Advanced Transport Systems

Milan Janić
Advanced
Transport
Systems
Analysis, Modeling, and Evaluation
of Performances
Advanced Transport Systems
Milan Janić
Advanced Transport Systems

Analysis, Modeling, and Evaluation
of Performances
123
Milan Janić
Transport and Planning Department
Faculty of Civil Engineering
and Geosciences
Delft University of Technology
Delft
The Netherlands
ISBN 978-1-4471-6286-5 ISBN 978-1-4471-6287-2 (eBook)

DOI 10.1007/978-1-4471-6287-2
Springer London Heidelberg New York Dordrecht
Library of Congress Control Number: 2013955907
Springer-Verlag London 2014

This work is subject to copyright. All rights are reserved by the Publisher, whether the whole or part of
the material is concerned, specifically the rights of translation, reprinting, reuse of illustrations,
recitation, broadcasting, reproduction on microfilms or in any other physical way, and transmission or
information storage and retrieval, electronic adaptation, computer software, or by similar or dissimilar
methodology now known or hereafter developed. Exempted from this legal reservation are brief
excerpts in connection with reviews or scholarly analysis or material supplied specifically for the
purpose of being entered and executed on a computer system, for exclusive use by the purchaser of the
work. Duplication of this publication or parts thereof is permitted only under the provisions of
the Copyright Law of the Publisher’s location, in its current version, and permission for use must
always be obtained from Springer. Permissions for use may be obtained through RightsLink at the
Copyright Clearance Center. Violations are liable to prosecution under the respective Copyright Law.
The use of general descriptive names, registered names, trademarks, service marks, etc. in this
publication does not imply, even in the absence of a specific statement, that such names are exempt
from the relevant protective laws and regulations and therefore free for general use.
While the advice and information in this book are believed to be true and accurate at the date of
publication, neither the authors nor the editors nor the publisher can accept any legal responsibility for
any errors or omissions that may be made. The publisher makes no warranty, express or implied, with
respect to the material contained herein.
Printed on acid-free paper
Springer is part of Springer Science+Business Media (www.springer.com)

To my wife Vesna at the 30th anniversary
of our marriage
Preface
The transport system has, is, and will continue to be a foundation of the economy of
each country/nation, as well as that of the world. In particular, in the twenty-first
century, it will further strengthen its role in integrating and globalizing economic
activities, and will thus also influence the quality of people’s lives. In the past,
transport demand in terms of both the number of passengers and the volumes of
freight/goods shipments has been constantly growing in the medium- to long-term
period(s) despite being affected, from time to time, by the local and global
economic and political crises. This demand has been satisfied by the capacity of the
transport system generally consisting of the transport infrastructure, transport
means/vehicles, and workforce. Material, energy, and labor has been consumed in
order to provide transport services according to the specified internal organization
containing operating rules and procedures, and under given external regulation and
constraints. On the one hand, such developments have produced the above-
mentioned positive contributions to the national economies and social welfare. On
the other, they have affected the environment and society in terms of land use/take
for expanding the transport infrastructure, energy consumption from non-renewable
sources (coal, crude oil, and natural gas) and related emissions of Green House
Gases (GHG), local noise, congestion, and safety (traffic incidents and accidents),
Since both passenger and freight transport demand are predicted to double over the
next 20 and triple over the next 50 years, solutions for serving them more efficiently
and effectively while mitigating impacts on the environment and society need to be
provided. Therefore, in addition to creating transport policies and monitoring
schemes aiming to reduce physical transport demand (i.e., telecommuting) and
implementing advanced transport planning and operating tools and techniques,
potential solutions also lie in developing advanced technologies individually and/or
in combination with advanced operational concepts. Generally, this implies
providing: (i) sufficiently capacitated and environmentally friendlier, i.e., more
energy/fuel efficient, cleaner, quieter, and safer, technologies based on an increased
use of renewable energy/fuel sources (such as, for example, biomass fuels (liquid)
hydrogen, wind and solar energy), nanotechnologies, and information technologies;
and (ii) the advanced organizational and operational forms and concepts of using
transport infrastructure, transport means/vehicles, and accompanied resources.
Experience so far indicates that commercialization, i.e., development and
implementation, of the advanced components—technologies and related
vii
viii Preface
operational concepts—of the transport system has been an evolutionary rather than
a revolutionary process. The main reasons include: (i) a rather long time for
maturing up to full commercialization; (ii) an inherent threat from confronting
existing and forthcoming even stricter institutional/policy regulation/constraints;
(iii) relatively high development costs; (iv) frequently uncertain long-term overall
commercial and social feasibility; and (v) a relatively long path for obtaining
operational certification implying full environmental and societal/policy acceptance.
Under such circumstances, most such transport technologies and operational
concepts, except a couple of futuristic ones, have been mostly gradually updated and
improved, usually based on the closest previous counterparts. In the given context,
this justifies deeming them ‘‘innovative’’ or ‘‘advanced’’ rather than completely
‘‘new’’. In this book, the attribute ‘‘advanced’’ is used for all such technologies and
operational concepts.
The book describes analysis, modeling, and evaluation of performances of the
selected advanced transport systems. Some of them have already been commer-
cialized, i.e., implemented and operationalized, and/or are planned to be so, while
others are still at the conceptual level waiting for further elaboration. Their
performances are considered as derived from the technical/technological design and
solutions of the infrastructure, transport means/vehicles, and supporting facilities
and equipment used according to the specified operational rules and procedures,
and economic, environmental, social, and policy conditions/constraints.
Analysis and modeling implies examination of their infrastructural, technical/
technological, operational, economic, environmental, social, and policy
performances. Evaluation based on a Strengths, Weaknesses, Opportunities and
Threats (SWOT)-like analysis implies assessment of the advantages and disadvan-
tages of these systems. In such context, Strengths and Opportunities are considered as
advantages, while Weaknesses and Threats are considered disadvantages. Both are
considered from the aspects of academics/researchers, but also from those of par-
ticular actors/stakeholders involved such as users of transport services–passengers
and freight/goods shippers/receivers, transport infrastructure and service providers/
operators, investors, policy makers at different institutional levels (local, national,
international), and members of the local community/society.
Particular advanced transport systems have been selected according to the
following criteria: (i) the level of advancement of particular performances;
(ii) representativeness through transport modes (rail, road, air, water/sea, inter-
modal); (iii) their spatial scale (area) of operation (urban and inter-urban);
(iv) category of demand served (passengers, freight/goods); (v) availability/
accessibility of relevant information (from science-based and publically-accessible
relevant sources); and (vi) the level of systematic scientific elaboration as
compared to that used in this book.
The selected advanced transport systems are clustered in the book’s chapters
respecting the type and number of their advanced performances independently of
the transport mode, spatial/geographical scale of operation, and type of transport
demand they serve.
Preface ix
The widely dispersed and in some cases scarce material collected from the
various available sources such as research (including my own), literature (books
and papers in scientific and professional journals), and websites is presented from
the traffic and transport engineering and planning and design perspective. Most
facts and issues are scientifically supported and accurate regarding the funda-
mental relationships between particular variables (parameters). Nevertheless, some
of them, particularly those related to futuristic concepts, contain a level of fuzzi-
ness in the absolute terms, which, however, does not compromise their relevance
in the given context. As such, the book aims to be informative as much as possible
but by no means exhaustive—to the contrary, it intends to provide academics,
researchers, consultants, policy/decision makers, and professionals from the
transport industry and related fields with material for current and future research
and development of the transport system.
October 2013 Milan Janić

Acknowledgments
The author gratefully acknowledges the support of organizations and individuals in

getting this book into publishable form.
Firstly, I would like to thank very much the Transport Institute of Delft
University of Technology (Prof. Bart van Arem—Director, and Dr. Arjan van
Binsbergen—Secretary) (TU Delft, Delft, The Netherlands) for some financial
support in finalizing the work on the book. Secondly, I benefited greatly from the
valuable discussions, materials, exhibits, and data provided by Mr. John P. Christy,
Lead Engineer—Operations Airport Technology, Boeing and Ms. Mary E. Kane,
Trademark and Copyright Licensing, Boeing Intellectual Property Management
(Boeing Company/Commercial Airplanes, Seattle, Washington, USA).
Thirdly, I give my special gratitude to Mr. Andrej Grah Whatmough for his
excellent help polishing the language.
On the personal side, the great effort of writing this book was continuously
supported and inspired by my wife Vesna and my son Miodrag, doctor of medi-
cine, who was at the same time also working enthusiastically on his Ph.D. thesis.
Milan Janić
xi
Contents
1 Advanced Transport Systems: General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1

1.1 Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
1.2 Classification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
1.2.1 Attributes/Criteria Related to Advanced Components . . . 3
1.2.2 Attributes/Criteria Related to Level
of Commercialization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
1.3 Performances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
1.3.1 Definition. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
1.3.2 Analyzing, Modeling, and Evaluation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
1.4 Composition of the Book . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
2 Advanced Transport Systems: Operations and Technologies . . . . . 11

2.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
2.2 Bus Rapid Transit Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
2.2.1 Definition, Development, and Use. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
2.2.2 Analyzing and Modeling Performances . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
2.2.3 Evaluation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
2.3 High Speed Tilting Passenger Trains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
2.3.3 Evaluation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
2.4 Advanced Subsonic Commercial Aircraft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
2.4.3 Evaluation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
3 Advanced Transport Systems: Operations and Economics . . . . . . . 83

3.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
3.2 Advanced Freight Collection/Distribution Networks. . . . . . . . . . 84
3.2.3 Evaluation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
xiii
xiv Contents
3.3 Road Mega Trucks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111

3.3.3 Evaluation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
3.4 Long Intermodal Freight Train(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
3.4.2 Analyzing Performances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
3.4.3 Modeling Performances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
3.4.4 Evaluation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
3.5 Large Commercial Freight Aircraft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
3.5.3 Evaluation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
4 Advanced Transport Systems: Technologies and Environment. . . . 165

4.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
4.2 Advanced Passenger Cars . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
4.2.2 Analysis and Modeling Performances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
4.2.3 Evaluation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
4.3 Large Advanced Container Ships. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
4.3.3 Evaluation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
4.4 Liquid Hydrogen-Fuelled Commercial Air Transportation . . . . . 216
4.4.2 Analysis and Modeling Performance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
4.4.3 Evaluation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
5 Advanced Transport Systems: Infrastructure, Technologies,

Operations, Economics, Environment, and Society/Policy . . . . . . . 235
5.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
5.2 High Speed Transport Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
5.2.2 Evaluation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
6 Advanced Transport Systems: Future Concepts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277

6.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
6.2 Personal Rapid Transit Systems. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
Contents xv

6.2.3 Evaluation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
6.3 Underground Freight Transport Systems. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
6.3.3 Evaluation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319
6.4 Evacuated Tube Transport System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322
6.4.3 Evaluation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340
6.5 Advanced Air Traffic Control Technologies
and Operations for Increasing Airport Runway Capacity . . . . . . 341
6.5.1 Definition, Development, and Use. . . . ....... . . . . . . 341
6.5.2 Analyzing Performances . . . . . . . . . . ....... . . . . . . 342
6.5.3 Modeling Performances . . . . . . . . . . . ....... . . . . . . 354
6.5.4 Evaluation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ....... . . . . . . 363
6.6 Advanced Supersonic Transport Aircraft . . . . ....... . . . . . . 364
6.6.1 Definition, Development, and Use. . . . ....... . . . . . . 364
6.6.2 Analyzing and Modeling Performances ....... . . . . . . 366
6.6.3 Evaluation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ....... . . . . . . 386
References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ....... . . . . . . 388
7 Advanced Transport Systems: Contribution to Sustainability . . . . 391

7.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391
7.2 Contribution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391
7.3 Some Controversies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394
7.3.1 Technical Productivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394
7.3.2 Energy/Fuel Consumption and Emissions of GHG . . . . . 396
7.3.3 Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397
Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398
About the Author . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 401
Abbreviations
ABD Additional breaking device

ACN Aircaft classification number
AGV Automotice grande vitesse
AMT Automatic manual transmission
ANA Air Nippon Airways
APT Air passenger transport
APU Auxiliary power unit
ASM Available seat mile
ATA Air Transport Association
ATAG Air Transport Action Group
ATC Air traffic control
ATMS Automated manual system
AVL Automatic vehicle location
atm Atmosphere
ATMS Automated manual system
BAU Business as usual
BEV Battery electric vehicle
BR Bypass ratio
BRT Bus rapid transit
CAD Computer aided dispatching
CDA Continuous descent approach
CDB Central business district
CEN Comité Européen de Normalisation
CIA Central Intelligence Agency
CIFT Commercial intermodal freight train
CNG Compressed natural gas
CO Carbon monoxide
CSS Carbon capture and storage
DC Direct-current
DM Decision making (maker)
DPF Diesel particulate filter
xvii
xviii Abbreviations
DWT Deadweight tonnage

EADS European Aeronautic Defense and Space Company
EAT Economic analysis technique
EBHA Electrical backup hydrostatic actuators
EC European Commission
ECB European Central Bank
EDS Electro dynamic suspension
EEC Electronic engine controller
EEDI Energy efficiency design index
EEOI Energy efficiency operational indicator
EET Evacuated tube transport
EFB Electronic flight bag
EGR Exhaust gas recirculation
EHA Electro-hydrostatic actuators
EMS Electromagnetic suspension
EPNL Equivalent perceived noise level
EPS Enhanced permissible speed
ETCS European train control system
ETOPS Extended range twin-engine operational performances
EU European Union
FAA Federal Aviation Administration
FAME Fatty acid methyl ester
FL Flight level
FMS Flight management system
g Gravitational acceleration
GAO Government Accountability Office (US)
GDP Gross domestic product
GHG Green house gases
GIS Geographic information system
GS Glide slope
GPS Global positioning satellite
Gt Giga ton
HFCV Hydrogen fuel cell vehicle
HFO Heavy fuel oil
hp Horse power
HPC High pressure compressor
HPT High pressure turbine
HS High speed
HSs Hub-and spoke(s) (network)
HSR High speed rail
HYV Hybrid vehicle
Abbreviations xix
HV Hydrogen vehicle
IATA International Air Transport Association
ICAO International Civil Aviation Organization
ICE Inter-city-express
ICEV Internal combustion engine vehicle
ICT Information communication technologies
IFR Instrument flight rules
ILS Instrument landing system
IMA Integrated modular avionics
IMC Instrument metrological conditions
IMF International monetary fund
IMO International Maritime Organization
INA Integrated noise area
IPC Intermediate pressure compressor
IPT Intermediate pressure turbine
ITS Intelligent transport systems
JAXA Japan Aerospace eXploration Agency
km Kilometer
Kn Kilo-Newton
kts Knot
kW Kilowatt
kWh Kilowatt-hour
l Liter
LAPCAT Long-Term Advanced Propulsion Concepts and Technologies
lb Pound-mass
LCA Life cycle analysis
LCC Low cost carrier
LEM Linear electric motor
LH2 Liquid hydrogen
LIFT Long intermodal freight train
LIM Linear induction motor
LNG Liquefied natural gas
LPP Lean premixed pre-vaporized (concept)
L/R Line or ring (network)
LSM Linear synchronous motor
LU Loading unit
m Meter
M Mixed (network)
MAGLEV MAGnetic levitation
MCA Multi criteria analysis
MCDM Multi-criteria decision-making (method)
xx Abbreviations
MEPC The Marine Environment Protection Committee

MFD Multi-functional display
MJ Mega joule
MLS Microwave landing system
MLW Maximum landing weight
MS Manual system
MTOW Maximum take-off weight
MW Mega watt
MWh Mega watt hour
MZFW Maximum zero fuel weight
NASA National Aeronautics and Space Administration
NextGen Next generation (air transport system)
nm Nautical mile
NSS Network systems server
NOx Nitrogen oxide
OMs Overall emission(s)
OEW Operating empty weight
Pa Pascal
PDE Pulse detonated engine
PEM Polymer electrolyte membrane
P–P Point-to-point (network)
PS Permissible speed
RFID Radio frequency identification
PR Priority
PRT Personal rapid transit
RAT Ram air turbine
RNAV aRea navigation
ROL Rich-burn/quick-quench/lean-burn
RPK Revenue passenger kilometer
rpm Rotations per minute
RTK Revenue ton-kilometer
SAW Simple additive weighting (method)
SBSP Space-based solar power
SCMR Specific maximum continuous rating
SCR Selective catalytic reduction
SESAR Single European Sky ATM Research
SEEMP Ship energy efficiency management plan
SFC Specific fuel consumption
SN Specific noise
SRM Steam methane reforming
SSP Space solar power
Abbreviations xxi
STA Supersonic Transport Aircraft

TCD Trunk line with collecting/distribution forks (network)
TEN Trans-European Transport Network
TEU Twenty foot equivalent unit
TGV Train à grande vitesse
TOPSIS Technique for order preference by similarity to ideal solution
(method)
TOW Take-off weight
TRM Transrapid maglev
TSFC Thrust specific fuel consumption
TTW Tank-to-wheel
TU Transport unit
TVM Transmission voie-machine (transmission track-machine)
UFT Underground freight transport
UIC International Union of Railways
ULD Unit load device
U.S. United States
VFR Visual flight rules
VMC Visual meteorological conditions
VOCs Volatile organic compound(s)
WSC World Shipping Council
WHRS Waste heat recovery system
WIF Water in fuel
WTT Well-to-tank
WTW Well-to-wheel
Chapter 1
Advanced Transport Systems: General
1.1 Definition
The transport system can be considered as a physical entity for the mobility of
persons and physical movements of freight/goods shipments between their (ulti-
mate) origins and destinations. The entity consists of infrastructure, transport
means/vehicles, supporting facilities and equipment, workforce, and organizational
forms of their use. Energy/fuel is consumed to build/manufacture and operate the
infrastructure, transport means/vehicles, and facilities and equipment. The transport
system includes different forms/modes such as rail, road, water, air, and their
sensible/wise combinations operating as intermodal or multimodal transport service
networks. Depending on the volumes and intensity of passenger and freight/goods
demand, each mode has different self-contained components distinguished mainly
with respect to the type of technologies, resources used, and concepts of providing
transport services. Consequently, in the remaining text, the term ‘‘systems’’ is used
for these rather complex components of the transport system.
The above-mentioned systems operated by different transport modes provide
services in urban, suburban, and interurban regions, thus covering different spatial/
geographical scales implying short, medium, and long transport distances,
respectively. These systems include both conventional and advanced elements. In
the remaining text, those with predominantly advanced elements as compared to
their preceding counterparts are referred to as ‘‘advanced systems.’’ The attribute
‘‘advanced’’ implies that the given system is superior compared to its closest
preceding counterpart(s) in the same or different transport mode(s), with respect to
one, a few, and/or all infrastructural, technical/technological,1 and/or operational
1
A specific advancement in technical/technological performances is made by use of new
materials (composites) based on the elements of nanotechnology. This is the science and
engineering of examining, monitoring, and modifying materials at nanoscale (atomic and/or
molecular level). By changing the structure of materials in terms of their physical, mechanical,
electrical, magnetic properties, heat conduction, and light reflection, this approach will also be
able to produce improved and/or new generation of concrete, steel, aluminum, etc., materials
currently widely used in construction of transport infrastructure and transport means/vehicles
(Khan 2011).
M. Janić, Advanced Transport Systems, 1

DOI: 10.1007/978-1-4471-6287-2_1, Springer-Verlag London 2014
2 1 Advanced Transport Systems: General
performances. In many cases, economic, environmental, and social/policy per-

formances are also taken into account to refer to such systems as ‘‘advanced.’’
Similar to their conventional counterparts, advanced transport systems consist of
physical infrastructure, transport means/vehicles, workforce/labor, and supporting
facilities and equipment. An important part of the latter is ITS (Intelligent Transport
Systems),2 which, with components such as sensors and microchips, have already
become and will increasingly continue to be an unavoidable part of the transport
system. In addition, advanced transport systems consume energy/fuel to perform
their primary function of transporting persons and freight/goods shipments
according to the specified organization of transport services based on the given
operational rules and procedures. In such context, they are designed to provide safe/
secure, efficient, effective, environmentally, and socially friendlier services then
their conventional (‘‘non-advanced’’) counterparts. The first implies the lack of
incidents and accidents due to known reasons. The second refers to the lower total,
average, and marginal costs of services offered to users/passengers and freight/
goods shippers/receivers. In particular, lower average costs per unit of output (p-km
and/or t-km) (p-km—passenger kilometer; t-km—ton-kilometer) can make these
systems commercially more feasible then their conventional counterparts. The third
implies the quality of transport services provided to users/passengers and freight/
goods shippers/receivers—attributed to the improved accessibility, regularity,
punctuality, reliability, and shorter travel/service time, higher riding comfort, etc.
The last includes, on the one hand, lower absolute and relative impacts on the
environment and society in terms of land use (take), energy consumption and related
emissions of GHG (Green House Gases),3 local noise, congestion, and waste, and on
the other, greater contribution to social welfare such as employment and GDP (Gross
Domestic Product) on the local, regional, national, and global scale.
1.2 Classification
Advanced transport systems can be classified with respect to different attributes/

criteria. Some relate to their advanced components and some to the level of their
commercialization.
2
The ITS enable collecting, processing, and distribution of information about the system states
and operations thanks to tracking and telematics applications, scheduling services/operations,
informing/notification of users/passengers and freight/goods shippers/receivers, monitoring
security, and detecting potential all kind of threats.
3
The U.S. (United Sates) and EU (European Union) have set up the targets for reducing
emissions of GHG (Green House Gases) from transport sector for about 20 and 50 % by the year
2020 and 2050, respectively, as compared to the year 1990. In addition, some research suggests
that if the scenario of the economic and social development continues as BAU (Business As
Usual), the world’s total emissions of GHG in terms of CO2 from transport sector will reach about
5 Gt/y (Giga tons/year) by the year 2050. However, if the Green Growth and CSS (Carbon
Capture and Storage) scenario is going to be implemented, this amount will likely not be greater
than 1 Gt/y (Gt—Giga tons) (EC 2010; Hawksworth 2008).
1.2 Classification 3
1.2.1 Attributes/Criteria Related to Advanced Components
Advanced transport systems can be classified depending on a single and/or com-

bination of dominant (prevailing) advanced components and related performances
of their infrastructure, technics/technologies of transport means/vehicles and
supporting facilities and equipment, energy/fuel used, pattern of operations, eco-
nomic/business model, and impacts/effects on the environment and society.
Consequently, in this book, advanced transport systems are ultimately distin-
guished and elaborated, independently on the transport mode, as follows:
• Systems with advanced technics/technologies of transport means/vehicles often
implying modified operations and in some specific cases infrastructure such as
high-speed tilting passenger trains, road mega trucks, large commercial freight
aircraft, and advanced commercial aircraft (for example, the most recent Boeing
B787-8 and the forthcoming Airbus A350);
• Systems with sometimes slightly modified technics/technologies of transport
means/vehicles and advanced operations aiming at improving the efficiency and
effectiveness of transport services such as the BRT (Bus Rapid Transit) System
systems, advanced freight collection/distribution networks, LIFTs (Long Inter-
modal Freight Train(s)) (in Europe), and the APT (Air Passenger Transport)
system;
• Systems with advanced technics/technologies of transport means/vehicles and
energy/fuel contributing to the consequent environmental effects/impacts,
including advanced passenger cars, large advanced container ships, LH2 (Liquid
Hydrogen)-fuelled commercial subsonic aircraft and advanced STA (Supersonic
Transport Aircraft); the latter two are alternatives to their current counterparts
using crude-oil derivatives-petrol/diesel and kerosene, respectively; and
• Systems with advanced infrastructure, technics/technologies of transport means/
vehicles, and consequently operations and business model such as HSR (High-
Speed Rail), TRM (TransRapid MAGLEV (MAGnetic LEVitation)) system,
PRT (Personal Rapid Transit) and UFT (Underground Urban Freight) systems in
urban areas, and the long-distance ETT (Evacuated Tube Transport) system;
additionally, the advanced technologies and procedures in the ATC (Air Traffic
Control) system for increasing the airport runway capacity can be categorized in
this category.
At present, except the ETT system, none of the above-mentioned existing and/
or forthcoming systems possesses all six—infrastructural, technical/technological,
operational, economic, environmental, and social/policy—advanced elements. On
the one hand, this indicates a lack of completely new systems in the medium- to
long-term future, and on the other, their present and prospective mainly evolu-
tionary rather than revolutionary development and commercialization.
1.2.2 Attributes/Criteria Related to Level

of Commercialization
Advanced transport systems are usually developed in five phases reflecting the
level of their commercialization as follows:
• Exploratory research delivering ideas and concepts;
• Applied research resulting in understanding and further elaboration of the par-
ticular ideas and concepts;
• Pre-industrial development resulting in prototypes and carrying out pilot oper-
ational trials;
• Industrialization resulting in production/manufacturing; and
• Commercialization implying physical implementation and operationalization.
Consequently, advanced transport systems can be categorized into four cate-
gories as follows:
• Category I includes systems that have passed all five phases and are fully
commercialized;
• Category II includes systems that have passed all five phases but have been
commercialized on a very limited scope and scale;
• Category III includes systems that have passed two or at most three of the
above-mentioned (five) phases, implying that they are still waiting for or just
undergoing pilot operational trials and industrialization; and
• Category IV includes systems in the exploratory phase waiting for the ‘‘green
light’’ in order to pass to subsequent phase(s).
This book considers advanced transport systems categorized according to the
level of their commercialization as given in Table 1.1.
1.3 Performances
Dealing with advanced transport systems usually raises the question of their
performances, i.e., their ability to satisfy current and prospective needs and
expectations of particular actors/stakeholders involved. Such an approach requires
analyzing, modeling, and evaluating particular performances.
1.3.1 Definition
Advanced transport systems are generally characterized by infrastructural, tech-

nical/technological, operational, economic, environmental, social, and policy
performances.
1.3 Performances 5
Table 1.1 Classification of advanced transport systems respecting their level of

commercialization
Category Systems
I BRT (Bus Rapid Transit)
High-Speed Tilting Trains
HSR (High-Speed Rails)
APT (Air Passenger Transport)a
Advanced Commercial Aircraft
Large Commercial Freight Aircraft
II Advanced Freight Collection/Distribution Networks (in Europe)
LIFTs (Long Intermodal Freight Trains) (in Europe)
Road Mega-Trucks (in Europe)
Large Advanced Container Ships
PRT (Personal Rapid Transit)
TRM (TransRapid MAGLEV)
III Super HSR (High-Speed Rail) (in Europe)
Advanced Passenger Cars
IV UFT (Underground Freight Transport)
ETT (Evacuated Tube Transport)
Advanced ATC (Air Traffic Control) Technologies
LH2 (Liquid Hydrogen)-Fuelled Commercial Air Transportation
Advanced STA (Supersonic Transport Aircraft)
a
‘‘The Wright Brothers created the single greatest cultural force since the invention of writing.
The airplane became the first World Wide Web, bringing people, languages, ideas, and values
together.’’—Bill Gates, CEO, Microsoft Corporation
• Infrastructural and technical/technological performances mainly reflect physi-

cal, constructive, technical, and technological features of infrastructure, trans-
port means/vehicles, and supporting facilities and equipment, respectively,
enabling them to carry out the specified transport operations serving the spec-
ified volumes of passenger and freight/goods demand under given conditions.
• Operational performances imply quantitative and qualitative capabilities to
serve given volumes of passenger and freight/goods demand.
• Economic performances reflect the efficiency of serving given volumes of
passenger and freight/goods demand expressed by costs of services covered by
the relevant charges (prices).
• Environmental and social performances reflect the intensity and scale of
physical impacts on the environment and society. If monetized, these impacts
are considered as externalities.
• Policy performances reflect compliance with current and future medium- to
long-term transport policy regulations and specified targets.
Although these performances are usually considered independently, they are
inherently strongly dependent and interactive with each other as shown in Fig. 1.1.
In the ‘‘top-down’’ consideration, infrastructural performances influence tech-
nical/technological performances and consequently create mutual influence
Infrastructural Technical / technological
Operational
Economic
Environmental
Social / Policy
Bottom-up
Top-down
Fig. 1.1 Potential interaction between advanced transport system performances
between these and all other performances. In the ‘‘bottom-up’’ consideration,

social/policy performances influence infrastructural and technical/technological
performances and consequently also create mutual influence of these and all other
performances.
For example, the technical/technological performances of transport means/
vehicles and supporting facilities and equipment can require completely new
infrastructure and consequently pattern of operations, which can influence the
economic, environmental, and social performances. Some examples include HSR
(High-Speed Rail), TRM (TransRapid MAGLEV (MAGnetic LEVitation)), and
ETT (Evacuated Tube Transport). In some other cases, the economic performances
can strongly influence the operational performances. Examples of this include
advanced freight collection/distribution networks, long intermodal freight trains,
and road mega trucks in Europe, as well as large commercial freight aircraft. In
addition, the technical/technological performances may directly influence the
operational and indirectly the economic performances of particular advanced
transport systems using the existing infrastructure. Examples include the BRT
(Bus Rapid Transit) System system in urban areas, high-speed tilting passenger
trains, large advanced container ships, advanced commercial subsonic and
supersonic passenger aircraft, and advanced ATC (Air Traffic Control) technolo-
gies aimed at increasing the airport runway capacity. Last but not least, the
required environmental and/or social performances can speed up development and
commercialization of completely technically/technologically new systems such as
advanced passenger cars (that use electricity and/or LH2 (Liquid Hydrogen)
instead of the currently used crude oil-based petrol/diesel), the PRT (Personal
Rapid Transit) and UFT (Underground Freight Transport) system (that uses
electricity), and advanced STA (Supersonic Transport Aircraft) (that uses LH2
instead of the crude-oil derivative kerosene (JP-1)).
1.3 Performances 7
The main actors/stakeholders involved in dealing with advanced transport

systems include:
• Investors, constructors/manufacturers of infrastructure, transport means/vehi-
cles, supportive facilities and equipment, and suppliers of raw material energy/
fuel;
• Providers and operators of transport infrastructure and services, respectively;
• Users of transport services (passengers and freight/goods shippers/receivers);
• Policy/decision makers at local, regional, national, and international level and
related associations; and
• The local population both benefiting and being affected by the given systems.
Their interests and individual objectives can coincide or be in conflict with each
other. For example, investors generally prefer to see a return on their investments
over the specified/planned period of time. Suppliers of raw material and energy,
and all related manufacturers prefer growth of these systems bringing them eco-
nomic benefits. In this case, the objectives and interests coincide and influence
each other downstream the chain of commercialization of the given advanced
transport system(s). Providers and operators of transport infrastructure prefer its
utilization at least at the level of covering operational and maintenance costs under
the given pricing policy. Transport operators prefer efficient, effective, and safe
transport means/vehicles providing services attractive to their users. Users/pas-
sengers and freight/goods shippers/receivers have the same preferences as trans-
port operators, but from the perspective of experiencing the expected quality,
safety, and security of the consumed services at reasonable/acceptable prices.
Policy/decision makers and related associations at the particular institutional/
organizational levels prefer efficient, effective, and safe advanced transport sys-
tems fully satisfying the overall user, social, and policy needs. In certain respects,
these preferences and objectives, particularly those related to the policy, may be in
direct conflict with those of transport infrastructure and service providers, and in
indirect conflict with those of raw materials’ suppliers and system manufacturers.
Local communities usually have two sets of conflicting preferences. On the one
hand, acting as prospective users they prefer advanced transport systems with the
maximal availability in space (as close as possible and easily physically accessi-
ble) and time (frequent services). On the other, due to their proximity, the same
people often complain about the impacts of these systems such as local air pol-
lution, noise, induced road congestion, and compromised/demolished landscape.
Consequently, these last mentioned preferences are essentially conflicting with the
preferences of all other actors/stakeholders involved including those they them-
selves experience as users of the systems.
The above-mentioned approach in dealing with performances of advanced
transport systems indicates that it is very difficult if not even impossible to
simultaneously satisfy (conflicting) objectives and interests of all actors/stake-
holders involved. However, as it will be shown, it is possible to come very close to
achieving some balance between them.
1.3.2 Analyzing, Modeling, and Evaluation
Analyzing the performances of advanced transport systems implies gaining insight

into their characteristics and the main influencing factors.
Modeling the performances of advanced transport systems implies defining the
indicators and measures of performances and establishing the analytical/quanti-
tative relationships between them and the main influencing factors. This enables
sensitivity analysis to be carried out systematically by providing a range of inputs
for planning and designing the considered system(s). In addition, modeling pro-
vides the opportunity to check the quality of particular models/methodologies by
using the inputs from the considered cases and comparing their outputs/results
with their real-life counterparts. Last but not least, modeling provides input for
planning and design of particular system’s performances according to the ‘‘what-
if’’ scenario approach. Consequently, this enables their further evaluation
according to the given set of attributes/criteria, chosen according to their relevance
to the particular actors/stakeholders involved.
Evaluation of performances of advanced transport systems can generally be
qualitative and quantitative. Qualitative evaluation implies identification of
advantages (Strengths and Opportunities) and disadvantages (Weaknesses and
Threats) of the particular advanced system perceived by the current and pro-
spective actors/stakeholders, i.e., applying a simplified SWOT analysis. Quanti-
tative evaluation implies choosing the preferable among the specified set of
alternatives with respect to the specified attributes/criteria reflecting their perfor-
mances relevant for the DM (Decision Maker) by using one of the multicriteria
evaluation methods. This enables ranking and calculating the scores of the
available alternatives and then choosing the one with the highest score as the
preferred option.
1.4 Composition of the Book
In addition to this introductory chapter, the book consists of six chapters, each
consisting of sections (subchapters) elaborating on a particular advanced transport
system. At the beginning of each section, bullet-like historical milestones in
development of the given system are provided. At the end of each section, a
qualitative evaluation of this system is presented by emphasizing its presumed
advantages and disadvantages viewed by the particular actors/stakeholders
involved.
Chapter 2 elaborates the advanced operational and technological performances
of the BRT (Bus Rapid Transit) Systems high-speed tilting passenger train(s), and
advanced commercial subsonic aircraft.
Chapter 3 deals with the operational and economic performances of advanced
freight collection/distribution networks, road mega trucks and LIFTs (Long
1.4 Composition of the Book 9
Intermodal Freight Trains) (in Europe), as well as large commercial freight

aircraft.
Chapter 4 elaborates the technical/technological and environmental perfor-
mances of advanced passenger cars, large advanced container ships, and the LH2
(Liquid Hydrogen)-fuelled commercial air transport system.
Chapter 5 deals with the multicriteria ranking of different HS (High-Speed)
passenger transport systems—HSR (High-Speed Rail), APT (Air Passenger
Transport), and TRM (TransRapid Maglev)—with respect to their infrastructural,
technical/technological, operational, economic, and environmental, and social/
policy performances.
Chapter 6 elaborates performances of the future systems such as: PRT (Personal
Rapid Transit) and UFT (Underground Freight Transport) as urban and/or sub-
urban passenger and freight transport systems, respectively; ETT (Evacuated Tube
Transport) as a very high-speed long-distance intercontinental transport system for
both passengers and freight/goods; advanced Air Traffic Control (ATC) technol-
ogies and operations aimed at increasing the airport runway capacity; and
advanced long-haul STA (Supersonic Transport Aircraft).
The last Chap. 7 summarizes the potential contribution of the advanced
transport systems to sustainability, i.e., greening, of the transport sector above-
mentioned.
References
EC. (2010). EU Transport GHG: Routes to 2050?—Towards the Decarbonisation of the EU’s
Transport Sector by 2050. Brussels: European Commission DG Environment.
Hawksworth, J. (2008). The word in 2050: Can rapid global growth be reconciled by moving to a
low carbon economy?. London, UK: Pricewaterhose Coopers LLP, Economics.
Khan, S. M. (2011). Nanotechnology in transportation: Evaluation of a revolutionary technology.
TR NEWS No. 277, Transportation Research Board of The National Academies, Washington
D.C., USA, pp. 3–8.
Chapter 2
Advanced Transport Systems: Operations
and Technologies
2.1 Introduction
This chapter describes BRT (Bus Rapid Transit) as an advanced mature public
transport system operating in many urban and suburban areas round the world,
high-speed tilting passenger trains operating along medium- to long-distance
passenger corridors/markets in many countries worldwide, and an advanced sub-
sonic commercial aircraft—the Boeing B787-8, which has recently started com-
mercial operation.
The BRT systems are considered as advanced compared to the conventional
urban bus systems mainly thanks to advanced operations. A BRT system can be
defined as a ‘‘rapid modes of transportation that combines the quality of rail transit
and flexibility of buses’’ (Thomson 2001).
High-speed tilting trains transport users/passengers along the curved segments
of the conventional rail lines/tracks at higher speeds than their conventional
counterparts thanks to advanced technology—the tilting mechanism. This com-
pensates increased centrifugal and centripetal forces due to higher speed in the
curved segments of the line by tilting on the opposite side from the direction of the
force, i.e., if the force is directed to the left, the train tilts to the right, and vice
versa. Such a tilting mechanism makes these trains advanced transport means/
vehicles in terms of technology, despite the fact that some other components
influencing their performances remain similar to those of their conventional
counterparts.
The subsonic commercial aircraft (Boeing B787-8) is considered advanced
thanks to its innovative design and the new materials used in its construction, and
perceived superior economic and environmental performances as compared to
those of its conventional counterparts.

12 2 Advanced Transport Systems: Operations and Technologies
2.2 Bus Rapid Transit Systems
1974 The first BRT (Bus Rapid Transit) system in the world—the ‘‘Integrated
Transportation Network’’—begins operations in Curitiba (Brazil)
1999/2000 The world’s largest BRT system—Transmilenio—begins operations in Bogota
(Columbia)
2.2.1 Definition, Development, and Use
The BRT (Bus Rapid Transit) systems are considered as a flexible rubber-tired
rapid transit mode that combines stations, vehicles, services, running ways, and
ITS (Intelligent Transport System) into an integrated system with a strong positive
image and identity. Flexibility implies that these systems can be incrementally
implemented as permanently integrated systems of facilities, services, and ame-
nities that collectively improve the speed, reliability, and identity of bus transit in a
variety of environments. In many respects, BRT systems can be considered as a
rubber-tired LRT (Light Rail Transit)-like systems but with greater operating
flexibility and potentially lower capital and operating costs (Levinson et al. 2002).
The BRT systems started in the U.S. (United States) in the 1960s through the
implementation of exclusive bus lanes. After the first truly dedicated bus way of
the length of several kilometers was set up in 1972 in Lima (Peru), the step
forward in developing the BRT system concept was made in 1974; the first bus-
based public transport network was developed in Curitiba (Brazil) using the
bus-way corridors spread as the route/line network throughout the city. Since the
mid-1990s, the BRT has been intensively promoted in U.S. cities as an advanced
urban transit system to alleviate the adverse effects of traffic congestion compared
to the conventional urban bus transit systems at the lower investment/capital costs
compared to rail-based urban transit systems such as LRT (Light Rail Transit).
At the same time, it has been expected to increase the transport capacity and make
the accessibility of dense urban agglomerations/regions more effective and effi-
cient. Designed and implemented on a case-by-case basis in order to meet the
specific needs and characteristics of the given urban and suburban areas, the BRT
systems have been characterized by the dedicated bus corridors, terminals/stations,
vehicles/buses, fare collection system, ITS technology, operational concepts
(timetable), and branding elements. Consequently, they have offered more effec-
tive, efficient, faster, reliable, and punctual transport services under given condi-
tions than conventional bus transit systems, which have approached or even
exceeded the services of the rail-based systems (LRT). The main objectives behind
implementation of the BRT concept have been to approach to the capacity and
quality of services of LRT while at the same time benefiting from savings in
infrastructure investment costs, flexibility of the bus transit system, and compa-
rable fares for users/passengers.
2.2 Bus Rapid Transit Systems 13
Table 2.1 Some characteristics of BRT systems in the world (http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/

Bus_rapid_transit)
Region Number Network % Transport volume(s) %
of cities/urban length of the (passengers/day) of the
agglomerations (km) total (million) total
Europe 42 636 17 0.937 3.8
North America 20 585 15.6 0.849 3.5
South America 50 1,250 33.4 15.694 64.1
Asia 25 882 23.6 6.439 26.3
Africa 3 62 1.7 0.238 1.0
Oceania 7 326 8.7 0.327 1.3
The BRT systems have shown flexibility in terms of feasibility of implemen-

tation in urban agglomerations with a population of between 0.2 and 10 million.
As such, in many transit corridors/routes, they have represented a test bed before
implementing a rail-based urban transit system such as LRT.
Depending on the layout of the city/urban agglomeration, the BRT system can
operate along radial and/or star-shape corridors exclusively or as a complement/
connection to the rail transit systems/lines. In addition to ‘Full BRT’ systems
operating exclusively along dedicated bus-ways, ‘BRT Lite’ systems mainly
operate along the mixed traffic lanes except in cases of passing through important
intersections where it is given exclusive lanes.
Currently, BRT systems operate in 147 cities/metropolitan areas on all conti-
nents. The total length of the dedicated bus-ways is about 3,741 km. The total
daily number of passengers using the systems is about 24.5 million. Table 2.1
gives additional characteristics of the BRT systems used around the world.
Regarding the above-mentioned characteristics, the BRT system has been
developed and consequently mostly used in South America and Asia, and the least
in Africa. The relative market share of the system in the total number of daily
commuting users/passengers indirectly reflects such developments. In addition, the
daily number of users/passengers tends to increase almost exponentially as the
BRT system network is extended as shown in Fig. 2.1.
This indicates that the system is attractive for both existing users of public
transit systems and those abandoning their cars for the first time.
LRT (Light Rail Transit), often considered as a strong competitor to the BRT
system, can be defined as an electric railway system with a ‘‘light volume’’
capacity for passengers as compared to conventional (heavy) rail. Its performances
are partially presented for comparative purposes. At present, 24 LRT systems
operate in the U.S. In Europe, LRT systems have often been considered together
with urban tramway systems. Some evidence indicates that 170 tram and LRT
systems, comprising 941 lines of a total length of 8,060 km are in operation. In 21
cities, 154 existing lines have been extended by about 154 km and 21 new lines of
a length of 455 km are under construction (ERRAC 2005).
18
16
D - Passengers/day - million
14
D = 0.1212e0.0039L
R² = 0.9386
12
10
0
0 200 400 600 800 1000 1200 1400
L - Length of the network - km
Fig. 2.1 Relationship between the daily number of passengers and the length of the BRT
network in particular regions/continents (http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Bus_rapid_transit)
LRT systems may use shared or exclusive rights-of-way, high or low platform
for users/passengers boarding/off-boarding, and multi- and/or single-car trains.
2.2.2 Analyzing and Modeling Performances
2.2.2.1 Background
The BRT systems are characterized by infrastructural, technical/technological,

operational, economic, environmental, and social/policy performances. Consid-
ered together, they allow the BRT system(s) to be distinguished generally in seven
features as compared to conventional/standard urban bus transit system(s) as given
in Table 2.2 (GAO 2012).
The performances of the BRT system are analyzed, modeled, and evaluated
using indicators and their measures. Their values are synthesized as averages from
40 BRT systems operating around the world—13 in Latin and South America,
seven in Asia, three in Australia, eight in Europe, and nine in the U.S. and Canada
(Wright and Hook 2007).
2.2.2.2 Infrastructural Performances
The main indicators of the infrastructural performances of BRT systems refer to

the spatial layout of their networks/corridors/routes, the number/density of stations
along the corridors/routes, and other characteristics.
Table 2.2 Distinguishing features of the BRT systems compared to conventional bus systems
(GAO 2012; Levinson et al. 2003a, b)
Feature Description
Running ways Segregated and dedicated busways or bus-only roadways
Terminals/stations Enhanced environment (information provided through real-time
schedule systems and additional amenities—safety
improvements, public art, landscaping, etc.)
Vehicles/buses Standard/articulated, different engine technology (diesel, gas
hybrid diesel/electric, electric), quieter, higher capacity, wider
(usually low-floor) doors
Services Faster, more frequent, punctual, and reliable
Fare collection Prepaid or electronic passes—speedy fare collection, and boarding
on/off convenience
Branding Marketed as a distinguished service at the terminals/stations and
vehicles/buses
ITS (Intelligent Prioritization of services at intersections and traffic lights,
Transportation Systems) monitoring headways between vehicles, real-time information
on vehicle position and schedule
Spatial layout of the network
The BRT system networks operate under the assumption of having regular and
sufficient passenger/commuter demand to be served by the relatively frequent
transport (bus, trolleybus) services over a given period of time (hour, day, year) (for
example, C8,000 passenger/h/direction). Consequently, the transport infrastructure
network consisting of the corridors/routes with dedicated busways and terminals/
stations spread over, pass by and/or through densely populated/demand attractive
areas of the given urban agglomeration—the city center(s) or CBDs (Central Busi-
ness District(s)). A simplified spatial layout of the BRT network is shown in Fig. 2.2.
The BRT dedicated busways passing through the high density area continue
outside it as right-of-way bus lanes. Both are connected to the freeway(s) sur-
rounding the densely populated area(s) (CBDs). In some cases, the BRT dedicated
busways or bus-only roadways are built along old rail corridors/lines. The dedi-
cated busways are usually provided as two-way lanes in different directions in
mixed traffic, as two-way lines on the same side or in the middle, or as a single line
in each direction on different sides of the given corridor/route. In some cases, the
bus-way is split into two one-way lanes/segments. The grade separation and ele-
vation of BRT system routes is also provided, if needed, particularly at intersec-
tions of the routes themselves and with those of other traffic. Particular BRT
busways can also be painted (red, yellow, green) in order to enhance visibility and
recognition—by both the other drivers and users/passengers.
Typically, the single BRT corridor spreads between two agglomerations, one of
which could be housing and the other CDB, or both CDBs. Given the length of this
corridor usually defined as the distance between the initial and the end terminal/
Densely populated area or CBD
Freeway
Right-of-way
Exclusive bus-way
Fig. 2.2 Schematic layout of a hypothetical BRT network
station, width, and the number and area of the terminals/stations along it, the total
area of land directly taken for building this infrastructure can be estimated as
follows (Vuchic 2007):
A ¼ L D þ nðldÞ ð2:1Þ
where
L is the length of corridor (km);
D is the width of the corridor (m);
N is the number of stations/platforms along the corridor; and
l, d is the length and width of the plot of land occupied by the terminal/station
(m), respectively.
For example, the width D of the exclusive bus-way (both directions) within the
BRT corridor varies depending on the speed from 10.4–11.6 m (for moderate
speeds B70 km/h) to 14.60 m (for speeds up to 90 km/h). The typical length of the
bus stops varies from l = 18–26 m depending on the bus length (for a single bus).
The minimum width of the bus stop at the terminal/station is about d = 3.0–3.5 m.
However, the width of the area occupied by the terminal/station itself with the
supporting facilities and equipment could be up to 9.0 m. For comparison, the
typical (minimum) width of the corridor for building a double track LRT line
respecting the vehicle’s dynamic envelope is about 7.5 m. The track gauge is
1,435 mm. The typical area of the platform of the LRT station can be from
12 9 50 m (surface) to 20 9 90 m (grade separated) (Vuchic 2007; Wright and
Hook 2007).
160
China
Rest of the world Rest of the world
140 n = 2.1733L - 3.5091
R² = 0.5774; N = 29
120
n - Number of stations
100
China
80 n = 1.322L0.9438
R² = 0.9034; N = 15
60
40
20
0
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70
L - Network length - km
Fig. 2.3 Relationship between the number of stations and the length of the BRT system network
(Levinson et al. 2003a, b; Wright and Hook 2007; http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Bus_rapid_transit)
Number/density of stations
The terminals/stations are important elements for the safe, efficient, and effective
inter and multimodal transfers on the one hand, and for demonstrating the identity
and image of the given BRT system on the other. A BRT terminal/station can be a
simple stop, an enhanced stop, designated station, intermodal terminal, and/or
transit center. The number and density of stations mainly depends and increases in
line with the length of the BRT system network as shown in Fig. 2.3. In BRT
systems around the world, except those in the People’s Republic of China, this
increase is of an average rate of 2.0/km. For systems in the PR of China, the
average rate is 1.0/km. The network length varies from about 2 to 60 km.
BRT terminals/stations usually have passing lanes and sometimes multiple
stopping/docking bays, which enable the convoying of busses in different com-
binations, if needed. The number of stopping/docking bays influences the required
length of the given terminal/station as shown in Fig. 2.4.
Evidently, the length of the BRT terminal/station generally increases more than
proportionally compared to the increase in the number of stopping/docking bays.
This length and other dimensions can be larger if the BRT terminal/station is
integrated with terminals/stations of other public transport modes, for example,
those of the underground public transport system.
Passenger access to the BRT terminals/stations—either on foot, by bike, car/
taxi, and other public transport systems—should be safe, efficient, and effective.
This implies good integration including parking and short stop spaces at the rear of
the stations, as well as providing convenient connections/passages to/from the bus
platforms. In particular, at the BRT feeder-trunk systems, cross-platform transfers
250
200
l - Required lenght - m
l = 29.,848e0.229n
R² = 0.988
150
100
50
0
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
n - Number of substations and stopping bays
Fig. 2.4 Dependence of the required length of terminal/station on the number of substations and
stopping/docking bays of the BRT system (Wright and Hook 2007)
Table 2.3 Infrastructural performances of the BRT and LRT system—infrastructure (averages)
(GAO 2012; Levinson et al. 2003a, b)
Indicator/measure System
BRT LRTc
Number of systems 147 170
Length of the network (km/system) 25.3/15.0c 47.4
Number of corridors/lines per system 2 6
Number of routes per corridor 5 –
Average length of the corridor/line (km) 32a/12.9b (28) 8.6
Width/profile of the lane (m) 10.4–14.6 7.5
Number of stations (-/route) 32a/23b –
Density of stations (-/km) 1a/2b –
Location of the station(s) (mainly) Side/curb/off-lane Side
Width/length of the station(s) (m) 9.5/50–9.5/75 12.0/50–20.0/70
Type of guideways/lanes—passing lanes Mostly yes Yes
Platform height (at the stations) Low Low (or High)
Static/spatial capacity of the stations 1–3 1–2
(vehicles/station)
Materials used (lanes, stations) Concrete, asphalt Iron/steel, concrete, asphalt
Construction time (km/year) 16–20 1–5
a b c
China; Rest of the world; Europe
from the feeder to the trunk buses, and vice versa, should be provided (see below).
Some additional indicators of the infrastructural performances of the BRT system
and a comparable LRT system are given in Table 2.3.
2.2.2.3 Technical/Technological Performances
The technical/technological performances of the BRT system mainly relate to: (i)
length, space (seats ? stands) capacity, weight, type and power of engine(s), and
riding comfort of vehicles/buses; and (ii) ITS (Intelligent Transport Systems)
including the systems for managing transit services along the network/routes,
providing the users/passengers with the online information, and collecting fares.
Vehicles/buses
The BRTsystems generally use standard and/or articulated transport vehicles/

buses (and trolleybuses) with a typical length of 12, 18, or 24 m, a weight of 13,
17, or 24 tons, and the corresponding capacity (seats ? stands) of 75, 100, or 160
passengers, respectively. The buses have 3–4 axles. The buses of the above-
mentioned 40 BRT systems are generally powered by four types of engines: diesel
and diesel Euro II/III/IV (26), CNG (Compressed Natural/Propane Gas) (7), hybrid
(diesel ? electricity) (3), and electricity (3). The diesel/buses use diesel fuel for
propulsion and electric power for auxiliary equipment. The CNG buses are
powered by engines similar to diesel engines, but instead of diesel they use a
methane mixture for propulsion. The hybrid diesel–electric vehicles/buses use an
onboard diesel engine for producing electricity that charges their batteries. These
in turn provide the electricity to run the electric propulsion motors. The electric
vehicles—trolleybuses—use electricity from the overhead power supply infra-
structure, i.e., from the catenary wire systems, for powering electric motors and
auxiliary equipment. The typical engine power of BRT vehicles/buses is about
150–220 kW(kW–kilowatt). A summary of indicators of the technical/techno-
logical performances for typical BRT and LRT vehicles is given in Table 2.4:
An important characteristic of BRT vehicles/buses, sometimes more important
than their size, is the number and width of doors. This influences utilization of
vehicles/buses, consequently the route/line capacity, and otherperformances such
as the average commercialspeed. Some longer buses have four doors, each about
1–1.1 m wide. Depending on the location of busways, they can be on the vehicle’s
right or left side.
ITS (Intelligent Transport Systems)
Systems for managing transit services
The ITS (Intelligent Transport Systems) managing the transit services of BRT
systems generally include: (i) automated enforcement systems for exclusive bus
lanes; (ii) an AVL (Automatic Vehicle Location) system; (iii) a CAD (Computer-
Aided Dispatching) and advanced communications system; (iv) a precision
docking at bus stop system; (v) a tight terminal guidancesystem; and (vi) a warning
system.
Table 2.4 Technical/technological performances of the BRT and LRT system vehicles
(averages) (AUMA 2007; CE 2008; STSI 2008; Vuchic 2007; Janic 2011)
BRT LRT
Length of a vehicle (m) 12/18/24a 14–30a
Height of a vehicle (m) 3.0–3.2 4.0–6.9b
Width of a vehicle (m) 2.5–2.6 2.20–2.65
Cars/vehicle 1 2–4
Capacity (spaces/vehicle) 75/100/160 110–250
Seat spacing (m) 0.80 0.75–0.90
Number of axles/vehicle 3/4/4 4/6/8
Tare weight (tons) 13/17/24 25.4–38.8
Engine power (kW) 150–220 200–434
Maximum speed (km/h) 90–100 60–120
Operating speed (km/h) 27–48 40–80
a b
Vehicle can be a set consisting of few cars; Including pantograph
• Automated enforcement systems for exclusive bus lanes include the transit signal
priority and the queue jump system; the former changes the timing of the traffic
signals in various ways in order to give priority to BRT vehicles/buses at inter-
sections (for example, the system turns the red light to green if it ‘‘recognizes’’ the
approachof a BRT vehicle to the intersection); the latter enables using the separate
lane and receiving the green light signal upon closer approach to the intersection;
• The AVL (Automatic Vehicle Location) System is the computer-based system
enabling the real-time tracking of vehicles/buses and providing them with the
information for the timely schedule adjustments and equipment substitutions; at
the core of this system is GPS (Global Positioning Satellite) technology and GIS
(Geographic Information System) displaying the location of the vehicles/buses
on the route map grids in the dispatch center;
• The CAD (Computer-Aided Dispatching) and advancedcommunications system
enables adjusting dwell times at vehicle/busstops or transfer points, vehicle/bus
headways, rerouting vehicles/buses, adding vehicles/buses to routes, and dis-
patching new vehicles/buses to replace incapacitated vehicles/buses; the drivers
exchange communications with the dispatch center by radiotelephones, cellular
telephones, and/or mobile display terminals;
• The precision docking system uses sensors on the vehicles/buses and on the
roadside to indicate the exact place where the vehicle/bus should stop; this
enables users/passengers to be in position for immediate boarding, which
shortens dwell time(s) at the stops;
• The tight terminal guidance system uses sensors similar to those for precision
docking to assist the vehicles/buses in maneuvering in terminals with limited
space; the system can contribute to minimizing the amount of space for bus
terminal operations, as well as to reducing the overall time the bus spends at the
terminal/station; and
• The warning system aims at assisting/warning the vehicle/bus drivers in order to

avoid collisions, pedestrian proximity, and low tire friction; this improves the-
safety, efficiency, and effectiveness of the BRTsystem’s operations.
User/passenger information system
The user/passenger information system at the terminals/stations and onboard the

vehicles/buses provides advance information contributing to the efficiency and
effectiveness of travel decisions. For the former, displays provide real-time
information on forthcoming arrivals/departures, transfer times and locations, and
maps of the related routes/lines. For the latter, the system automatically announces
the vehicle/bus approaching its next stop, giving sufficient time for preparation,
speeding up disembarking and embarking, and consequently shortening dwell time
at the terminals/stations (see below).
Fare collection systems
The BRT systems generally use three mainly automatedsystems for collecting
fares: (i) preboard, onboard, and free-fare collection and verification. Of the 40 of
the above-mentioned systems, 16 employ preboard, 21 onboard, and 3 free-board
fare collection systems. In particular, the onboard system speeds up the fare col-
lection process and eliminates expensive cash handling operations at transit
agencies using smart cards. The system uses the read-and-write technology to store
the monetary value on a microprocessor chip inside a plastic card. As passengers
board a vehicle/bus, the card reader determines the card’s value, debits the
appropriate amount for the busride, and writes the balance back onto the card, all
within a fraction of a second.
2.2.2.4 Operational Performances
Operational performances of the BRT system include demand, capacity, quality of

service, size of fleet, and technical productivity. They are analyzed and modeled
based on the above-mentioned global BRT systems. The corresponding figures for
LRT systems are also provided for comparative purposes.
Demand
In general, the volumes of demand for existing and prospective urban transport
systems can be estimated under the assumption of their mutual competition. In
such case, the BRT system can compete with the individual passenger carand other
public transport systems such as taxi, conventional bus, tram, metro, and LRT.
Under such conditions, the users/passengers are assumed to usually choose the
including BRT with respect to their own characteristics (age, gender, personal
income), trip purpose (work, shopping, entertainment, other), and the system’s
performances, both in combination reflecting the generalized travel cost. This cost,
usually represented by the disutility function of using the given transit system
(i) between given pair of origin and destination (k) and (l), respectively, Ui/kl(T),
can be estimated from either the aggregated trip generation data or disaggregate
passenger survey data, both for a given period of time (T). The MNL (Multi-
nomial) Logit model can then be applied to quantify the market share or the
probability of choosing the system (i) as follows (TRB 2008a):
2
Ui=kl ðT Þ
e
pi=kl ðT Þ ¼ I ð2:2aÞ
P 2 ðT Þ
Ui=kl
e
i¼1
where
I is the number of transport systems offering transit services between the origin
(k) and destination (l).
The number of users/passengers choosing the system (i) can be estimated from
Eq. 2.2a as follows:
qi=kl ðT Þ ¼ pi=kl ðT Þ qkl ðT Þ ð2:2bÞ
where
qkl(T) is the total number of users/passengers traveling between the origin (i) and
destination (k) during the time period (T) by all available transport
systems.
The user/passenger demand qkl(T) in Eq. 2.2b can be estimated by applying one
of the causal-gravity-type models based on the trip generation/attraction socio-
economic forces of the origin (i) and the destination (k), and the travel ‘‘resis-
tance’’ between them (Janic 2010; Vuchic 2004).
The user/passenger demand qi/kl(T) in Eq. 2.2b includes the demand between
the origin (k) and destination (l) as well as the demand between each pair of the
vehicle/bus stops along the corridor/line (kl) as follows:
X
M ffi MX1 X
M
qi=kl ðT Þ ¼ qi=kl ðT Þ þ qi=km ðT Þ þ qi=ml ðtÞ þ qi=mn ðT Þ ð2:2cÞ
m¼1 m¼1 n¼mþ1
where
qi=kl ðT Þ is the user/passenger demand between the origin (k) and
destination (l) during the time period (T);
qi=kl ðT Þ; qi=ml ðT Þ is the user/passenger demand between the origin (k) and the
station/stop (m), and the station/stop (m) and the destination
(l), respectively, during the time period (T);
qi=mn ðT Þ is the user/passenger demand between the stations/stops
(m) and (n) during the time period (T); and
M is the number of stations/stops along the route (kl).
2000
1800
CDBe - Employmet - thosuands
1600
1400
CBEe = 118.91P - 60.504
R² = 0.960
1200
1000
800
600
400
200
0
0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18
P - Population of urbanized area - million
Fig. 2.5 Relationship between population of an urbanized area and employment in the
corresponding CDB (Central Business District) (Levinson et al. 2003a, b)
Demand for BRT services mainly consists of daily users/passengers commuting

from their home to the place of a given activity (work, shopping, entertainment,
others), each located within or outside the given urban agglomeration (or CBD),
and vice versa. The potential demand for the BRT, as well as for other urban
public transport systems, can be influenced by the size of population, which in turn
can influence employment and other commercial and entertainment activities in
the given CBD. Figure 2.5 shows an example of the relationship between the size
of urban population and employment in a CBD as the potential demand for the
given BRT system.
Generally as intuitively expected, a larger urban population can generate pro-
portionally greater employment in the CBD at an average rate of about 118
thousands employees per 1 million of population (as in the above example).
Figure 2.6 shows an example of the relationship between the number of employees
in CBD and the number of daily (weekday) users/passengers of BRT systems.
As expected, higher employmentin the CBD generally generates a higher daily
demandfor urban transit including, in this case, the BRT.
Capacity
The transit capacity of the BRT system is one of the most important indicators of
its operational performances mainly due to the requirement to transport relatively
large numbers of users/passengers under given circumstances. This capacity can be
considered for a single terminal/station, route/line, and the entire network pro-
viding the vehicle/bus capacity is given.
Q - BRT system users/passengers - 000/day 140
120
Q = 0.304CDBe + 8.794
R² = 0.803
100
80
60
40
20
0
0 50 100 150 200 250 300 350 400
CDBe- employment - 000/CDB
Fig. 2.6 Relationship between the daily number of users/passengers of the BRT system and
employment in the CBD (GAO 2012; Levinson et al. 2003a, b; Wright and Hook 2007)
Fig. 2.7 Scheme of a BRT (a)

system service network a T1
Direct or convoy network Direct services Direct or convoy services
b Trunk-feeder network
(b)
Feeder services
T1 T2
Trunk services
Transfer terminals - T1,T2 Feeder services
Service network
The BRT system can generally operate as a ‘‘direct or convoy’’, ‘‘trunk-feeder,’’
and ‘‘hybrid’’ service network. The layout of the former two is shown in Fig. 2.7.
• Direct or convoy network consists of routes and related BRT services con-
necting different user-passenger origins and destinations, which can be both
within and outside a given urban agglomeration. In such case, many different
bus services/lines connecting particular sets of these origins and destinations
operate within the common/main part of the network(s) and then spread outside
it toward the periphery of the given agglomeration. Consequently, a high
frequency of mainly direct services (with no or few transfers) is provided to

those users/passengers traveling within the parts of the common/main network.
The demand served through the main part of thenetwork by the given BRT
service/line during the time period (T) estimated as in Eqs. 2.2a–c is:
Q(T) : qkl(T), where (k) is the origin (k = 1, 2…, K) and (l) is the destination
of the user/passenger flow(s) (l = 1, 2,…, L).
• Trunk-feeder network consists of the feeder and trunk part. The feeder part
represents the local network connecting the user/passenger origins and desti-
nations to the trunk terminal(s)/station(s) by services usually operated by lower
capacity (conventional) vehicles/buses. The trunk terminals are mutually con-
nected by services usually operated by the larger (articulated) and/or bi-artic-
ulated vehicles/buses. In any case, the size of vehicles/buses and service
frequency can be easily adapted to the volumes of user/passenger demand.
However, the users/passengers are forced to change at the trunk terminals/
stations, which does not exclude potential necessary changes at the stations
between them.
• Hybrid network represents a combination of a direct or convoy and trunk net-
work set up to appropriately adjust the offered capacityto changes in user/
passenger demand. This implies flexibility in adapting to the time and spatial
pattern, volumes, and intensity of this demand. Consequently, this network
possesses the combined features of both sub-networks it is comprised of.
The volumes of demand are generally different on the feeder and the trunk
route(s) of the trunk-feeder network(s). For example, on the feeder route con-
necting the origin (k) and the trunk terminal/station T1, the volume of this demand
P
during period (T) is: QðTÞ qk;T1 ðTÞ ¼ Ll¼1 qkl ðTÞ (k = 1, 2,.., K). On the trunk
route between the transfer terminals/stations T1 and T2, this volume is:
P P
QðTÞ qT1;T2 ðTÞ ¼ Kk¼1 Ll¼1 qkl ðTÞ, for k = l. Finally, on the feeder route
connecting the trunk terminal/station T2 and the destination (l), the volume of user/
P
passenger demand is: QðTÞ qT2;l ðTÞ ¼ Kk¼1 qkl ðTÞ (l = 1, 2,.., L). The user/
passenger demand qk,T1(T), qkl(T), and qT2,l(T) can be estimated as in Eqs. 2.2a–c.
Consequently, the main differences between the above two network configurations
are as follows:
• At the direct or convoy service network, the lower capacity BRTvehicles/buses
directly operate between particular origin and destination terminals/stations. In
this case, the volumes of user-passenger demand per origin–destination pair are
usually lower, resulting in the lower service frequency and the lower loadfactor
per frequency given thevehicle/bus size/space capacity; as mentioned above, the
capacity of these vehicles/buses is usually 70–75 spaces (seats ? stands) (12 m
length).
• At the trunk-feeder service network, feeder vehicles/buses of a capacity of
70–75 spaces (12 m length) transport users/passengers between their origins and
destinations and the trunk terminal(s)/station(s). At these terminals/stations, the
users/passenger change for trunk vehicles/buses, usually with a capacity of
160–200 spaces (18–24 length). Thus, the volumes of users/passengers in both

the feeder routes and the trunk corridor substantively increase, which generally
can justify the increase in the service frequency, the vehicle/bus capacity or both
simultaneously, and consequently the load factor. Such a BRT network is thus
more effective and efficient.
Furthermore, all above-mentioned types of BRT networks can act as feeder
systems to other mass urban (metro, tram, LRT) and inter-urban transit systems
(heavyrail).
Station/terminal capacity
The capacity of a station/terminal ls(t) depends on the number of platforms—

parking/stopping places—for the vehicles/buses and the average time they occupy
them. In general, this capacity can be estimated as follows:
ls ðT Þ ¼ P=ts ðT Þ ð2:3Þ
where
P is the number of available stopping/docking bays on the given terminal/
station; and
ts ðTÞ is the average occupancy time of a single stopping/docking bay (min)
during time period T.
The average occupancy time ts ðTÞ of the stopping/docking bay can change over
time as indicated by Eq. 2.3. Consequently, the capacity or service rate of the
stopping bay can also change under conditions of having all designedspaces
available during the time T (i.e., ls ðtÞ ¼ 1=ts ðTÞ).
Route/line capacity
The capacity of the route/line can be defined as the maximum number of vehicles/
buses (sometimes also the number of passenger spaces), which can pass through its
fixed point (i.e., the ‘‘reference location’’) during the given period of time T
(usually 1 h) under conditions of constant demandfor service (Vuchic, 2007). This
capacity expressed by the service frequency fkl/max(T) for the route/line connecting
the origin (k) and the destination (l) can be estimated as follows:
" #
T
fkl=max ðT Þ ¼ ð2:4aÞ
max Hkl=w=min ; Hkl=s=min
where
Hkl/w/min is the minimum headway between the successive vehicles/buses along
the particular sections of the route/line (kl) (min); and
Hkl/s/min is the minimum terminal/station headway defined as the inter-arrival
time of the successive vehicles/buses at the particular stations along the
route/line (kl) (min).
In the case of satisfied demand with the specified average load factor per
service, the frequency fkl(T) in Eq. 2.4a can be estimated as follows:

qkl ðT Þ
fkl ðT Þ ¼ ð2:4bÞ
kkl ðT ÞNkl
where
qkl(T) is the user/passenger demand on the route/line (kl) during the period
(T) (determined according to Eqs. 2.2a–c) (passengers);
kkl(T) is the average load factor along the route/line (kl) during time (T), and
Nkl is the vehicle/bus capacity operating along the route (kl) (spaces/vehicle).
In Eq. 2.4a, in most cases: Hkl/w/min [ Hkl/s/min; thus, the terminal/station

headway(s) determines the capacity of the given route/line. Consequently, the
capacity Ckl(T) expressed by the maximum number of vehicles/buses that can pass
through a given ‘‘reference location’’ of the route/line (kl) during the period of
time (T) can be estimated based on Eq. 2.4a as follows:
Ckl ðT Þ ¼ fkl=max ðT Þ mkl ð2:4cÞ
where
mkl is the number of vehicles/buses per each single departure/service on the
route (kl).
The offered capacity of the route/line (kl), Ckl/0(T) defined as the number of
passenger spaces supplied during the given period of time T can be estimated as
follows based on Eq. 2.4c:
Ckl=0 ðT Þ ¼ Ckl ðT Þ Nkl ð2:4dÞ

where all symbols are analogous to those in the previous equations.
In Eq. 2.4d, the vehicle/busspace capacity Nkl depends on its constructive
characteristics and is expressed by the number user/passenger spaces (seats ? -
stands) per vehicle/bus.
Speed
Speed as an indicator of operational performances refers to the operating and

commercial speed of vehicles/buses along the routes of a given BRT system
network(s). The operating speed includes acceleration, deceleration, and cruising/
operating speed, which depends on the vehicle/bus technical/design characteristics
and prevailing driving/traffic conditions, while the commercial speed vkl(dkl) along
the BRT route/line (dkl) includes the operational speed and dwell time at stations/
terminals. It can be estimated as follows:
Table 2.5 Operational performances of BRT and LRT system—capacity (averages) (ERRAC
2004; GAO 2012; Levinson et al. 2003a, b; Vuchic 2007; Wright and Hook 2007)
BRT LRT
Vehicle capacity (passengers seating ? standing) 75–160 110–250
Route/line capacity (veh/h) 8–15 5–12
Terminal/station dynamic capacity (veh/h) 8–15 5–12
Network capacity (veh/h) 56–105 30
User-passenger capacity (pass/h/direction) 600–2400 550–3000
Commercial speed (km/h) 26.3 20–25
vkl ðdkl Þ ¼ dkl =skl ðdkl Þ ð2:5Þ

where
dkl is the length of route between the origin (k) and the destination (l) (km);
and
skl(dkl) is the total travel time of a vehicle/bus along the route dkl (min).
Some measures of BRT and LRT system capacity have been estimated using
Eqs. 2.4a–2.5 and are given in Table 2.5.
The values in Table 2.5 confirm that on average, BRT systems appear quite
comparable and according to some measures even superior to LRT systems.
Furthermore, the user/passenger capacityof both large systems can be much
higher: 5,000–40,000 for BRT and 6,000–15,000 pass/h/direction for LRT sys-
tems, which clearly indicates the superiority of BRT systems (Wright 2003).
Nevertheless, the supply of this capacity should be adapted to the volumes of
demand as shown in Fig. 2.8.
In general, peak-hour capacity supply increases at a decreasing rate as the
volumes of corresponding demand increase. For example, in order to serve 5,000
users/passengers/h/direction, the BRT) system needs to engage 92 vehicles/buses
(N C 54). For 10,000 users/passengers, around 172 vehicles/buses are needed
(N C 58). For 20,000 users/passengers, about 323 buses are needed (N C 62).
This indicates that as the peak-hour demand increases, both the number and size of
the vehicles/buses engaged tend to increase.
The number and size of vehicles/buses in the operator’s fleet also depend on the
type of service system/network. For example, the average size of the fleet oper-
ating the direct or convoy system/network is about 133 vehicles/buses and of that
operating the trunk-feeder system/network 197 (80 trunk articulated and 117
feeder) vehicles/buses. Specifically, the largest BRT TransMilenio (Bogota,
Columbia) operates a fleet of 1,420 (1,013 trunk articulated and 407 feeder)
vehicles/buses (Wright and Hook 2007).
n - Capacity - numebr of buses/peak hour

450
400 n = 21.506Q0.9047
R2 = 0.9557
350
300
250
200
150
100
50
0
0 5 10 15 20 25 30
Q - Passengers/peak - hour/direction - thosuands
Fig. 2.8 Relationship between peak-hour capacity and demand for the selected BRT systems
(Levinson et al. 2003a, b)
Quality of service
The quality of service of the BRT system is expressed by schedule delays, travel
time or commercial speed, availability, reliability and punctuality, riding comfort,
and the overall accessibility of a given BRT route/line and/or network.
Schedule delay
Schedule delay is defined as the time a passenger has to wait for BRT services at a
given terminal/station. Assuming that the users/passengers are familiar with the
timetable and arrive at the BRT station/terminal uniformly during any two suc-
cessive vehicle/bus services, the average schedule delay of a user/passenger can be
estimated, based on Eqs. (2.4a, b) as follows:
SDðT Þ ¼ 1=4½T=f ðT Þ ð2:6Þ
where all symbols are as in the previous equations.
Travel time
Travel time depends on the distance of the user/passenger origins and destinations
along the given route/line, the vehicle/bus operating speed, and the number and
duration of intermediate stops. The duration of stops can be influenced by the
number and width of doors of the vehicles/buses, and the number of user/passenger
entries and exits at the particular stops (travel time can be extracted from Eq. 2.7b
below). The above-mentioned commercial speed, being much higher than that of
conventional bus systems (currently between 27 and 48 km/h), can be viewed as
an additional measure. As such, it is close to the commercial speed of LRT. For
example, the average commercial speed of a TransMilenio (Bogota, Columbia)
BRT service operating along the average route length of 13 kms is about 29.5 km/
h (Levinson et al. 2003a, b; Saavedra 2011; Vuchic 2007).
Consequently, thanks to these features, BRT systems are considered ‘‘savers’’
of travel time. Some figures in the U.S. show that, depending on the system, these
savings are about 5–35 %, which results in increases in the volumes of user/
passenger demand by about 3–60 %, the latter after 1 year of operation, as
compared to existing transit services (GAO 2012).
Availability, reliability, and punctuality
In general, BRT system services are considered highly available, reliable, and
punctual. Availability is achieved through scheduling services during the entire
day. Reliability implies operations without cancelation of the scheduled services
due to any reasons. High punctuality implies minor deviations of actual from
scheduled arrival times at particular locations/stations along the line(s), which is
achieved thanks to operating, in the most cases, along the dedicated bus ways and
applying ITS. Such high indicators are comparable to those of LRT systems.
Riding comfort
Riding comfort is usually influenced by the available space for seating and
standing onboard the vehicles/buses, internal noise, and smoothness of operations
depending, among other factors, on the driving regime and the quality of surface of
the bus-ways. Available space per passenger is measured by the seat spacing,
which is typically 0.80 m for the vehicles used in most BRT systems. The driving
regime is strongly influenced by acceleration/deceleration rates due to the rela-
tively frequent stops along the given route/line. These are about 0.8–1.6/1.1 m/s2
for BRT vehicles/buses compared to 0.9–1.3 m/s2 for LRT trains (Vuchic 2007).
Accessibility
BRT system services are accessible at terminals/stations located at certain dis-
tances along the routes/lines on foot, and/or by bike, car, taxi, and/or other public
transport modes. In many cases, pedestrian zones lead directly to BRT terminals/
stations, thus making them even more accessible. In addition, good accessibility is
achieved through the convenient positioning of BRT routes/lines in the given
urban context, by locating terminals/stations at easily accessible places, providing
dedicated parking spaces for bikes and vehicles/cars and convenient connections/
passages to BRT vehicles/bus platforms.
Table 2.6 gives some averages of the indicators and measures of the service
quality of BRT and LRT systems.
This confirms that both systems are quite comparable in terms of the quality of
service and as such are mutually substitutable.
Fleet size
The size of fleet of a given BRT system is expressed by the number of vehicles/
buses operating during a given period of time under given conditions (service
frequency and volume of user/passenger demand). This can be estimated for an
Table 2.6 Operational performances of BRT and LRT system—quality of service (averages)
(GAO 2012; Janic 2011; Levinson et al. 2003a, b; Vuchic 2007; Wright and Hook 2007)
BRT LRT
Service frequency (deep/peak-h) 8–15 5–12
Schedule delay (peak-h) (min) 1.00–1.875 1.25–3.0
Dwell time at stations (s) 24 –
Transit time (min/line) 64 –
Typical operating speed (km/h)
Freeway/bus-way
Nonstop 60–80 70–90
All-stop 40–55 40–60
Arterial streets 23–31 –
Acceleration/deceleration rate (m/s2) 0.8–1.6/1.1 0.9–1.3
Reliability of services High High
Punctuality of services High High
Riding comfort High High
individual route/line and/or entire network. For example, for a route/line (kl)
during the period T, the required number of vehicles nkl(T) equals, based on
Eqs. 2.4a–d:
nkl ðTÞ ¼ fkl=max ðTÞ skl ðdkl Þ ð2:7aÞ
where all symbols are equivalent to those in the previous equations.
In Eq. 2.7a, skl(dkl) is the turnaround time of the vehicles/buses on the route/line
dkl, which can be estimated as follows:
" #
X
Mkl 2 X
M kl 1
skl ðdkl Þ ¼ tkl=s1 þ 2 tkl=sj þ dkl=j;jþ1 =vkl=j;jþ1 dkl=j;jþ1 þ tkl=sM ð2:7bÞ
j¼1 j¼1
where
tskl/1, tkl/Mj is the average (scheduled) stop time of the vehicle/bus at the
beginning and end station/terminal of the route/line (kl) (min);
tskl/j is the average (scheduled) stop time of the vehicle/bus at the
intermediate station (j) along the route/line (kl) (min);
dkl//j jþ1 is the distance between the (j) and (j ? 1) station along the
route/line (kl) (km);
vjkl/, jþ1 (djkl/, jþj ) is the average operating speed of the vehicle/bus along the
segment of the route/line (kl) between (j) and (j ? 1) station
(km/h); and
Mkl is the number of stations along the given route/line (kl).
For example, the average fleet size of BRT systems operating a direct or convoy
network is 133 and of those operating a trunk-feeder network 197 vehicles/buses
(the latter excludes the TransMilenio system). The average fleet size of a European
LRT system is 155 vehicles.
Technical productivity
The technical productivity of an individual route and the entire BRT system
network can also be determined. Based on Eqs. 2.4a–2.7b, the technical produc-
tivity of the given route/line dkl can be estimated as follows:
TPðdkl Þ ¼ Ckl=0 ðT Þ Nkl vkl ðdkl Þ ¼ fkl=max ðT Þ mkl Nkl vkl ðdkl Þ ð2:8Þ
For example, the average technical productivity of BRT systems varies
depending on their size and scope from 15,780 to 63,120 s-km/h (excluding the
TransMilenio system). The corresponding technical productivity of LRT systems
in Europe varies from 11,000 to -75,000 s-km/h.
2.2.2.5 Economic Performances
The economic performances of BRT systems refer to their costs and revenues.
Costs
BRT system costs include investment costs in infrastructure, facilities, equipment
and in some cases vehicles/buses, as well as operational costs.
The total costs of a given BRT system consist of investment costs and operating
costs. For the period of 1 year, these costs can be estimated as follows:
CT ¼ CI þ Co ¼ A þ 365 V cv ðVÞ ð2:9aÞ
where
A is the annuity paid for investment and capital maintenance of infrastruc-
ture ($US/year);
V is the average daily utilization of the vehicle/bus fleet (veh-km/day); and
cv(V) is the average operating cost per unit of system output ($US/veh-km).
The average volume of vehicle kilometers carried out per day V can be
determined as the product of the daily mileage of a single vehicle and the number
of vehicles engaged depending on the volume of demand. Operating costs
cv(V) generally decrease more than proportionally as the volume V increases.
These costs include annuities on bonds for acquiring the vehicles/buses, vehicle/
bus insurance costs, the wages of drivers and other support staff, the costs of
vehicle/bus maintenance including wages of personnel and spare parts, energy/fuel
costs, and the costs of using the infrastructure (taxes). Table 2.7 gives an example
of the typical average costs for selected U.S. BRT and LRT systems.
Fig. 2.9 Relationship

between the investment costs Metro
Rapid transit
Investment cost/line length

and performances for selected
urban and suburban passenger
transport systems (Vuchic
2007)
LRT
Semi-rapid transit
BRT
BUS Street transit
Performance - speed,reliability,capacity,image
The differences in the investment costs between BRT and LRT are mainly due
to some specific components needed for LRT and not needed for the BRT system
such as, for example, train signal communication, electric power systems with
overhead wires to power the trains, and rails, ties, and switches. In addition, a rail
maintenance facility must be built if one doesn’t already exist. Furthermore, the
investment costs in BRT systems differ for dedicated bus lines and for mixed
traffic lines. For example, on average these amount to 1.2–6.0 $US/km for dedi-
cated and 0.03–0.06 million $US/km for mixed traffic lane(s). The average con-
struction time is about 16/20 km of lines per year. That said, urban and suburban
transit systems with higher performances will generally require higher investment
costs as shown by the linear qualitative relationship in Fig. 2.9.
In the example given in Table 2.7, the average cost per p-km and vehicle-km is
lower in the case of BRT than LRT systems. However, the average cost per
passenger is higher in the case of BRT than in LRT, indicating that LRT systems
provide services over longer distances.
Table 2.7 Economic performances of selected BRT and LRT systems—cost (averages) (GAO
2001, 2012; Janic 2011)
Cost component System
BRT LRT
Infrastructure and vehicles
Infrastructure (millions $US/km)a 8.98 18–25
Vehicle (millions/$US/unit) 0.4–1.0 1.5–3.4
Amortization period (years) 25 25
Infrastructure
Vehicles 12–15 25
Operation
$US/p-kmb 0.12 0.23
$US/veh-kmc 3.05 8.90
$US/passengerd 3.20 2.57
a
In the U.S. the average investment costs for 29 LRT systems amounted to about 24 million
$US/km; b 5 BRT and 15 LRT systems in the U.S.; c, d Six BRT and LRT systems in the U.S.
Revenues
Revenues from operating given BRT system are gained by collecting fares and
from various subsidies. For the period of 1 year, these revenues can be estimated
as follows:
R ¼ 365 qp p þ Su ð2:9bÞ
where
qp is the daily number of users/passengers (users/passengers/day);
p is the average fare per user/passenger ($US/user/passenger); and
Su is the annual subsidy to a given BRT system.
For example, the average fare of the above-mentioned 40 BRT systems oper-
ating around the world is 1.25$US/passenger. About 68 % of the systems (27 of
40) need subsidies at an average level of 25–30 %. Similarly, LRT systems also
need subsidies at a level of 20–25 % (Tegner 2003; Wright and Hook 2007).
2.2.2.6 Environmental Performances
The environmental performances of BRT systems include energy/fuel consump-

tion and related emissions of GHG (Greenhouse Gases), and land use/take.
Energy consumption and emissions of GHG
The energy consumption and emissions of GHG (Greenhouse Gases) by BRT
system(s) can be considered as direct absolute and relative, and in terms of savings
in these both thanks to the modal shift from other urban transit systems.
Direct energy/fuel consumption and related emissions of GHG are usually
expressed in relative terms, i.e., as the average quantities per unit of the system’s
output, i.e., g/p-km or g/s-km (grams/passenger-kilometer or grams/space-kilo-
meter). This is usually carried out for the specified vehicle size and occupancy rate
(load factor) while always bearing in mind the specific conditions in which a given
BRT system operates. Then, the absolute values can be easily obtained by mul-
tiplying these relative values by the corresponding volumes of output over the
specified period of time, or vice versa.
In particular, relative values are convenient for comparison of BRT system(s)
with other urban transport systems as given in Table 2.8.
As indicated, in both BRT systems, conventional buses (12 m long) mainly
used in small and medium-sized direct or convoy systems/networks and for feeder
services in larger trunk-feeder and hybrid networks consume and generate less
energy/fuel and related emissions of GHG (CO2), respectively, than their larger
articulated counterparts (18 m long). In addition, in this respect, BRT systems
remain inferior as compared to LRT systems on the one hand, but superior as
Table 2.8 Environmental performances of the selected urban transport systems—energy/fuel

consumption and emissions of CO2 (averages) (Vincent and Jerram 2006; VTT 2004; Wright
2003)
Impact System
BRTb BRTc LRTb Carb
Vehicle (length or units) 12 m 18 m 18 m 2 units 1 unit
Energy/fuel consumption (g/p-km)a 8.70 11.69 8.09 5.73 40.79
Emissions of GHG (CO2) (g/p-km) 27.85 37.41 25.9 18.37 130.53
a
Diesel fuel; b U.S. system(s); c BRT TransMilenio (Bogota, Columbia) (Based on 75 passen-
gers per BRT and/or LRT vehicle, and 2 passengers per car)
Table 2.9 Environmental performances of the U.S. BRT and LRT systems—emissions of other
than CO2 GHG (averages) (Puchalsky 2005)
Emissions of GHG System
BRT LRT
a
Diesel Hybrid CNG
NOx (g/p-km//g/s-km) 0.7150 0.439/0.336 0.2300/0.1590 0.0278/0.0115
VOCs (g/p-km//g/s-km) 0.0063 0.003159/0.002418 0.0112/0.0074 0.000177/0.000073
CO (g/p-km//g/s-km) 0.0713 0.00238/0.00182 0.2570/0.1770 0.000522/0.000216
a
CNG Compressed Natural Gas
compared to individual passenger cars on the other. Both BRT and LRT system are
superior as compared to individual (diesel-powered) cars. Table 2.9 gives the
average relative emissions of the other than CO2 GHG—VOC (Organic Com-
pounds), NOx (Nitrogen Oxide), and CO (Carbon Monoxide)—generated by BRT
and LRT systems in the U.S.
These values generally confirm again that BRT systems, independently on the
energy/fuel used, remain inferior as compared to LRT systems in terms of relative
emissions of the specified GHG. However, these emissions of GHG by LRT
systems always need to be considered respecting the composition of the primary
sources for obtaining electricity.
Savings in the energy/fuel and related emissions of GHG by BRT system(s) can
be achieved in different ways. One can be within the system by choosing low
energy/emissions vehicle/bus technologies, by designing bus ways as straight and
as short as possible, and by maximizing the fuel efficiency of the vehicle/bus
operations along the routes under given conditions (avoiding stops in traffic jams,
minimizing the dwell time at stations, driving at fuel-optimal speeds, etc.).
The other implies keeping existing users/passengers onboard, attracting those
using individual car as the mode (j) to shift to BRT system as the mode (i), and
attracting new users of public transport systems. These direct savings as the
average quantities per user/passenger can be estimated as follows:
ffi
sji ¼ ðki Ni Þ kj Nj ECj ECi d ð2:10Þ
where
Ni, Nj is the vehicle capacity of transport modes (i) and (j), respectively
(spaces);
ki, kj is the occupancy rate (i.e., load factor) of vehicles of transport modes
(i) and (j), respectively;
ECi, ECj is the average energy/fuel consumption and/or emissions of GHG of
transport modes (i) and (j), respectively (g/p-km); and
d is the travel distance (km).
From Table 2.5 it follows that, for example, a BRT bus carrying 75 passengers can
replace 37 individual cars, each with 2 passengers. Assuming, for example, that the
average commuting distance is 19 km, the savings in the energy/fuel consumption by
such car/BRT modal shift would be about 28.5 (bus—12 m long) and 28.7 (bus—
18 m long) kg of diesel fuel. The corresponding savings in the emissions of GHG
would be about 91.2 and 91 kgCO2, respectively (Vincent and Jerram 2006).
Land use
Land use relates the size of land used for setting up the infrastructure for a given
BRT system. This consists of land for the segregated bus-ways and stations along
them, and for the buses’ docking/maneuvering, short- and long-term parking
(garages), repairs, and maintenance. The size of acquired land for segregated
busways has already been discussed. But what are the potential savings of the
parking and operating land due to the potential replacing of individual cars by
BRT systems? For example, the parking space for a conventional (12 m long—70
spaces) and for an articulated BRT bus (18 m long—160 spaces) is about 36 and
54 m2, respectively. The former can replace 18 and the latter 40 passenger cars (4
seats), each occupying 10 m2 of space of at most. The resulting savings of parking
space otherwise occupied by cars would be about 144 and 346 m2, respectively.
2.2.2.7 Social and Policy Performances
Social/policy performances of BRT system(s) generally include noise, congestion,

traffic incidents/accidents (i.e., safety and security) and contribution to social
welfare.
Noise
BRT system vehicles/buses generate noise while performing transit services. As in

the case of other transport systems, this noise generally depends on their construc-
tive-technical/technological characteristics and the pass by speed. It has already
been mentioned that BRT systems operate vehicles/buses powered by different
engine technologies, which crucially influence levels of their noise. For example, the
85
80
Noise level - dBA
75
70
LRT noise - 5m from the track

65
Diesel buses - 15m from the line
Hybrid buses -15m from the lane
Electric buses-trolleybuses - 15m from the lane
60
0 20 40 60 80 100 120
Speed - km/h
Fig. 2.10 Relationships between the noise and speed of BRT and LRT vehicles (CE 2008; Ross
and Staiano 2007)
noise of BRT diesel and CNG buses comes from their exhaust system, engine block,
cooling system, air intake components, and tire/pavement interaction. The noise
from BRT hybrid vehicles/buses comes from both diesel and electric motors. The
main noise sources of BRT trolley buses are interaction between the catenary wire
and the pantograph, electric motor, auxiliary equipment, and tire-pavement inter-
action (Ross and Staiano 2007). In comparison, the noise by LRT vehicles primarily
comes from interaction between the catenary wire and the pantograph, electric
motors, auxiliary equipment, and wheel-track interaction (CE 2008). Important
factors influencing received noise from both BRT and LRT system are: (i) the
distance from the noise source, i.e., passing by vehicle(s), and (ii) the existence of
noise barriers along the lanes. Figure 2.10 shows an example of the dependency of
the noise on speed of BRT and LRT vehicles. BRT vehicles/buses are 12–18 m long,
weighting 13–17 tons empty and 32 tons full (vehicle ? driver ? passengers)
with a capacity of 75–100 spaces. LRT vehicles/trains are 20 m long weighting
37–44 tons full (vehicle-couple of cars ? driver ? 65–162 spaces/passengers).
In the case of BRT vehicles/buses, the noise increases in line with the operating
speed at a decreasing rate. In the case of LRT systems, this rate is slightly higher.
The noise level from LRT systems is higher than that of BRT buses. One of the
reasons is that the distance from the source is three times shorter (5 vs. 15 m)
(Urban and suburban buses operating at speeds of about 70 km/h generate noise of
about 87.5–92.5 dB at a distance of about 5 m from the source (Cebrián 2008)).
Nevertheless, it can be said that respecting their noise levels, BRT and LRT
systems appear quite comparable. Noise barriers of a sufficient height along BRT
routes built of brick or concrete contribute to decreasing noise to and below the
sustainable level of about 55 dBA (Mishra et al. 2010).
Congestion
BRT system congestion can be considered from three aspects. The first implies
congestion caused by interference between the BRT vehicles/buses and other traffic,
and vice versa, while operating along mixed traffic bus lanes. The second implies
congestion due to the clustering of the BRT buses operating along segregated bus
ways—particularly those with single lanes in each direction and without passing
lanes at the terminals/stations. This can happen in corridors with several BRT
routes/lines operating relatively frequent services. The trunk part of the feeder-trunk
network can particularly suffer from this kind of induced congestion causing delays
of the affected services. The last implies the contribution of the BRT system to
savings of own congestion and that of the other traffic, which both contribute to
savings in the overall user/passenger travel time. For example, the savings in travel
time compared to previously used transit services vary from 5 to 35 % at 16 U.S.
BRT systems (GAO 2012). In addition, as compared to individual traffic, savings of
32 % at TransMilenio (Bogotá, Colombia), 35 % at Metrobús (Mexico City,
Mexico), and 45 % at Metrobüs (Istanbul, Turkey) have been reported.
Safety
Traffic incidents/accidents reflect the safety and security of a given BRT system.
They are caused by collisions of BRT vehicles/buses with other BRT vehicles/
buses and with other vehicles, bikers, and pedestrians, all often resulting in injuries
and death, as well as damages to property. The number of events per unit of the
system’s output—the number of passengers and/or passenger-kilometer is a con-
venient measure. So far, accidents in BRT systems have been relatively rare, thus
indicating that the systems safe, and by all means safer than their conventional bus
counterparts as shown in Fig. 2.11.
As can be seen, the rate of collisions and injuries of the conventional bus
system operated in Bogota (Columbia) before the BRT system established was
about 7.7/million passenger trips. Over the 2000–2005 period, thanks to the BRT
TransMilenio, despite increasing the number of trips, this rate dropped to about
1–2/million passenger trips. In comparison, during the same period for the slightly
higher number of passenger trips on U.S. LRT systems, this rate was about
1.5–3.0/million passenger trips (RITA 2012; http://brt.mercedes-benz.com/
content/brt/mpc/Safety.html). That said, both BRT and LRT systems should
always be designed and operated to be safe implying that incidents/accidents due
to the already known reasons must not occur.
Social welfare
Social welfare of BRT systems relates to their urban and social effects.
9
TransMilenio - Collisions
8 TransMilenio - Injuries
Accidents/million passenger trips
US LRT - All incidents

7 Before TransMilenio
0
100 150 200 250 300 350
Number of users/passengers - million/year
Fig. 2.11 Relationship between the accident rate and the annual volume of traffic at the selected
BRT systems (RITA 2012; Saavedra 2011; http://brt.mercedes-benz.com/content/brt/mpc/
Safety.html)
Urban effects
The urban effects of BRT systems include changing of the land use and the value
of land and property, redistributive effects, and preceding other more efficient and
effective systems.
• Changing the land use implies (i) taking the land for building the BRT infra-
structure; and (ii) building economic and residential objects rather than parking
spaces along the BRT corridors/routes and particularly around the terminals/
stations.
• Changing the value of land and property generally implies rising their value
faster due to being located closer to BRT system terminals/stations and corri-
dors/routes. This is because the proximity of the BRT system can save time and
monetary cost of commuting, thus making the properties nearby generally
commercially more attractive for new developments or redevelopments than
otherwise. However, in some cases, the value of land and properties can
diminish due to increased noise and emissions of GHG caused by the BRT
system (Levinson et al. 2003a).
• Redistributive effects imply the contribution of BRT systems to the potential
relocation of particular businesses/firms from the suburban areas closer to the
city center, and vice versa, i.e., urbanization and de-urbanization of employment.
• Preceding other more efficient and effective systems implies that BRT corridors
are sometimes used to test the overall feasibility of LRT systems (GAO 2012).
Social effects
The main social effects of BRT systems are their contribution to direct and indirect
employment, social equity, and personal meetings and interactions.
• Direct employment is needed for planning, designing and constructing the BRT
system, and later on for its operating.
• Indirect employment includes institutional and supportive employment (in
entertainment, other amenities-hotels, hospitals, etc.) generated purely because
of the implementation of the BRT system(s).
• Social equity reflects the ability of the BRT system to, like other urban transport
systems, facilitate accessibility and promote social equity within a city. For
example, cheap BRT systems give lower income groups greater access to public
services and economic opportunities (Wright and Hook 2007).
• Personal meetings and interactions imply that effective, efficient, safe, and
cheap BRT systems can bring different groups of people in terms of age, gender,
and income group to places where they can meet and interact with each other in
different ways. Such interactions can diminish tensions and improve the mutual
understanding between such groups.
2.2.3 Evaluation
BRT systems possess both advantages (Strengths and Opportunities) and disad-
vantages (Weaknesses and Threats) as compared to other potentially substitutable
urban (mass) transit systems, such as conventional bus transit and LRT systems.
Comparison with conventional urban bus transit systems
Advantages
Users/passengers
• Relatively strong spatial coverage of a given urban area with corridors, routes,
and lines guaranteeing relatively high quality of the spatial accessibility of the
system’s services;
• Relatively high service frequency, particularly during peak periods contributing
to reducing schedule delay(s) and consequently the urge to shift to other sys-
tems/modes;
• Relatively fast and reliable services thanks to running along dedicated busways
not affected by other traffic at higher operating speeds with minimal dwell times
at the terminals/stations and stops along the routes/lines;
• Less delays due to general congestion, traffic signals, right turns, and passenger
stops; and
• Higher riding comfort thanks to operating rubber-tired, low floor vehicle/buses
of a suitable capacity, a sufficient number of wide doorways offering easy
boarding and internal comfort, and the information system inside the vehicles/
buses and at the terminals/stations/stops.
Transport operators, policy makers, and community members

• Increasing efficiency and effectiveness of operating the available vehicle/bus
fleet thanks to deploying ITS;
• Offering more competitive services contributing to diminishing use of individual
cars and consequently the negative impacts on the environment and society such
as energy/fuel consumption and related emissions of GHG, noise, and conges-
tion throughout the network—along the routes/lines and at parking lots;
• Affecting stronger urbanization and suburbanization along particular corridors/
routes including development of new commercial and social activities;
• Contributing to increasing numbers of users/passengers switching to public
urban transport systems; and
• Contributing to integrating transit and land use planning.
Disadvantages
Users/passengers
• Some confusion due to clustering too many lines/services at the same stops/
stations, particularly at feeder-trunk service systems/networks; and
• Diminishing quality of service if operating along mixed traffic lanes.
Transport operators, policy makers, and community members
• Relatively substantial investments in infrastructure, vehicles/buses, and sup-
porting facilities and equipment (for example, building tunnels or acquiring
CNG (Compressed Natural Gas) or hybrid buses) including the time of
commercialization;
• Affecting the space for other traffic and the urban content of the given area/city
by building the BRT infrastructure, the former can temporarily contribute to
increasing congestion, while the latter can deteriorate urban green areas;
• Increasing energy/fuel consumption and related emissions of GHG and noise
due to more voluminous operations despite using more technologically
advanced vehicles/buses (hybrid, CNG, etc.); and
• Needing subsidies for services in many cases.
Comparison with LRT (Light Rail Transit) systems
Advantages
• Flexibility and convenience of implementation in a wide range of urban and
suburban areas;
• Gradual implementation and extension of the route network;
• Higher frequency and flexibility of services in terms of adjusting to variable
daily demand and re-routing due to any reason, respectively;
• Comparable and flexible transport capacity; and
• Lower investment and comparable operational costs.
Disadvantages
• Generally requiring more space for setting up the infrastructure;
• Lower riding comfort due to the less sizeable and comfortable seats onboard (for
passengers);
• Higher energy consumption and related emissions of GHG independently of the
technology used and not absolutely free from traffic congestion;
• Rather negative image due to the general perception of LRT usually being slow,
noisy, and polluting;
• Lower effects in creating greater land and property value along the corridors/
routes; and
• Lower preferences by developers to locate social-economic activities along the
inherently unstable bus routes/stations rather than along more permanent LRT
routes/stations.
Finally, what can be said for BRT transport systems? They are advanced public
transit systems primarily characterized by the advanced organization of transport
services carried out by matured but gradually improving vehicle/bus technology.
2.3 High Speed Tilting Passenger Trains
1973 The 381 series tilting trains operated by JNR (Japan National Railways) begin commercial
services on the Chuo Main Line connecting Nagoya and Nagano (Japan)
1976 Fiat’s ETR401 tilting trains operated by the Italian State Railways begin commercial
services on the Rome-Ancona line (later extended to Rimini) (Italy)
1978 The Spanish tiling trains Talgo operated by RENFE (The Spanish National Railway) begin
commercial operations (Spain)
High-speed tilting passenger trains operate at speed of about 200 km/h on upgraded
and around 250 km/h or faster on newly built tracks defined by the EU (European
Union) thanks to their fully operational tilting mechanisms. This mechanism can be
disabled after moving onto high-speed tracks and reaching the speed of 250 km/h.
Such an advantage makes these trains highly interoperable in rail networks con-
sisting of conventional, upgraded, and completely new (high speed) lines (http://
en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Tilting_train). Some tilting trains operating on upgraded
trucks at speeds of about 200 km/h include: Virgin Trains’ Class 390 Pendolino
operating along the West Coast Main Line in the United Kingdom (UK), the Talgo
350 train operating on the Spanish AVE high-speed lines, the Italian Pendolino 2
tilting train ETR600, the Swedish X2 tilting train, and the E5 Series Shinkansen
2.3 High Speed Tilting Passenger Trains 43
train operating in Japan. One high-speed tilting train operating on new tracks at
speeds of 250 km/h or higher is the most advanced Japanese tilting train—the N700
Series Shinkansen. This train tilts up to one degree and maintains a speed of about
270 km/h as compared to its previous speed of 255 km/h while passing through
curves of a radius of 2,500 m on the Tōkaidō Shinkansen line.
2.3.2.1 Background
High-speed tilting passenger trains are characterized by their infrastructural,

technical/technological, operational, economic, environmental, social, and policy
performances, which all influence each other. In general, these trains are designed
to primarily operate along conventional tracks at higher speeds than those of
conventional passenger trains. In such cases, the tracks do not require any par-
ticular modifications. Operation at the higher speeds as the main distinguishing
feature of these trains compared to their conventional counterparts is possible
under given conditions thanks to the tilting capabilities.
The infrastructural performances of high speed tilting trains relate to the charac-
teristics of the track design and the related standards that these trains can use.
Track design
In order to fully exploit the technical and operating speeds of high-speed tilting
passenger trains, conventional tracks need to be upgraded and/or completely
rebuilt anyway. The former implies partial reconstruction/redesign of the existing
lines by leveling off high grades (horizontal and longitudinal slopes), increasing
the radii of curved segments, and partially reconstructing tunnels, bridges, cross-
ings, and platforms at particular stations. The latter implies building completely
new lines. Both should be carried out according to the specified standards for
designing rail tracks.
The main elements of rail track design relevant to understanding the operation
of high-speed tilting passenger trains are as follows (Persson 2007):
• The track gauge as the distance between the inner faces of the rail heads of the
track is measured 14 mm below the top of the rail on the inner face. The
standard track gauge is approximately 1,435 mm. The track gauge has an impact
on the lateral behavior of the vehicle which may lead to unstable running. In
addition, it impacts the lateral behavior of the vehicle, which in turn impacts
lateral ride comfort.
• The circular horizontal curve is a curve in the horizontal plane with a constant
radius. This curve is characterized by its radius R related to the track center line
and/or curvature as an inverse to the radius. The reduced radius of the circular
horizontal curve increases the lateral track forces, which increases the derail-
ment ratio. In addition, it has no impact on ride comfort.
• The transition curve is used to connect the straight track to the circular hori-
zontal curve or to connect two circular horizontal curves. The transition curve is
characterized by its curvature as a function of its longitudinal position. The most
common transition curves have linear variation of the curvature and do not
affect safety. The reduced length of the transition curve increases the rate of
change of the cant deficiency and thereby also the lateral jerk perceived by
passengers. It also increases the roll velocity of tilting trains, which is believed
to contribute to motion sickness.
• The track cant (or super elevation) is the amount at which one running rail is
raised above the other running rail (in the curve). The track cant is positive when
the outer rail is raised above the inner rail. The UIC has proved that a cant of
180 mm is widely acceptable and safe. The track cant does not influence ride
comfort.
• The cant transitions (or super elevation ramps) connect two different track
cants. In most cases, the cant transition has the same longitudinal position as the
transition curve. The cant gradient is characterized by its longitudinal distance
to raise one unit (normally expressed as 1 in X, where X is the longitudinal
distance in units). The ERRI (European Rail Research Institute) has showed that
a cant gradient of 1/400 m/m is acceptable. The most common cant transition
has a constant rate of cant change. Steep cant transitions may cause diagonal
wheel unloading, which in turn may lead to derailment due to flange climbing.
In addition, cant transitions do not impact ride comfort.
• The rate of cant change is the rate at which the cant is increased or decreased at
a defined speed. The rate of cant change is characterized by the cant change per
time unit. This does not impact safety.
• Cant deficiency arises when the installed cant is lower than the cant of equi-
librium. Cant deficiency is characterized by additional cant needed to ensure
equilibrium. High cant deficiency may lead to high lateral track forces. High
cant deficiency also increases the risk of over-turning.
• The rate of change of cant deficiency is the rate at which the cant deficiency
increases or decreases at a defined speed. This rate is characterized by the cant
deficiency change per unit of time. The most common transition curve/cant
transition has a constant rate of change of the cant deficiency, which does not
affect safety. However, an increased rate of change of the cant deficiency
increases the lateral jerk perceived by passengers. It also increases the roll
velocity of the tilting vehicles, which is found to contribute to motion sickness
while onboard the tilting vehicles.
• The track gradient connects tracks at different altitudes. The gradient, which
affects both safety and ride comfort, is characterized as a change in altitude per
unit of distance (%). In certain countries, it is represented as the longitudinal
Table 2.10 Infrastructural Element Value

performances for the high-
speed tilting trains in Cant (mm) 180
Europe—infrastructure Rate of cant change (mm/s) 75
standards (CEN 2006) Cant deficiency (mm) 306
Rate of change of cant deficiency (mm/s) 150
distance to raise for one unit (it is expressed as 1 in X, where X is the longi-
tudinal distance in units).
• The vertical curve not affecting safety and the ride comfort connects two dif-
ferent track gradients and is characterized by its radii.
Design standards (Europe)
The CEN (Comité Européen de Normalisation) provides guidance and standards
for particular elements of geometric design of conventional rail vehicles (CEN
2002). This guidance and standards are revised latter on in order to be also con-
venient for high speed tilting train vehicles (CEN 2006). For high-speed tilting
trains, some standards are given in Table 2.10.
In addition, CEN standards categorize the rail tracks, i.e., the rail traffic lines,
based on the categories of services they accommodate, as follows:
(a) Mixed traffic lines for passenger trains traveling at speeds from 80 to 120 km/h;
(b) Mixed traffic lines for passenger trains traveling at speeds greater than
120 km/h and up to 200 km/h;
(c) Mixed traffic lines for passenger trains traveling at speeds higher than 200 km/h;
(d) Mixed traffic lines for passenger trains incorporating special technical design
characteristics; and
(e) Dedicated passenger lines for passenger trains traveling at speeds greater than
250 km/h.
High-speed tilting passenger trains operate on lines (b), (c), and (d).
The technical/technological performances of high-speed tilting passenger trains

relate to tilting principles and tilting technology/mechanism, the vehicle/train
technical specifications, signaling system, and energy consumption.
Tilting principle
When trains pass the horizontal curves along the line(s), both the vehicles them-
selves and passengers onboard are exposed to centrifugal force. This can be
reduced by roll inwards, thus enabling trains to pass through curves at higher
speeds while still maintaining passenger ride comfort. In general, this inward roll
may be achieved by the track cant and/or by tilting the train. Trains composed of
coaches with tilting capabilities are called tilting trains, which can generally be
Fig. 2.12 Scheme of tilting principle of high-speed tilting passenger train(s) (Persson 2007)
categorized into two categories: (i) passively natural tilted trains (for example in
Japan), and (ii) actively tilted trains (in the rest of the world including Europe).
Passive tilt trains rely on the natural laws with a tilt center located above the center
of gravity of the coach. Along a curve, under the influence of centrifugal force, the
lower part of the coach swings outwards. Conversely, active tilt trains are based on
active technology controlled by a controller and executed by an actuator. The main
principle of tilting trains is rolling the coaches inwards the curve as schematically
shown in Fig. 2.12 in order to reduce the lateral force affecting passengers.
Despite the higher track plane acceleration for the tilting train (right), the lateral
force in the car-body is lower. When a coach/train is running along a horizontal
curve, horizontal acceleration emerges. It can be expressed as follows:
ah ¼ v2 =R ð2:11aÞ
where
v is the operating speed (m/s); and
R is radius of the curve (m).
The acceleration in the track plane can be reduced compared to horizontal

acceleration by arranging the track cant D. The angle between the horizontal plane
and the track plane is a function of the track cant and the distance 2b0 between the
two contact points of the wheel-set, as follows:
/t ¼ arctanðD=2b0 Þ ð2:11bÞ
The acceleration experienced by passengers can further be reduced compared

with the track plane acceleration by arranging the tilting angle of a coach /c.
Acceleration in the coach is called lateral acceleration ac, which can be determined
as follows:
ac ¼ ðv2 =RÞ sinð/t þ /c Þ g sinð/t þ /c Þ ð2:11cÞ

Acceleration in the perpendicular direction is called vertical acceleration av,
which can be determined as follows:
av ¼ ðv2 =RÞ sinð/t þ /c Þ g cosð/t þ /c Þ ð2:11dÞ

Reducing the lateral acceleration by increasing the track cant or tilt of a coach
correlates with a slightly increased vertical acceleration. Some typical values for
the lateral and vertical acceleration are ac = 0.98 m/s2 and av = 0.44 m/s2 for a
train operating at speeds of about: v = 200 km/h, along a track curve with a
radius: R = 1,000 m, track cant: D = 150 mm, and tilting angle: /c = 6.5.
Tilting technology/mechanism
As mentioned above, the tilting technologies/mechanisms are based on two prin-
ciples. The first is passive or natural tilting (in Japan), while the other is active
tilting (the rest of the world and Europe). Passive tilting uses natural laws with a tilt
center located well above the center of gravity of the car-body. On a curve, under
the influence of centrifugal force, the lower part of the car-body swings outwards.
Active tilting uses tilting mechanisms based on pneumatic systems, where air is
shifted from one side to the other of the air suspension. In addition, rollers and
pendulums as technological innovations carry the car-body load and provide
movement. Then, movement may be controlled by an actuator, which does not need
to carry the car-body load, thus resulting in much lower energy consumption.
Actively tilted trains need some kind of control system. Contemporary systems
include body feedback with an accelerometer placed in the car-body as a trans-
ducer. This can use different information sources. The obvious one is lateral
acceleration, but also the roll and yaw velocity can be used. Most tilting trains use
more than one source as the basis for their control. Consequently, they can be
differentiated in light of the type of tilting mechanism/technology they use as
follows: (i) trains tilting by inertial forces; (ii) trains with active tilting based on
sensory information provided by an accelerometer; (iii) trains with tilting con-
trolled by a computer; and (iv) the trains with tilting provided by active suspension
(http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Tilting_train).
Tilting by inertial forces
Some trains tilting by inertial forces include: Talgo (Spain), UAC TurboTrain (US,
Canada), and JNR 381 series (Japan). Talgo trains can achieve maximum speeds of
175–200 km/h, a tilting angle of 3–3.5, and DC traction, while Japanese trains
operate at maximum speeds of 120–160 km/h, a tilting angle of 5, and AC and
DC traction systems (DC—Direct Current; AC—Alternating Current).
Tilting actively by sensory information obtained from accelerometers

Some such trains include Light-Rapid Comfortable (LRC) trains built by Bom-
bardier (Canada, US). Depending on the version, these trains operate at maximum
speeds of 155–240 km/h, a tilting angle of 6–10, and AC and DC traction.
Tilting actively controlled by a computer
Currently, this is the most numerous category of high speed tilting trains. Some of
them are Acela Express (US), a Bombardier high-speed tilting train operating
between Boston and Washington D.C.; British Rail Class 390 ‘‘Pendolino’’ (UK),
a high-speed train run by Virgin Trains from London Euston to Liverpool/Man-
chester/Glasgow/Birmingham and Wolverhampton; Alfa Pendular (Portugal),
ElettroTreno (Italy), ICE-T, also called ICT Technologies)(Germany), a tilting
version of the German high-speed ICE; ICN (Switzerland), a new generation of
tilting trains operated by Swiss Rail, a Bombardier-built high-speed tilting train
operating between Zurich and Geneva; JetTrain (North America), Bombardier’s
experimental non-electric high-speed train; NSB Class 73 (Norway); SŽ series 310
(InterCitySlovenija), a high-speed tilting train operating among Ljubljana, Mari-
bor, and Koper; RegioSwinger (Germany and Croatia), a diesel regional tilting
train; Pendolino (Italy, Finland, the UK, and the Czech Republic), built by Alstom
(formerly Fiat); Virgin Train Super Voyager, a Bombardier-built high-speed tilting
train operating between London and Holyhead/Wrexham/Chester and Birmingham
to Edinburgh or Glasgow; Taroko Express (Taiwan), based on the JR Kyūshū 885
Series; Tilt Train by QR, diesel and electric tilting Traveltrains (Australia) oper-
ating between Brisbane and Cairns (the Electric Tilt Train is based on the JR
Shikoku 8000 series, X2 (Sweden), with tilting mechanism made by ABB; it is
also used in China under the name Xı̄nshísù); the JR Shikoku 2000 series (Japan
1989), the first tilting DMU in the world used on many limited express services in
Shikoku, including Ashizuri, Ishizuchi, Nanpū, Shimanto, Shiokaze, Uwakai, and
Uzushio (the upgraded N2000 Series was introduced from 1995), the JR Hokkaido
KiHa 281 series (Japan 1992), branded Heat 281 or Furico 281, and used for Super
Hokuto limited express service; the JR Shikoku 8000 series (Japan 1992) is used
for the limited express service on the Yosan Line, namely Ishizuchi and Shiokaze;
the JE Fast E351 series (Japan 1993) is used for Super Azusa; the Chizu Express
HOT7000 series (Japan 1994) is used for Super Hakuto; JR Central 383 series
(Japan 1994) is used for Wide View Shinano; JR Kyushu 883 series (Japan 1994)
is used for Sonic; the JR Hokkaido KiHa 283 series (Japan 1995), branded as
Furico 283 is used for the Super Hokuto, Super Ōzora, and Super Tokachi limited
express services. The JR West 283 series (Japan 1996) is used for Ocean Arrow;
the JR Kyushu 885 series (Japan 1999) is used for Kamome and Sonic; the JR
West KiHa 187 series (Japan 2001) is used for Super Inaba, Super Kunibiki, and
Super Oki (these trains operate at maximum speeds of 170–250 km/h, a tilting
angle of 8–10, and AC and DC traction systems).
Tilting by active suspension

Some of these trains are: the JR Hokkaido KiHa 201 series (Japan 1996) used for
rapid trains around Sapporo; the JR Hokkaido KiHa 261 series (Japan 1999),
branded Tilt 261, used for Super Sōya; the Meitetsu 1600 series (Japan 1999),
branded Panorama Super, mainly used for the Meitetsu Nishio Line; the Meitetsu
2000 series (Japan 2004), branded l-Sky, used to connect Nagoya and Chūbu
Centrair International Airport; the Odakyu 50000 series VSE (Japan 2005) used
for Romancecar; the N700 Series Shinkansen (except N700-7000/8000 series)
(Japan 2007) introduced by JR Central and JR West, used for the Tōkaidō and
Sanyō Shinkansen lines; the E5 Series Shinkansen (Japan 2011) introduced by JR
East, used for Tōhoku Shinkansen lines. These trains operate at maximum speeds
of 120–160 km/h and a tilting angle of 5.
Vehicles/trains
Most of high-speed tilting trains use electric energy from different voltage and
current systems; such flexibility represents an important component of their
interoperability. For example, in Europe, depending on the country, these are
1.5 kV and 3 kV DC, 15 kV/16.7 Hz AC and 25 kV 50 Hz AC systems. In the
U.S., newly built rail lines are equipped with the 25 kV 60 Hz system. In Europe,
one of the largest fleets (52 train sets) of high speed tilting trains is operated by
Virgin Trains along the West Coast Main Line in the UK. The technical specifi-
cations of these trains are summarized in Table 2.11.
Signaling system
High-speed tilting passenger trains operate using the cab signaling system, which
communicates the track status information to the driver’s cab. In general, the
system transmits information through the rails as electrical signals, which are
picked up by antennas placed under the train, then processed by computers and
displayed in the cab. The cab signaling system enables controlling the speed of
these trains while passing through the curves along a given line in order to
maintain it below or at most at the level of PS (Permissible Speed) or EPS
(Enhanced Permissible Speed). The latter is slightly under the speed at which these
trains can overturn. In general, the speed limits can be different for different types
of tilting trains passing though the same curve but usually only one is displayed in
order not to confuse the driver. In order to additionally prevent the confusion of
driver, the signs for tilting train speeds must be distinctive from those of con-
ventional trains. In addition, the total number of different speeds indicated at any
given location along the line(s) must not be greater than three—one for EPS and
two for conventional passenger and freight trains. Furthermore, changes in EPS on
a route must be signed implying application of the continuous route signing, the
positions of signs for any change in PS and EPS must be coincident, and signs for
EPS must not be positioned in isolation (i.e., where provided, they must always
Table 2.11 Technical/technological performances of a selected high-speed tilting train—tech-

nical specifications (Persson 2007)
Specification Systems
Type Pendolino, British Class 390
Owner Angel Trains (subsidiary of Babcock and Brown)
Operator/Franchise (until Virgin Trains
2011)
Operations area West coast route in UK
Number of units and Fifty two 9-car sets (468 cars) (one was lost in the accident in
configuration Grayrigg in 2007);
Delivered to use (year) Four new 11-car train sets added over the period 2010—2012;
31 older sets received with 2 new cars, with an option for the
21 remaining units.
Configuration Driving trailer ? 7 trailers ? driving trailer
1A0 A10 ? 1A0 A10 ? 20 20 ? 1A0 A10 ? 20 20 ? 1A0 A1 ? 20 20 ?
1A0 A1 ? 1A0 A1; After upgrade: driving trailer ? 9 trailers
? driving trailer
Length of the train (m) 217.4 (9-car set); 265 (11-car set)
Maximum weight (tons) 439
Capacity (seats/passengers) 439 (145 first class; 294 standard class)
Power (MW/hp) 5.1/6840(12 9 425 kW) (in Pendolino the power is distributed
Single current versions throughout the train set; regenerative braking system);
25 kV 50 Hz overhead
Maximum technical speed 230
(km/h)
have an accompanying sign for conventional trains). High-speed tilting passenger

trains are permitted to operate at EPS through curves only if the speed limit
information and speed supervision and control are provided by the above-men-
tioned cab signaling and automatic train protection system. The cab signaling
system continuously displays information on the speed limit, which is consistent
with EPS (where applicable), and the speed restrictions on the given line(s).
In addition to the signals along the track, the cab signaling system enables the
allowable speed and information about the tracks ahead to be displayed. Fur-
thermore, the automatic train protection system added on the top of the cab sig-
naling system warns the driver of dangerous conditions ahead including the
automatic activation of brakes able to decelerate and/or bring the train to a stop,
but exclusively in cases when the driver misjudges a dangerous condition.
The operational performances of high-speed tilting passenger trains include

interoperability, speed, turnaround time, required fleet, technical productivity, and
influence on the rail line capacity.
Interoperability
As mentioned above, the AEIF (European Association for Railway Interopera-
bility) also provides the TSI (Technical Specifications of Interoperability) for
Trans-European High-Speed Rail Infrastructure including guidance on the cant
and the cant deficiency for non-tilting vehicles (AEIF 2002). However, analogous
specifications and guidance for high-speed tilting passenger trains/vehicles have
been left to the owners/operators/managers of the corresponding infrastructure.
Under such circumstances, interoperability of high-speed tilting passenger trains
can be defined as their flexibility to:
• Operate along the above-mentioned (b), (c), and (d) category of railway lines at
operating speeds that are usually higher than the speeds of their conventional
counterparts; and
• Use different power (electricity) supply systems (1.5, 3, and/or 25 kV; kV—
kilovolt).
Both criteria have already been achieved thanks to tilting mechanism/tech-
nologies, multi-system locomotives (power units of the train sets), and particularly
in Europe, thanks to the forthcoming advanced train signaling and control system
developed as components of the ERTMS (European Rail Traffic Management
System) (EC 2010).
Speed
As applies to the other categories, the technical speed, operational speed, and
commercial speed of high-speed tilting trains can be distinguished.
Technical speed is defined as the maximum speed that a given high train can
achieve under given conditions (category of rail line and power supply system).
Usually, this speed is specified through the train design.
Operational speed is the maximum speed at which a given train commonly
operates on the given rail line. This speed is lower than or at most equal to the
technical speed.
Commercial speed is the travel speed of a given train along the given rail line
including acceleration, deceleration, intermediate stops, and other maneuvers
influencing the operating speed. This speed is lower than the operating speed. In
addition to the length of the line, it crucially influences the turnaround time of the
given train set(s).
Turnaround time
The turnaround time of a given train scheduled to operate along a given rail line is
defined as the total time the train spends between its stations, i.e., from the origin
to the destination station, and back. This time also includes the train’s stop time at
intermediate stations, which mainly depends on the pattern and volume of pas-
senger demand to be served in both directions. In addition, the turnaround time
includes the train’s acceleration and deceleration time to/from the operating/
cruising speed. Thus, the train line can be considered as a route consisting of
several segments. If the stops are the same in both directions, the turnaround time
of a given train can be estimated as follows:
" #
X
N X
K

ttr ¼ t0 þ 2 ti þ tk þ td ð2:12aÞ
i¼1 k¼1
where
to, td is the train’s stop time at the origin and destination station (terminus),
respectively (min);
ti is the train’s running time along the (i)-th segment of the given route (min);
tk is the train’s stopping time at the (k)-th intermediate station along the given
route (min);
N is the number of segments of the given route; and
K is the number of stations along the given route where the train stops
(K = N-1).
The train’s running time along the (i)-th segment of the route in Eq. 2.15a can
be estimated as follows:
ti ¼ vi =ai þ si =vi ð2:12bÞ
where
vi is the train’s operating/cruising speed along the (i)-th segment of the route
(km/h);
ai is the train’s acceleration/deceleration rate at the beginning and the end of the
(i)-th segment of the route (m/s2); and
si is the length of the (i)-th segment of the route (km).
In addition, the length of the route in one direction can be estimated as follows:
X
N
d¼ si ð2:12cÞ
i¼1
Furthermore, the commercial speed of the train along a given route based on
Eq. 2.15c can be estimated as follows:
vc ðdÞ ¼ d=ttr ð2:12dÞ
Fleet size
The fleet size of the high-speed tilting trains scheduled to operate on the route of
length d during the time period T can be determined, based on Eq. 2.12a, as
follows:
N½d; f ðT; dÞ ¼ f ðT; dÞ ttr ð2:13aÞ
where
f(T, d) is the frequency of train services along the route d during time T.
The frequency f(T, d) in Eq. 2.13a can be determined as follows:

f ðT; dÞ ¼ QðT; dÞ=½kðT; DÞ NðdÞ ð2:13bÞ
where
Q(T, d) is the passenger demand on the route of length d during the time interval
T (passengers);
k(T, d) is the average load factor of a given train service scheduled along the
route of length d during time T; and
N(d) is the seating capacity of a given train operating along the route d
(seats).
The other symbols are analogous to those in the previous equations.

The technical productivity of a high speed tilting train can be determined as the
product of its seating capacity and its technical, operational, and/or commercial
speed. In particular, the latter depends on the route length d. Thus it follows:
TP½vðdÞ; NðdÞ ¼ vðdÞ CðdÞ ð2:14aÞ
In addition, the technical productivity of a given route operated by high-speed
tilting trains can be estimated as the product of the total number of seats supplied
during a given period of time and the average speed of train services as follows:
TP½f ðT; d Þ; vðd Þ; N ðd Þ ¼ f ðT; dÞ vðd Þ CðdÞ ð2:14bÞ
Obviously, the service frequency f(T) in Eq. 2.14b is an integer as a reciprocal
of the time interval(s) between scheduling the train services. Depending on the
pattern of passenger demand, these intervals can typically be 1 h (h(d) = 1 h), half
an hour (h(d) = 1/2 h), etc. during the day. Consequently, the technical produc-
tivity of the train services along a given line of length d can be expressed as the
volume of passenger-km produced during the period T under given conditions.
Effects on the rail line capacity
High sped tilting trains can contribute to increasing the utilization of the available
capacity of a given train line. This happens when they replace their conventional
counterparts. Let’s assume that high-speed tilting and conventional trains are
scheduled exclusively along the given line of length d at constant intervals ht and
hc, respectively, during the time T. In such case, the following conditions need to
be satisfied:
ðnt 1Þht þ ttr=t ¼ T ð2:15aÞ
Fig. 2.13 Time-space

diagram of possible replacing
conventional with high-speed
tilting trains on a given (rail)
line
Distance ht Time
ht
High Speed Tilting Train(s)

Conventional train(s)
ðnc 1Þhc þ ttr=c ¼ T ð2:15bÞ

where
nt, nc is the number of high-speed tilting and conventional trains, respectively,
scheduled on the line during the time period T.
The other symbols are as in the previous equations. From Eqs. 2.15a, b, the
number of additional high-speed tilting trains as compared to the number of
conventional trains that can be scheduled on the line d under given conditions can

nt ¼ ðnc 1Þ ðht =hc Þ þ ttr=c ttr=t þ 1 ð2:15cÞ
where all symbols are as in the previous equations. A simplified scheme of the
time-distance diagram is shown in Fig. 2.13.
Let the length of the line be d = 500 km. Both categories of trains are
exclusively scheduled along the line with nine intermediate stops, each taking
about 2 min. The stop time at the origin and destination station takes about
20 min. The average operating speed of a high-speed tilting train is about 190 km/
h and that of a conventional train about 100 km/h. From Eq. 2.15a, the turnaround
time of both categories of trains is estimated to be tt r/t = 5.3 h and ttr/c = 10 h.
Both categories of trains are scheduled along the line in constant intervals of
ht = hc = 1 h. From Eqs. 2.15a, b, the number of high-speed tilting trains that can
be scheduled along the line is determined as: nt = nc ? 5. In addition, inclusion of
the seat capacity of both categories of trains can indicate the real extent of the
contribution of high-speed tilting trains to increasing utilization of the capacity of
a given rail line. However, we should always be aware that scheduling of any of
these trains is based on the characteristics of demand along a given line, i.e., its
volume(s) and time pattern(s).
The economic performances of high-speed tilting passenger trains mainly imply

their operational costs. In general, after the infrastructure has been upgraded
according to the above-mentioned standards, these costs consist of two compo-
nents: infrastructure operational costs related to its exploitation and maintenance,
and train operational costs, i.e., the costs of provision of transport services using
the infrastructure. In many, particularly European countries, the operation and
maintenance of rail infrastructure are managed by agencies/companies indepen-
dent of those providing services. Consequently, many rail service providers/
operators can access and use the same infrastructure, thus competing with each
other. Under such circumstances, they are charged for using the infrastructure at
rates that at least enable the given infrastructure managing company to cover the
maintenance costs.
Infrastructure maintenance and operating costs
Infrastructure maintenance and operating costs generally include the costs of the
labor, energy and other material consumed for day-to-day maintenance and
operations of the rail lines/tracks, terminals, stations, energy supplying and sig-
naling systems, as well as the traffic management and safety systems. These costs
consist of fixed and variable parts. The former depends on the volumes of oper-
ations routinely performed in accordance to technical and safety standards, while
the latter depends on the intensity of traffic on the given line generating the need
for different kinds of interventions. Some figures provided by UIC indicate that the
labor shares the largest part of the total infrastructure maintenance costs as fol-
lows: 55 % for maintenance of electric traction installations, 45 % for mainte-
nance of tracks, and 50 % for maintenance of equipment. For example, the average
cost of maintaining new and upgraded high speed rail lines in Europe ranges from
28 to 33 thousand euros (2000) per kilometer of a single track (De Rus 2009).
Train operating costs
The operating costs of high-speed tilting passenger trains can be divided into four
main categories: (i) shunting and train operations (mainly, labor costs); (ii)
maintenance of the trains/rolling stock and other equipment; (iii) energy; and (iv)
sales and administration. The latter vary across different rail operators depending
on the expected level of traffic, since they mainly include labor costs related to
ticket sales and providing information at the stations/stops. The other three
components vary widely depending on the technology/type of the high-speed
tilting train, and the local operating and economic conditions. For example, the
average operating costs of the ETR480 high-speed tilting train operating in Italy
since 1997 is about: c = 0.1756 €/seat-km (This does not include the costs of
acquiring the train and the costs of energy consumption). The former cost appears
to be rather negligible after it is spread over the annual volume of kilometers
travelled (about 150–200 thousands/train) and the train’s amortization period of
about 30–40 years. The latter cost mainly depends on the above-mentioned factors
influencing the energy consumption and the prices of electricity. The latter are
often conditioned by local agreements between the suppliers and consumers (rail
operator) (the ETR480 train set has a length of 296.6 m, weight of 400 tons, power
6 MW (8,000 Hp), maximum technical speed of 250 km/h, and 480 seats). In
addition, the average operating costs of the ICE-T high-speed tilting train that
began services in Germany in 1999 amount to about: c = 0.1346 €/seat-km, again
excluding the costs of acquiring the train set and the costs of energy consumption
(De Rus 2009) (Depending on the configuration (5 or 7 cars), the train’s length is
133–185 m, its weight 270–368 tons, its engine power 3–4 MW, and seat capacity
of 250–357 seats (RTR 2005)).
The environmental performances of high-speed tilting passenger trains include

energy consumption and related emissions of greenhouse gases, and land use/take.
Energy consumption
High-speed tilting passenger trains consume electricity, which, in general, can be
generated by electricity power plants using different primary sources. The pro-
portion of particular sources is always region- and country-specific. For example,
at present, in the EU27 (European Union) countries, these proportions are as
follows: coal/lignite 28.4 %, oil 4.2 %, gas 21.0 %, nuclear 30.2 %, renewable
14.0 %, and others 2.2 % (EEA 2007; Kemp 2007).
Different factors influence the energy consumption of high-speed tilting trains.
The most important are design and size of the train influencing the air and tolling
resistance, the operating speed, the number of stops, and regenerative braking.
Train/vehicle design
The energy consumption of a given high-speed tilting train is directly proportional
to its size. This implies that in order to lower this consumption per train seat (and/
or passenger), the size of the train needs to be reduced. However, instead, par-
ticular design parameters could be adjusted during designing a new train set. The
options are as follows: car body width (e.g., 5 instead of 3–4 seats per row) and bi-
level cars (up to 50 % more seats per meter of the train); the mass per unit of the
train length has been reduced up to about 2 tons/meter, etc. For example, the
average weight across almost all existing high speed tilting trains is just above
2 tons/m. The Class 390 Pendolino is about 6 % below this average and about
30 % above the best in the class—the Shinkansen 700 high-speed tilting train
(Henri et al. 1991).
Air and rolling resistance
The air resistance of high-speed tilting trains can be estimated as follows:
FD ¼ ð1=2Þ q v2 A Cd ð2:16aÞ
where
q is air density (kg/m3);
V is operating speed (m/s);
A is reference area (m2); and
Cd is drag coefficient.
This implies that a lower reference area at a given speed will enable lower
energy consumption. However, the intention is to reduce this consumption per
seat-km or passenger-km, which requires just the opposite, namely widening the
train’s reference area. The compromise is found in the above-mentioned design of
high speed tilting trains in combination with reducing the drag coefficient from
about 1.8–2.0 (ordinary trains) to 0.11 (Shinkansen 300).
Rolling resistance represents the resultant force that must be overcome by the
tractive power of the locomotive to move a given train set at a constant speed
along a level tangent track in still air. This force includes air resistance, train
dynamic forces, bearing resistance, and rolling friction between the wheels and the
track. Consequently, it appears obvious that, in order to overcome a larger
resultant force, a larger quantity of energy needs to be consumed by high-speed
tilting train(s).
Operating speed
The operating speed influences the energy consumption of a high speed tilting train
through the energy required for acceleration and increased air resistance. In
general, kinetic energy and aerodynamic resistance represent the largest part of a
train’s energy consumption. For example, for the selected single-deck European
high-speed tilting trains, the specific energy consumption depending on the
operating speed is estimated as follows:

EðvÞ ¼ 0:00018v; R2 ¼ 0:787; N ¼ 11 ð2:16bÞ
where
E(v) is the energy consumption (kWh/seat-km); and
V is the train operating speed (km/h).
In general, a substantial amount of energy is consumed when trains decelerate

before passing through the curve segments of the line(s). However, in addition to
the tilting mechanisms, the above-mentioned track cants contribute to reducing the
need for substantial deceleration in the curves. Thus, the energy consumption of
high-speed tilting trains remains dependent mainly on (higher) operating speed(s).
The number of stops
Stops along the route prolong the journey duration of high-speed tilting trains.
Additional energy is consumed during each stop due to the train’s acceleration
after the stop.
Regenerative braking
High sped tilting trains are equipped with technology to convert parts of the kinetic
energy back into electric energy during the deceleration and braking phase of the
trip. The portion of energy that can be regained mainly depends on the braking rate
and the grid. The most recent capacitor technology (ultra-caps) enables storing this
energy for subsequent use, providing faster acceleration after stopping. For
example, some measurements of Pendolino 390 trains operating on the West Coast
Main Line (UK) have indicated that the returned energy over the period of 24 h
amounts to 16–18 % of the total energy taken from the grid. This total energy
includes all the electricity drawn from the overhead grid including that during train
preparation and stops at intermediate stations.
Examples
An example for the energy consumption of high speed tilting trains is the above-
mentioned Pendolino 390 (Table 2.11). Measurements have shown that, under
different operating conditions along the West Coast Main Line (the UK), the
average energy consumption has been E = 0.040 kWh/seat-km for a 9-car train
set and E = 0.035 kWh/seat-km for a 11-car train set, both operated at the
maximum speed of v = 220 km/h (The average for Pendolino trains operating in
Europe is E = 0.033 kWh/p-km). Another example is the Swedish X2000 high-
speed tilting passenger train in a 5-car configuration with 270 seats and weighting
340 tons, which consumes E = 0.042 kWh/seat-km. Its 6-car version, with a
capacity of 310 seats and weighing 366 tons, consumes on average
E = 0.0377 kWh/seat-km. Both trains operate at the speed of 200 km/h (Persson
2007).
Emissions of GHG
Emissions of GHG (Greenhouse Gases) depend on the energy consumption and
emissions from the primary sources used to produce the electricity in question. As
already mentioned, the composition of these primary sources is region/country-
specific. In general, the energy consumption E(v) and emissions of GHG Ee(v) of
the high sped tilting trains are interrelated as follows:
Ee ðvÞ ¼ eem EðvÞ ð2:17Þ
where
eem is the emission rate from producing the electricity in a given region
(country) (kgCO2e/kWh).
For example, if the emission rate of GHG is eem = 0.455 kgCO2e/kWh (UK),
the emissions of GHG by a Pendolino 390 train operating at the speed of:
v = 200 km/h, will be, based on Eqs. 2.16b and 2.17, equal to Eem
(v) = 0.455 9 0.036 = 0.0164 kgCO2e/seat-km. By multiplying this amount with
the number of seats per train and the running distance, the total emissions of GHG
by a given train service can be obtained. Similar estimates of the energy
consumption and related emissions of GHG by high-speed tilting trains operating

in the other regions (countries) can be made.
Land use
High-speed tilting passenger trains can be considered as ‘‘neutral’’ in terms of
using additional land for building new and/or upgrading existing infrastructure.
This is mainly due to them operating on upgraded existing/conventional lines. In
some cases, the upgrading can require additional land, but usually on a negligible
scale as compared to when completely new rail lines are built.
2.3.2.7 Social/Policy Performances
The social/policy performances of high-speed tilting passenger trains relate to their

noise, congestion, and traffic incidents/accidents (safety).
Noise
Noise from high-speed tilting trains is an important and sensitive issue, as the rail
lines often pass close to or even through densely populated areas, as well as
through areas where the ambient noise used to be very low. Recently, this noise
was considered as a parameter of the trains’ ‘‘interoperability’’ causing their speed
to be limited in the TSI (Technical Specification for Interoperability) regulative
document. The aim is to limit noise by all passing trains in Europe (EC 2002).
The main source of noise of high-speed tilting trains is rolling noise and
aerodynamic noise. At a given speed, the former depends on the quality of wheels,
and the number of axis. The latter is manly dependent on the train’s aerodynamic
characteristics. The train noise is usually expressed in dB(A), i.e., equivalent
sound pressure levels—LAeq,tp.
The lateral distance and height of the point of measurement and the source(s) of
noise, i.e., passing train(s), is standardized to 25 and 3 m, respectively. Mea-
surements throughout Europe indicate that the noise by passing conventional,
high-speed tilting, and high-speed trains increases in line with their speed
according to the ‘‘30 log (v)’’ regression rule, with dominating rolling noise, as
follows (Poisson et al. 2008)
LAeq;tp ðvÞ ¼ 30:465 logðv=v0 Þ þ 19:909; ðR2 ¼ 0:935; N ¼ 25Þ ð2:18aÞ

where
v is the train operating speed (km/h); and
v0 is the reference train speed (v0 = 1)
The index (tp) in Eq. 2.18a denotes a train passing by the noise measurement
location. As mentioned above, the value of 30 is commonly used in the regression
equation for predicting the rolling noise of conventional trains. This confirms the
fact that the contribution of the rolling noise, which is the main noise source of
conventional trains, remains the same (dominating) source of noise of high-speed

tilting trains, both comfortably complying with the TSI limits.
Some measurements have indicated that the ETR480 and ETR500 tilting trains
generate noise of 90.5 and 88.0 dB(A) while passing at speeds of 250 km/h. This
is well below the TSI limits of 92 and 94 dB(A) at speeds of 300 and 320 km/h,
respectively (EC 2002; Poisson et al. 2008).
It should be mentioned that the noise from passing high-speed tilting trains
experienced by the local population is always lower than that predicted by the
above-mentioned regression equation. This is due to noise protecting barriers
(walls) near noise sensitive areas as well as the distances of these areas from the
rail line(s), which are usually greater than 25 m.
Congestion
High-speed tilting passenger trains do not cause congestion along the lines they
exclusively operate. However, on lines with mixed traffic, they can cause con-
gestion and delays of the lower prioritized conventional passenger and freight
trains. Furthermore, if these trains cause a road to rail modal shift, they can
contribute to mitigating local road congestion. For example, a single tilting train
with a seat capacity of 440 seats and load factor of 0.5 can replace about 110
passenger cars occupied on average by two persons.
Safety
Safe operations of high-speed tilting passenger trains is provided through their
scheduling and by respecting their operational constraints, particularly those
concerning the maximum allowable speed along particular segments of the line(s)
(along curves). Scheduling, in addition to satisfying passenger demand and the
operators’ perspective, also inherently implies specifying the minimum distance
between any two trains moving in the same direction. This is the distance at which
the running trains must stay apart in any case in order to prevent back collisions in
cases of immediate and/or unpredictable braking. This safe distance mainly
depends on the breaking characteristics of the trains and their operating speed as
follows:
dmin ¼ v2max =2b þ vmax =D ð2:18bÞ

where
vmax is the maximum operating speed (m/s);
b is the maximum deceleration rate (m/s2); and
D is the minimum time between activating and staring braking.
For example, for a high-speed tilting train operating at the speed of

vmax = 200 km/h, with a deceleration rate b = 0.65 m/s2, and the braking system
reaction time D = 5 s, the minimum breaking distance will be dmin = 2,652 m.
Respecting the maximum allowable speed(s) along the curves and other parts of
the rail line(s) prevents derailments of the high-speed tilting trains and related
damaging (incidental/accidental) events. However, except reports and descriptions

of individual accidents/incidents, additional aggregate statistical figures on these
events and their consequences are currently unavailable. Therefore, at this
moment, judgment about the overall safety of these trains can only be made
indirectly by considering the aggregate statistics for the passenger railways in the
given region. For example, the number of fatalities and injuries in passenger traffic
in EU27 Member States has been continuously decreasing over time (the
1997–2008 period) and reached about 3.5 fatalities per billion passenger-km in the
year 2009, of which only 1 % was caused by derailments including those of high-
speed tilting passenger trains (EC 2009). This suggests that high-speed tilting
passenger trains in Europe have been overall very safe.
2.3.3 Evaluation
High-speed tilting passenger trains possess both advantages (Strengths and

Opportunities) and disadvantages (Weaknesses and Threats).
Advantages
• Operating as the exclusive HS (High Speed) rail alternative in some regions/
countries;
• Operating as an intermediate phase from conventional to the full HS trains;
• Decreasing investments and maintenance costs for building rail infrastructure as
compared to that of full HS rails;
• Increasing utilization of the capacity of given rail lines;
• Enabling higher commercial speeds and thus shortening passenger journey time,
which in combination with improved riding comfort makes traveling by rail
more attractive for existing and prospective users/passengers;
• Stimulating internal and external modal shift; the former from conventional rail
services and the latter mainly from individual passenger cars; and
• Mitigating the environmental and social impacts as compared to those of con-
ventional trains after modal shift occurs.
Disadvantages
• Affecting interoperability at border crossings due to the diversity of standards
related to the geometry of infrastructure/tracks and train sets, which are mostly
country/manufacturer/rail line specific; and
• Exposing users/passengers to the inherent risk of motion sickness during tilting
at high speeds through the curves.
Finally, can high-speed tilting passenger trains be considered as an advanced
transport system? The answer is ‘‘yes,’’ particularly as compared to their con-
ventional passenger train counterparts.
2.4 Advanced Subsonic Commercial Aircraft
1935 The first flight of the piston engine-powered Douglas DC3 aircraft is carried out (U.S.)
1951 The first commercial jet engine-powered aircraft (Comet I) is launched (UK)
1957 The first flight of the first commercially successful jet engine-powered Boeing B707
aircraft is carried out (U.S.)
1969 The first commercial wide-body Boeing B747 aircraft is launched (U.S.)
2012 The Boeing B787-8 aircraft begins commercial operation
The main priorities in aircraft design over the past 30 years for both manufacturers
and operators—airlines have been improving safety while reducing operating
costs. The latter indicates that technology has also been strongly driven by com-
mercial/market driving forces. But, what about the future? Most research to date
states that the same priorities will continue in the medium- to long-term future, i.e.,
for about 10 to 30 years ahead, without significant and revolutionary changes in
technology. This implies that changes will be mostly evolutionary with the
advancements likely following the current lines of development:
• In the aerodynamic design, reducing drag by about 10 % as compared to the
design(s) in the 2001;
• In the operating empty weight, reduction by about 15 % thanks to the increased
use of composite materials in aircraft construction (airframe, engines, and the
other systems); and
• In propulsion, increasing the overall efficiency by about 8 % through improved
thermal efficiency—by increasing the overall pressure ratio and turbine inlet
temperature on the one hand, and improving combustion technology on the
other; this should result in reducing fuel consumption by about 30 % and the
related emissions of NOx (Nitrogen Oxides) by about 8 % (ICAO CAEP/6 NOX
limits) and further by 11–19 % (the proposed EPA Tier 8 NOX limits depending
on the engine pressure ratio) as compared to aircraft/engine technologies in
2001 (EPA 2011).
Consequently, aircraft manufacturers have undertaken to design commercial
aircraft that will be able to reach the above-mentioned targets. In particular, the
U.S. aircraft manufacturer Boeing, using the technology previously developed for
the Sonic Cruiser aircraft, announced at the end of January 2003 design of the
conventional configuration, the B7E7 aircraft, which later became the B787-8.
Furthermore, in July 2006, the European aircraft manufacturer Airbus began
development of the advanced A350 XWB (Xtra Wide Body) aircraft family as a
direct competitor to the above-mentioned Boeing B787-8 and existing B777 air-
craft family. Commercial flights of these aircraft with a seating capacity of
2.4 Advanced Subsonic Commercial Aircraft 63
270–350 passengers (depending on the version: A350-800, -900, -1000) are

expected to begin in 2014. Because the B787-8 aircraft is already in commercial
service, it is elaborated in more detail. The A350XWB aircraft is still under
development and therefore it is only mentioned for comparison where reasonable.
2.4.2.1 Background
The main idea behind the design of B787 aircraft was to emphasize the conve-
nience of smaller mid-size twin-jet compared to the large Airbus A380- and
Boeing B747-400/8 aircraft, which could also drive a stronger shift from hub-and-
spoke to point-to-point airline air route networks. After being postponed several
times, the B787-8 aircraft began commercial operations in October 2012 (Boeing
2012).
The B787-8 aircraft is characterized by its infrastructural, technical/techno-
logical, operational, economic, environmental, social, and policy performances.
The infrastructural performances of B787-8 aircraft relate to its airport operations.

Some of indicators and measures of these performances are given in Table 2.12.
As mentioned above, those for the A350-800 aircraft are given for comparative
purposes.
As far as airport operations are concerned, the Boeing 787-8 is categorized as a
medium-sized twin-engine long-range aircraft. Respecting the wing span, the
aircraft belongs to the E group according to the ICAO (International Civil Aviation
Organization) and the V group according to the US FAA (Federal Aviation
Administration) classification. Respecting the overall length, the aircraft belongs
to the ICAO’s RFF category 8 and FAA’s ARFF Index D (Boeing 2012a). In
addition, with its final approach speed of about 140 kts (kts-knots), the B787-8
belongs to the FAA category IV. The A350-800 aircraft is categorized similarly
(Airbus 2012; Boeing 2012a; Horonjeff and Mckelvey 1994).
Since the B787-8 aircraft is designed to perform nonstop flights of and longer
than 9,000 nm (nm—nautical mile: 1 nm = 1.852 km), the take-off runway need
to be no shorter than 3,400 m (11,000 ft) (ft—feet: 1 ft = 0.305 m).
Regarding airport maneuverability, the B787-8 is more advanced than its
closest counterparts, for example, the B767-300ER aircraft. Namely, the geometry
of maneuvering an aircraft at the airport is characterized by its turning radii, which
are a function of the nose steering angle. In principle, the larger the steering angle,
the smaller the radii, and consequently the greater the maneuverability. From the
standpoint of maneuvering close to buildings and other aircraft, the largest turning
Table 2.12 Infrastructural performances of the B787-8 and A350-800 aircraft—airport opera-
tions (Boeing 2012, Airbus 2012)
Specification Aircraft type
B787-8 A350-800d
Length (m) 56.7 60.6
Wingspan (m) 60.1 64.0
Wing area (m2) 325 443
Wing sweepback () 32.2 31.9
Height (m) 16.9 17.0
Fuselage constant diameter (m) 5.75 5.32
Maximum Take-Off Weight (MTOW) (t) 219.5 248
Maximum Landing Weight (MLW) (t) 168 193
Maximum payload (t) 44.5 35.7
Take-off field length (m)a 3,100 751
Landing field length (m)b 1,600–1,800 1,525
Maximum pavement width (m) 42 –
Effective steering angle () 65 –
Aircraft Classification Number (ACN)c 57–101 65–105
(flexible pavement) (flexible pavement)
57–91 59–93
(rigid pavement) (rigid pavement)
a
MTOW Maximum Take-off Weight, Sea level pressure altitude, standard day þ15 C tem-
perature, dry runway; b MLW Maximum Landing Weight, sea level pressure altitude, dry runway;
m meter; t ton; c ACN is the ratio between the pavement thickness required for a given aircraft
and that required for the standard aircraft single wheel load; d Preliminary data
radius is the most critical (Horonjeff and McKelvey 1994). The minimum turning
radius corresponds to the maximum nose steering angle, which is, for example, 65
for the B787-8 aircraft. This enables it to turn on a path (runway, taxiway, apron)
42 m wide, which is about 2 m narrower than that of the B767-300ER aircraft with
the maximum steering angle of 61 (44 m). Consequently, the radius of the
taxiway centerline for B787-8 is 32.9 m as compared to that of B767-300ER of
33.8 m (AT 20).
In addition, the size of parking stands at the apron gate complex depends
mainly on the aircraft’s overall size, the required buffer space between the aircraft
and the permanent fixtures (buildings), temporarily static objects (other aircraft
and traffic at the airport), and the type of parking scheme (nose-in, parallel, angled)
(Horonjeff and McKelvey 1994). Respecting its dimensions in Table 2.12, the size
of parking stand of a nose in parked B787-8 aircraft is approximately 5,385 m2
(this includes the aircraft footprint and a buffer space of 7.5 m around it). For
comparison, the size of the parking stand of nose in a parked B767-300ER aircraft
is approximately 4,376 m2, which is about 23 % lower than that of the B787-8
aircraft whose scheme of airport/ground servicing is shown in Fig. 2.14.
Fig. 2.14 Scheme of ground servicing of the B787-8 aircraft—regular conditions when APU
Auxiliary Power Unit is used (Boeing 2012a)
A can be seen, the facilities and equipment for the airport/ground servicing of
B787-8 are similar to those of B777 aircraft. The maximum turnaround time of the
aircraft at the apron gate stand is specified to be 41 min and the through time
28 min (Boeing 2012a).
The technical/technological performances of B787-8 aircraft relate to its aerody-

namic design and materials used for its construction, engines, and aircraft systems.
Aerodynamics and materials
Aerodynamic
The aerodynamic design of the Boeing 787-8 aircraft is ‘‘advanced’’ due to the
following reasons:
Fig. 2.15 Share of composite materials in the commercial aircraft over time (GAO 2011)
• Optimal combination of the aircraft weight, drag, and engine performance;

• Advanced transonic wing design for improved speed and lift (raked wingtips
optimal for long-haul flights);
• High performance, but mechanically simplified high lift system of high reli-
ability and reduced maintenance costs;
• Tightly integrated packaging of systems to reduce the size of aerodynamic
fairings for reduced weight and drag; and
• Final nose configuration (four windows, fewer posts, pilot vision similar as in a
B777 aircraft, non-opening windows, crew escape door, vertically stowed
wipers, etc.).
Materials
The structures of commercial aircraft have been continuously upgraded with an
increased use of composite materials as shown in Fig. 2.15.
As can be seen, the share of composites in the total weight is the greatest in the
latest B787 aircraft. In addition, Table 2.13 shows shares of different materials in
the weight of Boing 787-8 and its current and forthcoming counterparts.
The share of composite materials in the B787-8 is the second greatest—after
that of the forthcoming A350-800 aircraft. In terms of volume, composite mate-
rials account for about 80 % of the B787/8 aircraft total. One of the main reasons
to use substantial amounts of these materials is to reduce the aircraft weight while
retaining the required strength of the construction. In turn, this improves the
aircraft efficiency primarily in terms of reduced fuel consumption and simpler
maintenance, thus reducing both corresponding costs. Specifically, in the B787-8
aircraft, composites (carbon laminate, carbon sandwich, and fiberglass) are mainly
Table 2.13 Share of particular materials in the weight of selected aircraft (%) (Boeing 2012;
Airbus 2012)
Material Aircraft type
B777 A330-200 B787-8 A350-800c
a
Composites 11 10 50 53
Steel 11 19 10 10
Titanium 7 8 15 14
Aluminum/Al-Lib 70 58 20 19
Others 1 2 5 8
a b
Carbon laminate, Carbon sandwich, fiberglass (Fiberglass = Carbon fiber); Alloys of Alu-
minum and Lithium: c Preliminary data
used for the largest part of the fuselage, wings, horizontal, and vertical part of the
tail. Aluminum is used on the wing and tail leading edges. Titanium is used mainly
on the engines and fasteners, while steel is used in various places.
In order to illustrate the possible effects of substituting different materials in
aircraft construction, let pi be the current share of the material (i) with a specific
gravity of gi (g/cm3) to be partially substituted by material (j) with the current
share pj and a specific gravity of gj (g/cm3). The proportion of material (i) to be
substituted by material (j) is assumed to be qji. Consequently, the relative change
of aircraft weight due to changing the shares of these two materials on account of
each other can be estimated as follows:
ffi
Dwji ¼ 1 pi qji gi þ pj þ qji gj pi gi þ pj gj ð2:19aÞ
The value Dwji in Eq. 2.19a can take positive and negative values. The former
implies a decrease and the latter an increase in the aircraft weight in relative terms
by the given substitution of materials. For example, if the current share of composite
materials of pj = 50 % with a specific gravity of gj = 2.1 g/cm3 was further
increased in the construction of B787 by about qji = 5 % on the account of alu-
minum with a current share of pi = 20 % and a specific gravity of gi = 2.7 g/cm3,
the aircraft weight would be reduced by about 4.5 %. If steel (specific gravity
gi = 7.83 g/cm3), with a current share of 10 % was reduced by about 5 % on
account of composites whose share was increased to 55 %, the aircraft weight
would be further reduced by about 16 %.
Engines
General
The most important performances of contemporary turbofan jet engines are thrust,
fuel efficiency, and SFC (Specific Fuel Consumption).
• Thrust (T) is generally derived from the change in momentum of the air through
the engine and the thrust that occurs due to the static pressure ratio across the final
(exhaust) nozzle. Analytically, it can be expressed as (Jenkinson et al. 1999):
T ¼ mðv1 v0 Þ=g þ ðp p0 Þ=A ð2:19bÞ

where
m is the air flow through the engine (kg/s);
v1 is the velocity of exhaust jet (m/s);
v0 is the velocity of air entering the engine (m/s);
g is gravitational acceleration (m/s2);
p, p0 is the pressure at the intake and the exhaust station, respectively, (N/m); and
A is the nozzle cross sectional area (m2).
The thrust T in Eq. 2.19b is usually expressed in kN (kiloNewton) (SI units) or

Libras (lb) (British units).
• Efficiency (ge) directly expresses the rationale of the engine fuel consumption,
i.e, higher efficiency implies lower fuel consumption per unit of the engine
thrust, and vice versa.
• SFC (Specific Fuel Consumption) expresses the ratio of fuel burned per hour per
ton of net thrust (Janic 2007). It is expressed in kg of fuel per kg of thrust/h. The
SPC and engine efficiency ge are interrelated as follows:
SFC ¼ M=4 ge ð2:19cÞ

where
M is the Mach number.
Engines with higher bypass ratios usually have lower SPC. For most contem-
porary aircraft turbofan jet engines, this amounts about 0.25–0.30 kg of fuel/kg of
thrust/h. In addition, SFC relates to the jet engine bypass ratio (BR). The nature of
this relationship is illustrated using the data for the cruising phase of the flight of
20 different engines produced by different airspace manufacturers. The regression
relationship in which the bypass ratio BR is considered as the independent and
SFC as the dependent variable is as follows (Janic 2007):
SFC ¼ 0:3435BR0:1624 ; ðR2 ¼ 0:425; N ¼ 20Þ ð2:19dÞ

The B787-8 aircraft is powered either by RR (Rolls Royce) TRENT 1000 or by
General Electric GEnx1B engines.
RR (Rolls Royce) TRENT 1000 engine
The RR (Rolls Royce) TRENT 1000 engine is considered an advanced turbofan jet
engine as compared to its counterparts due to the following features: no-engine-
bleed systems, higher bypass ratio and higher pressure ratio compressor, high-flow
slower-speed fan, advanced materials and coatings, architecture, low-noise
nacelles with chevrons, and interchangeability at wing/pylon interface. Table 2.14
gives some important performances of the RR TRENT 1000 engine.
Table 2.14 Characteristics of the RR (Rolls-Royce) Trent 1000 aircraft engine (RR 2011)
Parameter Value
Type Three-shaft high bypass ratio
turbofan engine
Dimension/weight
Length (m) 4.769
Fan diameter (m) 2.85
Dry weight (tons 6.018
Performances
Maximum thrust (kN) 307–330
OPR (Overall Pressure Ratio) 33
SFC (Specific Fuel Consumption)a (kg-fuel/kg-thrust/h) 0.224
BR (Bypass Ratio) 10.0–11.0
Thrust-to-weight ratio (kN/ton) 51.01–54.84
a
Based on the performance of the RR Trent 800 engine (reduction for about 15 %); t ton
The no-engine-bleed systems of the RR Trent 1000 engine and its tiled engine
combustor suit the need for more electricity in Boeing 787-8 s, and thus enable
reduction in the overall aircraft weight, and consequently fuel consumption. In
addition, the RR Trent 1000 engine has a bypass ratio of about 10.0–11.0, which
gives an average efficiency rate of about ge = 0.908 during the cruising phase of
flight at the speed of: M = 0.85. For example, for the BR (Bypass Ratio) = 11, the
SFC (Specific Fuel Consumption) will be SPC = 0. 224 kg-fuel/kg-thrust/h
(cruise).
Aircraft systems
The systems of the B787-8 aircraft include: (i) Efficiency Systems; (ii) Highly
Integrated Avionics, and (iii) e-Enabled Airplane Systems (Nelson 2005; Boeing
2012a).
Efficiency Systems
Efficiency systems aim at generating, distributing, and consuming energy effi-
ciently and effectively. They include the following subcomponents: Advanced
Energy Management (The More Electric Aircraft), and Flight Controls (Variable
Camber Trailing Edge and Drooped Spoilers).
Highly Integrated Avionics
Highly integrated avionics systems enable the efficient and effective navigation
during flight. They include the following subcomponents: Common Core Systems
open architecture, Integrated Flight Controls Electronics, Integrated Communi-
cation/Navigation/Surveillance equipment, and Integrated Aircraft Systems
Control.
Table 2.15 Operational performances of the B787-8/9 and A350-800 aircraft (Airbus 2012;
Boeing 2012a)
Indicator/measure Aircraft type
787-8 787-9 A350-800a
Cockpit crew Two Two
Seating capacity (seats) 242 (3-class) 250–290 (3-class)
264 (2-class) 280 (2-class)
MTOW (tons) 219.5 251 248
MLW (tons) 168 193 190
MZFW (tons) 156 181 181
OEW (tons) 110 115 105
Cruising speed (Mach/kts) 0.85/490 at 3,5000 ft/10.700 m 0.85/490
40,000/12,190
Maximum speed (Mach/kts) 0.89/515 knots at 35,000 ft/10,700 m) 0.89/515
40,000/12,190
Service ceiling (ft/m) 43,000 /13,100 –
Range, fully loaded (nm/km) 5,550/10,280 6,500/12,036 5,000/9,375
Maximum fuel capacity (000 l) 126 139 129
Engines (92) RR Trent 1000 RR Trent 1000 Trent XWB
Type
Thrust (kN) 2 9 307-330 2 9 330 2 9 351
MTOW Maximum Take of Weight; MLW Maximum Landing Weight; MZFW Maximum Zero
Fuel Weight; OEW Operating Empty Weight; l liter; ft foot; kts knots; kN Kilo Newton; RR Rolls
Royce
a
Preliminary data
e-Enabled Airplane Systems

e-enabled aircraft systems provide the flight crew with wireless communication
both inside and outside the aircraft. They include broadband connectivity within
the aircraft and with the ground (Flight Deck, Crew Information System, Onboard
Health Maintenance, and Cabin systems).
The main operational performances of the B787-8 aircraft include its payload-
range characteristics and technical productivity. They are influenced by the aircraft
relevant parameters/indicators given in Table 2.15.
Payload-range characteristics
The payload-range characteristics of the Boeing 787-8 aircraft can be analytically
expressed as follows:
70
B767ER
B787-8
60 A350-800
50
Payload - tons
40
30
20
10
0
0 5000 10000 15000 20000
Range - km
Fig. 2.16 Payload-range characteristics of the selected commercial aircraft (Airbus 2012;
Boeing 2012a; http://nl.wikipedia.org/wiki/Airbus_A350)
2 3
44:5; 0\R\ ¼ 5550
PLðRÞ ¼ 4 44:50:00864 ðR 5550Þ; 5550\R\ ¼ 9600 5 ð2:20aÞ
9:50:023 ðR 9600Þ; 9600\R\ ¼ 10000
where
R is the range (nm); and
PL(R) is the payload (tons).
In addition, the payload-range characteristics for the B787-8, B767-300ER, and

A350-800 aircraft are shown in Fig. 2.16.
Evidently, the B787-8 appears superior to its B767-300ER counterpart as it is
able to operate along longer nonstop distances with greater payload. The forth-
coming A350-800 will at least be comparable to the B787-8 aircraft by carrying
seemingly higher payloads on shorter nonstop distances.
The technical productivity of commercial aircraft including the B787-8 can be
estimated as the product of their operational/cruising speed and payload. As
mentioned above, the maximum payload of each aircraft changes and depends on
the range. Consequently, technical productivity can be calculated as follows:
TP½vðRÞ; PLðRÞ ¼ vðRÞ PLðRÞ ð2:20bÞ
where
v(R) is the aircraft operating/cruising speed depending on the range R (km/h or
kts (nm/h)).
The other symbols are analogous to those in previous equations. Thus, for
example, if the B787-8 aircraft performs a flight of the length of R = 9,280 km at
an average cruising speed of v(R) = 900 km/h, its technical productivity will be
TP [v(R), PL(R)] = 44.5 tons 9 900 km/h = 40,050 ton-km/h. In case of longer
flights carried out approximately at the same speed, this productivity will decrease
in line with decreasing of the payload carried. It would not be reasonable to
investigate the influence of the operating/cruising speed on much shorter flights
with the maximum payload since this aircraft is just designed to operate long-haul
flights within the airline point-to-point network. The similar seems to apply to the
forthcoming A350-800 aircraft and the rest of its family.
The main economic performances of the B787-8 aircraft are its costs and revenues,
which can also be said for its conventional counterparts.
Costs
Aircraft costs are roughly divided into operating and non-operating cost. In par-
ticular, operating cost can be divided into DOC (Direct Operating Cost) and IOC
(Indirect Operating Cost) (Janic 2007). The former consist of the costs of aircraft
depreciation, insurance, maintenance and overhauling (airframe, engines and
avionics), and the cost of flight operations (crew, fuel/oil, airport, and navigation
charges). The latter roughly include the costs of aircraft and traffic servicing,
promotion and sale, passenger services, general and administrative overheads, and
maintenance and depreciation of the ground property and equipment. In general,
both DOC and IOC have shown to increase in line with the aircraft size (i.e.,
seating capacity) and stage length.
The aircraft DOC are usually expressed in average monetary units per flight or
per unit of flight output (US$ or € per ASK (Available Seat-Kilometer) or PKM
(Passenger Kilometer) passenger-km). The ATA (Air Transport Association) of
American method with the necessary modifications of the values of inputs is still
relevant for estimating and comparing aircraft DOC, particularly of aircraft that
are just at the beginning of their full commercialization such as the B787-8. An
example of application of this method is shown in Fig. 2.17 (AC 2005; Janic
2007).
As can be seen, the average cost per ASK (Available Seat-Kilometer) decreases
more than proportionally as the stage length increases, thus indicating economies
of distance in the case of the selected aircraft. At the same time, the average costs
of the B787 s aircraft are by about 3–11 and 8–11.5 % lower than those of the
4.5
3.5
3
Average unit cost -
2.5
2
ASK- Available Seat Kilometer
1.5 - cent of $US
1
B787-3/8/9
0.5 A310-300/A330-200
B767-200/300/ER
0
2000 3000 4000 5000 6000 7000 8000 9000 10000 11000
Stage length - km
Fig. 2.17 Relationships between the average operating cost and stage length of the selected
commercial aircraft (AC 2005)
B767-200/300/ER and A310/330-200 aircraft, respectively (The cost components

include aircraft price and interests on bonds, i.e., finance charges, navigational and
landing charges, flight attendant and crew costs, and maintenance and fuel cost).
The beginning of commercial operations of the B787-8 aircraft has confirmed the
above-mentioned expectations mainly thanks to the lower maintenance airframe
and engine costs and lower fuel consumption of increasingly expensive fuel. These
last two cost components will likely continue to influence the short-term variations
of the DOC. For example, let’s assume that the share of fuel costs in the total
operating cost of a given long-haul flight is about 30 %. Since the B787-8 aircraft
is supposed to consume about 20 % less fuel than its counterparts (B767-300ER,
A310-300/A330-200/300), the share of its fuel costs in DOC will decrease from
30 % to about 24 %. If the other cost components and their influencing factors
remain unchanged, this will decrease the total cost per flight by about 6 %. The
savings in DOC from operating the B787-8 aircraft will increase, for example, by
about 10 % if the share of fuel costs mainly caused by increasing of the fuel prices
rises (for example, from 30 to 50 %).
Revenues
As with other aircraft, revenues from operating B787 aircraft are obtained by
charging passengers on the given routes. For example, the average price/airfare
covering the cost of a flight in time T can be estimated as follows:
cij ðNij ; dij Þ
pij ðTÞ ð2:21Þ
kij Nij
where
cij(Nij, dij) is the cost per flight carried out by an aircraft of the seat capacity Nij
on the route of length dij in time T; and
kij is the average load factor of a flight on the route dij carried out by an
aircraft of the seat capacity Nij in time T (0 \ kij B 1).
As Eq. 2.21 indicates, the average price/airfare depends on the cost and the
average load factor of a given flight carried out by any aircraft, including the
B787-8 aircraft.
The environmental performances of the B787-8 aircraft include fuel consumption

and related emissions of GHG (Greenhouse Gases), and land use/take.
Fuel consumption and emissions of GHG
Multiplying the SFC with the thrust per engine and the number of engines per
aircraft can give an estimation of the aircraft total fuel consumption per unit of
time (tons/h). In addition, fuel consumption per seat-kilometer can be relevant for
comparison of different aircraft with respect to fuel consumption/efficiency. Some
estimates given in Fig. 2.18 indicate that the B787-8 aircraft could be more fuel
efficient by about 8, 9, and 18 % than its B767-200ER, B777-200ER, and 777-
300ER counterparts, respectively.
The most recent figures obtained by ANA (Air Nippon Airlines, Japan) show
that the fuel savings by operating B787-8 powered by RR Trent 1000 engines on
short-haul routes are 15–20 % and up to 21 % on long-haul (international) routes
as compared to the B767-200/300ER aircraft. Some additional savings of up to
about 3 % have been reported by JAL (Japan Airlines) using the B787-8 aircraft
powered by GEnx 1B engines (AW 2012). In addition, Airbus expects the fuel
consumption of the A350-800 to be about 6 % lower than that of B787-8 aircraft
as shown in Fig. 2.18.
The related emissions of GHG (Greenhouse Gases) from burning JP1 or JP-A
fuel are CO2 (Carbon), H2O (Water vapor), NO (Nitric Oxide) and NO2 (Nitrogen
Dioxide) (together called NOx (Nitric Oxides)), SOx (Sulfur Oxides), and smoke.
The emission rates of CO2, H2O, and SO2 are relatively constant—3.18 and
1.23 kg/kg, and up to 0.84 g/kg of fuel, respectively (Janic 2007). The emission
rate of NOx (Nitrogen Oxides) changes (increases) in line with increasing of the
OPR (Overall Pressure Ratio1) of the given turbofan jet engine. The above-
mentioned higher fuel efficiency thanks to the higher engine BR (Bypass Ratio)
(11.0) and better combustion makes the related emissions of GHG (particularly
CO2 and NOx) by the B787-8 aircraft proportionally lower than those of its closest
counterparts.
1
The OPR (Overall Pressure Ratio) is defined as the ratio of the total pressure at the compressor
discharge and the pressure at the compressor entry (Hunecke 1997; Janic 2007).
40
Existing subsonic aircraft
Advanced subsonic aircraft
35
Average fuel consumption - g/s-km
3-class passenger configuration

Nominal take-off weight – cruise
30
25
20
15
10
0
A330-200 B767-200 B767-200ER B787-8 A350-800
Aircraft type
Fig. 2.18 Fuel efficiency of the selected commercial aircraft (http://www.lissys.demon.co.uk/

boeing787.html)
Land use
Thanks to its advanced maneuverability, accommodating the B787-8 aircraft at
certified airports does not require use of additional land. Eventual modifications of
taxiways and apron-gate parking stands are to be carried out within the airport
area, i.e., over the already taken land. Thus, the B787-8 aircraft can be considered
as a land use/take ‘‘neutral’’ aircraft.
The social/policy performances of the B787-8 aircraft relate to noise, congestion,

and traffic incidents/accidents (safety).
Noise
Noise primarily comes from the aircraft engines while flying near the ground, i.e.,
during approach and landing, flyover, and take-off. The noise spreads in front of
and behind the aircraft engine(s). The front noise-spreading generators are the
engine(s) compressor and fan. The back noise-spreading generators are the turbine,
fan, and jet efflux. The aircraft are certified for noise at various noise certification
locations around the airport. The maximum noise at these locations must not
exceed 108 EPNLdB (this noise is equivalent to about 96 dB (A) measured by
A-noise weighted scale) (Huenecke 1997; Horonjeff and McKelvey 1994;
Table 2.16 Social performances of the selected commercial Aircraft—noise (Cohen-Nir 2010;
EASA 2011, 2012)
Aircraft type Noise level (EPNLdB)c
TOWa Lateral Flyover Approach
B767-200 144 95.7 91.5 102.1
B767-200ER 168 97.8 91.1 98.6
B767-300 158 96.0 91.3 98.5
B767-30ER 180 95.7 91.5 99.7
A330-200 230 97.0 94.4 96.8
A330-300 217 97.6 91.6 98.9
B787-8 220 90.5 83.0 96.2
A350-800b 259 89.0 83.0 95.0
a
Typical TOW Take-Off-Weight; b Preliminary data; c EPNLdB Effective Perceived Noise Level
in decibels (typical engines)
Janic 2007). Table 2.16 gives the noise characteristics of selected aircraft at the
noise certification locations.
Evidently, the B787-8 aircraft generates about 5–7, 7 and 0.6–6 dB lower
certificated noise than its counterparts while taking off, flying over, and
approaching, respectively (EASA 2011, 2012). In addition, making a broader
judgment concerning mitigation of noise by B787-8 can be made by assuming it
replaces the B767-200/200ER aircraft. This implies the gradual increase in the
number of replacing aircraft (B787-8) on the account of gradually replaced aircraft
(B767-200/200ER). The total number of B767-200/200ER aircraft to be replaced
is assumed to be 800 (based on the current orders of B787-8). Regarding operating
long-haul flights, each aircraft of both fleets is assumed to perform the same
number of flights (2/day). The noise level is considered to be the certified EPNLdB
(the case in Europe) (EASA 2011). The total noise exposure by take-off or
approach/landing operating fleet of both aircraft during the day can be estimated as
follows (Smith 2004):
1X 2
EPNLdB ¼ ni ½EPNLdBi þ 10 log10 ðni hi Þ ð2:22Þ
n i¼1
where
EPNLdBi is the Effective Perceived Noise Level of the aircraft in decibels (i);
ni is the number of aircraft (i) in operation (per day);
hi is the average number of flights per day of aircraft (i); and
n is the total number of aircraft in operation (per day).
The example is shown in Fig. 2.19.

As can be seen, the total potential noise exposure by the entire replacing and
replaced fleet decreases more than proportionally with increasing of the proportion
of advanced B787-8 aircraft. By full replacement, this exposure could be reduced
by about 3 dB and 6 dB during approach and take-off, respectively. Consequently,
Total average noise exposure level - EPNLdB

134
B767-200/200ER (1) B787-8 (2) Take-off: Total fleet 800 aircraft
(EPNLdB) (EPNLdB) Approach: Total fleet 800 aircraft
132 Take-off: 96.7 Take-off: 90.5
Approach: 100.35 Approach: 96.8
130
EPNLdBA= 0.0012p22-0.1562p2+ 132.27
R² = 0.994
128
126
124
EPNLdBT/O= 0.0012p22-0.189 p2+ 128.92
R² = 0.995
122
120
0 20 40 60 80 100
p2-Proportion of B787-8 aircraft -%
Fig. 2.19 Relationship between the average noise exposure and the proportion of B787-8 aircraft
in the fleet
the ‘‘noise contour’’ or ‘‘noise footprint’’ as the area of constant noise generated by
B787-8 aircraft around an airport can be by about 60 % smaller than those of its
counterparts, thus ensuring that noise above the level of 85 dB certainly does not
spread outside the airport boundaries. This is achieved mainly thanks to the
improved aerodynamics design on the one hand, and the lower fan speed and low
jet velocity of the RR Trent 1000 engines, on the other. The forthcoming A350-
800 aircraft is expected to be even quieter (Cohen-Nir 2010).
Congestion
The B787-8 aircraft is categorized as a heavy aircraft. This implies that as being
the leading aircraft in the landing sequence, it needs to be separated from A380,
other Heavy, Upper and Lower Medium, Small, and Light aircraft by 4, 4, 5, 6, and
7 nm, respectively. Currently, the separation amounts to 10 nm (nautical mile;
1 nm = 1.875 km). As the leader in the take-off sequence, the B787-8 aircraft
needs to be separated from all other aircraft by 3 min (FAA 2011). Consequently,
like the increased proportion of other heavy aircraft in the airport arrival and
departing streams, an increased proportion of B787-8 aircraft can contribute to
increased overall separation interval(s), which reduces the runway landing and
take-off capacity almost proportionally. Consequently, at saturated capacity-
constrained airports, the overall congestion and aircraft delays may increase.
Safety
The B787-8 is an advanced aircraft designed to operate absolutely safely implying
its immunity to incidents and accidents due to all previously known reasons. The
forthcoming more intensive operations will certainly confirm such expectations
since the aircraft is also designed in light of the overall objectives to make the
present and future air transport system safer despite its continuous growth. For
example, in the case of an engine failure during the cruising phase of flight, the
ETOPS (Extended Range Twin-Engine Operational Performances) capabilities
enable B787-8 aircraft to stay in the air for up to 180 min, which is, like its
counterparts, sufficient to reach the closest airport and land safely.
2.4.3 Evaluation
The B787-8 aircraft possesses advantages (Strengths and Opportunities) and dis-
advantages (Weaknesses and Threats) as compared to its closest counterparts—the
Boeing B767-300ER and the Airbus A330-200/300.
Advantages
• Advanced aerodynamic design;
• Substantial use of lighter but very strong composites (about 50 and 80 % of the
weight and volume, respectively);
• Superior technical productivity over the entire range;
• Advanced navigational systems onboard being a part of the forthcoming
NextGen and SESAR research and development initiatives in the USA and
Europe, respectively;
• Increased efficiency in terms of fuel consumption and related emissions of GHG
(Greenhouse Gases), but still not sufficiently convincible to be in line with the
widely advertised 20 % decrease; and
• Seemingly convincible reduction of noise at source—aircraft engines—but
again slightly lower than advertised.
Disadvantages
• Relatively high price;
• Rather modest reduction of direct operating costs due to improvements in the
fuel efficiency, i.e., lower fuel consumption and share of fuel costs in the total
operating costs;
• Contribution to increasing congestion and delays at capacity constrained airports
because of reducing the airport runway capacity affected by increased overall
separation within the arrival and departure stream(s); and
• An inherent uncertainty in the technical and operational reliability of the
innovative technologies and particularly electrical systems and composites
during the aircraft life-cycle of about 25–30 years.
Finally, the B-787-8 aircraft is certainly an advanced subsonic commercial air-
craft. At present, most of its infrastructural and technical/technological performances
are known. However, its remaining operational, economic, environmental, and
social/policy performances and consequently further advantages and disadvantages
will only be able to be analyzed in more detail after more intensive aircraft use.
References 79
References
AC. (2005). Can the 787 & A350 transform the economics of long-haul services?. Aircraft
Commerce, No. 39 (February/March), pp. 23–30.
AEIF. (2002). Trans-european high-speed rail system, technical specification for interoperability
(TSI), infrastructure. European association for Railway interoperability, international union of
Railways. Paris, France.
Airbus. (2012). A350XWB sharping efficiency. Blagnac Cedex: Airbus Company.
AUMA. (2007). Towards a light rail transit program: Analysis and recommendations. Alberta,
California: Alberta Urban Municipalities Association.
AW. (2012). ANA, JAL boeing 787 fuel burn performance beating expectations. Aviation week &
space technology, AW&ST.com, (June), pp. 20–22.
Boeing. (2012a). 787 Airplane characteristics for airport planning. Seattle, Washington: Boeing
Commercial Airplanes.
Boeing. (2012). Boeing 787 dreamliner being designed for environmental performance. Seattle,
Washington: Boeing Commercial Airplanes.
CE. (2008). Vehicle technology review: City of Edmonton, LRT Projects. Retrieved from
www.edmonton.ca/LRTProjects
Cebrián, P. (2008). CNG vehicles for urban transport: An available solution for cleaner air in
cities. BESTUFS (Best Urban Freight Solution) II-8th Workshop, IVECO trucks and
commercial vehicles, March, Madrid, Spain.
CEN. (2002). Track alignment design parameters—track gauges 1435 and wider—part 1: Plain
line. Railway Applications. EN13803-1, Comité Européen de Normalisation, Brussels,
Belgium.
CEN. (2006). Track alignment design parameters—track gauges 1435 and wider—part 1: Plain
line. Railway Applications. Enquire Version EN13803-1, Comité Européen de Normalisation,
Brussels, Belgium.
Cohen-Nir, D. (2010). Airbus Program Update, Presentation. Airbus America Inc., Airbus SAS.
Herndon, Virginia, USA.
De Rus, C. J. G. (Ed.). (2009). Economic analysis of high speed rail in Europe. Bilbao: BBVA
Foundation.
EASA. (2011). Type certificate data-sheet for noise no. EASA. A004 for Airbus A330, EASA
IM.A. 115 for boeing 787-8, B767. Koln, Germany: European Aviation Safety Agency.
EASA. (2012). Type certificate data sheet data sheet for noise no. EASA.IM.A.115 for boeing
787-8. Koln, Germany: European Aviation Safety Agency.
EC. (2002). Technical specification for interoperability relating to the rolling stock subsystem of
the trans european high-speed rail system, 30/05/2002. Official Journal of the European
Commissions, No. 12 (September).
EC. (2009). EU energy and transport in figures. Statistical pocket book, directorate general for
energy and transport, Brussels, Belgium.
EC. (2010). Signal. The newsletter of the european rail traffic management system ERTMS, No.
21. European Commission, Brussels, Belgium.
EEA. (2007). The emission factors: Technical annex. Copenhagen, Denmark: European
Environmental Agency.
EPA. (2011). Control of air pollution from aircraft and aircraft engines; proposed emission
standards and test procedures, Part II, 40 CER Part 80 and 1068. Environmental Protection
Agency, Federal Register (Vol. 16, No. 144), Washington D.C., USA.
ERRAC. (2004). Light rail and metro systems in Europe: Current market perspectives and
research implications. Brussels, Belgium: The European Rail Research Advisory Council.
FAA. (2011). Interim procedures for boeing 747-800 and boeing 787 flights. Notice N JO
7110.542, Federal Aviation Administration, US Department of Transportation, Washington,
D.C., USA.
GAO. (2001). Mass transit: Bus rapid transit shows promise. GAO-01-984, Report to
Congressional Requesters, United States Government Accountancy Office, Washington,
D.C., USA.
GAO. (2011). Aviation safety: Status of FAA’s actions to oversee the safety of composite
airplanes. Report to Congressional Requesters, Government Accountability Office, GAO-11-
849, Washington, D.C., USA.
GAO. (2012). Bus rapid transit: Projects improve transit service and can contribute to economic
development. GAO-12-811, Report to the Committee on Banking, Housing, and Urban
Affairs, United States Government Accountancy Office, Washington, D.C., USA.
Henri, L., Guy, M., & Jürg Z. (1991). Les Structure des Véhicules. Revue Générale des Chemins
de Fer. No. 7–8 (July/August).
Horonjeff, R., & McKelvey, F. R. (1994). Planning and design of airports (3rd ed.). New York:
McGraw-Hill Book Company.
Hunecke, K. (1997). Jet engines: Fundamentals of theory, design and operation. UK: Airlife
Publications Ltd.
Janic, M. (2007). The sustainability of air transportation: Quantitative analysis and assessment.
UK: Ashgate Publishing Company.
Janic, M. (2011). Light rail rapid transit (LRRT) system for more sustainable ground accessibility
of airports. Transportation Planning and Technology, 34(6), 569–592.
Jenkinson, L. R., Simpkin, P., & Rhodes, D. (1999). Civil jet aircraft design. London: Arnold
Publisher.
Kemp, R. (2007). T618: Tracton energy metrics, No. 2, Rail Safety and Standards Board.
London, UK.
Levinson, S. H., Zimmerman, S., Butherford, G. S., & Glinger, J. (2002). Bus rapid transit: An
overview. Journal of Public Transportation, 5(2), 1–30.
Levinson, S. H., Zimmerman, S., Clinger, J., Gast, J., Rutherford, S., Smith, L. R., Cracknell, J.,
Soberman, R. (2003a). Bus rapid transit, Volume 1: Case studies in bus rapid transit, Report,
TCRP (Transit Cooperative Research Program), TRB (Transportation Research Board),
Washington, D.C., USA.
Levinson, S. H., Zimmerman, S., Clinger, J., Gast, J., Rutherford, S., Bruhn, E. (2003b). Bus
rapid transit, Volume 2: Implementation Guidelines, Report, TCRP (Transit Cooperative
Research Program), TRB (Transportation Research Board), Washington, D.C., USA.
Mishra, K. R., Parida, M., & Rangnecar, S. (2010). Evaluation and analysis of traffic noise along
bus rapid transit corridor. International Journal of Environmental Science and Technology,
7(4), 737–750.
Nelson, T. (2005). 787 Systems and Performance, Flight operations engineering. Boeing
Commercial Airplanes, Seattle, USA.
Persson, R. (2007). Tilting trains: Description and analysis of the present situation, Literature
study ISBN 978-91-7178-608-1. Stockholm: Royal Institute of Technology.
Poisson, F., Gautier, P.E., Letourneaux, F. (2008). Noise sources for high speed trains: A review
of results in the TGV case. In B. Schulte-Werning et al. (Eds.), Noise and vibration
mitigation. NNFM 99, springerlink.com, Springer, Heidelberg,Germany, pp. 71–77.
Puchalsky, C. M. (2005). Comparison of emissions from light rail transit and bus rapid transit.
Transportation Research Record 1927: Public Transportation, pp. 31–37.
RITA. (2012). Safety and security time series data (2002–2011). Research and Innovative
Technology Administration, U.S. Department of Transportation, National Transit Database
Washington, D.C., USA.
Ross, C. J., Staiano, A. M. (2007). A comparison of green and conventional diesel bus noise
levels. Paper presented at Noise-CON Conference, Reno, Nevada, USA, p. 8.
RR. (2011). TRENT100 Factsheet: Optimized for B787 Dreamliner Family. Rolls Royce,
COM13797, Issue 9, November 2011, London, England.
RTR. (2005). High speed and network extension. Rail technical review, No. 2. pp. 11–18.
Saavedra, S. N. (2011). The evolution of transportation planning in bogota, Report. Traffic and
Transport Research Program, Universidad Nacional de Colombia, Bogota, Columbia.
References 81
Smith, J. T. M. (2004). Aircraft noise. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.

STSI. (2008). Light rail vehicles. Siemens Transportation Systems Inc., Rolling Stock Division,
Sacramento, California, USA.
Tegner, G. (2003). Comparison of costs between Bus, PRT, LRT, and Metro/Rail. In EC project
European Demonstration of Innovative City Transport (EDICT). European Commission 5th
Framework Program, DG VII, Brussels, Belgium.
TRB. (2008). Airport ground access system mode choice models: A synthesis of airport practice.
ACRP Synthesis 5. Washington, D.C., USA: TRB.
Vincent, W., Jerram, C. L. (2006). The potential for bus rapid transit to reduce related CO2
emissions. Journal of Public Transportation, Special Edition, pp. 219–237.
VTT. (2004). Transit bus emissions study: Comparison of emissions from diesel and natural gas
buses. Research Report, Technical Research Center of Finland, Tampere, Finland.
Vuchic, R. V. (2007). Urban public transportation systems and technology. New York: Willey.
Wright, L. (2003). Bus rapid transit-mode 3b, Deutsche Gesellshaft fur Technische Zusammen-
arbeit (GTZ) GmbH. Germany: Eschbom.
Wright, L., & Hook, W. (2007). Bus rapid transit planning guide (3rd ed.). New York: Institute
for Transportation & Development Policy.
Chapter 3
Advanced Transport Systems: Operations
and Economics
3.1 Introduction
This chapter describes advanced freight collection/distribution networks, road

mega trucks, LIFTs (Long Intermodal Freight Train(s)) as components of the
advanced freight/goods system in Europe, and large commercial freight aircraft.
Advanced freight collection/distribution networks can be operated by a single or
few different (integrated) transport modes moving freight/goods consolidated into
loading units such as pallets, containers, swap-bodies, and/or semi-trailers between
the doors of particular shippers and receivers. When these networks are operated
exclusively by road, standard or mega trucks are exclusively used. The road mega
truck is the largest, i.e., the longest and heaviest, commercial freight vehicle
proposed to carry fright/good shipments throughout the EU (European Union)
countries. As such, it is longer and heavier that its current largest counterpart—the
standard truck with a length of 18.75 m and a weight of 40–44 tons.
In rail-operated networks, CIFTs (Commercial Intermodal Freight Train(s) or
LIFTs can be used along the main route(s). Specifically, LIFTs (Long Intermodal
Freight Train(s)) are proposed to carry out large freight/goods shipments on long
distances in Europe. Due to being longer and heavier than their conventional
counterparts, they are expected to be powered by two instead of one locomotive.
Operating as the main mode of the rail/road intermodal transport system, they are
expected to be competitive in terms of operational (internal) costs to the road
transport system operating either standard or mega trucks.
In intermodal networks, CIFTs, LIFTs, or barges can be used along the main
routes, and road trucks for the collection and distribution of loading units at the
beginning and from the end intermodal terminal(s), respectively. The intermodal
rail/road freight collection/distribution networks operated have been initiated by
the ERRAC (European Research Advisory Council) and the rail freight operators
in France, Belgium, Germany, and the Netherlands. The aim has been to improve
the market position of freight nonroad transport modes, and consequently mitigate
the impacts of the road freight transport mode on the environment and society.

84 3 Advanced Transport Systems
The Boeing B747-8F and Airbus A380-800F are examples of large commercial
freight aircraft. They are advanced mainly due to their size, i.e., payload capacity,
and their related operational/economic advantages, both as compared to their
closest smaller counterpart such as the B-747-400F.
3.2 Advanced Freight Collection/Distribution Networks
1954 The ICC (Interstate Commerce Commission) (U.S.) concludes that the transportation
of piggyback trailers on flatcars is not a motor-carrier service and stopped requiring
railroads to have a motor-carrier certificate in order to operate Trailer-On-Flat Car
(TOFC) services (U.S.)
1956 Intermodal TOFC (Trailer-On-Flat Car) services are launched by the Trailer Train
Company set up by the Pennsylvania Railroad and the Norfolk and Western
Railways (U.S.)
1961 The ISO (International Organization for Standardization) set standards for containers
(Switzerland)
1972 The ‘‘landbridge’’ intermodal service, where containers are transferred from a ship to a
train on one coast, then transported across the country to the other coast and
transferred back from train to another ship, is introduced by the Southern Pacific
railroad and Sea-Land (U.S.)
1994/ The ten Pan-European transport corridors are defined at the second Pan-European
1997 Transport Conference in Crete; additions are made at the third conference in
Helsinki (Europe)
1996 Guidelines for the TEN-T (Trans-European Networks-Transport) are initially adopted
by the European Parliament (Europe)
2001 Guidelines for the TEN-T with respect to the seaports, inland ports, and intermodal
terminals are amended (Europe)
2004 More fundamental changes of the TEN-T policies are intended to accommodate the
enlargement of EU (European Union) and consequent changes in the pattern of
freight/goods flows are made (Europe)
Non-road freight transport modes as the main components of the intermodal or

multimodal freight transport networks in Europe have steadily grown stimulated
by both market forces and EC (European Commission) transport policy. For
example, during the 1990–1999 period, intermodal or multimodal transport within
the EU (European Union) 15 Member States grew from an annual volume of about
119 to about 250 billion t-km1 (tons-kilometers), which resulted in an increase of
1
Of this total about 91 % was international and 9 % domestic traffic. Rail carried about 20 %,
inland waterways 2 %, and short-sea shipping 78 % of international traffic. About 97 % of
domestic traffic was carried by rail and 3 % by inland waterways (EC 1999, 2002).
3.2 Advanced Freight Collection/Distribution Networks 85
its market share from about 5 to 9 %. This mainly happened after enhancement of
operations in the Trans European transport corridors along distances of
900–1,000 km where about 10 %t of the total volumes of freight/goods (tons) were
transported. On distances up to about 900 km where about 90 % of these freight/
goods volumes were transported, the market share of intermodal or multimodal
transport was negligible—only about 2 % in the total volumes of t-km, and 2–3 %
in the total volumes of tons (EC 1999, 2002). Since 1999, the above-mentioned
market shares have not substantially changed mainly due to the following reasons:
(i) the rather low overall unitarization rate2 of freight/goods of only about
10–15 %; (ii) the frequent deterioration of the quality of services of intermodal or
multimodal transport main mode(s)—primarily rail—as a result of insufficient
frequency and rather low reliability of service; (iii) the low door-to-door freight/
goods delivery speed of only about 18–20 km/h, and consequently long delivery
time; and (iv) further improvements in efficiency and effectiveness of the road
freight transport sector including initiatives for introducing road mega trucks on a
wider European scale (CNT 2006; EC 1999, 2000a, 2001a, 2002, 2007).
The above-mentioned developments reflect a part of the visionary policy for
development of the European freight transport sector by 2020 and beyond
implying further consolidation and more intensive use of rail/barge/short-sea on
the account of the road transport mode aiming at making freight and consequently
the entire transport sector more sustainable (EIRAC 2007). Specifically, in the
scope of the above-mentioned policy, the transport and logistics operators have
considered the advanced freight collection/distribution networks as options to
provide users/freight shippers/receivers advanced door-to-door transport services
as compared to other transport (freight) service networks. These networks can be
operated by single or few transport modes. In both cases, the freight shipments are
consolidated into compact units such as pallets and loading units—containers,
swap-bodies and semi-trailers. They can be exchanged between vehicles of dif-
ferent size/capacity operated by the same or different transport modes at dedicated
terminals. In case when the networks are operated by a single mode, the shipments
from smaller incoming vehicles can be consolidated into those to be carried
conveniently by larger outgoing vehicles such as road standard or mega trucks
(with electronic coupling), CIFTs (Conventional Intermodal Freight Train(s)),
LIFTs (Long Intermodal Freight Train(s)), large containers ship(s), or large
commercial freight aircraft, and vice versa at the dedicated uni-modal freight
terminals. When the network is operated by different transport modes, the vehicles
of particular modes meet at the multimodal terminals where seamless transship-
ment of freight shipments between them takes place. The combination of modes
can be different, but most frequently the inland systems include road and one of the
nonroad transport modes (rail, and/or barge).
2
The unitarization rate refers to the proportion of goods carried in loading units—containers,
swap-bodies, and semi-trailers.
3.2.2.1 Background
Advanced freight collection/distribution networks are based on the advanced orga-

nization of transport and transshipment services, in many cases supported by
advanced technologies (EC 1997a, b; Janic et al. 1999; Janic 2005). The advance-
ments in organization of transport services imply operating demand-driven direct-
fixed or ‘‘shuttle’’ services connecting shippers and receivers, directly and/or via
single- or multimodal terminals. Advancements in transport technologies include
those of transport means/vehicles and the transshipment of loading units in terminals.
The former implies more intensive use of advanced transport means/vehicles such as
standard and mega trucks, multisystem locomotives, special rail cars, barges of
different capacity, etc., and loading units such as containers, swap-bodies, and semi-
trailers. The latter includes technologies based on increased automation enabling
both horizontal and vertical transshipment of loading units. These technologies
provide higher capacity, efficiency, and effectiveness of terminal operations.3
Advanced freight collection/distribution networks can be classified into five
categories as follows: P–P (Point-to-Point) networks, TCD (Trunk line with
Collecting/Distribution forks) networks, HS (Hub-and-Spoke(s)) networksnet-
works, L/R (Line or Ring) networks, and M (Mixed) networks (EC 1997a, 1998a;
Janic et al. 1999; Janic 2005).
• A P–P (Point-to-Point) network serves relatively substantial and regular freight
flows. Loading units from different shippers are collected by road and con-
centrated at the origin (begin-) terminal. After being transshipped from the
trucks to the direct-fixed or shuttle train(s) (or barge(s)), they are transported to
the destination (end-) terminal. There, they are transshipped from the train/barge
to the trucks and transported to the final receiver;
• A TCD (Trunk line with Collecting/Distribution forks) network is actually an
expanded P–P (Point-to-Point) network covering a wider area. This network
consists of two types of terminals: the origin/destination trunk terminals and CD
(Collection/Distribution) terminals. Feeder rail or barge services are operated
between the origin/destination and CD terminal, and between the CD terminals
themselves. At the CD terminal(s), these feeder trains/barges can be partly loaded/
unloaded by loading units from/to the other origin/destination terminals,
respectively. Then, they proceed toward the other CD/destination terminals,
respectively. The loading units to/from each terminal of the network are usually
collected/distributed from/to the doors of shippers/receivers, respectively, by road
(EC 1997a, 1998a);
3
For example, horizontal transshipment can be eased by the automatic locking on the container
castings or on the tray castings, in combination with the automatic positioning of the train along
the loading/unloading floor.
• A HS (Hub-and-Spoke(s)) collection/distribution network is particularly operated

by the rail and/or barge freight transport mode. The network consists of several
begin-/end-terminals (spokes) and one centrally located (intermediate) terminal
(hub). The loading units sent by shippers arrive at the spoke terminal(s) usually by
road. There, they are transshipped from the trucks to the rail wagons or barges.
Then, they proceed to the hub, where they are transshipped between the incoming
and the outgoing trains/barge shuttle services. The transshipment takes from
several minutes to several hours depending on the inbound and outbound time-
table and the applied type of transshipment operations. After the outgoing trains/
barges from the hub arrive at the spoke(s), the loading units are again transshipped
to the trucks and delivered to the door(s) of receivers (EC 1997a, 1998a);
• A L/R (Line or Ring) collection/distribution network consists of a begin- and
end-terminal located at both ends of the line/ring and several intermediate (line/
ring) terminals located in between. Line train and/or barge services are sched-
uled between the begin- and end-terminal. They may stop at one and/or few
intermediate terminals where transshipment of loading units between the same
and/or different transport modes can take place. This implies that the road can
also be used between the terminals of the network and the doors of shippers/
receivers of loading units (EC 1997a, 1998a); and
• A M (Mixed) network usually consists of a combination of elements of the
above-mentioned four basic networks.
Advanced freight collection/distribution networks possess network-generic and
the network-specific performances. The former include inventories, delays, and the
costs of processing loading units in the network(s), while the latter include in-
frastructural/spatial, technical/technological, operational, economic, environmen-
tal, and social/policy performances. Both types of performances can be considered
from the aspects of particular actors involved such as: users of network services
(freight/goods shippers/receivers), transport and terminal operators, manufacturers
of transport and terminal infrastructure facilities and equipment, and DM (Deci-
sion-Making) authorities and communities at different institutional levels (local,
national, international). Modeling the network-generic performances implies
developing analytical equations for estimating the level of inventories and related
delays of freight/goods shipments, and the total operating and inventory costs.
Modeling the network-specific performances implies quantifying particular indi-
cators and measures and then using them as attributes/criteria in the multicriteria
ranking of particular network configurations (EC 1997a, 1998a; Hay 1977;
Manheim 1979; Tarski 1987).
3.2.2.2 Generic Performances
Network generic-performances such as inventories, delays, and the costs of pro-

cessing loading units in the network(s) imply analyzing the network structure and
operations, and then developing the corresponding analytical models based on the
following assumptions:
• Demand is expressed by the number of loading units requesting service in the
network during a given period (a day, week);
• The available transport and terminal capacity are always sufficient to satisfy this
demand;
• Terminals represent the network nodes where loading units are exchanged
between the same and/or different transport modes; in addition, the loading units
can enter and/or leave the network through these nodes, i.e., terminals;
• Loading units enter and leave the network in batches, which can form inven-
tories at particular locations such as the network nodes, i.e., terminals and the
network links, i.e., routes;
• Formation of inventories of loading units causes their delays; delays can be
repetitive at regular time intervals called network cycles (day or a week)
depending on the pattern of demand and supply;
• The level of inventories of loading units during a cycle represents the network
state;
• The total costs of particular networks consist of inventory costs, transport costs,
and terminal costs; inventory costs relate to handling inventories of loading
units while in a given network; transport cost consists of the operators’ cost to
transport loading units between their origin(s) and destination(s); terminal cost
includes handling cost of loading units while in and through the terminal(s).
(Hall 1987, 1993; Janic et al. 1999; Janic 2005)
P–P (Point-to-Point) network
Inventories and delays
A P–P (Point-to-Point) collection/distribution network operates as follows: the
loading units are delivered from their local origins (i.e., doors of the shippers) to
the origin intermodal terminal by road haulage. Then, they are loaded onto a direct
or shuttle train or barge (vessel) and transported to the destination terminal. From
there, they are distributed (again by road) to their final destinations (i.e., doors of
the receivers). Figure 3.1 shows a simplified layout of the network and inventories
of loading units in it during a cycle.
The flow of loading units qAB is transported between terminal A and B. The
length of the route connecting the two terminals is lAB and the average speed of
transport units is vAB(lAB). The intensity of collection of loading units at the terminal
(A : i) is ki. The loading units are assumed to arrive there by road some time
before departure of the train, barge, or vessel. This time may vary from the time of
preceding departure to the time of closing ‘‘new’’ departure for loading. The period
between the arrival of the first and the last loading unit of the batch qAB is s0i.
The total loading time is dependent on the size of batch qAB : qij and loading
rate li. After the batch qij is loaded, the transport unit is inspected and dispatched
after the period s1i. The transport unit arrives at terminal (B : j) after time lAB/
vAB(lAB). Then, the batch qij is unloaded. The intensity of unloading at terminal
Terminal A Direct or shuttle trains and/or barges services Terminal B
A, B - begin- and end-terminal, respectively Pre- and end-road haulage
Transport of loading units by shuttle

Arrivals and loading of loading or direct train(s)/barge(s)
Unloading and departure of loading
units at origin terminal
units from destination terminal
λi Flow qij
qij T λj
μi TB qij
A μj
τ 0i A≡i B j τ1j τ
qij/ μi τ 1i 0j
qij/μ j
qij/λ j
Fig. 3.1 Scheme of a P–P (Point-to-Point) network (Janic et al. 1999; Janic 2005)
(B : j) is lj. The inspection and preparation of transport unit for unloading is

carried out in time s1j and s0j, respectively. Similarly as at the origin terminal, the
loading units that arrive at the terminal (j) can be either placed in the terminal’s
‘‘storage’’ area waiting for being picked-up latter or directly transshipped to the
road trucks, and vice versa. The intensity of their leaving the terminal (j) is kj.
The time for processing batch qij through the network defines the network’s
cycle, which can be repetitive in both directions. If it is assumed that the suc-
cessive cycles do not overlap and thus do not affect each other, the total delay of
loading units accommodated by the network during a single cycle can be estimated
as follows:
Dij ¼ Dbi þ DTij þ Dbj " #

ffi ffi
1 1 lij 1 qij
¼ soi þ s1i þ qij qij þ qij þ s1j þ s0j þ qij
li 2ki vij 2 min kj ; lj
ð3:1aÞ
The symbols Dbi, DTij, and Dbj denote the ‘‘inventory’’ delay at the origin
terminal (i), delay along route (ij), and the ‘‘inventory’’ delay at the destination
terminal (j), respectively.
Costs
The total costs of a P–P (Point-to-Point) network can be estimated based on
Eq. 3.1a as follows:

Cij ¼ CI þ CTR þ CTE ¼ Dbi þ DTij þ Dbj pij rij þ cðd0i ; W0i Þ f0i
ffi
b0i þ b1i b0j þ b1j ð3:1bÞ
þ c lij ; Wij fij þ c dj0 ; Wj0 fj0 þ þ qij
ui Q i uj Qj
where
Dbi, DTij, Dbj is the delay of loading units while passing
through the terminal (i), route (ij), and terminal
(j), respectively (LU-h) (LU—Loading Unit; h—
hour);
pij is the average value of a shipment belonging to
the batch qij (€/LU);
rij is the average ‘‘inventory’’ charge of a shipment
belonging to the batch qij (€/h);
c(di0,Wi0), c(lij,Wij), c(dj0,Wj0) is the cost of transport unit of capacity Wi0, Wij,
and Wj0 along the route di0, lij, and dj0, respec-
tively (€/dispatch);
fi0, fij, fj0 is the transport service frequency on the routes
di0, lij, and dj0, respectively (departures/h);
b0i, b1i, b0j, b1j is the total handling and operation cost of the
terminals (i) and (j), respectively, (€/year);
Qi, Qj is the volume of demand planned to be handled
in terminal (i) and (j), respectively, (LU/year);
and
ui, uj is the average utilization of the terminals (i) and
(j), respectively.
The transport cost function can be expressed either in linear or log-linear form
as follows:
cðd; W Þ ¼ a0 þ a1 d þ a2 W or cðd; W Þ ¼ a0 da1 W a2 ð3:1cÞ

where
a0 is the fixed transport cost (€/dispatch);
a1 is the average cost per unit distance (€/km);
a2 is the average cost per unit of capacity of a transport unit (€/tone or €/LU);
d is the length of the route (km), and
W is the capacity of transport unit (tons/TU or LU/TU; TU—Transport Unit).
For any transport mode, the service frequency on the routes connecting the
particular spokes can be determined based on the assumption that the demand is
always satisfied as follows:
f ¼ q=k W ð3:1dÞ
where
q is the volume of loading units on a given route (LU/period), and
k is the average utilization of transport units running on the route.
The other symbols are analogous to those in previous equations.
TCD (Trunk line with Collecting/Distribution forks) network

A TCD (Trunk line with Collecting/Distribution forks) network consists of origin
and destination ‘‘local’’ terminals, which are assigned to the corresponding trunk
terminals. The loading units move between the ‘‘local’’ terminals via the CD
terminals, which can all be single- or multimodal. Figure 3.2 shows a simplified
spatial layout and inventories of loading units in the network during a cycle.
The origin ‘‘local’’ terminals and the destination ‘‘local’’ terminals are: Tdi
(i = 1, 2, …, N) and Taj (j = 1, 2,…, M), respectively. The flow of loading units
between the origin and destination ‘‘local’’ terminals (i) and (j), respectively, is qij.
Handling of these loading units at terminals is carried out as in a P–P (Point-to-
Point) network. The loading units are transported by direct or shuttle ‘‘feeder’’
trains (or barges) from the ‘‘local’’ to the trunk terminals, and vice versa. For
example, at the trunk terminal TA, the loading units are regrouped into batches
convenient for longer direct or shuttle transport units (trains or barges), which are
then dispatched along the trunk route lAB to the trunk terminal TB.
Tb1
Ta1
Terminal A Terminal B
Tb2
Ta2
Trunk direct train/barge
Tb3
Feeder
Feeder train/barge
Ta3 train/barge
Pre- and end-road-haulage
Tai, Tbi - Begin- and end-terminal (k = 1,2,3)
A, B - CD- terminals
qjaB djb/dj
qiaA dia/id N M N M
Arrivals of loading units at qidA ∑ ∑ qij qjdB ∑∑ qij
local/regional terminal(s) i 1 j 1 i 1 j 1
T1aATiaATNaA τA T1dATidATNdA T1aBTjaBTNaBτB T1dB TjdBTMdB

T0A T0B
Td1 TB1
λi qiA TA TB qBj λj
μi qiA Tdi TBj qBj μj
τ Transport of loading units by 'trunk
0i
qiA/ μ i τ0i τ1j τ0j
line' train(s)/barge(s) TBM qBj/ μ j
qBj/ λ j
TdN Transport of loading units

Transport of loading units by
local train(s)/barge(s) by local train(s)/barge(s)
Distribution of loading units
from regional/local terminal(s)
Fig. 3.2 Scheme of a TCD (Trunk line with Collecting/Distribution forks) network (Janic et al.
1999; Janic 2005)
In rail-based networks, both ‘‘local’’ and ‘‘trunk’’ terminals may operate like
‘‘local’’ and ‘‘regional’’ shunting yards, respectively. In particular, the delays of
loading units during their passing through the ‘‘trunk’’ terminals are dependent on
the number, capacity, and timetable of the inbound ‘‘local’’ trains and the out-
bound ‘‘trunk’’ trains. In addition, these delays can be significantly influenced by
the strategy and ‘‘speed’’ of shunting, both depending on the size and type of
shunting yard.
In Fig. 3.2, the arrival time of i-th ‘‘local’’ train at the terminal TA (i = 1, 2, …, N)
is TiaA, the departure time of i-th ‘‘trunk’’ train from the terminal TA is TidA, the arrival
time of i-th ‘‘trunk’’ train at terminal TB is TiaB, and the departure time of i-th ‘‘local’’
train from the terminal TB is TidB. In case when all outbound trunk trains have to wait
for all inbound trains in order to exchange wagons and/or loading units, and vice
versa, their accumulation and related delays may become rather long. The maximum
number of loading units that can be accumulated in the terminals TA and TB can be
P P P PM
determined as: Ni¼1 qiA ¼ Ni¼1 M j¼1 qij ¼ j¼1 qBj ; qiA is the batch of loading
units moving between the fork terminal (i) and the trunk terminal TA (‘‘i’’ is assigned
PN
to ‘‘TA’’) (i = 1, 2, …, N), i.e., qiA = j¼1 qij ði ¼ 1; 2; . . .; N Þ; qiB is the batch of
loading units moving from the trunk terminal TB to the fork terminal (j), (‘‘j’’ is
P
assigned to ‘‘TB’’), (j = 1, 2, …, M), i.e., qBj = M i¼1 qij ðj ¼ 1; 2; : :; M Þ; N and M are
the number of origin and destination (local) terminals assigned to the trunk terminals
TA and TB, respectively. The loading units arrive at the origin ‘‘local’’ terminal (i) at
the rate of ki (i = 1, 2, …, N). They may be either directly transshipped to the feeder
train(s) or placed in the terminal storage area. The intensity of loading the feeder
trains at the origin terminal (i) is lI, while the intensity of unloading the feeder trains
at the destination terminal (j) is lj. The loading units leave the destination (local)
terminal (j) at the rate of kj (j = 1, 2, …, M). The times T0A and T0B are the moments at
which the trunk terminals TA and TB, respectively, change the operating regime. At
the time T0A the terminal TA is closed for further arrivals of incoming feeder trains and
opened for the departure of the outgoing trunk trains. At the time T0B, the terminal TB
is closed for arrivals of incoming trunk trains and opened for the departures of the
P P
feeder outgoing trains. The total delay of the batch of loading units Ni¼1 M j¼1 qij can
be computed as follows:
XN ffi ffi
1 1
D ¼ DB þ DT ¼ s0i þ s1i þ qiA þ ðT0A TiaA Þ þ ðTidA T0A þ sA Þ qiA
i¼1
l i 2k i
!2 !2
PN P M PN P M 2 3
qij qij T0B TjaB þ TjdB T0B þ sB þ
i¼1 j¼1 i¼1 j¼1 XM 6
!! 7
þ aA þ aB þ 6 7 qBj
lA lB 4 1 1 5
j¼1 s1j þ s0j þ qBj
lj 2 min kj ; lj
!
X N
liA X N X M
lAB X M
lBj
þ qiA þ qij þ qBj
i¼1
viA i¼1 j¼1 vAB j¼1 vBj
ð3:2aÞ
where
s0i, s0j is the time between the arrival and loading of the batch of loading
units qiA at the origin (local) terminal (i), and the time between the
arrival and departure of the batch qBj from the destination (local)
terminal (j), respectively (minutes, h);
s1i, s2j is the time of preparing the transport unit to depart from the origin
(local) terminal (i), and the time of preparing the transport unit for
unloading after arrival at the destination (local) terminal (j),
respectively, (minutes, h);
a A. a B is a binary variable taking the value ‘‘1’’ if the service of loading
units at the trunk terminals TA and TB is realized just after the
arrival of the whole batches qiA and qiB, respectively, and the value
‘‘0,’’ otherwise;
liA, lAB, lBj is the length of route connecting the origin (local) terminal (i) and
the trunk terminal TA, the trunk terminals TA and TB, and the trunk
terminal TB and the destination (local) terminal (j), respectively,
(km); and
viA, vAB, vBj is the average speed of transport unit (train/barge/vessel) on the
routes liA, lAB, and lBj, respectively (km/h).
Costs
The total costs of a TCD (Trunk line with Collecting/Distribution forks) network
can be estimated based on Eq. 3.2a as follows:
C ¼ CI þ CTR þ CTE
2 3
DbiA þ DTiA þ DbA þ DTAB þ DbB þ DTBj þ DbBj pij rij
6 þ cðdi0 ; Wi0 Þ fi0 þ cðdiA ; WiA Þ fiA þ cðdAB ; WAB Þ fAB 7
6 7
XN X M 6 7
6 b0i þ b1i 7
¼ 6 þ cBj dBj ; WBj fBj þ c dj0 ; Wj0 fj0 þ qiA 7
6
i¼1 j¼1 6 u Q 7
ffi i i 7
4 b0A þ b1A b0B þ b1B b0j þ b1j 5
þ þ qiA þ qBj þ qBj
uA Q A uB Q B uj Qj
ð3:2bÞ
where all symbols are analogous to those in previous equations.
HSs (Hub-and-Spoke(s)) network
A HSs (Hub-and-Spoke(s)) network usually consists of a hub (the central node—
terminal) and several spokes (peripheral nodes—terminals). A simplified layout
and inventories of loading units in this network during a cycle are shown in
Fig. 3.3.
Direct/shuttle trains N qHj μj λj

T1 Hj =∑ qij Ti q
i =1
τ1j τ0j qHj/μ j
qHj/λj
H
N
TI+1
qi H = ∑ qij
j =1
TN
Ti
λi
μi qiH
diH/Hj
N N
τ0i
qiH/ μi τ1i ∑ ∑ qij
i 1 j 1
T0
T1aH T2aH TiaH TNaH τH T1dH T2dH TjdH TNdH
Fig. 3.3 Scheme of a HS (Hub-and-Spoke) network (Janic et al. 1999; Janic 2005)
The spoke terminals Ti (i = 1, 2, …, N) can be connected directly to the hub

H and indirectly through the hub H between themselves by direct and/or shuttle
trains/barges transporting loading units between their origins and destinations (hub
and spoke nodes). The loading units enter and/or leave the spoke terminals (i.e.,
the network) usually by road. There, they are transshipped from the trucks to direct
or shuttle train(s)/barges which are then dispatched to the hub H, or vice versa.
Direct trains or barges operate between particular spokes by passing through the
hub, while shuttle trains operate exclusively between spokes and the hub. Loading
units can pass through the hub H either by staying on the same transport units
(wagons/barges) all the time (direct trains/barges) or by changing them (shuttle
trains/barges). In the former case of rail, wagons are exchanged between trains,
thus implying that the hub terminal actually operates as a conventional shunting
yard. In the latter case of rail, loading units are exchanged between different
transport units (wagons) while being in the hub, thus implying that the hub
operates as an advanced automated rail–rail terminal with vertical transshipments
of loading units. The ‘‘inventories’’ of loading units have a similar pattern as those
at a TCD network, i.e., the transshipment of loading units at spoke terminals Ti and
shunting of trains at the hub terminal H are analogous to the corresponding
operations carried out at the local terminals Tai and Taj, and the trunk terminals TA
and TB, respectively.
If the flow of loading units between spokes (i) and (j) is qij, the resulting flow of
loading units on the routes (iH) and (Hj) will be qiH and qHj, respectively. The total
number of loading units passing through the hub H is equal to the sum of all
individual flows qij (i, j [ N; I = j). The total delay of loading units served by the
network operated by rail during a cycle can be estimated as follows:
!2
N
X ffi N X
X N
1 1
D ¼ DB þ DT ¼ s0i þ s1i þ qiH þ ðT0 TiaH Þ qiH þ aH qij =lH
i¼1
li 2ki i¼1 j¼1
" !# ffi
X
N 1 1 N X
X N
liH lHj
þ TjdH T0 þ sH þ s0j þ s1j þ qHj qHj þ qij þ
j¼1
lj 2 min kj ; lj i¼1 j¼1
viH vHj
ð3:3aÞ
where
ki, kj is the intensity of arrival and departure of loading units at/from the
spoke terminals (i) and (j), respectively (LU/h);
li, lj is the intensity of loading/unloading of loading units at the spoke
terminals (i) and (j), respectively (LU/h);
TiaH is the arrival time of a train operating between the spoke (i) and hub (H);
T0 is the time when all trains arrived from N spokes are ready to be shunted
at the hub H;
aH is a binary variable taking the value ‘‘1’’ if shunting starts after the
arrival of the last among N trains at the hub (H), and the value ‘‘0,’’
otherwise;
lH is the average rate of shunting assumed to be approximately constant
and not dependent on the train and wagon characteristics (trains/h);
TjdH is the departure time of a train operating between the hub H and the
spoke (j);
sH is the total time needed for shunting N trains; shunting is assumed to
start just after the arrival of the last train from the batch of N trains
(hours);
liH, lHjj is the length of route connecting the spoke (i) and (j), via the hub (H),
respectively (km); and
viH, vHj is the travel speed of a train along the routes liH and lHJ, respectively
(km/h).
Costs
The total costs of a HSs (Hub-and-Spoke(s)) collection/distribution network can be
determined based on Eq. 3.3a as follows:
C ¼ CI þ CTR þ C
2 TE 3
Dbi þ DTiH þ DbH þ DTHj þ Dbj pij rij þ cðdi0 ; Wi0 Þ fi0
N 6 7
XN X
6 þ cðdih ; Wih Þ fiH þ cHj dHj ; WHj fHj þ c dj0 ; Wj0 fj0 7
¼ 6 ffi 7
i¼1 j¼1
4 b0i þ b1i bH0 þ bH1 b0j þ b1j 5
þ qiH þ qiH þ qHj þ qHj
ui Q i uH QH uj Qj
ð3:3bÞ
L/R (Line or Ring) network

A L/R (Line or Ring) network is a line or ring configuration where single- and/or
intermodal terminals are located in a line or ring in relation to the direction in
which the loading units are moving. Rail and inland navigation (barges/vessels)
direct and/or shuttle services usually connect these terminals where the exchange
of loading units can takes place between different transport modes: rail/rail, truck/
rail, truck/barge, and truck/short and deep-sea vessels. The loading units can enter
and leave the network at any terminal, which can also be their origins and des-
tinations. Figure 3.4 shows a simplified layout and inventories of loading units in
this network.
As in the networks presented above, the ‘‘inventories’’ of loading units emerge
in the terminals where they are collected and/or distributed. For example, at the
terminal Ti, the loading units intended to be sent to some other location, are
collected with the intensity kai (loading units/unit of time). After some time, the
batch of loading units qai is formed. Two possibilities for proceeding this batch qai
to its final destination can be applied. First, if a transport unit is immediately
available, the batch can be directly loaded (transshipped) to it. Otherwise, the
batch will be stored in the terminal and wait for a free transport unit to come and
pick-up it. In that case, the waiting time of the batch qai will be sai (min/h/days).
The intensity of loading depending on the available facilities and equipment in the
terminal and/or transport unit itself is lai (LU/h). After being transported to the
terminal Ti, the batch qdi is unloaded with the intensity ldi (LU/h). Loading and
unloading can be carried out in two ways, sequentially and simultaneously.
Sequential loading/unloading implies that the whole batch qdi is unloaded and then
the whole batch qai is loaded. Simultaneous transshipment is carried out
Fig. 3.4 Scheme of a L/R (Line or Ring) network (Janic et al. 1999; Janic 2005)
‘‘in parts,’’e.g., one loading unit from the batch qdi is unloaded first and then one
loading unit from the batch qai is loaded. After the batch qai is loaded, it is
transported to the final destination. The unloaded batch qdi is either directly
transshipped to the other transport units already being in the terminal (trucks,
trains, barges, or vessels) or stored in the terminal. The waiting time of the batch to
be picked-up is sdi. The rate of emptying the terminal Ti is kdi (LU/h). The batch
qai consists of loading units having their origin at the terminal Ti and destination at
P
other terminals Tj (i B j B N), e.g., qai ¼ Nj¼1 qij . The batch qdi consists of
loading units having their origin at the terminal Tj and destination at terminals Ti
P
(1 B j B i), e.g., qdi ¼ ij¼1 qij . Thus, the number of loading units transported
P P
between any two terminals Ti and Ti+1 is equal to qi;iþ1 ¼ ik¼1 Nj¼iþ1 qkj . The
delay of loading units while passing through the network can be estimated as
follows:
D ¼ DB þ0 DT 13
2 a2
PN aai 2kaiai þ ðsad þ sdi þ bi qdi =ldi Þ qai
6 @
A7
6 i¼1 þ s þ 1 qdi
q 7 XN
li;iþ1
¼66
di 2 minðkdi ;ldi Þ
ffi 2 ffi
di

7þ
7 qi;iþ1
4 qai ldi 5 i¼1 vi;iþ1
ci
2lai lai þ ldi
ð3:4aÞ
where
XN Xi Xi XN
qai ¼ q0 ; qdi ¼
j¼1 ij
q0 ; and qi;iþ1 ¼
j¼1 ji k¼1 j¼iþ1
q0kj for
i ¼ 1; 2; . . .; N 1
sad is the inter-arrival time of batches qai and qdi (minutes/h);

ai is a binary variable, which takes the value ‘‘1’’ if the batch qai instantly
emerges at the terminal (i), and the value ‘‘0,’’ otherwise;
bi is a binary variable, which takes the value ‘‘1’’ if the batch qai is loaded
after unloading of a complete batch qdi, and the value ‘‘0,’’ otherwise;
ci is a binary variable, which takes the value ‘‘1’’ if loading and unloading of
the batches qai and qdi at the terminal (i) are simultaneously performed, and
the value ‘‘0,’’ otherwise;
q0ij is the local flow of loading units originating from the terminal (i) and
sinking in the terminal (j) (i = j; i, j [ N) (LU);
li,i+1 is the length of the route connecting terminals (i) and (i ? 1) (km); and
vi,i+1 is the average speed of transit unit (train, barge, vessel) operating between
terminals (i) and (i ? 1) (km/h).
Costs
The total costs of a L/R (Line or Ring) network can be estimated based on
Eq. 3.4a, as follows:
X
N
C ¼ CI þ CTR þ CTE ¼ ½Dbi pi ri þ cðdi0 ; Wi0 Þ fi0 þ cðd0i ; W0i Þ f0i
i¼1
XN XN ffi
b0i þ b1i
þ c di;i1 ; Wi;i1 fi;i1 þ ðqai þ qdi Þ
i¼2 i¼1
ui Qi
ð3:4bÞ
3.2.2.3 Specific Performances
Network-specific performances are expressed by indicators and measures such as

the network size, average route length, capacity of transport vehicles, service
frequency, schedule delay, average transport speed and time, terminal time,
average delivery distance, speed and time, punctuality, reliability, coefficient of
terminal time, transport work, intensity of network services, technical productivity,
costs, and externalities. As analyzed, modeled, and quantified, they can be used as
the attributes/criteria for ranking different configurations of advanced freight
collection/distribution networks.
Indicators and measures
Size of the Network (SN)
The network size reflects its physical features such as the number of inter-modal
terminals (nodes), routes (links), as well as the number of single- and/or multimodal
subnetworks. In particular, the number of terminals reflects the spatial accessibility
of network services; their geographical (spatial) distribution defines the network’s
area coverage. The number of routes reflects the spatial extension of network
services. The number of single- and/or multimodal subnetworks indicates the level
of network complexity. This indicator is always preferred to be as high as possible.
Average Route Length (ARL)
The average route length reflects the average travel distance of transport means/
vehicles throughout a given network. This can be determined either for the entire
network, its subnetworks, and/or for particular routes operated by the same and/or
different transport modes. This indicator is preferred to be as low as possible and
as high as possible at the same time. This implies that the network should be able
to simultaneously offer services along very short (previously exclusively reserved
for road) to extremely long freight delivery distances (where rail and inland
waterways/barge transport modes are supposed to dominate).
Capacity of Transport Vehicle (CTV)

The capacity of a transport vehicle reflects the quantity of freight/goods shipments
in terms of weight and/or volume that can be loaded onto it. This is of relevance
for both transport operators and users-goods shippers/receivers. Generally, the
capacity is preferred to be as high as possible. Transport operators can benefit from
using transport units of a greater capacity since they can reduce the service fre-
quency and consequently operating costs of serving the given volume of demand.
Users may benefit and suffer losses at the same time. The benefits may include the
increased possibility to place their shipments on larger transit units, thus enabling
them to depart as soon as possible (i.e., at the desired time), while losses can
include increased schedule delays of goods due to the reduced service frequency.
Service Frequency (SF)
Service frequency is the number of departures scheduled on a given route of the
network during a given period of time (hour, day, and week). It is usually setup to fit
the time pattern of the expected demand and provide feasible operations for transport
operators. The service frequency is proportional to the volumes of freight demand
and inversely proportional to the capacity of transport unit(s) and rate of their uti-
lization, i.e., load factor. Users prefer the service frequency to be as high as possible.
Schedule Delay (SD)
Schedule delays reflect the way of interaction between the demand represented by
the number of freight/goods shipments (containers, swap-bodies and semi-trailers)
and the service frequency on particular routes of a given network. It is defined as the
time between the desired (most convenient) and the actual departure of loading units
from a given origin to a desired destination. This is actually the waiting time of
loading units at the origin terminal(s) for the nearest departure of transport service.
This time is mostly dependent on the time pattern of demand, service frequency (i.e.,
headway between the successive departures), and punctuality of services (delays).
Users and terminal operators prefer the schedule delay do be as short as possible: the
former because shorter schedule delays can make their networks more attractive and
competitive thanks to more frequent services, while the latter because longer
schedule delays may require larger special capacities for handling inventories of
loading and transport vehicles/units during the network/route cycle.
Average Transport Speed (ATS)
The average transport speed is the operating speed of transport means/vehicles
(i.e., units) in a given network. Shippers/receivers of loading units prefer this speed
to be as high as possible simply due to its contribution to shortening the door-to-
door delivery time of shipments Transport and terminal/logistics operators prefer
this speed to be as high as possible due to its contribution to generally shortening
the turnaround time of both transport and loading units. Such shorter turnaround
time requires engagement of smaller fleets of transport and loading units under
given circumstances, which generally contributes to decreasing operational costs.
Average Transport Time (ATT)

The average transport time is the time the transport units spend on the routes
between given origin and destination terminals. Generally, this time may have two
effects on transport operators: first, a shorter time of transport units can contribute
to shortening the total delivery time of loading units; second, the vehicle fleet
needed to serve given volumes of demand can be smaller than otherwise. As in the
case of operating speed, the networks providing the shortest transport times are
always preferable.
Terminal Time (TT)
The terminal time is the time that both transport and loading units spend in the
terminal(s) on-route between their origins and destinations. This time is usually
spent transshipping loading units between transport units operated by the same or
different transport modes. The terminal time influences the delivery time of
loading units and consequently the total delivery cycle of both transport and
loading units. Transport and terminal operators prefer this time to be as short as
possible since transport operators can offer faster and more reliable services and
thus increase their attractiveness, and at the same time increase utilization of their
fleet and reduce operating costs. Terminal operators can improve efficiency and
effectiveness of their services and consequently make them more attractive for
transport operators. In addition, more efficient and effective terminals require less
space (land) and are considered more environmentally friendly by the relevant
decision makers, authorities, and public.
Average Delivery Distance (ADD)
The average delivery distance is the distance between the origin and destination of
loading units measured along the transport line that connects them. It is mostly
dependent on the size of a given network and the spatial pattern of demand. The
average delivery distance is preferred to be as short as possible in order to increase
the competitiveness of advanced nonroad freight collection/distribution networks
compared to dominating road transport services on short distances.
Average Delivery Speed (ADS)
The average delivery speed is the speed of movement of loading units between their
origins and destinations. This is mainly influenced by the average transport speed
and terminal time. For a given delivery distance, on the one hand, it increases with
increasing of the transport speed, which decreases the average transport time; on the
other, it decreases with increasing of the terminal time. This speed is always
preferable to be as high as possible similarly as the average transport speed.
Average Delivery Time (ADT)
The average delivery time is the door-to-door time, i.e., the time loading units
spend between their origins and destinations in the given network. By definition,
this time will be shorter if loading units are delivered on shorter distances at a
higher delivery speed, and vice versa. It is always preferred to be as short as

possible. Generally, shorter average delivery times can yield several macro- and
micro-economic benefits. The main macro-economic benefit implies savings of
time, which can be used either for additional production, i.e., accelerating the
production and turnover processes, or for other nontransport activities. Transport
operators and users of their services can generate analogous micro-economic
benefits. In addition, the principal social benefit from shortening the average
delivery time is reducing the ‘‘frozen’’ working capital during its time in the
network, which may contribute to improved production and consumption pro-
cesses. Consequently, the advanced freight collection/distribution networks
offering the shortest delivery times are always preferable.
Punctuality (P)
Punctuality reflects delivery of loading units from shippers to receivers on-time, i.e.,
according to the schedule. This can be expressed by delays expressed as differences
between the actual and the scheduled (planned) time of departures and arrivals of
transport and loading units at the particular ‘‘reference locations’’ in a given network.
Usually, these include terminals, temporary storage facilities, and the doors of
receivers. In any case, these delays are preferred to be as short as possible.
Reliability (R)
Reliability is the ratio between the realized and planned (scheduled) transport
services in the given network. In this context, the transport services can be realized
either in accordance to the timetable or at the time most convenient for users/
shippers/receivers of loading units. The reliability is considered to be zero if the
scheduled departures do not take place and the loading units do not reach their
destinations. This can be caused due to the various impacts such as bad weather,
technical defects/failures, traffic incidents/accidents, and other reasons (e.g., the
staff industrial actions). The transport and terminal operators, and users prefer this
indicator to be as high as possible.
Coefficient of Terminal Time (CTT)
The coefficient of terminal time expresses the share of the terminal time in the total
door-to-door delivery time of loading units. On the one hand, it is relevant for
network and terminal operators, while on the other, it is important for terminal
manufacturers. The users/shippers/receivers of loading units consider terminal
operations inherently unproductive. However, they are necessary for exchanging
loading units within the same or between different transport modes. As mentioned
above, this time is not exclusively influenced by the terminal’s capacity but also by
the timetable(s) of incoming and outgoing transport services. This time and the
corresponding coefficient are preferred to be as short and as low as possible,
respectively. In order to achieve this, terminal operators should speed-up terminal
operations by better using existing or introducing NG (New Generation) increas-
ingly automated transshipment technologies. In addition, transport operators need
to properly match incoming and outgoing services at these terminals.
Transport Work (TW)

Transport work is the product of the number of loading units and their transport
distance. It increases in line with the number of the above-mentioned components
individually and/or both simultaneously. For network operators, this represents one
of the simplest measures of output and is preferred to be as great as possible. As
such, this output can reflect networks with (i) smaller volumes of loading units
transported over long distances; (ii) greater volumes of loading units transported
over shorter distances; and (iii) larger volumes of loading units transported over
longer distances. In some freight transport markets, higher output may provide a
greater market power and thus make the operator’s position more competitive.
Intensity of Network Services (INS)
Intensity of network services is defined as the transport work carried out over the
unit of the network or its route length per unit of time. It is preferred to be as high
as possible and can be particularly relevant for the local and central authorities
aiming to ensure balanced development and proper utilization of transport infra-
structure and co-ordination of land-use planning.
Technical Productivity (TP)
Technical productivity reflects the transport work carried out by one or a fleet of
transport units per unit of time. It is estimated as the product of the capacity of
transport unit (or fleet) and transport (operating, commercial) speed. By definition,
this indicator increases as either or both factors increase. From the standpoint of
network (transport) operators, it is preferred to be as high as possible.
Costs (C)
The costs reflect the total expenditures to operate a given network. These costs
directly influence the overall profitability and indirectly competitiveness of the
network (transport) and terminal operators. In many cases, both local and central
authorities can partially subsidize the networks with lower total cost. Conse-
quently, this indicator is generally preferred to be as low as possible.
Externalities (E)
Externalities represent the costs of impacts of a given network on the environment
and society. These include energy consumption and related emissions of GHG
(Green House Gases), land use, noise, congestion, and traffic safety (incidents/
accidents) (EC 1996). Communities and authorities at different (local, national,
and international) levels are particularly interested in as low as possible above-
mentioned impacts. Consequently, as in case of other transport concepts, advanced
collection/distribution networks with lower impacts will be preferable.
Table 3.1 Indicators and measures of performances as ranking attributes/criteria of advanced

freight collection/distribution networks (Janic et al. 1999; Janic 2005)
Indicator Unita Character
‘Benefit’ ‘Cost’
1. Size of the network (SN) - ?
2. Average route length (ARL) (km) ?
3. Capacity of transit vehicle (CTV) (TEU/TU) ?
4. Frequency (F) (TU/h) ?
5. Schedule Delay (SD) (h) 2
6. Average transport speed (ATS) (km/h) ?
7. Average transport time (ATT) (h) 2
8. Terminal time (TT) (h) 2
9. Average delivery distance (ADD) (km) 2
10. Average delivery speed (ADS) (km/h) ?
11. Average delivery time (ADT) (h) 2
12. Punctualityb (P) (min, h) ?
13. Reliabilityb (R) (%) ?
14. Coefficient of terminal time (CTT) 2 2
15. Technical productivity (TP) (TEU-km/h) ?
16. Transport work (TW) (TEU-km) ?
17. Intensity of network services (INS) (TEU-km/km) ?
18. Cost (C) (€/TEU-km) 2
19. Externalitiesb (E) 2
a
TEU/TU Twenty Foot
b
Indicators identified as relevant but not applied in the ranking
Equivalent Unit/Transit Unit; (km/h) kilometers/hour, (h) hour, (TU/h) Transit Units/hour, (TEU-
km/h) TEU-kilometers/hour, TEU-km TEU-kilometers, (TEU-km/km) TEU-kilometers/kilome-
ter of network length; (€/TEU-km) €//TEU-kilometer; TEU is an equivalent for 200 (foot)
container
3.2.2.4 A Methodology for the Multicriteria Ranking of Networks
The methodology applied to the multicriteria ranking of advanced freight col-

lection/distribution networks enables assessing their overall feasibility as alter-
natives respecting the preferences of particular actors/stakeholders involved. As
such, this methodology includes definitions of the particular attributes/criteria of
network performances, the ranking method, and its application to the selected
network cases.
Attributes/criteria
The above-mentioned network-specific indicators of performances are used as the
attributes/criteria for ranking different configurations of advanced freight collec-
tion/distribution networks. For such a purpose, they are classified as ‘‘benefit’’ and
‘‘cost’’ attributes/criteria given in Table 3.1.
The (+) sign denotes a ‘‘positive’’ (‘‘beneficial’’) preference, i.e., as the indi-
cator’s value is higher, the corresponding network concept will be more preferable,
and vice versa. The (-) sign denotes a ‘‘negative’’ (‘‘cost’’) preference of the
indicator, i.e., if the value of this indicator is greater, the corresponding network
will be less preferable, and vice versa.
Ranking method
The ranking method consists of its basic structure, techniques for normalizing the
values of attributes/criteria in order to make them convenient for comparison across
different network configurations, and the methods/models for assigning weights to
attributes/criteria reflecting their preferences for DMs (Decision Maker(s)).
Structure
The simple additive weighting (SAW) method is used as one of the best-known
and widely used multiple-criteria methods for ranking different alternatives, in this
case advanced freight collection/distribution networks. Its basic structure is as
follows (Hwang and Yoon 1981):
Let m represents the number of alternatives to be ranked and n the number of
criteria per alternative. Suppose that DM has assigned a set of importance weights
w = (w1, w2, …, wn) to particular criteria. Then the most preferable alternative A*
is selected such that:
)
Xn X
n

A ¼ maxi fAi g ¼ maxi wj rij = wj for i ¼ 1; 2; . . .; m: ð3:5Þ
j¼1 j¼1
Pn
where j¼1 wj ¼ 1, and rij is the normalized outcome of the alternative Ai with
respect to j-th ‘‘benefit’’ criterion (the ‘‘cost’’ criterion is converted to the ‘‘benefit’’
criterion by taking the reciprocal of the former before normalization).
Normalizing the values of attributes/criteria
Normalizing the values of attributes/criteria can be carried out by using different
techniques such as, for example, the ‘‘vector normalization’’ and the ‘‘linear scale
transformation’’ technique. In the given case, the latter technique is applied by
dividing the value of a given attribute/criterion by its maximum value, provided that
all attributes/criteria are defined as ‘‘benefit’ criteria (i.e., the larger the value of the
attribute/criterion, the greater its preference, and vice versa). The ‘cost’ attributes/
criteria can be treated as the ‘‘benefit’’ attributes/criteria by taking the inverse of their
outcomes, and vice versa. Let xij be the outcome of the ‘‘benefit’’ attribute/criterion
(j) of the alternative (i). Then, the transformed outcome of xij will be equal to:
xij
rij ¼ ð3:6aÞ
maxi xij
It is clear that: 0 B rij B 1 and that the outcome is more favorable as rij
approaches 1.0. The advantage of this scale-transformation is that all outcomes are
transformed in a linear (proportional) way. For the ‘‘cost’’ attribute/criterion xij, the
transformed outcome will be as follows:
1=xij
rij ¼ ð3:6bÞ
max i 1=xij
Thus, rij = 0 implies the worst outcome and rij = 1 the best outcome of a given
attribute/criterion (Hwang and Yoon 1981).
Assigning weights to attributes/criteria
Assigning weights to particular attributes/criteria to reflect the DM’s preference
for a given alternative(s) for can be carried out by different methods. In general,
weights can be assigned by experts and/or DM (Decision Maker) according its
own preferences. If expert weights are lacking, analytical methods can be applied,
one of which is the entropy method used in this chapter but described in detail in
Chap. 5, (Hwang and Yoon 1981).
3.2.2.5 Application of the Methodology
Input
Sixteen of the 19 indicators of performances of the above-mentioned collection/
distribution networks have been estimated in Table 3.1 for the given cases of the
above-mentioned advanced collection/distribution networks. This has uncovered a
high diversity of particular indicators and measures across the routes and sub-
networks of the same and/or different networks. Therefore, the average (i.e.,
typical) values of particular indicators and measures have been used. Conse-
quently, with the exception of the indicators ‘‘Size of the network’ (1), ‘‘Transport
work’’ (17), and ‘‘Intensity of network services’’ (16), which relate to the entire
network, all other indicators relate to an average (typical) route of the given
network. This guarantees consistency of the approach, which, at the same time,
possesses advantages and disadvantages. The main advantage seems to be the high
level of simplification and relative easy use of the selected ranking method/model.
The main disadvantage seems to be the risk of losing some important details on
network performances due to the high level of aggregation of values of particular
indicators. The values of indicators and measures of performances of the selected
cases of collection/distribution networks used as the ranking attributes/criteria are
given in Table 3.2.
Results
The SAW method applied to the above-mentioned 15 advanced collection/distri-
bution networks as alternatives has provided estimates of their performances and
ranks given in Table 3.3.
Among the three P–P collection/distribution networks, the RoadRailer network
appears the one with the best performances followed by the RailRoads and
Jämsänkoski network. The TCD network concepts have not been identified in the
considered sample. Among the six evaluated HS collection/distribution networks,
106
Table 3.2 Indicators and measures of performances of the selected advanced freight collection/distribution networks (according to the SAW method) (Janic
et al. 1999; Janic 2005)
Network Indicator/measure of performancesa
SN ARL CTV F SD ATS ATT TT ADD ADS ADT CTT TW TP INS C
Point-to-Point
Jämsänkoski 5/4 2009 26 1 84.0 26.6 75.5 48.0 2009 15.9 126.1 0.381 104437 728 259 –
RailRoads 8/5 1121 42 7 12.0 38.0 29,5 12.0 1121 20.9 41.5 0.289 1647870 1597 294 –
RoadRailer 2/2 607 45 4 22.6 58.0 10.5 3.7 607 42.7 14.2 0.261 399526 2594 355 –
Trunk line-TCD – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –
Hub-and-Spoke
Wembley EFOC 16/15 300–1670 40 7 12.0 40.3 24.1 1.0 766 31.8 25.1 0.382 3564760 1733 232 –
Hub of Metz and the 37/37 60–2400 44 28 3.0 35.5 22.7 4.3 1619 31.4 51.7 0.083 9576292 1564 1186 –
Quality Net
‘‘Drehscheiben’ – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –
The NEN 8/7 100–750 65 4 21.0 32.3 5.4 28.8 370 9.2 40.3 0.715 4667612 2522 603
Bahntrans 11/10 100–750 40 7 12.0 20.6 5.8 6.0 350 15.2 23.0 0.261 9100000 1200 4550 –
GT Hupacb 13/12 320–1250 43 9 9.3 45.2 19.7 24.0 862 19.7 43.7 0.549 5414264 1932 638 –
Line (or) Ring
Piggy-back – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –
RingZug 10/1 167 82 35 2.4 23.7 7.0 1.6 167 19.4 8.6 0.186 623200 1946 5438 –
The ‘‘Linienzug’ 6/7 259 34 24 3.5 95.7 2.7 3.5 259 41.8 6.2 0.565 280376 3378 537 –
Mixed
Voltri 9/8 140–1500 27 7 18.9 60.0 4.2 33.0 251 6.8 37.2 0.877 373329 1620 164 –
Sogemar 26/19 100–500 27 3 28.0 45.7 20.3 28.0 647 14.3 45.3 0.552 1052973 1231 168 –
FlexNode – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –
a
See Sect. 3.2.2.3 and Table 3.1 for an explanation of the abbreviations
b
GT Gateway Terminal
3 Advanced Transport Systems
Table 3.3 Performances and ranks of the selected collection/distribution networks in the given
example (Janic et al. 1999; Janic 2005)
Network Performance Rank
P–P (Point-to-Point)
Jämsänkoski 0.198 3
RailRoads 0.686 2
RoadRailer 0.745 1
TCD (Trunk line-CD forks) – –
HSs (Hub-and-Spoke(s))
Wembley EFOC 0.430 4
Hub of metz and the quality net 0.569 1
Drehscheiben – –
The NEN 0.314 5
Bahntrans 0.550 2
GT Hupac 0.472 3
L / R (Line or Ring)
Piggy-back – –
Ring zug 0.695 1
The ‘‘Linienzug’ 0.529 2
M (Mixed)
Voltri 0.585 2
Sogemar 0.744 1
Flex-node – –
the rail-based Hub of Metz and the Quality Net emerges as the preferable network.
The Ring-Zug Rhein-Rhur network appears the preferable L/R collection/distri-
bution network, while the Sogemar network is identified as preferable among the
three M collection/distribution networks.
3.2.2.6 Preferable Network(s)
The multicriteria ranking of the above-mentioned advanced freight collection/

distribution networks enables us to synthesize the generic performances, which
should be similar to those of the RoadRailer (P–P), Hub of Metz and the Quality-
Net (HSs), Ring Zug Rhein-Rhur (L/R), and Sogemar (M) networks.
The RoadRailer network as the most preferable P–P network suggests the
following generic performances of similar networks:
• The network consists of a begin- and end-terminal where the pure sequential
exchange of loading units between road and rail (and vice versa) takes place;
• The network serves relatively large and predictable freight flows in both
directions, on transport distances of between approximately 400 and 600 km;
• The large volumes of predictable and regular freight flows justify operating shuttle
(or direct) trains at a regular frequency; this frequency should be matched with
demand (typically, one service per day or one service per 2 days seems to be quite
acceptable);
• Flexibility in adapting the transport capacity to demand through changing the
service frequencies and capacity of transport units (trains) makes this network
both beneficial for its operators and users (shippers/receivers);
• The relationships between transport speed, delivery distance, and total terminal
time provide the service quality A (delivery in 24 h) and/or B (delivery in 48 h);
and
• Operating trains of a relatively large capacity at relatively high transport speeds
produces the concept’s high technical productivity, intensity of network
services, and transport work; these make such networks competitive to road-
haulage in equivalent freight transport markets (characterized by similar
volumes of freight and delivery distances) with respect to the total delivery time,
utilization of the available infrastructure, and reduction of the negative impacts
on the environment and society.
The Hub of Metz and Quality Net network as the most preferable HSs network
suggests the following generic performances of similar networks:
• The network should be as large as possible in terms of the number of terminals
(nodes) and routes (links). The hub terminal should be located at the intersection
of important rail-lines (‘‘axis’’), i.e., in a central location with respect to the
location of the other terminals (spokes); it needs to provide a sequential
exchange of rail wagons and/or wagon groups (and loading units) between the
incoming and outgoing trains; the exchange time and the total terminal time of
loading and transport units can be shortened by ensuring proper balance of the
inbound and outbound train timetable(s);
• The spoke terminals should be located over a large area (such as half of Europe)
in order to provide high spatial accessibility of the network services and delivery
of loading units over a wide spectrum of distances (routes) (from several
tenths—let’s say 60 km to a few thousand—2,500 km); the spatial location of
terminals and high diversity of route lengths allows the establishment of dif-
ferent subnetworks (and thus segmentation of markets and related services),
which begin and end at the central/common hub;
• Regular services of direct trains should be provided on each route connecting
the spokes and the hub; the frequencies should be sufficient, at least one per day,
but adjusted to demand, capacity, and utilization of trains;
• Regarding the frequency (i.e., schedule delay), delivery distance, average
transport speed (20–40 km/h), and the average terminal time (about four hours),
different types of quality of service can be offered: A/B (delivery up to 24 h on
distances up to 800 km), A/C (delivery up to 48 h on distances from 800 to
1,600 km), and A/D (delivery up to 72 h on distances over 1,600 km);
• With respect to transport and delivery distances and distribution of the route
lengths in the network (long routes prevail), the terminal time is expected to
have a rather negligible influence on the total delivery time of loading units;
therefore, introduction of NG terminal transshipment technologies to speed-up
the exchange of loading units between incoming and outgoing trains seems to be
of rather low added value; and
• A network of such a configuration and frequency of services is capable to replace
the high volumes of transport work on the particular routes, which otherwise
would be carried out by road; thus, it can offer significant reduction of impacts on
the environment and society over a wide area as compared to road haulage.
The Ring Zug Rhein-Rhur network as the preferable L/R network suggests the
following generic performances of similar networks:
• The network should consist of a reasonable number of terminals (say about 10),
located at relatively short distances (about 30–40 km) along the line or ring. The
begin-, end-, and intermediate terminals should provide sequential exchange of
loading units between the same and/or different transport modes. The network
should cover a relatively small area (region) and should be able to generate and
attract big, regular, predictable, and dense freight flows; this justifies frequent
shuttle train services (a few per day) delivering loading units to very close
destinations, up to 30–40 km (regional) and up to 200 km international transport;
• The high frequency, i.e., very short schedule delay, short delivery distance,
acceptable transport speed, and the short terminal time guarantee A-quality
services (delivery in up to 24 h); the terminal time may be further reduced by
introducing NG terminal transshipment technologies enabling simultaneous
(pure and batch) exchange of loading units; this may additionally rise the
competitiveness of the network(s) in short distance markets compared to the
currently dominating road haulage; and
• The high frequency and capacity of trains operating along short distances pro-
duce large quantities of transport work, which would otherwise be realized by
road; this could significantly mitigate the environmental and social impacts of
freight transport in the given region while improving utilization of the rail and
terminal infrastructure.
The Sogemar network as the preferable M network suggest the following
generic performances of similar networks:
• The network should consist of a great number of terminals where the sequential
exchange of loading units between the same and/or different transport modes
takes place; this makes the layout and corresponding through time of these
terminals more dependent on the inbound and outbound timetable(s) than on the
characteristics and efficiency of their operations; different subnetworks operat-
ing independently from each other and capable to cover a relatively wide area(s)
can be established between particular terminals; each subnetwork may include
different transport modes such as short-sea, road, and rail; the rail (inland)
portion of the specific subnetwork can cover a wide range of distances, from
about 100 to 1,500 km;
• Regular and frequent services by shuttle trains/barges/vessels matching the
offered capacity to demand as much as possible should be provided on the
particular inland routes; and
• the length of delivery distances (routes), delivery speed(s), and the terminal
time(s) guarantee A-quality services (delivery in up to 24 h); introducing NG
terminal transshipment technologies in order to improve the overall terminal and
network efficiency and effectiveness can be reasonable; all these make the
particular rail-based inland subnetworks competitive to road haulage.
3.2.3 Evaluation
Advanced freight collection/distribution networks possess both advantages

(Strengths and Opportunities) and disadvantages (Weaknesses and Threats).
Advantages
• Larger batches of loading units transported at higher speeds require a smaller
number of larger but highly utilized transport units (means/vehicles), lower
service frequency, and less labor on the transport side of logistics chain(s); this
increases the efficiency of operations, thus leading to reduction of transport-
related operational cost in both absolute and relative terms;
• The said reduction in transport operational costs partially compensates the
additional costs of loading units due to their inventorying at terminals; and
• Deploying larger trains and barges, or their more frequent services on main
routes-markets/corridors brings: (i) increased utilization of capacity of the rail
and inland navigation infrastructure; and (ii) specialization of transport opera-
tors for the specific services and consequent improvement of the competitive-
ness in the corresponding markets.
Disadvantages
• Formation of inventories of loading units in the network nodes-terminals
causing their delays as a generic feature of these networks;
• Requiring as great as possible inventories of loading units in order to fill rea-
sonably frequent and higher capacity direct and shuttle train or barge services on
the main routes of these networks;
• Requiring more storage space, handling facilities, and equipment, energy and
workforce in terminals for handling larger inventories of loading units, thus
increasing the related costs;
• Diminishing the commercial speed and related door-to-door delivery time of
freight/goods shipments due to their inventorying at terminals;
• Increasing time of spending larger higher-valued (time-sensitive) freight/goods
shipments in the network due to inventorying of loading units, which propor-
tionally depreciates them; and
• Inability to contribute to mitigating impacts on the environment and society
even more particularly at the local level due to the inevitable use of trucks for
delivering loading units to/from the begin- and end- terminal(s).
Finally, advanced freight collection/distribution networks can be quite rightly

considered advanced transport systems mainly thanks to their organizational, opera-
tional, and economic advancements as compared to their conventional counterparts.
3.3 Road Mega Trucks
1950s Direct-injection turbo-charged diesel engines become standard; standard-sized steel truck
containers (that can be fixed to a trailer chassis for use on the road) are developed by
Malcom McLean (U.S.)
1996 Common standards/limits/measures on the maximum length and weight of road trucks
operating throughout EU (European Union) Member States are set up by the EC
(European Commission) (Directive 96/53/EC) (Europe)
2008 25.25 m long road mega trucks (as compared to the standard length of 18.75 m) are
allowed to operate in Finland, Sweden, Norway, Denmark, the Netherlands, and
Germany for the period of 3 years (Europe)
2009 The EC (European Commission) begins considering raising the maximum weight of road
trucks to 60 tons and their length to 25.25 m (as compared to the standards of 40 tons
and 18.75 m, respectively) (Europe)
A road mega truck is defined as the largest truck currently or planned to be used
for transporting freight/goods by road in a given region (country, continent). The
attribute ‘‘largest’’ refers to the truck size, i.e., its gross weight and length. In this
case, the size mainly contributes to considering these trucks as ‘‘advanced’’. The
analysis below refers to these largest and consequently most advanced road trucks
in Europe. Their implementation is currently a very pressing issue for the EU
(European Union) transport policy makers as they face the dilemma whether to
allow their wide implementation throughout the Member States, similarly as in the
USA. Beginning in 1992, the gross weight, number of axles, and length of road
trucks have been limited (harmonized and standardized) to 40–44 tons, 5–6 axles,
and 18.75 m, respectively. This gives a maximum axle load of these vehicles of
40–44/5, i.e., between 8 and 8.8 tons/axis. As such, these vehicles have always
been referred as the ‘‘standard’’ trucks and used as ‘‘term(s) of reference’’ for other
trucks. Thus, trucks heavier or longer than the above-mentioned standard ones can
be can be classified as mega trucks, ‘‘road trains,’’ or ‘‘gigaliners.’’ As far as the
scale of using these trucks is concerned, from the beginning of 2009, some cat-
egories of mega trucks have been in operations in the Netherlands (weight of
50 tons and length of 18.75 m), Sweden (weight of 60 tons and length of
25.25 m), and Finland (weight of 44/48 tons and length of 25.25 m), with some
pilot trials also being carried out in Germany. Consequently, the EC’s (European
Commission’s) Commissioner for Transport has left each Member State set up its
own limits on the gross weight and length of road mega trucks, but exclusively
with respect to operations in their own countries. In parallel, the EC has been
considering a proposal based on scientific research to allow raising the maximum
gross weight of trucks to 60 tons, 7–8 axes, and length to 25.25 m (as it is the case
in Sweden). This would represent an increase of the truck’s gross weight by 50 %
and length by almost 40 %; the average axle load would remain almost the same or
even decrease in the case of vehicles with 8 axles to 7.5 tons/axle as compared to
standard trucks that typically carry 8 tons/axle (EC 1996; UIC 2008).
3.3.2.1 Background
The road mega tracks are characterized by infrastructural, technical/technological,

operational, economic, environmental, and social/policy performances.
The infrastructural performances relate to suitability for using the existing road
network in Europe. The technical/technological performances include the truck
design and carrying capacity, engine, use of ITS/ICTTechnologies) (Intelligent
Transport System/Information Communication Technologies), and technical pro-
ductivity. The economic performances related mainly to the operational cost. The
environmental performance relate to the fuel consumption and emissions of GHG
(Green House gases), and land use. The social/policy performances of mega trucks
include noise, congestion, and safety (traffic incidents/accidents).
In general, the European road network is designed to meet the existing standards
on the weight and length of the heaviest standard trucks. However, there is evi-
dence that this network is not completely suitable to efficiently, effectively, and
safely accommodate trucks heavier and longer than the standard ones of a weight
of 40–44 tons and a length of 18.75 m (European Directive 96/53/EC (EC 1996)).
Consequently, the more widespread use of heavier and longer trucks (mega
trucks), with a maximum gross weight of 60 tons and length of 25.25 m, will
likely require modification of the existing road infrastructure as follows (ASECAP
2010; UIC 2008):
• Bridge-bearing structures will need to be significantly reinforced in order to
accommodate higher loads and maintain the current safety standards (crashes of
mega trucks inherently create higher dynamic stresses, which need to be absorbed
by crash barriers of greater dimensions; in addition, since these dynamic forces are
also absorbed by the bearing structure, this also needs to be reinforced);
• Tunnels will need to be changed structurally including re-sizing the profiles of
the parking niches/breakdown bays; since the increased load of trucks inherently
3.3 Road Mega Trucks 113
increases the risk of fire almost proportionally, this will be need to be carried out
in several European countries (Alpine and Pyrenees regions, etc.);
• Access to and the parking areas used for the mandatory breaks of drivers during
their journeys will need to be reconstructed;
• Interconnections between primary and secondary roads such as junctions,
roundabouts, etc., designed and built according to the regulations related to the
above-mentioned ‘‘standard’’ trucks, will need also to be partially reconstructed
and modified; and
• Experience and evidence including data on the true impact of mega trucks on
the wearing and tearing of the road infrastructure will need to be obtained
through experimental trials and simulations under different conditions.
Facilitating these shortcomings requires rather substantial investment, despite
uncertainty about exactly how much investment is really needed. For example, do
the roads and turning areas need to be widened? The turning cycle of road mega
trucks is also the subject of EU regulation, which states that any vehicle inde-
pendently of its configuration must be able to make a turning circle within a
corridor bounded by two circles, the inner with the radius of 5.3 m and the outer
with the radius of 12.5 m (EC 1996; Larsson 2009).
Nevertheless, the more widespread use of road mega trucks could bring some
benefits through increased utilization of the capacity of existing road infrastruc-
ture. This capacity is expressed by the maximum quantity of goods (tons) trans-
ported over a given road link/line or passing through its ‘‘reference location’’
during a given period of time under given conditions. For a single mega truck
replacing its standard counterpart, the increase could be about 50 %. This could
mitigate the need for expanding the road infrastructure in order to facilitate the
forthcoming expected growth of road freight/goods transport demand efficiently,
effectively, and safely. Consequently, the pressure for additional land use/take for
building new roads could be mitigated.
3.3.2.3 Technical/Technological and Operational Performances
The technical/technological and operational performances of road mega trucks

relate to their design influencing capacity, i.e., payload, engine influencing fuel
consumption, ITS/ICTTechnologies) (Intelligent Transport System/Information
Communication Technologies), and technical productivity.
Design and capacity
The design of mega trucks appears to be relatively simple. In addition to a stronger
engine, a larger trailer is usually attached to a standard truck weighting 40 tons.
Figure 3.5 shows the typical configuration of a standard and mega truck. Contrary
to the length, the frontal area of a mega truck is almost the same as that of a
standard truck, i.e., about 7.7 m2, which generates an aerodynamic drag coefficient
of about 0.6.
2.35m 7.82m 7.82m
4.50m
18.75m
2.35m 7.82m 13.00m
4.50m
25.25m
Fig. 3.5 Scheme of typical configuration of a standard and mega truck (Fraunhofer 2009)
The rolling resistance coefficient is about 0.0068 (AEA 2011). Increase in the
gross weight of 50 % increases the payload capacity of a mega truck as compared
to its standard counterpart by about 60 % in terms of weight (40 vs. 25 tons), 50 %
in terms of the number of pallets (52 vs. 34), and 42 % in terms of the volume of
freight/goods (160 vs. 105 m3). In addition, the ratio between the payload capacity
and the gross weight of a mega truck is: 40/60 = 0.667, which is about 6.7 %
greater than that of a standard truck: 25/40 = 0.625, which contributes to its
higher overall efficiency. Consequently, the transport capacity of the operator’s
fleet will incrementally increase by about 60 % as soon as the fleet of mega trucks
is deployed instead of the fleet of their standard counterparts.
Engine
The engines of both standard and mega trucks is designed respecting the Euro V
emissions legislation4 with different volumes of 10, 11, 12, 13, or 16 l in line or 6,
12 l V6 or 16 or 18 l V8 configuration. Following the emissions legislation, these
diesel engines require the use of both EGR (Exhaust Gas Recirculation) and SCR
(Selective Catalytic Reduction) after treatment to meet the prescribed emission
limits.
4
In Europe, two solutions to meet emissions legislation are widely adopted at Euro V: one using
high levels of EGR along with DPF (Diesel Particulate Filter); and the other using SCR (Selective
Catalytic Reduction). At Euro VI, it is anticipated that OMs (Overall Emission(s)) will follow the
current technologies in Japan and USA using both EGR and SCR to meet the new prescribed
emission limits. Both will have an impact on the fuel consumption, which could be reduced
through engine power transmission technologies available. In Europe, AMT (Automatic Manual
Transmission) is favored while in the U.S. and Japan the standard fit transmissions are both
manual. In particular, AMT can reduce fuel consumption by up to about 7 % depending on the
driver’s skills.
Road mega trucks are expected to have generally stronger engines than standard
trucks, with the power of about: 290–450 kW (1 kW = 1.36 hp; kW—kilowatt;
hp—horse power) at 1,700 rpm (rotations per minute). This power can be adjusted
during operation by either ATMS (Automated Manual System) offering 12 to 16 or
MS (Manual System) with 12 speed changes.
ITS/ITC (Intelligent Transport System/Information Communication
Technologies)
ITS/ICT (Intelligent Transport System/Information Communication Technologies)
are deployed to enable efficient, effective, and safe trips of mega trucks. They
include adaptive cruise control, navigation system, fleet board telematics system,
and forward collision warning system. The adaptive cruise control and collision
warning systems are foremost comfort and safety systems, respectively. In addi-
tion, they constrain harsh acceleration and braking maneuvers, which, depending
on the driver, may improve efficiency of the fuel consumption by up to 1 %. The
fleetboard telematics system records the data of several vehicle parameters, which
can be transmitted in real-time or at specified intervals. Typically, these include
information/data on the vehicle speed, engine rpm, the rate of braking and
acceleration, idling time, etc. Together with the driver ID (Identification) obtained
from the digital tachograph, this information/data enable any potential correlation
between the driving style and fuel consumption to be analyzed (AEA 2011).
Technical productivity is expressed by the quantity of output produced by one unit
of production input (in this case a single vehicle) per unit of time. For either a
loaded standard or mega truck, this can be estimated as follows:
TPðk; PL; vðdÞÞ ¼ k PL vðdÞ ð3:7Þ
where
PL is the vehicle payload capacity (tons/truck);
k is the vehicle load factor (between 0 and 1); and
v(d) is the vehicle speed dependent on the freight/goods delivery distance d.
The technical productivity TP(,PL, v(d)) expressed in t-km/h (ton-kilometers/

hour) increases in proportion with the payload, operating or commercial speed, or
both simultaneously. For example, a full mega truck operating at a speed of
70 km/h has the technical productivity of 40 tons 9 70 km/h = 2,800 t-km/h. A
full standard truck operating at the same speed has the productivity of
26 tons 9 70 km/h = 1,820 t-km/h.
The main economic performances of standard and mega trucks include their
operating costs. The operating costs of standard trucks include the costs of vehicle
depreciation (10 %), interest (2 %), insurance (6 %), road tax (2 %), tires (1 %),
fuel (30 %), wages/labor (26 %), overheads (18 %), and others (5 %) (The figures
in brackets illustrate the share of particular cost component in the total operating
costs for a standard truck operated by an EU road freight transport operator (AEA
2011)). The structure of operating costs of mega trucks is similar with the
exception of a higher proportion of insurance, road tax, and tire costs. As
expressed in averages such as €/vehicle-km and/or €/t-km, the operating costs of
both vehicles become relevant for setting the prices of services. In general, these
costs decrease with increasing of the delivery distance more than proportionally,
thus indicating the existence of economies of distance. The typical analytical
relationship obtained by using the empirical data is as follows (Janic 2007):
cðdÞ ¼ a0 d a1 ð3:8aÞ
where
c(d) is the average unit cost (€/vehicle-km);
a0, a1 are coefficients to be estimated; and
d is the distance (km).
By dividing the cost c(d) in Eq. 3.8a by the vehicle payload capacity or the
actual payload, the average cost per unit of payload per unit distance (€/t-km) can

cðd; PL; kÞ ¼ a0 d a1 =ðk PLÞ ð3:8bÞ
where the particular symbols are analogous to those in the previous equations.
The payload capacity and corresponding unit costs in Eq. 3.8b can also be
expressed depending on the type of goods transported per pallet and/or per unit of
available space on the vehicle (m3).
Comparison between the average unit costs of mega and standard road trucks
can be carried out after introducing the following hypothesis (Fraunhofer 2009):
The mega truck is more efficient than its standard counterpart mainly thanks to its
greater payload capacity. Further elaboration in this section is based on the potential
substitution of standard trucks with mega trucks and the possible effects. For such
purpose, the generic model of the substitutive capability of mega trucks as com-
pared to that of the standard trucks based on the equivalent quantity of freight/goods
to be transported along the given distance/route is developed. Let (i) and (j) be the
standard and the mega truck, respectively. The number of required vehicles of both
categories, ni and nj, respectively, can be estimated as follows:
ni ðd Þ ¼ Qðd Þ=ki PLi and nj ðd Þ ¼ Qðd Þ=kj PLj ð3:8cÞ
where
Q(d) is the quantity of goods to be transported either by truck (i) or by truck
(j) on the distance d (tons);
ki,kj is load factor of the truck (i) and (j), respectively;
PLi, PLj is the payload capacity of the truck (i) and (j), respectively (tons); and
d is the delivery distance of the freight/goods Q(d) (km);
If the trucks (j) substitute the trucks (i), the factor of substitution can be esti-
mated as follows:
Sj=i ðdÞ ¼ nj ðdÞ=ni ðd Þ ¼ kj PLj =ki PLi ð3:8dÞ
where the symbols are as in the previous equations.
Applying Eqs. 3.8a, b, c, d to the above-mentioned data on the payload capacity
of both types of trucks indicates that two full mega trucks can substitute three full
standard trucks, which a priori represents savings in operators’ costs. But how
much do these savings amount to? The answer lies in estimating the difference
between the average unit costs of transporting a given quantity of freight/goods
according to the above-mentioned scenario (2 instead of 3 vehicles deployed). For
such purpose, the given quantity of freight/goods is assumed to be consolidated
into TEU (20-Foot Equivalent Unit) containers as the most common in Europe.
Each of these containers has an average gross weight of 14.3 tons (12 tons of
goods plus 2.3 tons of tare) (Janic 2007). Consequently, respecting their payload
capacity, a standard truck can carry the equivalent of two TEUs and a mega truck
the equivalent of 3 TEUs. Thus, for six TEUs, 3 standard or 2 mega trucks are
needed. Then, applying the regression technique based on (Eqs. 3.9a, b) to the
empirical data, the average costs for a standard truck loaded with 2 TEUs is
estimated as follows: ci(d) = 5.456d-0.277 (€/vehicle-km) (k = 0.85; N = 26;
R2 = 0.781; 25 B d B 1,600 km) (Janic 2007). By taking into account the dif-
ference in the payload capacity and the number of required trucks for the above-
mentioned task, the average costs for the mega truck are estimated similarly as
follows: cj(d) = 6.913d-0.277 (€/vehicle-km). Both regressions indicate economies
of distance at both standard and mega trucks. At the same time, for the given
distance, the average unit cost of a mega truck is greater by about 27 %, However,
by dividing these costs by the corresponding payload capacity and assumed load
factor, the following average unit costs are obtained for a standard truck and for a
mega truck, respectively: ci(d, 26, 0.85) = 0.201d-0.277 (€/t-km) and cj(d, 40,
0.77) = 0.167d-0.277 (€/t-km). In calculating the mega truck average unit costs, its
lower load factor, higher fuel efficiency and share of fuel costs in the total oper-
ating costs are taken into account. Consequently, it seems realistic to expect that,
for a given distance, the average mega truck unit costs will be by about 20 % lower
than those of standard trucks under the above-mentioned substitution scenario.
The environmental and social/policy performances of mega trucks relate to their

energy/fuel consumption and related emissions of GHG (Green House Gases), and
land use.
70
Standard truck
Mega truck
r - Fuel consumption - l/100km 60
50
40
30
20
10
0
10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120
v - Operating speed - km/h
Fig. 3.6 Relationship between the operating speed and the average fuel consumption of the road
standard and mega trucks (AEA 2011)
Fuel consumption
The engines of both standard and mega trucks consume diesel fuel as a derivative
of crude oil. If this consumption is at the rate r (l/100 km) for each truck, the total
consumption of the given convoy of n trucks operating along the distance d can be
estimated as follows:
FCðnÞ ¼ n r ð100 dÞ ð3:9aÞ
The main operational factors influencing the fuel consumption are the operating
speed, and the aerodynamic and the rolling resistance, the latter being higher in the
case of a mega truck compared to a standard truck due to the greater number of
axes (7/8 vs. 5/6). With increasing speed, the total resistance linearly increases
mainly thanks to an increase in the aerodynamic resistance on the account of the
rolling resistance (AEA 2011). Figure 3.6 shows an example of the relationship
between the average fuel consumption and the operating speed of a mega and a
standard truck with 70 % of the maximum payload of 40 and 25 tons, respectively.
As can be seen, the average fuel consumption of both categories of trucks first
decreases with increasing of the operating speed, then remains relatively constant
for a range of speeds between 40 and 60 km/h, and then increases again. In most
European countries, the maximum speed of these trucks is and will be limited to
90 km/h on motorways and 70 km/h on other roads, which implies that the cor-
responding fuel consumption will be 29–32 l/100 km for standard and 40–45 l/
100 km for mega trucks.
The stronger engines of road mega trucks will enable performances similar to
those of its standard counterpart. For example, if the engine power/gross weight
ratio remains the same as that of standard trucks, mega trucks will need more
powerful engines by about 50 %. Despite having stronger engines, mega trucks are
expected to be more fuel efficient than standard trucks by about 8, 10/11, 10, and
3 % with respect to the gross weight and payload capacity in terms of weight, the
number of pallets, and the volumes of goods, respectively. At the same time,
however, mega trucks will certainly consume more fuel in absolute terms (by
about 40 % per unit of distance—l/100 km; l—liter) than their standard counter-
parts (UIC 2008; http://lipasto.vtt.fi/yksikkopaastot/tavaraliikennee/tieliikennee/
tavara_tiee.htm).
Emissions of GHG
Similarly as fuel consumption, emissions of GHG (Green House Gasses) can be
considered for a single vehicle and for a convoy of vehicles. For example, the
emissions of GHG in terms of CO2e (Carbon-Dioxide equivalents) by a convoy of
standard or mega trucks operating along the distance d can be estimated as follows:
EM ¼ FC e ¼ n r ð100 dÞ e ð3:9bÞ
where
FC is the total fuel consumption of the convoy of n trucks/vehicles (l; l-liter));
r is the rate of fuel consumption per a vehicle/truck (l/100 km); and
e is the emission rate per unit of fuel consumed (kgCO2e/l of fuel)
The other symbols are as in the previous equations.
The rate e usually relates to on-wheel emissions including emissions from
manufacturing fuel and emissions from the direct burning of fuel.
Mega and standard trucks consume diesel fuel at the rate r depending on the
operating speed and other conditions as shown in Fig. 3.6. As mentioned above,
mega trucks consume by about 40 % more fuel than standard trucks under the same
conditions. However, if convoys are considered, then a convoy of two mega trucks
consumes about 6–8 l/100 km less fuel that a convoy of three standard trucks
operating at a speed of between 50 and 90 km/h. Similar applies to emissions of
GHG. For example, when both mega and standard trucks operate at an average speed
of vj = vi = 70 km/h, their fuel consumption rate will be: rj = 40 l/100 km, and
ri = 29 l/100 km, respectively. The specific gravity of diesel fuel is: 0.82–0.95 kg/l,
and its calorific value: 12.777 kWh/kg (EC 2005). This produces an average rate of
energy consumption of about: SECj = 4.59 kWh/km for mega trucks, and: SECi =
3.33 kWh/km for standard trucks. The emission rate of GHG is: ej = ei =
0.324 kgCO2e/kWh (CO2e includes CO (Carbon Oxide), HC (Hydro Carbons), NOx
(Nitrogen Oxides), and PM (Particulate Matters)). This gives emissions of GHG by a
convoy of two mega trucks of: EMj = 2 * 1.487 = 2.974 kgCO2e/km and for a convoy
of three standard trucks of: EMi = 3 * 1.079 = 3.237 (kgCO2e/km). Thus, despite
the emissions of GHG by a single mega truck (1.487 kgCO2e/km) are higher than that
of a single standard truck (1.079 kgCO2e/km), which is in proportion to the differ-
ences in the rates of fuel consumption, they appear lower for a convoy of mega trucks
substituting a convoy of standard trucks under the assumed 2/3 scenario. In addition,
the average emission intensity is lower for the convoy of mega trucks than that of
standard trucks, i.e., 53.11 gCO2e/tkm compared to 61.66 gCO2e/tkm, respectively
(payload rate is 70 %).
Land use
As compared to the already operating standard trucks, mega trucks will not require
additional roads and consequent land use. They will nevertheless need bigger
parking and maneuvering spaces, which is greater for a mega truck than for a
standard truck by about 35 %, i.e., in proportion to the difference in their length.
However, if mega trucks substituted standard trucks at the 2/3 rate, the total
additional parking space would likely increase by about 23 %.
The social/policy performances of standard and/or mega trucks relate to their

noise, congestion, and traffic/incidents (safety).
Noise
The noise of standard and/or mega trucks generally depends on the following
factors:
• Intensity of noise at source;
• Distance of the noise source from the receiver(s)/observer(s);
• Duration of the noise event(s);
• The number of successive noise events during a given period of time; and
• Noise mitigating measures.
The intensity of noise at source depends on the constructive (design) charac-
teristics of the vehicles (trucks) and their speed while passing the given receiver(s),
i.e., the potentially affected inhabitants.
The distance of noise source(s) from the receiver plays an important role since
the volume of sound at the receiver’s location generally decreases in line with the
square of the distance from the noise source(s). This implies that highways with
intensive truck traffic are preferred to be sufficiently far away from populated
areas.
The duration of noise event implies the time of exposure of a receiver to noise
from passing truck(s). In general, this time is proportional to the length of truck
and its speed.
The number of successive noise events—passing trucks—during a given period
of time reflects the persistency of noise over time.
Noise mitigating measures include diminishing causes of noise through truck
design and construction, limiting their operating speed, constraining operation
during particular periods of the day (night), and/or installing noise protecting
barriers at particularly ‘‘noise-sensitive’’ locations. In order to estimate the level of
noise a receiver near a given motorway/highway is exposed to, a convenient model
is developed based on the generic scheme shown in Fig. 3.7.
The shaded polygon represents a convoy of mega trucks of the length Sj moving
at an average speed vj along the distance d. A receiver represented by the small
t=0 tj = (Sj+2 β)/vj

Si/2 β β Sj/2
vj t
Sj Sj
ρ(0)
γ ρ(t )
j
Noise receiver(s)
Fig. 3.7 A scheme for estimating the noise exposure of a receiver by passing road truck(s) (Janic
and Vleugel 2012)
triangle starts to consider an approaching convoy of trucks when it is at distance b

from the point along the line, which is at the closest right angle distance c from
him/her. The consideration stops after the convoy moves behind the above-men-
tioned closest point again to the distance b. Under such circumstances, the distance
between a receiver and passing trucks changes over time as follows:
q2 ðtÞ¼ ðSj = 2 þ b vj tÞ2 þ c2 for 0 \t \ ¼ ðSj þ 2bÞ=vj ð3:10aÞ

If each truck is of length sj and if the distance between successive trucks in the
convoy moving along the segment d is d (v), the length of a convoy will be as
follows:

Sj ¼ n s j þ ð n 1Þ d v j ð3:10bÞ
where the number of trucks in the convoy ni can be estimated from Eq. 3.8c. In
general, the distance between the trucks in the convoy d (vi) is an increasing
function of the operating speed vi.
If the level of noise received from the r-th truck passing the receiver at the
speed vi at the shortest distance c is Leq(c, vi), the level of noise during time tj can

Leq qðtÞ; vj ¼ Leq c; vj 8:6562 ln q tj =c ð3:10cÞ
The second term in Eq. 3.10c represents the noise attenuation with distance
between the noise source and a receiver over an area free of barriers.
The total noise exposure of a receiver(s) from nj successive trucks passing by
during the period of time T can be estimated as follows:
X
n Leq ½qðtÞ;vj
Leq nj ¼ 10 log 10 10 ð3:10dÞ
r¼1
The noise of an individual event is commonly measured as the standard at the

right-angle distance of 25 m (m–meter) from the source (i.e., passing trucks) and
at height of 3 m. Typical values depending of the standard truck’s operating speed

are as follows (EC 2001a):

Leq 25; vj ¼ 5:509 ln vj þ 25:36 dBðAÞ; R2 ¼ 0:988; 10 \vj \90 ðkm=hÞ
ð3:10eÞ
The noise from mega trucks is expected to be higher mainly because of their
stronger engines and increased rolling resistance due to the greater number of
axles. In such case the above-mentioned expression needs to be slightly modified.
In addition, the exposure to noise of a single mega truck will last longer, likely in
proportion to the difference in its length and the length of a standard truck (25.25/
18.75, which is about 35 %), However, the exposure to noise from a convoy of
three standard trucks will be longer than the exposure to that of a convoy of two
mega trucks by about 11 %. Furthermore, the equivalent noise level will be higher
for the former than for the later convoy of trucks, i.e., Leq(i) = 55.25 dB(A) and
Leq(j) = 53.89 dB(A), respectively, if both move at the same speed of 90 km/h
and pass the noise receiver at the same distance.
The above-mentioned estimates of noise exposure by standard and mega trucks
can be further generalized by including the frequency of noise events and the
number of population located close and consequently exposed to these events. In
considering the actual exposure of population located close to a highway/motor-
way to noise by passing convoy(s) of trucks, it is necessary to take into account the
influence of noise protective barriers. They are usually set up to protect particu-
larly noise-sensitive areas by absorbing the maximum level of noise of about
20 dB (A) (single barrier) and 25 dB (A) (double barrier).
Congestion
Congestion caused by a convoy of standard and/or mega trucks is expressed by the
time losses of the individual passenger cars and other smaller vehicles running
behind while waiting to overtake them. Figure 3.8 shows a simplified scheme of a
traffic scenario.
vi/q Lane - q
αpq
vq
vp vp
δ p(vip) δ (v )
p p
Lane - p
Δp gp Δp
*
Gq
Fig. 3.8 Scenario for estimating time losses of smaller vehicles waiting to overtake a convoy of
mega or standard road trucks (Janic and Vleugel 2012)
The convoy moves along the distance d along the far right line of the given
motorway/highway. The potentially affected vehicles use this (right) lane just after
entering and before leaving a given segment of the highway/motorway. In partic-
ular, in the former case, these vehicles follow the convoy by staying behind in the
right lane until the opportunity for overtaking it arises. As this happens, they pass
onto the left lane and move in parallel with the convoy until passing it and finishing
overtaking, or even longer. While running behind the convoy at approximately the
same speed, which is generally lower that it would be otherwise, these vehicles
spend extra time between their origins and destinations, which could be considered
as their time losses. In order to quantify these losses, let the right and left lane be
denoted by p and q, respectively, as in Fig. 3.8. The length of a convoy of trucks can
be estimated as in Eq. 3.10b. Each vehicle following the convoy in the same lane
starts and finishes its overtaking at the distance Dp from the last and from the front
truck in the convoy. In addition, at the moment of entering the lane q, the minimum
distance from the vehicle already being there should be equal at least apq. Conse-
quently, a gap between the vehicles in the traffic flow along the lane q needed for the
safe overtaking of the convoy can be estimated as:
Gq ¼ apq þ 2 Dp þ S ð3:11aÞ
If the convoy of trucks moves at the average speed vp and a vehicle overtaking
it at the average speed of vq, the average time the vehicle needs to safely overtake
the convoy can be estimated as follows:

tpq ¼ Gq = vq vp where vq [ vp ð3:11bÞ
The vehicles behind the convoy try and overtake it after each other, i.e., the
next vehicle does not start overtaking before the preceding one finishes. If the
intensity of vehicles intending to overtake the convoy is Kpq (veh/h), the average
waiting time of the first vehicle in the queue following the convoy along the
distance xpq before starting to overtake it can be estimated analogously as in the
theory of steady-state queues as follows:

wpq ¼ xpq 1=vq 1=vp ð3:11cÞ
The total time losses of all vehicles Kp queuing behind a convoy of trucks while
waiting for the first one to overtake it can be estimated as follows:

W ¼ Kpq wpq 1 wpq þ tpq ð3:11dÞ
where all symbols are analogous to those in the previous equations and Fig. 3.8. In
addition to the above-described scenario of moving convoys of mega and standard
trucks, the inputs are specified to illustrate their influence on congestion and delays
imposed on other traffic. Thus, the convoy of mega trucks consists of nj = 2 and the
convoy of standard trucks of ni = 3 vehicles, both moving at an average speed of:
vj = vi = 80 km/h. The flow of vehicles with the average intensity of Kpq = 1 veh/
min queues behind these convoys at an average distance of xpq = 1 km before
starting to overtake any of them. The free speed of these vehicles is assumed to be:
vq = 120 km/h. The length of a standard and mega truck is: si = 18.75 m, and
sj = 25.25 m, respectively. The distance between particular trucks in both convoys
is: dj(80) = di(80) = 80 m. In addition, the distance between the overtaking
vehicles, and the last and the first truck in the convoy is assumed to be: Dp = 100 m.
The distance between the overtaking vehicle and the first incoming vehicle in the
overtaking lane is: apq = 100 m. Consequently, the waiting time or delay of
a vehicle before starting to overtake either convoy is estimated to be: wj/pq =
wi/pq = 1.5 min. The time for overtaking the convoy of mega trucks is estimated to
be: tj/pq = 0.5 min, and that of the convoy of standard trucks: ti/pq = 0.77 min. The
corresponding total times of passing are: 2.0 and 2.27 min, respectively. Thus, the
waiting time for overtaking the convoy of mega trucks is shorter by about 13.5 %
that that of the convoy of standard trucks, which seemingly indicates benefits of the
2/3 substitution scenario.
Safety
The traffic incidents/accidents of standard and/or mega trucks reflect their safety,
which is usually measured by the number of actual and/or potential fatalities and
injuries occurred on a given segment of the road. For example, for a convoy of
either trucks, the number of incidents/accidents along the distance d can be esti-
mated as follows:
A ¼ n k PL d a ð3:12Þ
where
a is the rate of fatalities/severe injuries per unit of output of either truck (events/
t-km).
The rate of fatalities and severe injuries in traffic incidents/accidents of standard
trucks has been estimated by using some figures from the EU27 Member States.
These show that the number of fatalities in traffic accidents in which these vehicles
have been involved has generally decreased from 4,586 in 1996 to 3,350 in 2006,
which is a reduction of about 27 % (ERSO 2007). Since the volume of transport
output was 1,528 billion t-km in 2006, the average fatality rate was:
a = 2.191 9 10-9 (fatalities/t-km). It is reasonable to expect that mega trucks will
be at least equally if not even safer than their standard counterparts. In order to
meet such safety targets, the following operational issues for mega trucks need to
be considered:
• Impacts of accidents could be more serious in terms of the scale of damage and
fatality rate;
• In tunnels, particularly in Alpine regions in Europe, cross-sections, parking
niches/breakdown bays, and ventilation ducts will need to be reconstructed;
• The psychological impacts of mega trucks on the drivers of lighter vehicles
should be taken into account;
• The existing design standards for guardrails/crash barriers would need to be

strengthened in order to absorb impacts of mega trucks;
• The access space/lanes to the emergency parking in cases of breakdowns would
need to be reconstructed; and
• Retrieving mega trucks in cases of breakdown would require special currently
non-standard equipment and emergency procedures applicable to fire brigades
or the breakdown services.
3.3.3 Evaluation
Mega trucks possess both advantages (strengths and opportunities) and disad-
vantages (weaknesses and threats) as compared to their standard truck counter-
parts, which can be considered for a single vehicle and/or for a convoy of vehicles
substituting each other.
Advantages
Single vehicle
• Enabling higher utilization of the capacity of the available road infrastructure;
• Operating at the same speed as standard trucks, which in combination with the
greater payload capacity provides higher technical productivity; and
• Providing lower average cost per unit of output (t-km) due to economies of
scale/size given an adequate load factor.
Convoy of vehicles
• Reducing the number of vehicles required for transporting the given volumes of
freight/goods;
• Preventing uncontrolled escalation of operator costs and impacts on the envi-
ronment and society thanks to the lower number of vehicles engaged for
transporting the same volumes of freight/goods; and
• Bringing benefits to almost all actors/stakeholders involved when substituting a
convoy of standard trucks.
Disadvantages
• Extending time for logistics operations such as loading and unloading of freight/
goods shipments, which increase the vehicle’s turnaround time, and thus in turn:
(i) requires a greater number of vehicles in the operator’s fleet and (ii) increases
the inventories of freight/goods and the related costs at both ends of the logistics
chain(s);
• Increasing the vehicle’s operating costs with likely a higher share of fuel costs in
the total costs;
• Consuming more fuel per service and consequently emitting higher quantities of
GHG (Green House Gases);
• Requiring adaptation/modification of the road infrastructure, which could be

rather expensive (bridges, tunnels, parking lots, access lanes (paths), freight
terminals, emergency routes/paths, etc.);
• Generating higher noise due to stronger engines and longer exposure times due
to their greater length;
• Contributing to increasing congestion due to their greater length;
• Graver consequences of traffic incidents/accidents due to their larger size and
weight; and
• Possibly affecting the market share of rail and rail-based intermodal freight
transport if commercialized on a wider scale.
Finally, road mega trucks, although technically/technologically maturated, can
be considered, regarding their size, related operations, and economics, as qualified
components of advanced transport systems.
3.4 Long Intermodal Freight Train(s)
2003/2006 The feasibility of launching longer trains (up to 1,000 m) in the Paris-Amsterdam
corridor is examined as part of the European project led by the SNCF (French
National Railways) (France, The Netherlands)
The LIFTs (Long Intermodal Freight Train(s)) have been initiated by some rail
freight operators in France (SNCF FRET), Belgium (B-Cargo), Germany (DB), and
the Netherlands (PRORAIL) as an innovative and presumably more efficient
competitive product than the current CIFTs (Conventional Intermodal Freight
Trains). These trains, longer than conventional ones, are supposed to operate as the
main rail services within intermodal or multimodal freight transport networks
including the above-mentioned advanced collection/distribution networks. This
implies that they transport freight/goods shipment consolidated into loading units
such as containers, swap-bodies, and semi-trailers. The specific objectives of
launching LIFTs are to: (i) improve the internal efficiency within the rail freight
sector; and (ii) increase the competitiveness of rail compared to road freight
transport in the medium- to long-distance corridors between the North and South of
Europe. Initial trials were carried out between the Netherlands (port of Rotterdam)
and France (Paris), and further to the south toward Lyon and other Mediterranean
ports (EC 2007; Janic 2008). In addition, the enlargement of the EU (European
Union) from 15 to 25 Member States in 2004 and to 27 Member States in 2007
(when Bulgaria and Romania joined the EU) has seemed to open up new oppor-
tunities for such rail services in the long-distance markets (corridors) such as those
3.4 Long Intermodal Freight Train(s) 127
between West (Germany) and East (Poland) Europe, as well as between Northwest
(North of Germany, Netherlands, Denmark) and Southeast Europe (Greece, and
later on Turkey).
The preconditions for the success of the concept are perceived to be, on the one
hand, maintaining the compactness of LIFTs as block trains in order to control
freight delivery time and costs at a reasonable (competitive) level, and on the
other, the sufficient and time regular volumes of freight demand in both directions
along the corridors.
3.4.2 Analyzing Performances
3.4.2.1 Background
LIFTs (Long Intermodal freight Train(s)) are characterized by their infrastructural,

performances. These performances are elaborated in the scope of the rail/road
intermodal freight transport network in which they operate as the main mode
instead of CIFTs (Conventional Intermodal Freight Train(s)), and the road freight
transport network used for comparative purposes.
3.4.2.2 Infrastructural, Technical/Technological and Operational

Performances
Rail/road intermodal freight transport network

Components and operations
Rail/road intermodal freight transport network delivers loading units from shippers
to receivers in five steps: (i) collection in the origin ‘‘zone’’ and transportation to
the ‘‘origin’’ rail-road intermodal terminal located in the ‘‘shipper’’ area by road
trucks; (ii) transshipment at the ‘‘origin’’ rail-road intermodal terminal from road
trucks to CIFTs or LIFTs; (iii) rail haulage between the ‘‘origin’’ and ‘‘destination’’
intermodal terminal; the CIFTs or LIFTs running between two terminals are trains
with a fixed composition,5 which use the same technology (infrastructure, traffic
control and signaling system, and rolling stock) but have distinct technological/
operational characteristics, such as braking systems and operating speed; the
former trains have been operating for a long time while the latter are as a concept
still under preparation (EC 2006); (iv) transshipment at the ‘‘destination’’
5
This excludes the shunting and marshaling of trains while operating between their origin and
destination intermodal terminal at both ends of a given corridor (market) (EC 2006).
3500
Conventional trains - Typical weight
Conventional trains - Maximum weight
3000 Long trains - typical length: 800m
W - Train gross weight- tons
Long trains - typical length: 1000m

2500
2000
Conventional trains - Maximum weight
W = 5.911S0.897
1500 R2 = 0.859
1000 Conventional trains - Typical weight

W = 5.8504S0.892
R2 = 0.823
500
0
250 450 650 850 1050
S -Train length - m
Fig. 3.9 Relationships between the gross weight and the length of CIFTs and LIFTs in Europe
(EC 2002, 2006)
intermodal terminal in the ‘‘receiver’’ area from the rail to the trucks; and (v)
distribution from the ‘‘destination’’ terminal to the destination ‘‘zone’’ by trucks.
The main mode: CIFTs (Conventional Intermodal Freight Train(s))
CIFTs (Conventional Intermodal Freight Train(s)) already operate in many
national/country and Trans-European corridors (EC 2001a, b, 2007). Typically,
each train consists of 25–30 four-axle rail flat wagons of an approximate length of
20 m, which gives a typical length of a CIFT of about 500–600 m. The empty
weight of a flat wagon depends on its type and varies from about 24 tons (for
carrying containers and swap bodies) to 32 tons (for carrying semi-trailers). The
carrying capacity of each flat wagon is up to 50 tons. This wagon can carry an
equivalent of three TEU (20-Foot Equivalent Unit), each of a length of 20 ft or
about 6 m (the most common in Europe). An empty TEU weighs 2.3 tons (EC
2002). Goods in the TEUs and their tare represent the CIFTs’ payload. The length
of CIFTs depends on the number of wagons. Its weight depends on the weight of
empty flat cars and the locomotive, as well as the payload, i.e., the load factor of
each wagon and/or of the entire train. Figure 3.9 shows the relationship between
the length and typical and maximum gross weight of the CIFTs and LIFTs in
particular European corridors.
The prospective length and weight of LIFTs are shown for comparative purposes.
The length of CIFTs, typically varying between 450 and 650 m, is within the current
UIC (International Union of Railways) regulation on the pneumatic braking distance
of 750 m. The constraints of the current braking system6 as well as commercial

reasons, i.e., finding sufficient and regular (stable) quantities of goods flows, are the
main factors influencing the above-mentioned length of CIFTs. In addition, their
weight increases at a decreasing rate with increasing of the length in both typical
(load factor 75 %) and maximal configuration (load factor 100 %) (EC 2001a, 2002,
2006). CIFTs have a fixed composition, which a priori excludes additional shunting
and/or marshaling along the route(s). Due to difference in the electric power supply
in particular European countries (1.5 kV DC, 3 kV DC, 25 kV 50 Hz AC),
multisystem 6 MW ALSTOM PRIMA 6000B or SIEMENS CLASS 189 locomo-
tives weighing 86–89 tons are usually used to power the CIFTs. Thus, the necessary
interoperability is provided by eliminating cross-border delays due to locomotive
changing. CIFTs can run at the maximum operating speed of about 120 km/h, but the
average commercial speed tends to decrease with distance resulting in an average of
about 40–50 km/h between the short- and medium distance terminals
(300–600 km). This happens mainly due to the relatively frequent speed changes and
intermediate stops. CIFTs are usually dispatched once to three times per week during
the weekdays, depending on the volume and time pattern of demand. Such frequency
and speed make these trains relatively competitive alternative to road haulage with
respect to the door-to-door delivery time over longer distances (Janic 2007).
The main mode: LIFTs (Long Intermodal Freight Train(s))
LIFTs (Long Intermodal Freight Train(s)) actually represent extended CIFTs
composed of 38 or 48 flat wagons giving a train length of 800 m and 1,000 m,
respectively. LIFTs are also supposed to have a compact-fixed composition
implying no-intermediate marshaling and/or shunting along the route(s). At an
empty weight and load factor of 75 %, the gross weight of a LIFT can vary from
about 2,400 to 2,800 tons (see Fig. 3.9). The length and weight of LIFTs require a
breaking system to be designed, which is, in addition to be the major technical/
technological advancement, also the most significant barrier to their immediate
implementation7 (EC 2006). Two instead of one multisystem 6 MW electric
6
The conventional braking system operates as follows: when the braking command is initiated
from the locomotive (front side of the train), there is a propagation delay of about a half a minute
per rail wagon before the breaking becomes effective after the air pressure stabilizes within the
system. This delay increases the train’s braking distance, which is, for example, standardized to
about 950 m for freight trains running at a maximum speed of about 100 km/h and to those trains
of 690 m running at a maximum speed of 120 km/h. New rail wagons for both categories of
trains have a braking distance of about 890 m (Railtrack 1998).
7
Freight trains longer than 750 m do not comply with the current UIC braking regulation.
However, installing a remote controlled ABD (Additional Braking Device) at the rear end of the
train in order to distribute pressure more symmetrically towards the middle of the train can shorten
the pressure stabilization delay and thus enable shortening of the braking distance(s) according to
the prescribed standards, and consequently enable trains of up to 1,000 m in length to be operated
safely. This additional braking device will be controlled by means of a radio-based communications
system and related network, whose main features are autonomy without interference with those of
other trains and interoperability across different European countries (EC 2006).
locomotive are supposed to pull LIFTs of both lengths (weights) in order to

achieve maximum operating speeds of about 90 km/h and commercial speeds of
about 45 km/h (EC 2006). The length and speed of LIFTs can interfere with the
shorter but faster CIFTs and other passenger trains on the same line(s), thus
causing delays of the latters. These delays can be further extended upstream of
LIFTs due to their intermediate stops on short sidings, passing loops, marshaling,
and shunting yards, currently with the maximum length of 775 m, which is shorter
than the LIFTs’ length of 800 or 1,000 m. Nevertheless, despite the above-men-
tioned shortcomings, in order to be sufficiently competitive, LIFTs should be
dispatched similarly as CIFTs—at least three times per weekday, which implies
that sufficient volumes of freight/goods need to be provided.
Road freight transport network
The road freight transport network enables delivering loading units between par-
ticular shippers and receivers in three steps: (i) collection in the origin ‘‘zone’’ by
truck; (ii) road haulage from the shipper area to the receiver area by the same
vehicle without intermediate storage and associated unloading/loading, which
would also include exchanging vehicles; and (iii) distribution in the destination
zone by the same vehicle (EC 2000a, 2006; Janic 2007, 2008).
The economic performances of intermodal freight transport networks relate to the

operational (internal) costs and revenues of the particular actors involved. Spe-
cifically, the operational costs of intermodal transport and terminal operators
generally depend on the service frequencies, delivery distances, the volumes of
transshipment activities in the intermodal terminals, and the prices of basic inputs
such as labor (staff), material (means), and energy (fuel). The costs of loading units
mainly relate to the costs of their owners–freight/goods shippers and receivers and/
or intermodal system operators (EC 2001a, b; Levison et al. 1996). The operational
(internal) costs are constant in the short-term for a given volume and intensity of
system activities (Janic 2007).
Revenues are obtained by charging users/shippers of loading units for door-to-
door services. These are then distributed to the particular actors in proportion to
their operating costs for providing the given services.
The environmental performances of intermodal freight transport networks relate to

their energy consumption and related emissions of GHG (Green House Gases) and
land use/take (EC 2001a; Levison et al. 1996).

The trucks carrying out the collection and distribution of loading units usually burn
diesel fuel, thus causing emissions of GHG (Green House Gases) with local and
global impacts, the latter if transported and deposited into the atmosphere (Janic
2007; Levison et al. 1996).
Emissions of GHG from CIFTs and/or LIFTs are indirect, depending on the
primary sources for producing the electric energy for their (electric) locomotives.
In any case, the energy consumption and related emissions of GHG associated with
LIFTs and their external costs are higher than those of CIFTs (The potential use of
diesel locomotives and their associated impacts is not considered). Large con-
temporary intermodal terminals use electric cranes for transshipment of loading
units, thus generating indirect emissions of GHG (The use of diesel-powered
reachtackers is not considered). The costs of GHG emissions usually reflect the
marginal expense of maintaining and/or recovering people’s health, as well as the
flora and fauna in the affected areas (EC 2001a, 2006).
Land use
Rail/road intermodal freight transport networks operated by CIFTs or LIFTs do not
require taking additional land use for modification of rail infrastructure. Some
seemingly very limited exceptions can be modifications for extensions of tracks for
handling LIFTs. However, some additional land could be taken by intermodal
terminals for expanding storage space for the increasing number of loading units to
be transported by LIFTs.
The social/policy performances of intermodal freight transport networks operated

by LIFTs or CIFTs relate to their noise, congestion, and traffic incidents/accidents
(safety) (EC 2001a; Levison et al. 1996).
Noise
Trucks collecting and distributing loading units in the shipper and receiver area,
respectively, and the CIFTs and LIFTs operating between them generate noise,
which can affect nearby populated areas. Truck noise depends on its weight and
operating speed, while train noise depends on its length, weight, and speed, which
implies that the bigger but rather slower LIFTs are supposed to generate more
persistent but not necessarily louder noise than CIFTs. In most cases, direct noise
from the transshipment of loading units in the intermodal terminals is not sig-
nificant as it remains inside the terminal.
The costs of noise generated by trucks can include the costs of additional noise
insulation of the affected houses and the costs of constructing protecting barriers
along the road lanes. The costs of noise from trains can be considered as the
marginal cost of setting up noise protection barriers along the rail lines (EC 2006;
Janic 2007).
Congestion
Trucks performing collection and distribution of loading units usually operate in
densely urbanized and/or industrialized ‘‘zones,’’ which frequently experience
costly congestion and delays. They also impose delays on other vehicles whose
consequent costs of time losses need to be taken into account as an externality.
CIFTs and LIFTs are assumed to be free of congestion under regular (non-
disturbing) conditions, which is provided through their scheduling. This a priori
prevents the mutual interference with other trains, both freight and passenger,
operating on the same lines. Thus, the costs of delays that such trains may impose
on each other are negligible. Nevertheless, the slower LIFTs may impose delays on
those CIFTs and other passenger trains behind them even under regular operating
conditions. The costs of these delays as externalities depend on the number of
affected CIFTs, the value of their time, and the length of imposed delays (EC
2006). The loading of units usually bundled in the storage areas of intermodal
terminals or onto the trains do not interfere and thus do not impose delays and
related costs on each other (EC 2006; Janic 2007).
Safety
Traffic incidents/accidents cause injuries and loss of human life, as well as damage
and loss of goods and property affecting intermodal transport system operators,
third parties, and neighboring people. In particular, trucks performing collection
and distribution of loading units have an accident rate comparable to that of the
overall road freight transport of the same category. LIFTs are expected to have the
very low, if any, incidents/accidents similarly to CIFTs. Accidents at intermodal
terminals are shown to be very rare events. The total costs are expressed as the
direct and indirect costs of impacts (EC 2002, 2006; Levison et al. 1996).
3.4.3 Modeling Performances
Modeling performances of the intermodal freight transport networks operated by

CIFTs or LIFTs implies developing a methodology consisting of models for
estimating the full costs of the particular steps—collection of loading units from
their shippers by road haulage, rail-line hauling, and distribution of loading units to
their receivers, again by road haulage. The full costs consist of the operating
(internal) and external costs, the latter reflecting the cost of impacts of the system
on the environment and society (EC 2001a, b; Levison et al. 1996; Janic 2007,
2008). This actually means modeling the economic and environmental perfor-
mances of such networks respecting their close relationship with the technical/
technological and operational performances. Modeling includes assumptions and
the basic structure of the methodology for estimating the full costs.
3.4.3.1 Assumptions
The methodology for estimating the full costs of an intermodal freight transport
network operated by either CIFTs or LIFTs is based on assumptions related to the
general conditions, collection and distribution of loading units by trucks, and the
rail haulage between intermodal terminals.
General conditions
• The demand is always sufficient for dispatching a train of a given category,
either a CIFT or LIFT, with a reasonable frequency and utilization (load factor).
Collection and distribution of loading units
• Trucks of the same capacity and load factor collect and/or distribute loading
units from/to shippers/receivers in a given origin/destination zone/region around
the corresponding intermodal terminal(s) by making tours of the approximately
same length at a constant average speed;
• The collection step starts at the vehicle’s initial position, which can be anywhere
within the ‘‘shipper’s’’ area and ends at the origin’s intermodal terminal. The
distribution step starts at the destination intermodal terminal where the vehicles
may be parked and ends at the ‘‘receiver’s’’ area at the doors of the last receiver
(Morlok et al. 1995; Janic 2007, 2008).
Rail haulage between intermodal terminals
• The service frequency of either CIFTs or LIFTs between a given pair of
intermodal terminals follows the practice of many rail operators in Europe,
which dispatch few regular weekly services (EC 2001a, 2006);
• CIFTs and/or LIFTs are block trains performing ‘‘shuttle’’ or ‘‘direct’’ train
services. They consist of a fixed number of rail flat wagons of the same capacity,
which, on the one hand, implies their constant capacity, and on the other, the
absence of any additional shunting and/or marshaling along the line (Janic 2007,
2008);
• The average speed and anticipated arrival/departure delays of particular train
services provided either by CIFTs or LIFTs are approximately constant and
equal.
3.4.3.2 Structure of the Methodology
The full costs of the intermodal transport system

The full costs of the given intermodal freight transport network operated by either
CIFTs or LIFTs can be estimated in generic terms as follows (Janic 2008):
• Operational (internal) cost

– Transport cost
Transport Cost ¼ ðFrequencyÞ ðCost per FrequencyÞ

¼ ½ðDemandÞ=ðLoad Factor Vehicle CapacityÞ ð3:13aÞ
ðCost per FrequencyÞ
– Handling cost
Handling Cost ¼ ðDemandÞ ðCost per Unit of DemandÞ ð3:13bÞ
• External cost
External cost ¼ ðFrequencyÞ ðExternal cost per FrequencyÞ ð3:13cÞ
The variables in Eq. 3.13a are specific to particular steps of the intermodal
freight transport network. The ‘‘Frequency’’ variable in the collection and distri-
bution step relates to the number of truck runs in collecting and/or distributing a
given volume of load units. In zone (k), ‘‘Frequency’’ fk is directly proportional to
the volume of loading units Qk, and inversely proportional to the product of the
truck capacity Mk and load factor kk. The ‘‘Cost/Frequency’’ variable relates to the
operating cost of a truck and is usually expressed in relation to distance (i.e., length
of the tour) as cok(dk). The distance dk includes the segments between the truck’s
initial position and the first stop xk, the average distances between successive stops
dk, and the distance between the last stop and given intermodal terminal rk. Anal-
ogous reasoning for the trip frequencies and distances is used for the distribution
step. In the rail line-hauling step, the ‘‘Frequency’’ variable f is directly proportional
to the total volume of loading units Q and inversely proportional to the product of
the train carrying capacity Qt and the load factor k. The variable ‘‘Cost per Fre-
quency’’ implies the internal (operating) costs per train. It is modeled as dependent
on the train’s gross weight W, payload q, and distance d, i.e., as co(W, q, d).
The variables in Eq. 3.13b have the following meaning: the handling costs in the
collection step in zone/region (k) are proportional to the quantity of loading units qk,
the unit handling time and costs, thk and chk, respectively. The calculation of these
costs is the same for the distribution step in zone/region (l). In the rail line-hauling
step, the handling cost is proportional to the total quantity of loading units q and the
unit handling cost at both intermodal terminals, ch1 and ch2, respectively. In many
cases, these costs can be considered as the costs of loading/unloading a train.
The variables in Eq. 3.13c are as follows: the external cost in the collection step
in zone/region (k) is proportional to the frequency of truck trips fk, which depends of
the quantity of loading units qk, the truck’s capacity and load factor, i.e., mk and kk,
respectively. The external cost per frequency is given at the aggregate level and for
a given truck type depends mainly on the operating distance (i.e., route length) dk,
i.e., as cek(dk). Calculation of the external cost (Eq. 3.13c) is the same for the
distribution step in ‘‘zone’’ (l). In the rail line-hauling step, the external costs are
proportional to the total quantity of loading units q, the unit aggregate external cost
of each intermodal terminal ce1 and ce2, and the unit aggregate external cost per
train service, i.e., ce(w, q, d). The detailed analytical expressions for particular cost
components are given as follows: (Janic 2007).
1. Transport operating (internal) cost
(a) Collection/distribution step:
C1=k ¼ ðQk =kk Mk Þ cok ðdk Þ ð3:14aÞ
(b) Line-haul step:
C1=lh ¼ f co ðW; q; dÞ ¼ ðQ=qÞ co ðW; q; dÞ ð3:14bÞ
2. Handling cost
C2=k ¼ Qk thk chk ð3:15aÞ
(b) Line-haul step:
C2=t ¼ Q ðch1 þ ch2 Þ ð3:15bÞ
3. External cost
C4=k ¼ ðQk =kk Mk Þ cek ðdk Þ ð3:16aÞ
(b) Line-haul step:
C3=lh þ C4=lh ¼ Q ðce1 þ ce2 Þ þ f ce ðW; q; dÞ

¼ Q ðce1 þ ce2 Þ þ ðQ=qÞ co ðW; q; dÞ ð3:16bÞ
4. Subtotal
X
3 X
K
Cc=i=k ð3:17aÞ
i¼1 k¼1
(b) Line-haul step:

X
4
Clh ¼ Ci=lh ð3:17bÞ
i¼1
5. The full (total) cost
CF ¼ Cc þ Clh þ Cd
X3 X k 3 X
X k
¼ Cc=i=k þ f ½co ðW; q; d Þ þ ce ðW; q; dÞþ Cc=i=k ð3:18Þ
i¼1 k¼1 i¼1 k¼1
where
Q is the quantity of goods to be transported between given origin and
destination intermodal terminals (tons);
nl is the number of locomotives per train;
wl is the locomotive weight (tons);
nw is the number of flat-wagons;
ww is the weight of an empty wagon (tons);
nc/w is the carrying capacity of a flat-wagon (loading units/wagon);
qc is the average weight (tare ? goods) of a loading unit (tons/unit);
k is the train load factor;
T is the period of time in which the transport of goods between two
terminals is considered (h);
d is the distance of the given rail line connecting two intermodal
terminals (km);
v is the commercial speed of a train along a given line (km/h);
D is the anticipated delay of a train running between two intermodal
terminals (hours);
a is the value of time of goods while waiting for and during
transportation, respectively (€/h-ton);
f is the train frequency along a given line (departures/T);
W is the gross weight of a train including rolling stock and payload
(tons);
w is the weight of the train’s rolling stocks (wagons and locomotive(s)
(tons);
q is the payload on the train (tons);
co(W, q, d) is the operational cost of a train of the gross weight W over the
distance d (€);
nd is the number of drivers;
tdp is the driver’s preparation and finishing time before and after the trip
(h);
ce(W, q, d) is the external cost of a train of the gross weight W along the
distance d (€);
N is the number of different staff categories serving and operating a
given train;
ns/i is the number of staff of category (i) serving and operating the train;
cs/i is the cost of labor of the staff of category (i) serving and operating
the train (€/h-staff);
ts/i is the time of engagement of staff of category (i) needs to serve and
operate the train (h);
Pj is the price of rolling stock of type (j) (j = 1 for locomotives; j = 2
for wagons) (€);
rj is the interest rate on loans for acquiring rolling stock of type (j)(%);
nj is the life cycle period of rolling stock of type (j) (years);
nr/j is the number of rolling stock of type (j);
mr/j is the utilization of rolling stock of type (j) during the life cycle
(km);
cmji is the unit maintenance cost of rolling stock of type (j) (€/km);
e is the unit energy consumption of a train (kWh/ton-km);
ce is the cost per unit of energy consumed (€/kWh);
ca is the unit charge of using the railway infrastructure (€/ton-km);
Ci is the cost of train insurance (€);
a is the quantity of emissions of GHG per unit of energy consumed by
a train (kgCO2e/kWh);
cap is the unit cost of damage by emissions of GHG (€/kg);
Cn is the cost of additional barriers along a given rail line to protect
people from the noise of a given train (€);
U is the utilization of a given train along the line during its life cycle
(km);
ar is the train’s accident rate (events/ton-km);
cac is the cost per train accident (€/event);
De is the delay the a given train imposes on other trains (h);
ced is the average cost per unit of delay of other trains (€/h);
dk/l is the tour of a road vehicle (truck) collecting/distributing loading
units in the zones (k) and (l), respectively;
Mk/l is the capacity of road vehicle collecting/distributing loading units in
the zone (k) and (l), respectively;
kk/l is the capacity of road vehicle carrying out collection/distribution of
loading units in zone (k) and (l), respectively.
The average operational (internal), external, and full cost per unit of system
output (t-km) can be estimated by dividing the full (total) cost (Eq. 3.18) by the
volume of demand and door-to-door delivery distance. This can be used for
comparisons either within the intermodal freight transport system where exclu-
sively CIFTs or LIFTs operate or between these and road transport systems
operating either standard or mega trucks. In the case of road transport systems,
Eqs. (3.17a, b) and (3.18) can be modified using the door-to-door distance between
the zones/regions (k) and (l).
The full cost of rail haulage
The full costs of a given rail haulage, i.e., train service, consist of the opera-
tional (internal) and external costs, co(W, q, d) and ce(W, q, d) and given in Table
3.4 and Table 3.5, respectively.
Table 3.4 Structure of the train’s operational (internal) cost co (W, q, d) (Janic 2008)
Cost component Equation
ffi
(i) Investments in rolling stock (rail flat P2 rj ð1þrj Þ
nj
(3.19a)
wagons ? locomotive(s)) C 01 ¼ n r=j P j nj
j¼1 ð 1þr j Þ 1
(ii) Maintenance of rolling stock (rail flat P2 (3.19b)

wagons ? locomotive(s)) C02 ¼ nm=j cm=j d
j¼1
(iii) Accessing and using infrastructure C03 ¼ ca W d (3.19c)
(iv) Energy consumption C04 ¼ ce e W d (3.19d)
(v) Labor (staff) PN (3.19e)
C05 ¼ ns=i cs=i tai
j¼1
(vi) Loading/unloading C06 ¼ ðch1 þ ch2 Þ q (3.19f)
Table 3.5 Structure of the train’s external costs ce (W, q, d) (Janic 2008)
Cost component Equation
(i) Emissions of GHG Ce1 ¼ ðce1 þ ce2 Þ þ q cap e a W d (3.20a)
(ii) Noise Ce2 ¼ ðCn =U Þ d (3.20b)
(iii) Congestion Ce4 ¼ ced De (3.20c)
(iv) Traffic incidents/accidents Ce3 ¼ car ar W d (3.20d)
Operational (internal) cost

The operational (internal) cost co(W, q, d) in Eq. 3.19 consists of six components:
(i) investments in rolling stock—wagons and locomotive(s); (ii) the costs of
maintaining rolling stock–wagons and locomotives; (iii) the costs of using the
railway infrastructure, i.e., the infrastructure charge; (iv) the costs of energy
consumption; (v) labor costs for assembling/decoupling and driving the trains; and
(vi) the costs of loading/unloading the trains at two intermodal terminals. The
corresponding equations are given in Table 3.4.
Consequently, the costs co(W, q, d) are equal to the sum of the particular cost
components (Eq. 3.19a–f) in Table 3.4.
External cost
The external cost ce(W, q, d) (Eq. 3.16) consists of four cost components: (i)
emissions of GHG from assembling/decoupling, running, and loading/unloading
the trains; (ii) noise; (iii) congestion; and (iv) traffic incidents/accidents. The
corresponding equations are given in Table 3.5.
Consequently, the external cost ce(W, q, d) is equal to the sum of the particular
external cost components (Eq. 3.20a–d) in Table 3.5). The train’s gross weight
W consisting of the weight of the empty train (flat-wagons ? locomotive(s)) and
payload (loading units) in (Eq. 3.19c, d) and Table 3.4 and 3.5 can be calculated as
follows:

W ¼ w þ q ¼ nl wl þ nw ww þ k Qt Þ ¼ nl wl þ nw ww þ k nc=w qc
ð3:21Þ
where all symbols as in previous equations.
3.4.3.3 Application of the Methodology
The proposed methodology for estimating the full costs is applied to the simplified
European intermodal system operated by LIFTs and CIFTs, and its road truck
counterpart for comparative purposes (EC 2000a; 2001a, b, 2006; Janic 2007,
2008).
Input
Loading units
Both systems deliver loading units of 20 ft or about 6 m (TEU-Twenty Foot
Equivalent Unit), the most common in Europe. Each load unit has an average gross
weight of 14.3 metric tons (12 tons of goods plus 2.3 tons of tare) (EC 2001a;
Janic 2007).
Collection/distribution by road trucks
In each zone of the intermodal transport system, the average length of tour and the
speed of each vehicle, which is assumed to make only one stop during the col-
lection and distribution step, are taken to be as in Table 3.6.
The average collection/distribution distance is assumed to be longer for LIFTs
than for CIFTs because the LIFTs’ loading units are collected and distributed over
a wider area, implying the constant spatial concentration of the shippers and
receivers and their generating and attracting potential. The load factor of 0.60
reflects the possibility that the train will be partly or completely empty during
returning trips (EC 2001a, b).
The truck’s operational cost during the collection/distribution step, based on the
full load equivalent of two 20 foot loading units, is determined as the regression
equation, which uses the empirical data: c0(d) = 5.456d-0.277 €/vehicle-km
(N = 26; R2 = 0.78; 25 B d B 1,600 km). The average load factor is: k = 0.60,
Table 3.6 Characteristics of the collection/distribution step in the given example (Janic 2007;
2008)
Parameter Train category
CIFT LIFT—800 m LIFT—1,000 m
• Collection/distribution distance by road dk/l (km) 50 75 75
• Truck’s carrying capacity Mk/l (tons) 2 * 14.3 2 * 14.3 2 * 14.3
• Load factor kk/l 0.60 0.60 0.60
• Average speed during a tour uk/l (km/h) 35 35 35
Table 3.7 Characteristics of CIFTs and LIFTs in the given example (EC 2006; Janic 2008)
Parameter Train category
CIFT LIFT—800 m LIFT—1,000 m
Train load factor k 0.75 0.75 0.75
Payload q (tons) 14.3 * 3 * 26 * 0.75 14.3 * 3 * 38 * 0.75 14.3 * 3 * 48 * 0.75
= 837 = 1223 = 1544
Empty weight w (tons)
1 locomotive 24 * 26 * 89 = 713 24 * 38 ? 89 = 1001 24 * 48 ? 89 = 1241
2 locomotives 24 * 38 ? 2 * 89 = 1090 24 * 48 ? 2 * 89 = 1330
Total weight W (tons)
1 locomotive 1550 2224 2785
2 locomotives (tons) – 2313 2874
Operating speed v (km/h)
1 locomotive 110 70 65
2 locomotives – 95 90
Commercial speed v (km/h)
1 locomotive 60 50 45
2 locomotives – 50 45
Anticipated delay D (h) 1 1 1
implying the possibility that the truck will be partly or even completely empty
during the returning trip(s). The costs c0(d) already include the handling costs of
loading units (EC 2001a, b; Janic 2007). The same equation is used for deter-
mining the operational costs of haulage by standard trucks between particular
shippers and receivers with respect to an average load factor of: k = 0.85. This
load factor has been observed for the most long-distance road operators in Europe
reflecting, in many cases, full or semi-full returning trips (EC 2001a, b).
From the same sources of data, the externalities comprising local and global air
pollution, congestion, noise, and traffic accidents are determined in the following
aggregate regression form: ce(d) = 9.884d-0.6235 €/vehicle-km (N = 36;
R2 = 0.70; 25 B d B 1,600 km) (EC 2001a, b; Janic 2007, 2008).
Rail hauling
• The train composition, weight, speed, and anticipated delay
The characteristics of CIFTs and LIFTs running between two intermodal ter-
minals are given in Table 3.7 (EC 2006; Janic 2007, 2008):
The load factor of a train of 0.75 reflects operating not always completely full
train(s) in both directions along a given route (market-corridor) (EC 2006; Janic
2007).
• The train’s operational (internal) cost
The train’s operational (internal) cost co(W, q, d) expressed in €/train is esti-
mated as follows (AEAT 2005; Baungartberm 2001; EC 1996a, 1997a, 2000a,
2001a, 2006; INFRAS 2000; Janic 2008):
co ðW; d; qÞ ¼ ð4:60 nl þ 0:144 nw þ 0:3Þ d þ 12:98ðnl þ nw Þ þ 5:6q þ 0:0019 W d

X
L
þ 0:227 106 v2l =ln dl þ 0:000774 W d þ 33nd tdp þ d=v þ D
l¼1
The coefficients of particular variables have the following meaning: the first
represents the unit cost of depreciation and maintenance of the rolling stock (flat
wagons and locomotives) and the monitoring cost of a train while running along
the line (€/km); the second represents the unit cost of assembling/decomposing the
train at both ends of the corridor (€/train unit); the third expresses the unit cost of
loading and unloading the train at both ends of the rail-line, i.e., the transshipment
cost of loading units at two intermodal terminals (€/ton); the fourth represents the
unit cost of using the rail infrastructure (i.e., the infrastructure charge) (€/t-km);
the fifth represents the unit cost of the energy consumption along the line with
L segments, i.e., intermediate stops (€/t-km); and the last sixth rate represents the
unit cost of the train’s driver(s) (€/h).
• The train’s external cost
The train’s external cost ce(W, q, d) expressed in €/train is estimated as follows
(EC 1996a, 1997a, 2000a, 2001a, 2006; INFRAS 2000; Janic 2008):
X
L
co ðW; d; qÞ ¼ 0:000128 W d þ 0:0549q þ 1:889 107 v2l =In dl þ 0:00064 W d
l¼1
þ 0 W d þ 5:6 d Dm
The coefficients of particular variables have the following meaning: the first
represents the unit cost of noise (€/t-km); the second expresses the unit external
cost of the train loading/unloading, i.e., transshipment of loading units at two
intermodal terminals (€/ton); the third represents the cost of emissions of GHG due
to energy consumption (€/t-km); the fourth expresses the cost of traffic incidents/
accidents (€/t-km); and the fifth rate represents the unit external cost of congestion
(€/h-km).
Handling cost
The handling cost of a given loading unit at each intermodal terminal is already
included in the cost of loading/unloading the train (the third term in the train’s
internal cost function), i.e., at both terminals: ch1 = ch2 = 2.8 €/ton. This is taken
as the average value for a given level of utilization of intermodal terminals (EC
2001b, c; Janic 2007).
The external costs of intermodal terminals include only the costs of local and
global air pollution imposed by production of electricity for moving the cranes
used for the transshipment of loading units, as follows: ce1 = ce2 = 0.0549 €/ton
(EC 2001a).
9
CIFT
LIFT - 800 m
8 LIFT - 1000 m
Average operational cost - cent/t-km)
Road - Standard trucks

Road - Mega trucks
7
0
2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18
Door-to-door distance - hundred km
Fig. 3.10 Relationship between the operational (internal) cost and door-to-door distance of
intermodal CIFTs, LIFTs, and road trucks (Janic 2008)
Results
The results from applying the methodology based on the above-mentioned inputs
are shown in Figs. 3.10 and 3.11. For the purpose of the sensitivity analysis, the
length of rail-line hauling distance (i.e., the door-to-door distance) is varied as a
parameter for both CIFTs and two categories of LIFTs. The volume of demand is
considered to be always sufficient for dispatching one train of either category per
day, which is, and will be, the preferred departure frequency for many existing and
prospective users- customers (and consequently train operators) in Europe (EC
2001a, b, 2006; Janic 2007).
Figure 3.10 shows the relationship between the average operational (internal)
cost and the door-to-door distance of an intermodal transport system operating a
CIFT and different categories of LIFTs. The corresponding cost figures for the
road transport system operating standard and mega trucks are also provided.
The average operational (internal) cost decreases more than proportionally with
increasing the door-to-door distance for both intermodal rail/road and road
transport, thus indicating the existence of economies of distance. In general, the
operational cost of intermodal transport decreases at a higher rate than that of the
road transport. If CIFTs are used, the costs of intermodal transport equalizes and
becomes increasingly lower than the cost of road transport beyond distances of
about 1,100 km. If LIFTs of either length are used, this cost-breakeven distance
shortens to 600–650 km. This occurs because the average internal cost of LIFTs of
800 m and 1,000 m are lower by about 12–18 % and 18–27 %, respectively, than
that of CIFTs for the range of door-to-door distances between 300 and 1,300 km.
As an illustration, if road mega trucks are used instead of standard trucks, this cost-
9
LIFT - 1000m
Road - Standard truck
8 Road - Mega truck
7
Average full cost- cent/t-km
0
200 400 600 800 1000 1200 1400 1600 1800
Door-to-door distance - hundred km
Fig. 3.11 Relationship between the full (operational and external) cost and door-to-door distance
of intermodal LIFTs and road trucks (Janic 2008)
breakeven distance for both categories of LIFTs extends to about 1,300–1,400 km.
The above-mentioned differences between the operational costs indicate the
existence of the economies of scale for LIFTs as compared to CIFTs.
The relationships between the average operational (internal) costs of both
systems indicate that intermodal transport networks operating CIFTs or LIFTs are
and can be competitive alternatives to long-haul road transport operating standard
trucks beyond the above-mentioned ‘‘break-even’’ distances. Therefore, intro-
ducing LIFTs under the above-specified conditions and circumstances could
seemingly improve the competitiveness of the intermodal transport by decreasing
the cost-based prices over a wider range of even shorter distance(s) where more
voluminous demand actually exists. Thus, LIFTs could generally improve the
efficiency of intermodal (rail) transport operators and eventually contribute to
changing the current modal split, both of which are amongst the important
objectives of the concept/product. A real threat to such developments could come
in the form of more intense introduction of road mega trucks.
Figure 3.11 shows the relationships between the average full cost, as the sum of
operational (internal) and external cost, and the door-to-door distance for the
intermodal transport system operating LIFTs (category of 1,000 m) and road
transport operating standard and mega trucks.
In the above example, the share of external cost in the full cost of the inter-
modal transport system increases by about 20–23 % as the door-to-door distance
extends from about 300 to 1,300 km. The share of the external cost in the full cost
of road haulage decreases from about 20–13 % for the same range of distances
independently of the truck type. The external cost of both modes appears to be
relatively low as compared to the internal (operating) cost. One of the main
reasons is that while the internal cost is based on real figures, the external cost is
still based on the above-mentioned caveats including the slight (under) estimates
of the prospective impacts, rather than on their real (market-recognized) values.
The full cost of both modes decreases more than proportionally with increasing of
the door-to-door distance(s). The rate of decrease is again higher for the inter-
modal transport system, thus equalizing its full cost with that of its road coun-
terpart operating standard trucks at the ‘‘break-even’’ distance of about 700 km.
This is longer than in the case where only the operational (internal) cost is con-
sidered (about 600 km). In addition, the full cost of road mega truck transport is
lower than that of the intermodal transport operating LIFTs of the length of
1,000 m for the entire range of the door-to-door delivery distances. Since the
volume of demand generally decreases with increasing of the door-to-door
delivery distance, basing the prices on the (higher) full costs may generally affect
the already low (though still present) price-sensitive demand, and thus make it
more difficult for intermodal transport to eventually gain higher market shares
even by using LIFTs. Introducing road mega trucks under the given conditions
would additionally worsen the market position of intermodal transport operating
LIFTs. This again raises the question of the efficiency of EU policies, which expect
that internalizing transport externalities could strengthen the market position of the
entire, but particularly rail/road intermodal transport systems in Europe, also
despite more widespread use of road mega trucks (EC 2001a; Janic 2008).
3.4.4 Evaluation
LIFTs (Long Intermodal Freight Train(s)) possess both advantages (strengths and
opportunities) and disadvantages (weaknesses and threats) as compared to CIFTs
(Conventional Intermodal Freight Train(s)) and their road counterparts as follows:
Advantages
• The internal and full costs of both intermodal and road transport systems
decrease more than proportionally with increasing of the door-to-door distance,
thus indicating economies of distance; and
• The average operational (internal) and full cost of intermodal transport operated
by LIFTs are lower than those operated by CIFTs, thus indicating economies of
scale;
• The full costs decrease faster with increasing of the door-to-door distance at
both intermodal than at the road transport system; the costs of both types of
intermodal trains equalize at the ‘‘break-even’’ distance(s), thus indicating
conditions for competition by distance.
Disadvantages
• Contributing to improving the internal efficiency and intra- and inter- compet-
itiveness of the rail freight transport sector only if there is sufficient demand
around the ‘‘break-even’’ distances guaranteeing the operation of frequent/
competitive services; and
• Increasing the ‘‘break-even’’ distances after internalizing externalities, which
will generally increase and thus push LIFTs to compete with their road coun-
terparts in longer distance markets with increasingly diminishing volumes of
demand; these will not be able to justify the customer-driven services required
for successful competition with the road counterpart.
Finally, it can be said that LIFTs possess sufficient advancement in both
operational and economic performances enabling them to be qualified as the
components of advanced transport systems.
3.5 Large Commercial Freight Aircraft
1973 FedEx (Federal Express) begins exclusive freight delivery services (U.S.). as a pure air
cargo company
1988 UPS (United Parcel Service) obtains permission from the US FAA (Federal Aviation
Administration) to begin operating its own services (U.S.)
2006/ Twenty-seven orders for the A380F-800 aircraft are cancelled or converted (France,
2007 Germany)
2011 The first B747-8F enters service with the Cargolux airline (Luxembourg)
The large commercial freight aircraft is defined as aircraft with the greatest structural
payload capacity among existing commercial freight aircraft. Except the single
largest Antonov An-225,8 two aircraft are currently the largest: the Boeing B747-8F
and the forthcoming Airbus A380-800F. Their size compared to the size of other
commercial freight aircraft qualifies them as advanced in the given context. The
B747-8F aircraft entered service in 2011, while the entry of the latter A380-800F
8
The USSR/Ukrainian 6-turbofan (229 kN thrust each) Antonov An-225 (Mriya—‘‘Dream’’) is
currently the largest commercial freight aircraft in the world with a length of 84.0 m and a
wingspan of 88.4 m, a MTOW (Maximum Take-Off Weight) of 640 tons, and a payload capacity
of 250 tons (http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Antonov_An-225_Mriya).
250
200
RTM - Billion/year
150 RTM = 0.0067GDP - 75.891

R² = 0.933
100
50
0
30000 32000 34000 36000 38000 40000 42000 44000
GDP- Billion $US/year
Fig. 3.12 Relationship between global volumes of air freight in RTK (Revenue Ton-Kilometer)
and GDP (Gross Domestic Product) (period 1995–2011) (Boeing 2012a)
aircraft has been postponed indefinitely. Both aircraft, together with their smaller
counterparts, are supposed to provide sufficient capacity for supporting the current
and future expected growth of air freight transport demand, which is usually
expressed in RTKs (Revenue Ton Kilometer(s)). The average annual growth rates of
the world’s air freight RTKs over the past three decades have been about 6.9 %
(1981–1990), 6.1 % (1991–2000), and 3.7 % (2001–2011). According to some
forecasts, the volume of 194.5 billion RTK in 2011 will increase to about
550–560 billion by 2031. GDP (Gross Domestic Product) will be the main driving
force behind such growth (Boeing 2012). Figure 3.12 shows that the volumes of air
freight and GDP have been and are very likely continue to be in strong correlation.
Industrial production is an essential component of GDP, and has also shown to
correlate very well with growth of the volumes of air freight demand. In addition,
about 80 % of the prospective air freight demand is expected to be long-haul
intercontinental demand. Furthermore, about 60 % of the total air freight demand is
likely to take place on the US-Europe-Asia Pacific routes (Boeing 2012).
Air freight airlines serve the above-mentioned demand by providing scheduled
and charter flights/services. The former account 90–93 % and the latter about 7 %
of the total global air freight volumes. These airlines operated 1738 freight aircraft
in 2011, of which 31 % were the large aircraft with a payload capacity greater than
80 tons. The proportion of these aircraft in the total fleet was 22 % in 2001. The
forecasts suggest that 3198 freight aircraft of which 31 % will be large ones will be
needed by 2031. Such developments will also be influenced by the decreasing role
of passenger aircraft in serving air freight demand (Boeing 2012).
3.5 Large Commercial Freight Aircraft 147
3.5.2.1 Background
The large commercial freight aircraft are characterized by their infrastructural,

performances, which all influence each other. The infrastructural performances
mainly relate to suitability for airport operations. The technical/technological
performances relate to the aerodynamic design and materials used, engines, and
aircraft systems. The operational performances relate the apron-gate turnaround
time, payload range characteristics, technical productivity, the service network,
and fleet size. The economic performances mainly include operating costs and
revenues. The environmental performances consider fuel consumption and related
emissions of GHG (Green House gases), and land use. The social policy perfor-
mances include noise, congestion, and safety (traffic incidents/accidents).
The infrastructural performances of large commercial freight aircraft such as the

B747-8F and A380-800F mainly refer to airport operations. Some of these per-
formances are given in Table 3.8.
The 747-8 and A380-800F aircraft are classified into FAA (Federal Aviation
Administration) Airplane Design Group VI (Wing Span and Tail Height) and
ICAO (International Civil Aviation Organization) Aerodrome Reference Code 4F
(Wing Span and Outer Main Landing Gear Width) category aircraft. According to
the FAA, both aircraft belong to the speed category D: 141–165 kts. However, in
terms of ATC wake vortex separation rules during the final approach and landing,
the B747-8F is considered a Heavy and the A380-800F a Super Heavy aircraft.
Both B747-8F and A380-800F aircraft can maneuver safely, efficiently, and
effectively on existing airport infrastructure-runways, taxiways, and apron-gate
complexes. Specifically, the B747-8F aircraft can use runways and taxiways 45
and 23 m wide, respectively; the external and internal radius of curvature for the
turning angles of 90/135 is 52 and 26 m, respectively. The A380-800F aircraft
can operate on same the runways and taxiways as B747-8F aircraft; the external
and internal radius of curvature for the turning angles of 90/135 is 45.7 and
25.9 m, respectively. On runways and taxiways 60 and 30 m wide, respectively,
the external and internal radius of curvature for the turning angle of 135 is 51.0
and 25.5 m, respectively. In addition, as shown in Fig. 3.13. The B747-8F and
A380-800F aircraft occupy the apron-gate parking space of 6,350 and 5,840 m2,
respectively, which is larger by about 9.3 and 1.0 %, respectively, then the space
occupied by their previously largest counterpart B747-400F (this occupies the
space of 5,810 m2). Furthermore, the B747-8F occupies an about 9 % larger space
than its A380-800F counterpart (Airbus 2012; Boeing 2012).
Table 3.8 Infrastructural performances of the B747-8F and A380-800F aircraft—airport oper-
ations (Airbus 2012; Boeing 2012a)
Aircraft B747-8F A380-800F
Parameter Value
Length (m) 76.25 72.73
Wingspan (m) 68.40 79.75
Wing area (m2) 554 845
Wing sweepback () 37.5 33.5
Height (m) 19.35 24.45
Fuselage constant diameter (m) 6.5 7.14/8.41
Maximum take-off weight (MTOW) (t) 448 590
Maximum landing weight (t) 346 427
Maximum payload (t) 133 151
Volume of cargo compartments (m3) 874 938
Designed freight density (kg/m3) 152 161
Take-off field length (m)a 3150 2900
Landing field length (m)b 2250–2350 2150
Maximum pavement width (m) 45 45
Effective steering angle () 70 70
Aircraft Classification Number (ACN)c 64–11 (flexible pavement) 66–116 (flexible pavement)
66–102 (rigid pavement) 60–120 (rigid pavement)
a
MTOW (Maximum Take-off Weight), Sea level pressure altitude, standard day ? 15 C tem-
perature, dry runway
b
MLW (Maximum Landing Weight), sea level pressure altitude, dry runway; m meter, t ton
c
ACN is the ratio between the pavement thickness required for a given aircraft and that required
for the standard aircraft single wheel load
(The take-off and landing field length of the An-225 aircraft are about 3,200 m)
Fig. 3.13 Scheme of the required apron-gate parking area for B747-8F and A380-800F aircraft
(Airbus 2012; Boeing 2012a)
3.5.2.3 Technical/Technological and Operational Performances
The technical/technological performances of the B747-8F and A380-800F large

commercial freight aircraft include their aerodynamic design and materials used,
their engines, and aircraft systems.
Aerodynamic design and materials
B747-8F
The aerodynamic design of the B747-8F aircraft has been improved as compared
to that of its predecessor B747-400F. In particular, this refers to the new wing
design including new airfoils and raked wingtips that replace the winglets. The
wings are thicker and deeper. The new wingtip structures reduce the wingtip
vortices at the lateral edges of the wings, thus decreasing wake turbulence and
aerodynamic drag, and consequently improving fuel efficiency. Some composites
such as carbon fiber-reinforced plastic in addition to next generation alloys are
used for parts of the airframe primarily in order to reduce the weight. In addition,
using fly-by-wire technology for the majority of the lateral controls has addi-
tionally contributed to reducing the weight. Nevertheless, the above-mentioned
design and structural modifications can be considered mainly as evolutionary,
rather than revolutionary, as compared to the B747-400F aircraft (Boeing 2012a).
A380-800F
The A380-800F is expected to have stronger wings (and structure) than its current
passenger version A380. This implies that the most of its fuselage will be made of
the regular aluminum (7010) rather than of composites, which comprise about
20 % of the airframe of the A380 passenger version. In this latter case, composites
such as carbon-, glass, and quartz-fiber reinforced plastic are used extensively for
the wings, the sections of fuselage such as the undercarriage and the rear end, the
tail surfaces, and the doors. However, it remains to be seen what materials will be
used for the final version of the A380-800F. What remains pretty certain is that the
smoothly contoured wing cross-section and the central wing box made of carbon-
fiber reinforced plastic will stay in place in order to improve aerodynamic effi-
ciency, and consequently reduce fuel consumption. Nevertheless, very limited use
of composites can be expected in order to preserve the required strength of the
structure, thus making the aircraft design and structure again evolutionary rather
than revolutionary, this time, as compared to the B-747-8F (Airbus 2012).
The designed freight density of both aircraft is closely adjusted to the medium-
to long-term relatively stable average density of the world’s air freight shipments
of about 155 kg/m3 (Table 3.8). (For comparison, the designed freight density of
the largest An-225 aircraft is 250 tons/1,300 m3 = 192 kg/m3, which is about
24 % greater than the world’s average of 155 kg/m3 (http://www.antonov.com/
aircraft/transport-aircraft/an-225-mriya)).
Engines
The B747-8F and A380-800F large commercial freight aircraft can use two types
of engines—Engine Alliance GP7200 and RR (Rolls-Royce) Trent 900—whose
main characteristics are given in Table 3.9.
It is evident that although both engines have very similar characteristics, this is
no guarantee of similar efficiency and effectiveness of the powered aircraft.
Table 3.9 Characteristics of GP7200 and RR Trent 900 aircraft engines (ICAO 2012; Ryck
2008)
Characteristic Engine type
GP7200 RR Trent 900
Type Dual rotor, axial airflow, high bypass Three shaft high bypass ratio, axial
ratio turbofan engine with a single flow, turbofan engine with LP
stage fan with large chord hollow (Low Pressure), IP (Intermediate
blades, 5-stage LPC (Low Pressure Pressure and HP (High Pressure)
Compressor), 9-stage HPC (High Compressors driven by separate
Pressure Compressor), annular turbines through coaxial shafts
combustion chamber, 2-stage HPT
(High Pressure Turbine), 6-stage
LPT (Low Pressure Turbine), dual
channel FADEC (Full Authority
Digital Engine C), and EOS
(Electronic Over-speed Protection)
Dimension/
weight
Length (m) 4.92 5.48
Fan diameter (m) 2.96 2.95
Maximum 3.14 3.94
diameter (m)
Dry weight 6.718 6.246
(tons)
Performances
Maximum thrust 330 310–360
(kN)
Bypass ratio 8.7 8.02–8.15
Overall pressure 36.92 37–39
ratio
SFC (Specific 0.518 0.518
fuel
consumption)
(kg-fuel/
kg-thrust/h)a
Trust-to-weight 49.12 49.43–57.40
ratio (kN/
ton)
a
Cruise; m meter, kN kilo-Newton, kg kilogram
GP7200
The GP7000 engine is developed by Engine Alliance comprised of two aircraft
engine manufacturers—Pratt and Whitney and General Electric. This new engine
is intended to be used for both the passenger and freighter version of B747-8 and
A380 aircraft. The engine is derived from the GE90 and PW4000 engine families.
As such, it is expected to fulfill stricter standards in terms of in-service reliability
and performance, simplicity of maintenance, and environmental and social impacts
such as fuel consumptions and related emissions of GHG (Green House Gases) and
noise, respectively.
RR (Rolls-Royce) Trent 900
The RR (Rolls-Royce) Trent 900 engine is the largest and one of the most pow-
erful engines developed by the manufacturer. It is derived from the RR Trent 1,000
engine specifically developed for powering B787-8 aircraft (see Chap. 2). The
Trent 900 engine is a three shaft high bypass ratio, axial flow, turbofan with LP
(Low Pressure Compressor), IPC (Intermediate Pressure Compressor), and HPC
(High pressure Compressor) driven by separate turbines through coaxial shafts.
The combustion system consists of a single annular combustor. The LPC’s and
IPC’s assemblies rotate independently in an anti-clockwise direction, and the
HPC’s assembly rotates clockwise, when viewed from the rear of the engine. The
engine control system utilizes an EEC (Electronic Engine Controller) which has an
airframe interface for digital bus communications. The engine is considered to
have the lowest noise and emissions of GHG per unit of thrust as compared to
other large turbofan engines powering other commercial passenger and freight
aircraft.
Aircraft systems
The aircraft systems mainly include the flight deck and the systems for actuating
the aircraft control surfaces such as the flaps, slats, allerons, spoilers, elevators,
rudder, and stabilizers.
B747-8F
The flight deck of the B747-8F aircraft is improved as compared to that of the
B747-400F aircraft, but at the same time preserving their operational similarity,
which contributes to reducing the costs of training crew and the number of
required crews. The flight deck architecture is similar to that of the B777 aircraft
including the new FMS (Flight Management System) with larger memory and
increased functionality, the new VSD (Vertical Situation Display), the integrated
moving map display, and built-in EFB (Electronic Flight Bag).
System improvements include a new RAT (Ram Air Turbine) for additional
hydraulic/electric power, improved interior and cargo handling equipment, and an
improved fire suppression system (SSG 2012).
A380-800F
The A380-800F aircraft is expected to have the same IMA (Integrated Modular Avi-
onics) architecture as its passenger version. This technological innovation is based on
networked computing modules, which support different applications. Data commu-
nication networks based on fast-Ethernet reduce the required amount of wiring and
minimize latency. The cockpit layout is similar to that of other Airbus aircraft, which
certainly contributes to reducing the cost of training crews and the overall number of
required crews as well. Eight displays including two MFDs (Multi-Functional Dis-
play(s)) provide an easy-to-use interface to the flight management system. The NSS
(Network Systems Server) as a critical component of the paperless cockpit eliminates
need for hard-copy manuals and navigational charts and backup paper documents. The
MFDs enable keyboard access to the NSS with the stored data and electronic docu-
mentation, required equipment list, navigation charts, and performance calculations.
In addition, the primary hydraulic actuators are backed by power-by-wire flight
control actuators with self-contained hydraulic and electrical power supplies. EHA
(Electro-Hydrostatic Actuators) are used in the aileron and elevator, electric, and
hydraulic motors to drive the slats. EBHA (Electrical Backup Hydrostatic Actu-
ators) are used to drive the rudder and some spoilers. Reductions in the weight and
size of pipelines (made of titanium), actuators, and related components is achieved
through innovative high-pressure hydraulics. Variable frequency electrical gen-
erators and aluminum power cables are used as the main components of the
completely computerized electric power system (Airbus 2012).
Operational performances
The operational performances of the B747-8F and A380-800F aircraft include the
apron-gate turnaround time, payload range, technical productivity, the service
network, and fleet size.
Apron-gate turnaround time
The apron-gate turnaround time depends on the quantity of freight to be unloaded/
loaded, and the aircraft’s suitability for such operations, usually expressed by the
position, number and size of doors, and the loading/unloading facilities and
equipment. For example, for the B747-8F aircraft, this maximum time is 91 min if
the nose cargo door is used, 98 min if the side doors are used, and 54 min if both
the nose and side doors are used (Boeing 2012a). The turnaround time of the
A380-800F is projected to be about 120 ± 20 min depending on the layout of the
ULD (Unit Load Device) (ULDs appear in two forms: pallets and containers of
different sizes) (Airbus 2012; Boeing 2012a).
Payload range
As also applies to other passenger and freight aircraft, one of the most important
operational performances of the B747-8F and A380-800F aircraft are the payload
range characteristics. This is influenced by the other aircraft operational perfor-
mance characteristics given in Table 3.10.
Table 3.10 Operational performances of the B747-8F and A380-800F aircraft (Airbus 2012;
Boeing 2012a)
Indicator/measure Aircraft type
B747-8F A380-800F
Cockpit crew 2 2
MTOW (tons) 448 590
MLW (tons) 346 427
MZFW (tons) 330 402
OEW (tons) 197 251
Payload (tons) 133 151
Capacity
Containersa 2LD1 ? 12 LD6 s 59–71 LD3 s
Palletsb 46 66
Cruising speed at 35,000 ft/11,000 m (Mach/kts) 0.845/490 0.890/510
Maximum speed at 35,000 ft/11,000 m (Mach/kts) 0.92/533 0.96/551
Range, fully loaded (nm/km) 4150/7685 5643/10450
Maximum fuel capacity (000 l) 226 310
Engines (94)
Type GEnx2B67 GP7177/Trent 977B
Thrust (kN) 4 9 296 4 9 340
a
Contoured full-width container: 1 LD6 is equivalent to 2 LD3 (1 LD3—volume 4.9 m3 , tare
weight 123 kg, maximum gross weight 1588 kg); Contoured half-width containe—LD1
b
Contoured pallet—width/length 2.44 9 3.18 m; volume 10.8–11.52 m3 ; MTOW Maximum
Take of Weight, MLW Maximum Landing Weight, MZFW Maximum Zero Fuel Weight, OEW
Operating Empty Weight, l liter, ft foot, kt knot, kN Kilo Newton, GE General electric, GP
Engine Alliance of General Electric and Pratt and Whitney Aircraft Engine Manufacturers
250
A380-800F
B747-8F
B747-400F
200 An-225
Payload - tons
150
100
50
0
0 2000 4000 6000 8000 10000 12000 14000 16000 18000 20000
Range - km
Fig. 3.14 Payload-range characteristics of the selected commercial freight aircraft (Airbus 2012;
Boeing 2012a; http://www.antonov.com/aircraft/transport-aircraft/an-225-mriya)
In particular, the freight density expressed as the ratio of freight weight carried
and the volume of aircraft indoor space occupied by such weight can be relevant
for setting up the payload range relationship. In such context, the payload can be
expressed in terms of weight, volume, or freight density. Figure 3.14 shows the
payload range diagrams for the B747-400F, B747-8F and A380-800F aircraft
(Diagrams for the An-225 and B747-400F aircraft are shown for comparative
purposes).
As can be seen, the A380-800F aircraft appears superior as compared to the
other two counterparts from Boeing thanks to it being able to carry the greatest
payload over the longest range. The B747-800F aircraft is superior in a similar
way to the B747-400F aircraft. In addition to the cancellation of orders for A380-
800F aircraft, this superiority can also explain the dynamism of orders for the
B747-7F aircraft: 27 by 2005, 53 by 2006, 66 by 2007, 68 by 2011, and 70 by 2012
(http://active.boeing.com/commercial/orders).
Technical productivity is defined as the product of the aircraft payload and
cruising speed (see Chap. 2). For the B747-8F and A380-800F aircraft, the pay-
load versus range is shown in Fig. 3.14, and the cruising speed is given in
Table 3.10. The calculated relationship between the technical productivity and the
range affecting the maximum payload for both aircraft is shown in Fig. 3.15.
As can be seen and as intuitively expected, the technical productivity of the
A380-800F aircraft exceeds that of the B747-8F aircraft since both influencing
factors—payload and cruising speed—are greater. This difference decreases from
about 42 % for the corresponding range with the maximum payload to about 20 %
for the corresponding range with 60 % of the maximum payload. At the maximum
range, which can be achieved without any payload, the technical productivity
becomes equal to zero by definition at both aircraft.
Service network
The B747-8F and A380-800F large commercial freight aircraft are expected to
operate in the global air freight service network, which will presumably be of the
multi hub-and–spoke configuration. The primary network nodes will be large hubs
located on different continents (one or two per continent). Each hub will have
spoke airports as the secondary network nodes for feeding and distributing traffic
located in the regions of the same and/or different continents. Air freight services
scheduled between particular airports-nodes will act as the links. Figure 3.16
shows the simplified scheme of such a network. Long-haul intercontinental ser-
vices between hub airports will be carried out by large commercial aircraft
including the B747-8F and A380-800F. The short- to medium-haul connecting
usually daily services will be scheduled between particular hubs and the associated
spokes and carried out by medium size freight aircraft. This ensures the efficient
interlining of services on a global scale. In addition, both the hub and spoke
airports of the global network will have to have efficient and effective inland road
(and in some instances rail) networks for the collection and distribution of freight
TP (R) - Technical Productivity - 000 ton - km/h 160

A380-800F
B747-8F
140
120
100
80
60
40
20
0
6000 9000 12000 15000 18000 21000
Range - km
Fig. 3.15 Relationship between the technical productivity and range for the B747-8F and A380-
800F aircraft (Airbus 2012; Boeing 2012a)
Fig. 3.16 The potential future global air freight transport network (Cargolux 2011)
shipments at/to the doors of shippers and receivers, respectively. For example, the
European feeder road network of the Cargoulx airline from and/to its hub—
Luxembourg airport—spreads over 17 countries with 63 origin/destination cities.
The airline also has six road feeder networks from other European airports with
total of 50 associated origin/destination cities (Cargolux 2011).
This makes the involved airports air/road or air/rail/road freight intermodal

transport nodes.
Fleet size
The fleet size of air freight airlines is generally proportional to the product of the
service frequency during any given period of time and the aircraft turnaround time
on the network. For example, LHC (Lufthansa Cargo AG) operates a fleet of 18
MD-11F aircraft and has 5 new B777F aircraft on order. The airline network with
its main hub at Frankfurt-Main airport includes 211 destinations/cities in 94
countries on all continents except Australia served per week (about two destina-
tions/cities/country on average). The average service frequency is more than
20 flights/day/route. The Cargolux airline with its hub at Luxembourg airport
currently operates a fleet of 11 B747-400F and B747- 400BCF, and 2 B747-8F
aircraft, and has 11 new B747-8F aircraft on order. Its network includes 62 des-
tinations/cities on all continents except Australia. It is evident that the fleet of both
airlines is much smaller and more unified in terms of the number and type/size of
aircraft, than that of, for example, some passenger airlines. This is mainly influ-
enced by the characteristics of their rather global intercontinental networks and the
type (scheduled, charter) and frequency of the offered services (Cargolux 2011;
LHC 2011).
The economic performances of large commercial freight aircraft include their

costs and revenues.
Costs
As with other freight and passenger aircraft, the operating costs of large com-
mercial freight aircraft such as the B747-8F and A380-800F aircraft consist of the
costs of aircraft depreciation, flight crew, fuel, maintenance, and other flight costs
including navigational and airport charges (Morrell 2011). In general, the evidence
to date does not indicate the existence of economies of scale regarding the aircraft
size, but in general, economies of distance do exist as shown in Fig. 3.17.
In addition, the economies of distance appear to be relatively weak in the case
of long-haul freight aircraft as shown in Fig. 3.18.
It should be mentioned that US air freight carriers operate the B747-400F,
B747- 400BCF, B747F-100/200F, B767-200F, and MD-11F aircraft. As men-
tioned above, Cargolux operates 11 B747-400F and B747- 400BCF, and 2 B747-
8F aircraft, while LHC (Lufthansa Cargo AG) operates a fleet of 18 MD-11F
aircraft.
The share of fuel costs in the total operating costs of long-haul and particularly
the B747-400F aircraft operated by most freight airlines amounts to about
50–70 %. Therefore, if the B747-8F aircraft is expected to have lower fuel con-
sumption by about 7–15 % (Table 3.11) than the B474-400F aircraft, its operating
100
c(d)- Average cost - ¢$US/ATM
80
60
c(d) = 9209.8d-0.746
R² = 0.881
40
20
0
0 500 1000 1500 2000 2500 3000 3500 4000 4500
d - Average stage length -nm
Fig. 3.17 Relationship between the average operating cost and the average stage length of U.S.
commercial freight aircraft (AM 2011)
400
350
c - Operating cost- ¢$US/ATK
300
250
200
150
100 US air freight carriers

B747-400F
50 B747-8F Estimate
Cargolux 2008-2011
Lufthansa Cargo - 2009-2011
0
1000 2000 3000 4000 5000 6000 7000 8000 9000
Average stage length-kms
Fig. 3.18 Relationship between the average operating costs and the average stage length of
commercial long-haul freight aircraft (Cargolux 2011; LHC 2011; Morrell 2011)
costs will be lower by about 7–15 %. As fuel prices increase, so will the cost
savings. The information about the cost of the A380-800F aircraft are not suffi-
ciently reliable in order to make more detailed analysis of their potential effects.
Revenues
Revenues are obtained by charging for air freight services. For example, during the
2008–2011 period, the above-mentioned Cargolux freight airline recorded average
revenues (i.e., yield) of about 339 €$US/RTK and the Lufthansa Cargo AG freight
airline of about 319 €$US/RTK (Cargolux 2011; LHC 2011). Despite there not
being any strong evidence on the economies of scale relating to the aircraft size, it
is reasonable to expect that the fuller and more fuel efficient B747-8F and A380-
800F aircraft will enable freight airlines to offer lower rates while still providing
sufficient revenues for covering their operational and other costs.
The environmental performances of large commercial freight aircraft include fuel

consumption and related emissions of GHG (Green House Gases) and land use/
take.
The main characteristics of the fuel consumption and related emissions of GHG
(Green House Gases) of the B747-8F and A380-800F aircraft powered by different
engines are given in Table 3.11.
Specifically, the fuel consumption and related emissions of GHG of the B747-
8F aircraft are lower than those of the B747-400F aircraft by about 15–22 %
(0.117 kg/ATK). The fuel consumption of the A380-800F aircraft derived from its
passenger version of 0.096 kg/ATK appears to be by about 5–6 % higher than the
lowest of B747-8F aircraft. Nevertheless, despite such differences and the inherent
uncertainty of the figures for the A380-800F aircraft, the average fuel consumption
and related emissions of GHG (Green House Gases) in terms of CO2e (Carbon
Dioxide Equivalents) of both large aircraft appear to be quite comparable (ICAO
2009). For comparison, the fuel consumption of the largest An-225 aircraft
amounts about 23.5 tons/h while flying at the average cruising speed of 800 kmh
with a payload of 200 tons. These give an average fuel consumption of about
147 g/ATK and emissions of GHG of about 639 g/ATK (http://www.antonov.
com/aircraft/transport-aircraft/an-225-mriya)
Table 3.11 Environmental performances of B747-400F, B747-8F and A380-800F aircraft—fuel

consumption and emissions of GHG (Green House Gases) (Airbus 2012; Boeing 2012a; various
websites)
Indicator/measure Aircraft/Engines
B747-400F/PW, B747-8F/ A380-800/RR Trent
GE, RR GP7200 900
Fuel consumption (g/ATK) 117 91–101 88–103/113
Emissions of GHG (gCOa2e/ 510 399–438 383–449/492
ATK)
a
CO2e Carbon-Dioxide equivalents, PW Pratt and Whitney, GE General Electric, GP Engine
Alliance, RR Rolls Royce, ATK Available Ton Kilometer
Land use
The B747-8F and A380-800F large commercial freight aircraft are designed to
operate on runways and taxiways of ICAO reference code F airports safely, effi-
ciently, and effectively. At the apron-gate gate complex in front of the airport
cargo terminal(s), parking stands need to be appropriately designed within the
existing airport area (Fig. 3.13). This implies that these aircraft are ‘‘neutral’’
regarding additional land use.
The social/policy performances of large commercial freight aircraft include noise,

congestion, and traffic incidents/accidents (safety).
Noise
Aircraft noise is discussed in Chap. 2. Table 3.12 gives the noise level at noise-
certified locations for the selected freight aircraft.
It is evident that both the B747-8F and A380-800F aircraft are much quieter
than the current long-haul freight aircraft including their closest counterpart—the
B747-400F aircraft, namely by about 2.9–4.6 dB, depending on the noise certifi-
cation location. In addition, Fig. 3.19 shows that both large aircraft are also
superior regarding their SN (Specific Noise) during arrivals and departures.
Consequently, replacing current aircraft with either the B747-8F and/or A380-
800F aircraft will significantly contribute to mitigating the aircraft noise around
airports.
Congestion
The B747-8F and A380-800F large commercial freight aircraft are categorized as
Heavy aircraft since their take-off weight is greater than 136 tons (ICAO) and
162 tons (CAA UK). Consequently, ATC (Air Traffic Control) separation rules are set
up for the arriving and departing sequences in which these aircraft are the leading ones
in order to avoid hazards arising from their wake vortices. In such context, the A380-
800F aircraft is differentiated from other Heavy aircraft as a Supper Heavy aircraft. As
the leading aircraft in the arriving sequence, it is separated from other Supper Heavy,
Heavy, Upper and Medium Heavy, Small and Light following aircraft at 4, 6, 7, 7, and
8 nm, respectively. At the same time, the B747-8F aircraft as the leading aircraft in the
arrival sequence is separated from other Supper Heavy, Heavy, Upper and Medium
Heavy, Small and Light following aircraft at 4, 4, 5, 6, and 7 nm, respectively. This
indicates that the presence of an A380-800F in the arriving stream increases the
average ATC separation rules by about 20 % as compared to the B747-8F aircraft, and
thus almost proportionally reduces the airport runway landing capacity under given
conditions. Similarly, the presence of an A380-800F in the departure stream increases
ATC separation rules by about 20 % as compared to those applicable to B747-8F
aircraft, and thus reduces the corresponding runway capacity (Janic 2012).
Table 3.12 Social performances of the selected commercial freight aircraft—noise (EASA
2011)
Aircraft type Aircraft weight (tons) Noise level (EPNLdB)
MTOW/MLW Lateral Flyover Approach
B787-4F 448/346 94.0 94.0 100.9
A380-800F 590/427 94.2 95.6 98.0
B747-400F 386/296 98.3 98.6 103.8
MD-11F 286/223 96.1 95.8 104.4
A330-200F 233/187 97.4 90.7 97.1
MD10-30F 263/198 97.9 97.4 106.3
B777F 287/221 98.7 87.0 99.7
MTOW (Maximum Take-Off-Weight); MLW Maximum Landing Weight
EPNLdB Effective Perceived Noise Level in decibels (typical engines)
0.7
Departures
Arrivals
- EPNLdB/ton
0.6 Arrivals::
SNa = 172.94MLW-1.093
0.5 R² = 0.992
SN (Specific Noise)
0.4
0.3
Departures:
SNd = 72.227MTOW-0.955
0.2 R² = 0.984
0.1
0
150 200 250 300 350 400 450 500 550 600 650
WMTOW,
- MLW - tons
Fig 3.19 Relationship between the SN (Specific Noise) and weight of the commercial freight
aircraft (MTOW—Maximum Take-Off Weight; MLW—Maximum Landing Weight) (EASA
2011; FAA 1997)
However, operating large commercial freight aircraft rarely has such an impact
on the runway capacity since freight flights are usually scheduled during off-peak
periods and/or on the separate runways.
Safety
The traffic incidents/accidents (safety) of large commercial freight aircraft can be
considered as those of other commercial freight and passenger aircraft (Chap. 2).
An additional aspect can be the safety of staff involved in ground operations,
particularly in loading and unloading the aircraft. This can be measured similarly
as the safety of aircraft operations in terms of the number of deaths and injuries per
quantity of freight handled or per an aircraft kilometer carried out, both for the
specified period of time, which is usually 1 year. Similarly, the safety of freight
onboard can be measured by the quantity/value lost per aircraft kilometer.

Regarding the B747-8F and A3380-800F aircraft, no judgment on their safety can
be made at this moment since the former has just started and the latter is expected
to begin operations sometime in the future.
3.5.3 Evaluation
The large commercial freight aircraft possess both advantages (strengths and
opportunities) and disadvantages (weaknesses and threats) as compared to their
closest smaller counterparts such as the B747-400F aircraft.
Advantages
The main advantages are as follows:
• The flight deck design enables flight operational commonality implying cross-
crew qualification (i.e., qualification for different aircraft types), and conse-
quently reducing the crew training time, the number of required crews, and
providing for simpler and cheaper maintenance;
• The designed freight density fits very well with the current and prospective
density of air freight shipments around the world;
• The lower fuel consumption and related emissions of GHG (Green House
Gases) in relative and noise in absolute terms (per ATK (Available Ton-Kilo-
meter)) are lower as compared to those of their closest counterpart(s);
• The designed range enables non-stop flights on long-haul intercontinental routes
connecting large hub airports on different continents, thus consolidating the
global air freight multi hub-and-spoke network(s) on the one side and fulfilling
requirements of global companies in terms of just-in-time delivery of shipments
and made-to-order call frequencies on the other; and
• The required fleet and its number of flights for transporting a given volume of air
freight are smaller, contributing to reducing the related total fuel consumption
and emissions of GHG, and congestion and delays at airport(s) as compared to
those of their closest smaller counterparts.
Disadvantages
The man disadvantages are as follows:
• The actual behavior of composites used for making the structure—airframe and
engines—is uncertain during the stressful life-cyclecycle, which consequently
may increase maintenance cost;
• The time for collecting, loading, unloading, and distributing the larger volumes
of freight is longer, which inherently increases the level of inventories and
related costs at both ends of the given supply chain(s);
• The fuel consumption and related emissions of GHG per individual flight are
grater that those of their closest counterparts;
• Airport infrastructure, particularly at the apron-gate complex where parking

stands and related maneuvering space of the required size need to be provided,
need to be modified;
• Adapting to strong and fast fluctuations in the volumes of air freight transport is
inherently weak, i.e., the inflexibility in such adaptation is very high; and
• Congestion and delays can increase due to longer ATC separation rules applied
to these and the other aircraft in the arrival and departure streams at a given
airport (that said, the flights of freight aircraft are usually scheduled outside of
the main peaks and/or on separate runways).
Finally, large commercial freight aircraft can be considered as advanced mainly
because of their size, operational, and economic performances, which all enable
forming and consolidating the global air freight transport network supporting the
further internationalization and globalization of the world’s economy.
References
AEA. (2011). Reduction and testing of greenhouse gas (GHG) emissions from heavy duty
vehicles—Lot 1: Strategy, Didcot, Oxfordshire, UK: Final Report to the European
Commission, DG Climate Action Ref: DG ENV. 070307/2009/548572/SER/C.
AEAT. (2005). Structure of the costs and charges review—Environmental costs of rail transport,
Final Report to the Office of Rail Regulation, London, UK: AEA Technology Rail.
Airbus. (2012). A380 airplane characteristics for airport planning AC, Cedex, France: Airbus
Blagnac.
AM. (2011). Block hour operating costs by airplane type for the year 2010: Executive summary.
The Airline Monitor, 24(3), 1–49.
ASECAP. (2010). Introduction of longer and heavier vehicles: Impacts on road infrastructure,
Brussels, Belgium: Association des Europeennes des Cpncessionaires d’Autoroutes et
d’Ouvrages a Peage.
Baungartberm, J. P. (2001). Prices and costs in the railway sector. Lausanne, Switzerland:
EPEL—Ecole Politechnique Federale de Lausanne.
Boeing. (2012). World air cargo forecast 2012–2013. Seattle, WA, USA: Boeing Commercial
Airplanes.
Boeing. (2012a). 747-8 airplane characteristics for airport planning. Seattle, WA, USA: Boeing
Cargolux. (2011). Annual Report 2011, Luxembourg, Luxembourg: Cargolux Airlines Interna-
tional S.A., Luxembourg Airport.
CNT. (2006). Transport/Europe, bulletin of the observatory on transport policies and strategies
in Europe, Paris, France: Michel Savy, December.
EASA. (2011). Type-certificate data sheet for noise A380, TCDSN EASA, Issue 6. Koln,
Germany: European Aviation Safety Agency.
EC. (1996). Council Directive 96/53/EC, Brussels, Belgium: Official Journal of European
Communities, No. L235/59.
EC. (1996a). Towards fair and efficient pricing in transport: Policy options for internalizing the
external costs of transport in European Union, Supplement 2/96, Brussels, Belgium:
European Commission.
References 163
EC. (1997a). Innovative bundling networks in europe, TERMINET, Deliverable D1, WP1, The
Transport RTD Program of the 4th Framework Program, European Commission, (TERM-
INET Consortium).
EC. (1997b). New Generation Terminals and Terminal-Node Concepts in Europe, TERMINET,
Deliverable D2, WP2, The Transport RTD Programme of the 4th Framework Programme,
European Commission, (TERMINET Consortium).
EC. (1998a). Building the blocks for preferable layout of innovative networks, Deliverable D4,
WP 3, Final Report, The Transport RTD Programme of the 4th Framework Programme,
European Commission, (TERMINET Consortium).
EC. (1999). The common transport policy—Sustainable mobility: Perspectives for the future,
Brussels, Belgium: European Commission, Economic and Social Committee and Committee
of the Regions, Directorate General DG VII.
EC. (2000a). Intermodal quality-IQ project, Brussels, Belgium: European Commissions,
Directorate General DG VII, RTD 4th Framework Program.
EC. (2000b). The way to sustainable mobility: Cutting the external cost of transport, Brussels,
Belgium: Brochure of the European Commission.
EC. (2001a). Real cost reduction of door-to-door intermodal transport—RECORDIT, Brussels,
Belgium: European Commission, Directorate General DG VII, RTD 5th Framework
Programme.
EC. (2001b). Improvement of pre- and end- haulage—IMPREND, Brussels, Belgium: European
Commissions, Directorate General DG VII, RTD 4th Framework Programme.
EC. (2001c). Towards a new generation of networks and terminals for multimodal freight
transport—TERMINET, Brussels, Belgium: European Commission, Directorate General DG
VII, RTD 4th Framework Programme.
EC. (2002). EU intermodal transport: Key Statistical data 1992–1999, Luxembourg: European
Commissions, Office for Official Publications of European Communities.
EC. (2005). Energy and fuel consumption from heavy duty vehicles, COST 346, Final Report on
the Action, Brussels, Belgium: European Cooperation in the Field of Scientific and Technical
Research.
EC. (2006). Long innovative intermodal interoperable freight trains, Brussels, Belgium:
European Commission, INTERREG IIIB NWE, C041.
EC. (2007). Customer-driven rail-freight services on a european mega corridor based on
advanced business and operating models (CREAM), Integrated Project, Brussels, Belgium:
European Commission, Directorate General DG VII, 6th EU Framework Programme.
EIRAC. (2007). Strategic intermodal research agenda 2020. Brussels, Belgium: European
Intermodal Research Advisory Council.
ERSO. (2007). Traffic safety: Basic figures 2007—Heavy goods vehicles and buses, European
Road Safety Observatory, Safety Net, Transport, http://ec.europa.eu/transport/wcm/
road_safety/erso/index.html
FAA. (1997). Noise level for U.S. certified and foreign aircraft, Washington, USA.: AEE-
110Federal Aviation Administration, U.S. Department of Transportation.
Fraunhofer. (2009). Long-term climate impacts of the introduction of mega-trucks: Study for the
Community of European Railway and Infrastructure Companies (CER). Karlsruhe, Germany:
The Fraunhofer-Institute for Systems and Innovation Research.
Hay, W. W. (1977). An introduction to transportation engineering. New York, USA: Wiley.
Hall, R. W. (1987). Direct versus terminal freight routing on a network with concave costs.
Transportation Research B, 21(4), 287–298.
Hall, R. W. (1993). Design for local area freight networks. Transportation Research Part B,
27B(2), 70–95.
Hwang, L. C., & Yoon, K. (1981). Multi attribute decision-making: Methods and applications,
lecture series in economics and mathematical systems. Berlin, Germany: Springer.
ICAO. (2009). ICAO carbon emissions calculator version 2. Montreal, Canada: International
Civil Aviation Organization.
ICAO. (2012). ICAO engine exhaust emissions data bank: Subsonic engines. Montreal, Canada:
International Civil Aviation Organization.
INFRAS. (2000). External cost of transport: Accident, Environmental and Congestion Costs in
Western Europe. Zurich, Switzerland: INFRAS Consulting Group for Policy Analysis and
Implementation.
Janic, M., Reggiani, A., & Nijkamp, P. (1999). Sustainability of the European freight transport
system: Evaluation of the innovative bundling networks. Transportation Planning and
Technology, 23(2), 129–156.
Janic, M. (2005). Modelling performances of intermodal freight transport networks. Logistics and
Sustainable Transport, 1(1), 19–26.
Janic, M. (2007). Modelling the full costs of an intermodal and road freight transport network.
Transportation Research D, 12(1), 33–44.
Janic, M. (2008). An assessment of the performance of the European long intermodal freight
trains (LIFTs). Transportation Research—A, 42(10), 1326–1339.
Janic, M. (2012). Modeling effects of different air traffic control operational procedures,
separation rules, and service disciplines on runway landing capacity, Journal of Advanced
Transportation, August 24, 2012. doi:10.1002/atr.1208
Janic, M., Vleugel, J. (2012). Estimating Potential Reductions in Externalities from Rail-Road
Substitution in Trans-European Transport Corridors. Transportation Research D, 17(2),
154–160
Larsson, S. (2009). Weight and dimensions of heavy commercial vehicles as established by
directive 96/53/EC and the European modular system (EMS). Brussels, Belgium: Workshop
on LHVs.
Levison, D., Gillen, D., Kanafani, A., & Mathieu, J. M. (1996). The full cost of intercity
transportation—A comparison of high-speed rail, air and highway transportation in
california, USA: Institute of Transportation, University of California, Berkeley, Research
Report, UCB-ITS-RR-96-3.
LHC. (2011). Thinking ahead: 2011 Annual report, Frankfurt, Germany: Lufthansa Cargo AG,
Frankfurt Airport.
Manheim, M. L. (1979). Fundamentals of transportation system analysi:Basic Concepts (Vol. 1).
Cambridge, Massachusetts, USA: The MIT Press.
Morlok, E. K., Sammon, J. P., Spasovic, L. N., & Nozick, L. K. (1995). Improving productivity in
intermodal rail-truck transportation. In P. Harker (Ed.), The service productivity and quality
challenge (pp. 407–434). The Netherlands: Kluwer Academic Publishers.
Morrell, S. P. (2011). Moving boxes by air: Economics of air cargo. Farnham, UK: Ashgate
Publishing Company.
Railtrack, (1998). Braking system and performance for freight trains. London, UK: Railtrack
PLC.
Ryck De, H. (2008). Turbofan design for the commercial aircraft. Warsaw, Poland: University of
Technology, Faculty of Power and Aeronautical Engineering.
SSG. (2012). 747-8 Quick reference pilot guide, Supercritical Simulations Group. http://
www.supercritical-simulations.com
Tarski, I. (1987). The time factor in transportation processes, developments in civil engineering
15. Amsterdam, The Netherlands: Elsevier.
UIC. (2008). Mega trucks versus rail freight. Paris, France: International Union of Railways.
Chapter 4
Advanced Transport Systems:
Technologies and Environment
4.1 Introduction
This chapter deals with the performances of advanced passenger cars, large
advanced container ships, and LH2 (Liquid Hydrogen)-fuelled commercial air
transportation. The prime objective is to show the potential effects of such
advanced technologies on the environment in terms of energy/fuel consumption
and related emissions of GHG (Green House Gases).
Man-made GHG emissions, particularly those from using nonrenewable energy
sources, have become an increasing burden on the industry, society, and politics all
around the world. This is because these emissions and particularly their CO2
component (Carbon Dioxide) are perceived to remain in the atmosphere for pro-
longed periods of time (presumably hundreds of years) and are proven to contribute
to global warming and consequent climate change (Archer 2008). In order to
mitigate or even diminish these impacts, both national and international policy
makers, industrial organizations, and associations have undertaken a range of dif-
ferent measures. For example, in Europe, the EU (European Union) 27 Member
States have fully institutionalized the problem by introducing national and inter-
national legislations and conventions, in addition to setting up specific targets for
the absolute and relative reduction in emissions of particular GHG. These targets
are expected to be achieved by a range of advanced technical/technological and
operational improvements and by monitoring and reporting developments
throughout particular air polluting sectors of the economy and society (EEA 2010).
The most recent evidence indicates that some results have already been achieved:
the total emissions of GHG have decreased by about 20 % over the 1990–2009
period, from 5,589 in 1990 to 4,674.5 million tons of CO2e (Carbon Dioxide
equivalents) in 2009 (CO2e include CO (Carbon Oxide), CO2 (Carbon Dioxide),
SO4 (Sulfur Oxides), NOx (Nitrogen Oxides), H2O (water vapor), and particles).
However, at the same time, the share of transport sector in the total emissions of
CO2e has increased from about 17 % in 1990 to about 26 % in 2009, which is an
equivalent of about 951 and 1,225 million tons of CO2e, respectively (EC 2010a, b).

166 4 Advanced Transport Systems: Technologies and Environment
In particular, road transport and specifically passenger cars have substantially

contributed to the above-mentioned increase in the total emissions of GHG, as their
share in the total volumes of vehicle-kilometers by road amounted to about 73 %
during the 2005–2009 period. In absolute terms, these total volumes have increased
from about 2,433 million in 1995 to about 3,061 million vehicle-kilometers in 2009
(EC 2010a, b; EEA 2010).
The world’s economic development and international trade have been strongly
supported by maritime transport whose freight ship fleet has been permanently
growing aiming to satisfy growing demand. The fleet consists of different types of
ships such as bulk, container, general cargo ships, oil tankers, and other ships. A
substantial fast-growing part of this fleet consists of large advanced container
ships. These and other freight ships use diesel fuel, which, in combination with
higher demand, has resulted in an increase of GHG emissions. Consequently,
maritime transport, which is currently not part of the Kyoto Protocol, accounts for
about 3.3 % of the global man-made GHG emissions with the share of its inter-
national part in this total of about 2.2 %. Unless global policies aimed at con-
trolling these emissions are put into place, they will likely increase by about
200–300 % by 2050 as compared to the figures in 2009, mainly driven by the
expected continued growth in international trade. For example, in the EU-27
Member States, international maritime transport is the second largest source of
GHG emissions by the transport sector. In 2007, international maritime transport
emitted about 176 million tons of CO2e mainly on account of transportation of
3,934 million tons of freight/goods. As compared to the emitted volumes in 2002,
this represents an overall increase of about 18 % (EEA 2012; UNCDAT 2012).
In order to prevent the above-mentioned negative developments in the EU27
and the rest of the world, the shipping industry has undertaken a variety of
technical/technological and operational measures to improve the sector’s effi-
ciency. The aim is two-fold: to reduce operational costs on the one hand and
improve energy efficiency by reducing fuel consumption and related emissions of
GHG on the other. Particularly relevant for large advanced container ships, the
former measures include building fuel-efficient and environmentally friendly ships
and promoting a switch to alternative/cleaner fuels. The latter measures imply
adopting slow steaming. In addition, the international community, including the
IMO (International Maritime Organization), has undertaken some measures to
influence the energy efficiency of all, including large advanced container ships,
aiming at reducing the rates of emissions of GHG (CO2/ton-mile) below the
current level. By combining the technical/technological and operational
improvements, it seems possible to reduce these emissions by about 15–20 % by
2020 and by about 30 % by 2025 and beyond (IMO 2011; MEPC 2012).
The commercial APT (Air Passenger Transport) system mainly driven by eco-
nomic/GDP (Gross Domestic Product) growth has grown over the past decades
contributing to both globalization of the world’s and national economies and overall
social welfare on the one hand, and increasing energy consumption of nonrenewable
sources (crude oil), related emissions of GHG and local noise, on the other. For
example, the number of RPK (Revenue Passenger Kilometers) has increased from
4.1 Introduction 167
0.5 trillion in 1971 to about 4.25 trillion in 2006. Some long-term forecasts by
international air transport organizations (IATA, ICAO, ACI), and in particular by the
two main manufacturers of commercial aircraft Boeing and Airbus, predict the rather
stable long-term growth of RPKs at an average annual rate of 4.6–5 % over the next
20 years, mainly on account of average annual GDP growth of about 3.5 %. This will
increase the total volumes of the world’s traffic to about 10.545 trillion RPKs
(Airbus 2006) and 11.4 trillion RPKs (Boeing 2007) by 2025/26. At the same time,
the number of passengers is predicted to rise at an annual rate of 4.5 %, which will
result in a total of about 6.8 billion in 2025/26 (Boeing 2007). The above-mentioned
growth of air traffic will require an increasing number of aircraft, from the current
18,230 (of which 16,250 are passenger aircraft) in 2006 to about 36,420 (of which
32,440 will be passenger aircraft) in 2025/26 (Boeing 2007). Since all these aircraft
are assumed to use conventional jet fuel as a derivative of crude oil, the total fuel
consumption and related emissions of GHG will continue to increase, contributing to
global warming and climate change (Airbus 2006; Boeing 2007; IPCC 1999). Some
estimates indicate that the air transport sector emitted about 513 MtCO2 in 1992.
This is expected to increase to about 1,468 MtCO2 in 2050. The latter quantity will
likely continue to account for between 3–5.5 % of the total man-made emissions of
CO2 (ICAO 2008; IPCC 1999, 2001).
4.2 Advanced Passenger Cars
1901 Electric cars-taxi cabs appear in New York (U.S.)

1911 The first gasoline–electric hybrid car is released by the Woods Motor Vehicle
Company of Chicago (U.S.)
1997 The world’s first mass-produced Toyota Prius electric–gasoline hybrid car is
released (Japan)
1999 The first Honda Insight hybrid car since the little-known Woods hybrid of 1917 is
sold in North America; sales of the hybrid Toyota Prius substantially increase;
many car makers release hybrid models and several began to produce new
electric car prototypes (U.S.)
2008 The first Tesla Roadster all-electric car developed by Tesla Motors in serial
production is sold to customers (U.S.)
2009/2010 The Mitsubishi i-MiEV electric car is launched (Japan)
At present, the majority of passenger cars use petrol and diesel fuel as a derivative of
crude oil and natural gas, the burning of which contributes to the above-mentioned
emissions of GHG. Consequently, under the assumption that volumes of passenger
car use will continue to grow, that the reserves of crude oil and natural gas will
become depleted and eventually vanish, and that the emissions of GHG will remain
in the atmosphere for prolonged periods, thus indicating their continuous increase in
cumulative amounts, various improvements of existing and developing advanced
passenger car technologies have been undertaken. Among other, they aim, together
with other operational, social, and policy measures, to mitigate the above-mentioned
emissions of GHG over the medium- to long-term future (IPTS 2008).
4.2.2 Analysis and Modeling Performances
4.2.2.1 Background
Both existing conventional and advanced forthcoming passenger car technologies

are characterized by their technical/technological, operational, economic, envi-
ronmental, and social/policy performances. In the given context, the technical/
technological performance mainly relates to the vehicle size (the number of seats,
weight), and the engine type characterized by its volume/power and energy/fuel
efficiency. The operational performances include the maximum and the most fuel/
energy efficient speed. The economic performances include the purchase price and
operational costs (fuel, maintenance). The environmental performances mainly
include the emissions of GHG, which depend on the energy/fuel used. These could
also include land use for operating—maneuvering and parking. The social/policy
performances relate to noise, congestion, and general public acceptance.
4.2.2.2 Analyzing Performances
At present, the following passenger car technologies based on the type of energy/fuel
use can be distinguished: conventional petrol/diesel/gas ICEVs (Internal Combus-
tion Engine Vehicles), HYVs (Hybrid Vehicles), BEVs (Battery Electric Vehicles),
HVs (Hydrogen Vehicles), and HFCVs (Hydrogen Fuel Cell Vehicles). The last
three categories of cars, and particularly the latter two, are expected to more
intensively penetrate the EU27 and other world markets over the forthcoming
decades. However, this can only be expected if they are able to provide an equivalent
overall convenience to their users—at least at the level provided by today’s con-
ventional ICEVs and/or if they become exclusive alternatives due to the depletion of
reserves of crude oil, making more convenient ICE cars practically unusable.
ICEVs (Internal Combustion Engine Vehicles)
Conventional ICEVs (Internal Combustion Engine Vehicle(s)) are considered as
relatively low energy/fuel efficient due to the fact that as a result of converting fuel
into propulsion, most of the energy is emitted as heat. Typical petrol ICEVs
4.2 Advanced Passenger Cars 169
engines effectively use only 21 % of the fuel energy content to move the vehicle
and their diesel ICE counterparts are efficient up to 25 %. This WTW (Well-to-
Wheel) efficiency includes the energy consumed to produce and deliver fuel to the
station (WTT (Well-to-Tank)) and the energy used to fill and consume it in the car
(TTW (Tank-to-Wheel)) (Bodek and Heywood 2008).
Currently, in the EU (European Union)-27 Member States, conventional ICEVs
are categorized into three categories depending on the engine volume: Small
\1.4 l, Medium [1.4 and B2.0 l, and Big [2.0 l (l—liter). Regardless of the fuel
used, Small cars are most numerous and their Big counterparts the least. The
typical engine power of these cars is about 60–80 kW. The engine volume is
correlated to the car weight, which is related to the fuel efficiency as follows:
FE = 0.004 ? 5.249 W (R2 = 0.839) (FE is fuel efficiency, i.e., the average fuel
consumption (l/100 km)); W is the car weight (kg)). In addition, the fuel con-
sumption of an average car using petrol, diesel, and/or gas amounts to 6.7
l/100 km (0.683 kW-h/km). Specifically, the average fuel consumption of an
average petrol car is 7.3 l/100 km (0.706 kW-h/km) (this is expected to decrease
to 5.8 l/100 km (0.561 kW-h/km) by 2020), and that of an average diesel/gas car
5.8 l/100 km (0.594 kW-h/km), which is expected to decrease to 4.6 l/100 km
(0.493 kW-h/km) by 2020. The average age of a passenger car in the EU-27 is
7.5 years (this is expected to increase to about 11–13 years by 2020) (IPTS 2003;
ICG 2010).
Emissions of GHG by conventional ICEVs are usually considered as closely
related to their WTW energy/fuel efficiency. In many cases, both can be stan-
dardized and as such become country or region specific. For example, the stan-
dards set up for the EU-27 Member States in 2007–2008 were 6–8 l/100 km
(0.612–0.760 kW-h/km) of energy/fuel consumption and 165–200 gCO2/km. The
newly proposed standards are around 6.2 l/100 km (0.632 kW-h/km) and
140 g CO2/km. The targets to be achieved by 2030 are energy/fuel consumption of
about 3.5 l/100 km (0.357 kW-h/km) and emissions of about 82–84 gCO2/km
(CO2—Carbon Dioxide) (IPTS 2008).
HYVs (Hybrid Vehicle(s))
HYVs (Hybrid Vehicle(s)) can be considered an advanced passenger car technol-
ogy. They are powered by conventional petrol or diesel ICEs and an electromotor.
While the former uses petrol or diesel fuel, the latter uses electric energy stored in
on-board batteries, which are charged by the energy from the ICE engine. This
means that recharging batteries by plugging in at street stations and/or at home is
not possible. In general, the electromotor is used for driving at low speeds pre-
dominantly in urban areas, while the power switches to ICE when driving at higher
speeds requiring greater engine power. The WTW energy/fuel efficiency of these
cars is about 40 % (Toyota Prius) and is expected to improve to about 55 % in the
mid-term future. For example, the most efficient hybrid car in 2005 was the Honda
Insight whose WTW energy/fuel efficiency was 0.64 km/MJ (0.391 kW-h/km)
followed by the Toyota Prius with 0.56 km/MJ (0.491 kW-h/km), and the petrol
ICE Honda Civic VX with 0.52 km/MJ (0.534 kW-h/km) (MJ—Mega Joule; kW-
h—kilowatt hour).
In general, in 2010, the fuel consumption of an average hybrid electric-petrol
car amounted to about 5.4 l/100 km (0.799 kW-h/km) and that of an average
hybrid electric–diesel car to about 4.51 l/100 km (0.483 kW-h/km). The corre-
sponding emissions of GHG were 125 and 90 gCO2/km, respectively. Some
improvements particularly to the fuel supply systems in these cars lead to
expectations that their consumption will decrease to about 3.4 l/100 km
(0.329 kW-h/km) in the former and to about 2.45 l/100 km (0.251 kW-h/km) in
the latter by 2035. The corresponding emissions of GHG will be 52 and 47 gCO2/
km, respectively. This implies that in terms of energy/fuel efficiency and related
emissions of GHG, electric/petrol and electric/diesel HYVs are more efficient than
their conventional ICE counterparts by about 25 and 30 %, respectively (Bodek
and Heywood 2008).
BEVs (Battery Electric Vehicles)
BEVs (Battery Electric Vehicle(s)) can be considered as an advanced passenger
car technology. They are propelled by electromotors using the electric energy
stored in batteries on-board the vehicle. The batteries are recharged from the
power grid (at home or at street/shop charging stations). The WTW energy effi-
ciency of electric cars is expected to reach up to about 80 %. This can be achieved,
among other factors, also thanks to converting the stored energy into propelling the
car, not consuming energy while stopping, and regenerating some (about 20 %)
through regenerative braking. For example, the Tesla Roadster BEV has a WTW
energy efficiency of about 1.14 km/MJ (0.235 kW-h/km). Other typical electric
cars are expected to have a WTW energy efficiency of about 1.125 km/MJ
(0.247 kW-h/km) (Hamilton 1980) and 1.583 km/MJ (0.175 kW-h/km) (Toyota
Rav4EV) (ICG 2010). It should be mentioned that about 20 % of this energy
consumption is due to inefficiencies in recharging the on-board batteries. These are
the most sensitive parts of electric cars in terms of their specific energy capacity
versus the weight, replacement, durability, and the short and full charging time.
With a single charge, they need to provide sufficient energy for the car to cover a
reasonable distance at a reasonable speed as compared to conventional ICE
petrol/diesel cars. Contemporary lithium batteries usually have a specific energy
capacity of about 130 W-h/kg, which is one of the reasons for their frequent use
despite their rather limited lifespan. Modified lithium iron phosphate and lithium–
titan batteries have an extended life span of up to several thousand cycles and are
relatively easily replaced. Their recharging time also needs to be reasonable. This
is not particularly important if recharging takes place at home during off-peak
hours (Koyanagi and Uriu 1997); however, it becomes very important if
recharging takes place at street stations. Depending on the car’s charger and
battery technology, the recharging time can be 10–30 min to fill the batteries to
about 70 % of their capacity. For example, the forthcoming models in the EU-27
market in 2011 such as Nissan Leaf, Renault Fluence Z. E. and Hyundai Blue have
ranges between 140 and 170 km, top speeds between 130 and 145 km/h, full
charging times of 6–8 h, and rapid charging times (up to 80 %) of about
25–30 min. The above-mentioned characteristics make these cars particularly
convenient for use in urban and suburban areas with rather short daily driving
distances (ICG 2010).
Electricity for BEVs can be obtained from different primary nonrenewable and
renewable primary sources (EEA 2008; OI 2011). The former include coal, crude
oil, natural gas, biomass, and nuclear energy, and the latter solar, wind, and hydro
energy. The shares of the above-mentioned primary sources (usually country or
region specific) make GHG emissions by BEVs exclusively dependent on their
WTT (Well-To-Tank) energy/fuel efficiency.
HVs (Hydrogen Vehicles) and HFCVs (Hydrogen Fuel Cell Vehicle(s))
Hydrogen passenger vehicles (cars) are powered by hydrogen fuel. Two categories
of these vehicles can be distinguished. The first are slightly modified conventional
ICEs that use hydrogen instead of petrol/diesel/gas as fuel—HVs (Hydrogen
Vehicle(s)). In order to cover a reasonable distance, hydrogen is highly com-
pressed in the fuel storage tanks of these vehicles, mainly thanks to its low density.
HFCVs (Hydrogen Fuel Cell Vehicle(s)) represent an advanced technology in
passenger cars. They consist of five components which distinguish them from their
HV counterparts: their fuel cell stack, electric motor, power control unit, hydrogen
storage tank, and high-output batteries. Specifically, the fuel cell stack consists of
individual fuel cells whose number depends on their size and the required electric
energy. Each fuel cell uses either pure hydrogen from hydrogen-rich sources, or
oxygen to generate electric energy. Fuel is used to feed the electric motor that
actually propels the car. The intensity of electric energy delivered from the fuel
cells to the electric motor is regulated by the power control unit. Hydrogen as the
source of electricity is stored in the hydrogen storage tank either as a liquid or as a
highly compressed gas. In addition, high-output batteries are installed to accu-
mulate the electric energy from the regenerative braking, thus providing additional
power to the electric motor.
Hydrogen as a prospective fuel exists in nature as a component of natural gas
(CH4) and water (H2O). This means that in order to provide hydrogen as fuel for
hydrogen fuel cell cars, it needs to be extracted from the above-mentioned sources.
This can be carried out by reforming natural gas or through the water electrolysis
either at large plants or at local fuel supply stations. In the former case, distribution
from the producing plants to local supply stations needs to be provided either by
truck or an underground pipeline network. Hydrogen has more energy per unit of
mass than other crude oil-based fuels including natural gas. On the other hand, it is
much less dense (Janic 2010). The design of the fuel tanks of HFCVs will have to
take the above-mentioned facts into consideration. Nevertheless, the volume of
these tanks should not be much greater than that of conventional ICEVs as more
energy per unit of mass of hydrogen is expected to compensate its lower density to
a large extent. In addition, this will enable a similar pattern of utilization of

HFCVs compared to their modern conventional ICEV counterparts.
The primary sources for obtaining hydrogen heavily influence the energy/fuel
efficiency of HFCVs. At present, in practice, the WTW energy efficiency of HFCVs
reaches about 50–60 % (i.e., 0.85 km/MJ or 0.327 kW-h/km) if hydrogen is
obtained from reforming natural gas, and to only about 22 % (i.e., 0.30 km/MJ or
0.926 kW-h/km) if it is obtained through water electrolysis. However, the theoretical
overall efficiency of HFCVs can be nearly 100 % (i.e., 1.39 km/MJ or 0.198 kW-h/
km and 2.78 km/MJ or 0.102 kW-h/km, respectively) (http://www.fueleconomy.
gov/FEG/fuelcell.shtml).
If hydrogen is derived from water electrolysis, the emissions of GHG by
HFCVs will mainly depend on the primary sources of the electric energy used for
this electrolysis. This can be from both nonrenewable and renewable sources,
which influences the total WTW emissions of GHG. In the WTT segment, these
will be zero if electricity is obtained exclusively from renewable sources and much
higher otherwise. In the TTW segment, the emissions will be zero except for those
of water vapor (H2O), which will increase by about three times as compared to
those from conventional ICEV and HYV fuels (Janic 2010).
4.2.2.3 Modeling Performances
Modeling the performances of different passenger car technologies is focused on

their environmental performances in terms of the energy/fuel consumption and
related emissions of GHG. When and where necessary, other infrastructural,
technical/technological, operational, economic, and social policy performances are
also considered. Modeling includes an analysis of the previous efforts, objectives,
and assumptions, as well as the basic structure of the methodology for assessing
the above-mentioned impacts/effects on the environment.
Previous efforts
Alterative passenger car technologies and particular dimensions of their perfor-

mances (technical/technological, operational, economic, environmental, social,
and policy) have been intensely investigated over the past decade. In general,
efforts can be classified into the following five segments:
• Market demand: This aspect has focused on investigating the demand for
alternative energy/fuel passenger cars and the consequent prospective market
structure, while respecting the various operational, economic, environmental,
and institutional (policy) conditions/constraints. These particularly relate to
demand for HYVs and BEVs in specified regions. In such context, different
supporting tools mainly based on the logit modeling approach have been
developed for estimating the relative market share and the dynamics of intro-
ducing particular passenger car technologies, as well as their absolute demand
and supply with both and particularly the latter respecting the long-term plans of
major car manufacturers (Ewing et al. 1998; Hörmandinger and Lucas 1996;
Heffner et al. 2007; Higgins et al. 2007; ICG 2010; IPTS 2003; Kurani et al.
1996; Mabit and Fosgerau 2011).
• Impacts and effects of energy consumption and emissions of GHG in urban
areas: This aspect has focused on investigating the characteristics of energy/fuel
consumption by conventional ICEVs, HYVs, and new BEVs and HFCVs, the
overall logistics for the energy/fuel supply, estimating the demand for the
particular energy/fuel type, and the impacts of this demand on the eventual
depletion of these energy/fuel primary sources. In the above-mentioned cases,
the related emissions of GHG affecting the environment at the specified urban,
suburban, and wider regional scale have also been estimated (Chi and Stone
2005; Coelho and Luzia 2010; DeLuchi 1989; Georgakellos 2008; Hamilton
1980; IPTS 2008; Johansson and Åhman 2002; Kang and Recker 2009;
Kempton and Letendre 1997; Koyanagi and Uriu 1997; Lave and MacLean
2002; Nakata 2000; Rienstra and Nijkamp 1998; Schock et al. 1995; Wang and
DeLucchi 1991; Wang et al. 2008).
• Design and performance of new passenger car technologies including infra-
structure for energy/fuel supply: This aspect has dealt with the technical/tech-
nological solutions (material, design, safety requirements) influencing the
operational, economic, and safety performances of innovative (HYV) and new
(BEV and HFCV) technologies. In addition, the characteristics and needs for
energy/fuel supply infrastructure for new passenger car technologies have been
investigated (Chen and Ren 2010; Eberhard and Tarpening 2006; Ogden 1997;
Schwoon 2007; Spiegel 2004).
• Social costs and benefits: This has focused on assessing the overall social and
environmental costs and benefits from using innovative HYVs and new BEVs
and HFCVs including the economy of providing and using energy/fuel by these
cars in specified regions (Funk and Rabl 1999; Haller et al. 2008; Johansson
1999); and
• Policy implications due to introducing alternative passenger car technologies:
This research has analyzed energy/fuel economy in various regions of the world
and related emissions of green house gases, and compared them with the stan-
dards set up for passenger cars and other transport vehicles (An and Sauer 2004).
Assumptions
The methodology for assessing the prospective medium- to long-term effects of the
above-mentioned advanced passenger car technologies on energy consumption
and related emissions of GHG (CO2e—Carbon Dioxide equivalents) has been
developed respecting the following facts:
• The fuel/energy consumption and related emissions of GHG depend on the
volumes of passenger car use, which is mainly driven by the overall socio-
economic development;
• The energy/fuel used by currently predominant conventional ICEVs is obtained

from exhaustive resources (crude oil), the burning of which generates emissions
of GHG, which after being deposited tend to remain in the atmosphere for a long
time;
• The structure of the passenger car market is expected to gradually change due to
the more intensive use of advanced HYVs, BEVs, and HFCVs, in addition to
permanent improvements of conventional ICEVs; and
• Production of electric energy used by BEVs and indirectly by HFCVs is
expected to generally shift toward more intensive use of renewable sources.
In addition, the methodology is based on the following assumptions:
• The particular passenger car technologies remain and/or penetrate the market of
a given region according to the specified ‘‘what-if’’ scenarios, which remain
stable (constant) over a given period of time; this approach has been adopted
since it is at present practically impossible to precisely predict the structure of
this market based on the users’ acceptance of BEVs and HFCVs even in the
short- and especially in the medium- and long-term future;
• The average (typical) values of the WTW energy/fuel efficiency for particular
passenger car technologies and related emissions of GHG and their gradual
improvements are implicitly taken into account; energy consumption is esti-
mated only in relative terms (per unit of car output—veh-km) and used as an
input for calculating the GHG emissions;
• The emissions of GHG by passenger car use over the specified future period of
time are exclusively considered; this implies that the lifetime and related rates of
dissipation of GHG have not been taken into account mainly due to the very
high level of uncertainty and diverging expert opinions on these issues; and
• Advanced passenger car technologies are assumed to use energy/fuel mainly
obtained from GHG-neutral primary sources whose shares are also specified
according to the ‘‘what-if’’ scenarios remaining stable (constant) over the given
period.
Structure of the methodology
The methodology consists of three components/models: (i) the model for esti-
mating the volumes of passenger car use; (ii) the model for estimating the fuel/
energy consumption by the above-mentioned passenger car use; and (iii) the model
for estimating emissions of GHG from the above-mentioned fuels/energy
consumption.
The model for estimating the passenger car use
The existing and future passenger car use in terms of the vehicle kilometers carried
out during a given period of time (year) in a given region can be estimated by two
types of submodels using empirical data: (i) the time series model; and (ii) the
causal model based on multiple regression analysis.
• The time series submodel

The time series model uses the empirical data on the passenger car use for the
period and establishes their relationship in dependence of time as follows:
vk ¼ f ðtn Þ ð4:1aÞ
where
vk is the volume of passenger car use in the k-th year of the observed period
(k = 1,2,…, N);
tn is the variable representing time (years of the observed period); and
n is the coefficient estimated by establishing the given relationship.
The submodel (Eq. 4.1a) can be estimated using past data, thus enabling
extrapolation of the passenger car use as the dependent variable into future period
of time (the independent variable). In this case, it is implicitly assumed that the
main forces influencing the dependent variable in the past period will continue to
similarly drive future development.
• Causal submodel
This submodel implies that the passenger car use in a given region over a given
period (the dependent variable) depend on a set of influencing factors considered
as the independent (explanatory) variables. One of the possible generic forms in
the given context is as follows:
vk ¼ f ðtn Þ ð4:1bÞ
where
GDPk is the Gross Domestic Product of a given region in the k-th year of the
observed period (billion currency units);
MRk is the motorization rate of a given region in the k-th year of the observed
period (cars/thousand inhabitants); and
Pk is the population of a given region in the k-th year of the observed period
(million).
The other symbols are analogous to those in Eq. 4.1a.
In Eq. 4.1b, the past data of one or more independent variables can be simul-
taneously taken into account to estimate the dependent variable. By specifying the
future values of particular independent variables, the future volumes of passenger
car use in the given region can be estimated (as the dependent variable). Similarly
as in Eq. 4.1a, the driving forces from the past are expected to act in a very similar
way in the future.
The model for estimating energy consumption by passenger car use
Let the period of time considered be N years long. During this period, M different
passenger car technologies are expected to be used. The average fuel/energy
consumption of the passenger car technology (i) in the k-th year of the observed
period can be estimated as follows:
Eki ¼ vk pki ð1 rki Þ eki ð4:2aÞ

where
pki is the proportion (i.e., market share) of passenger car technology (i) in the
k-th year of the observed period;
rki is the average rate of improvement of the fuel/energy efficiency of passenger
car technology (i) in the k-th year of the observed period; and
eki is the average energy/fuel consumption of passenger car technology (i) in the
k-th year of the observed period (units of energy/fuel/car-km).
From Eq. 4.2a, the total cumulative energy/fuel consumption from the begin-
ning to the year (n) of the observed period can be estimated as follows:
n X
X M n X
X M
EðnÞ ¼ Eki ¼ vk pki ð1 rki Þ eki ð4:2bÞ
k¼1 i k¼1 i
The model for estimating emissions of GHG by passenger car use
Based on Eqs. 4.2a and 4.2b, the emissions of GHG by the passenger car tech-
nology (i) in the k-th year of the observed period can be calculated as follows:
GHki ¼ Eki gki ð4:3aÞ
where
gki is the average emission rate of GHG of the passenger car technology (i) in
the k-th year of the observed period (emitted quantity/unit of energy/fuel
consumed)
In Eq. 4.3a, the variable gki takes into account both direct and indirect (WTW)
emissions of GHG emitted by the given passenger car technology in the given
year. In addition, it depends on the structure of primary sources for obtaining
energy/fuel for a given car technology in the given year as follows:
X
L
gki ¼ qkij ckij ð4:3bÞ
j¼1
where
qkij is the share of the primary source of type (j) for producing fuel/energy for
the car technology (i) in the k-th year of the observed period;
ckij is the average rate of GHG emissions from producing the energy/fuel from
the primary source (j) for the car technology (i) in the k-th year of the
observed period (emitted quantity/unit of energy/fuel consumed); and
L is the number of different primary sources for producing the energy/fuel for
passenger car technologies.
The cumulative GHG emissions from energy/fuel consumption due to the

passenger car use from the beginning until the year (n) of the observed period are
n X
X M X
n X
M
G ð nÞ ¼ Gki ¼ Eki gki ð4:3cÞ
k¼1 i k¼1 i
Application of the methodology
Input
• ‘‘What-if’’ scenario approach
The ‘‘what-if’’ scenario approach is characterized by specifying the particular

variables of the proposed above-mentioned methodology for the specified
medium- to long-term period, in this case from 2010/15 to 2065 (Rienstra and
Nijkamp 1998). This includes GDP growth as the main driving force of the
volumes of passenger car use, the composition of the passenger car fleet in terms
of the share of particular car technologies, the characteristics of particular car
technologies in terms of the energy/fuel consumption and related emissions of
GHG respecting gradual improvements over time, and the composition of pri-
mary sources for obtaining the energy/fuel to be used by the particular car
technologies. Three scenarios are considered:
– Scenario 0 is a rather hypothetical one specified mainly for comparative
purposes. It is characterized by the continuing exclusive use of conventional
petrol/diesel/gas ICEVs whose WTW energy efficiency and related rates of
emissions of GHG continuously improve by 2030/2035. Their hybrid
counterparts are not expected to penetrate the market substantially. In
addition, depletion and vanishing crude oil reserves and increased related
emissions of GHG do not particularly affect the expected use of these per-
manently technical/technologically improved conventional passenger cars.
– Scenario 1 is a semi-hypothetical scenario containing some remaining
uncertainty regarding the extent to which advanced, conventional petrol/
diesel/gas ICEVs, and their HYV versions with constantly improving WTW
energy/fuel efficiency and related emissions of GHG are assumed to be
exclusively used. This again implies that further depletion of crude oil
reserves will not significantly affect the use of these passenger car technol-
ogies. In addition, the emissions of GHG will be controlled by the technical/
technological improvements of advanced innovative HYVs and existing
ICEVs. Also, advanced BEVs and HFCVs are not assumed to substantially
penetrate the market.
– Scenario 2 can be considered realistic as it implies depletion of crude oil
reserves and the subsequent strong market penetration of advanced passenger
car technologies (BEVs and HFCVs). In addition, there will be a constant

increase in the use of renewable primary sources to produce the energy/fuel for
these cars. According to some forecasts, the known reserves of crude oil will be
mostly exhausted by the end of the specified period (around 2065) (Cambell
2002; Greene and Hobson 2003; Pfeiffer 2004; IEA 2009). The petrol and
diesel fuels obtained from biomass and synthetic fuels will not be sufficient and
will consequently be too expensive and thus practically unavailable for mass
passenger car use. This implies that conventional petrol/diesel/gas ICEVs and
their hybrids (HYVs) will gradually but certainly disappear from the market,
which will be exclusively shared between BEVs and HFCVs.
During the observed period, which is divided into three subperiods, a set of
factors are assumed to individually or in combination influence the rate of market
penetration of each advanced passenger car technology as follows:
– The technical/technological maturity of the advanced car technology and
availability of the energy supply infrastructure in the given region (EU27);
– The familiarity of prospective users with advanced car technologies as
compared to existing conventional technologies;
– Comparable/competitive purchasing prices and operating costs of advanced
car technologies as compared to existing conventional technologies;
– Despite improvements in the TTW (Tank-To-Wheel) efficiency, continu-
ously raising operating costs of conventional petrol/diesel/gas ICEVs and
their hybrids mainly due to raising prices of the increasingly depleting/
vanishing crude oil reserves;
– Gradual saturation of the market with advanced car technologies implying
the market presence of competitive advanced technologies; and
– The overall increasing public awareness of the depletion of crude oil reserves
as the fuel source for conventional ICEVs and their hybrids on the one hand,
and of BEVs and HFCVs as the only available alternatives on the other.
In the first subperiod, the annual market penetration rate of new passenger cars
is assumed to be rather modest due to the predominant influence of factors 1 and 2.
In the second period, this rate is assumed to be reasonably high, stable, and
influenced mainly by the above-mentioned factors 3 and 4. In the final period, this
rate is assumed to again decrease mainly due to the influence of factors 5 and 6.
During the same period, energy for the transport sector and passenger cars is
assumed to be increasingly produced from renewable primary sources on account
of coal, crude oil, and natural gas exhaustion (OI, 2011).
• The volumes of passenger car use
The volumes of passenger car use in the given region are estimated by using the past
GDP data as the independent variable in the expression (4.1b) as shown in Fig. 4.1.
Implicitly, the average car occupancy rate is adopted to be 1.6 persons/vehicle.
The growth of volumes of passenger car use in the EU27 between 1995 and
2009 closely followed GDP growth, albeit at a decreasing rate. Consequently, the
3400
V - Volume of car use - 000million km
3200
3000
2800
Vk = 1877.3Ln(GDP) - 14715
2600
R2 = 0.975
2400
2200
2000
9000 10000 11000 12000 13000
GDP - Biliion
Fig. 4.1 Relationship between the annual volumes of passenger car use and GDP in the EU27
(1995–2009) (EC 2010)
Fig. 4.2 Development of the 5500

V - Volume of car use 000 million km
volumes of passenger car use 5000

over time in the EU27
4500
(2010–2065)
4000
3500
3000
2500
2000
1985 1995 2005 2015 2025 2035 2045 2055 2065
Time - years
volumes of passenger car use over the forthcoming 2010/15–2065 period are
estimated using the constant average annual growth rate of GDP of 2 % (as in the
past period) as shown in Fig. 4.2.
The volumes of passenger car use in the EU27 are expected to continue to
increase during the observed future period at a slightly decreasing rate mainly
driven by the rather constant and stable GDP growth.
• Market share of different passenger car technologies
Considering the above-mentioned factors, the annual rates of market penetration
by the particular advanced passenger car technologies in each of the three sub-
periods of the observed period are determined for Scenario 0, 1, and 2, as shown in
Fig. 4.3a, b, c (ICG 2010).
In all the above-mentioned scenarios, the proportion of conventional petrol
ICEVs is expected to decrease to a modest 10 % in Scenario 0 and 0 % in Sce-
narios 1 and 2. The proportion of conventional diesel ICVs is expected to increase
(a) Scenario 0
100
Conventional ICEVs-petrol
90 Conventional ICEVs-diesel
Share of car technology - %
80
70
60
50
40
30
20
10
0
2005 2015 2025 2035 2045 2055 2065
Time - years
(b) Scenario 1
100
90 Conventional ICEVs-petrol
Conventional ICEVs-diesel
80
HYVs-petrol/diesel
70
60
50
40
30
20
. 10
0
2005 2015 2025 2035 2045 2055 2065
Time - years
(c) Scenario 2
100
Conventional ICEVs-petrol
90 Conventional ICEVs-diesel
80 HYVs-petrol/diesel
BEVs
70 HFCVs
60
50
40
30
20
10
0
2005 2015 2025 2035 2045 2055 2065
Time - years
Fig. 4.3 Scenarios of the market penetration by different passenger car technologies in the given
example (EU27–2010/15-2065)
up to 90 % in Scenario 0, increase and then decrease and stabilize at about 30 % in

Scenario 1, and increase and then continuously decrease to 0 % until the end of the
observed period in Scenario 2. The proportion of HYVs is expected to increase in
Scenario 1 during the first two-thirds of the observed period to 70 %, and to 35 %

during the first half of the observed period in Scenario 2. This proportion remains
at the achieved level in Scenario 1 and decreases to 0 % in Scenario 2 during the
remaining observed period. From the time of entering the market, the proportion of
BEVs and HFCVs is expected to increase in Scenario 2 and reach about 70 and
30 %, respectively, by the end of the observed period.
• Energy/fuel consumption and emissions of GHG
The average rates of energy/fuel consumption and emissions of GHG of different
passenger car technologies expected to be used in the EU27 during the observed
period are given in Table 4.1.
In order for conventional ICEVs and their hybrid versions to fulfill the above-
mentioned targets, improvements in both WTT (Well-To-Tank) and particularly
TTW (Tank-To-Wheel) efficiency will be needed. In the former case, such
improvements will be rather difficult to achieve, while in the latter, improvements
will mainly stem from advanced car design including increased use of generally
lighter (composite) materials. In any case, the average annual rate of improve-
ments of the WTW efficiency and related emissions of GHG by 2020/2035 will
need to be about 4–5 % for conventional petrol ICEVs, 4.5–5.5 % for conven-
tional diesel ICEVs and 4.7–5.7 % for HYVs. The WTW (Well-To-Wheel) energy
efficiency of BEVs and HFCVs will also improve while their emissions of GHG
will strongly depend on the primary sources for the production of electric energy
(EU-27- 2010/15-2065).
Table 4.1 Environmental performances of the different passenger car technologies—energy/fuel

consumption and emissions of GHG (Bodek and Heywood 2008; IPTS 2003; ICG 2010; IEA
2009; http://www.fueleconomy.gov/FEG/fuelcell.shtml)
Technology Basic energy/ Efficiency WTW energy WTW emissions of
fuel efficiency GHG
0 (kWh/km) (gCO2e/km)
Conventional Petrol/diesel/ 20–21 0.612–0760 165–200
ICEVs Auto gas (e) 25 0.955
Petrol/diesel/ 20–21 0.632 140
Auto gas (n) – – –
Petrol/diesel/ 20–25 0.357 82–84
Auto gas (f) – –
HYVs Petrol (e) 40 0.799 125
Diesel (e) 55 0.483 90
Petrol (e) 50 0.329 52
Diesel (e) 65 0.251 47
BEVs Electricity 80 0.175–0.235 (A)
HVs Hydrogen 50 0.926 (A)
HFCVs Hydrogen 95–100 0.010–0.327 (A)
e existing standards; n new proposed standards to be in place by the year 2020–2035; (A)
depending on the primary sources for producing electricity and/or hydrogen
100
Energy supply - Vision
Share of renewable energy sources - %
90 Energy consumption - transport - Vision
Energy consumption - new technology cars
80
70
60
50
40
30
20
10
0
2005 2015 2025 2035 2045 2055 2065
Time - years
Fig. 4.4 Development of the share of renewable primary sources in the energy supply and
consumption by the transport sector and advanced passenger car technologies (EU27–2010/15-
2065) (EEA 2008; OI 2011)
• Primary sources for energy/fuel supply and consumption

A scenario of developing the share of renewable primary sources in the energy/fuel
supply and the energy consumption by the transport sector and particularly by
advanced passenger car technologies is shown in Fig. 4.4.
The share of renewable primary sources in the energy supply is expected to
continuously grow during the given period according to the ‘‘S-curve power law.’’
This implies relatively modest growth rates at the beginning, higher in the middle,
and again lower at the end of the observed period. Such dynamism is reasonable if
the EU-27 Member States intend to mitigate their currently increasing dependency
on imported and increasingly expensive depleting crude oil sources. Since these
reserves are expected to be exhausted by the end of the observed period, renewable
sources will remain the exclusive primary energy supply sources in the region. A
substantial proportion of such energy will be consumed by the transport sector—in
proportion to that of the overall supply. This electricity will be mainly consumed
by the advanced passenger car technologies dominating the transport sector during
the observed period according to Scenario 2.
Results
The results in terms of the annual energy consumption and related emissions of
GHG in particular Scenarios of passenger car use in the EU27 states during the
observed period are shown in Figs. 4.5, 4.6, and 4.7.
• Energy consumption
The annual energy consumption by passenger car use in the given example is
shown in Fig. 4.5. The energy consumed is expressed in terms of crude oil
equivalents for comparative purposes.
As intuitively expected, the annual energy consumption differs in different
scenarios. In addition, it changes over the observed period driven mainly by the
volumes of passenger car use on the one hand, and particular passenger car
technologies in combination with improvements of their WTW energy efficiency
on the other. In particular, in Scenario 0, the annual energy consumption decreases
at the beginning of the observed period despite growing volumes of passenger car
use mainly thanks to improvements in the energy efficiency of conventional
(petrol/diesel/auto gas) ICEV passenger cars (Table 4.1). When these improve-
ments are exhausted, the annual energy consumption begins and continues to
increase until the end of the observed period mainly driven by growing volumes of
passenger car use. In Scenario 1, the trend of changing the annual energy con-
sumption during the observed period is generally similar to that in Scenario 0. The
differences are as follows: the annual energy consumption is always lower than
that in Scenario 0 mainly thanks to more intensive use of energy efficient HYV
cars; the period in which the energy consumption decreases despite growth in the
volumes of passenger car use is longer due to the longer period of exhaustion of
improvements in the WTW energy efficiency of all three car technologies
(Table 4.1). In Scenario 2, the annual energy consumption is the lowest as com-
pared to that in the other two scenarios. It continuously decreases despite the
growing volumes of passenger car use during the observed period (2010/15-–
2065). This is achieved by the more intensive and continuous introduction of EVs
on the one hand, and much more energy efficient BEVs, HVs, and HFCVs on the
other (Fig. 4.3 and Table 4.1).
250
Scenario 0
230 Scenario 1
Scenario 2
Energy consumption - 000 tons
210
190
170
150
130
110
90
70
50
2005 2015 2025 2035 2045 2055 2065
Time - years
Fig. 4.5 Energy consumption over time in particular scenarios (EU27—period 2010/15–2065)
• Emissions of GHG
Emissions of GHG in terms of CO2e are estimated using the above-mentioned
inputs. The results are shown in Figs. 4.6 and 4.7.
In particular, Fig. 4.6 shows the annual emissions of CO2e by passenger car use
in the given example (EU27—period 2010/15–2065).
The general trends in particular Scenarios are similar to those of energy con-
sumption. In particular, in Scenarios 0 and 1, the annual emissions of GHG (CO2e)
decrease during the first part and then increase until the end of the observed period.
The main cause of this is the fact that during the first part of the period, the annual
rate of technical/technological improvements to passenger cars (only ICEVs in
Scenario 0 and both ICEVs and HYVs in Scenario 1) is higher than the annual rate
of increasing volumes of their use. After the above-mentioned improvements are
exhausted, these emissions again start to increase by the end of the observed period
mainly driven by increasing annual volumes of passenger car use. During the entire
observed period, the annual emissions of GHG (CO2e) are greater in Scenario 0 than
in Scenario 1, thus indicating the contribution of the HYVs to their mitigation (by
about 10–15 %). In Scenario 2, the gradually increased use of advanced BEVs and
HFCVs contributes to decreasing annual emissions of GHG (CO2e) over the entire
observed period. In addition, in each individual year of this period, these emissions
are lower than those in Scenarios 0 and 1. At the same time, at the end of the
observed period (in 2065), the annual emissions may be close to zero due to
providing the energy/electricity for both advanced passenger car technologies
prevailing in the market exclusively from renewable primary sources.
The cumulative emissions of GHG (CO2e) by the given year of the observed
period (EU27–2010/15–2065) are shown in Fig. 4.7.
In Scenarios 0 and 1, the cumulative emissions of GHG (CO2e) increase con-
tinuously during the observed period. Specifically, they increase during the first
600
Scenario 0
Scenario 1
Emissions of CO 2e- million tons
500 Scenario 2
400
300
200
100
0
2005 2015 2025 2035 2045 2055 2065
Time - years
Fig. 4.6 Emissions of GHG (CO2e) over time in particular scenarios (EU27–2010/15–2065)
5500
Scenario 0
Emissions of CO 2e- million tons

5000 Scenario 1
Scenario 2
4500
4000
3500
3000
2500
2000
1500
1000
500
0
2005 2015 2025 2035 2045 2055 2065
Time - years
Fig. 4.7 Cumulative emissions of GHG (CO2e) by given year of the observed period in
particular scenarios (EU27–2010/15–2065)
part of the period at a decreasing rate mainly thanks to improvements of con-

ventional ICEVs and both ICEVs and HYVs, respectively, despite continuous
growth in passenger car use volumes. Over the remaining part of the period, when
the improvements are exhausted, GHG emissions continue to grow mainly driven
by and in proportion to the growing volumes of passenger car use. Again, the
cumulative emissions of GHG (CO2e) in Scenario 0 will always be greater than
those in Scenario 1, with increasing differences over the observed period. This
illustrates the increasing positive contribution of the more intensive use of HYVs
over time. In Scenario 2, BEVs and HFCVs will contribute to increasing the
cumulative emissions of GHG (CO2e) at a decreasing rate during the entire
observed period. They are mainly driven by the growth of volumes of passenger
car use. Near the end of the observed period, when both advanced passenger car
technologies prevail in the market, the cumulative emissions stagnate. In other
words, in light of the long standing time of CO2 in the atmosphere, these are
actually emissions from ICEVs and HYVs before their replacement by their BEV
and HFCV counterparts. Last but not least, the cumulative emissions of GHG
(CO2e) in Scenario 2 will always be lower than those in Scenarios 0 and 1. The
positive differences continuously increase and reach the maximum at the end of
the observed period.
4.2.3 Evaluation
Advanced passenger car technologies and their variations including electric petrol/
diesel HYVs (Hybrid Vehicles), BEVs (Battery Electric Vehicles), and HFCVs
(Hydrogen Fuel Cell Vehicles) possess both advantages (Strengths and Opportu-
nities) and disadvantages (Weaknesses and Threats).
Advantages
• Decreasing total energy consumption in terms of crude oil equivalents and
related emissions of GHG in terms of CO2e (Carbon Dioxide equivalents) despite
increasing volumes of passenger car use thanks to the technical/technological
improvements of conventional ICEVs and HYVs at higher rates of growth of
passenger car use volumes during the first part of the observed period; and
• Decreasing total energy consumption and related emissions of GHG during the
entire observed period despite growing volumes of passenger car use after BEVs
and HFCVs penetrate the market more substantially.
Disadvantages
• Contributing to increasing total energy consumption and related emissions of
GHG until the end of the observed period mainly driven by continuously growing
volumes of passenger car use after the potential for further improvements of
ICEVs and HYVs is exhausted; the energy consumption and related emissions of
GHG will be lower insofar as HYVs penetrate the market at a higher rate;
• Considering the lifespan of man (car)-made emissions of GHG in the atmosphere
of several hundred years, only complete replacement of conventional ICEVs and
HYVs with their BEV and HFCV counterparts under the given circumstances can
actually stop their further cumulative increase in the given case;
• Achieving an energy density of batteries close to that of gasoline and diesel fuel
as derivatives of crude oil, enabling the equivalent driving performances
(acceleration, operating speed, and range with a single battery charge) as those
of ICEVs and HYVs is going to be complex;
• Achieving a selling price comparable to that of both BEVs and HFCVs is
uncertain; and
• Penetrating the market more intensively will not contribute to reducing con-
gestion in urban and suburban areas.
Finally, advanced passenger cars can be considered a subsystem of the
advanced transport system mainly regarding the techniques/technologies of the
power system (engine) and the energy/fuel supply system, both of which are
adapted to type of energy/fuel used.
4.3 Large Advanced Container Ships
1957 The first Sea–Land Gateway City container ship, a modified tanker loaded with 56
containers, makes its inaugural voyage between the ports of Newark Miami, Houston,
and Tampa (U.S.)
1960 The first Grace Line Santa Eliana fully containerized ship begins international container
shipping to Venezuela (U.S.)
2006 The then largest Emma Maersk container ship begins commercial operations (Denmark)
4.3 Large Advanced Container Ships 187
Advanced freight ships are mainly characterized by improved operational, eco-

nomic, and environmental performances, the latter in terms of energy consumption
and related emissions of GHG (Green House Gases), as compared to those of their
conventional counterparts. The improvements in performances of these ships can
generally be achieved by improving existing and/or deploying completely new
(advanced) technologies and operations. In particular, due to the continuously
increasing use of containers for transporting freight/goods in international trade,
improvements of performances will be particularly relevant for the relatively fast
and continuously growing fleet of container ships.
Maritime shipping has gained a central role in global trade due to the inter-
nalization and globalization of the world’s economies. During the past three
decades, international seaborne trade has continuously grown, and increasing
volumes of freight/goods have been transported in containers as shown in Fig. 4.8.
Despite being relatively modest, the volumes of containerized freight/goods
have increased faster than the total volumes of freight/goods by their share in the
totals of about 2.75 % in 1980, 10.16 % in 2000, and 15.83 % in 2011.
The above-mentioned total freight/goods volumes have been transported by a
fleet composed of five types of ships respecting the categories of freight/goods
such as oil tankers, dry bulk, general cargo, container, and other ships. Figure 4.9
shows development of the total world’s and particularly the container ship fleet.
As can be seen, both have increased almost exponentially over the past three
decades. In particular, the share of container ship capacity in the capacity of total
fleet has constantly increased from about 1.61 % in 1980 and 8.02 % in 2000 to
about 11.5 % in 2011.
10000
Total
9000
Freight - million tons loaded
Containerized
8000
7000
6000
5000
4000
3000
2000
1000
0
1975 1980 1985 1990 1995 2000 2005 2010 2015
Year
Fig. 4.8 Development of the global international seaborne trade (million tons loaded) (UNCDAT
2012)
1800
Total fleet
1600 Container ship fleet
Capacity - million of DWT
1400
1200
1000
800
600
400
200
0
1975 1980 1985 1990 1995 2000 2005 2010 2015
Year
Fig. 4.9 Development of the global freight ship fleet (UNCDAT 2012)
4.3.2.1 Background
Container ships have been designed to exclusively carry containers in their holds
and on the deck. The fleet of these ships is usually represented by the annual
number of ships in operation, their total capacity, the average ship size expressed
in TEUs (Twenty foot Equivalent Unit(s)), and DWT (Deadweight Tonnage)1 as
given in Table 4.2.
Evidently, over the past 25 years, the number of container ships has increased
fivefold, their total capacity about 15-fold, and the average ship size about
threefold. Thus, ships with a capacity exceeding 3,000–4,000 TEU can be con-
sidered large container ships, implying that the average ship in 2012 can be
considered as a large container ship. It can also be considered advanced if it is
more operationally, economically, and environmentally efficient and effective than
its conventional predecessors.
Large advanced container ships possess infrastructural, technical/technological,
operational, economic, environmental, and social/policy performances. Never-
theless, the aim of dealing with particular performances is primarily to emphasize
the contribution of these ships to mitigating impacts on the environment in terms
of the energy/fuel consumption and related emissions of GHG (Green House
Gases).
1
This is the total weight (tons) that a given ship can safely carry. It includes payload (cargo),
fuel, water, supplies, crew, etc.
Table 4.2 Development of the world’s container ship fleet over time (UNCDAT 2012)
Year Number of ships Fleet capacity Average capacity Average carrying capacitya
(TEU) (TEU/ship) (DWT/ship)
1987 1,052 12,122,15 1,155 16,170
1997 1,954 3,089,682 1,581 22,134
2007 3,904 9,436,377 2,417 33,838
2008 4,276 10,760,173 2,516 35,224
2009 4,638 12,142,444 2,618 36,652
2010 4,677 12,824,648 2,742 38,388
2011 4,868 14,081,957 2,893 40,502
2012 5,012 15,406,610 3,074 43,036
a
Based on the standard assumption: 1 TEU = 14 DWT (1 TEU = 2.3 tons of tare weight ? 10
tons of average payload; the rest is allocated to the ship’s fuel, fresh water, spares and other
supplies)
Table 4.3 Development of the container ships over time—milestones in size (MAN Diesel
2011; Rudolf III 2007; www.worldslargestship.com)
Year/generation Capacity Length Beam Draught Number of engines/power
(TEU) (m) (m) (m) (MW)
1968 750 180 25 9.0 1/6.7
1972 1,500 225 29 11.5 1/14
1980 3,000 275 32 12.5 1/25
1987 4,500 275 39 11.0 1/40.1
1998 7,900 347 43 14.5 1/60
2006/Emma Maersk 15,000 397 56 15.5–16.0 1/80.1
2012/CMA/CGM Marco Polo 16,020 396 54 16.0 2/80
2015/Triple E Maersk 18,000 400 59 16.0 2/64
The main infrastructural performances of large advanced container ships are the
required space and other conditions at the port container terminals used to handle
them. The required space refers to the number and length of berths, which can be
constructed along linear or sheltered coastline. The length of a berth is directly
related to the length of a container ship implying that it can range up to 400 m. The
length of a quay is then influenced by the number of berths needed to simultaneously
handle container ships. The width of a seaside could be up to 60 m. These would both
enable the handling of the largest forthcoming container ships such as Triple E
Maersk (see Table 4.3). In addition, the sea water in the terminal accessing channels
and near berths enabling access and docking needs to be sufficiently deep (in the
above-mentioned example at least 17 m). Experience so far indicates that the water
depth in the main ports has been continuously improved in line with deploying large
advanced container ships. If the depth is adopted to be 15 m as the required mini-
mum, the number of appropriate ports has increased from 17 in 2000 to 25 in 2003,
Fig. 4.10 Development of the capacity of large container ships (period 1997–2012) (http://en.
wikipedia.org/wiki/List_of_largest_container_ships)
and to 28 in 2008. Consequently, the infrastructure of the main ports in the major
trading regions in terms of the required water depth and length of berths is adequately
provided for current and forthcoming large advanced container ships (Tozer 2001).
Design
Large advanced container ships have been characterized by a persistent increase in

size, capacity, and related engine power over time. Table 4.3 shows the milestones
of such developments over the past 40 years.
In addition, Fig. 4.10 shows the general trend of increasing capacity of the 267
largest container ships over the past 15 years.
Three periods can be distinguished: the first (1997/2003) when only ships of a
capacity of about 8,000 TEU were built, the second (2003/2005) when ships with a
capacity of 8,000–10,000 TEU were built, and the last (2006–2012) when ships of
a capacity between 8,000 and 15–16,000 TEU were built. The latest are usually
called ULCS (Ultra Large Container Ships). One of them, the Triple E Maersk to
be launched in 2015, will represent an advanced step in increasing the size to about
18,000 TEU/ship. However, the capacity of these ships in terms of TEU and DWT
does not reflect the standard rule of 14 DWT/TEU as mentioned in Table 4.2, but
rather less: from 9.9 DWT/TEU for the largest (Triple E Maersk) to 11.0 DWT/
TEU to the smallest (2,800 TEU) container ship. This indicates that they are
actually designed assuming that all TEUs on-board will never be completely full.
Advanced container ships have been designed for relatively constant ‘‘design’’
conditions. Such conditions have mainly influenced the hull form, rudder and
propeller design, size, and power of the main engine, and the capacity and layout
of auxiliary systems. Consequently, designing of future large advanced container
ships will have to be flexible in order to be adaptable to both ‘‘design’’ and ‘‘off-
design’’ conditions. The former conditions are characterized by increased resis-
tance of the hull due to operating at higher ‘‘design’’ speed(s), which compromises
their overall energy, economic, and environmental efficiency. The latter conditions
imply operating at lower than design speeds, i.e., slow steaming, which reduces
fuel consumption and improves economic and environmental efficiency. In order
to avoid the negative effects of changing conditions, future large advanced con-
tainer ships will have to be designed (particularly hull and propulsion system-
engines) for a range of the most likely operating speeds and draughts, thus bal-
ancing between the two compromising effects: one for reducing the operating
speed and the other for increasing the capacity.
For example, the forthcoming Triple E Maersk ship is designed with a wider
hull in order to accommodate the specified 18,000 TEUs. Such a wider U-shaped
hull creates higher propulsion resistance than the narrower V-shape hull of its
closest counterpart—Emma’s Maersk. However, the Triple E’s operating speed is
limited to 23 kts (two engines generate the required power of 65–70 MW while
running at 80 rpm (revolutions per minute), while Emma’s is limited to 25 kts (the
single engine generates the required power of 80 MW while running at 90 rpm).
Thus, despite operating at higher propulsion resistance, thanks to operating at a
lower engine rate and operating/cruising speed, the Triple E Maersk is expected to
be overall more efficient than its closest smaller counterpart Emma Maersk.
Figure 4.11 shows the principal differences in design of the two ships.
However, in both cases, utilization of the ships’ available capacity (deadweight)
is variable mainly due to frequent oversupply on the one hand and fluctuating
market conditions on the other. These conditions which will likely become
increasingly common in the future.
Propulsion/engines and propellers
Propulsion system/engines
The propulsion system/engines of large advanced container ships are one of their
crucial components. Some empirical evidence indicates that their power can be
roughly estimated from the modified Admiralty formula as follows:
P ¼ cp V 3þk D2=3 ð4:4Þ

where
cp is the coefficient
V is the ship’s designed operating speed (kts); and
D is displacement (tons).
The displacement (D) is the actual gross weight of the ship consisting of its own
empty weight and the weight of its cargo, fuel, fresh water, provisions, and crew.
As can be seen, the propulsion power is proportional to the ship’s speed (V) to the
power of 3 ? k and to its displacement to the power of 2/3. By proper selection of
Fig. 4.11 Scheme of large advanced container ships
the coefficients (cP) and (k), each individual speed–power curve of each individual
ship can be expressed. In addition, Eq. 4.4 suggests that more engine power
efficiency can be obtained by increasing the ship’s size than by increasing the
ship’s speed (DNV 2012). Figure 4.12 shows the relationship between the size and
engine power of large container ships.
In this case, the engine power increases at a decreasing rate as the ship’s size
increases, thus confirming the above-mentioned trend of designing larger container
ships assumed to operate at lower speeds. The exception is the forthcoming Triple
E Maersk as the largest container ship in the world with a capacity of 18,000 TEU
and two engines delivering about 65 MW of power as compared to its currently
largest counterpart (Emma Maersk) with a capacity of 15,000 TEU and a single
engine delivering 67.7 MW of power (i.e., 3.61 vs. 4.51 kW/TEU, indicating an
improvement of the power efficiency of about 25 %) (Table 4.3).
100
90
P - Engine SMCR power - 000 KW
80
70
P= 33.17ln(C) - 238.31
60 R² = 0.996
Trple E Maersk
50
40
30
20
10
0
3000 5000 7000 9000 11000 13000 15000 17000 19000
C - Ship size - maximum number of TEU
Fig. 4.12 Relationship between engine power and size (carrying capacity) of large advanced
container ships (SCMR Specific Maximum Continuous Rating) (MAN Diesel 2011)
Propellers
The propulsion system of large advanced container ships is usually placed near the
middle of the ship in order to make the best use of the rigidity of the hull and to
maximize the carrying capacity. Once the main propulsion system is made
available, the crucial element to be designed is the propeller. Propellers of existing
container ships are made of nickel aluminum bronze usually with six blades. Their
diameter and weight generally increase at a decreasing rate as the engine SMCR
(Specific Maximum Continuous Rating) power for the specified speed increases.
For example, for an engine of 60 MW SMCR power, the diameter of a propeller
rotating at the speed of 94 r/min is about 9.2 m and its weight 95 tons. For an
engine of 100 MW SMCR power rotating at the same speed, the diameter is about
10 m weighing 155 tons. For engines of 60 MW SMCR power rotating at the
speed of 104 r/min, the diameter is about 8.5 m and weight 90 tons. For an engine
of 100 MW power rotating at the same speed, the diameter is about 9.7 m and
weight about 140 tons. This indicates that higher rotating speeds enable the design
and construction of propellers with smaller diameter and weight (MAN Diesel
2011). For example, the forthcoming Triple E Maersk container ship will be
equipped with a twin engine/twin screw propulsion system. Each of the two
propellers will have a diameter of 9.8 m and 4 blades as compared to the Emma
Maersk ship equipped with a single engine/single screw propulsion system where
the propeller has a diameter of 9.6 m and 6 blades. In the twin screw propulsion
system, the propellers are lighter, thus reducing any vibration of the hull. In
addition, such systems provide greater pushing power and lower water resistance
(Tozer 2001).
V - Average design speed - krts 26
25
24
Triple E Maersk
23
22
20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90
P - Engine SMCR power - MW
Fig. 4.13 Relationship between the design speed and the engine power of large advanced
container ships (SCMR Specific Maximum Continuous Rating) (MAN Diesel 2011)
The operational performances of large advanced container ships include speed,

maneuverability, turnaround time, technical productivity, and fleet size/capacity.
Speed
Design speed
The design speed of large advanced container ships generally increases as the
engine power increases, albeit at a decreasing rate. Since the engine power
increases with the size of the ship, the speed also tends to increase in line with the
size of the ship. However, it remains constant and independent of the size of the
ship and related engine power in ships larger than 5,500 TEU and with an engine
power equal or greater to about 50 MW; the latter is shown in Fig. 4.13.
However, the most recent exception from the above-mentioned rule of thumb is
the largest Triple E Maersk container ship expected to be launched in 2015, with a
design speed of 23 kts and a total twin-engine power of about 645 MW.
Operating/cruising speed
The operating/cruising speed of large advanced container ships differs in practice

from their design speed due to the various reasons. One of these reasons is the
preference of operators to minimize fuel consumption and related costs by
adopting lower speeds. As a result, four speed categories of these ships can be
distinguished as follows:
• Nominal speed (20–25 kts; 37.0–46.3 km/h), which represents the optimal
cruising speed at which a given container ship and its engine have been designed
to operate;
• Slow steaming speed (18–20 kts; 33.3–37.0 km/h), which represents the speed
achieved by running the ship’s engines below their capacity in order to reduce
fuel consumption. (In 2011, more than 50 % of the global container shipping
capacity was operating at this speed);
• Super slow steaming speed (15–18 kts; 27.8–33.3 km/h), which is also known
as the economic speed aiming at minimizing fuel consumption while still
maintaining a competitive commercial service; and
• Minimal cost speed (12–15 kts; 22.2–27.8 km/h), which represents the lowest
technically possible speed since even lower speeds do not lead to any significant
additional reduction in fuel consumption. (However, since these speeds and the
related quality of services are commercially unviable, it is unlikely that mari-
time shipping companies will adopt them as part of their practice).
The practice of slow steaming emerged during the financial crisis of 2008–2009
when on the one hand, the demand for international trade and containerized
shipping was severely affected, and on the other the new capacity ordered during
the previous years of economic boom was coming into service (Figs. 4.9, 4.10). In
reaction to such an imbalance between the decreased demand and increased
capacity, maritime shipping companies adopted slow steaming and even extra
slow steaming services on particular routes. Since the lower operating/cruising
speeds required longer ship turnaround times, more ships were needed and indeed
were available thanks to the new additional capacity.
It seems that slow steaming will remain the operational practice of many
shipping companies due to the following reasons: (i) reducing fuel consumption
and related costs, particularly if the trend of increasing fuel prices continues; and
(ii) reducing emissions of GHG, thus respecting increasingly stricter environ-
mental regulations.
As an innovative operational practice/regime, slow steaming will require
adapting engines through their ‘‘de-rating,’’ namely involving the timing of fuel
injection, adjusting exhaust valves, and exchanging other mechanical components to
the new speed and power level of about 70 % instead of the previously regular 80 %.
Maneuverability
One additional important operational advantage of large advanced container ships

is their maneuverability. Conventional container ships of all sizes generally satisfy
all of the IMO (International Maritime Organization) maneuverability criteria by
using conventional steering systems. Some problems emerge around congested
ports as the wind loading on the above-water profile of large units can be great.
Therefore, for example, on the currently largest Emma Maersk container ship, two
bow and two stern thrusters provide port maneuverability, and two pairs of sta-
bilizer fins reduce rolling. When the banking angle is 20, the bridge sways by
about 35 m. In addition, the turning diameter of the ship operating at the speed of
24 kts (44.5 km/h) is about 0.81 nm (i.e., 1.5 km).
Turnaround time
The turnaround time of a large container advanced ship scheduled to operate along
a given route is defined as the total round time between the given origin and
destination port, and back. This time includes the ship’s turnaround time at the
origin and destination port, its stop/transit time at the intermediate ports (which
usually depends on the pattern and volumes of freight demand to be served in both
directions), and the operating/cruising time between the particular ports. Thus, the
ship’s route between each given origin and destination port can be considered to
consist of several segments. If the stops are the same in both directions, the
turnaround time of a given ship can be estimated as follows:
" #
XN XK
str ¼ s0 þ 2 si þ sk þ sd ð4:5aÞ
i¼1 k¼1
where
so, sd is the ship’s turnaround time at the origin and destination port,
respectively (days);
si is the ship’s operating/cruising time along the (i)-th segment of a given
route (days);
sk is the ship stop/transit time at the (k)-th intermediate port along a given
route (days);
N is the number of segments of a given route; and
K is the number of ports along a given route where the ship stops (K = N - 1).
The ship’s operating time along the (i)-th segment of the route in Eq. 4.5a can
si ¼ si =Vi ð4:5bÞ
where
si is the length of the (i)-th segment of the route (nm); and
Vi is the ship’s operating/cruising speed along the (i)-th segment of the route
(kts)
In addition, the length of the route in one direction can be estimated as follows:
X
N
d¼ si ð4:5cÞ
i¼1

It follows from Eq. 4.5a that reducing the cruising speed increases the ship’s
turnaround time along a given route, which can be partially compensated by
shortening its turnaround time at the origin and destination port, and the stop/
transit time(s) at intermediate ports. These times generally depend on the ship’s
size, volume of load/cargo, and the rate of ship/container handling, the latter
influenced by the available (increasingly automated) loading/unloading facilities
and equipment at ports (Tozer 2001).
In order to estimate the performance of the additional loading and unloading
facilities and equipment in ports (cranes) needed to compensate the extra travel
time due to slow steaming, Eq. 4.5b can be modified as follows:
s ¼ s ð1=vs 1=vr Þ ð4:5dÞ
where
C is the ship’s capacity (TEU);
S is the length of route, i.e., trip distance between origin and destination port
(nm);
vr, vs is the regular and slow steaming speed, respectively (kts).
Equation 4.5d states that the ship’s extra trip time will increase in line with the
route length and the difference in the regular and the slow steaming speed. Such
trip time extensions generally increase the cost of TEU/goods time while in the
chain, which can be estimated as in Eq. 3.1a (Chap. 3) as follows:
Dc ¼ b C s ð1=vs 1=vr Þ ð4:5eÞ
where
Dc is the extra cost of freight/goods time ($US/TEU-h);
b is the freight/goods time while in transportation ($US/TEU-h).
The other symbols are analogous to the previous equations. The extra trip and
cost of freight/goods can be partially compensated by shortening the ship’s
loading/unloading time at the origin/destination port, respectively. Modifying
Eq. 3.1a (Chap. 3), the time loading units remain in the regular and the slow
steaming supply chain can be estimated, respectively, as follows:
sr ¼ 2C=nr ar þ s=vr and ss ¼ 2C=ns as þ s=vs ð4:5fÞ
where
nr, ns is the number of loading/unloading facilities and equipment (cranes) at the
origin and destination port serving regular and slow steaming ships,
respectively (-); and
ar, as is the service rate of a single facility (crane) in either port serving a ship
operating under regular or slow steaming regime (TEU/h).
The other symbols are analogous to those in the previous equations. Conse-
quently, the loading/unloading capacity for a slow steaming ship that could
compensate the extra cruising time can be estimated from Eq. 4.5e as follows:
2C nr ar
ns as ¼ [0 ð4:5gÞ
2C nr ar s ð1=vs 1=vr Þ
This is reasonable only if the denominator of Eq. 4.5g is positive, i.e., if the
reduced speed is not less than:
n s as v r s
vr [ ð4:5hÞ
vr C þ nr ar s
Equation 4.5h states that compensating the ship’s extra trip time due to slow
steaming by increasing the loading/unloading capacity at ports (i.e., shortening the
corresponding time(s)), could be achieved only if the reduced speed is not under a
certain threshold. Otherwise, this is not possible, thus forcing users/freight/goods
shippers to adapt and accept such changed quality of service.
As with other vehicles, the technical productivity of a large advanced container

ship can be determined as the product of its operational/cruising speed and car-
rying capacity as follows:
TP ¼ V C ðd Þ ð4:5iÞ
where
C(d) is the capacity of a given container ship operating along the route d (DWT
or TEUs).
The technical productivity of a given route for a given period of time (week,
month, year) can be estimated as the product of the technical productivity of a
single ship and the service frequency. In many cases, it is assumed that all services
are carried out by ships of the same capacity operating at the same speed. The
service frequency is directly proportional to the quantity of freight to be trans-
ported (TEUs) and inversely proportional to the ship size and its load factor
(Chap. 2).
Fleet size/capacity
The fleet size/capacity of large container shipping companies can be expressed as

the sum of the capacity of all ships in the fleet. Figure 4.14 shows the relationship
between the total fleet capacity expressed in TEUs and the number of ships in the
fleet for the 20 largest global container shipping companies.
As can be seen, the total transport capacity expressed in TEUs increases in line
(at a constant rate) with the number of ships in the fleet. The average capacity of a
container ship in a fleet in the given example is about 4,000 TEU.
The number of ships in the fleet of large advanced container ships operating on
the route (d) during the time period (T) can be determined, based on Eq. 4.5a, as
follows:
N ðd; T Þ ¼ f ðT; dÞ str ð4:6Þ
2.5
C - Fleet capacity - million TEU
2
C = 0.004N + 0.0199
R² = 0.9677
1.5
0.5
0
0 100 200 300 400 500 600 700 800
N - Number of ships
Fig. 4.14 Relationship between the size and capacity of the containership fleet (May 2012)
(http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Intermodal_freight_transport)
where
f(T, d) is the service frequency on the route (d) during time (T).
Equation 4.6 confirms that increasing the ship’s turnaround time due to slow
steaming will require a larger fleet of ships of a given size. As the volumes of
freight demand increase, so does the number of ships of a given capacity and
utilization in the fleet. At the same time, using larger and better utilized ships will
require fewer of them.
The economic performances of advanced large container ships include their costs
and revenues.
Costs
The costs of container ships, as the costs of other categories of freight/goods

transport vehicles, consist of capital and operating cost including the cost of
capital, port and terminal call charges, costs of insurance, maintenance and repair,
costs of lubes and stores, and fuel, crew, and administration/overhead costs.
Experience so far shows that due to economies of scale, the average cost per
transported unit of freight/goods (TEU) on a given distance/route decreases more
than proportionally as the size of a container ship increases. Figure 4.15 shows an
800
750
700
Cost $US/TEU
650
600
550
500
450
0 2000 4000 6000 8000 10000 12000 14000 16000 18000
Size of ship - TEU
Fig. 4.15 Relationship between the average cost per TEU and the size of container ship
(AECOM 2012; Cullinane and Khanna 2000; Nottebon and Rodrigue 2007; Tozer 2001)
example for a Transatlantic route of an average length of about 4,000 nm (AE-

COM 2012; Nottebon and Rodrigue 2007).
Such diminishing economies of scale pose the question whether large advanced
container ships such as the Triple E Maersk will bring more substantial cost-
decreasing benefits as compared to their smaller predecessors. In all cases, fuel costs
dominate (80–85 %), followed by capital costs (about 8.0 %), Panama Canal tolls
(6–10 %), and crew costs (1.2–2.4 %) (AECOM 2012). In addition, for a given ship
size, the average unit cost increases in line with the route length and the operating/
cruising speed, both approximately at a decreasing rate. The latter is because the
increased speed requires greater fuel consumption, thus additionally raising the share
of already dominating fuel costs in the total operating costs of the ship.
Revenues
The revenues of container ship operators come from transporting containers

between ports.
Usually, their rates are set to cover operating costs while respecting highly
competitive market conditions. Since these conditions are all quite different, the
rates vary substantially across operators, markets and routes, and prevailing micro-
and macroeconomic conditions. In addition, they depend on the transport distance
and sometimes also ship size. In addition, generally speaking, the exporting rates
when ships are fuller are lower than those of returning trips when ships may
transport only empty containers. An example of such high diversity of the average
unit rates in container shipping is shown in Fig. 4.16.
In the specified month, the average rate for transporting freight/goods of 1 TEU
generally increased in line with the port-to-port distance in all markets, except
4500
US/Canada-Asia
Europe-Asia
Intra-Asia
4000 Middle East-Asia
Transatlantic
US, Europe, Rest of AsiaMiddle East and South Asia
3500
3000
Rate - $US/TEU
2500
2000
1500
1000
500
0
0 2000 4000 6000 8000 10000 12000 14000
Port-to-port distance - nm
Fig. 4.16 Relationship between the lowest rate and port-to-port distance for transporting
containers in particular markets—(March 2010) (DSC 2010)
Europe–Asia, US/Canada–Asia, and partially Middle East-Asia markets. In these

markets, the rates remained rather independent of the distance, but very distinctive
across the particular routes. All rates were changed the following month, thus
indicating their above-mentioned high fluctuation depending on the short-term
market and stakeholder-related conditions (DSC 2010).
4.3.2.6 Environmental and Social/Policy Performances
The environmental and social/policy performance factors of large advanced con-

tainer ships are considered to be the energy/fuel consumption and related emis-
sions of GHG (Green House Gases), land use/take for the container terminals in
ports handling such ships (environmental), as well as traffic incidents and accidents
(safety) (social).
Fuel consumption
Large advanced container ships consume MDO (Marine Diesel Oil), sometimes
also known as No. 6 Diesel or HFO (Heavy Fuel Oil) or Bunker C fuel adapted to
the 2005 standards as MDF (Marine Distillate Fuels) (http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/
450
400 Triple E Maersk

Extra slow Slow steaming
steaming
Fuel consumption - tons/day
350
Nominal speed
300
250
200
150
100
50 Expon. (4000-5000TEU)
Expon. (10000TEU)
Expon. (12000TEU)
0
14 16 18 20 22 24 26
Operating/cruising speed – kts
Fig. 4.17 Relationship between the fuel consumption and the operating speed and size of
container ships (AECOM/URS 2012; Churchill and Johnson 2012; Notteboom and Carriou 2009)
Heavy_fuel_oil). These are largely unrefined very thick crude oil derivatives, often
needed to be heated by steam in order to reduce their viscosity and thus enable
them to flow. The fuel consumption of large container ships generally depends on
their size and operating speed and usually increases in line with both factors
individually and/or simultaneously as shown in Fig. 4.17.
As can be seen, the fuel consumption of a container ship of a given size
increases more than proportionally as the operating/cruising speed increases. For
example, large container ships of a capacity of 12,000 TEU such as Emma
Maersk consume about 400 tons of fuel per day while cruising at a speed of
about 20 kts (the length of route is about 15,000 nm) (AECOM/URS 2012).
Ships with a capacity of 10,000 TEU consume about 375 and 200 tons of fuel per
day while cruising at the (designed) speed of 25 kts and reduced speed of 21 kts,
respectively. For container ships of 4,000–5,000 TEU, the corresponding fuel
consumption is 150 and 85 tons per day, respectively. The forthcoming largest
Triple E Maersk ship of a capacity of 18,000 TEU will consume about 360 tons
of fuel per day while cruising at the speed of 25 kts. These figures illustrate the
very high sensitivity of fuel consumption to changes in the ship’s operating/
cruising speed.
In addition, fuel consumption can be expressed in other units. For example,
currently the world’s largest single diesel Wärtsilä-Sulzer 14RTFLEX96-C engine
powering the Emma Maersk largest container ship delivers the maximum power of
80–81 MW for the designed cruising speed of 25 kts. Under such regime it con-
sumes about 19,000 l or 16.7 tons of HFO/h or 198 g/KWh. The forthcoming
Triple E Maersk container ship with two MAN diesel engines delivering total
power of 64 MW enabling an operating/cruising speed of 23 kts will consume
15.04 tons of HFO/h, or about 231 g of HFO/kWh. At the designed operating/
25
Achieved
Targets
FC- Fuel consumption -kg/TEU-day
20
15
10
0
2005 2006 2007 2008 2009 2010 2011 2012 2013 2014
Time - year
Fig. 4.18 Changes in the average unit fuel consumption of a large shipping company over
time—Maersk Line (Maersk Line 2011)
cruising speeds, these give 1.39 kg of HFO/TEU/h for Emma Maersk and 0.84 kg
of HFO/TEU/h for Triple E Maersk ship, which is a reduction of about 40 %
(MAN Diesel 2011; Tozer 2001).
Endeavors to reduce fuel consumption
Modern large advanced container ships use HFO (Heavy Fuel Oil), the burning of
which produces GHG such as SOx (sulfur oxides), NOx, (nitrogen oxides), PM
(particulate matter), and CO2 (carbon dioxide). Therefore, due to the permanent
increase in the total emissions of GHG, the maritime industry and its national and
international organizations have made efforts to at least control such emissions.
For example, the WSC (World Shipping Council) and its members have been
engaged through the IMO (International Maritime Organization) in numerous
efforts to improve the energy efficiency of the maritime sector through reducing
the ships’ fuel consumption and related emissions of GHG. At the level of indi-
vidual shipping companies, this has been carried out through medium- to long-
term sustainability plans. Figure 4.18 shows the achievements of a large shipping
company—Maersk Line—over the 2006–2011 period.
As can be seen, the company has certainly followed a downward path toward
the established target of an average fuel consumption of about 10 kg/TEU/day to
be achieved by 2013. This also implies corresponding savings in the emissions of
GHG.
Other efforts have been institutionalized through Annex VI of MARPOL, an
international treaty developed through the IMO, which has established legally
binding international standards for regulating the energy efficiency of existing and
future ships. Consequently, the main environmental and social/policy perfor-
mances of large advanced container ships are contained in these standards
specified by the MEPC (The Marine Environment Protection Committee) of the

IMO (International Maritime Organization) aimed at reducing the energy con-
sumption and related emissions of GHG (Green House Gases) over the forth-
coming 2013/14–2025 period and beyond (the standards are also specified for all
other types/categories of ships). The main quantitative attributes of these standards
for container ships with a deadweight of over 15000 tons imply the following
targets for reducing GHG (CO2) emissions: Phase 0–0 % over 2013–2014; Phase
1–10 % over 2015–2019; Phase 2–20 % over 2020–2024; and Phase 3–30 %
beyond 2025 (MEPC 2012). This is expected to be achieved by: (i) technical/
technological measures; (ii) operational measures; and (iii) economic measures.
• Technical/technological measures
The technical/technological measures aim at enhancing the energy efficiency of
large advanced container ships through improving their technical/technological
performances. For existing ships, this can be carried out through different modi-
fications. For new ships, this is to be carried out through their design. Some of
these measures include:
– Reducing propulsion resistance by modifying the hull form;
– Ensuring enhanced propulsion efficiency by modified propeller(s);
– Increasing the hull size in order to increase the deadweight (capacity);
– Using energy from exhaust heat recovery; and
– Using renewable energy (wind, solar power, etc.).
EEDI (Energy Efficiency Design Index): This index is proposed by the IMO in
order to evaluate the effects of the particular above-mentioned technical/techno-
logical measures for existing and new ships. In general, the rather complex
expression for the original EEDI can be simplified as follows (IMO 2011; LR 2011):
P SFC Cf
EEDIref ¼ ðgCO2 =ton mileÞ ð4:7aÞ
DWT V
where
P is the engine power including the main engine and auxiliary engines
(kW);
SFC is the specific fuel consumption (the recommended value is 190 g/kWh)
Cf is the carbon emissions factor (3.1144 gCO2/g of fuel for HFO);
DWT is the ship’s deadweight (tons); and
V is the speed that can be achieved at 75 % of P of the main engine.
As indicated in Eq. 4.7a, EEDI decreases more than proportionally as the ship’s
deadweight DWT and operating/cruising speed V increase, and increases in pro-
portion with the engine power P and fuel efficiency SFC.
Using the data for container ships built over the period 1999–2008, the average
EEDI is calculated and regressed with the deadweight DWT. The average
regression line is obtained as follows (Flikkema et al. 2012; IMO 2011):
EEDIref ¼ 174:22 DWT0:201 ð4:7bÞ

This Reference Line is used as the terms of reference for existing and especially
new-build ships. If the attained EEDI value of a given ship is above the Reference
Line, the ship is considered energy inefficient, and vice versa. Consequently, the
required EEDI can be defined as the allowable maximum attained EEDI for a
given container ship, which is below and/or at most at the Reference Line.
Regarding the above-mentioned policy targets for improving the energy efficiency
of container ships over the forthcoming period (i.e., by 2025 and beyond), the
required EEDI can be estimated as follows (IMO 2011):
EEDIreq ¼ ð1 X=100Þ EEDIref ð4:7cÞ
where
X is the target for improving the energy efficiency of container ships during the
specified period of time (%).
As an example, using Eq. 4.7a, the attained EEDI is calculated for existing
Post-Panamax large container ships which entered service over 2003–2008.
Capacity utilization (DWT) is assumed to be 70 %, the power 75 % of the max-
imum engine power, and the speed 1 kts below the maximum designed speed
(MAN Diesel 2011). The required EEDIs respecting the above-mentioned energy
efficiency improvement targets can be calculated using Eqs. 4.7b, c. Figure 4.19
shows the results. As can be seen, all considered container ships fulfill the required
2013–2014 EEDI. Ships larger than 85,000 DWT will be able to satisfy the
required 2015–2019 EEDI. None of these ships will be able to satisfy the required
2020–2024 EEDI, or those set for 2025 and beyond.
20
18
16
EEDI - gCO2 /ton-mile
14
12
10 Ref. Line - 2013-2014

Ref. Line - 2015-2019
8 Ref.Line - 2020-2024
Ref. Line - 2025-
Attained - 2003-2008
6
60 70 80 90 100 110 120 130 140 150 160 170 180 190
DWT - Deadweight - 000 tons
Fig. 4.19 Environmental performances of the large advanced container ships—relationship

between the existing and required EEDI, and the capacity (IMO 2011; MAN Diesel 2011)
20
18
16
14
EEDI - gCO 2 /ton-mile
12
10
Triple E Maersk
8
6 Ref.Line - 10000TEU; DWT = 101000 tons; 2013-

2014/2015-2019/2020-2024/2025-
Attained - 10000TEU; DWT = 101000 tons; 2012
4
Ref. Line - 18000TEU; DWT =178000 tons; 2013-
2 2014/2015-2019/2020-2024/2025-
Attained - 18000TEU; DWT = 178000 tons; 2012
0
1 2 3 4 5
Time - 1 - 2013/2014; 2 - 2015-2019; 3 - 2020-2024; 4 - 2025-
Fig. 4.20 Environmental performances for the selected large advanced container ships—attained
and required EEDI specified by the MEPC policy for the 2013–2025 period and beyond
In addition, Fig. 4.20 shows that container ships larger than 85,000 DWT
including the largest forthcoming Triple E Maersk to be launched in 2015 will be
able to satisfy the required EEDI from 2012 until 2020 and slightly beyond, but not
later. If, however, the Triple E Maersk ship is to be designed as expected
(SFC = 168 g/kWh and engine power P = 65 MW), its attained EEDI will be
comfortably below the required EEDI over the entire period (2015–2025 and
beyond).
• Operational measures
Operational measures aim at improving the energy efficiency of large advanced
container ships through innovative operations. They can be applied to existing
ships by shipping companies in the scope of their efforts to improve energy and
consequently economic efficiency. Some of these measures include:
– Optimizing operations of individual ships and fleets;
– Operating/cruising at reduced speed, i.e., slow steaming;
– Entering and leaving ports on time;
– Maintaining the hull clean in order to reduce propulsion resistance; and
– Ensuring regular maintenance of the ship’s overall machinery.
In order to promote, stimulate, and implement some and/or all above-mentioned
operational measures applicable to existing large advanced container and all other
ships, the IMO has also proposed two indicators/tools: EEOI (Energy Efficiency
Operational Indicator) and SEEMP (Ship Energy Efficiency Management Plan).
EEOI (Energy Efficiency Operational Indicator): This indicator was introduced

on a voluntary basis in 2005 and is expected to be used by the owners and operators
of large advanced container and other ships as an indicator expressing the energy
efficiency of a given ship in operation. It can be estimated as follows (IMO 2012):
FC Cf
EEOI ¼ ðgCO2 =ton mileÞ ð4:7dÞ
Wc d
where
FC is the fuel consumption during a trip (tons);
Wc is the actual weight of freight/goods (tons); and
d is the length of route, i.e., actual trip distance (nm).

Equation 4.7d indicates that EEOI is proportional to the fuel consumed during a
given trip and is inversely proportional to the actual weight of freight/goods on-
board and length of route. Thus, the EEOI can be improved by decreasing the fuel
consumption, as mentioned above, through reducing the operating/cruising speed,
i.e., slow steaming, while transporting larger quantities of freight on longer
distances.
Despite being expressed in the same units as EEDI, the EEOI is estimated from
the values of particular variables measured during or just after a given trip.
Therefore, it can be used for measuring changes in the energy efficiency of the
same ship operating along different routes/markets under different conditions. Due
to such inherent diversity of the independent variables already used for the same
ship, the EEOI appears inappropriate for the comparison of different ships.
SEEMP (Energy Efficiency Management Plan): This management plan is used
for implementing improvements in the ship’s and fleet’s energy efficiency through
operational measures. These include planning the trip in terms of weather routing,
arrivals and departures from ports on time, optimization of speed, etc., optimizing
the ship’s handling and maintenance of the hull, use of engines and waste heat
recovery, as well as energy management and reporting. The implementation of
SEEMP voluntarily by ship and fleet owners and/or operators can be carried out
through five procedures comprising the energy efficiency improvement cycle as
follows (Sala 2010):
• Planning identifies measures for improving energy efficiency, sets up the tar-
gets, defines the activities and persons in charge, and establishes all these as a
system with a roadmap over a 3–5 year period;
• Implementation implies realization of the energy efficiency improvements
according to the plan; these include zero or low cost simple improvements made
during daily operation and maintenance, less than 2 year pay-back improve-
ments of systems by minor conversions during regular operations, and
improvements of the systems and haul requiring the ship to dock;
• Monitoring implies developing the method and performing energy efficiency

monitoring continuously by collecting and processing quantitative information/
data during and/or at the end of the improvement cycle; and
• Self-evaluation implies assessing the effects of the implemented measures by
using the monitored results and feeding them back to the next energy efficiency
improvement cycle; and
• Publication of the results voluntarily implies presenting the results to the pro-
fessional public and enabling third party evaluation.
Due to the need for collecting a relatively large quantity of information even for
a single trip, different support systems are being developed for calculating, ana-
lyzing, and preparing reports on energy efficiency improvement cycle(s).
• Economic measures
Economic measures aim at promoting and implementing the above-mentioned
technical/technological and operational measures. IMO has proposed several
measures classified into two broad categories as follows:
– The fuel pricing system (proposed by Denmark); and
– The emissions trading system (proposed by Norway, Germany, and France).
The former measure implies automatically charging an amount on the purchase
of fuel. The collected funds would be used for different projects aiming at reducing
emissions of GHG, particularly those in developing countries. In addition, a part of
the amount collected would be awarded back to ships achieving substantial
improvements in energy efficiency. The latter implies that the total amount of
GHG generated by the shipping industry would be regulated by the emission
trading system. In such a case, each ship would be assigned a credit in terms of the
annual allowable emissions of GHG (CO2). Subsequently, the differences between
the actual and credited (assigned) emissions would be traded with other ships and/
or the rest of the transport and other non-transport sectors.
Potential impact on global emissions of GHG
The presented EEDI and SEEMP measures are expected to significantly reduce
emissions of GHG from the world’s freight ships over the long-term 2010–2050
period. Figure 4.21 shows one such scenario.
As can be seen, both EEDI and SEEMP will contribute to reducing the total
emissions of GHG (CO2) as compared to the emission levels in 2010. For example,
the reduction will be between 13–23 % over the 2020–2030 period. However,
these measures will not be able to prevent a further increase in the total emissions
of GHG according to an upward trend although with some reduced rates as
compared to the BAU (Business As Usual) scenario, mainly driven by the
expected growth in global trade.
The contribution of EEDI and SEEMP will most likely be proportional to the
product of their share in the total global freight ship fleet and the above-mentioned
3000
Scenario BAU - Business As Usual
Scenario with EEDI and SEEMP
2500
Total emissions of CO 2 -million tons
Scenario with container ships, EEDI, and SEEMP
2000
1500
1000
500
0
2005 2015 2025 2035 2045 2055
Year
Fig. 4.21 Scenarios of development of emissions of GHG (CO2) by the global freight ship fleet
over time (IMO 2011; MEPC 2012)
required EEDI targets. In addition to the required EEDI targets, let the ‘‘what-if’’
scenario assume an increase in the share of large advanced container ships in the
global fleet at an average rate of 5 %/10 years by 2050. This will amount to shares
in the corresponding totals of 5, 7, 17, 23, 28, and 33 % in 2010, 2013, 2020, 2030,
2040, and 2050, respectively. As applied to the total amount of emissions of GHG,
this again produces an upward trend as shown in Fig. 4.21. As can be seen, the
contribution to decreasing of the total emissions of GHG (CO2) would be about
3–10 % over the observed period (2010–2050).
Future measures and technologies for mitigating emissions of GHG
The main drivers of design of future large advanced container ships will be con-
ditioned by the strategic plans of shipping companies and environmental con-
straints aiming at:
• Improving economics by reducing the staff and increasing productivity;
• Increasing flexibility of services by modifying routes and networks, and ship
deployment;
• Optimizing utilization of containers, i.e., securing return freight/goods volumes;
• Minimizing delays at ports; and
• Minimizing fuel consumption and related emissions of GHG (Green House
Gases) by meeting the current and prospective energy efficiency regulatory
requirements, i.e., required EEDI.
In particular, the options for minimizing fuel consumption and related emis-
sions of GHG through ship design include: (i) Reduction of power; (ii) New
technology for power generation; and (iii) Renewable fuel/energy primary sources.
• Reduction of power can generally be achieved by designing/developing the hull
form, reducing the weight and power for the ship’s own use, frictional and wind
resistance, and improving the engine efficiency;
• New technologies for power generation include use of alternative fuels such as
biofuels, LNG (liquefied natural gas), LH2 (liquid hydrogen) and fuel cells; and
• Renewable fuel/energy primary sources include solar and wind energy.
In addition, an option for minimizing the fuel consumption and related emis-
sions of GHG includes forthcoming trip support systems, one of which is ‘‘Sea-
Navi.’’ These are designed to support online optimization of the ship’s routing
respecting the shortest distance, weather, characteristics of the hull, and regime of
engine operation, thus contributing to improving EEOI and SEEMP.
Reduction of power
Some achievements have already been made by reducing power. An example of

using existing technologies is the Triple E Maersk container ship, which will
consume about 35 % less fuel (HFO) and emit about 20 % less CO2 per TEU as
compared to today’s most energy efficient container ships, and about 50 % less of
both as compared to the industry average for container ships operating in the Asia–
Europe market. Such energy efficiency of about 9 % will be partially achieved also
thanks to an advanced energy efficient waste heat recovery system, the purpose of
which is to reduce the engine’s need for fuel and consequent emissions of CO2.
The system operates by capturing the heat and pressure contained in the exhaust
gases and then using them to move turbines creating mechanical energy for
operating an electrical generator.
In addition, a future container ship concept has been proposed by Odense Steel
Shipyard Ltd. The reference case is the existing A-class Post-Panamax container
ship of a capacity of 8,500 TEU, 109000 tons DWT, length 352 m, draught 15 m,
the power of main engine 63 MV at 100 rpm, and design speed of 26.5 kts. In
parallel with improving the main engine and propeller design, an innovative WIF
(Water in Fuel), WHRS (Waste Heat Recovery System), and EGR (Exhaust Gas
Recirculation) system aiming at improving the ship’s energy efficiency would be
introduced in four of five designs as shown in Table 4.4 (OSSL 2009).
The given cases indicate that de-rated engine power, modified propeller design
and slow steaming, in combination with other systems (WHRS, WIF, and EGR),
could improve the ship’s energy efficiency in terms of energy consumption and
related emissions of GHG (CO2) by about 30 %.
Furthermore, some other advanced container ship designs with existing HFO
may be promising. One of these is the new method of powering large freight ships
developed by Gamma Light and Heavy Industries Ltd. The method implies that
instead of placing diesel engines at the rear of the ship as is common, the sets of
Table 4.4 Improving performances through the design of advanced future container ships
(OSSL 2009)
Performance 1 2 3 4 5
WHRS No Yes Yes Yes Yes
WIF and EGR No Yes Yes Yes Yes
Capacity (TEU) 8,500 8,500 8,500 8,500 8,500
Design speed (kts) 26.5 26.5 26.5 24.1 22.08
Engine (de-rated) power (MW) 63.0 62.6 58.3 40.9 31.4
RPM1) 100 94 94 78 76
Propeller
Diameter (m) 8.9 9.2 9.2 9.2 8.8
Number of blades 6 6 6 6 6
Fuel consumption (HFO) (tons/day) 278 246 227 160 121
Emissions of GHG (CO2) (tons/day) 866 766 707 498 377
RPM Rotations per minute; (1) A-class as built (reference design); (2) New engine, larger
propeller diameter ? WHRS, ? WIF&EGR; (3) 2 ? New propeller blade design, hull coating,
and advanced rudder; (4) 3 ? Lower steaming I; (5) 4 ? New Engine, Smaller propeller
diameter, new propeller blade design, hull coating, advanced rudder ? Lower steaming II
diesel electric units are placed down the side and along the entire length of the
ship, enabling much higher efficiency due to much reduced use of the available
power and proportionally less fuel consumption while maneuvering. Such a con-
stellation is expected to improve the nominal (present) energy efficiency of ship(s)
by about 75 %.
New technologies
Biofuels are considered as alternative fuels. They include biodiesel/vegetable oils

and biogas. The former is applied to FAME (Fatty Acid Methyl Ester), which can
be used exclusively or as an ingredient of conventional HFO. Generally, it can be
produced from oleaginous crops such as rapeseed, sunflowers, soy beans, palm
oils, etc. The latter, also known as SNG (Substitute Natural Gas), can be produced
with similar characteristics as LNG (Liquefied Natural Gas) allowing use in LNG
engines. The primary source of biogas is organic waste and energy crops. It can be
used by LNG engines and also fuel cells (UniCredit 2009).
LNG is also an alternative fuel, the main component of which is methane. It has
come under focus mainly due to its CO2 content which is about 20–25 %
lower than that of HFO. Also, it can reduce emissions of SOx (Sulfur Oxide) by
about 90–95 % and NOx to the level complying with IMO Tier III limits to be in
effect from 2016. In addition, the price of LNG would be comparable to that of
HFO. However, the tanks for storing LNG are much larger than those for storing
HFO, thus requiring more space, which can compromise the ship’s loading
capacity. Nevertheless, this could be compensated by improved energy efficiency.
The engines powering the ship would be the dual-fuel hybrid constructions
enabling operation in both HFO and LNG mode. Some designs such as Quantum
(DNV—Det Norske Veritas) indicate that the EEDIs of large container ships using
a mixture of LNG/HFO could be significantly lower than that required beyond
2025 (by about 30 %). In addition, particular attention needs to be devoted to the
safety and reliability of LNG bunkering systems by excluding any spillage (GL
2012).
In principle, fuel cells convert chemical energy (for example contained in
hydrogen H2 and oxygen O2) directly into electricity used for powering the ship’s
electromotor(s). Such direct conversion makes hydrogen fuel cells highly efficient.
On container ships they are located inside the container units and they can be of
the PEM (Polymer Electrolyte Membrane) type characterized by a high power
density and flexible behavior in operation. As such, they enable optimization of
power use on a case by case (trip) basis depending on the prevailing conditions.
The NYK Super Eco Ship 2030 is an example of a future container ship that could
alternatively be powered by fuel cells (UniCredit 2009).
Renewable fuel/energy primary sources
Wind energy was commonly used in maritime operations in the middle ages. One
modern example is the MS Beluga SkySails ship developed by two companies—
KiteShip and SkySails—and launched in 2007 (EC 2010b). The wind assisting
system includes larger sails attached, for example, to the container ship, which pull
the ship through the water by using high-altitude wind(s). Depending on the ship’s
size, the sails can have up to about 5000 m2 of surface area. They are divided into
compartments with compressed air keeping them rigid. Such sails are controlled
by computer in addition to an autopilot system used to determine the optimal
shipping route(s) depending on the weather (prevailing wind) conditions. In the
given case, the wind energy is partially used as a means of assistance, since a
diesel HFO engine still remains in place. The potential improvement in the ship’s
energy efficiency is estimated to be up to about 10–35 %.
In addition, solar and wind energy will be used exclusively and/or in combi-
nation with LNG for powering future large container ships. In such cases, both
solar and wind energy will be harnessed by solar panels (or solar cells on foils) and
sails, respectively, and then either directly converted into electricity and consumed
or stored for later use. Table 4.5 gives a comparison of the existing MV NYK
VEGA and future NYK Super Eco Ship using different power sources.
The future NYK Super Eco ship will be equipped with an LNG engine with
about 30 % less power, but supported by about 5–13 % of renewable (solar and
wind) energy. Both will enable improvement of the ship’s energy efficiency by
about 70 %.
Another example is the Aquarius Eco Ship designed by EMP (Eco Marine
Power) from Fukuoka (Japan). The central component of the ship is the Aquarius
MRE System based on EnergySail technology. This is a renewable energy plat-
form also designed by EMP fitted with different renewable energy technologies
incorporating solar panels and wind power devices, energy storage modules, and a
positioning system. The first enable tapping wind and sun power while at sea or
Table 4.5 Main characteristics of existing and future advanced large container ships (NYK
Line/MTI 2010)
Basic characteristics: MV NYK VEGA NYK Super Eco Ship
9000 TEU/25 kts (2006) (2030)
Length (m) 338 353
Weight (m) 45.8 54.6
Draught (m) 13.0 11.5
Engine type Diesel engine (HFO) Fuel cell (NLG)
Required power (MW) 64 40
Renewable energy (MW) 0 Solar: 1–2/Wind: 1–3
Emissions of CO2 (g/TEU-mile) 195 62
even in the port. The second enable energy storing for eventual future use. The
latter contributes to sailing optimization. The solar panels and wind devices are
located in an array of rigid sails made of composites whose number and area
depend on the required power compensated by the assisting LNG engine. Such
rigid sails would be automatically positioned to best suit the prevailing weather
conditions including being lowered and stored during inconvenient weather. In
addition to the Aquarius MRE System, the future Aquarius Eco Ship would be
equipped with other energy efficiency improving components such as an advanced
electrical propulsion system and waste heat recovery technologies. A computer
system will monitor and control operation of all above-mentioned components.
Such combination of technologies could lead to improving the energy efficiency of
Aquarius Eco Ship(s) by about 40 % (http://www.ecomarinepower.com).
Land use
Large advanced container ships are handled at the port’s container terminals. Each
terminal consists of water-side berths for ship docking, a large coastal area of land
for the storage of containers, specialized berth cranes and yard cranes for container
loading/unloading to/from the ship and within the storage area, tractors and other
equipment for handling containers from the ships to the storage area, gates for
inland road trucks, in many cases yards, and barges and various maintenance and
administrative buildings. The size of this used land generally increases propor-
tionally or more than proportionally as the number and size of berths increases, as
shown in Fig. 4.22 (an example for seven U.S. port container terminals). In
addition, most ports set aside ‘land banks’ for future expansion, which can range
from a few hundreds to a few thousand percent of the land occupied by existing
terminals (CGI 2007).
Safety
Traffic incidents and accidents have happened to all container ships, including large
advanced ones. Incidents and accidents usually refer to fatalities during particular
stages of operations such as loading and unloading at the port terminals, operations in
300
250
S - Area of required land - ha
S = 36.782e 0.2096N
R² = 0.936
200
150
100
50
0
0 2 4 6 8 10
N- Number of berths
Fig. 4.22 Relationship between the area of land occupied by U.S. port container terminals and
the number of berths (CGI 2007)
ports, restricted and coastal waters, and open sea transit. Similarly as in other
transport modes, the risk of loss of life is expressed by the number per unit of output.
In addition, the impacts of incidents and accidents on the environment are taken into
account. They are usually expressed in absolute terms. For example, some figures
indicate that the average number of fatalities was 3.52 9 10-3 fatalities/ship-year,
the number of environment-pollution events 4.36/year, and the average number of
lost containers 182/year, all over the 1993–2004 period (IMO 2007).
In order to assess the risk of potential fatalities in container ship crew members,
the main factors of risk include collisions, contact, grounding, fire/explosion, and
heavy weather. Respecting this classification, the risk of potential fatalities among
ship crew members has been assessed as 9.00 9 10-3, and that for an individual
crew member as 2.25 9 10-4. The latter is lower than the maximum perceivable
risk for a crew member of 10-3, but higher than the ‘‘negligible’’ risk of 10-6. At
the same time, the perceived environmental risk causing release of substantial
quantities of dangerous substances and fuel has been estimated to be 1.01 (IMO
2007). This implies that large advanced container ships are at least as safe as their
smaller counterparts.
4.3.3 Evaluation
Large advanced container ships possess both advantages (Strengths and Oppor-
tunities) and disadvantages (Weaknesses and Threats) as compared to their smaller
counterparts.
Advantages
• Strongly supporting international trade, thus contributing to further globaliza-
tion of the national and global economies;
• Supplying relatively substantial transport capacity per service, which in turn can
compensate the diminishing technical productivity during slow steaming;
• Slow steaming can improve the economic performances by reducing the oper-
ating costs and the environmental performance by improving energy efficiency,
i.e., reducing fuel consumption and related emissions of GHG (CO2); in addi-
tion, slow steaming can contribute to increasing the number of transport units/
ships in operation serving given volumes of demand and consequently partially
compensate short-term capacity oversupply caused by market volatility; and
• Large advanced container ships are convenient in terms of technical/techno-
logical feasibility and testing and implementing different alternative technical/
technological and operational innovations for improving technical/technologi-
cal, operational, economic, and environmental performances (particularly
energy efficiency).
Disadvantages
• Calling or serving, i.e., being able to access, a limited number of ports due to
limitations of the maximum draught, and efficient and effective maneuverability;
• Requiring substantial investments in some port/terminal infrastructure, facilities,
and equipment (berths, cranes, store areas for containers, etc.) for efficient and
effective handling;
• Requiring increasing use of coastal land for building larger berths, terminals,
and inland transport infrastructure;
• Vulnerability to market volatility easily creating imbalances between demand
and capacity, thus compromising the overall economic feasibility; adapting to
such conditions requires modification of the service network(s) into stronger
hub-and-spoke configuration(s) with a smaller number of ports serving mature
markets with relatively stable freight demand in both directions;
• Economies of scale disappear rapidly beyond a certain size, i.e., over
10,000 TEU;
• Contributing to a decrease in the overall speed of supply chains and prolonging
the period freight/goods remain within the chains, thus causing raising inventory
costs due to slow steaming (Chap. 3);
• Remaining concerns relating to energy efficiency in terms of the current and
prospective contribution to total fuel consumption and related emissions of
GHG (CO2) despite forthcoming technical/technological (EEDI) and operational
(SEEMP) improvements, at least until HFO is mainly used; and
• Some reservations including criticism as to whether it is correct to use EEDI for
assessing energy efficiency, implying the need for further modifications and
improvements.
Finally, regardless of the above-mentioned advantages and disadvantages, the
fleet of large advanced container ships will likely continue to grow, while being
continuously modernized by simultaneously improving their technical/technolog-

ical, operational, economic, and environmental performances. In combination with
their size, these have already and will continue to make such ships advanced.
4.4 Liquid Hydrogen-Fuelled Commercial Air

Transportation
1957 The first successful test of the bomber aircraft B57 modified to use LH2
(Liquid Hydrogen) under military auspices (U.S.)
1988 The first flight of the TY155 aircraft with modified Engine No.3 by Kuznetsov to use
LH2 or NG (Natural Gas) (USSR)
1990 The standard reference book ‘‘Hydrogen Aircraft Technology’’ is published
by D. Brewer (U.S.)
1990s The European–Canadian ‘‘Euro-Quebec Hydro-Hydrogen Pilot Project’’ covers many
aspects of hydrogen use (Europe, Canada)
2003 The study carried out in the scope of the 5th EC FMP (Framework Program) covers
different aspects of making the transition from conventional to LH2 fuel such as:
aircraft configuration, systems and components, propulsion, safety, environmental
compatibility, fuel sources and infrastructure, and transition processes, from both
global and regional perspective (Europe)
Mitigating the medium- to long-term impacts of the APT (Air Passenger Trans-
port) system on the environment in terms of energy consumption and related
emissions of GHG (Green House Gases) and society can be achieved, among other
endeavors, also by further development of aircraft propulsion systems (engines) as
follows:
• Improving existing turbofans in combination with using fuels synthesized from
alternative sources such as coal and natural gas, and biomass from plants and
algae; these engines are expected to be generally more fuel efficient by about
15 % and quitter by about 25 dB; and
• Improving existing turbofans by using advanced materials enabling adapting
combustion thanks to higher combustion temperatures, including developing
advanced concepts such as the following:
– Ultrahigh by-pass ratio engines (Geared turbofan (GTF)) developed by Pratt
and Whitney and NASA (National Aeronautics and Space Administration) in
the U.S., which would be about 15 % more fuel efficient and 30 dB quitter as
compared to existing turbofans;
4.4 Liquid Hydrogen-Fuelled Commercial Air Transportation 217
– Open-rotor engine (GTF) or Unducted Fan (UDF) developed by GE (General

Electric) and NASA, which would be about 25 % more fuel efficient and
15–20 dB quitter then their existing counterparts;
– Hybrid and electric engines such as Boeing/NASA SUGAR Volt-hybrid and
Voltair (all-electric aircraft concept), which would require major advances in
the battery energy density such as the Lit-Air (Lithium Air) battery concept;
the theoretical energy density of this concept is about 11.5 kWh/kg, which is
close to that of gasoline/kerosene of about 13 kWh/kg; and
– Improvements and modification of existing turbofan engines enabling them
to use LH2 (Liquid Hydrogen) as fuel.
The latest concept as an alternative for mitigating the global emissions of GHG
by APT over the future long-term period implies switching from conventional jet
fuels (kerosene) to alternative fuels, one of which is LH2 (Liquid Hydrogen) (Janic
2008, 2010).
4.4.2 Analysis and Modeling Performance
4.4.2.1 Liquid Hydrogen (LH2) as Fuel
Manufacturing, logistics, and economics
Some of the methods for manufacturing hydrogen as a fuel are already commer-
cially available, but the produced quantities are used only in small niche markets
as a chemical substance and not as an energy commodity. For commercial use in
general, hydrogen can be produced from chemically reformed natural gas, fossil
fuels, and/or biomass feedstock using conventional chemical processes. In addi-
tion, it can also be produced by using electricity or heat, sunlight, and/or spe-
cialized microorganisms for dissociating water. In cases of producing relatively
large quantities, the process will be mainly driven by economic reasons including
the full logistics costs (Chevron 2006; IEA 2006).
The logistics of hydrogen includes its transport and storage. Hydrogen can be
transported and stored after being converted into a highly concentrated form either
by increasing the pressure or by lowering the temperature. In general, over shorter
distances, it is transported as a compressed gas by dedicated vehicles and/or
pipeline systems. Over longer distances, it is exclusively transported as a liquid by
dedicated vehicles operated by all transport modes. It is stored in high-pressure
cylindrical tanks and containers (IEA 2006).
The economics of hydrogen implies the amount of energy consumed for its
production, packaging, transport, and storage, all depending on whether it is a liquid
or gas. For example, the energy input could be about 2.12 and 1.65 times higher than
the energy content of the delivered liquid and gas hydrogen, respectively (i.e.,
loss factor). In both cases, the loss factor is considerably higher than that of
conventional jet fuels (about 1.12) (Bossel and Eliasson 2003). In addition, the most
important issue in supplying hydrogen as an energy commodity is a competitive
price. This depends greatly on the primary sources and the related manufacturing
processes on the one hand, and some market mechanisms such as, for example, taxes
on the emissions of CO2 (Carbon Dioxide), on the other. The price of hydrogen
should in general be comparable to that of conventional jet fuel. In this context, in the
long term the prices of conventional jet fuel are expected to increase and that of
hydrogen to decrease, which makes the expectation of comparable prices for both
fuels more realistic. Some estimates indicate that in 2035, the production costs of
hydrogen will range between 0.8 and 3.5 $US/kg H2 (IEA 2006).
Operational and environmental performances
Hydrogen as a fuel for APT is going to be in the liquid aggregate state (i.e., LH2—
Liquid Hydrogen). Its main operational characteristics include its specific energy
(120 MJ/kg), specific density (0.071 kg/m3 at 15 C), energy density (8.4 MJ/l),
and boiling point (-253 C) (Chevron 2006; Daggett et al. 2006). As compared to
conventional jet fuel, LH2 has the following advantages in terms of emissions of
particular GHG: 0 versus 0.50 g CO; 0 versus 0.75 kg CO2; 0.78 versus 0.30 kg
H2O; 0.02–0.102 versus 0.41 g NOx; and 0 versus 0.20 g UHC (this is based on
10 MJ of energy content obtained from 0.5 l of LH2 and 0.3 l of Jet A) (Daggett
et al. 2006; EEC 2005). Thus, its burning does not produce CO2 or SOx. Increased
emissions of H2O and NOx (the latter under specific conditions) remain the only
matter of concern. Figure 4.23a, b and c shows the net relative impact of GHG
from conventional jet fuel/kerosene (K) and LH2 (H) on global warming.
In general, the net impact of GHG such as H2O and NOx on global warming
increases more than proportionally, and that of CO2 decreases less than propor-
tionally as the aircraft flying altitude increases. In the case of kerosene, increasing
the flying/cruising altitude from 9 to 11 km increases the net impact of NOx by
about a half and that of H2O by about 75 %, the latter due to the formation of
contrails since the aircraft fly in the troposphere. At the same time, the impact of
CO2 decreases by about 30 %. In the case of LH2, increasing the flying/cruising
altitude from 9 to 11 km increases the impact of NOx up to about 10 % and that of
H2O by about 50 %. There is no CO2 impact.
Social/policy performances
The main social/policy performances of LH2 are considered to be safety, i.e., not
causing incidents/accidents resulting in injuries, loss of life, or damaging prop-
erties due to known reasons. In general, LH2 can be a safe fuel. Nevertheless, its
main potential disadvantages are its explosive rate of 13–79 % concentration in the
air and its very low ignition energy (about only 0.02 mj). LH2 also mixes faster
with air than jet fuel vapor, and disperses rapidly through the air in contrast to jet
fuel, which pools on the ground. It burns with a nearly invisible, colorless, and
odorless flame, which is also an important safety concern (IEA 2006).
Fig. 4.23 Impacts of GHG (a) CO2 (Carbon Dioxide)

(Green House Gases) from
conventional jet fuel 180 K-CO2
H-CO2
(kerosene) and LH2 (Liquid 150
Relative impact
Hydrogen) on global 120
warming depending on the
90
aircraft flying altitude
(Penner 1999) 60
30
0
0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14
Altitude - km
(b) H2O (Water vapor)
180 K-H2O
H-H2O
150
Relative impact
120
90
60
30
0
0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14
Altitude - km
(c) NOx (Nitrogen Oxides)

210
K-NO x
180 H-NO x
Relative impact
150
120
90
60
30
0
0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14
Altitude - km
4.4.2.2 The LH2-Fuelled Commercial Aircraft
Development
Research on using hydrogen for commercial aircraft has been carried out in
Europe, the U.S., and the Russian Federation for a considerable length of time.
However, the first ideas and related experiments emerged more than 70 years ago
and continue until nowadays. Recently, different projects have provided a vision of
the prospective technical/technological, operational, economic, environmental,
and social/safety performances of cryogenic aircraft expected to be fully devel-

oped by around 2020 and consequently commercialized by around 2040 (EC 2003;
EEC 2005).
Technical/technological and operational performances
In light of the characteristics of LH2 as compared to conventional jet fuel (2.8

higher specific energy and about 11 times less specific density), LH2 fuelled or
cryogenic aircraft will require about 4.3 times more fuel volume for equivalent
energy output than conventional aircraft. Therefore, their main design character-
istic will be a relatively large volume of well-insulated cylindrical fuel tanks. They
can have different positions within the aircraft configuration: above the payload
(passengers and freight), above and aft of the payload, and fore and aft of the
payload section. The wings could, with no fuel storage space, be smaller. The
results will be increased aerodynamic resistance and aircraft empty weight as
compared to conventional aircraft. However, the much lower weight of LH2 is
expected to compensate for such an increase in the empty weight and consequently
contribute to reducing the maximum take-off weight (Brewer 1991; EC 2003).
Cryogenic jet engines will retain the basic structure of conventional jet engines
but with some necessary modifications, such as fuel pumps, fuel control unit, and
combustion chambers. Experiments so far have shown that these engines will have
about 64 % lower Specific Fuel Consumption (SFC) than conventional jet engines
(0.0976 vs. 0.2710 (kg/h)/kg for cruising and 0.0512 vs. 0.1420 (kg/h)/kg for the
take-off phase of flight). In addition, they are expected to be 1–5 % more efficient
in generating thrust from the given energy content. For Supersonic Transport
Aircraft (STA), the specific consumption of LH2 and Jet A fuel during cruising is
expected to be about 0.260 (kg/h)/kg and 0.680 (kg/h)/kg, respectively, (the ratio
for Jet A/LH2 is 2.61). Last but not least, the hydrogen engines for either aircraft
category are expected to operate with a slightly lower turbine entry temperature,
which in turn will extend their life and reduce maintenance costs (Brewer 1991;
Corchero and Montanes 2005; EC 2003; Guynn and Olson 2002; Svensson et al.
2004; http://www.tupolev.ru).
Economic performances
Over the 2003–2007 period, the share of fuel cost in the total operating costs of
commercial airlines stood at about 30 % (EC 2003). Respecting the unit price of
LH2, the latest price of conventional jet fuel, and the lower Specific Fuel Con-
sumption of cryogenic engines of about 64 % (i.e., 1 kg Jet A is equivalent to
0.36 kg LH2), estimates show that the share of fuel costs in the total operating
costs of cryogenic aircraft could vary between 45 % (1$US/kg LH2) and 78 %
(1.73$US/kg LH2), if the prices of other inputs are assumed constant. Equalizing
the prices of both fuels to 1$US/kg, the shares of corresponding costs would
amount to about 60 and 35 %, respectively, mainly due to the lower Specific Fuel
Consumption of cryogenic aircraft. This scenario appears realistic since the prices
of conventional jet fuel are expected to continue to rise, while those of LH2 are
assumed to decrease as both the efficiency of production and the overall logistics
improve.
Environmental performances
Cryogenic aircraft powered by LH2 do not emit CO2. However, water vapor (H2O)
emitted in quantities about 2.6 times higher than by conventional aircraft at and
above cruising altitudes of 31,000 feet (FL310; FL-Flight Level) will be the main
GHG. However, its impact as compared to that of conventional aircraft appear to
be much lower (Marquart et al. 2005). Reducing the cruising altitude is an option
for eliminating these impacts. However, this could compromise other perfor-
mances. In addition, cryogenic aircraft are assumed to emit about 5–25 % less
NOx than their conventional counterparts, which is expected to be achieved
through the design of the combustion chamber of cryogenic engines (EC, 2003).
Table 4.6 gives the environmental performances of typical long-range conven-
tional and cryogenic aircraft in relative terms, mainly for comparative purposes.
Social/policy performances
As with fuel, the main social performance of cryogenic aircraft should be safety.
As applies to fuel in general, cryogenic aircraft should be at least as safe as their
conventionally fueled counterparts. In the event of an accident, LH2 burns much
faster (15–22 s) with low heat radiation, thus mitigating the fire impact in cases of
collapsing fuselage. This contrasts to the impact of fire from conventional jet fuel.
In addition, burning LH2 covers a much smaller surface area (EC 2003). The
overall safety figure also includes the appropriate design and operation of the
airport fuel supply system. It seems likely that the manufacturing of LH2 will take
place at the airport fuel storage area that reserves will be stored in the large storage
tanks, and that fuel will be usually delivered to the aircraft at the airport parking
stands through a dedicated underground pipeline system.
Table 4.6 Environmental performances of typical long-range conventional and cryogenic air-
craft—ratio (EC 2003; Janic 2008)
Characteristic Conventional aircraft Cryogenic aircraft (LH2)
(Jet A)
Fuel energy content 1 0.36
Volume of fuel 1 11
Volume of fuel tanks 1 4.3
MTOW 1 0.85–1.05
Aerodynamic resistance 1 1.1
Pollutants CO, CO2, SOx, HC 1 0
H2O 1 2.6
NOx 1 0.05–0.25
4.4.2.3 Modeling Performances of a LH2-Fueled Air Transport System
Modeling the performances of a LH2-fuelled commercial air transportation

includes the structure and application of the methodology. The former consists of
the models for a single and two aircraft fuel technologies. The later embraces
deriving the input data and analysis of results.
Structure of the methodology
LH2-fueled APT is expected to be a ‘‘carbon-neutral’’ system. This implies that

despite the continued growth of commercial air passenger transport demand over
the future period of time, the energy/fuel consumption and related emissions of
GHG of the APT system will remain constant or even decrease. The methodology
for assessing such developments consists of the models for estimating the annual
quantities of emissions of GHG by the APT system using: (i) one single (con-
ventional), and (ii) two (conventional and cryogenic) aircraft fuel technologies,
both on the global scale (Janic 2008).
The model for a single aircraft fuel technology
The global emissions of GHG generated by commercial air transportation in the

given year of the observed period can be estimated as follows:
ffi n X
L
En ¼ V0 ð1 þ iv Þn FC0 1 if el ð4:8aÞ
l¼1
where
En is the total emission of GHG in year (n) counted from the beginning of a
given period of N years, i.e., the base year ‘‘0’’ (tons);
V0 is the volume of air traffic demand in the base year (0) of a given period
(RPK—Equivalent Revenue Passenger Kilometers)2;
FC0 is the average consumption of conventional jet fuel in the base year (0) of a
given period (g/RPK);
iv is the average annual rate of growth of traffic demand in terms of equivalent
RPKs over a given period of time (%);
if is the average annual rate of improvement of the average unit fuel
consumption over a given period of time (%); and
el is the emission rate of the l-th green house gas (g/g of Jet A fuel).
According to Eq. 4.8a, the total emissions En can be affected through the
influencing variables in the given (target) year (n) as follows:
2
Equivalent RPKs are regarded as the sum of RPKs and RTKs (Revenue Ton Kilometers)
(1 RTK = 10 RPK).
• Achieving a rate of improvement of the average unit fuel consumption com-

pared to the rates of air traffic growth, i.e., if iv =ð1 þ iv Þ;
• Slowing air traffic growthffiaccording
to the rate of improvement in the unit fuel
consumption, i.e., iv if = 1 if ;
• Constraining air traffic growth by imposing a cap on the total emissions of green
1=n
ffi n P L
house gases, i.e., iv ¼ En =½V0 FC0 1 if el 1, where En is the
l¼1
‘‘cap’’ on the total emissions of green house gases in the target year (n); and
• Affecting the air traffic growth rate by weakening its relationship with the main
internal and external demand-driving forces.
The first three above-mentioned conditions are not likely to be achieved before
2025/26 and beyond, mainly because of the relatively wide differences between
the current and predicted average annual air traffic growth rates (3.1 %, IPCC
1999; 5.4 %, Airbus 2006; Boeing 2007) and the rates of improvement in fuel
efficiency (1.2–2.2 %; EEC 2005; IPCC 1999; Learmount 2007; Lee et al. 2004).
For example, in the first case if should be not less than 4.3–4.8 %, respectively,
which is almost twice as much as the current very optimistic 2.2 %. In the second
case, the air traffic growth rate iv should not be greater than the expected rate of
improvement in fuel efficiency, i.e., about 1.2–2.2 %. In the third case, the main
problem appears to be criteria for setting up the annual cap En and its monitoring
and control (IPCC 1999, 2001). The last case seems highly uncertain.
Consequently, the above-mentioned expected reductions in fuel consumption
and related emissions of GHG by technological and operational improvements
appears to be the only realistic but certainly insufficient alternative. This indicates
that achieving a ‘‘carbon-neutral’’ air transport system will be extremely difficult if
not impossible with conventional aircraft jet fuels.
The model for two aircraft fuel technologies
The introduction of cryogenic aircraft powered by LH2 is expected to be a process

of gradually replacing part of the conventional aircraft fleet. This process will be
able to start if and after the following conditions are fulfilled:
• A pallet of different categories of cryogenic aircraft are fully developed
regarding the size–range (small-short, medium–medium, large–long);
• The sufficient manufacturing capacities of cryogenic aircraft and LH2 are
available to satisfy the given rate of replacement;
• The airport infrastructure for supplying LH2 is fully operational;
• The market prices of LH2 are competitive to the prices of conventional jet fuel;
and
• The emissions of GHG during the manufacture of LH2 are captured and stored.
The gradual replacement process will take place over a ‘‘transitional’’ period
during which both conventional and cryogenic aircraft will be used. The contri-
bution of such a ‘‘hybrid’’ fleet to the total emissions of GHG in the year (k) of the
‘‘transitional’’ period of K years can be estimated, based on Eq. 4.8a, as follows
(Janic 2008):
" #
k ffi k XL X
M
Ek ¼ V0 ð1 þ iv Þ FC01 1 if ð1 kih Þ el þ FC02 ðkih Þ em
l¼1 m¼1
ð4:8bÞ
where
ih is the average share of the total volume of traffic (RPKs) carried out
by cryogenic aircraft in each year of the observed period
(0 B kih B 1; k = 1,2, …, K);
FC01, FC01 is the average unit fuel consumption of conventional (Jet A) and
cryogen (LH2) fuel, respectively, in the base year (0) of the given
‘‘transitional’’ period (g/RPK); and
em is the emission rate of the m-th GHG from cryogen fuel (LH2) (g/g of
JetA fuel).
The other symbols are analogous to those in Eq. 4.8a. The parameter FC01 in
Eq. 4.8b is assumed to be at the level achieved when the process of introducing
cryogenic aircraft starts, i.e., at the beginning of the ‘‘transitional’’ period, and will
continue to improve over the said period. The parameter EC02 will be lower than
EC01 approximately proportionally to the ratio between the specific energy of
conventional jet fuel and LH2, i.e., 43.2/120 = 0.36. This ratio is assumed to
remain constant over the ‘‘transitional’’ period. The cryogenic aircraft replacing
conventional aircraft will be introduced each year in constant proportions, thus
implying their constantly increasing share in satisfying air traffic demand (RPKs).
In this case, the eventual stabilization and/or even reduction in emissions of GHG
in the given (target) year could be achieved by the same alternatives as in Eq. 4.8a.
In addition, one additional alternative could consist of adjusting the rate of
introducing cryogenic aircraft in Eq. 4.8b as follows:
" # (" # )
ffi XL ffi XL X
M
ih ¼ iv FC01 1 if el = FC01 1 if el FC02 em ½1 þ iv ðk þ 1Þ
l¼1 l¼1 m¼1
ð4:8cÞ
where all symbols are as in previous equations.
Application of the methodology
Input
The methodology is applied to the long–term development of the APT system,

related fuel consumption, and emissions of GHG. The time horizon is divided into
three subperiods: 2006–2025/26, 2025/26–2040, and 2040–2065. The first sub-

period is specified by the two leading aircraft manufacturers (Airbus 2006; Boeing
2007). The second sub-period is specified as the period until the start of the ‘‘en-
masse’’ introduction of cryogenic aircraft (2040). The last period represents the
‘‘transitional’’ period of gradually replacing a certain proportion of conventional
aircraft with cryogenic aircraft. This implies that at the end of the final period, a
‘‘hybrid’’ aircraft fleet consisting of both aircraft categories will operate. The
potential ‘‘what-if’’ scenarios of prospective development of APT demand and
cryogenic aircraft over the specified periods of time are used as inputs for the
methodology and are given in Table 4.7.
The growth rates of air traffic demand are assumed to be constant during each
sub-period and to decrease when looking further into the future.3 This reflects the
increasing maturity of the air transport market combined with the weakening
dependency of air transport demand and its main driving forces. The fuel effi-
ciency of conventional aircraft is assumed to permanently improve over time,
albeit at a decreasing rate. Aircraft utilization is assumed to generally increase
over time at a decreasing rate, which implies the number of aircraft increasing at a
decreasing rate. The rate of introduction of cryogenic aircraft is assumed to be
constant in each year of the ‘‘transitional’’ period, thus providing the share of
cryogenic aircraft in the total of RPKs of 22 and 50 % by the end of the year 2065.
Table 4.7 Scenarios of the future development of the APT demand and aircraft fleet (Janic
2008)
Input variable Period
2006–2005 2026–2040 2040–2065
Basic annual traffic volume: V0 (trillion Equivalent RPKs) 6.26a 13.78 22.61
Average traffic growth rate: iv (%) 5.4a 3.5 2.0
The number of aircraft at the beginning of the period 18230a 36420 48823
Average aircraft utilization at the beginning of the period 0.3615 0.3784 0.4632
(trillion RPK/year)
Rate of improvement of aircraft utilization: (%/year) 1.50 1.25 1.00
Average unit fuel consumption of conventional aircraft: 27.7 19.66 16.28
EC01 (g/RPK)
Rate of improvement in EC01: i- f (%/yr) 1.70 1.25 1.00
Average unit fuel consumption of cryogenic aircraft: EC02 N/A N/A 5.86
(g/RPK)
Average share of the total traffic carried out by cryogenic 0.00 0.00 1.00/2.00
aircraft: ih (%/yr)
a
Airbus 2006; Boeing 2007
b
EC02 = 0.36 EC01; N/A Not Applicable
3
The average growth rate of APT demand over the entire time horizon is about 3.2 %, which is
similar to the growth rate of 3.1 % over the 1990–2050 period in one of the scenarios of the air
traffic growth developed by IPCCs. This rate produces a total of about 16.5 trillion RPKs in 2050
and 26.02 trillion RTKs in 2065 (IPCC 1999).
The eventual improvements in the unit fuel consumption of cryogenic aircraft are
not considered due to the lack of realistic data.
Results
The results from application of the methodology using the above-mentioned inputs
in Table 4.7 are shown in Fig. 4.24a, b, c. It shows the development of APT
demand and related emissions of GHG (CO2, H2O, and NOx, respectively) over
time in relative terms (Index).
Figure 4.24a shows that if only conventional aircraft continue to be used, the
future emissions of CO2 will continue to increase driven by increasing volumes of
air traffic. However, the emissions of CO2 will rise more slowly than the traffic,
mainly due to permanent improvements in aircraft fuel efficiency on the one hand,
and aircraft utilization on the other. For example, at the end of the period (2065),
air traffic will have increased six fold and the related emissions of CO2 by 3.5
times as compared to those in the base year (2006). This is lower than in the
IPCC’s Reference Scenario where the CO2 emissions in 2050 are predicted to be
about 3.9 times greater than in 2006 (IPCC 1999). Consequently, it becomes
evident that independently of the rate of improvement of conventional aircraft,
stabilization of the annual global emissions of CO2 will not be possible under
conditions of unconstrained growth of air traffic demand implying that achieving a
‘‘carbon neutral’’ system will not be possible. However, from the time of intro-
ducing cryogenic aircraft even at a modest proportion of only about 1 % per year,
the emissions of CO2 will start to gradually slow down, stagnate, and finally
stabilize by 2065 at a level about 2.8 times higher than in 2006, despite continuous
traffic growth. If the rate of introduction of cryogenic aircraft is about 2 % per
year, the rate of CO2 will immediately start to decrease and be about 1.8 times
higher in 2065 as compared to the base year (2006). This indicates that cryogenic
aircraft may enable the decoupling of growth of air traffic and related emissions of
CO2 and thus contribute to achieving a ‘‘carbon neutral’’ APT system.
Figure 4.24b shows that emissions of H2O will continue to increase in line with
air traffic demand independently of the aircraft technology. If only conventional
aircraft are used, the level of H2O in 2065 will be about 3.3 times greater than in
the base year (2006). At the same time, air traffic demand will be about 7 times
higher. This indicates that, as in the case of CO2, improving the aircraft fuel
efficiency and daily utilization will slow down the increase in H2O emissions.
Introducing a relatively low proportion (1 %) of cryogenic aircraft will slightly
(negligibly) increase this level during the period of replacement (2040–2065).
However, if the proportion of introduced cryogenic aircraft is 2 %, the level of
H2O in 2065 will be about 4.2 times higher than in the base year (2006). These
figures confirm the present concern that cryogenic aircraft will not stabilize
emissions of H2O, but, to the contrary, contribute to their substantial rise and thus
the increased risk of more intensive formation of contrails.
Figure 4.24c shows the prospective long-term emissions of NOx. As can be seen,
similarly as in the case of the other two green house gases, when conventional
(a) CO 2 emissions
800
Emissions of CO2 - The conventional aircraft
700 Emissions of CO2 - The cryogenic aircraft - 1%
Emissions of CO2 - The cryogenic aircraft - 2%
Traffic - RPKs
600
The base year 2006:
Traffic: 6.26 Trillion RPKs
Index - 2006 = 100
500
Emissions of CO2: 554.3 Mt
400
300
200
100
0
2000 2010 2020 2030 2040 2050 2060 2070
Year
(b) H2O emissions
800
Emissions of H2O - The conventional aircraft
700 Emissions of H2O - The cryogenic aircraft - 1%
Emissions of H2O - The cryogenic aircraft - 2%
600 Traffic
The base year 2006:
Index - 2006 = 100
Traffic: 6.26 Trillion RPKs

500 Emissions of H2O: 216.1 Mt
400
300
200
100
0
2000 2010 2020 2030 2040 2050 2060 2070
Year
(c) NOx emissions
800
Emissions of NOx - The conventional aircraft
Emissions of NOx - The cryogen aircraft - 1%
700 Emissions of NOx - The cryogen aircraft - 2%
Traffic
600 The base year 2006:
Index - 2006 = 100
Traffic: 6.26 Trillion RPKs Emissions

500 of NOx: 2.61*10-6 Mt
400
300
200
100
0
2000 2010 2020 2030 2040 2050 2060 2070
Year
Fig. 4.24 Influence of cryogenic aircraft on the long-term global emissions of GHG (Janic 2008)
aircraft are exclusively used over the entire period (2006–2065), emissions of NOx
will continue to rise driven by the growth of air traffic demand, but again at a slower
rate, mainly thanks to improvements in aircraft fuel efficiency and daily utilization.
This again indicates that conventional aircraft will not be able to stabilize the level of
NOx and thus make the system ‘‘carbon-neutral’’ under conditions of unconstrained
air traffic growth. For example, the level of NOx in 2065 will be about 3.5 times
greater than that in the base year (2006), driven by an increase in air traffic demand
by about 7 times. If cryogenic aircraft really achieve NOx emission rates of about
5–25 % of that of conventional aircraft, their gradual introduction will certainly
stabilize and even decrease the total emissions of NOx despite growing air traffic
demand. For example, if the rate of introduction of cryogenic aircraft is 1 %,
emissions of NOx in 2065 will stabilize at a level about 2.8 times higher than that in
the base year (2006). If the rate of introducing cryogenic aircraft is 2 %, the emis-
sions of NOx will decrease by 2065 to a level of about 2 times higher than in the base
year (2006).
4.4.3 Evaluation
The LH2 (Liquid Hydrogen)-fueled APT (Air Passenger Transport) system pos-
sesses both advantages (Strengths and Opportunities) and disadvantages (Weak-
nesses and Threats) as compared to its conventional crude oil-based jet fuel/kerosene
counterpart. In general, the advantages and disadvantages relate to LH2 as a fuel and
the aircraft/engine technology, as well as general environmental effects/impact.
Advantages
• The production cost of LH2 can be comparable to those of conventional fuels by
using primary sources such as solar, wind, and hydro energy, and SRM (Steam
Methane Reforming) biofuels and biomass fuels;
• LH2 aircraft engines are slightly more fuel efficient than their conventional
crude oil-based counterparts;
• The life and related maintenance costs of LH2 aircraft engines can be extended
thanks to LH2 fuel burning at slightly lover turbine temperatures;
• Using LH2 in a wide range of margins enables reduction of NOx emissions due
to its burning characteristics;
• Using LH2 definitely has a potential for mitigating, stabilizing, and even
decreasing the cumulative emissions of GHG (Green House Gases) except H2O
(water vapor) in the future medium- to long-term period of time, despite con-
tinuous air traffic growth; this could be achieved by the gradual replacement of
conventional aircraft by cryogenic (LH2-fuelled) aircraft over the long-term
future;
• The lower take-off weight and smaller engines of cryogenic aircraft make them
less noisy than their conventional counterparts; and
• Increased use of LH2 ensures national independence of fuel supply since LH2
can, in contrast to crude oil, be produced in any country.
Disadvantages
• Increased emissions of H2O remain a matter of concern;
• The benefits from savings in the emissions of GHG by using LH2 only arise if
the primary sources for its production are wind, solar, and hydro energy;
• LH2 aircraft engines are just slightly more efficient than their conventional crude
oil-based counterparts;
• A relatively substantial commercialization of LH2-fuelled aircraft of a given
category (long range in this case) is needed in order to produce the desired
environmental effects;
• These long-range LH2-fuelled aircraft would produce less relative savings in
energy consumption compared to smaller short- and medium-range aircraft;
• LH2-fuelled aircraft, related manufacturing plants for both vehicles and fuel, and
the fuel supply infrastructure at airports do not exist yet and still need to be built;
and
• Switching from conventional jet fuel to LH2 seems, at least at present, to be
technologically, economically, and environmentally rather risky; the latter in
particular because the share of emissions of GHG by commercial air transpor-
tation in the total man-made emissions of GHG is expected to range between 3
and 5 % over the forthcoming medium- to long-term period of time.
Finally, it can be said that LH2 (Liquid Hydrogen) and the related adaptation of
vehicles/aircraft and logistics of fuel manufacturing, supply, and distribution at
airports are the main characteristics that will enable further advances of the already
advanced commercial air transport system.
References
AECOM. (2012). NC maritime strategy: Vessel size vs. cost. Prepared for the North Carolina
Department of Transportation, Architecture, Engineering, Consulting, Operations and
Maintenance Los Angeles, California, USA.
AIRBUS. (2006). Airbus global market forecast. Toulouse: Airbus Industrie.
An, P., Sauer, A. (2004). Comparison of passenger vehicle fuel economy and GHG emission
standards around the world. Arlington: World Resource Institute, New Center for Global
Climate Change.
Archer, D. (2008). The long thaw: How humans are changing the next 100,000 years of earth’s
climate. Princeton: Princeton University.
Bodek, K., & Heywood, J. (2008). Europe’s evolving passenger vehicle fleet: Fuel use and GHG
emissions scenarios through 2035. Cambridge: Laboratory for Energy and Environment,
Massachusetts Institute of Technology (MIT).
Boeing. (2007). Current market outlook 2007: How will you travel through life? Seattle: Boeing
Bossel, U., Eliasson, B. (2003). Energy and the hydrogen economy. Baden-Dattwil: Report ABB
Switzerland Ltd. Corporate Research.
Brewer, G. D. (1991). Hydrogen aircraft technology. Boca Raton: CRC Press.

Cambell, C. J. (2002). Peak oil: An outlook on crude oil depletion. Retrieved from http://
www.greatchange.org/ov-campbell,outlook.html
Chen, C., & Ren, Y. (2010). Exploring the relationship between vehicle safety and fuel efficiency
in automotive design. Transportation Research D, 15(2), 112–116.
Chevron, (2006), Alternative jet fuels, addendum 1 to aviation fuels technical reviews (FTR-3/
A1), Chevron Corporation, USA.
CGI. (2007). Container terminal parameters: A white paper. Prepared for Marine Department of
Transportation, The Cornell Group, Inc., Fairfax.
Chi, G., Stone, B. Jr. (2005) Sustainable transport planning: Estimating the ecological footprint of
vehicle travel in future years. ASCE Journal of Urban Planning and Development, September,
170–180.
Churchill, J., Johnson, B. (2012). Saving billions on bunkers. Maersk Post. May 2012, pp. 9–12.
Coelho, M. C., & Luzia, M. B. (2010). Evaluating the energy performance of a SUV hybrid
electric vehicle. Transportation Research D, 15(8), 443–450.
Corchero, G., Montanes, J. l. (2005). An approach to use hydrogen for commercial aircraft
engines. Journal of Aerospace Engineering, 219G, 35–44.
Cullinane, K., & Khanna, M. (2000). Economies of scale in large containerships: Optimal size
and geographical implications. Journal of Transport Geography, 8(3), 181–195.
Daggett, L. D., Hebdicks, L. C., Walhter, R., Corporan, E. (2006). Alternate fuels and their
potential impact on aviation, NASA/TM-2006-214365. National Aeronautics and Space
Administration, Glenn Research Centre, Ohio, USA.
DeLuchi, M. A. (1989). Hydrogen vehicles: An evaluation of fuel storage, performance, safety,
Environmental impact, and costs. International Journal of Hydrogen Energy, 14(2), 81–130.
DNV. (2012). What is the optimum speed for a 20kTEU container ship? Container Ship Update,
1, 15–16.
DSC. (2010). Container freight rate insight: Bi-monthly pricing benchmarks on the CONTAINER
market. London: Drewry Shipping Consultants Ltd.
Eberhard, M., & Tarpening, M. (2006). The 21st century electric car. Paolo Alto: Tesla Motors
Inc., Tesla North America.
EC. (2003). Liquid hydrogen fuelled aircraft- system analysis (CRYOPLANE). European
Commission, 5th R&D Framework Program (Growth 1998–2002), Brussels, Belgium.
EC. (2010a). Energy, transport, and environment indicators, EUROSTAT, Statistical books,
European Commission, Luxembourg.
EC. (2010b). EU transport GHG: Routes to 2050? Review of potential radical Future transport
technologies and concepts. Report VI, The European Commission’s Directorate General
Environment, European Commission, Brussels, Belgium.
EEA. (2008). EU27 electricity production by fuel. Copenhagen: European Environmental
Agency.
EEA. (2010). European union emission inventory report 1990–2008 under the INECE convention
on long range trans boundary air pollution (LRTAP). Copenhagen: European Environmental
Agency.
EEA. (2012). The contribution of transport to AIR quality Term 2012: Transport indicators
tracking progress towards environmental targets in Europe. Copenhagen: European
Environment Agency.
EEC. (2005). GAES-Future Engine Technology Environmental Impact. Report No. EEC/SEE/
2005/002, EUROCONTROL Experimental Centre, Bretigny Sur Orge, France.
Ewing, G. O., Sarigöllü, E., & Gordon, O. (1998). Car fuel-type choice under travel demand
management and economic incentives. Transportation Research D, 3(6), 429–444.
Flikkema M., Nieuwenhuis, J. J., Duursema, W. (2012). MIP Project ‘‘EEDI, Ontwikkeling van
alternatieve CO2 index voor kleine handelsvaart schepen en short sea schepen: Current State of
Regulations and Literature Survey. Report 1, MARIN Conoship, Groningen, The Netherlands.
Funk, K., & Rabl, A. (1999). Electric versus conventional vehicles: Social costs and benefits in
France. Transportation Research D, 4, 397–411.
References 231
Georgakellos, D. A. (2008). A polygon-based environmental appraisal of new vehicle

technologies combined with renewable energy sources. Transportation Research D, 13(4),
283–288.
GL. (2012). In focus: Containerships: Boosting performance with efficient solutions. Germani-
scher Lloyd, Hamburg.
Greene, D. L., & Hopson, J. L. (2003). Running out of and into oil: Analyzing global depletion
and transition through 2050 ORNL/TM-2003/259. Oak Ridge: Oak Ridge National
Laboratory.
Guynn, M. D., Olson, E. D. (2002). Evaluation of an aircraft concept with over-wing hydrogen-
fuelled engines for reduced noise and emissions. Technical Memorandum, NASA/TM = 2002-
211926, National Aeronautics and Space Administration, Langley Research Centre, Hampton,
Virginia, USA.
Haller, M., Welch, E., Lin, J., & Fulla, S. (2008). Economic costs and environmental impacts of
alternative fuel vehicle fleets in local government: An interim assessment of a voluntary ten-
year fleet conversion plan. Transportation Research D, 12(3), 219–230.
Hamilton, W. (1980). Energy use of electric vehicles. Transportation Research A, 14A, 415–421.
Heffner, R. R., Kurani, K. S., & Turrentine, T. S. (2007). Symbolism in California’s early market
for hybrid electric vehicles. Transportation Research D, 2(6), 396–413.
Higgins, C. J. H., Matthews, S., Hendrickson, C. T., & Small, M. J. (2007). Lead demand of
future vehicle technologies. Transportation Research D, 12(2), 103–114.
Hörmandinger, G., & Lucas, N. J. D. (1996). Is clean enough? The influence of environmental
externalities on markets for fuel cells in transport. Transportation Research D, 1(1), 63–78.
ICAO. (2008). ICAO environmental report 2007. Montreal, Canada: International Civil Aviation
Organization.
ICG. (2010). Electric car markets in Europe: 10 countries analysis and strategic review.
Edinburgh: International Consultancy Group Ltd.
IEA. (2006). Hydrogen production and storage: Research & development priorities and gaps.
Paris: International Energy Agency.
IEA. (2009). Hybrid & Electric Vehicles: Implementing Agreement. IA-HEV Outlook 2009,
International Energy Agency, Paris, France
IMO. (2007). FSA (Formal Safety Assessment)—Container vessels: Details on the formal safety
assessment, MSC83/INF 8. London: International Maritime Organization.
IMO. (2011). Main Events in IMO’s Work on Limitation and Reduction of Green house Gas
Emissions from International Shipping. International Maritime Organization, London, UK.
IPCC. (1999). Aviation and the global atmosphere, intergovernmental panel of climate change.
Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.
IPCC. (2001). Climate change 2001: Synthesis report. Contribution of Working Groups I, II, and
II and III to the Third Assessment Report of IPCC, Intergovernmental Panel of Climate
Change, Cambridge University Press, Cambridge, UK
IPTS. (2003). Dynamics of introducing of new passenger car technologies: The IPTS transport
technologies model. Seville: Institute for Progressive Technological Studies, p. 76.
IPTS. (2008). Environmental Improvement of Passenger Cars (IMPRO-car). Seville: Institute for
Progressive Technological Studies.
Janic, M. (2008). The potential of liquid hydrogen for the future ‘Carbon Neutral’ air transport
system. Transportation Research D, 13(7), 428–435.
Janic, M. (2010). Is liquid hydrogen a solution for mitigating air pollution by airports?
International Journal of Hydrogen Energy, 35(5), 2190–2202.
Johansson, B. (1999). The economy of alternative fuels when including the cost of air pollution.
Johansson, B., & Åhman, M. (2002). A comparison of technologies for carbon-neutral passenger
transport. Transportation Research D, 7(3), 175–196.
Kang, J. E., Recker, W. W. (2009). An activity-based assessment of the potential impacts of plug-
in hybrid electric vehicles on energy and emissions using 1-day travel data. Transportation
Research D, 14(8), 541–556.
Kempton, W., & Letendre, S. E. (1997). Electric vehicles as a new power source for electric
utilities. Transportation Research D, 2(3), 157–175.
Koyanagi, F., & Uriu, J. (1997). Modeling power consumption of electric vehicles and its impacts
on power demand. Electrical Engineering in Japan, 120(4), 41–46.
Kurani, K. S., Turrentine, T. S., & Sperling, D. (1996). Testing electric vehicle demand in
‘HYBRID Households’ using a reflexive survey. Transportation Research Part D, 1(2),
131–150.
Lave, L. B., & MacLean, H. L. (2002). An environmental-economic evaluation of hybrid electric
vehicles: Toyota’s Prius vs. its conventional internal combustion engine corolla. Transpor-
tation Research D, 7(2), 155–162.
Learmount, D. (2007). New-technology aircraft to reduce average fuel consumption. Retrieved
from http://www.flightglobal.com
Lee, J. J., Lukachko, S., Waitz, I. A. (2004). Aircraft and energy use. Encyclopedia of Energy
(Vol. 1, pp. 1–11). Philadelphia: Elsevier Science Publisher.
LR. (2011). Assessment of IMO mandated energy efficiency measures for international shipping:
Estimated CO2 emissions reduction from introduction of mandatory Technical and
operational energy efficiency measures for ships. MEPC 63/INF.2 Annex, Lloyd’s Register,
London, UK.
Mabit, L. S., & Fosgerau, M. (2011). Demand for alternative-fuel vehicles when registration taxes
are high. Transportation Research D, 16, 225–231.
Diesel, M. A. N. (2011). Propulsion trends in container vessels. Copenhagen: MAN Diesel-
Powering the World.
Marquart, S., Ponater, M., Strom, L., & Gierens, K. (2005). An upgraded estimate of the relative
forcing of cyroplane contrails. Meteorologische Zeitschrift, Gebruder Bontraeger, 14,
573–582.
MEPC. (2012). 2012 Guidelines on the Method of Calculation of the Attained Energy Efficiency
Design Index (EEDI) for New Ships (Vol. 212, no. 63). [Annex 8, Resolution MEPC].
London, UK: The Marine Environment Protection Committee.
Line, Maersk. (2011). Sustainability progress report 2011-Route 2. Copenhagen: Maersk Line.
Nakata, T. (2000). Analysis of the impact of hybrid vehicles on energy systems in Japan.
Nottebon, T., Rodrigue J. P. (2007). The next fifty years of containerization: container vessels,
linear shipping, and port terminal. In Proceedings of the 52nd Annual Meeting of Association
of American Geographers, San Francisco, California, USA.
Notteboom, T. & Carriou, P. (2009). Fuel surcharge practices of container shipping lines: is it
about cost recovery or revenue making?. In Proceedings of the 2009 International Association
of Maritime Economists (IAME) Conference, June 2009, Copenhagen, Denmark.
NYK Line/MTI. (2010). NYK Super Eco Ship 2030 – Our Concept Ship in the Future.
Presentation, Nippon Yusen Kabushiki Kaisha, Tokyo, Japan.
Ogden, M. J. (1997). Infrastructure for hydrogen cell vehicles: A Southern California case study.
’97 World car conference, Riverside, California, USA.
OI. (2011). The vision scenario for the European union: 2011 update for the EU-27. Oko-
Institute, Institute for Applied Ecology, Berlin, Germany.
OSSL. (2009). Green ship of the future: 8500 TEU container ship concept study. Odense: Odense
Steel Ship Yard Ltd.
Penner, J. E. (1999). Aviation and the global atmosphere (p. 257). Cambridge: Cambridge
University Press.
Pfeiffer, A. D. (2004). The end of oil age. Raleigh: Lulu.com.
Rienstra, S. A., & Nijkamp, P. (1998). The role of electric cars in Amsterdam’s transport system
in the year 2015: A scenario approach. Transportation Research D, 3(1), 29–40.
Rudolf, C. D, I. I. I. (2007). Ship-to-shore productivity: Can it keep up with mega-ship size
increases? Part 1. Port Technology International, 34(3), 1–5.
Sala, S. (2010). Energy efficiency and the shipping industry. DELTAMARIN, www.deltamarin.
com
References 233
Schock, R. N., Berry, C. D., Smith, R., Rambach, G. D. (1995). Hydrogen as a new
transportation fuel. Lawrence Livermore National Laboratory, University of Melbourne,
Australia
Schwoon, M. (2007). A tool to optimize the initial distribution of hydrogen filling stations.
Spiegel, R. J. (2004). Platinum and fuel cells. Transportation Research D, 9(5), 357–371.
Svensson, E., Hasselrot, A., & Moldanova, J. (2004). Reduced environmental impact by lowered
cruise altitude for liquid hydrogen-fuelled aircraft. Aerospace Science and Technology, 8,
307–320.
Tozer, D. R. (2001). Ultra-Large Container Ships (ULCS). In Proceedings of Lloyd’s Register
Technical Association, London, UK.
UNCDAT. (2012). Review of maritime transport 2012, Report of the UNCTAD Secretariat.
United Nations conference on trade and development, United Nations, New York, USA.
UniCredit. (2009). Study: Green shipping. HypoVereinsbank, Global shipping division,
UniCredit Corporate Banking, Hamburg, Germany.
Wang, Q., DeLucchi, M. A. (1991). Impact of electric vehicles on primary energy consumption
and petroleum displacement. Working Paper UCTC No. 6, University of California Transport
Center, University of California Berkeley, Berkeley, USA.
Wang, G., Ogden, J. M., & Sperling, D. (2008). Comparing air quality impacts of hydrogen and
gasoline. Transportation Research D, 13(7), 436–448.
Chapter 5
Infrastructure, Technologies, Operations,
Economics, Environment, and Society/
Policy
5.1 Introduction
This chapter describes selected HS (High Speed) passenger transport systems and
their multicriteria ranking based on their infrastructural, technical/technological,
operational, economic, environmental, and social/policy performances. These
include the constantly growing APT (Air Passenger Transport) and HSR (High
Speed Rail), as well as forthcoming TRM (TransRapid MAGLEV) systems. Such
a multicriteria approach has proven convenient regarding the general objectives
expected to be fulfilled by the above-mentioned HS (High Speed) systems as well
as the often conflicting preferences of the increasing number of actors/stakeholders
involved in the DM (Decision Making) process (Giuliano 1985; Haimes 1985;
Speling 1984).
The main objectives of HS passenger transport systems are as follows:
• Competing against and complementing each other at the same time, particularly
in high volume and density demand transport markets (corridors); the conse-
quent effects include redistributing existing and generating new transport
demand, improving the efficiency of particular transport modes based on mar-
ket-driven forces, and revitalizing local, regional, and national transport net-
works by contributing to their stronger integration in global national and
international transport networks. Examples in Europe include TENs (Trans-
European Transport Network(s)) (EC 1998a, b);
• Influencing the micro and macro spatial, socioeconomic, and political devel-
opment of particular regions in which they operate; in general, influence on the
structure and ‘‘spatial redistribution’’ of the current and new socioeconomic
activities is mainly expected;
• Covering much wider areas in a much shorter time than their conventional
counterparts, thus ensuring the more efficient and effective physical mobility of
persons and goods and consequently, in addition to telecommunications and
information technology, further enhancing globalization, internalization, and
integration of the regional and national economies and societies; and

• Playing an important role as promising options for the further sustainable

development of the transport sector in terms of supporting further demand
growth driven by economic growth on the one hand, while mitigating the
negative impacts on the environment and society such as energy consumption
and related emissions of GHG (Green house Gases), land use/take, noise,
congestion, and traffic incidents/accidents (i.e., safety), on the other.
5.2 High Speed Transport Systems
The HS (High Speed) passenger transport systems such as APT (Air Passenger
Transport), HSR (High Speed Rail), and TRM (Trans Rapid Maglev) possess the
common performance—‘‘high speed’’—while operating in the given environment
under given conditions. In addition, each of them possesses specific performances
in the given context. For ATP these are aircraft capabilities, regulation of opera-
tions, airline strategy, and mitigating impacts on the society and environment. For
an HSR and TRM these are the infrastructure network, rolling stock, speed, and
traffic. They are a priory considered to mitigate impacts on the environment and
society by design, construction, and operations.
5.2.1.1 Analysis of Performances
APT (Air Passenger Transport)
1956 The flag carrier of the USSR Aeroflot is the first in the world to sustain regular jet services
with the Tupolev Tu-104 aircraft (USSR)
1978 Congress passes the Airline Deregulation Act, thus opening conditions for the
development of a competitive (fully deregulated national) air transport market (USA)
1990s The EU (European Union) air transport market is liberalized, significantly impacting the
structure of air transport industry, shifting toward growing LCCs (Low Cost
Carrier(s)), partially on the account of traditional national airlines (Europe)
The APT (Air Passenger Transport) system emerged in 1950s and as such, at
that time, represented the most advanced transport mode, i.e., the earliest HS
system. From its very beginnings it has been constantly modernized and improved
in terms of the above-mentioned aircraft capabilities, regulation of operations,
airline strategy, and mitigating impacts on the environment and society (particu-
larly over the past decade and a half) (Boeing 1998; Janic 2007).
Aircraft capabilities
Development of ‘‘aircraft capabilities’’ includes speed, take-off weight, payload,
and range characteristics. Aircraft capabilities have also influenced the other three
5.2 High Speed Transport Systems 237
9
Aircraft lowest speed – 246km/h - 1934
8
7
Ratio of increase in speed
0
1930 1940 1950 1960 1970 1980
Year
Fig. 5.1 Evolution of aircraft speed over time (Boeing 1998; Horonjeff and McKelvey 1994)
above-mentioned performances, and vice versa. Both speed and payload have
contributed to an enormous increase in aircraft technical productivity—by more
than 100-fold over the past 40 years (Horonjeff and McKelvey 1994). Specifically,
this increase in speed is illustrated by relating the speeds of various commercial
aircraft to the speed of slowest (Douglas DC3 (238 km/h)) as shown in Fig. 5.1.
As can be seen, the relatively fast (exponential) technological progress over
time has temporarily come to an end with the launch of the Concorde supersonic
aircraft in 1974.
In addition, the payload has increased contributing to increasing aircraft tech-
nical productivity over longer ranges. Figure 5.2 shows the most recent payload
developments in terms of the number of seats per aircraft and range for Boeing and
Airbus long-haul aircraft.
As can be seen, with the exception of Airbus A380 and Boeing B747-8 aircraft,
the number of seats varies between 200 and 450, and the range between 6,000 and
18,000 km (Some additional figures on the payload-range relationship are also
presented in Chaps. 2 and 6).
Regulation of operations
‘‘Regulation of operations’’ relates to the airline’s freedom to enter markets, set
airfares, supply transport capacity in terms of the number of seats and flight
frequencies, and with regard to ownership structure. For many years, national
governments regulated these three elements through national, international bilat-
eral, and multilateral agreements. Under such conditions, the airline industry was
regulated through very constrained airline rights dealing with where, when, and
how to operate, mainly applying the principles of reciprocity. However, at one
moment, regulation became a barrier to the further development of the airline
industry and particularly its expected role in supporting globalization of the
600
Boeing Family
Airbus Family
B747-400ER
500 A380-800
400
Capacity - seats
300
200
100
0
0 2000 4000 6000 8000 10000 12000 14000 16000 18000 20000
Range - km
Fig. 5.2 Relationship between the seat capacity and range for the selected series of aircraft
(http://www.boeing.com; http://www.airbus.com/aircraftfamilie)
economy and society. Consequently, deregulation of the U.S. airline industry in

1978 and liberalization of the intra-EU air transport market, the later as a gradual
process during the period 1987–1992 in combination with deregulation of national
markets removed barriers for airlines to freely enter the market(s), set up airfares,
and supply transport capacity–seats and flight frequencies. In addition, different
‘‘open skies’’ agreements were concluded in international markets to mitigate
international institutional barriers. At the same time, many airlines were priv-
atized, resulting in the removal of any ‘‘governmental protection’’ particularly in
subsidizing nonprofitable services.
The above-mentioned developments have had a dramatic impact on the airline
industry, airports, and users of air transport services—passengers and goods
shippers. For example, in the U.S., many airlines went into bankruptcy while
others changed the structure of their operational and business models from the
previously and exclusively used ‘‘point-to-point’’ to the ‘‘hub-and-spoke’’ net-
work(s). As a result, airports included in the given airline network started oper-
ating as either hub or spoke airports. In general, many airports previously used as
airline bases have been converted into hubs. In addition, airports have become the
hub of several airlines. Furthermore, the same airline can operate one or several
hub airports (BCG 2004). Many previously connected airports have lost regular
connections while some others have gained connections after being included in
airline hub-and-spoke networks.
In Europe, major national (flag) airlines have mainly remained at their base
airports by developing ‘‘star-shaped’’ hub-and-spoke instead of the previously used
‘‘star-shaped’’ point-to-point networks. In addition, many national flag airlines
have concluded alliances with their partners from both Europe and other conti-
nents. This consolidation process has resulted in three large alliances emerging:
Point-to-point network
Base airport(s)
Other airport(s)
Hub-and-spoke network
Hub airport (s)
Spoke airport(s)
Fig. 5.3 Schemes of airline air route networks
STAR led by Lufthansa (Germany), Oneworld led by British Airways (UK) and
SkyTeam led by Air France-KLM (France-The Netherlands) (EC 2003). These
alliances have consolidated the hub-and-spoke networks of their leading partners
around their hub airports—Frankfurt Main (Lufthansa), London Heathrow (British
Airways), and Paris Charles de Gaulle-Amsterdam Schiphol (Air France-KLM),
respectively. Consequently, these networks have developed into global mega
networks and their hubs into the global mega-hubs.
In addition, in both the U.S. and Europe air transport market, the LCCs (Low
Cost Carriers(s)) have emerged as the strong competitors.
Airline strategy
As mentioned above, after deregulation and liberalization of the airline industry,
full cost airlines previously exclusively operating ‘point-to-point’ networks from
their base airports have changed their business/operational model into star-shaped
‘‘hub-and-spoke(s)’’ networks. A simplified scheme is shown in Fig. 5.3.
The main characteristics of the newly emerged ‘‘hub-and-spoke(s)’’ networks
include increased traffic concentration on routes connecting the hub to spoke
airport(s) and consequently increasing proportions of connecting/transfer passen-
gers. Table 5.1 shows an example of such early developments at U.S. major
Table 5.1 Connecting Year Proportion (%)

passengers at U.S. major
airlines (http://www.transtats. 1993 60
bts.gov/Tables.asp?DB_ID= 1995 59
125) 1998 59
2000 58
2003 62
40
Proportion of connecting passengers -%
35
30
25
20
15
10
0
1985 1990 1995 2000 2005 2010
Time - years
Fig. 5.4 Trends in the development of connecting passenger traffic at London Heathrow airport
(UK) (CAA 2011)
airlines: America West, American, Continental, Delta, Northwest, United, and

U.S. Airways Airlines.
In addition, Fig. 5.4 shows an example of the development of the share of
connecting passenger traffic at London Heathrow airport (UK), which has sig-
nificantly increased over the past two decades.
This has occurred mainly due to the stronger concentration of Transatlantic
flights at Heathrow airport after liberalization of the EU–US air transport market,
the abandonment of BA’s (British Airways) twin-hub strategy, and the growth of
LCCs (Low Cost Carriers) at London Gatwick airport (CAA 2011).
Consequently, the ‘point-to-point’ network(s) shown in Fig. 5.3 have remained
to be mainly operated by LCCs (Low Cost Carrier(s)) as new market entrants. For
example, large European LCCs have operated several base airports and associated
subnetworks. One of these, Ryanair operates 17 base airports in different European
countries, each with 4–8 stationed aircraft. At this and other European LCCs, the
nonintended connectivity of flights at the base airport(s) implies negligible if any
volumes of transfer passengers. However, some U.S. LCCs have substantial
proportions of connecting (transfer) passengers one among the largest ones,
Southwest Airlines, has about 25 % of such passengers.
Fig. 5.5 Relationship between the average unit cost and the stage length—the U.S. domestic
market (2003) (GAO 2004)
In addition to the route network configuration and structure, their operating

costs are the main difference between the two airline categories—business models/
concepts. Figure 5.5 shows an example for the U.S. airline industry.
As can be seen, in the given case, the average unit cost of the conventional
(legacy) airlines is higher than that of the LCCs by about 30–40 %. In addition, at
both types of airlines, the unit cost decreases more than proportionally as the stage
length increases, thus indicating the existence of economies of distance.
Mitigating Impacts on the environment and society
The airline industry and aircraft manufacturers have continuously endeavored to
mitigate the impacts of their operations on the environment and society, mainly in
terms of fuel consumption and related emissions of GHG, and noise (Janic 2007).
At the same time, reducing fuel consumption has contributed to decreasing
operating cost. Figure 5.6 shows an example of these efforts by the U.S. airline
industry to improve the energy intensity expressed by ASK (Available Seat
Kilometers)/kg of fuel over the past 50 years.
The energy intensity of both domestic and international operations has
increased in line with increasing of the ASK volumes at a decreasing rate. The EI
(Energy Intensity) and its rate of international operations have been overall greater
than that of domestic operations by about 20 %. At the same time, volumes of
domestic operations are about two times greater than volumes of international
operations. Due to their nature, the related intensities of GHG emissions have
followed a similar pattern, thus indicating gradual but permanent improvements
(Janic 2007) (see also Chap. 2). In addition, improvements through investments in
new technologies (aircraft engines and airframes) have mitigated aircraft noise at
40
International operations:
35 EI i = 4.8307ASK0.2874
R² = 0.8253
EI - Energy intensity - ASK/kg
30
25
Domestic operations:
20 EI d = 2.475ASK 0.3466
R² = 0.8543
15
10
0
0 200 400 600 800 1000 1200 1400
ASK - Available Seat Kilometers -billion/year
Fig. 5.6 Relationships between EI (Energy Intensity) and available capacity of U.S. certified
airlines (1960–2010) (USDT 2012)
0.9
SN - Specific noise (TO) -EPNLdB/ton
0.8
0.7
0.6
0.5
0.4
0.3 SN = 65.452TOW -0.932

R² = 0.9674
0.2
0.1
0
100 200 300 400 500 600
TOW (Take-Off Weight ) -tons
Fig. 5.7 Relationship between the certified T/O (Take-Off) SNL (Specific Noise Level) and
TOW (Take-Off-Weight)—heavy aircraft (FAA 1997; EASA 2011)
source. An example of the relationship between SN (Specific Noise) expressed by

EPNLdB (Effective Perceived Noise Level in Decibels) per unit of TOW
(Take-Off Weight) (ton) and the aircraft TOW (Take-Off-Weight) (tons) is shown
in Fig. 5.7. The EPNLdB values represent certified noise levels for Heavy aircraft
(TOW [ 100 tons) during the T/O (Take-Off) phase of flight.
As can be seen, SN decreases more than proportionally as the aircraft size

increases, indicating the substantial achievements in reducing noise while at the
same time increasing the aircraft size, i.e., TOW (Take-Off-Weight).
HSR (High Speed Rail)
1933 ‘‘Fliegender Hamburger’’ diesel-powered trains with Jakobs bogies begin regular services
between Hamburg and Berlin with a maximum speed of 160 km/h operated by Deutsche
Reichsbahn-Gesellschaft, some 50 years before the advent of the TGV train (Train à
Grande Vitesse) (Germany)
1964 The first modern Tōkaidō Shinkansen HS (High Speed) trains begin operations between
Tokyo and Osaka (Japan)
1981 TGV (Train à Grande Vitesse) HS trains begin operations on the first section of the new
Paris-Lyon high-speed rail line (a distance of 418 km in 2.5 h) (France)
1998 HS Direttissima trains begin operations (Italy)
1991 ICE (Intercity-Express) HS trains begin operations on the new Hannover-Würzburg high-
speed rail line (Germany)
1992 Class 100 high-speed trains derived from the French TGV begin services on the Madrid–
Seville high-speed rail line (Spain)
1994 Eurostar high-speed trains begin operations through the Channel Tunnel between France
and the UK (United Kingdom)
2000 Acela Express trains begin operations as the first HS train in North America
2004 Construction of the HSR network begins in China
HSR (High Speed Rail) is characterized by the above-mentioned infrastructure

network, the rolling stock, speed, and traffic.
The infrastructure network
One of the main characteristics of an HSR is the network length. In 2011, the
length of the global HSR network in operation was 15,231 km, of which Europe
shared 43.5 %, Asia 54.0 %, and other countries 2.5 %. In addition, 9,172 km of
an HSR network are under construction around the world and nearly 17,594 km
are planned. Consequently, by the end of 2025, the length of the world’s HSR
network is expected to reach 41,997 km, of which Europe will still have a sub-
stantial share (UIC 2011).
As far as the length of the network of particular countries is concerned, Japan
has the longest HSR network in operation, followed by France, Spain, and Ger-
many. This ranking has been made by taking into account also the HSR lines under
construction in 2011. The total length of China’s HSR network of 4,576 km
includes the Beijing-Tianjin, Wuhan-Guangzhou, Zhengzhou-Xi’an, and Shang-
hai-Nanjing lines (with the highest operating speed in the world). According to the
planning and current construction status, the total operating mileage of an HSR in
China will almost triple by 2020 when it will exceed 13,000 km (UIC 2011).
HSR development in Europe is mainly influenced by institutional attainment,
namely the decisions of particular EU (European Union) Member States to build
the Trans-European HSR network. The planned length of this network is about
29,000–12,500 km of which are new lines. Total costs were estimated at about
9000
8000
L - Length of the network - km
L = 1E -78e0.0936t
7000 R² = 0.9834
6000
5000
4000
3000
2000
1000
0
1975 1980 1985 1990 1995 2000 2005 2010 2015
t-time (year)
Fig. 5.8 Development of the European HSR network over time (EC 2010, 2012; UIC 2011)
€240Bn (billion), €207Bn of which would be allocated to the rail infrastructure

and €33Bn to the rolling stocks. Figure 5.8 shows an example of dynamism of
development of the HSR network in Europe.
As can be seen, the network length has increased more than proportionally over
time, which appears to be in line with the plans to complete the entire network by
2020–2025 (CEC 1993a; 1995; UIC 2011).
Rolling stock
The HSR rolling stock is characterized by infrastructural, technical/technological,
operational, economic, environmental, and social performances given for existing
TGV (Train à Grande Vitesse) and forthcoming AGV (Automotice Grande Vit-
esse) passenger trains in Table 5.2.
The forthcoming AGV train appears superior as compared to its TGV counter-
part, mainly with respect to its technical/technological, operational, economic, and
environmental performances. It is supposed to operate on the same HSR infra-
structure as TGV trains. The principal technical/technological difference is the
positioning of bogies between the cars of the train and distribution of the traction
system below the floor of cars and not only at the front and the back as in TGV units.
This is expected to have an advantage due to maintaining the power of the train
independent between units/cars and providing more space for passengers. AGV
trains are fully interoperable, which enables them to operate throughout different
European countries with quite different power supply systems. Aluminum and steel
are mainly used as construction materials, resulting in a lighter and thus relatively
more energy efficient train. Thanks to the greater seating capacity and operating/
cruising speed, the technical productivity of an AGV train is expected to be higher
than that of a TGV train. Since AGV trains are expected to operate on the same
Table 5.2 Performances of selected HS (High Speed) trains (BBVA 2009; http://en.wikipedia.
org/wiki/TGV; Alstom 2008; www.alstom.com)
Performance Type
TGV-All AGV11-14
Infrastructural
Width of tracks (mm) 1,435 1,435
Maximum radius of curves (km) C4 C7
Maximum gradient (%) 3.5–4.0 3.5–4.0
Technical/technological
Power supply (kV) 25 kV7 50 Hz AC, 25 kV/50 Hz–15 kV/
15 kV/16.7 Hz; 16.7 Hz-3 kV DC-1
5 kV DC
Signaling system TVM/ETCSa TVM/ETCSa
Power of locomotive (MW) 6.45–12.24b 9.0
Number of bogies 13 11–12
Length of train set (m) 200–394 220–252
Number of cars (cars/train set) 8–10 11–14
Gross weight (tons) 415–816 410–522
Empty weight (tones) 383–665 370–425
Power/empty weight (ratio) (W/kg) 16.84–18.41 24.32
Operational
Operating/cruising speed (km/h) 270–320 320–350
Minimum scheduled interval (min) 3 3
Transit capacity (seats) 345–750 458–593
Technical productivity (000 seat-km/h) 93.15–240.0 146.56–207.550
Economic
Investment in infrastructure (mio€/km) 18 18
Direct operating costs (€/seat-km) 0.0935–0.1171 –
Break-even load factor (%) 60–65 60–65
Environmental
Energy consumption (kWh/train-km) 19.01 16.15
Emissions of GHG (gCO2e/train-km) 401.1 341
Land use/take (ha/km) 3.2 3.2
Social
Noise (dB(A))/Speed (km/h) 92/300 92/360
Congestion—delays (min) – –
Safety (deaths ? injuries/billion p-km) 0.00114 –
Policy
Contribution to sustainability Yes Yes
a
TVM–Transmission Voie-Machine (Transmission Track-Machine)—a block of the approximate
length of 1.5 km; ETCS (European Train Control System) Level 2; b under 25 kV
infrastructure, the corresponding investment costs will be almost equivalent.

However, its direct operating costs are supposed to be lower mainly due to the lower
energy consumption and related costs, and lower maintenance costs (by about 15 %)
at comparable break-even load factors (during breaking, an AGV train returns about
8 MV of energy to the power supply network). Lower energy consumption also

implies lower emissions of GHG(Green house Gases). Despite the AGV train being
faster than its TGV counterpart, it is less noisy mainly thanks to its lower weight (i.e.,
higher power/weight ratio) and improved aerodynamics. Furthermore, like its TGV
counterpart, it is expected to not cause congestion and delays for AGV and other
trains on lines with mixed traffic. Last but not least, AGV trains are expected to be
safe, i.e., free of incidents and accidents, again very much like their TGV coun-
terparts. Consequently, it can be said that AGV trains will represent a step forward
toward improving the sustainability of the passenger transport sector through its
HSR component (Alstom 2008).
Speed
In terms of dynamism, the development of passenger train speeds has been much
slower than that of the APT by stretching over more than a century and half.
During that time, the speed had increased by more than 10-fold, namely from
about 50 to more than 500 km/h as shown in Fig. 5.9.
At present, the maximum operating/cruising speed of TGV (Train à Grande
Vitesse) is 320 km/h. The Japanese Shinkansen and German ICE (Inter-City-
Express) trains currently operate at a maximum speed of about 300 km/h.
However, the forthcoming more advanced European AGV (Automotice Grande
Vitesse) and Japanese Fastech 360Z trains are expected to operate at an average
speed of 350 and 360 km/h, respectively. AGV trains have also achieved maxi-
mum operating speeds of 574.8 km/h, close to half the speed of sound.
Traffic
Development of the HSR network in Europe has been carried out through several
phases. It started with giving priority to national projects. Later on, with the
introduction of the concept of TENs (Trans-European Transport Networks),
international and cohesive projects came to the forefront. As mentioned above, the
first HSR line started operations in 1981 when the French railways launched the
HSR service on the Paris-Lyon line. One of the main reasons for beginning HSR
operations in France was the oil crisis in 1973, which resulted in huge fuel deficits.
At that time, electrically powered HSR was expected to reduce the dependence of
the transport sector on crude oil and thus overall fuel consumption by replacing air
transportation in particular markets. Such development of infrastructure has also
driven traffic growth, resulting in HSR amounting for 15 % of the total passenger
market share in Europe. Some relationships between development of the HSR
infrastructure and related traffic volumes over the 1981–2010 period are shown in
Fig. 5.10. As can be seen, traffic volumes have continuously increased, albeit at
decreasing rate.
14 The lowest speed – 47km/h - 1829

Ratio of increase in speed
12
10
4
HSR era
2
0
1925 1935 1945 1955 1965 1975 1985 1995 2005 2015
Year
Fig. 5.9 Evolution of the speed of passenger trains over time (UIC 2011)
120
100 Q = 49.564ln(L)-335.43
Q-Volume of transport-billion p-km
R² = 0.927
80
60
40
20
0
0 1000 2000 3000 4000 5000 6000 7000
L-Length of the network -km
Fig. 5.10 Relationship between the volume of traffic and the length of the European HSR
network (EC 2012)
TRM (TransRapid MAGLEV)
1970s Research on maglev transportation intensifies (Japan, Germany)

1977 The first TRM (TransRapid Maglev) test line of a length of 7 km is built (the test
speed achieved is 517 km/h) (Japan)
1993 The TRM test of 1,674 km is carried out (the achieved speed is 450 km/h)
(Germany)
1990/1997 The Yamanashi TRM test line of a length of 42.8 km is constructed in 1990 and the
first test is carried out in 1997 (EDS (Electro Dynamic Suspension)) (Japan)
2004 The first TRM line between Shanghai and its airport (China) is commercialized
The TRM (TransRapid MAGLEV—MAGnetic LEVitation) system is based on

Herman Kemper’s idea of magnetic levitation from the 1930s. Magnetic levita-
tions enables the suspension, guidance, and propelling of MAGLEV vehicles by
magnets rather than by mechanical wheels, axles, and bearings as is the case in HS
wheel/rail vehicles. Two forces (lift and thrust/propulsion), both created by
magnets, are needed for operating TRM vehicles. Although the TRM system has
been matured to the level of commercialization, the relevant infrastructure has
only been partially built, mainly connecting airport(s) with city centers, which is
still far from network development comparable to that of HSR (Geerlings 1998;
Kertzschmar 1995; Powell and Danby 2007).
Similarly as the HSR, the TRM (TransRapid MAGLEV) system can also be
characterized in the given context as mentioned above by its infrastructure, rolling
stock, speed, and traffic.
Infrastructure
The main TRM infrastructure is a guideway consisting of concrete (prefabricated)
supporting piers and beams. The concrete piers are located at different distances
depending on type of the guideway: 31 m—type I, 12 m—type II, and 6.19 m—
type III). The beams lying on the solids can have different lengths: 62.92 m—type
I, 24.78 m—type II, and 6.19 m—type III. The height of a beam can be: 2 m—
type I, 1 m—type II, and 0.4 m—type III. The total height of the guideway can be:
2.2–20.0 m—type I and II, and 1.35–3.5 m—type III. The beam carries the vehicle
and provides power to the entire system. Each type of beam has a trapezoidal-like
profile with the body and the track on top. The beam can be made of steel,
concrete, or hybrid (steel/concrete mixture). The three above-mentioned types of
guideway can be single or double (or triple) track constructions. The profile area of
the guideway is 1.445 m2 (Shibo 2008).
Rolling stock
Principles of operations TRM trains differ from the wheel/rail HS trains in the way
they operate along the tracks. A scheme of TRM system in Fig. 5.11 shows that
the support and guidance systems follow the principles of magnetic levitation. The
individually controlled DC (Direct-Current) support and guidance magnets are
located at the undercarriage of the vehicle. The three phase armature windings or
Fig. 5.11 Scheme of the

main components of the TRM
Vehicle
system (He et al. 1992)
Gliding skid
Slide Rail
Guidance and Breaking

Guidance and
Braking Rail
Long - Stator and Iron -

Levitation and Core Armature Windings
Propulsion Magnet
Guideway
stator windings of the linear electromotor getting power from the modulated
inverter system are installed in the slots of iron core, which is mounted on the
underside of the gateway. The controlled DC suspension magnets getting energy
from the on board power-conditioning equipment also provides excitation fields
for the linear motor. The air gap typically 1 cm is maintained as small as possible
in order to increase efficiency and power factor of the system (He et al. 1992).
Such design enables the TRM vehicles to levitate above the tracks supported by
magnets and run on the principle of electromagnetism. As mentioned above, the
magnets create two forces—lift and thrust or propulsion for operating the TRM
vehicle. The lift force keeps the vehicle above the guideway at a distance of at
most 1 cm but usually 10–15 mm during the trip. The propulsion force enables
acceleration and deceleration as well as overcoming air resistance during the
cruising phase of the trip. Thanks to levitation, there is no friction between the
tracks and the vehicle’s wheels, thus enabling TRM trains to operate at much
higher speeds. Figure 5.11 shows a simplified cross-sectional profile containing
the particular components enabling operation. Electric energy is consumed for
generating both lift and thrust force, but in much greater proportion for the latter
than for the former. In addition, a part of the energy spent during deceleration is
returned to the network, thus also indicating possibilities for saving energy simi-
larly as in the case of HSR. Figure 5.12 shows a scheme of the TRM cross-section
profile.
Levitation and propulsion Two TRM technologies have been developed to
maturity enabling their full commercial implementation: EMS (Electromagnetic
Suspension) and EDS (Electro Dynamic Suspension). They enable three basic
functions of TRM vehicles: (i) levitation above the track; (ii) propulsion enabling
moving forward in terms of acceleration, cruise, and deceleration; and (iii) guid-
ance implying maintaining stability along the guideway.
• EMS technology as a wheel-less system enables TRM trains to levitate above the
steel beam thanks to magnets attached to the vehicle and oriented toward the
beam. This is arranged as a series of C-shaped profiles with the upper part
attached to the vehicle and the lower inside part containing the magnets, thus
positioning the rail between the upper and inner part. Due to the high fluctuation
TRM vehicle
3.9m
Guideway
Beam
3.7m
2.2 - 20.0m Concrete footing
Ground
Fig. 5.12 Scheme of the TRM system cross-section profile
of the magnetic field with distance, a highly reliable and redundant electrical
control system is installed to continuously maintain the vehicle at a constant
distance from the track of 10–15 mm depending on the type. This technology
operates at all speeds from minimum speeds of 10–15 km/h to maximum speeds
of 400–500 km/h. The thrust of the TRM vehicle for acceleration, cruising, and
deceleration is provided by the on board synchronous long-stator linear motor
creating a propulsive force moving the vehicle forward.
• EDS technology as a wheel-based system uses the magnetic field generated by
magnets installed both on the TRM vehicle and on the guideway. The magnetic
force in the vehicle is generated by the magnetic field from either supercon-
ducting magnets or by a series of permanent magnets. The magnetic force in the
track is generated by an induced wire- or conducting strips in the track-based
magnetic field. The inherent advantage of this technology is that the levitation is
stable and does not require a feedback system (as EMS technology does) to
maintain a constant distance between the vehicle and the track during the
journey. Since the magnetic field generated at low speeds is not sufficient to
maintain the vehicle above the track, i.e., to levitate, trains must have some kind
of wheels to support them until they reach higher speeds. Contrary to EMS, this
technology does not include a linear motor on board the TRM train for gener-
ating the propulsion force enabling moving forward. Instead, propulsion coils
alongside the track are used to extract propulsion force, thus playing the role of
linear motor. The main principle is as follows: alternating current, whose
frequency is synchronized to match the vehicle’s speed(s), is pushed through the

propulsion coils, thus generating continuously changing magnetic field moving
the vehicle forward along the track. Under such conditions, the counterbalance
between the strength of the magnetic fields created on board the vehicle and that
from the track creates propulsive force moving the vehicle forward. However,
this is possible only while operating (cruising) at high speeds. During acceler-
ation and deceleration, at low speeds, a secondary propulsive system based on
the conventional electrical linear motor is used in combination with the wheels
(‘landing gear’).
Weight and energy consumption The typical weight of an empty TRM vehicle
is about 50 tons, which, combined with the weight of payload (passengers) of
about 20 tons, gives a total gross weight of 70 tons. A portion of the vehicle’s
empty weight represents the weight of on board magnets. If the magnet force to
maintain levitation of the vehicle is about 1–2 kW, then the total energy consumed
for this part could be 70–140 kW. Table 5.3 gives some specifications of TRM
(TranRrapid MAGLEV) 07.
Usually, similarly as at HSR, the energy consumption of TRM is expressed in
the relative terms, i.e., either per unit of input—supplied seat or per unit of out-
put—passenger carried. This is often called SEC (Specific Energy Consumption).
Figure 5.13 shows an example of the relationship between the SEC and operating
speed of TRM07. For the comparative purposes, the corresponding SEC for HSR
is also given.
As can be seen, the SEC of both systems increases more than proportionally
with increasing of the operating speed, mainly due to increasing the air resistance.
In addition, the SEC of HSR is higher than that of TRM for the range of operating
speeds (For example, at speed of 300 km/h, this amounts about 33 %).
Control systems Contrary to conventional rail and HSR, TRM systems using
either technology do not rely on an outside signaling system. TRM systems have
fully automated communication systems controlled by the computer system. This
consists of the main computer in the system’s command center and that on board
the vehicle(s). These computers continuously communicate between each other,
thus providing the necessary monitoring and control/management of the driverless
vehicles along the line(s). In addition, TRM trains change tracks by using bending
switches. These consist of bending beams with drive units installed on every
second solid of the bending switch. There are low-speed and high-speed switches.
The former are used near and at stations enabling passing between the tracks at
speeds of about 100 km/h. The former are used along the main portion of the
guideway enabling switching between the tracks at speed(s) of about 200 km/h.
Speed
TRM trains can operate at a range of speeds from about 10–15 km/h to about
400–500 km/h due to the lack of physical contact with the dedicated guideway.
This enables them to cover travel distances of between 500 and 800 km, also
typical of HSR and short-haul APT system operations, in 1–2 h, respectively. This
Table 5.3 Technical/technological and operational performances of TRM (TransRapid

MAGLEV) 07 (He et al. 1992; Janic 2003)
Performance Value
Carriages per train (linked) 2
Total length (m) 50
Width (m) 3.70
Height (m) 3.9
Weight of a train (unloaded/loaded) (tons) 90/110
Seating capacity (average) (seats) 200
Operating speed (km/h) 400–450
Maximum speed (km/h) 500
Maximum acceleration/deceleration (m/s2) 0.8–1.5
Lateral tilting angle (0) 12–16
Levitation air gap (mm) 8
Maximum thrust (kN) 85
Total tractive resistance (kN)
Speed (km/h)
300 22
400 35
500 52
Guideway loads (at 400 km/h)
Longitudinal (kN) 300
Lateral (kN/m) 14
Vertical (kN/m) 33
Track structure Single beam elevated
Span 12 and 16 m
Technical curve radius (m) 2,825–3,580
90
SEC-Specific Energy Consumption -(W-h/s-km)
80
70
60
SFC HSR = 0.0002v 2 + 0,119v + 6.911
50 R² = 0.794.
40
30
SEC TRM = 0.0001v 2 + 0.092v + 3.844
R² = 0,840
20
10
0
50 100 150 200 250 300 350 400 450
v-Train cruising speed -(km/h)
Fig. 5.13 Relationship between SFC (Specific Energy Consumption) and crusing speed of
TRM07 and HS train(s) (Lukaszevicz and Anderson 2009; TIG 2012)
performance qualifies the TRM system as both a competitive and complementary

alternative to the other two HS systems on comparable distances. Consequently,
TRM will be able to connect centers and edges of major cities with airports on the
one hand, and provide an intermodal connection with existing APT, HSR, and
urban-mass transit and the eventually forthcoming ETT (Evacuated Tube Trans-
port) system, on the other. However, similarly as in the case of HSR, both national
and/or international dedicated infrastructure networks for the long-distance TRM
may take decades to develop up to a level that will have a significant influence on
the existing and prospective transport market(s) (Kertzschmar 1995).
Traffic
Individual TRM lines have been constructed so far for different purposes. In
particular, in addition to five testing tracks and four tracks (lines) under con-
struction, only three lines have been commercialized for public use as follows
(http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Maglev):
• The Shanghai Maglev Train following the German TRM design, which began
operations in 2004 in Shanghai (China) by covering the distance of 30 km
between the city of Shanghai and its airport in 7 min; this implies an average
commercial speed of about 268 km/h;
• The ‘‘Urban MAGLEV’’ also known as the Tobu-Kyuryo Line, namely the
Linimo system that started operation in 2005 in Aichi (Japan); the length of the
line is 9 km with nine stations, a minimum curve radius of 75 m, and a maxi-
mum gradient of 6 %; the trains—almost free from noise and quite resistant to
disruptions by bad weather—operate at maximum speeds of 100 km/h, thus
offering highly regular and reliable services (nearly 100 %); consequently,
nearly 10 million passengers used this system during the first 3 months of
operation; and
• The urban MAGLEV system UTM-02 in Daejeon (South Korea) began oper-
ations in 2008; the length of the line is 1 km connecting the Expo Park and
National Science Museum.
5.2.1.2 Modeling Performances
Background
The DM processes related to HS passenger and other transport systems are mostly
based on different ranking methods. Generally, these methods are commonly
applied (almost as standard) to ranking alternative systems operating either by the
same or different transport modes including already existing (operated) and/or
nonexisting (forthcoming) alternatives. Ranking within the scope of the same
transport mode is necessary for identifying the ‘‘best’’ or ‘‘most preferable’’ among
different available alternatives, while ranking within the scope of different trans-
port modes is necessary for identifying the ‘‘most preferable’’ alternative under
conditions when both competition and complementarity by substitution between
given HS modes can be expected. Competition is possible in high-density markets

(corridors) with sufficient volumes of transport demand supporting efficient and
effective operations of the given HS systems. Complementarity by substitution can
take place in high-density markets-corridors where one HS system fully or par-
tially replaces/substitutes another aiming at mitigating its current capacity burden
(i.e., congestion) on the one hand, and its overall impact on the environment and
society, on the other (EC 1998b; Levison et al. 1996; Janic 2003).
Ranking of HS alternatives can be carried out respecting the preferences of the
different actors/stakeholders and interest groups involved. Each group can use the
specified methodology/method applied to the selected ranking attributes/criteria
represented by the indicators and measures of performances of alternative HS
passenger transport systems.
Actors/stakeholders and interest groups
In Europe and the rest of the world, different actors/stakeholders and interest
groups have acted as DM (Decision Makers) in developing and implementing the
above-mentioned HS passenger transport systems. In general, these have been
public, semiprivate, and private investors; manufacturers of these systems in the
broadest sense; transport operators; governmental authorities at the local (regional
and national) and global (international) level; users/passengers; the general public;
and local community members. Usually, these actors and groups have different
preferences regarding the full commercialization of such systems. On the positive
side, they have expected benefits from the new systems. On the negative side, they
have always been reluctant regarding their costs. In such a case, a compromise
solution had to be found.
Both benefits and costs are of different meaning and importance for different
actors. On the benefit side, for example, investors in the HS passenger transport
system infrastructure and manufacturers of rolling stock and supporting facilities
and equipment expect at least a return of their investments over the planned period
of time. Local and central governments expect contribution of these systems to the
overall social welfare and the economy. Transport operators expect to profitability.
Users/passengers expect to utilize their travel budget more efficiently and effec-
tively. Local community members expect local socioeconomic benefits in terms of
new job opportunities and improved accessibility of their regions.
On the cost side, investors, local and central governments can very likely be
confronted with extremely high infrastructure costs, long return on investment
periods, and permanent scarcity of monetary funds. In addition, governments at all
levels and local community members can be faced with increased global and local
impacts on the environment and society in terms of energy consumption and related
emissions of GHG, land use/take, noise, congestion, and traffic incidents/accidents.
The systems’ manufacturers can be exposed to an increased risk of economic and
social failure of the new concepts. Transport operators need to deploy new models
and knowledge in order to run their businesses profitably. Users/passengers can
expect increased travel costs in absolute terms. Under such conditions, the choice of
the appropriate HS system generally appears to be a very complex process, usually

resulting in some kind of compromise solution. DMs use different sets of criteria
based on the attributes of performances of particular HS transport systems, which
are either already commercialized or in the planning phase.
Attributes/criteria of performances
The attributes/criteria of performances of the particular HS passenger transport
systems can be selected, defined, and clustered in light of the preferences of the
particular actors/stakeholders involved such as users/passengers, transport opera-
tors, local and central government, and local community members.
Users/passengers
Users/passengers are particularly interested in the following attributes/criteria of
performances of the HS transport systems:
• Accessibility
This attribute can be quantified by the users-passengers’ generalized costs to
reach the services of a given HS transport system. These costs depend on the
total time the user spends on any of the available urban and suburban transport
systems to reach the HS transport station from his or her location (house, office,
shop). The HS transport system’s station can be either the HSR station usually
located nearby the center of an urban agglomeration or at an airport. The fare
paid for such movement is another factor influencing the generalized costs.
Generally, both the travel time and fare depend on the travel distance. In
addition to individual modes (car, taxi), mass transport modes such as urban and
suburban bus, stretcher, and various rail-based systems can be used (Vuchic
2007). This attribute/criterion is preferred to be maximal, implying that acces-
sibility costs are preferred to be minimal.
• Generalized travel costs
These costs consist of the costs of users-passengers’ total time spent in a given
HS system and the fare paid for the respective trip. The total time spent in the
HS transport system consists of any schedule delay and in-vehicle time. The
former depends on the departure frequency on a given route during the specified
period of time (an hour, day), while the latter depends mainly on the length of
route and the vehicle operating speed, as well as on the punctuality of operations
expressed by delay(s) as deviations of actual arrivals from the schedule. It
should be mentioned that HS passenger transport systems operate as scheduled
transport systems at which scheduled delays are significantly reduced by
advertising the schedule. Being familiar with the schedule, users-passengers
choose to arrive just in time to meet their scheduled departure. The speed of
HSR and TRM depends on the technical speed and the number and length of
stops along a given route. In APT, the aircraft block speed, which depends on
the aircraft type, cruising altitude, weather and traffic conditions on a route, and
departing and landing airport, is relevant. In contrast to APT, both HSR and
TRM are inherently free of congestion and delays that can exclusively be caused
by imbalances between demand and capacity. In general, these delays can be

used for measuring punctuality of services of particular HS transport systems.
The fare is primarily dependent on the class of trip (business, leisure), time of
trip (high or low season, weekend or working day, time of day, etc.), length of
travel distance, and the type of ‘yield management system’. This attribute/
criterion is preferred to be minimal.
• In-vehicle comfort
The internal comfort, choice of services (drinks, meal, newspapers, videos,
possibility of working on board, etc.), and feeling of security are important
attributes (criteria) for users-passengers of a given HS transport system. They
are preferred to be maximal.
• Reliability of services
This attribute reflects the rate of canceled departures. The HS system with the
lowest rate is preferable. This attribute/criterion is expected to be maximal,
implying that the number of canceled departures in comparison to the number of
realized ones is preferred to be minimal.
• Security and safety
Users always expect this attribute to be as high as possible. The choice of HS
alternative is always related to the perceived risk for a user to be injured and/or
killed due to potential incidents and/or accidents. The preference is for this
attribute/criterion (security and safety) to be maximal.
Transport operators
Transport operators are expected to consider the following attributes/criteria of
performances of HS passenger transport systems:
• Operating costs
Operating costs are primarily dependent on the constructive characteristics of
particular HS transport systems, and the volumes and prices of inputs such as
labor, capital, and energy. This attribute/criterion is preferred to be minimal.
• Operating revenues
Operating revenues depend on the internal and external characteristics of both
HS transport systems and their operators. Internal characteristics imply the
system’s inherent profitability (i.e., some systems are profitable because they are
planned to be so, and others are not) and the capabilities and skills of transport
operators to successfully use and sell their capacities (use of the ‘yield man-
agement system’). External characteristics imply the volumes and structure of
demand and the prevailing market prices under given conditions. This attribute/
criterion is always preferred to be as high as possible, i.e., maximal.
• Utilization of resources
The art of utilizing the resources engaged to carry out transport services is
reflected by the load factor. This is expressed as the ratio between the number of
passengers on board and the number of offered seats by the given transport ser-
vices on a given route/line during a given period of time. HS passenger transport
system operators prefer systems that can easily provide at least the break-even
load factor. Therefore, from their point of view, this attribute/criterion (the break-
even load factor) is preferred to be as low as possible, i.e., minimal.
• Technical productivity
Operators always prefer to operate systems with higher technical productivity.
Technical productivity is expressed by the volume of services carried out per
unit of time. Therefore, technical productivity increases in line with the vehicle
and line capacity on the one hand, and the vehicle operating speed on the other
(Vuchic 2007). This attribute/criterion is preferred to be maximal.
Local and central government
Local and central governmental authorities can consider the following attributes/
criteria of performances of the HS passenger transport systems (Tabucanon and
Mo-Lee 1995):
• Investments
The investments are always carefully considered in evaluating any HS passenger
transport system since the related costs are always very high. Therefore, this
attribute/criterion is always, independent on the investor, preferred to be mini-
mal while the return on investment is preferred to be maximal.
• Energy consumption
Energy consumption is important for planning the energetic balance of the
country and/or of a given region. In any plan, the proper balance between
different types of primary sources of energy/fuel needs to be established in
addition to minimizing overall energy/fuel consumption. Therefore, in the case
of HS passenger transport systems, planners and policy/decision makers prefer
this attribute/criterion to be minimal.
• Congestion
Congestion causes delay of transport services and consequently of users-pas-
sengers while traveling door-to-door. In general, these delays impose costs on
the affected parties. Operators have to engage more vehicles to serve the same
volumes of demand under given conditions. Users-passengers loose time, which
increases their generalized travel costs. Both increase the overall social costs
and generate the need for building additional infrastructure, which may nega-
tively affect the environment through change of land use, increased energy
consumption and related emissions of GHG, and an increased risk of traffic
incidents/accidents. In order to minimize these costs, the local and central
government will always prefer the HS transport system that can reduce con-
gestion costs, both directly and indirectly.
• Externalities
Externalities of HS passenger transport systems include energy consumption
and related emissions of GHG, noise, traffic incidents/accidents, and land use/
take. These are preferred to be minimal in both absolute and relative terms.
Local community members

Community member(s) are particularly interested in the following attributes/cri-
teria of performances of particular HS passenger transport systems:
• Accessibility cost
Once accepting a given HS transport system in their neighborhood, community
members are always keen to use its services in the most convenient way. On the
local scale, they prefer efficient and effective access to services, while on the
global scale, thanks to the high speed, the preference is to also access many
previously rather distant regions in shorter (more reasonable) time. Thus, this
attribute/criterion is preferred to be maximal.
• Social welfare
Social welfare expresses some general benefits of the local community arising
from the given HS transport system. These can be direct and indirect, part-time,
and/or permanent jobs. In addition, these can include the overall increase of
attractiveness of a given community (region(s)) for housing, and business and
leisure activities. Therefore, in the given context, this attribute/criterion is
preferred to be maximal.
• Local externalities
Local externalities of HS transport systems comprise the environmental and
social impacts such as energy consumption and related emissions of GHG,
noise, traffic incidents/accidents, congestion, and land use (take). However, this
time they are considered at the local community level. For example, changes to
land use due to building HS infrastructure can cause displacement of house-
holds, creating physical barriers to daily activities, or increase noise, and sim-
ilar. Therefore, this attribute/criterion is preferred to be minimal.
The multi-criteria ranking methodology
The multicriteria ranking methodology of HS passenger transport systems as
alternatives includes the DM (Decision-Making) problem and process, models of
ranking attributes/criteria, and the structure of the ranking method(s).
The DM (Decision Making) problem and process
The DM (Decision-Making) problem of choosing one among several HS passenger
transport system alternatives based on their ranking in terms of overall feasibility
can be structured on three levels as shown in Fig. 5.14.
As can be seen, the first level is occupied by the interest groups. The attributes
(criteria) of performances of particular HS passenger transport systems are on the
second level, while the ranking alternatives, i.e., HS transport systems, occupy the
third and final level.
At least theoretically, membership in particular interest groups is not exclusive,
meaning that the same person(s) may belong to different groups simultaneously
and he or she is assumed to use different attributes/criteria and their weights while
making decisions within each group.
RANKING
HS (HIGH SPEED) PASSENGER TRANSPORT SYSTEMS
ACTORS AND INTEREST GROUPS
Users/Passengers Transport operators Local/central Local community

government members
ATTRIBUTES (CRITERIA)
• Accessibility • Operating costs • Investments • Accessibility cost

• Generalized travel • Operating revenues • Energy • Social welfare
cost • Utilization of consumption • Local externalities
resources • Congestion
• In-vehicle comfort
• Technical • Externalities
• Reliability of productivity
services
• Safety/security
THE HS (HIGH SPEED) PASSENGER TRANSPORT SYSTEM ALTERNATIVES
Alt. No. 1 Alt. No. 2 Alt. No. 3

HSR TRM APT
Fig. 5.14 Scheme of the DM (Decision Making) problem and procedure of ranking HS
passenger transport system alternatives (Janic 2003)
The DM process of ranking the selected HS transport system alternatives

consists of two parts. The first deals with modeling particular attributes/criteria of
performances assumed to be relevant for particular interest groups considering the
available HS transport systems as alternatives. This enables quantification of the
particular attributes/criteria. The second part consists of the multicriteria ranking
methodology. In this specific case, the methodology includes the TOPSIS
(Technique for Order Preference by Similarity to Ideal Solution) method and the
entropy method. The methodology enables particular interest groups to carry out
more systematic and consistent evaluation and then selection of the preferable HS
system alternative (Hwang and Yoon 1981).
Models of attributes/criteria
Modeling attributes/criteria for ranking the HS transport systems enables their
quantification in both absolute and relative terms under given conditions. In
absolute terms, they can be quantified for a given route (corridor) or for the entire
network of a given HS system, while in relative terms, the attributes/criteria can be

quantified per unit of the system’s output (seat-km, passenger-km, km of infra-
structure, etc.). In both cases, estimates are made for the given traffic scenario
implying operations of the particular HS transport systems along comparable (or
the same) routes/corridors.
• Attributes/criteria for users/passengers
– (A1) Accessibility
This attribute/criterion for a given HS transport system can be expressed by the
generalized cost of users/passengers to access its services from their current
location as follows:
Ca ¼ a T ðdÞ þ d pðdÞ ð5:1aÞ
where
a is the value of user-passenger time while traveling (€/pass-h);
T(d) is the perceived travel time on the distance d between the user’s location
and the HS transport system station (T(d) = d/v(d) where v(d) is average
speed of a chosen transport mode operating on the distance d) (min; h);
d is the average travel distance from the user’s temporal location to the HS
transport system station (km); and
p(d) is the fare for using a given urban transport mode to arrive at the HS
service (€/p-km; p-km—passenger kilometer).
– (A2) Generalized travel cost

The attribute/criterion of a given HS transport system can be estimated as
follows (Janic 1993):
CðDÞ ¼ PðDÞ þ a0 ½T=4f ðT; DÞ þ D=vðDÞ þ Td ð5:1bÞ
where
P(D) is the fare paid by the passenger for traveling on the route of length
D (€/passenger);
a0 is the value of passenger time while in a given HS transport system
(both waiting for departure and in-vehicle time) (€/pass-h);
D is the length of the route (km);
T is the period in which the departures on route D are scheduled (h);
f(T) is the service frequency on the route D in time T (-);
v(D) is the average operating speed on the route D (km/h); and
Td is the anticipated delay on the route D (min; h).
According to Eq. 5.1b, the generalized travel costs will rise in line with
the fare, value of passenger time, and the time of staying in a given HS
transport system, the latter depending on the number of departures,
length of route, operating speed, and anticipated delay(s).
– (A3) In-vehicle comfort

This attribute/criterion for a given HS transport system refers to its in-vehicle
comfort, security/safety, quality of food/drinks, kindness of cabin attendants,
possibilities for on board work, etc. This can be estimated either by interviewing
the users-passengers or by some quantitative estimates such as for example the
number of different services offered. Generally, the number and diversity of
these services on shorter routes is smaller than on longer ones.
– (A4) Reliability of services
This attribute/criterion for a given HS transport system is usually expressed by
the perceived rate of reliability of services. For the route of length D, this rate
can be determined as:
Rr ¼ NðD; T0 Þ=NðD; T0 Þ ð5:1cÞ
where
Ncd (D,T0) is the number of canceled departures on the route D in time T0; and
N(D,T0) is the total number of realized departures on the route D in time T0
(day, week, month, and year).
– (A5) Safety and security

This attribute/criterion for a given HS transport system is usually expressed by
the ratio between the number of events/causalities (incidents/accidents/deaths/
injuries) and the volume of output (vehicle-km, or p-km) carried out during a
given period of time (usually 1 year).
• Attributes/criteria for transport operators
– (B1) Operating costs
This attribute/criterion usually reflects the capital, operating, and maintenance
costs of transport means/vehicles of a given HS transport system. The common
expressions to estimate these costs can be as follows (Bianco and DiMajo 1991;
Janic 1993; ITA 1991):
HSR and TRM
Ct ðD; St Þ ¼ c0 D St ð5:2aÞ
where
c0 is the unit cost per unit of output (€/seat-km); and
St is the average number of seats per departure (seats).
The other symbols are analogous to those in Eq. 5.1a, b and c.
APT
Ca ðD; Sa Þ ¼ a0 þ a1 D þ a2 Sa ð5:2bÞ
where
ai is the coefficient estimated by calibration of the regression equation (i = 0,
1, 2).
The other symbols are analogous to those in Eq. 5.2a. The causal relationship
(Eq. 5.2a, b) can also be in the log-linear form. As can be intuitively expected, the
cost per departure of the given HS transport systems—HSR, TRM, and APT—
increases in line with the vehicle (train, aircraft) seating capacity and route length,
and vice versa.
– (B2) Operating revenues
This attribute/criterion for a given HS transport system can be expressed by the
following causal relationship (ITA 1991):
PðDÞ ¼ b0 þ b1 D ð5:2cÞ
where
bi is the coefficient determined by calibration of the regression model (i = 0, 1).
The other symbols are analogous to those in the previous equations. Evidently, the
average fare rises in line with the route length (travel distance).
– (B3) Utilization of resources (break-even load factor)
This attribute/criterion for a given HS transport system reflects the level of
utilization of its operators’ resources and is expressed as the break-even load
factor. For a single service on a route, it can be determined after equalizing the
operating costs and the operating revenues as follows:
kb ðDÞ ¼ CðDÞ=PðDÞ ð5:2dÞ
where
C(D) is the operating cost per departure on the route D (€/dep); and
P(D) is the average fare on the route D (€/passenger).
– (B4) Technical productivity

This attribute/criterion for a given HS transport system can be determined for a
single vehicle as well as for the route where a fleet of vehicles operate as
follows:
Vehicle
Pv ¼ S vðDÞ ð5:2eÞ
Route
Pl ¼ f ðT; DÞ S mðDÞ ð5:2fÞ

Both the above-mentioned attributes/criteria are expressed in seat-km/h. The cri-
terion of a single vehicle increases in line with both its seating capacity and
operating speed, while the criterion of the route increases in line the technical
productivity of a single vehicle and the service frequency of the route.
• Attributes/criteria for the local/central government

– (C1) Investments
HSR and TRM
This attribute/criterion for HSR and TRM reflects construction investments and the
costs of maintaining the infrastructure of a given HS transport system and can be
Cti ¼ ðIta DÞ=Qt ð5:3aÞ
where
Ita is the average annual annuity on the investments per unit length of line
(M€/km);
D is the length of route (km); and
Qt is the total number of passengers expected to travel on route D (pass/per
year).
As expressed per passenger, this cost is expected to decrease as the passenger
numbers on a given route increase. In addition, if the investment and maintenance
costs are additionally divided by the length of route D, the average unit cost
per p-km during a given period of time can be estimated.
APT
This attribute/criterion for APT reflects the investment and maintenance costs in
airports and ATC (Air Traffic Control System) and can be estimated as follows
(Manheim 1979):
ra ¼ ðRa Ca Þ=Ia ð5:3bÞ
where
Ra is the average annual operating revenues (M€);
Ca is the average annual operating cost (M€); and
Ia is the total investment cost (M€).
– (C2) Energy consumption

HSR and TRM
This attribute/criterion for HSR and TRM is expressed by the energy consumed
per p-km on a given route and can be estimated as follows (ITA 1991):
SPCt ¼ ECt =ðkt St Þ ð5:3cÞ
where
ECt is the energy consumption of an HSR or TRM train (KWh/km);
kt is the average train’s load factor; and
St is the train’s seating capacity (seats/train).
Multiplying Eq. 5.3c by the number of departures f(D, T) in time T, the route
length D, and the seating capacity of train St, the total energy consumption for a
given traffic volume can be estimated.
APT
This attribute/criterion for APT is expressed by the quantity of energy/fuel con-
sumed per p-km and can be estimated as follows:
D
FCa ðDÞ a0 þ a1 Tg þ a2 ðvðDÞ þ Td Þ
SFCa ¼ ¼ ð5:3dÞ
k a S a D k a S a D
where
FCa(D) is the average fuel consumption per flight on the route of length
D (tons/flight);
ai is the coefficient determined for each flight; it is dependent on the
aircraft type and length of flight (long, medium, short haul) (i = 0, 1,
2); and
Tg is the taxi and/or idle time while the aircraft is on the ground with its
engines turned on (min).
The other symbols are analogous to those in Eqs. 5.1b and 5.3a–5.3c. For a given
flight, SFCa decreases more than proportionally as its length and the aircraft size
increases. By multiplying Eq. 5.3d by the flight frequency f(D,T), the aircraft
seating capacity Sa, and the route length D, the total energy consumption for
carrying the given volumes of passengers can be estimated.
– (C3) Congestion
This attribute/criterion reflects the total costs of congestion and delays including
the costs of HS vehicle delays and the costs of user/passenger time losses under
given conditions. It can be estimated as follows:
CðTd Þ ¼ Td f ðD; TÞ ½CðD; SÞ vðDÞ=D þ a k S ð5:3eÞ
where the symbols are analogous to the previous equations.
– (C4) Externalities
Emissions of GHG
This attribute/criterion for a given HS transport system reflects the total emissions
of GHG generated on the route D in the time period T. It can be estimated as
follows:
X
M
TE ¼ ½f ðT; DÞ k S D SEj ð5:3fÞ
j¼1
where
SEj is the specific emission of (j)-th type of GHG (g/p-km) ðj ¼ 1:2; . . .; MÞ:
Land use
This attribute/criterion for a given HS transport system reflects the size and effi-
ciency of land use, which can be quantified by the land use coefficient as follows:
oðQ; AÞ ¼ Q=A ð5:3gÞ
where
Q is the volume of output (seat-km or p-km); and
A is the area of land acquired for infrastructure of a given HS system (km2).
Specifically, in the case of HSR and TRM, A = s0D, where s0 is the unit area
(km2/km) needed for building the line (D is the length of line). In the case of APT,
A can be considered as the size of the airport airside area (runways, taxi-ways,
apron(s)).
Noise
This attribute/criterion for a given HS transport system can be expressed as
measured—in decibels on the logarithmic scale dB(A).
Incidents/accidents (safety)
This attribute/criterion for a given HS system can be determined similarly as in the
case for an individual user/passenger (A5).
• Attributes/criteria for community members
– (D1) Accessibility costs
On the local scale, this attribute/criterion for a given HS transport system can be
estimated similarly as that for users/passengers (A1) (Eq. 5.1a). On the global
scale, it can be estimated by the number, diversity, and generalized travel costs
of connections between the given and other regions.
– (D2) Social welfare
This attribute/criterion for a given HS transport system reflects the permanent
and temporary jobs created by its commercialization. This can be quantified by
the number of new jobs created per thousand of active inhabitants in the given
region.
– (D3) Local externalities
This attribute/criterion for a given HS transport system can be estimated simi-
larly as that for local/central governments (C4). In such cases, the externalities
relevant for the local community need to be selected.
The multicriteria ranking method
The most common method applied to ranking HS transport systems is the con-
ventional ‘‘pure monetary’’ EAT (Economic Analysis Technique). The EAT
evaluates particular alternatives (projects) on the basis of their ‘‘revenues’’ and
‘‘costs’’ during their life cycles. The outputs are expressed exclusively in monetary
terms such as NPV (Net Present Value), BCR (Benefit-Cost Ratio), and/or IRR
(Internal Rate of Return). In many cases, the application of EAT is not easy due to
many reasons. First, taking into account the other nonmonetary attributes such as
the environmental and social impacts of particular alternatives adequately and
objectively is not always easy. Second, dealing with sometimes quite opposite
interests and objectives of the various interested groups involved in the evaluation
procedure is sometimes quite difficult, complex, and time-consuming (Giuliano
1985; Tabucanon and Mo-Lee 1995). Consequently, various modifications of the
conventional EAT have emerged enabling systematic inclusion of more alterna-
tives and ranking attributes/criteria, the latter reflecting specific interests of par-
ticular actors/interest groups involved in the DM process. In academic and
professional literature, these are referred to as MCDM (Multi-Criteria Decision
Making) methods. In particular, these methods have been proven to cope with the
problems of using a large amount of diverse information, clearly identifying trade-
offs between conflicting goals, and comparing the available alternatives in a sys-
tematic and consistent way (Geerlings 1998; Hwang and Yoon 1981). One of the
strongest research-based recommendations for using MCDM methods instead of
‘‘pure monetary’’ EAT was made in the European COST 328 Action (EC 1998a).1
The multicriteria method presented for ranking three HS passenger transport
systems consists of the entropy method as a commonly used above-mentioned
analytical method for assigning weights to attributes/evaluation criteria and the
TOPSIS (Technique for Order Preference by Similarity to Ideal Solution) method
as one multicriteria analytical method alleviating selection of the preferable among
several available alternatives. Alternatively, weights can be assigned to criteria
empirically by interviewing representatives of the particular interest groups
involved in the DM process (Hwang and Yoon 1981).
• The entropy method
The entropy method implies that the data on the decision matrix representing
the quantitative estimates of the selected attributes/criteria of the given alternatives
are known. Let Ai ði ¼ 1; 2; 3; . . .; mÞ alternatives need to be evaluated according
to n attributes/criteria Xj ðj ¼ 1; 2; 3; . . .; nÞ. Let Xij be the outcome of the i-th
alternative with respect to the j-th criterion. The values of Xij form the decision
matrix D containing a certain amount of information. Let pij be the probability that
the alternative Ai is the ‘best’ per criteria Xj. Then the probability pij can be
X
m
pij ¼ Xij = Xij ; 8ðijÞ ð5:4aÞ
i¼1
Since the choice of the ‘best’ alternative according to any Xj criterion is related to
some measure of uncertainty, the entropy of criteria Ej can be expressed as follows:
1
The MCA (Multi-Criteria Analysis) is proposed as a useful and convenient method for
evaluating projects in the scope of Trans-European Transport Networks (s) (TENs).
X
m
Ej ¼ ½1= lnðmÞ pij ln pij ; 8j ð5:4bÞ
i¼1
where the expression [1/ln(m)] guarantees fulfillment of the condition: 0 \ Ej \ 1.

If the DM (Decision Making) has no reason to prefer one criterion over the other,
the weight of criteria Xj can be determined as follows (Hwang and Yoon 1981):
X
n
wj ¼ ð1 Ej Þ= ð1 Ej Þ; 8j ð5:4cÞ
j¼1
• The TOPSIS method

The TOPSIS method evaluates the decision matrix D½Xij ði ¼ 1; 2; . . .; m; j ¼
1; 2; . . .; nÞ with (m) alternatives each having (n) criteria by assuming that each
criterion takes either increasing or decreasing utility. This implies that the larger
the criterion outcomes, the grater the preference for the ‘benefit’ criterion and less
the preference for the ‘cost’ criterion. The computation process of the TOPSIS
method consists of the following steps:
STEP 1: The dimensions of various criteria are transformed into nondimensional
criteria allowing comparison. This allows a normalized decision matrix R to be set
up whose elements are determined as follows (Hwang and Yoon 1981):
sffiffiffiffiffiffiffiffiffiffiffiffiffi
X m
rij ¼ Xij = Xij2 ð5:5aÞ
i¼1
STEP 2: The set of weights wj ðj ¼ 1; 2; . . .; nÞ obtained by the expression (5.4c)

(or provided by the DM) is accommodated to the decision matrix by multiplying
each column of the matrix R with its associated weight wj. Thus, the normalized
decision matrix takes the following form:
vij ¼ ½wj rij ; ði ¼ 1; 2; . . .; m; j ¼ 1; 2; . . .; nÞ

STEP 3: After determining the matrix, V vij the positive and negative ideal
solution A* and A-, respectively, can be estimated as follows:
n o
A ¼ maxi vij jj 2 J ; mini vij jj 2 J 0 ji ¼ 1; 2; . . .; m ¼ v1 ; v2 ; . . .; vj ; . . .; vn ð5:5bÞ
and

A ¼ n mini vij jj 2 J ; maxi o vij jj 2 J 0 ji ¼ 1; 2; . . .; m
¼ v
1 ; v2 ; . . .; vj ; . . .; vn ð5:5cÞ
where J is associated with the ‘benefit’ and J0 with the ‘cost’ criteria.
STEP 4: Compute the separation of each alternative from the positive and neg-
ative ideal solution. A* and A-, respectively as follows:
For the positive ideal solution, it amounts to:
vffiffiffiffiffiffiffiffiffiffiffiffiffiffiffiffiffiffiffiffiffiffiffiffiffiffiffiffi
uX
u n
Si ¼ t ðvij vj Þ2 ; for i ¼ 1; 2; . . .; m ð5:5dÞ
j¼1
Similarly, for the negative ideal solution, it amounts to:

vffiffiffiffiffiffiffiffiffiffiffiffiffiffiffiffiffiffiffiffiffiffiffiffiffiffiffiffiffi
uX
u n
Si ¼ t ðvij v 2
j Þ ; for i ¼ 1; 2; . . .; m ð5:5eÞ
j¼1
STEP 5: Compute the relative closeness of the alternative Ai with respect to A* as

follows:
Ci ¼ Si =ðSi þ Si Þ; 0 \ Ci \ 1; I ¼ 1; 2; . . .; m ð5:5fÞ
Apparently, Ci* * *
= 1 if Ai = A , and Ci = 0 if Ai = A . An alternative is-
closer to A* as Ci* approaches 1. A set of alternatives can now be ranked in

descending order of the value of Ci* .
Application of the multi-criteria ranking methodology

The multicriteria ranking methodology is applied using the attributes of HSR and
APT performances estimated through real-life data, and those of TRM estimated
though hypothetical (derived) data.
Input
The estimated values of 15 selected attributes as criteria of performances for three
HS passenger transport systems are given in Table 5.4 including the preferences of
the particular actors and interest groups. Despite not perfectly coinciding with
those shown in Fig. 5.14, the selected attributes/criteria are sufficiently relevant for
the purpose.
The attributes/criteria in Table 5.4 are expressed in absolute and relative terms
and not always by using the above-mentioned quantification models. In addition,
the inputs for their estimation have been taken from different sources. Further-
more, one should be aware that these sources may change over time. Under such
circumstances, this ranking should be considered as an illustrative example and
guidance for future similar work.
As already explained, the first four criteria (1, 2, 3, and 4) are mostly relevant
for users/passengers. Operators of HS passenger transport systems are mainly
interested in the next three criteria (5, 6, and 7). The remaining criteria (8, 9, 10,
11, 12, 13, 14, and 15) are mostly relevant for the local and central government
and community members. Furthermore, among the 15 criteria, five are considered
Table 5.4 Attributes as criteria for ranking the HS passenger systems in the given example
(Janic 2003)
Criterion Objectives for The HS alternative
criteria
HSR TRM APT
1. Local accessibility (km) ‘‘cost’’-(min) 0.5–3.0 0.5–3.0 10-30
2. Generalized travel cost (€/p-km) ‘‘cost’’-(min) 0.188 0.257 0.121
3. In-vehicle comfort and conveniencea ‘‘benefit’’-(max) 2 2 3
4. Safety (deaths/100 million p-km) ‘‘cost’’-(min) 0.000009 0.00000 0.0400
5. Operating costs (€/p-km) ‘‘cost’’-(min) 0.042 0.085 0.055
6. Operating revenues (€/p-km) ‘‘benefit’’-(max) 0.069 0.147 0.068
7. Technical productivity ‘‘benefit’’- (max) 98,550 132,800 100,200
(seat-km/hour)
8. Investments (M€/km)b ‘‘cost’’-(min) 7.14 15.14 14.94
9. Rate of return on investments (%) ‘‘benefit’’-(max) 13.7 13.5 10.0
10. Social welfarec ‘‘benefit’’-(max) 138/25 30/10 817/1,270
11. Energy consumption (Wh/seat-km) ‘‘cost’’-(min) 60d 42d 230–570
12. Emissions of GHG (g/seat-km) ‘‘cost’’-(min) 14.2–25.0e 9.9–17.5e 140
13. Land use (ha/km) ‘‘cost’’-(min) 3.2–3.5 1.2 15
14. Noise (dB(A)) ‘‘cost’’-(min) 84–105 79–93 46.5–92.5
15. Congestion (average delay) (min) ‘‘cost’’-(min) 1 1 11.7
a
The number of different in-vehicle services; b The cost per km of infrastructure; c The number
of part-time/permanent jobs/km of infrastructure; d At the speed of about 300 km/h; e Depends
on the primary sources for obtaining electric energy
as ‘‘benefit’’ criteria and the other ten as ‘‘cost’’ criteria independently of the actors
or interest group involved in the DM. The particular criteria are quantified as
follows:
• ‘‘Local accessibility’’ is expressed in terms of distance rather than in monetary
terms. Since HSR and TRM terminals are usually located in the center of an
(urban) agglomeration, it is assumed that the access distance to these terminals
may vary from 0.3 to 5 km. The distance of the user-passenger’s location to/
from an airport is assumed to vary from 10 to 30 km (Lufthansa 1996).
• ‘‘Generalized travel cost’’ is determined under the assumption that all three
alternatives operate according to the same schedule (i.e., they have equal number
of service frequencies along a given route) where all users-passengers have
approximately the same value of time. Under such conditions, the generalized
travel costs are dependent only on the in-vehicle time and fare. In this example,
the cost of in-vehicle time and fare are expressed in monetary terms per unit of
travel distance. The average value of travel time is adopted to be 32 €/pass/h. The
unit value of travel time per unit of travel distance is calculated as follows: for
HSR—32 €/pass/h 9 1 km/270 km/h = 0.119 €/p-km; for TRM—32€/pass/
km 9 1 km/400 km/h = 0.080€/p-km; and for APT—32 €/pass/h 9 1 km/
600 km/h = 0.053 €/p-km. The fares are 0.069 €/p-km, 0.147 €/p-km and 0.068
€/p-km for HSR, TRM, and APT, respectively (CEC 1995; ITA 1991; Levison
et al. l996; Witt 1995). Summation of the above values provides the total gen-
eralized travel costs for each alternative (Table 5.4).
• ‘‘In-vehicle comfort and convenience’’ is expressed by the number of different
services provided to users/passengers while on board (SNCF 1996; Lufthansa
1996).
• ‘‘Safety’’ is expressed by the number of deaths per volume of output. For HSR,
the estimate takes into account the ICE accident of 1998 in which 102 pas-
sengers were killed. TRM is assumed to be absolutely safe (no events and no
experience). The risk of death in the APT mode is estimated from current ICAO
(International Civil Aviation Organization) figures (Corrie 1994).
• ‘‘Operating costs’’ are estimated for typical operating conditions of HS passenger
transport systems as the product of the average cost per seat-km and the load factor
adopted to be 65 % (CEC 1995; ITA 1991; Levison et al. 1996; Witt 1995).
• ‘‘Operating revenues’’ are estimated similarly to the ‘‘operating costs,’’ but also
by assuming that 50 % of first and 50 % of second fare-class passengers use the
HSR and APT services. In the case of TRM, only one fare-class is considered
(Witt 1995).
• ‘‘Technical productivity’’ is estimated for the typical operating speed that may
be attained on the competing travel distances of 600–800 km. For HSR this
speed is adopted to be 270 km/h and the seating capacity of a train set 365 seats.
The typical operating speed of TRM is adopted to be 400 km/h and the seating
capacity of a train (the longest version) 332 seats. The typical operating speed of
APT is assumed to be 600 km/h and the seating capacity 167 seats (A320-200
aircraft) (CEC 1995; Ellwagner and Wilckens 1994; Geerlings 1998; ITA 1991;
Kertzscmar 1995; MVP 1994; Witt 1995).
• ‘‘Investments’’ are expressed in M€/km of the infrastructure represented by HSR
lines, TRM guideways, and airport runway(s). For HSR, this is determined by
dividing the total cost of building and upgrading the HSR network in Europe by
the total network length (CEC 1995). For TRM, this is estimated by using data
for the Berlin-Hamburg line (Witt 1995). In order to obtain comparable esti-
mates, in the case of APT, the total investments of 25,000 M€ intended to
improve the existing and build new airport and air traffic control capacity during
the 1994–2000 period are allocated to the total length of runways at 437 airports
in EU (European Union) Member States (CEC 1994b).
• ‘‘Rate of return on investments’’ represents one of the measures of investment
effectiveness where the pure ‘‘Economics Analysis Technique’’ is applied.
Essentially, it expresses the gains on the invested capital expressed in percents. This
time, this is used as a single attribute (criteria). For the HSR, this is estimated for the
entire network (CEC 1995), for TRM for the line Hamburg-Berlin (Witt 1995), and
for APT for the airport and air traffic control infrastructure (Doganis 1992).
• ‘‘Social-welfare’’ is estimated in terms of the newly generated jobs per km of
infrastructure, i.e., for the entire HSR network, single line of TRM, and 437
APT airports in the EU. In the latest case, the jobs at airports, air traffic control,
airlines, and supporting airspace industry are taken into account (CEC 1994a;
CEC 1995; Doganis 1992; Witt 1995).
• ‘‘Energy consumption’’ is estimated for typical operating conditions of partic-

ular HS systems. In case of HSR and TRM, the energy consumption increases in
line with the operating speed and is constant as the travel distance and train
seating capacity increase. The values in Table 5.4 correspond to operating
speeds between 200–320 and 400 km/h for HSR and TRM, respectively. The
energy/fuel consumption of APT decreases as the nonstop travel distance
increases. Also, it varies with changes of the aircraft seating capacity. Typical
values for A320-200 aircraft flying on routes of between 300 and 800 km are
considered (ITA 1991; Geerlings 1998).
• ‘‘Emissions of GHG’’ are expressed by the total amount of GHG emitted per
seat-km during the specified period of time. The GHG considered are: CO, NOx,
SO2, CH, and CO2 (the share of CO2 is about 98.8 % in the total). In the case of
HSR and TRM, these amounts are estimated as generated from the primary
sources for obtaining electric energy in the EU15 Member States, while in the
case of APT, the average emissions of GHG are estimated for A320-200 aircraft
operating at speeds of about 500–600 km/h.
• ‘‘Land-use’’ is estimated per kilometer of HSR (tracks), TRM (guideways), and
APT (airport runways) infrastructure. As given, this attribute should be taken
with caution since the absolute values of land use (requirements) for the entire
HSR and TRM networks and airports can show quite different relationships
(ATAG 1996; CEC 1993b; Witt 1995).
• ‘‘Noise’’ is estimated for the typical operating conditions of HSR (200–300 km/
h) and TRM (200–400 km/h) (Geerlings 1998; Kertzshmar 1995; Levison et al.
1996). In the case of APT, the ICAO noise certification limits for aircraft of
different weights while taking-off, landing and at the side line are considered
(ATAG 1996).
• ‘‘Congestion’’ is expressed by the ‘‘average delay’’ of service operated by each
HS transport system. It is adopted to be 1 min for HSR and TRM. In the case of
APT it is calculated based on the prevailing demand/capacity ratio of forty EU
airports (CEC 1994b).
Results
Two rankings of the three above-mentioned HS transport systems are carried out
using the inputs in Table 5.4. The first produces the preferable alternative with
respect to all 15 criteria, while the second produces the preferable alternative with
respect to the specific set of criteria.
• The preferred HS transport alternative respecting all criteria the normalized
decision matrix is constructed as the initial step in selecting the preferable HS
alternative (Eq. 5.5a) and weights are assigned to particular criteria by using the
entropy method (Eq. 5.4) their values are given in Table 5.5. By comparing the
values in Tables 5.4 and 5.5, it can be seen that the highest weights are assigned
to the attributes/criteria with the greatest difference in absolute values, which
emphasizes their relative importance for the dm (decision maker(s)). For
example, the ‘‘most important’’ criteria appear to be: (1) ‘‘safety’’, (2) ‘‘social
Table 5.5 Normalized decision matrix and weights for particular criteria (Janic 2003)
Criterion Normalized value/alternative Weight Rank
A1-HSR A2-TRM A3-APT
1. Local accessibility 0.090 0.090 0.990 0.132 4
2. Generalized travel cost 0.552 0.754 0.355 0.011 10
3. In-vehicle comfort and convenience 0.485 0.485 0.728 0.005 12
4. Safety 0.0003 0.000 0.999 0.271 1
5. Operating costs 0.383 0.773 0.550 0.011 11
6. Operating revenues 0.392 0.835 0.386 0.018 8
7. Technical productivity 0.510 0.687 0.518 0.002 14
8. Investments 0.318 0.675 0.666 0.012 9
9. Rate of return of investments 0.632 0.623 0.461 0.002 13
10. Social welfare 0.078 0.019 0.997 0.200 2
11. Energy consumption 0.224 0.585 0.760 0.026 7
12. Emissions of GHG 0.265 0.216 0.940 0.056 6
13. Land use 0.211 0.075 0.975 0.107 5
14. Noise 0.650 0.591 0.478 0.002 15
15. Congestion 0.012 0.012 0.143 0.144 3
Table 5.6 Ranks of the HS Alternative Proximity to the ideal solution Ciz Rank
passenger transport system
alternatives (Janic 2003) HSR 0.644 1
TRM 0.632 2
APT 0.358 3
welfare’’, (3) ‘‘congestion’’, (4) ‘‘local accessibility’’, and (5) ‘‘land-use’’.

The ideal and the negative-deal solution and the separate measures are calcu-
lated by applying Eq. 5.5b–5.5e to the values in Table 5.5. Then, the relative
closeness to the ideal solution is determined using Eq. 5.5f. The results are
presented in Table 5.6.
Consequently, the alternatives are ranked according to descending order of Ciz .
As can be seen, HSR emerges as the preferred in comparison to the other two
alternatives (TRM and APT). However, as compared to APT, TRM is very close
to HSR.
• The preferred HS transport alternative respecting the specific attributes/criteria
From the methodological perspective, selection of the preferred HS transport
system alternative respecting the specific set of criteria of their performances
represents a sensitivity analysis of outputs with respect to changes of inputs, i.e.,
the number and type of criteria involved in ranking the alternatives. According
to the importance of particular criteria for particular interest groups, the fol-
lowing four cases are elaborated:
– Criteria such as ‘‘accessibility,’’ ‘‘generalized travel cost,’’ ‘‘in-vehicle com-

fort and convenience,’’ and ‘‘safety’’ relevant for users/passengers and com-
munity members while acting as users of HS systems;
Table 5.7 Sensitivity analysis in ranking the HS passenger transport system alternatives (Janic
2003)
Case/criteria Rank/(Ciz )
A1-HSR A2- TRM A3-APT
Case 1/(1, 2, 3, 4) 1/0.980 2/0.955 3/0.450
Case 2/(5, 6, 7), 2/0.342 1/0.611 3/0.234
Case 3/(8, 9, 10, 11) 1/0.095 3/0.026 2/0.073
Case 4/(12, 13, 14, 15) 2/0.955 1/0.999 3/0.009
Ciz —‘‘Closeness’’ to the ideal solution
– Criteria such as ‘‘technical productivity,’’ ‘‘operating costs’’, and ‘‘operating

revenues’’ relevant for transport operators;
– Criteria such as ‘‘investments,’’ ‘‘rate of return on investments,’’ ‘‘social
welfare,’’ and ‘‘energy consumption’’ relevant for the governmental, public,
semipublic, and private institutional and financial authorities and bodies; and
– Criteria representing externalities of particular HS systems such as ‘‘emissions
of GHG’’, ‘‘land use,’’ ‘‘noise,’’ and ‘‘congestion’’ mainly relevant for the local
and central governmental authorities, and local community members.
The results of these subevaluations are given in Table 5.7.
In the first and third case in Table 5.7, HSR emerges as the preferred alternative
in comparison to TRM and APT systems. TRM appears the preferable alternative
in the second case. APT is the least preferred alternative in the first, second, and
fourth case. The score indicates that HSR is a favorable alternative for users/
passengers, governmental authorities at both local (regional), national, and inter-
national level, as well as for potential investors. Transport operators, local and
central governmental authorities, and local community members, who are mostly
interested in externalities, favor TRM. However, this alternative appears to be the
least preferable for governmental authorities and investors due to its very high
investment costs and a rather low contribution to social welfare as compared to the
other two alternatives. Nevertheless, this last consequence should be viewed with
caution since only the social effects of a single TRM line have been considered
rather than those of a developed network.
The above-mentioned scores again confirm that rail-based HS systems are
competitive alternatives to APT systems in short- to medium-haul high-density
transport corridors/markets. The variations of preferences across the specific sets
of criteria indicate why the attitudes of different interest groups must be respected
in the DM process, particularly those related to the development of very important
HS projects. In addition, the sensitivity analysis reveals the high sensitivity of
outputs to changes of inputs. This may highlight the problem of selecting the
number, type, and indicators of performances to be included as attributes/criteria
in the DM procedure. Furthermore, in addition to application of analytical tools for
weighting attributes/criteria, the subjective judgments of representatives/experts of
different interest groups need always to be taken into account if at all possible.
5.2.2 Evaluation
The HS (High Speed) passenger transport systems—APT (Air Passenger Trans-

port), HSR (High-Speed Rail), and TRM (TransRapid MAGLEV)—and the
methodology for their ranking as alternatives possess both advantages (Strengths
and Opportunities) and disadvantages (Weaknesses and Threats).
Advantages and disadvantages

HS systems
• HSR has emerged as the preferable alternative as compared to both TRM and
APT with respect to the selected 15 ranking criteria;
• Users/passengers, policy makers, and investors prefer HSR under the given
circumstances;
• TRM appears as the preferable alternative of policy makers and community
members, both actors/interest groups primarily interested in transport exter-
nalities; and
• APT appears as the least preferable alternative for virtually all actors and
interest groups.
The multicriteria ranking methodology

• Enables ranking of predetermined transport alternatives (both existing and
planned) while respecting the many often conflicting objectives by using attri-
butes/criteria of performances of particular HS systems quantified for the given
(assumed) traffic scenario(s);
• Ensures flexibility in including additional indicators of performances as attri-
butes/criteria in the ranking procedure of existing and completely new HS
system(s) (still at the conceptual level);
• Can be efficiently and effectively used by particular actors and interest groups
involved in the DM process by enabling easier articulating, more transparently
presenting, and more exactly quantifying the relevant attributes/criteria of the
performances of HS transport alternatives;
• Enables relatively easy verification of the consistency of assigning weights to
attributes/criteria including subjective judgments, thus mitigating or completely
avoiding some irrational, time-consuming and unexpected activities and out-
comes from the DM process; and
• Seems to be the preferable methodology compared to the conventional EAT
(Economic Analysis Technique(s)), thus contributing to more efficient and
effective DM (Decision Making) process relating to the further development and
commercialization of HS passenger transport systems.
Finally, it can be said that HS passenger transport systems can be viewed as
advanced with respect to all their performances taken into account in their mul-
ticriteria ranking as mutually substitutable alternatives.
References 275
References
Alstom (2008). AGV-a cutting-edge technology integrator. Berlin, Germany: Alstom Transport
Europe, INNOTRANS-BERLIN.
ATAG. (1996). Aviation and environment. Geneva, Switzerland: Air Transport Action Group.
BBVA. (2009). Economic analysis of high speed rail in Europe. Bilbao, Spain: BBVA Foundation.
BCG. (2004). Airports-dawn of new era: Preparing for one of the industry’s biggest shake- ups.
Munich, Germany: Boston Consultancy Group.
Bianco, L., & DiMajo, D. (1991). Perspectives of high-speed rail transport in short-medium
period. Transportation Research-A, 25A, 193–202.
Boeing (1998). Evolution of the world fleet: Time line. Boeing Aircraft Company. http://www.
boeing.com.
CAA (2011) UK airports market-general context, working paper. London, UK: Airport Market
Power Assessment, Civil Aviation Authority.
CEC. (1993a). European high-speed rail network: Socio-economic impact study. Commission of
the European Communities, Directorate General for Transport, Final Report, Brussels,
Belgium.
CEC. (1993b). The European high-speed train network: Environmental impact assessment.
Executive Summary, Commission of the European Communities, Directorate General for
Transport, Brussels, Belgium.
CEC. (1994a). Expanding Horizons, A report by Comite de Sages for air transport to the
European Commission. Brussels, Belgium: Directorate General for Transport.
CEC. (1994b). Progress report on the guidelines for the Trans-European airport network.
Brussels, Belgium: Commission of the European Communities.
CEC. (1995). High-speed Europe, high level group. The European high speed train network.
Brussels, Belgium: Commission of the European Communities.
Corrie, S. J. (1994). Potential growth in air travel demands renewed effort to improve safety
record (pp. 7–9). Montreal, Canada: ICAO Journal.
Doganis, R. (1992). The airport business. London, UK: Routledge.
EASA. (2011). Type-certificate data sheet for noise A380, TCDSN EASA, Issue 6. Koln,
Germany: European Aviation Safety Agency.
EC. (1998a). Integrated strategic infrastructure networks in Europe. Final Report on the Action
COST 328, EUR 18165, European Commission, Luxembourg.
EC. (1998b). Relationships between high-speed rail and air passenger transport. Final Report on
the Action COST 318, EUR 18165, European Commission, Luxembourg.
EC. (2003). Analysis of the European transport industry. European Commission—DG TREN,
Final Report, Brussels, Belgium.
EC. (2010). High speed Europe: A sustainable link between Citizens. Luxembourg: European
Commission.
EC. (2012). EU transport in figures: Statistical pocketbook 2012. Luxembourg: European
Commission.
Ellwagner, G., Wilckens, M. (1994). European high-speed transport: A service with a future.
International 33, 2–12.
FAA. (1997). Noise level for U.S. certified and foreign aircraft. Washington, USA: AEE-
110Federal Aviation Administration, U.S. Department of Transportation.
Geerlings, H. (1998). The Rise and Fall of new technologies: MAGLEV as technological
substitution? Transportation Planning and Technology, 21, 263–286.
Giuliano, G. (1985). A multicriteria method for transportation investment planning. Transpor-
tation Research-A, 19A(1), 29–41.
GAO. (2004). Airline financial conditions. Report, The US Government Accountability Office
(GAO), Report, Washington DC, USA
Haimes, Y. Y. (1985). Multiple-criteria decision-making: A retrospective analysis. IEEE
Transactions on Systems, Man, and Cybernetics, 15(3), 313–315.
He, J. L., Rote, D. M., & Coffey, H. T. (1992). Survey of Foreign maglev systems. Argonne,
Illinois, USA: Center for Transportation Research, Energy Systems Division, Argonne
National Laboratory.
Horonjeff, R., & McKelvey, F. X. (1994). Planning and design of airports (4th ed.). New York,
USA: McGraw- Hill Book Company.
Hwang, L. C., & Yoon, K. (1981). Multi attribute decision-making: A methods and applications.
Lecture series in economics and mathematical systems. Berlin, Germany: Springer.
ITA. (1991). Rail/air complementarity in Europe: The impact of high-speed rail services. Paris,
France: Institute du Transport Aèrien.
Janic, M. (1993). A model of competition between high-speed rail and air transport.
Transportation Planning and Technology, 17, 1–23.
Janic, M. (2003). Multiple criteria evaluation of high speed rail, transrapid maglev, and air passenger
transport systems in Europe. Transportation Planning and Technology, 26(6), 491–512.
Janic, M. (2007). The sustainability of air transportation: A quantitative analysis and assessment.
Aldershot, England: Ashgate Publishing Limited.
Kertzschmar, R. (1995). Transrapid maglev: Prospects for fast regional transportation service.
Paper presented at the 1st European workshop on high speed maglev transport system:
European prospects. Padua, Italy: University of Padua.
Levison, D., Gillian, D., Kanafani, A., & Mathieu, J. M. (1996). The full cost of inter-city
transportation—A comparison of high speed rail, air and highway transportation in
California. Institute of Transportation, Research Report, UCB-ITS-RR-96-3. Berkeley, USA:
University of California.
Lukaszevicz, P., & Anderson, E. (2009). Green train energy consumption: Estimation on high-
speed rail operations. Stocholm, Sweeden: KTH Engineering Science, KTH Railway Group.
Lufthansa. (1996). Timetable. Frankfurt, Germany.
Manheim, M. L. (1979). Fundamentals of transportation system analysis (Vol. 1: Basic
concepts). Cambridge, Massachusetts, USA: The MIT Press.
MVP. (1994). Riding of flying? TRANSRAPID and its links with the car, railway and aircraft.
Germany: Versuchs-und Plannungsgesellschaft fur Magnetbahnsysteme MbH.
Powell, J., & Dunby, G. (2007). Maglev: Transport mode for 21st century (pp. 44–55). Science
and Technology: EIR.
Shibo, S. (2008). Dynamic simulation of the maglev guideway design. MSc Thesis, Faculty of
Civil Engineering and Geosciences, Delft University of Technology, Delft, The Netherlands.
Speling, D. (1984). Assessment of technological choices using a pathway methodology.
Transportation Research-A, 18A(4), 343–353.
SNCF. (1996). Timetable-TGV/Thalys. Paris, France.
Tabucanon, T. M., & Mo Lee, H. (1995). Multiple criteria evaluation of transport system
improvements. Journal of Advanced Transportation, 29(1), 127–143.
TIG. (2012). High tech for flying on the ground. Berlin, Germany: Transrapid International
GmbH & Co.
UIC. (2011). High speed rail and sustainability. Report, International Union of Railways, Paris,
France
USDT. (2012). National transport statistics. U.S. Department of Transportation Research and
Innovative Technology Administration Bureau of Transportation Statistics, Washington DC, USA.
Vuchic, R. V. (2007). Urban transit: Systems and technology. Hoboken, New Jersey, USA: Willey.
Witt, M. (1995). The transrapid system and the Hamburg-Berlin connection, the 1st European
workshop on high-speed maglev transport systems: European prospects. Padua, Italy:
University of Padua.
Chapter 6
Future Concepts
6.1 Introduction
This chapter describes five concepts of future advanced transport systems: (i) PRT
(Personal Rapid Transit) systems; (ii) UFT (Underground Freight Transport)
systems; (iii) ETT (Evacuated Tube Transport) system; (iv) advanced ATC (Air
Traffic Control) technologies and procedures for increasing airport runway
capacity; and (v) advanced STA (Supersonic Transport Aircraft).
• PRT (Personal Rapid Transit) systems were elaborated in the 1970s and com-
mercialized in the 2010s. They are a fully automated transit systems consisting
of dedicated aboveground guideways enabling movement of small passenger
car-like vehicles, i.e., capsules. As such, PRT systems are expected to offer
competitive—efficient and effective—transit services by substantially replacing
conventional passenger cars, motor- and trolleybuses, and LRT (Light Rail
Transit) systems in urban and/or suburban areas. At the same time, PRT will
contribute to mitigating the overall impacts of urban transit systems on the
environment and society in terms of energy consumption and related emissions
of GHG (Green House Gases), land use/take, noise, congestion, and traffic
incidents/accidents. PRT commercialization is shown to be a rather gradual
process mainly due to the high investment costs starting in some niche markets;
• UFT (Underground Freight Transport) systems were elaborated for the first time
in the 1970s but particularly in the 1990s and 2000s. They are fully automated
systems for moving freight/goods shipments of different sizes such as standard
pallets, containers, and/or swap bodies along a network of underground pipes/
tunnels. Shipments are loaded onto dedicated vehicles/capsules. Underground
pipes/tunnels connect different freight/goods origins and destinations in a given
urban or suburban area including large intermodal transport nodes such as ports,
airports, and inland freight terminals. UFT systems are expected to substantially
replace road trucks in congested urban areas and consequently mitigate their

278 6 Advanced Transport Systems: Future Concepts
impacts on the environment and society. The commercialization of any kind of

UFT system is still under consideration due to the high investment costs related
to building underground pipes/tunnels.
• Evacuated Tube Transport system was elaborated for the first time in the 1970s,
but remained at that stage until recently (Salter 1972). This system is used to
transport passengers and freight/goods along long-haul (intercontinental) dis-
tances by TRM (TRansRapid MAGLEV) trains running through pipes located
below the ocean’s floor at supersonic speed.1 The EET system’s eventual full
commercialization will likely be the matter of discussion and decisions in the
forthcoming decades since if the decision is taken to design such a system, this
will certainly not be earlier than around the 2050s or latter. The main issues still
to be resolved are choosing the design of infrastructure (pipes) and proving the
system’s economic feasibility, mainly due to the very high investment cost for
building the infrastructure (underwater pipes);
• Advanced ATC (Air Traffic Control) technologies and procedures for increasing
the airport runway capacity are currently under development in the scope of the
U.S. FAA NextGen (Next Generation Air Transport System) and European-
EUROCONTROL SESAR (Single European Sky ATM Research) programs
(EC 2007; FAA 2010). The advanced procedures supported by these technol-
ogies imply the application of ATC mixed horizontal/vertical, exclusively
vertical distance-based, and time-based separation rules instead of the current
horizontal distance-based separation rules between landing aircraft. In parallel,
ATC can alternatively apply the existing FCFS (First Come First Served) and
the advanced PR (Priority) service discipline for landings on a single runway. In
addition to maintaining the required level of safety, these advanced technologies
and procedures are expected to increase the airport runway system capacity
without requiring new land for expanding the infrastructure, i.e., building new
runway(s) (LHR 2010). The full commercialization of these technologies and
procedures is the matter of a decade or so, i.e., by the year 2020/2025; and
• STA (Supersonic Transport Aircraft) were already in commercial operation as
the French-British Concorde and Soviet Union’s TY144 supersonic aircraft. Still
being at the conceptual level, the aircraft is supposed to operate at speeds higher
than Mach 2.0. Their full commercialization is likely to occur in about two to
three forthcoming decades (2030/2040). This is because, at present, the main
aircraft manufacturers Airbus and Boeing, and other agencies and institutions
dealing with the visions of development of the commercial air transport system
do not explicitly consider such developments to occur earlier than around 2030
(ACARE 2010; Airbus 2012; Boeing 2012).
1
The supersonic speed is greater than the speed of sound, which depends on the air ambient
temperature. For example, at the sea level with standard temperature of 15 C, it is 1,225 km/h; at
the cruising altitudes of most commercial jets and supersonic aircraft of 11,000–20,000 m with
temperature of -57 C, it is 1,062 km/h.
6.2 Personal Rapid Transit Systems 279
6.2 Personal Rapid Transit Systems
1972/1975 The WVU PRT Morgantown system begins operations (U.S.)

2001 The first self-balancing PRT (Personal Rapid Transit) system (Segway PT) is
launched (U.S.)
2011 The PRT ULTra (Urban Light Transit) system begins operations at London
Heathrow airport (UK)
One of the most dominant social-economic trends during the twentieth century has
been urbanization characterized by growing cities and the consequent increase in
proportion of the urbanized population. This has reached about three billion, i.e.,
about 47 % of the total global population in the year 2000. The current and future
trends indicate that about 6 billion or two-thirds of the world’s population are likely
to live in the urban areas by the year 2050. In parallel, the urban mobility problems
in terms of provision of sufficient transit capacity, emissions of GHG (Green House
Gases), land use, congestion, and noise have been increasing and becoming more
complex. This has often required adaptation of the growing urban forms and
structures to the requirements of existing individual and mass urban transit systems,
and vice versa (Rodrigue et al. 2006). These urban transit systems referred to here
as conventional are considered to be bikes, motorbikes, individual passenger cars,
taxis, motor buses, and trolleybuses (including BRT (see Chap. 2)), trams, and LRT
(Light Rail Transit) system(s). Future urban developments will certainly require the
commercialization of advanced urban transit systems in order to support the
above-mentioned conventional ones and satisfy growing demand for urban mobility
more efficiently, effectively, environmentally friendly, and safely. Some of these
systems/concepts are: (i) ADAS (Advanced Driver Assistance System) for indi-
vidual passenger cars; (ii) PRT (Personal Rapid Transit) system; (iii) Advanced bus
systems; and CTS (Cybernetic Transport Systems) with the ‘‘road-based people
movers’’ and ‘‘advanced car sharing’’ subsystems (EC 2007).
Specifically, PRT (Personal Rapid Transit) as urban transport systems offer a
potential solution for mitigating urban congestion and improving travel accessi-
bility. It is designed for use in a variety of cases aiming at replacing mainly
individual passenger cars and urban motor buses and trolleybuses as:
• An exclusive urban and/or suburban transit system;
• A system feeding other mass urban and suburban transit systems (conventional
buses, BRT, LRT, metro);
• An airport ground access system/mode complementing to the existing ones;
• An inter-airport transit system connecting airports belonging to the same airport
system (for example, New York and/or London airports);
• An intra-airport transit system at a large airport connecting distant structures

such as terminals (the satellite concept) to long-stand parking areas, and vice
versa; and
• An exclusive system operating in campus environment such as universities and
self-contained business/entertainment parks.
The PRT systems consist of fully automatized small driverless vehicles trans-
porting an individual or small group(s) (typically 1–6) persons along dedicated
guideways. These can be elevated, at ground level, and underground. The transit
services, available on demand rather than according to a fixed schedule over most
or all of the day are provided between particular origins and destinations without
stops at intervening stations, i.e., without the need to transfer. The PRT systems
can be implemented as a single- and dual-mode systems. The most well-known
single-mode PRT systems in the U.S. are the earliest WVU PRT Morgantown
(1972/1975), Raytheon PRT2000 (1995), and Taxi 2000 HCPRT (High-Capacity
Personal Rapid Transit) (2003). In Europe, the most well-known systems include
the UK ULTra and Dutch 2getThere PRT systems. The most well-known dual-
mode PRT system is Denmark’s RUF (Rapid Urban Flexible) Intelligent Auto/
Transit concept. This system is designed to operate PRT vehicles both automati-
cally and manually. The main element of the RUF system is dedicated guideways
for the automatic portion of each trip. The system uses small- and medium-sized
intelligent electric vehicles, which can move along conventional roads/streets as
well as along the automated rail network. Small vehicles with a capacity of 2–4
persons could be in the public or individual private ownership and as such in the
latter case parked at the individual’s residence and/or workplace. Larger vehicles
with a capacity of 10 persons are usually publically owned and parked at the public
parking areas similarly to small buses. As such, the concept brings together the
convenience of the individual passenger car and the efficiency of urban railways.
While operating on roads/streets in manual mode, the vehicles are powered by the
electricity from the on-board batteries enabling an average range of about 50 km.
While operating in automated mode, the vehicles are powered by electricity
obtained from the rail electricity supply system, enabling relatively high operating
speeds over longer distances. Such smart integration of operating modes enables
the concept/system to offer users/passengers efficient and effective connection
between numerous origins and destinations within and through large, dense, and
congested urban agglomerations. Consequently, fully automated computer-con-
trolled operations enable traveling free of congestion and potential incidents/
accidents (RUF 2008).
To date, three PRT systems have been commercialized: the WVU (West
Virginia University) PRT system (designed by Boeing) started operation during the
1972/1975 period; the partially commercialized Cybercab PRT system of the Dutch
manufacturer 2getThere operating in Masdar City (Abu Dhabi) started operation in
2010; and the ULTra (Urban Light Transit) system commenced operation at
London Heathrow airport (London, UK) in May 2011. The forth, the Vectus PRT
system of the Swedish/Korean manufacturer Vectus is planned to start operation in

2013 in Suncheon Bay (South Korea) (EC 2007; http://www.advancedtransit.org).
In addition, the ULTra system yet to be commercialized in Amristar (Punjab, India)
in 2014 will be the world’s first and largest actually urban PRT system. The length
of its network is planned to be 8.0 km with seven stations accommodating 240
vehicles expected to serve peak demand of up to 100,000 passengers/day. This
completely privately financed system is expected to bring savings in the current
journey time of up to about 30 min (http://www.advancedtransit.org). Furthermore,
some prototypes of PRT systems such as the LINT PRT system by the manufacturer
Modutram (Mexico), the Microrail PRT/Dual Mode system by the manufacturer
Megarail Transportation Systems (US), and the Skyweb Express PRT system by the
manufacturer Taxi 2000 (US) have been operationalized to the level of test track.
6.2.2.1 Background
The generic characteristics of a PRT system are as follows: automatically guided

high-pressure rubber tire or steel wheel vehicles with a capacity of 1–6 persons
move along exclusive/dedicated concrete steel elevated guideways at relatively
high speed for the given (urban) conditions. The vehicles are powered by an
electric motor propulsion system controlled by microprocessors, making them
reliable, less energy consuming and air polluting, and less noisy, all as compared
to individual cars and other urban mass transit systems. The small and relatively
light vehicles allow for lighter and consequently less costly guideways. Nonstop
services are provided thanks to using off-line stations, which are closely spaced in
the network of interconnected guideways, thus eliminating the need for passengers
transferring between lines. At stations, a few empty vehicles usually wait (simi-
larly as at taxi stations) to be picked up by users/passengers. First, passengers need
to select their itinerary, buy their ticket, and pass the information from the ticket to
the vehicle’s control system. Then, after the vehicle’s door opens they board the
vehicle, the door closes, and the computer control system opens a path to the
vehicle. Then, the vehicle accelerates and joins other vehicles passing through a
given station, and then forward toward the destination. The elevated configuration
of guideways reduces the required land only to that needed for setting up posts and
stations (Anderson 2000, 2005, 2007).
Similarly as the other advanced transport systems, a given PRT system can be
characterized by its infrastructural, technical/technological, operational, economic,
environmental, social, and policy performances, all of which are further analyzed
and modeled.
Vehicle(s)
Guideway
Concrete cellar pod
Fig. 6.1 Scheme of the PRT system
The infrastructural performances of a given PRT system refer to its design,

geometry, and material of guideways; spatial layout and coverage of the network;
layout, configuration, and number of stations; and switching.
Guideways
The PRT system guideway(s) as an elevated construction(s) usually with top-
mounted vehicles gives the visual impression shown in Fig. 6.1. A typical PRT
guideway is a U-shaped configuration made of concrete laying on a concrete and/
or steel/concrete construction. This construction is supported by pods (solid pil-
lars) located at certain distances, thus enabling the relatively uniform distribution
of its own weight and the weight of moving vehicles. The cross-section of the
U-shape guideway with vehicles determines the square-shaped vehicle dynamic
envelope with a height of about 3 m (from the top of a vehicle to the bottom of the
guideway aerial structure) and a width of about 5 m for the two-track guideway(s)
shown in Fig. 6.2. The height of the pods (solid pillars) from the ground can vary
depending on the roadway and/or pedestrian way clearance requirements.
The guideways are also designed with respect to stress (bending and torsion,
natural frequency and critical speed) and passenger ride comfort, generally with or
without walkways, and with many curves and elevations. Both horizontal and
vertical curves need to be designed to provide for the riding comfort of seating
passengers according to the standards for the lateral and normal acceleration and
jerk of about 0.25 g and 0.25 g/s, respectively. In some cases, covers made of
composite materials and a thin aluminum layer inside are attached to the sides of
App. 3m
0.45m
App. 5m
Fig. 6.2 Scheme of the vehicle dynamic envelope for the two-track guideway PRT system
the guideway in order to protect the tracks and tires from extreme weather (frost
during cold nights, the accumulation of snow, and solar heating during the sum-
mer), and in some cases, from electromagnetism (Anderson 2007).
Network
The PRT network consists of guideways. Its spatial layout is usually adjusted to
the spatial density of user/passenger demand. The network can consist of a single
line connecting a given origin and destination (for example in the case of airport
access or internal transit systems), a small-scale network of lines feeding other
urban mass transport systems such as BRT, LRT, and/or metro, and a larger scale
network operating in a given urban complex as an independent and/or exclusive
public transport mode. In most cases, network development usually begins by
building a single guideway and then gradually expanding by adding new ones
through adapting to transport needs. Figure 6.3 shows a simplified layout of an
exclusive PRT network.
Stations
PRT system stations are designed as off-line guideways located usually between
intersections of guideways at distances of about 800 m, or shorter or longer
depending on the spatial distribution of user/passenger demand. In the vertical
plane, the stations are designed as elevated platforms leveled to the elevated
guideways and standing either alone or incorporated into other existing urban
Urban area
International airport
PRT line
Building
/station
Car
parking
Fig. 6.3 Scheme of the prospective fully developed PRT network (Masdar City—Abu Dhabi)
(http://www.advancedtransit.org)
structures. The length of an off-line station can be, depending on the vehicle’s
operating speed, about 33–39 m, thus providing safe maneuvering space and
berths for about 3–5, and, if needed, after extension for up to 12–14 vehicles.
Additional berths are also needed for vehicles waiting due to any reason—for
example, while vacant during off-peak hours, maintenance, or when all tracks are
occupied. Since the passengers are supposed to spend only a short while at the
stations during boarding and disembarking the vehicles, the intended space is
relatively small, thus reducing the construction costs, and mitigating the visual
impacts and crowd-related (social) problems. Such off-line stations enable con-
tinuous vehicle movement, thus maximizing the transit speed and minimizing the
transit time, while enhancing riding comfort. In addition, stations also provide
good spatial accessibility (Anderson 2007).
Switching
Switching is an important component of the PRT infrastructure. At present,
switching is based on mechanical back up. In such cases, switches have two stable
positions, are self-stable, and can be thrown manually if required. They are
unaffected by centrifugal forces, operable under all weather conditions, and
powered by low-voltage batteries.
The technical/technological performances of a given PRT system relate to its

vehicles (cars), the system for controlling their movement, and the system for
interaction with users/passengers.
Vehicles
The PRT vehicles, designed as small, light, and short as possible—typically 2.7 m
long and 1.65 wide, are usually placed above the guideway(s). Each vehicle
consists of three parts: a passenger cab, a bogie for interface with the guideway,
and a propulsion system. The typical capacity of the passenger cab is four persons
plus two children (and their baggage between the seats) including space for
wheelchairs, bikes, etc. The bogie has rubber-tired or steel wheels, thus guaran-
teeing efficient and effective braking at an acceptable noise level. The propulsion
system is usually an LEM (Linear Electric Motor) (LSM—Synchronous or LIM—
Induction) powered by electricity from on-board batteries or from an external
electricity supply system, and controlled by computer microprocessor. Either lead–
acid or lithium iron phosphate batteries can be used. The LEM enables weather-
independent acceleration and braking, and a reaction and breaking time of a few
milliseconds, each as compared to that of humans—0.3–1.7 s, and that of
mechanical brakes of 0.5 s, respectively.
The operating speed of vehicles can vary between 30 and 80 km/h depending
on the type of PRT system, and the location, geometry, and topography of
guideways (the elevation change can be up to 15 % along the distance of 9.0 m).
The vehicle movement control system
The control of vehicles while operating along the guideway is carried out by a
fully automated centralized dual-redundant computer system providing high
dependability and safety. The control function is set up hierarchically at three
levels: (i) vehicle control; (ii) zone control; and (iii) central control. The vehicle
control system generally generates the intended routes/paths for each vehicle
boarded by an individual and/or group of users/passengers between their intended
origins and destinations, and accelerates/decelerates, monitors, and controls the
operating speeds and headways between the vehicles. This implies that each
vehicle follows the assigned/commanded trajectory. The zone control system
enables each vehicle to communicate with the zone’s computer controller. Each
vehicle transmits information about its position and speed to this controller
through the cable in the guideway, and the controller responds back with the
maneuvering commands, both in milliseconds. In addition, the merge-zone-control
computer receives and maintains information about the current position and speed
of all vehicles within a given merging zone, and resolves any potential merging
conflicts by sending the relevant maneuvering commands to the vehicles involved.
The central control system comprised of the central computer controlling the
computers at the other two lower hierarchal levels.
The user/passenger interaction system
The system for interaction of a given PRT system with its users/passengers gen-
erally consists of: (i) the information and communication subsystem; and (ii) the
fare collection subsystem.
Table 6.1 The subsystem for informing and communicating within a given PRT system
Component Function
Touch Screen, automated interactive display and audio Information
CCTV, intercom, emergency assistance request button Communications initiation
2-way audio intercom and CCTV monitoring Communications
Application dependent Destination selection
CCTV, intercom, operator Emergency response
Facility for ride sharing Yes
The information and communication subsystem

The components and functions of the subsystem for informing and communicating
at both vehicles and berths/stations are given in the self-explanatory Table 6.1.
The fare collection subsystem
The subsystem for collecting fares consists of ticketing machines located at the
stations/berths. After selecting the destination and paying by an available means
(cash, credit, debit card), the user receives a magnetically encoded card. Then, he/
she takes the ticket and goes to the boarding platform where the ticket is passed
through the stanchion in front of an available (empty) vehicle. Then, the infor-
mation about the travel itinerary is transferred to the microprocessor on-board the
vehicle. The door opens, the vehicle is boarded, the door closes, and the zone and
then the central computer, based on the information received from the given
vehicle, generates and then opens the route/path for the vehicle depending on the
surrounding traffic. The nonstop transit to the intended destination begins. There,
after the vehicle’s door opens automatically, the passenger leaves the vehicle.
The operational performances of PRT systems include demand, capacity, service

quality, fleet size, and technical productivity.
Demand
The PRT system is designed to replace individual passenger cars, particularly in
congested urban areas. Therefore, the primary category of users are passengers
abandoning their cars and those using the system for the first time instead of their
cars. Some research has indicated that the proportion of car users switching to the
PRT system could be up to 30 %. In addition, switching from other urban transit
modes could also be expected, but the more exact volumes remain the matter of
further investigation on a case by case basis. The PRT system’s services are
supposed to be equally and fairly available to all categories of individuals or small
groups users/urban passengers regarding their gender, social category, trip pur-
pose, and current mode choice.
Capacity
The capacity of a given PRT system generally includes the capacity of vehicles,
lines, and stations. The vehicle capacity is expressed by the number of spaces for
users-passengers. The capacity of lines and stations can be expressed by the traffic
capacity and the transport/transit capacity. The former reflects the number of
vehicles and the latter the number of users-passengers handled and transported,
respectively, during the specified period of time (usually 1 h) under conditions of
constant demand for service.
The traffic capacity of a given PRT system’s line can be estimated as follows:
Ktraffic ¼ T=h ð6:1aÞ
where
T is the period of time (minute, hour); and
h is the minimum headway (seconds, minutes).
From Eq. 6.1a, the transport/transit capacity of the same PRT line can be
Ktransport=transit ¼ Ktraffic k n ð6:1bÞ
where
k is the average vehicle’s load factor or occupancy rate; and
n is the number of spaces for users/passengers on a vehicle (pass/veh).
The capacity of a PRT system station can be static and dynamic. Its static
capacity can be expressed by the required number of berths simultaneously used
by PRT vehicles as follows:
N s ¼ Ks s þ Nw ð6:1cÞ
where
Ks is the intensity of demand for using berths at a given station;
s is the average occupancy (i.e., dwell) time of a berth at a given station by an
active (operating) vehicle; and
Nw is the number of berths for vehicles waiting to be called.

The dynamic capacity or throughput of a given station is expressed by the
number of vehicles processed during a given period of time. For a station with Ns
berths, its capacity or throughput (veh/min or veh/h) can be estimated as follows:
Ks ¼ Ns =s ð6:1dÞ
For example, let the minimum headway in Eq. 6.1a be: h = 0.5 s. This implies
that the traffic capacity of a line during the time of: T = 1 min can be: Ktraffic =
120 veh/min (Similarly, with a headway of h = 1 and 2.5 s, this capacity will be:
Ktraffic = 60 and 24 veh/min, respectively). If each vehicle has n = 3 spaces/seats

and all are occupied, i.e., k = 1.0, based on Eq. (6.1b), the transport/transit
capacity of a given line will be: Ktransport/transit = 120 9 3 9 1.0 = 360 pass/min
(if the traffic capacity is: Ktraffic = 60 and 24 veh/min, this capacity will be 180
and 72 pass/min, respectively). After considering a given line as a part of the PRT
network by taking into account the more realistic values of the headways and the
load factor of vehicle, both capacities will certainly be lower. Nevertheless, the
minimum headway must not be shorter than the vehicle breaking distance at a
reasonable deceleration/braking rate (1.0–1.5 m/sec2).
If the intensity of demand for a given station in Eq. 6.1c is: Ks = 120, 60, and 24
veh/min, and the vehicle dwell time at the berth s = 20 s, the required number of
berths will be: Ns = 40, 20, and 8, respectively. Similarly, it follows from Eq. 6.1d
that the maximum throughput of a station with 5, 10, and 20 berths, each occupied by
a vehicle for about: s = 20 s, will be: Ks = 15, 30, and 60 veh/min, respectively.
In order to enable efficient and effective operations of a given PRT system, the
capacities of lines, merging segments, and off-line stations need to be balanced.
Consequently, the resulting capacity of a given line with the given number of off-
line stations will be the minimum among the capacities of these elements.
Quality of service
Measures of the quality of service of a given PRT system can include accessibility
and availability, schedule delay, transit time, punctuality and reliability, and riding
comfort.
Accessibility and availability
The PRT system is designed to be highly spatially accessible in terms of walking
distance and related time. Nevertheless, locations for joining the system are not as
close to the users’ residences or workplaces such as those of cars as users have to
walk a short distance to one of the PRT stations. Ideally, the distance is about 150 m
requiring up to 5 min walking time. In terms of availability, the PRT system is
inherently highly available (some concepts are specified to operate 24 h/day).
Schedule delay
PRT is designed as a demand-responsive system where vehicles wait for users-
passengers, which is distinctive from other urban mass transit systems where the
users/passengers usually wait for the vehicles. However, this is not always true.
PRT systems may also incur schedule delays as the time difference between the
moment a user-passenger makes a request for a free vehicle and the moment it
becomes available. This vehicle can be from a stock waiting at the given station,
sent from some other waiting location, or have just arrived and been vacated by its
previous user(s). Consequently, the schedule delay can be zero, tens of seconds,
and/or a few minutes, the latter two during peak and off-peak periods, respectively.
Facilitating the users/passengers and vehicles in the first of the above-mentioned
cases confirms the claim that at PRT system(s), the vehicles wait for users/pas-
sengers rather than vice versa.
Transit time
The transit time depends on the distance between the selected origin(s) and des-
tination(s), and operating speed. This time consists of the time of boarding the
vehicle after buying a ticket, the time for the vehicle’s acceleration/deceleration
(not higher that 1–1.5 m/s2), and the time the vehicle cruises at the operating speed
mentioned above. Such composed transit time is continuous, uninterrupted by
congestion, minimal, and highly predictable under the given circumstances.
Reliability and punctuality
Like other public urban public transit systems, the reliability of a given PRT
system can be expressed as the ratio between the realized and planned services
during the specified period of time (day, month, year). The reliability to date of
currently operating and planned PRT systems has been very close to 100 %. The
punctuality of PRT system can be expressed as the proportion of user-passenger
trips carried out during the specified period of time, on time, or within the pre-
scribed time deviation(s) (in the latter case it is often referred to as dependability).
The punctuality of already operating PRT systems has also been very close to
100 %. In general, both measures are actually expected to be near 100 % all the
time and under all weather conditions.
Riding comfort
The riding comfort of a given PRT system is expected to be at a higher level than
that of other urban transit systems. This is achieved through the above-mentioned
design of the guideways, stations, and vehicles themselves. The guideways enable
the smooth ‘‘gliding’’ of air-conditioned vehicles. The size and pattern of supply of
transport capacity always guarantee a free seat to users-passengers. Thanks to the
system of controlling the flow(s) and spacing between vehicles, their operating
speed and acceleration/deceleration are always maintained within the prescribed
(comfortable) limits (the later of about 1.0–1.5 m/s2) excluding any unpredictable
strong breaking, for example, due to preventing potential collision(s).
Fleet size
The vehicle fleet of a given PRT system consists of the vehicles in operation and in
reserve. The former provide services while the latter are only engaged when the
former need to be out of service due to repair and maintenance. Based on Eq. 6.1b,
the maximum number of PRT system vehicles in operation can be roughly esti-
mated as follows:
M ¼ Ktraffic t ð6:2Þ
where
t is the vehicle’s average turnaround time over the PRT network (min).
The turnaround time t in Eq. 6.2 depends on the average distance between
particular origins and destinations and the related average speed. This implies that
serving shorter trips at a higher speed will require a smaller vehicle fleet, and vice
versa.
The technical productivity of a given PRT system can be estimated for a single
vehicle and for a fleet of vehicles. For a single vehicle, it is equal to:
TPv ¼ n v ð6:3aÞ
where
n is the number of spaces in a vehicle
v is the vehicle operating speed (km/h).

For example, for a vehicle with 4 spaces/seats operating at a speed of 40 km/h,
the technical productivity will be: TPv = 4 9 40 = 160 seat-km/h.
Similarly, for a fleet of M vehicles, the technical productivity can be estimated
as follows:
TPfv ¼ N n v ð6:3bÞ
For example, the technical productivity of a fleet of N = 20 vehicles, each with
n = 4 spaces/seats and operating at a speed of v = 40 km/h will be:
TPfv = 20 9 4 9 40 = 3,200 seat-km/h.
The economic performances of PRT system(s) include the system costs, revenues,
and the user/passenger benefits expressed in monetary terms.
Costs
The costs of a given PRT system(s) consists of the capital/investment cost for
infrastructure, vehicle and control systems, operating cost for providing transit
services, and the total cost as the sum of the annual capital/investment and
operating cost.
Capital (investment) costs
The capital (investment) costs relate to the cost for building infrastructure and
acquiring the vehicles and control systems for a given PRT system. This cost can
Civ ¼ ci L þ cv M þ Ccs ð6:4aÞ

where
ci is the cost of building the PRT system infrastructure (€/km);
cv is the cost of acquiring a vehicle (€/veh);
Ccs is the cost of the control systems (€); and
L is the length of the PRT network (km).

The guideways of PRT systems are mainly elevated constructions for all or part
of their length, though the structure can be relatively light. Some estimation of
these costs are made for different systems and the averages are as follows: 3.8
million €/km for the infrastructure and systems, and 75,000 €/vehicle (EC 2007).
Operating costs
The operating costs mainly consist of the costs of material, energy, and labor for
(daily) operating and maintaining the system. These costs can be estimated directly
and indirectly: the former, by estimating the quantities of particular cost issues
based on the perceived (or actual) scenario(s) of operating the system; and the
latter, by assuming theses costs as a portion of the capital/investment cost.
For example, in the direct case, an estimation is arrived at from a base cost for
5 km of track and a fleet of 25 vehicles (including staff) plus additions for
infrastructure per km and per vehicle, and for staff per km and per vehicle. The
causal relationship obtained is: Co = 1600 ? 67.0(L-5) ? 11.0(M-25) (1000 €/
year), where L is the length of the single track guideway (km) and M is the number
of vehicles (EC 2007). In the indirect case, typical annual operating costs are
estimated at about 3–5 % of the capital/investment costs.
Total costs
The total costs are the sum of the capital/investment costs for infrastructure,
vehicles, and control systems, and the operating costs imposed by providing transit
services during the period of exploiting the system, i.e., its life cycle, which is
20–30 years. Consequently, the total average unit cost per unit of the system’s
output expressed in pass-km can be estimated as follows:
c ¼ ½Civ ð1 þ qÞ=½m 365 D s ð6:4bÞ
where
q is the average proportion of the investment costs taken as operational costs;
m is the depreciation period of the given PRT system (years);
D is the user/passenger demand (trips/day); and
s is the average trip length (km).
The average cost c in Eq. 6.4b expressed in €/pass-km linearly increases with
increasing of the capital/investment and operational costs and decreases more than
proportionally with increasing of the daily demand (passenger trips) and length of
the system’s depreciation period.
Revenues
The revenues of a given PRT system can be direct and indirect. The former are
gained from passenger fares, the potential transportation of freight/goods, adver-
tising, and subsidies from local authorities and/or particular interest groups. The
latter are generally wide and distinctive such as savings in the land use/take
combined with increased land values and improved accessibility, increased rents
for commercial space located near the system, reduction in traffic congestion,
savings in the user-passenger travel time, increased productivity of staff, increased
convenience for third party partnerships (e.g., hotel user access), operational
savings, and some financial benefits. In any case, both direct and indirect revenues
should cover the total costs of the given PRT system.
The environmental performances of a given PRT system include the energy

consumption and related emissions of GHG (Green House Gases), and land use/
take.
Energy consumption
PRT systems consume electric energy for their operations. The electricity con-
sumption per unit of output (pass-km) depends on many interrelated factors such
as: propulsion efficiency, operating speed, load factor, vehicle weight, drag and
rolling resistance, the number of stops along the route/path, and requirements for
air-conditioning. Some estimates for U.S. transit systems indicate that the elec-
tricity consumption of a PRT system can be about 0.404 kWh/pass-km, which is
lower than that of trolleybuses (1.09), passenger gasoline/diesel cars (1.06), and
motor buses (0.62). Consequently, in the above-mentioned case, PRT system
commercialization resulting in taking over trolleybus, individual car, and motor
bus users/passengers could contribute to energy consumption savings of about
0.69, 0.66, and 0.22 kWh/pass-km, respectively. The total savings can be obtained
by multiplying these figures by the volumes of pass-km carried out during the
specified period of time. This advantage of PRT systems is believed to be mainly
derived from substantially reducing or completely eliminating intermediate stops
and increasing the average daily load factor (Anderson 2007).
Emissions of GHG
The emissions of GHG depend on the primary sources for obtaining the electric
energy used for powering PRT systems, which are mainly country/region specific.
However, some proposals for installing solar panels on the sides and the top of
guideways for producing the electric energy needed for PRT vehicles have been
made. In such a case, emissions of GHG would be minimal or even nonexistent.

Consequently, in this respect, a given PRT system could be considered as com-
pletely environmentally neutral.
The savings in emissions GHG can be estimated similarly to those of energy
consumption.
Land use
The land used by a given PRT can be also direct and indirect. Directly, land is
needed for the posts (solid cellars) and stations supporting the elevated guideways.
However, the land needed is very small compared to the land taken for building the
infrastructure of other urban transit systems. Specifically, the land underneath the
guideways (about 4.5–5.0 m wide) can be used for walking and biking paths, as
well as for vehicle and pedestrian crossings. Indirectly, PRT systems can save land
through reducing the need for operating and parking individual passenger cars,
trolleybuses, and motor buses in the scale and scope to which they are replaced.
6.2.2.7 Social Performances
The social performances of a given PRT system include noise, congestion, traffic
incidents/accidents (i.e., safety and security), and social welfare.
Noise
The PRT system is supposed to be a relatively ‘‘silent’’ urban transit mode as
compared to its counterparts—individual passenger cars, trolleybuses and motor
buses, and LRT (Light Rail Transit) systems. This is because the vehicles run on
rubber tires along the concrete guideway’s floor and the electric motors do not
have moving components. Some measurements have shown that passing PRT
vehicles generate noise of less than 50 dBA at a distance of 2.5 m and 32 dBA at a
distance of about 10 m from the observer (EC 2007).
Congestion
PRT is by design a congestion-free system. This implies that the vehicles run
rather independently without interfering with each other, thus providing highly
punctual services, i.e., without significant deviations of the actual times at desti-
nations from those planned. In particular, PRT can contribute to mitigating road
congestion by replacing individual passenger cars, trolleybuses, and motor buses.
For example, if the average occupancy rate of an individual passenger car is
2 pass/car, and that of a PRT vehicle 4 pass/vehicle, then each PRT trip can
substitute about two car trips. Such substitution removes these and other (substi-
tuted) cars from the road traffic flow and thus contributes to mitigating congestion
and related overall impacts. Some estimates indicate that about 30 % of present car
users could switch to the PRT system, if an equivalent efficiency and effectiveness
of services under given circumstances was provided (Anderson 2005, 2007).
Safety
PRT systems are designed to be absolutely safe implying that incidents/accidents
do not occur due to known reasons. The following facts support such expectations:
(i) the vehicles operate on dedicated, elevated guideways separated and isolated
from other interfering urban transit systems; (ii) the spacing between vehicles is
maintained automatically by the three-level computer-based control system par-
ticularly controlling their acceleration/deceleration, speed, and breaking; (iii) the
vehicles are automatically stopped and the user/passengers allowed to get-off in
cases of system component failure and/or emergency; (iv) vehicle boarding takes
place individually (or as homogenous groups), thus preventing entry of undesired
persons; and (v) the stations are relatively small and monitored, thus preventing
collection of too many people, and consequently reducing risk of exposure to
antisocial behavior that could compromise both individual and collective security.
Social welfare
The social welfare resulting from a given PRT system consists of urban and social
effects
Urban effects
The urban effects can be considered at the macro- and microscale. On the micro-
scale, these generally imply creating more livable high density urban structures and
the system’s apparent ability to support deurbanization of large urban agglomera-
tions and/or the self-contained urban complexes efficiently, effectively, sustainably,
and safely (see Chap. 2). On the macroscale, this implies an efficient use of land
under the system’s guideways and stations for some other purposes.
Social effects
Social effects could generally include the following: savings in land for individual
car infrastructure–roads and parking spaces; reducing the frequency of incidents/
accidents including the local third party impact; reducing the overall energy
consumption and emissions of GHG; reducing noise emitted by individual cars;
making accessibility to the green zones in urban areas on the one hand, and also to
the public activities and services—schools, offices, stores hospitals—on the other
easier; transporting also freight/goods and mail; and being permanently available
and accessible for everybody at acceptable costs. The social impacts could include:
reducing the number of employees mainly due to operating driverless vehicles; and
suffering from unprofitability, i.e., an inability to cover the costs, thus requiring
subsidies.
6.2.2.8 Policy Performances
The policy performances of PRT systems mainly refer to the existing and pro-
spective barriers to their faster commercialization on a wider urban scale(s). Due
to their mutual interrelations, the barriers to a given PRT system are summarized
in no specific order as follows:
• Some researchers and academics express skepticism toward the system’s con-
troversy in combining two mutually incompatible components, namely elements
of individual passenger cars and elements of other urban mass transit system(s):
very small vehicles with very complex infrastructure are considered infeasible
and incapable of handling greater volumes of user/passenger demand in dense
urban areas due to insufficient capacity and network spatial coverage; such small
vehicles seem to be very convenient in low density suburban areas due to them
offering sufficient capacity and network coverage but the user/passenger demand
is insufficient to be served efficiently and effectively;
• The planners and prospective system operators are faced with much uncertainty
in predicting/forecasting the volumes of user/passenger demand. This makes
evaluation of the system’s overall social/economic feasibility complex, unreli-
able, and consequently difficult to make investment decisions. Furthermore, the
necessary investments in a PRT system are very high by design;
• Urban authorities are usually concerned with finding funding/investors for the
system, with its ability to coexist with existing transit systems, and its vulnerability
to weather conditions. This also relates to the system’s ability to solve all or only
some of the existing urban mobility problems, and its technical reliability including
the consequences of technical failures. Furthermore, there is always the inherent
concern that introduction of fully automated systems like PRT can rise local
unemployment and consequently compromise local GDP (Gross Domestic Prod-
uct). Last but not least, skepticism could arise from the perceived negative impacts
on the visual appearance of a given urban complex after system construction;
• Users/passengers may be skeptical due to their lack of sufficient knowledge
about the system they are supposed to use. They could particularly feel
uncomfortable when being driven automatically without any ability to control
the running vehicles themselves. This also relates to being permanently moni-
tored, traced, and tracked while in the system. The question whether all social
groups in terms of age, gender, education, and technical knowledge will be able
to use the system appropriately remains a matter of specific concern; and
• Standardized and harmonized legislation for driverless systems, specifying the
responsibilities during operation/use of PRT services, is lacking in many
countries.
6.2.2.9 Performances of Commercialized PRT Systems
The quantitative performances are illustrated for three already commercialized

(WVU, ULTra, and Cybercab), and one forthcoming PRT system (Vectus).2
2
The information is collected from different sources including websites, which are not
particularly cited.
• The WVU PRT system was commercialized, i.e., started operations, under the
same name between 1975 (phase I) and 1979 (phase II) by connecting five WVU
(West Virginia University) campuses (Morgantown, West Virginia, USA). The
system provides transit services for the University staff and students, as well as
local residents.
• The ULTra PRT system has been operating from May 2011 under the name
‘‘Heathrow pod’’ at London Heathrow airport connecting Terminal 5 and the
Business Car Park. There are plans to extend the network throughout the airport.
• The Cybercab PRT system started operations in Masdar City (Abu Dhabi) in
2010 under the name ‘‘Masdar PRT’’ connecting the North Car Park at Masdar
City and Phase 1a of the Masdar Institute of Science and Technology. The
original plan was to develop the PRT system along with an inter-city LRT
(Light Rail Line), both also connecting to the Abu Dhabi airport, which would
exclude access of all passenger cars to the city center. These would be parked at
the borders of the area covered by the PRT lines as shown in Fig. 6.3.
• The Vectus PRT system is planned to start operations as ‘‘Suncheon Wetland
PRT’’ in 2013 connecting Suncheon City Garden Expo site and the world
famous Suncheon Coastal Wetlands Park. As such, the system is expected to
serve mainly visitors to the sites.
The quantitative estimates of indicators and measures of particular perfor-
mances of the above-mentioned PRT systems are given in self-explanatory
Tables 6.2, 6.3, 6.4, 6.5, and 6.6.
Infrastructural performances
Specifically, Table 6.2 indicates that the length of the network typically being a
single line is relatively short—the longest is that of the earliest WVU PRT system.
The guideways are concrete and steel/concrete mainly elevated constructions.
They have a similar width (up to 2 m) and maximum gradient (10), and quite
distinctive turning radii. The area of the square dynamic envelope is between about
4 and 8 m2.
The system for maintaining the guideways operational during bad weather is
case specific. Each case has off-line stations enabling the vehicles level entry. At
these stations, the berth concept prevails either angled independent (30) or
straight in-line. The minimum berth width is about 4 m. The three recent and
forthcoming cases are only with the beginning and end station and the similar
dynamic capacity, i.e., throughput.
Technical/technological performances
In particular, Table 6.3 indicates that the vehicles of particular PRT systems are of
a similar size, payload, and space capacity with the exception of the earliest WVU
system.
In addition, all vehicles have rubber wheels except the forthcoming Vectus PRT
system, which has rail wheels. The power is supplied differently to the vehicles of
particular systems. For example, in the earliest WVU system, electricity is
Table 6.2 Infrastructural performances of the selected PRT systems
System/Network WVU PRT Cybercab PRT ULTra PRT Vectus PRT
—————————— Morgantown (USA) Masdar City LHRa Suncheon Bay,
Performances/ (1975) (Abu Dhabi) (UK) (South Korea)
Indicators and measures (2010) (2011) (2013)
Guideway(s)
Length of network (km) 13.9 1.7 3.9 5.3
Track width (at grade/elevated) (m) 2.5/2.5 1.75/1.85 1.75/2.10 1.40/1.40
Maximum track gradient (%) 10 10 10 10
Positioning profile Mainly elevated Mainly elevated Mainly elevated Mainly elevated
(65 %)
Square dynamic envelope 2.40 9 3.30 1.75-1.85 9 2.30 1.75–2.10 9 2.00 2.10 9 2.50
(width 9 height) (m)
Pavement (type) Concrete Concrete Concrete on a steel structure Steel rails on concrete/steel structure
Turning radii (m) 9.1 6.1 5.2 5.0
Height (m) As necessary As necessary 5.7 As necessary
Spacing of pods/(concrete pillars) (m) N/A N/A 18 30/50
Maintaining guideway operational Heating No need Snow and ice vehicle N/A
Stations
Number 5 2 2 2
Spacing (km) 3.3 1.7 3.9 5.3
Berths per station 6/22b 4–6 2–4 4
Berth length (m) 5.0 4.3 at 30 3.2 4.5
Beth capacity (veh/h) 68/210b 120 120 160–200
a
London Heathrow Airport
b
End-of-line station/Off-line station
N/A Not Available
297
provided through a 575 V AC bus bar system, which runs along the side of the
track and is electrically heated (similar to the principle of metro trains). In the
following two systems, the vehicles are equipped with batteries, which can be
charged at stations—either at berths or in dedicated charging rooms at the oper-
ation facilities. In the forthcoming Vectus PRT system, power is to be provided to
vehicles by a current collection system installed along the guideway(s). The
vehicles are centrally driverless (WVU) or self-managed (others) and controlled by
the central or distributed control system (Vectus PRT). Each vehicle of the above-
mentioned systems has an independent CAS (Collision Avoidance System), as
well as two-way communications between operator and passenger(s) on-board
including CCTV, air conditioning, and LCD screens displaying journey status and
other useful messages for passengers.
Operational performances
Table 6.4 indicates that most operational performances of the given PRT systems
are quite distinctive. The exceptions are partially the minimum headway, the
maximum speed, the maximum speed in curves, acceleration/deceleration rates,
and reliability and punctuality of services.
Economic performances
The economic performances of the selected PRT systems given in Table 6.5 are
relatively similar. This particularly relates to the unit investment and operational
costs, and savings in passenger time. The question remains if these systems are
economically feasible without subsidies.
The environmental and social performances
The environmental and social performances of the considered PRT systems in
Table 6.6 are characterized by lower overall relative impacts on the environment
and society as compared to those of individual passenger cars and motor buses.
The energy consumption is roughly proportional to the vehicle size (capacity),
while the emissions of GHG depends on the energy consumption and the primary
sources for obtaining electricity.
Specifically, electricity is obtained from different primary sources staring from
predominantly coal in West Virginia (U.S.), a mixture of primary sources in the
UK and South Korea, and exclusively solar panels in Abu Dhabi. Thanks to the
predominantly elevated network of guideways, the above-mentioned cases confirm
the inherent neutrality of the PRT systems in terms of land use/take. In addition,
their noise levels are similar under comparative conditions. Last but not least, they
all are absolutely free from occurrence of traffic incidents/accidents, and related
property damages, injuries, and losses of lives.
The performances of the above-mentioned PRT systems indicate that they are,
at present, mainly designed and commercialized to serve specific—niche—urban
transit demand by partially replacing individual passenger car, motor-, trolleybus,
and sometimes LRT system use. As such, the case-specific and quite distinctive
Table 6.3 Technical/technological performances of the selected PRT systems
—————–——– Morgantown Masdar city LHRa Suncheon Bay
Performances/ (USA) (Abu Dhabi) (UK) (South Korea)
Indicators and measures (1975) (2010) (2011) (2013)
Vehicles
Length/Height/Width (m) 4.72/2.67/2.01 3.90/1.46/2.01 3.70/1.47/1.80 3.60/2.08/2.42
Weight (empty/full) (tons) 3.78/5.40 1.40/2.05 0.85/1.30 1.5/2.5
Payload (tons) 1.62 0.65 0.45 1.0
Capacity (spaces) 20 4?2 4?2 4?4

(adults ? children)
Suspension/ Rubber wheeled Rubber wheeled Rubber wheeled Rail
support wheeled
Power supply (V/kW) 575 V AC/52 Batteries 4 9 Batteries (Acid) 48/2 500 VDC/5
(Lithium ion)/-
Engine type Electric-linear Electric motor driving vehicle Electric motor driving vehicle Electric-linear
wheels wheels
Control systems
Guidance—vehicle Passive presence detectors Reference magnetic markers Electronic Captive to steel
control steering track
Control—vehicle Central system Central system Central system Distributed system
Operations—vehicle Driverless/centrally Driverless/ Driverless/ Driverless/
managed self-managed self-managed self-managed
a
299
Table 6.4 Operational performances of the selected PRT systems
300

————————— Morgantown Masdar City LHRa Suncheon Bay
Indicators and measures (1975/1979) (2010) (2011) (2013)
Demand
Passengers (000/year) 2250 255–365 500 3000
Capacity
Fleet size 71 10 21 40
Traffic capacityb 240 720 400 720–900
(veh/h/dir)
Transport capacityb 4800 2880 3600 5760–7200
(pass/h/dir)
Minimum headway (sec) 15 5 6 4–5
6
Maximum speed (km/h) 50 40 40 70

Maximum speed in curve (radius 20/50/100 m) N/A 16/26/36 18/28/40 -/36/43
Typical/maximum acceleration/deceleration (m/sec) 1.0/5.0 0.8/4.7 1.25/2.5–5.0 1.2/5.0
Technical productivity 240.0 76.8 64.0 91.9
(000 pass-km/h)
Quality of service
Accessibility 100–150/1.5–5 100–150/1.5–5 100–150/1.5–5 100–150/1.5–5
(Walking distance-/time-min)
Availabilityc Wd/Std/Snd (h/day) 16/7.5/0 24/24/24 22/22/22 N/A
(continued)
Advanced Transport Systems: Future Concepts
Table 6.4 (continued)
————————— Morgantown Masdar City LHRa Suncheon Bay
Indicators and measures (1975/1979) (2010) (2011) (2013)
Schedule delay (min) 1–5 0–2 0.3 N/A
Transit time (min) 11.5 2.5 6.0 7.0
Reliability (%) 98.5 99.0 99.7 N/A
Punctuality (delays) Negligible Negligible Negligible Negligible
a
b
Based on the minimum headway
c
Wd Weekday, Std Saturday, Snd Sunday, N/A Not Available

301
302
Table 6.5 Economic performances of the selected PRT systems

—————–——– Morgantown Masdar City LHRa Suncheon Bay
Performances/Indicators (USA) (Abu Dhabi) (2010) (UK) (South Korea)
and measures (1975/1979) (2011) (2013)
Costs
Investment cost (million €/km)b 6.55 3.8c 6.15 6.50–10.90
Operating cost 2.75 N/A 1.33 N/A
(million €/year)
6
Subsidies (%) 35–40 N/A N/A N/A

Operating cost (€/pass) 0.9–1.1 N/A 1.38 N/A
Revenues
User charge (€/pass) 0.35/free Free 0.70 N/A
Savings of passenger time (min)/(€/min) 11.2/1.65 2.0/N/A 10.8/4.43 N/A
a
b
One-way guideway
c
EC 2007
N/A Not Available
Table 6.6 Environmental and social performances of the selected PRT systems
——————— Morgantown Masdar City LHRa Suncheon Bay
Indicators and (1975/1979) (2010) (2011) (2013)
measures
Energy consumptionb 0.40 0.19 0.13 0.24
(kWh/km)
Emissions of GHGc 12.8 Nil 11.4 12.9
(gCO2e/pass-km)
Land use N/A N/A N/A N/A
Noise (dBA) N/A N/A \50 at 2.5 m \50 at 2.5 m
Safety (Incidents/ Nil Nil Nil Nil
accidents)
a
b
Full vehicle
c
Emission rates: UK- 527gCO2e/kWh, South Korea 430gCO2e/kWh (mixture of primary sour-
ces); West Virginia (US)—642gCO2/kWh (mainly coal); Abu Dhabi—0gCO2e/kWh (Solar)
N/A Not Available
performances indicate the lack of standardization of PRT systems. This suggests

that the future eventual commercialization of PRT systems on a wider urban scale
will need some standardization in order to, at least, improve their economic per-
formances, i.e., reduce the overall costs.
6.2.3 Evaluation
PRT system(s) possesses both advantages (Strengths and Opportunities) and dis-
advantages (Weaknesses and Threats) as compared to individual passenger cars
and other urban mass transit systems, which can be relevant for users/passengers,
system operators, and local/regional urban communities and authorities.
Advantages
Users/passengers
• High availability closely following the pattern of demand in terms of time and
volumes;
• Convenient riding comfort regarding the availability of space(s)/seat(s) and
exposure to different forces;
• Acceptable travel cost (fares) as compared to those of other urban transport
alternatives including individual passenger cars;
• Savings in the journey time including high punctuality of services, i.e., a high
certainty of arrival at the selected destination(s) at the scheduled time; and
• Improved physical (spatial) accessibility as compared to that of other urban
mass public transit systems.
System operator(s)
• Low operational costs due to operating driverless and fully automated vehicles
and needing generally few employees; and
• High quality of transport services delivered very closely matching the expec-
tations of users/passengers.
Local/regional community and authorities
• Contributing to mitigation of the overall impacts of urban transit systems on the
environment and society in terms of energy consumption and emissions of
GHG, land use/take, noise, congestion, and traffic incidents/accidents, and
• Contributing to increasing/improving the social/economic/business attractive-
ness of particular locations in a given urban area(s).
Disadvantages
Users/passengers
• Slightly diminished physical accessibility for those users/passengers switching
from individual passenger cars;
• Concerns of particular categories of users/passengers due to their unfamiliarity
with approaching and using the vehicle(s)/services; and
• The still present, although at a much lower scale, risk of exposure to some
elements of antisocial behavior.
System operator(s)
• Setting up the system is costly mainly on account of high infrastructure costs;
• Covering the costs exclusively by operations is an inherent weakness; and
• The inherent uncertainty of providing sufficient transit capacity comparable to
that of the other cooperating and/or competing urban mass transit systems.
Local/regional community and authorities
• Compromising the environment’s visual impression due to the elevated
infrastructure;
• Potentially requiring subsidies for covering operational and other costs; and
• Inability to resolve all urban transit problems as some authorities may expect.
The experience so far shows that only three of more than 50 conceptual, pro-
totype, and fully developed PRT systems have been commercialized. This is mainly
because of the above-mentioned policy–social barriers to their implementation
where the total system operating costs seemingly dominate. Nevertheless, in the
present context, PRT possesses all attributes of an advanced urban transit system,
which certainly should be carefully considered for gradual implementation
respecting its overall socioeconomic feasibility. This certainly will be a gradual
process on a case by case basis continuing with niche applications. On the one hand,
such development will continue to demonstrate and prove the expected advantages.
On the other, it will contribute to the further maturating of PRT systems and
consequently increased interest in their commercialization on a wider scale.
Finally, the trends of both strengthening and weakening of the existing level of
urbanization will certainly contribute to the wider use of PRT systems either as a
complement or even an exclusive urban transit system.
6.3 Underground Freight Transport Systems
1970s A British national tube transportation system for general commodity freight (similar to
SUBTRANS) is launched by the British Hydro-mechanics Research Association
(BHRA) (UK)
1984 The concept of long-haul freight/goods transport in capsules propelled by linear induction
motors through a tube of a diameter of about 2.0 m called SUBTRANS is patented
(U.S.)
Large urban and suburban agglomerations and large multimodal transport nodes
such as ports, airports, and other inland intermodal terminals located close to these
urban agglomerations have increasingly suffered from severe traffic congestion
with the following impacts: (i) lost time of passengers while traveling to and from
their workplace and delays in delivery of freight/goods to their final destinations;
(ii) incidents/accidents caused by trucks and individual passenger cars resulting in
injuries and death, and damage and loss of property (vehicles); (iii) increasing
energy consumption and related emissions of GHG (Green House gases) by all
vehicles (trucks and cars) while in congestion; and (iv) local noise caused by
congested slowly moving traffic. One of the prospective solutions to mitigate such
impacts and their further escalation due to the prospective growth in freight
transport volumes can be to partially replace trucks used for freight/goods deliv-
eries by the UFT (Underground Freight Transport) systems. The UFT system
concept of is not new. One of the first such systems was The Mail Rail System in
London (UK) operating from 1927 by Royal Mail for moving mail across the city.
At present, some UFT systems have been successfully used in Japan to transport
bulk material (Nippon/Daifuku and Sumitomo Electric Industries). In addition,
two UFT systems have been operating in Georgia (Tbilisi) for the movement of
crashed rock and in Russia (Petrograd) for moving garbage. The others are two
automated capsule systems—one for containers and the other for pallets—still at
the conceptual level with some pilot trials conducted under laboratory conditions
(Rijsenbrij et al. 2006).
The concept is rather simple: instead of moving freight/goods consolidated into
shipments of different sizes such as standard pallets and/or containers aboveground
by trucks, they are moved through underground pipes/tunnels on automatically
controlled dedicated vehicles. The pipes/tunnels, which can be partially above-
ground, connect different freight/goods origins and destinations in the given urban
and suburban area(s). The vehicles/capsules, loaded with freight/goods shipments,
move completely automatically though the pipes/tunnels. At the beginning, the
pipes were expected to have a diameter/width of about 1 or 2 m mainly for
transporting smaller shipments up to the size of pallets. Later on, pipes/tunnels
with a much wider diameter/width have been considered for moving containers,
swap bodies, and semi-trailers. This has resulted in emerging two fully automated
distinguished concepts: (i) the Automated Capsule System for Pallets such as
CargoCap (Germany), Subtrans (Texas, U.S.), and MTM (U.S.); and (ii) the
Automated Capsule System for Containers such as CargoCapContainer (Germany)
and SAFE Freight Shuttle (TTI, Texas, U.S.). Both concepts, but especially the
latter one(s), imply interoperability while connecting to existing (conventional)
freight transport systems.. All these systems require building completely new
underground infrastructure—tubes/tunnels, which could be very costly if devel-
oped as networks. This is one of the main reasons why none of these concepts have
been either privately or publically commercialized as yet, despite some positive
feasibility studies (Liu 2004; Rijsenbrij et al. 2006).
6.3.2.1 Background
The UFT systems are characterized by their infrastructural, technical/technologi-

cal, operational, economic, environmental, social, and policy performances. In the
given context, the infrastructural performances relate to guideways, i.e., pipes or
tunnels, the network, and stations. The technical/technological performances refer
to vehicles/capsules, the system for their driving, movement control, and vertical
transportation. The operational performances relate to demand, capacity, and
quality of services, vehicle/capsule fleet size, and technical productivity. The
economic performances imply the costs and revenues. The environmental per-
formances, similarly as at other systems, refer to the energy consumption and
related emissions of GHG (Green House Gases) and land use. The social perfor-
mances include noise, congestion and safety (traffic incidents/accidents).
6.3 Underground Freight Transport Systems 307
The infrastructural performances of a given UFT system relate to the character-

istics of gudeway(s), i.e., pipes/tunnels, network, and stations/terminals.
Guideways (Pipes/Tunenls)
In general, UFT pipes/tunnels can be circular or rectangular/square. The former is
recommended in cases when the pipes/tunnels are built deeper underground in
order to withstand higher internal pressure.3 Depending on the location, they need
to be positioned sufficiently below the surface to avoid any conflict with existing
underground structures such as building foundations, water and gas pipes, metro
systems, etc. This could be from 6–8 to 30–50 m or even deeper. In addition, for
pipes with a diameter of less than 1.2 m, the construction costs could be lower due
to the possibility of using standard commercially available steel-made elements.
Figure 6.4 shows a scheme of such circle-shaped design of the above-mentioned
Automated Capsule System for Pallets.
As can be seen, to the certain extent, the shape of vehicles/capsules is adapted
to the shape of the pipe/tunnel.
Rectangular/square pipes/tunnels appear to be more convenient respecting the
shape of freight shipments, usually in the format of boxes/containers and pallets. In
addition, the rectangular/squared tunnels can be built by the reinforced concrete
similarly as the large concrete canals, which could substantively reduce the con-
struction costs. Figure 6.5 shows an example of the cross-sectional shape of pipes/
tunnels of the Automated Capsule System for Containers (Standard container:
Length—12.2 m (40 ft), Height—2.60 m (8.5 ft), Width—2.44 m (8 ft); this is an
equivalent of 2TEU (Twenty-foot Equivalent Unit) (Liu 2004).
As can be seen, the rectangular shape of pipe/tunnel enables them to more
efficiently and effectively fit with the shape of the container(s) and other similar
sized loading units (swap bodies and semi-trailers). Nevertheless, the fitting rate is
usually determined by determining the proper blockage ratio defined as the quo-
tient between the cross-sectional area of the vehicle/capsule and the inside cross-
sectional area of the pipe/tunnel. A higher blockage ratio causes the aerodynamic
drag on the vehicle/capsule to increase requiring increased electricity consump-
tion. At the same time, it reduces the risk of collision of vehicles/capsules in case
of power failures.
3
In general, the internal pressure can be estimated as: r = zc, where c is the average specific
weight and z is the depth of the soil. This implies that the internal pressure increases linearly with
increasing of the depth of soil. For example, if the average specific weight of soil is: c = 20 kN/m3
and the depth: z = 30 m, the resulting vertical pressure on the upper wall of a pipe/tunnel located
there will be: r = 20 9 30 = 600 N/m2 (Pa). In addition, the weight of surface constructions
(pavements, tracks, buildings, etc.,) need to be added. The other is the lateral pressure component
by the surrounding soil at a given depth.
Tube/tunnel
1,6m
Floor
Vehicle/capsule
Fig. 6.4 Scheme of the UFT Automated Capsule System for Pallets—CargoCap (CC 1999)
2.6m 2.6m
Pipe/tunnel
4.57m 3.0m Vehicle/capsule 3.0m

3.6m
Concrete floor
Steel wheels Steel wheels
Steel tracks
Fig. 6.5 Scheme of the possible cross-sectional shapes of pipes/tunnels at the UFT system for
containers—one direction (Liu 2004)
In case of setting up bidirectional tracks within a single pipe/tunnel, its diam-

eter/width will have to be at least doubled. Alternatively, twin pipes/tunnels each
with a single track can be a solution. In both cases, different vehicles/capsules (full
and empty) can move simultaneously in both directions of a given line. As
mentioned above, the main material for building these larger pipes/tunnels can be
steel and concrete, which depends on their shape and size as well as underground
depth. The floor of pipes/tunnels would be made of concrete or steel with the steel
tracks enabling movement of steel-wheeled vehicles/capsules. The alternative can
be just a concrete floor enabling the movement of vehicles/capsules with rubber
tires (as is the case in the current applications in Japan).
Network
In general, a given UFT system can be designed to operate as a single line or as a
network of lines. In both cases, the lines connect network nodes/stations, which act
as the entries and exits of the vehicles/capsules to/from the system, respectively. In
order to properly cover an urban or suburban area, the UFT network needs to have a
sufficient number of nodes/stations, each covering the specified ‘‘service area’’ (few
hundred meters around the station at the surface, i.e., street level). In the horizontal
plane, these stations/locations should be at or as close as possible to the intermodal
terminals where the transfer of shipments between UCT and other conventional
freight transport systems/modes, and vice versa, takes place. For example, in case
of Automated Capsule System for Containers, these transshipment locations can be
the port and inland container terminal(s). In case of Automated Capsule System for
Pallets, the locations can be large logistics and shopping centers. This implies that
the UFT networks for transporting containers could cover a much wider area than
those transporting pallets and other smaller shipments. However, the density of
nodes/stations of the latter can be much higher, mainly depending on the size and
structure of activities of a given urban area. In any case, both types of systems are
expected to operate at short- to medium-haul distances, i.e., up to 350–400 km. The
main reason is that the greatest volumes of freight/goods are transported along such
distances, thus guaranteeing sufficient demand for these systems.
Stations
The stations of the UFT network as its nodes are underground structures designed
as platforms with several tracks for handling the incoming and outgoing vehicles/
capsules. The area of floor of a given station depends on the number and length of
tracks. The latter is influenced by the length of a single vehicle/capsule or the
length of a ‘‘train’’ consisting of few units, i.e., vehicles/capsules. The floor level
of these stations is usually located above the pipe/tunnel level, which enables using
gravity for acceleration of the incoming and deceleration of the outgoing vehicles/
capsules, respectively. Each station can have a set of short tunnels at the same
level, each ending with an elevator (if the station is deep underground), which
enables lifting vehicles/capsules to/from the street level. From there, the vehicles/
capsules are delivered to their final destinations, and vice versa. Figure 6.6 shows
a horizontal layout of a station/terminal of a UFT system for pallets. The pipes/
tunnels connect the given station/terminal to the rest of the network. They all are
underground. Four elevators deliver vehicles/capsules with or without pallets
vertically to/from the neighboring streets (Liu 2004).
The technical/technological performances of a given UFT system relate to the

characteristics of its vehicles/capsules, and the systems for their driving, move-
ment control, and vertical transport.
Streets
Elevators
Station/Terminal
Pipes/tunnels
Elevators
Fig. 6.6 Scheme of the station/terminal of a UFT system for pallets (Liu 2004)
Vehicles/capsules
Depending on the UFT system, the vehicles/capsules can carry (standard) pallets
or containers, swap bodies and/or semi-trailers. Their cross-sectional shape would
be closely adapted to the shape of pipes/tunnels and their length to the length of the
boxes with freight shipments. Their steel wheels mounted on the bottom would
support the gross weight, i.e., the weight of the vehicle/capsule and that of the
freight/goods onboard. The steel wheels would enable movement along the steel
tracks, thus considerably reducing the rolling resistance as compared to rubber
tires (up to 0.002) and consequently contributing to saving energy. In addition, so-
called side wheels can be mounted on the vehicles/capsules in order to provide
their stability during moving through pipes/tunnels and reduce friction between
them and the walls of pipes/tunnels.
The vehicles/capsules can operate as single units or be coupled as a ‘‘train’’ of
two or three units. The typical capacity of a single vehicle/capsule of a UFT system
for pallets usually corresponds to 2 Euro pallets (800 9 1,200 9 1,500 mm) or to
about 2 tons of freight/goods. The dimensions and carrying capacity of a single
vehicle/capsule of a UFT system for containers and swap bodies usually corre-
sponds to one container or a swap body equivalent to 2TEU. Table 6.7 gives some
characteristics of the vehicles/capsules of a UFT system for pallets and containers.
Table 6.7 Characteristics of UFT system vehicles/capsules for pallets and containers (CC 1999;
Liu 2004)
Characteristic UFT system
CargoCap (Germany) New York city (USA)
Pallets Containers
Length/Width/Height (m) 4/1.4/1.6 12.81/2.6/3.0
Empty weight (tons) 0.8 25
Payload (maximal) (tons) 1.5 64
Gross weight (tons) 2.3 89
Track gage (mm) 800 1,453
The vehicles/capsules are mainly made from steel with thin outer aluminum
cladding of 1–2 mm enabling driving by LIM (Linear Induction Motor). The
loading/unloading of vehicles/capsules can be carried out at both underground and
aboveground stations by using the conveyor technique. The roll conveyors on the
vehicles/capsules automatically connect to those at the stations enabling loading
units to pass between them.
The system for driving vehicles/capsules
While moving through pipes/tunnels, the vehicles/capsules are supposed to be
most efficiently and effectively driven by one or more LIMs. The LIM can be
considered as an electric machine that converts electrical energy directly into
mechanical energy in translational motion. It consists of two components: a pri-
mary and a secondary. When powered by three-phase electric current, the primary
winding generates a moving flux. Then the current induced in the secondary reacts
with this flux and produces mechanical force. The LIMs are placed at convenient
distances along particular lines and particularly at the stations of a given UFT
system. At so-called LIM stations, usually two LIMs powered by three-phase
current are installed at each side of a pipe/tunnel, acting as the motor’s stator, i.e.,
the primary windings. Their shape should be adapted as close as possible to the
shape of the vehicles/capsules. The primaries of such LIMs interact with the
vehicles/capsules acting as the secondary while passing through, which generates
electromagnetic and then mechanical force pushing them as a pump down the
pipe(s)/tunnel(s). In order to act as the secondary, the walls of the vehicles/cap-
sules are made of two layers—the inner of steel as a ferromagnetic material and
the outer of aluminum as a good conductor. In order to ensure rather good effi-
ciency, the air gap between the wall of the vehicle/capsule and the LIM must be
about 1 cm at most. In general, the power, i.e., thrust force, of a given LIM (MW)
can be estimated as follows (Liu 2004):
Pin ¼ E V A Dp ð6:5Þ
where
E is the LIM’s efficiency (%);
V is the air speed in the pipe/tunnel under steady-state conditions (m/s);
A is the size of the inner area of a pipe/tunnel (m2); and

Dp is the pressure drop along the entire length of the system under steady-state
conditions (Pa(N/m2)).
The thrust Pin in Eq. 6.5 is supposed to be controlled most effectively by
changing the input current frequency, which enables the acceleration/deceleration,
cruising at constant speed, and breaking/stopping of the vehicles/capsules. Alter-
natively, the vehicles/capsules could have breaking systems similar to those of
conventional rail wagons, i.e., based on the use of compressed air as the energy
source to activate brakes. Each vehicle/capsule would have its own tank with
compressed air, whose discharging, and thus activating breaks would be achieved
through an automatic remote control system and onboard PLC (Programmable
Logic Controller). The brakes would be activated whenever needed—while
approaching the stations until complete stop and/or when preserving a safe dis-
tance to the vehicle/capsule ahead.
For large LIMs driving UFT systems for containers and swap bodies, the
required thrust could reach a couple of hundred MW and efficiency E should be
about 70–80 %.
In addition, thanks to using rail-based technologies, the steel-wheeled vehicles/
capsules could be switched between the steel tracks at stations/terminals or
intersections/branches of the pipes/tunnels similarly to conventional rail wagons.
The switches could be activated by the central computer when needed.
The system for controlling movement of vehicles/capsules
The vehicles/capsules need to be identified and sorted while moving through a
given UFT network of pipes/tunnels. For such a purpose, the corresponding sys-
tems would be installed at the locations such as the entry and leave station(s) and
inside the pipes/tunnels at each intersection/branching location. In the former case,
the type of freight/goods is identified including shippers and receivers. In the latter
case, the vehicle/capsule destination is identified in order to activate the appro-
priate switches. In general, UFT systems for pallets and containers are recom-
mended to use a RFID (Radio Frequency Identification) system. This generally
consist of a transported (identification tag) attached to each vehicles/capsule, an
antenna and stationary reader both attached to the wall of the pipe/tunnel, and
central computer located on the ground. As in the case of aircraft, the repro-
grammable transponder sends a high frequency radio signal, which is picked up by
antenna, read by the reader, and forwarded to the central computer for processing
(Liu 2004).
The system for vertical transport of vehicles/capsules
When the pipes/tunnels of a given UFT system are located deep underground (a
few tens of meters), the vertical transfer of both loaded and unloaded vehicles/
capsules between the street level and the system needs to be provided. A simple
straightforward solution is to use common elevators. They should be designed
according to the purpose (UFT system case) with a carrying capacity of one or a
few vehicles/capsules and a reasonable vertical speed of about 1–3 m/s. If the
tunnel/pipes, particularly those of a UFT system for pallets, are not so deep
underground, the entry/exit stations/terminals are elevated above the natural street
level, thus enabling gravity force to be used for accelerating and decelerating
incoming and outgoing vehicles/capsules, respectively.
The operational performances of a given UFT system are demand, capacity,

quality of service, the vehicle/capsule fleet size, and technical productivity.
Demand
Demand for a given UFT system can be expressed in terms of the number of
pallets, containers, and/or swap bodies expected to be served during a given period
of time (usually one year). In most case studies, UFT systems have been expected
to considerably affect the conventional truck transport system in given urban or
suburban areas by counting on taking over the volumes of demand that would
ensure their economic feasibility over their life cycle. This implies that UFT
systems would act as complete substitutes and not as complementary systems to
conventional truck transport. In general, demand has shown to substantially
influence the economic performances of UFT systems.
Capacity
The capacity of a given UFT system can be expressed by the maximum volumes of
freight/goods consolidated into pallets, and/or containers or swap bodies processed
during a given period of time under given conditions, i.e., constant demand for
service. For example, the capacity of a pipe/tunnel expressed in the weight of
freight/goods served can be estimated as follows:
Cp ðTÞ ¼ f ðTÞ n w ð6:6aÞ
where
T is the time period under consideration (hour, day, week, year);
f(T) is the frequency of vehicles/capsules passing through a given location in the
pipe/tunnel in a single direction during the time period T;
n is the number of vehicles/capsules per train; and
w is the weight (or the number of units) of freight/goods on-board the vehicle/
capsule (tons).
The frequency f(T) in Eq. 6.6a can be estimated as follows:

f ðTÞ ¼ T=s ð6:6bÞ
where
s is the minimum inter arrival time between two successive vehicle/capsule
trains (s).
The time interval s can be estimated as:
s ¼ d=v ð6:6cÞ
where
d is the minimum distance between any two successive vehicle/capsule trains
(m); and
v is the average operating speed of a vehicle/capsule train in the given pipe/
tunnel (m/s).
The typical average operating speed of UFT systems for pallets and containers is
planned to be about v = 30–40 km/h and the maximum speed about 80–90 km/h.
In addition, the capacity of a given UFT system station in terms of the weight of
freight/goods served during a given period of time can be estimated analogously as
in Eq. (6.6a). In such case, the time interval s represents the average injection
interval between successive vehicle/capsule trains at a given station (s). The
capacity of a pipe/tunnel and a station in terms of the volume of freight/goods
served can be estimated similarly as in Eqs. 6.6a–6.6c.
Quality of service
Quality of service is expressed by indicators and measures such as accessibility
and availability of services, delivery time, and reliability and punctuality of
services.
Accessibility and availability of services
The accessibility and availability of services depends on the spatial coverage of a
given UFT system and its operating regime. In particular, accessibility would be
high if there were a sufficient number of entry and exit stations of the system in
order to provide access of customers from the given urban or suburban area it
serves, as well as at a reasonably close distance from their door. This implies that,
in the optimal case, this distance should be about a couple of hundreds of meters.
Availability implies that the system needs to be accessible in order to accept and
deliver freight/goods shipments at the time convenient for the (quite different)
users/customers. Therefore, most concepts consider 24-h operation, i.e., avail-
ability of access, every day of the year.
Delivery time
The delivery time of freight shipments by a given UFT system depends on the
length of pipes/tunnels, i.e., lines, the operating speed of vehicle/capsule trains,
and the time needed for their vertical transport between the system and the ground
(street) level, and vice versa. This time can be estimated as follows:
td ¼ 2ðh=VÞ þ L=v ð6:6dÞ

where
h is the vertical distance between the system and the ground (street) level with
the entry/leaving stations (m);
V is the average speed of the elevators at both ends of a given pipe/tunnel
moving vehicles/capsules vertically (m/s); and
L is the length of a given pipe/tunnel (m).
The other symbols area s in the previous equations.
Reliability and punctuality of services
UFT systems are expected to provide reliable and punctual services by design.
This would be possible thanks to their full automation based on the centralized
computer system monitoring and controlling vehicle/capsule train movements.
Fleet size
The fleet size, i.e., the number of vehicles/capsules, can be estimated as follows:
NðTÞ ¼ maxfQðTÞ=w; f ðTÞ ½tl þ 2ðh=V þ L=vÞ þ tul g ð6:6eÞ
where
Q(T) is the demand oforf freight/goods to be transported during time (T) (tons);
and
tl, tul is the average loading and unloading time of a vehicle/capsule at shippers
and receivers, respectively (min, hours).
The other symbols are as in the previous equations. Equation 6.6e assumes that
each vehicle/capsule, in addition to the time of delivering goods, also spends
loading and unloading time at the shippers and receivers of freight/goods ship-
ments, respectively; in addition, each individual vehicle/capsule or train moves
full between freight/goods shippers–receivers and empty back, which implies
utilization of the available capacity N(T)w of about 50 %. This could be improved
by reasonably widening the diversity of freight/goods shipments transported.
The technical productivity of a pipe/tunnel of a given UFT system can be esti-
mated from Eq. 6.6a as follows:
TPp ðTÞ ¼ Cp ðTÞ v ð6:6fÞ
where all symbols are as in the previous equations. This indicates that, as intuitively
expected, container UFT systems have much higher technical productivity than
those for pallets, again explaining the shift in design from the latter to the former.
For example, let a specific UFT system deal with containers and swap bodies. Each
vehicle/capsule carries one container or swap body equivalent to 2TEU at an
average speed of v = 35 km/h. If they were injected into the system at stations/
terminals every: s = 30 s, during the time: T = 1 h, the technical productivity
would be: TPp(T) = (3600/30) 9 1 9 2TEU 9 35 = 8,400 TEU-km/h.
The economic performances of a given UFT system include its costs and revenues.
In assessing the feasibility of particular UFT system concepts, both have usually
been expressed per year over the period of the system life cycle of about 30 years.
Costs
The costs of an UFT system include the investment costs and operating costs.
The former includes the costs of building the system infrastructure (pipes/
tunnels and stations), and the costs of acquiring: (i) supporting facilities and
equipment (rails, elevators, LIMs, equipment in stations, control and communi-
cation system, etc.); and (ii) vehicles/capsules. The latter includes the costs of staff
operating the system, the costs of electricity consumption, and the other (mis-
cellaneous) costs. By dividing the total annual costs by the total quantity of freight
transported, the average unit costs can be obtained as the basis for setting the
prices of services. For example, some studies have indicated that the average unit
costs of the UFT system for pallets serving New Your City (U.S.) could be: 0.177
$US/ton. The costs of the UFT system for containers in the same city would be:
17.2 $US/TEU (Liu 2004).
Revenues
Revenues are obtained by charging for services provided by a given UFT system.
Usually rates are set to at least cover the unit total cost, thus guaranteeing feasible
operation. Otherwise, subsidies would be needed to cover the negative difference
between the costs and revenues. In the above-mentioned examples of the UFT
systems serving New Your City, these rates would need to be competitive to those
of conventional truck services: 20 $US/ton for the UFT system for pallets and
30 $US/TEU for the UFT system for containers (Liu 2004). This implies that both
systems would be profitable even without considering their contribution to
reducing externalities.
The environmental performances of UFT systems include energy consumption and

related emissions of GHG (Green House Gases), and land use/take.
UFT systems consume electrical energy mainly for powering the LIMs pushing
vehicles/capsules through the pipes/tunnels. The power of a single LIM based on
the power consumed by the flow of air and vehicles/capsules can be estimated as in
Eq. 6.5. In general, the total electricity consumption of a given UFT system would
be proportional to the product of the number of LIMs deployed, the power of each
of them, and their operating time. Since all three parameters could be high at large-
scale UFT systems, it is realistic to expect that they will, operating continuously,
consume a substantial amount of electricity. In relative terms, i.e., the energy
consumed per transported shipment, these systems are supposed to be more effi-
cient that their conventional truck counterparts serving the same urban and sub-
urban areas.
The total emissions of GHG of UFT systems is generally proportional to the
product of the quantity of electric energy consumed and the emission rates of the
primary sources for obtaining this energy. Again, these emissions with respect to
UFT systems are expected to be lower than those of conventional trucks in both
absolute and relative terms.
The achieved savings in energy consumption and related emissions of GHG by
replacement of truck transport under given conditions could thus be used as one of
the important criteria for assessing the overall social-economic feasibility of UFT
systems. This could particularly be justifiable if emissions of GHG were inter-
nalized, i.e., considered as externalities.
Land use
UFT systems do not use/take additional land since they are predominantly
underground constructions. Some very limited land may be used/taken at street
level for building access to entry/leave stations. By replacing trucks, the
requirements for new land for eventually widening the roads and streets including
providing parking spaces for trucks would be significantly reduced and not com-
pletely eliminated. This would be again taken into account in assessing the overall
social-economic feasibility of UFT systems.
The social performances of a given UFT system include noise, congestion, traffic
incidents/accidents (safety and security), and social welfare comprising both urban
and social effects. In contrast to conventional trucks, UFT systems are by design
free of impacts such as noise, congestion, and traffic incidents and accidents, the
latter causing injuries and loss of life. Even more, they are expected to be bene-
ficial in relieving a given urban or suburban population from these impacts by
trucks expected to be replaced. Thus, they contribute to overall social welfare,
which should be, similarly as above, taken into account in assessing their overall
social-economic feasibility. However, since such completely automatized systems
do not require substantive employment, employment in the truck transportation
sector due to rather substantial substitution could be affected, thus resulting in an
increase of the total unemployment in the given context.
The main policy performance of UFT systems is their attractiveness for the pro-
spective public or private financiers in terms of full commercialization under
conditions of completely liberalized freight transport markets (Visser 2010). In
many cases, this will need additional clarification of the role of private and public
entities interested in commercializing these systems. In addition, such clarification
would enable overall changes in the perception of both society and DM (Decision-
Making) institutions/bodies at different institutional levels (local-urban, regional,
and national). Specifically, the government as the public entity and DM can be
involved in commercialization of a given UFT system at four levels: (i) fully
through public initiative; (ii) through public–private partnership; (iii) through
supporting private initiative; and (iv) through providing a legal framework for a
fully private initiative.
In addition, in order to start participating more actively in the eventual com-
mercialization of UFT systems, the government, in general, needs to make three
mental shifts (Winkelmans and Notteboom 2000). The first is the cognitive shift
implying a change in perception toward UFT systems by considering them as a
solution for some freight transport-related problems. The second is the strategic shift
implying defining the strategic policy objectives related to UFT systems. The last is
the operational shift implying acting according to the specified policy objectives.
However, to date, the above-mental shift has not appeared to have fully taken place
yet. For example, in the Netherlands, UFT has been the matter of private and public-
funded research; governmental-policy consideration including setting up a test site
have been carried out since mid-1997, but the whole initiative was put on hold in
2002. In Japan, many private research and commercialization activities were carried
out on UFT systems in the 1980s and 1990s, but none with the strong government
support. The currently commercialized UFT systems developed by Sumitomo Metal
Industries for transporting different materials such as solid waste, minerals, and
construction material are owned by private companies. In the UK, in the early 2000s,
an initiative to commercialize a UFT system in London based on the Mail Rail tunnel
network failed to receive government support at any level: local, regional, or
national. In the USA, different initiatives for commercializing UFT systems have
been either fully or partially sponsored by the states’ or central government since
1990. However, these systems including the above mentioned for pallets and con-
tainers in New Your City have not yet received government support for final
commercialization. In Germany, despite being co-sponsored by the government, it is
still very uncertain whether the CargoCap systems for pallets and containers will
obtain government support for full commercialization.
An additional policy performance of UFT systems is represented by access for
users/customers acting as systems operators. The question is whether access will
be granted to one or a few mutually competing operators, like it was in the past and
is at present, respectively, within the railway freight transport sector. This seems to
be strongly dependent on the ownership, i.e., on whether the systems will be
private or public goods. In the former case, the privately built and operated UFT
system would allow access to a single user/operator. In the latter case, access
would be given to a few users/operators.
In summary, it seems that the above-mentioned policy performances of UFT
systems will need additional time for the overall mental shift to occur, thus
opening the path toward their commercialization under given (market) conditions.
6.3.2.9 Quantitative Performances of Selected UFT Systems
The performances of UFT systems are illustrated by two concepts: Automated

Capsule System for Pallets—CargoCap (Germany) and Subtarns (USA), and
Automated Capsule System for Containers—CargoCapContainer (Germany) and
Freight Shuttle (Texas, USA). They are given in the self-explanatory Tables 6.8
and 6.9, respectively (Kersting and Draganinska 2005; Rijsenbrij et al. 2006).
Tables 6.8 and 6.9 indicate that UFT systems for pallets and UFT systems for
containers and swap bodies, despite being designed for application under different
micro conditions, could be standardized similarly as railways, particularly regarding
some of their infrastructural, technical/technological, and operational performances.
6.3.3 Evaluation
The UFT systems for either pallets or containers possess both advantages
(Strengths and Opportunities) and disadvantages (Weaknesses and Threats).
Advantages
• The technology is known and available, thus making such systems for both
pallets and containers technologically feasible, i.e., sustainable;
• Some improvements in the social-economic feasibility could be achieved by
operating 24 h/day and fully automatizing the processes within the logistics
chains these systems serve;
• Mitigating the impacts of freight transport on the environment and society in a
given urban or suburban area(s) by direct and indirect savings in the energy
consumption and related emissions of GHG (Green House Gases), local noise,
congestion, traffic incident/accidents, and land use/take—all as compared to the
equivalent volumes of the presumably substituted transport by road trucks; and
• Flexibility in improving the overall social-economic feasibility by including
direct and indirect impacts on the society and environment– in case of inter-
nalizing externalities in the freight transport sector in a given urban or suburban
area(s).
Disadvantages
• Requiring completely new, dedicated predominantly underground infrastructure
(lines and networks of pipes/tunnels);
Table 6.8 Performances of UFT systems: Automated Capsule System for Pallets—CargoCap/
Subtrans (Liu 2004; Rijsenbrij et al. 2006)
Performances/type/indicator Value of indicator
Infrastructural
Pipe/tunnel (shape)
Circular (diameter) (single line) (m) 1.2/2.1
Pipe/tunnel
Length (km) 80/644
Construction material Steel or concrete Steel
Tracks
Station(s) (number/m) -/1/610
Network (type) Point-to-point (corridor)
(Limited number of freight/goods origins and
destinations)
Vehicle/capsule
Body/Wheels Steel
Carrying capacity
Euro pallets/vehicle/capsule
(W 9 L 9 H = 800 9 1200 9 1500 mm) 2/6
Maximum load (tons) 2/2
The vehicle/capsule driving system LIM/LIM
The vehicle/capsule braking system LIM or compressed air based
Operational
-/-
Demand (tons/day)(000—estimated)
Capacity (tons/day)(000—estimated) 113/205
Speed (km/h)
Average 36/40
Maximum 40/90
Operating time (h/day) 24/24
Economic
Average operating cost (€/ton-km) 0.72/0.54
Average total cost (€/ton-km) 1.51/0.67
Environmental
Energy consumption (kWh/ton) -/0.17
Emissions of GHG (Green House Gases) Depending on the primary sources for
producing electricity
Social
Noise Free/Free
Congestion Free/Free
Safety (traffic incidents/accidents) Free/Free
Policy
Availability of technology (Yes/No) Yes/Yes
Level of development Prototype without tests/LIM tested in the
laboratory
Perception/acceptance level Low-Fuzzy/Low-Fuzzy
Table 6.9 Performances of UFT systems: Automated Capsule System for Containers—Cargo-
CapContainer/Freight Shuttle (Liu 2004; Rijsenbrij et al. 2006)
Performance/type/indicator Value of indicator
Infrastructural
Pipe/tunnel (shape)
Rectangular (two lines) (width, height) (m) 10, 7
Circular (diameter) (single line) (m) 8
Pipe/tunnel
Length (km) -/116
Construction material Concrete
Tracks Steel
Station(s) (number) -/2
Network (type) Point-to-point (Corridor)
Vehicle/capsule 4-axes automotive rail wagon
Body/Wheels Steel
Carrying capacity (TEU/vehicle/capsule) 2
The vehicle/capsule driving system LIM (three-phase current)
The vehicle/capsule braking system LIM or Compressed air based
Operational
Demand (TEU/day) (000—estimated) 10/30
Capacity (TEU/day) (000—estimated) -/30.2
Speed (km/h)
Average 40
Maximum 80–90
Operating time (h/day) 24
Economic
Average operating cost (€/TEU-km) 0.03–0.08
Average total cost (€/TEU-km) 0.04–0.35
Environmental
Energy consumption (kWh/TEU) -/112.8
Emissions of GHG (Green House Gases) Depending on the primary sources for
producing electricity
Social
Noise Free
Congestion Free
Safety (traffic incidents/accidents) Free
Policy
Availability of technology (Yes/No) Yes/Yes
Level of development Concept/No prototype or demonstration
Perception/acceptance Low-Fuzzy
• Being still at the conceptual level of commercialization—despite the availability

of the technology, only a few prototypes have been built and limited demon-
strations carried out;
• Uncertainty in the overall socioeconomic feasibility due to high infrastructure
costs such as the tunnel-building costs and the highly uncertain average oper-
ational costs;
• Requiring additional costly consolidation/deconsolidation of freight/goods
shipments (the systems for pallets) to enable smooth interoperability with other
conventional freight transport systems/modes—particularly road and rail;
• Requiring rather substantial and stable medium- to long-term demand for eco-
nomically feasible operations under competitive conditions; at present such
demand exists only in short-distance markets implying the potential feasibility
of these systems in these markets;
• Inflexibility, i.e., inherent vulnerability, in adapting to changes of the structure
of given urban and suburban area(s) due to changing locations of the businesses
of particular service users/consumers (i.e., users leaving their locations); and
• Complex and time-consuming decision-making, planning, and building pro-
cesses prolonging and increasing the uncertainty in time of the return on
investment; in addition to difficulties to provide sufficient demand in particular
markets, these facts make prospective investors hesitant to act.
Finally, it can be said that the UFT systems are still at the conceptual level of
development and commercialization. At present, prospective investors seem to be
hesitant to commercialize them mainly due to the systems’ high infrastructure
costs and consequently high uncertainty in the overall social-economic feasibility.
Although the technological barriers have been overcome, the policy barriers
related to the role of particular actors involved in investment, ownership, access,
and position in the liberalized freight transport markets in the urban and suburban
areas they serve need further clarification. Nevertheless, it seems very likely that
urbanization, the related conventional freight transport, and consequent environ-
mental and social impacts, particularly those of road trucks, will continue to grow.
Under such circumstances, UFT systems will have to be reconsidered in all above-
mentioned aspects as an alternative and complementary solution for mitigating the
impacts in the medium- to long-term future.
6.4 Evacuated Tube Transport System
1910s The modern concept of a Vactrain with evacuated tubes and maglev technology explored
by U.S. engineer Robert Goddard (USA)
1914 A Vactrain concept offered in the book Motion without friction (airless electric way) of
Russian professor Boris Weinberg (Russia)
1970s A series of elaborate engineering articles about Vactrains published in the year 1972 and
1978 by R. M. Salter of RAND (USA)
(continued)
6.4 Evacuated Tube Transport System 323
(continued)
1980s The experimental German TRM train to operate in the large underground tunnels with
reduced air pressure equivalent to that at the altitude of 68,000 ft (21,000 m)
proposed by the Swissmetro (Switzerland)
1980s The transoceanic tube floating above the ocean floor anchored with cables proposed by F.
P. Davidson (the chairman of the Channel Tunnel project) and Y. Kyotani (a
Japanese engineer) (UK, Japan)
The future economy and society until and beyond the year 2050 will likely mainly
be characterized by demography, resources, and global development (ACARE
2010). Demography will be characterized by: (i) continuing growth: the world’s
population is expected to reach 9–10 billion; (ii) an aging population: by 2,100, the
average age will be about 40 years in all countries; the largest population group
will be that of about 50 years old; and both will likely increase the economic
pressure on the health system; (iii) growing developing economies: the strength-
ening ‘‘middle’’ class in countries like Brazil, India, Russia, China will certainly
create new increasing demand for mobility; and (iv) urbanization: by 2025 about
two-thirds of the world’s population will live in cities, many of which are to be
developed into mega-cities.
The resources will be characterized as follows: (i) energy: the cost of energy
will continue to increase particularly after the peak of crude oil production, which
is expected around 2030; alternative sources will need to be developed in any case
simply because the conventional ones will start to run out; (ii) technology: ICT
(Information and Communication Technologies) will continue to influence and
lead to an increasingly dematerialized economy; nanotechnology will be able to
create new materials with a wide range of applications including in transport; and
(iii) environment: the main development will seemingly be a change of the earth’s
climate with its perceivable consequences; certain parts of the world will face
limited availability of fresh water.
Global development will be characterized as follows: (i) geopolitics: the rise of
new economic and political powers such as China, Brazil, India, and Russia will
lead to a multipolar world with the likely gradually decreasing influence of the
USA and (ii) economy and trade: the character of economic development in the
long-term will continue to be ‘growth-leading to-growth’ despite impacts of
economic/political crises from time to time; the above-mentioned new emerging
economic powers will continue to strengthen their influence.
The future transport system will be characterized by continuous growth of
demand mainly sustained by demographic and economic development (growth).
The main attributes of the transport system serving such demand are expected to
be as follows: (i) connecting people: connecting large urban agglomerations and

markets thus further fostering globalization of economic and trade; (ii) providing
transport services of refined quality at reasonable costs: transport services will
have to be adapted to the very differentiated users’ needs (business and leisure) in
terms of sufficient capacity, travel time, reliability, punctuality, safety, and secu-
rity, i.e., in terms of the acceptable generalized door-to-door travel costs; (iii)
further diminishing the impacts on the environment and society: the energy con-
sumption and related emissions of GHG (Green House Gases), local noise, con-
gestion, traffic incidents and accidents, and waste will have to be further reduced
by advanced technologies and operations; and (iv) contribution to the national and
global economics: this will continue to be achieved through employment and
expanding, i.e., through synergies of new technologies from other fields/areas.
The ETT (Evacuation Tube Transport) or ‘Vactrain’ defined as a very high-
speed long-haul transportation system could potentially be an advanced future
transport system. The ETT system was elaborated for the first time in the 1910s by
the U.S. engineer Robert Goddard. In general, the concept assumed that the trains
would operate at speeds of about 1,600 km/h in vacuumed4 underground tunnels/
tubes. In addition, Russian professor Boris Weinberg designed a ‘Vactrain’ con-
cept in 1914. The rather well elaborated concept again emerged in the 1970s
(Salter 1972). In the late 1970s and early 1980s, Swissmetro considered operating
experimental German TRM (TransRapid MAGLEV) trains in large underground
tunnels with the pressure reduced to the altitude of 68,000 ft (21,000 m). In the
1980s, Frank P. Davidson, founder and chairman of the Channel Tunnel project,
and Japanese engineer Yoshihiro Kyotani proposed a system consisting of a tube
floating at least 300 m below the ocean surface anchored with cables. The depth of
floating would be sufficient to prevent impacts of water turbulence.
In these concepts of the 1970s, the range of operating speeds of ETT system
trains was supposed to be several thousand km/h (6,400–8,000 km/h, which is
about 5–6 times the speed of sound at sea level and standard conditions-
1,225 km/h). As such, in terms of operating and commercial (travel) speed, the
ETT system would be superior to conventional and past supersonic (Concorde,
TY144) APT, and quite comparable to the forthcoming STA (Supersonic Trans-
port Aircraft).
After being fully conceptualized, the ETT system would be able to take over
substantial numbers of passengers and volumes of freight/goods from the APT (Air
Passenger Transport) system and thus, as an environmentally friendlier system/
mode, contribute to mitigating the negative impacts on the environment and
society in terms of energy consumption from nonrenewable resources (crude oil)
and related emissions of GHG (Green House Gases), and noise around airports.
4
‘Vacuum’ is defined as an air-free or almost the air-free space.
6.4.2.1 Background
The main components of a given ETT system are its vacuumed tunnels/tubes,
TRM trains, and supporting facilities and equipment for energy supply, main-
taining vacuum in the tunnels, train/traffic control/management systems on-board
the vehicles and on the ground, and fire protection systems. They all influence the
system’s performances, and vice versa.
Similarly to other transport systems, the ETT system is characterized by its
infrastructural, technical/technological, operational, economic, environmental, and
social/policy performances. In general, even under the present conditions of no
prototype system existing, they could be analyzed and modeled using the ‘‘what-
if’’ scenario approach and bearing in mind the preferences of the particular actors/
stakeholders involved such as providers/managers of transport infrastructure,
manufacturers of vehicles/trains, users and providers of transport services, gov-
erning bodies at different institutional levels (local, regional, national, and inter-
national), and local communities.
The infrastructural performances include design of the individual tubes and their
network.
Tubes
The infrastructure of the EET system would be designed according to two con-
cepts. The first implies building underground tunnels under the sea floor, while the
alternative implies installing undersea floating tubes anchored to the seabed by
steel cables. The latter concept would consist of two designs: (i) two transport and
one separate service/maintenance tube; the separate tube would be also shared
with pipelines for oil, water, gas, electric power transmission lines, communication
lines, etc. and (ii) a single tube divided vertically into three sections—the main
section with the train lines, the maintenance section above, and the emergency
section below the main section. Figure 6.7a, b shows these designs where TRM
trains would be used (Salter 1972; Sirohiwala 2007).
The floating tubes could be made of two types of materials: either pure steel
guaranteeing air-proof at a rather moderate cost or composite materials with steel
and concrete where the inner thin layer of steel would be the inside and the
concrete the outside wall of the tube. Due to the need for eliminating heating from
the tube mainly coming from train operations, materials with good thermal con-
ductivity would have to be used. For example, common steel would be better than
stainless steel. Locating tubes deep underwater (300 m) in combination with water
pipes inside the tubes could be a solution for the heating problem (Zhang et al.
(a)
TRM vehicle
TRM vehicle
Transport tube
D = 6m
3.9m
1.15m 1.15m
1.15m 1.15m
D = 3.0m
3.70m
Service/maintenance tube
Service/maintenance section
(b)
2.5m
TRM vehicle
D = 10.0m
0.8m 1.0m 0.8m
D1 = 5m Main section
3.7m 3.7m
2.5m
Beam Emergency section
Fig. 6.7 Schemes of the tube design for an underwater ETT system, a Double tube, b Single
tube
2011). The thickness of the tubes’ walls would be sufficient to sustain the water
pressure at a given depth from the outside and almost zero pressure from the inside
(at the depth of 300 m the outside pressure is about 30 atm, i.e., the pressure
increases by 1 atm for each 10 m of depth (atm—atmosphere)). The tubes would
be composed of prefabricated sections joined together in order to compose an
airtight tube. Alternatively, an interlocking mechanism would be incorporated into
the sections in order to keep them assembled. The vacuum-lock isolation gates at
the specified distance would be constructed in order to evacuate air from particular
sections of the tubes more efficiently and thus prevent the spreading of potentially
large-scale air leakages throughout the entire tubes. These gates would consist of
vertically up and down moving doors, which could also function as part of the fire
protection system. These doors would be closed during initial evacuation of air
from the tubes and in the cases of large-scale leakages, and opened otherwise
(Salter 1972).
The question arises whether such built and equipped tubes incorporating
additional TRM guideway(s) would be able to float at the given depth. This will
depend on the resultant buoyant force Wb as the difference between the weight of
the tube Wp (positive) and the weight of the displaced water Ww (negative) as
follows:
W b ¼ W p W w ¼ M q0 V ð6:7aÞ
where
M is the mass (weight) of the tube(s) (kg);
q0 is density of sea water (tons/m3); and
V is the volume of displaced water equal to the volume of tube(s) (m3).
If Wb = 0, the tube(s) will float at the surface; if Wb \ 0, the tube(s) will be

pushed upwards implying that they would need to be anchored to the ocean floor
by a cable system in order to stay at the given depth; if Wb [ 0, the tube(s) will
sink to the sea floor.
The mass (weight) of the tube can be determined as the product of the volume
of the shell of a tube DV and the specific gravity of the material sm. The volume of
the shell of a tube can be calculated as follows:
DV ¼ p ðR22 R21 Þ L ð6:7bÞ

where
R1 , R 2 is the inside and outside radius of the tube (m) (R1 \ R2); and
L is the length of the tube (m).
The mass (weight) of the tube is as follows:
M ¼ DV sw f ¼ p ðR22 R21 Þ L sm f ð6:7cÞ

where
f is the factor of increasing the total mass (weight) of the tube due to its internal
content.
The mass (weight) of the displaced water is equal to the product of the internal
volume of the tube V and (sea) water density q0 as follows:
q0 V ¼ q0 p R21 L ð6:7dÞ
As shown in Fig. 6.7a, in the case of the two transport and single service/
maintenance concept, the inside and outside diameter of each transport tube would
be about D2 = 2R2 = 6.2 and D1 = 2R1 = 6.0 m, and that of the service tube
Ds2 = 2Rs2 = 3.2 and Ds1 = 2Rs1 = 3.0 m, respectively. The diameter of trans-
port tubes is specified regarding the profile of TRM trains of a width and height of
3.70 and 4.16 m, respectively (Table 5.4, Chap. 5). In addition, these tubes would
accommodate ‘‘at grade guideways’’ for TRM trains (currently, their height is
1.25–3.5 m with a support by of reinforced concrete piers set up at a distance of
2.75 m; the height of the steel hybrid guider is 0.4 m (Chap. 5). For example, let
the specific density of ocean water be: q0 = 1.027 tons/m3; the dimensions of the
tubes are as above; the factor f = 2 for installing guideway(s) and other systems
inside; the average specific gravity of the tubes’ material is: sm = 5.67 tons/m3
(this is the 60/40 % mix of steel (specific gravity: ss = 7.85 tons/m3) and concrete
(specific gravity: sc = 2,400 tons/m3)). Then, for a given length of tube of
L = 1 m, based on Eqs. 6.7a–6.7c, the buoyant force for the transport tube would
be: Wb = 21.72–29.02 = -7.3 kg \ 0, which implies that the tube would float and
must thus be anchored to the ocean floor. By carefully adjusting the values of the
parameters, particularly factor f, more accurate results could be obtained. In
addition, the strength of the buoyant force would be used to specify the need for
anchoring cables.
In the above-mentioned calculations, the thickness of walls of all tubes has been
adopted to be 200 mm. But would this be necessary? Theoretically, the minimum
thickness of a given tube (tm) can be estimated as follows (Antaki 2003):
3 D2
tmin ¼ Pa ð6:7eÞ
4 B
where
Pa is the maximum allowable external pressure on the wall of the tube (MPa);
and
B is the strength of the material the tube is made of (MPa).
The tube(s) would be evacuated and thus without any significant internal
pressure. In the above example, the strength of the material (60/40 steel/concrete
mix) is: Bm = 1,240 MPa, which is at the same time the collapse pressure Pc
(Bs = 2,000 MPa; Bc = 100 MPa; MPa—Mega Pascal; 1 atm = 0.101325 MPa).
Then the maximum allowable pressure for this mixture of materials would be:
Pa = (1/3) Pc = 1,240/3 = 413.3 MPa. In addition, the actual pressure at a depth
of 300 m where the tubes would be placed is: Pa = 30 atm (i.e., & 3.04 MPa),
which is much lower than the above maximum allowable pressure. Then, based on
Eq. 6.7e, the minimum required thickness of the tube wall would be:
tm C 11.03 mm. For example, at a depth of 500 m, this would be: tm C 18.39 mm.
Both values are far below the adopted wall depth of 200 mm.
Taking into account the length of the link/line of about 5,664 km (the distance
between London (UK) and New York (USA)), the quantity of material used to
build two transport and one service/maintenance tube with 200 mm thick walls
and the specific gravity of the mixture of material (5.67 tons/m3) would amount to
about 152 million tons, In addition, building the given link/line would take at least
20 years.
As compared to underground tunnels, this concept seems to be more attractive,
mainly due to the nature of the construction work and supporting activities, and the
overall investment costs. In addition, it seems to be more resistant to earthquakes
and other kind of large-scale disruptive events on the one hand, but also more
exposed to the eventual terrorist and other attacks on the other. The other details
on the construction process could be found in the reference literature (Salter 1972;
Sirohiwala 2007; Zhang et al. 2011).
Network
The individual tubes and intermodal terminals would compose the EET system
network, which would consist of two subnetworks as follows:
• The subnetwork at the higher level consisting of links/lines connecting large
(hub) intermodal passenger terminals at the coasts of particular continents. The
links/lines as the tunnels/tubes would lie mainly under the sea level with a short
portion as an underground construction (between the coast and the inland
intermodal passenger terminal(s)); and
• The subnetwork at the lower level consisting of links/lines as tunnels/tubes
connecting continental large urban agglomerations and coast terminals; these
would be completely underground constructions.
The two subnetworks would meet each other at intermodal terminals near the
coast(s). The links/tubes of the higher network would be predominantly under
water. One of the characteristic cases could be the link/line under Atlantic Ocean
connecting Europe and North America (e.g., London and New York). The tubes
would begin and end at the intermodal passenger terminals enabling exchanging
passengers between the ETT system and its feeder systems under the same ‘‘roof’’.
Figure 6.8 shows the simplified sheme of an intercontinental higher level ETT
system/network with a single link/line.
Technical/technological performances relate to the vacuum pumps, vehicles, and

traffic control/management system.
Continent 1 Continent 2
Sea/Ocean
TA
ETT system
TB
Sea/Ocean
TA, TB – Terminals of the ETT system

Local/regional transport network (tram, bus, metro)
National/continental transport network (conventional/HS rail, short-,and medium-haul APT)
Fig. 6.8 Scheme of an intercontinental ETT system network with a single link/line (tube)
Vacuum pumps
After assembling the tubes, MAGLEV guideways, energy system for both vehi-
cles, vacuum pumps, and other supporting facilities and equipment will need to be
installed. The vacuum pumps would be applied to initially evacuate and later
maintain the required level of vacuum inside the tunnels/pipes. In particular,
creating the initial vacuum consists of two steps: (i) large-scale evacuation and (ii)
removal of smaller molecules near tunnel walls using heating techniques. In
addition, any potential leakages of air would need to be dealt with. These require
powerful vacuum pumps consuming a lot of energy, at least during the initial step.
An alternative could be to create a vacuum at very low pressure, for example, at
about 0.01–0.0001 atm (equivalent to the altitude of about 50 km). How would the
pumps work? At the initial stage, they would be operating until achieving the
required tube evacuation level. Once the required vacuum conditions were set up,
the pumps would automatically stop and the vacuum-lock isolation gates would be
opened. In cases of air leakage in some section(s), the corresponding gates would
be closed and the pumps activated again. The pumps would be located along the
tube(s) in the required number depending on the volumes of air to be evacuated,
available time, and evacuation capacity. For example, along the Atlantic line,
about 200 units each with a vacuuming capacity of 100 m3/min and energy con-
sumption of 260 KW would be located at a distance of about 28 km. The volume
of air to be evacuated from the two tubes with a diameter of 6.0 m and one tube of
3.0 m, and a length of 5,564 km would be about 354 million m3. The initial
evacuation would take about 12.3 days (Sirohiwala 2007).
Vehicles and propulsion
As mentioned above, the EET system would use TRM (Trans Rapid Maglev) type
vehicles. Such as, for example, German TRM07 trains whose technical/technological
performances are given in Table 5.3 (Chap. 5). The exceptions from those in this table
are the operating speed and acceleration/deceleration rate(s), which would be, thanks
to moving through vacuum, much higher—the operating speed would be about
6,400–8,000 km/h and the horizontal acceleration/deceleration to/from these cruising
speeds about 3.0–5.0 m/s2. The trains would be pressurized similarly to modern
commercial aircraft (about 1 atm) (Zhang et al. 2011).
The ETT TRM trains would very likely be powered by some type of rocket
engine, mainly due to the requirements for the very high supersonic speeds in the
vacuumed tubes/tunnels. This is because these engines do not rely on the atmo-
spheric oxygen. These rocket engines would presumably be powered by nuclear
energy as a propellant. Most of the energy would be consumed during acceleration
and deceleration phase of a journey. During cruising phase, due to the vacuum
conditions in the tube/tunnel, the TRM trains would move thanks to the inertial
force gained after acceleration. Consequently, the rolling and aerodynamic resis-
tance during cursing phase of a journey as the two additional main causes for the
energy consumption would be completely eliminated. In addition, operating in the
airless tinnel(s)/tube(s) at the very high speeds would eliminate, on the one hand,
the shock waves at the moment of breaking the sound barrier (important for
passing trains in a single tunnel/tube concept), and on the other air friction and the
consequent heating of trains. Even under conditions of the very low air density in
the tubes, the latter two would be negligible. Nevertheless, heat shields would be
incorporated in the trains in order to protect them from overheating caused by
unpredictable air leakages. Under such circumstances, if, for example, a mass of
the two-car TRM train was 110 tons (as in Table 5.3), then based based on the
Newton’s laws, a rocket engine of about 733 MW would be needed to accelerate/
decelerate the train to/from the cruising speed of 8,000 km/h.
Traffic control/management system
The traffic control/management system would be fully automated. The main reason
is the very high speed of TRM trains, which can be monitored but not controlled by
their drivers. In addition, under such conditions, the driver simply would not have
time to react in unpredicted events. Consequently, the trains would be controlled
(guided) automatically analogously to modern unmanned flying vehicles (UAV)5 ,
and managed (separated) along the link/line according to TRM principles.
The operational performances relate to demand, capacity, and quality of service,

vehicle fleet size, technical productivity, and a ‘‘what-if’’ operating scenario.
5
At present, these are designed pilotless aircraft, but due to transmitted electronic means and/or
their autonomous on-board flight management control system, they do not need active
intervention by a pilot-flight controller.
Demand
The passenger demand for the above-mentioned higher level ETT subnetwork
would be collected and distributed from the lower level ETT system, short-haul
and medium-haul Air Passenger Transport (APT), High-Speed Rail (HSR),
TransRapid Maglev (TRM), conventional rail and bus systems, local urban mass
transit systems (subway, tram, bus), and individual passenger cars. The corre-
sponding modal-based freight transport systems would be used for collecting/
distributing the freight/goods shipments. For the lower level EET subnetwork, the
demand would be collected and distributed in a similar way.
The most important attribute of choosing the ETT system would be the total
door-to-door travel time. This consists of the accessibility time and the time on-
board the ETT system. The time on-board consists of the scheduled delay, i.e., the
average waiting time for a departure, depending on the departure frequency, and
vehicle/transit time. If the value of passenger time is taken into account, the
generalized cost function can be formulated as follows:
ffi ffi
T v d v
Uðd; TÞ ¼ a h þ 1=2 þb þþ þ þ pðd; TÞ ð6:8aÞ
f ðTÞ g vðdÞ g
where
a is the value of passenger time of assessing the ETT system and while
waiting for a departure (€/min);
h is the time of accessing the EET system (min);
b is the value of passenger time while on-board the ETT system (€/-min);
T is the period of time (day, h);
f(T) is the service frequency during the period (T) (dep/T);
v(d) is the cruising speed of the ETT train along the route/line (d) (km/h);
gþ , g is the acceleration/deceleration rate of the EET trains (m/s2); and
p(d, T) is the fare for a trip on route/line (d) during time (T) (€/pass).
A similar form of generalized cost function could be used for the ETT system’s
main competitor—APT (Air Passenger Transport). Then, the probability of
choosing the ETT system as mode (1) instead of APT as mode (2) at time (T) can
eU1 ðTÞ
p1 ðTÞ ¼ P2 ð6:8bÞ
Ui ðTÞ
i¼1 e
The number of passengers choosing mode (1-ETT) at time (T) can be estimated
as follows:
Q1 ðTÞ ¼ p1 ðTÞ QðTÞ ð6:8cÞ
1400
Realized
Forecasted until 2031
RPKs (Revenue Passenger Kilometers) - billions/year
1200 Forecasted beyond 2031
1000
800
600
400
200
0
1995 2005 2015 2025 2035 2045 2055
Year
Fig. 6.9 Possible development of APT (Air Passenger Transport) demand between Europe and
North America (Boeing 2012)
where
Q(T) is the total number of passengers intended to travel along the given route/
line at time (T) by competing modes (1-ETT) and (2-APT).
Given the above-mentioned scenario of the future long-term development of the

transport system, operating between large urban (continental and intercontinental)
agglomerations appears the most convenient for the ETT system as it would be
able to generate sufficient passenger and/or freight/goods demand. This implicitly
implies competition with the long-haul APT (Air Passnger Transport) system. One
such prospective intercontinental passenger market could be the one between
Europe and North America (Airbus 2012; Boeing 2012). Figure 6.9 shows
development of APT demand in this market for the 2011–2050 period. Its share in
the total global APT6 demand of about 8.3 % in 2011 would decrease to about 6.5
or 5.4 % in 2031, thus indicating its increasing maturity over time (Boeing 2012;
Airbus 2012).
The development of APT demand in Fig. 6.9 is based on the average annual
growth rate of 3.8 % over the 2011–2031 period. Beyond the year 2031, this rate is
6
Generally, for the period (2011–2030/31), both Boeing and Airbus predict annual APT growth
in terms of RPK (Revenue Passenger Kilometers) of about 5 % (Airbus 2012; Boeing 2012).
assumed to be 2.5 % for the 2031–2041 period, and 1.75 % for the 2041–2051
period, thus indicating further maturation of the market and weakening of its
demand-driving forces on both sides of the Atlantic.
Beyond the year 2050, the EET system is supposed to be in operation and take
over part of the APT demand. The attracted demand would consist mostly of
business passengers and shippers/receivers of high-value time-sensitive freight/
goods, both considering the transport time as one of the most important attributes
for choice of the transport mode/system (currently they use the APT system). Later
on, the ETT system could become increasingly convenient for more massive use
also by ‘‘middle class’’ users-passengers and other categories of freight/goods
shipments. This implies that the main driving force for development of the ETT
system, in addition to sufficient demand, would be the intention to travel at the
substantially higher speeds and consequently reducing travel time, in an eco-
nomically viable, environmentally acceptable, and safe way, all as compared to the
fastest counterpart—the APT system.7
Capacity
The service frequency of the ETT system on a given route/line f1(T) during time
(T) satisfying the expected demand can be determined as follows:
Q1 ðTÞ
f1 ðTÞ ¼ ð6:8dÞ
k1 ðTÞ n1 ðTÞ
where
k1(T) is the average load factor of an ETT train departing during time (T); and
n1(T) is the seating capacity of an ETT train departing during time (T) (seats).
Quality of service
Passengers on-board the ETT TRM trains would be exposed mainly to the hori-
zontal acceleration/deceleration, lateral, and vertical acceleration force g
(g = 9.81 m/s2). The horizontal force would be: F = ma (a = 3–5 m/s2). The
impact could be mitigated through the design of the ETT tubes (preferably as
straight as possible in both horizontal and vertical plane) and appropriate
arrangements of seats within the trains. The former would be rather complex to
achieve particularly in the vertical plane since the long intercontinental tubes have
to align with the Earth’s curvature. In the horizontal plane, the straight line shortest
(Great Circle) distances would very likely be followed.
Thus, the lateral component of the g-force would be minimized, and only the
other two-horizontal and vertical—would remain. Under such conditions, if the
trains were accelerating/decelerating at the rate of a = 3–5 m/s2, and the vertical
7
Economic viability implies the system’s ability to cover its costs. Environmental acceptability
implies at least not additionally contributing to impacts on environment and society. Safety
means operating without incidents and accidents due to known reasons.
component was always 9.81 m/s2 (i.e., 1 g), the resulting force would be:
1.04–1.12 g, which could be acceptable for most passengers due to not particularly
affecting their riding comfort.
Fleet size
Given the service frequency f1(T) in Eq. 6.8d, the fleet size of the given ETT
system can be estimated as follows:
N1 ðTÞ ¼ f1 ðTÞ ttr ð6:8eÞ
where
ttr is the ETT train’s turnaround time (min).
The turnaround (ttr) in Eq. 6.8e can be estimated as follows:

v d v
ttr ¼ 2 ts þ þ þ þ ð6:8fÞ
g vðdÞ g
where
ts is the train’s stop time at the beginning and end terminal (min).
Technical productivity for the ETT system can be determined as the product of the
offered capacity per given period of time and the operating speed.
Train/vehicle
TP1=v ðTÞ ¼ n1 ðTÞ v1 ð6:8gÞ
Route/line
TP1=r ðTÞ ¼ 2f1 ðTÞ n1 ðTÞ v1 ð6:8hÞ
‘‘What-if’’ operating scenario
The ‘‘what-if’’ operating scenario is developed for the year 2050/2051 when the
EET system connecting Europe and North America is supposed to be in place
competing with the APT system. It is assumed that the APT system will not yet
operate STA (Supersonic Transport Aircraft). According to the scenario in
Fig. 6.9, the APT system is supposed to carry out about 1,350 billion RPKs in
2051. The ETT system operating at a speed about nine times higher and having
higher prices of about 100 % would be able to attract about 45 % of this volume.
Assuming the travel distance of 5,564 km (that between London and New York),
the annual number of trips in both directions attracted by the ETT system would be
about 109.184 million. The daily number amounts to about 149,567 per direction
(these numbers do not include the induced demand, i.e., that using the system as
the first choice from the beginning). If served by TRM trains of a seating capacity
of 2 9 200 = 400 seats and load factor 0.80, the daily service frequency would be
456 dep/day or 16 dep/h per direction, i.e., every 3.75 min. Assuming that the
train’s running time along the route/line of length of 5,564 km would be 54 min
(acceleration/deceleration at a rate of 3 m/s and cruising at a speed of 8,000 km/h),
the number of trains simultaneously operating in each direction would be
17 9 (54/60) & 15, separated by a distance of about 378 km. Respecting the
train’s running time of 54 min and the stop time at both ends of the route of
15 min, the required fleet for service frequency of 16 dep/h would be
2 9 (54 ? 15)/60 9 16 & 39 trains. At each end terminal, the required number
of tracks to handle departing and arriving trains would be 2 9 16 9 (15/60) & 8
tracks. The length of each track would be about 150–200 m, in order to enable
comfortable passenger embarking and disembarking of train(s).
The technical productivity of a single train during cruising phase of a journey
would be 400 (seats) 9 8,000 (km/h) & 3.2 million s-km/h. The technical pro-
ductivity of the system during 1 h would be 2 9 16 (dep/h) 9 400 (seats) 9 8,000
(km/h) & 102.4 million s-km/h.
The economic performances of the EET system include costs, revenues, and a
‘‘what-if’’ economic scenario.
Costs
Infrastructure
The costs include expenses relating to the infrastructure and rolling stock. The
infrastructure costs would consist of investment, maintenance, and operating costs.
The investment costs generally include the costs of building tubes (2 ? 1), TRM
guideways, and terminals at both ends of the given tube/tunnel. They also include
the costs of facilities and equipment such as vacuum pumps, the power supply
system, traffic control system, communications, and fire protection system (http://
tunnelbuilder.com). The maintenance costs include the costs of regular and capital
maintenance of infrastructure and supporting facilities and equipment. The oper-
ational costs mainly include the costs of labor and energy for maintaining vacuum
in the tubes.
Rolling stock
The cost of rolling stock would consist of the investment and operational cost. The
former relates to acquiring the TRM train fleet. The latter includes the cost of
maintenance, material, labor, and energy to operate the TRM fleet under given
conditions.
Revenues
Revenues would be mainly obtained from charging passengers and freight/goods
shippers. In addition, the savings in externalities such as energy consumption and
related emissions of GHG, noise around airports, congestion, and traffic incidents
and accidents by substituting APT could be taken into account, particularly when
the EET system is considered from the broader international social/policy per-
spective. Furthermore, there could be savings in the costs of passenger time
compared to those of the APT system.
‘‘What-if’’ economic scenario
According to the ‘‘what-if’’ economic scenario, the ETT system connecting Europe
and North America is assumed to provide a return on investment over a period of
40 years. At present, the investment costs for building tubes appear to be very
uncertain but some estimates indicate that they could be about 13–18 million €/km
(i.e., 72–103 billion € for the entire link/line of length of 5,564 km including
terminals at both ends) (http://www.popsci.com/scitech/article/2004-04/trans-
atlantic-maglev). The cost of building the TRM guideway in the tube in a single
direction would be similar as at the today’s TRM—about 15 million €/km (i.e., for
two tracks this gives the total investment cost of: (5,564 km) 9 (2 9 15) million €/
km = 167 billion €) (Table 5.4 in Chap. 5). Thus, if the system was built over the
20-year period between 2030 and 2050, the total infrastructure investment cost
would be about 239–270 billion €, or without taking into account the interest rate(s),
5.975–6.750 billion €/year (the cost of facilities and equipment—vacuum pumps,
power supply system, traffic control system, and fire protection system are included).
As an illustration, the share of the investment costs in the cumulative GDP of Europe
(EU) (544.05 trillion €) and North America (USA, Canada) (688.76 trillion €) during
that period would be about 0.04–0.05 %, and 0.035–0.039 %, respectively.8
The costs of operating infrastructure would amount to about 10 % of the
investment costs, which would give total infrastructure costs of about 6.573–7.425
billion €/year. Assuming that the passenger demand in each year of the invest-
ment-returning 40-year period would be at least at the same level as in 2051, i.e.,
about 592 billion RPKs, the investment costs would be about: 0.0111–0.0125 €/
RPK or 0.0139–0.0157 €/s-km (the load factor is 80 %).
The operational cost of a TRM (Transrapid Maglev) system would be about
0.085 €/RPK (similarly as in Table 5.4, Chap. 5). As a result, the total costs of an
EET system would be 0.0911–0.0925 €/RPK and 0.11388–0.11568 €/s-km. The
minimum return fare between Europe and North America covering the costs would
be about 1014–1029 €/pass, which would be reasonably competitive with today’s
APT business fares in the given market.
8
The base for estimating GDP in Europe and North America during the period 2030–2051 has
been GDP in 2011 (CIA 2012). The average annual growth rate of GDP in both areas is assumed
to be 3 % over the 2011–2051 period.
Savings in the costs of passenger time could also be achieved; thanks to the
difference in travel speed of both systems. For example, if the average value of
passenger time would be rather low, say about 32 €/pass h (Chap. 5), and the
difference in travel time about 6 h (0.7 h by the ETT system and about 6.7 h by
APT), the total savings in the cost of passenger time in 2051 would be about 20.5
billion € [592 (billion RPK)/5,564 (km) 9 6 (h) 9 32 (€/h)].
6.4.2.6 Environmental and Social Performances
The environmental and social performances relate to impacts of a given EET system
in terms of: (i) energy consumption and related emissions of GHG (Green House
Gases) and land use/take (environmental); (ii) noise, congestion, safety (traffic
incidents and accidents) (social); and (iii) a ‘‘what-if’’ environmental scenario.
Energy consumption of an ETT system includes the energy for operating TRM
trains, setting up and then maintaining vacuum in the tubes, and powering other
supporting systems, facilities, and equipment. The amounts of energy would be
substantive. For example, only for a single trip (service) the energy consumed for
accelerating a 110 tons TRM train from 0 to 8,000 km/h would be about
75.445 MWh. If in this latest and all above-mentioned cases the energy was
obtained from renewable (sun, wind, and hydro) and nonrenewable nuclear
sources, this would mean almost zero emissions of GHG. Even if a LCA (Life
Cycle Analysis) was considered, these emissions would be almost negligible
(IBRD 2012).
Land use
ETT system would occupy additional land only for their coast terminals should
they not already be incorporated into the surrounding urban structures.
Noise
ETT system would not generate any noise disturbing the population around the
begin and end terminals. This is because of operating TRM trains at the low speeds
in their vicinity.
Congestion
Due to the nature of operations, the ETT system would be free from congestion
along the links/lines. In addition, regarding the intensity of operations, automated
traffic management systems would have to provide precise guidance in order to
achieve almost perfect (in terms of seconds) matching of the actual and scheduled
departure and arrival times. However, while relieving airports from congestion by
taking over APT demand, ETT system could contribute to increasing congestion in
the areas around the begin and end terminals simply due to the increased intensity
of mobility described above.
Safety
ETT system is expected to be at least as safe as its APT counterpart. This implies
that incidents and accidents should not occur due to the known reasons. However,
special attention would have to be devoted to the external security of infrastructure
(tubes), for example, to ways of monitoring and preventing eventual terrorist
attacks.
‘‘What-if’’ environmental scenario
According to the ‘‘what-if’’ environmental scenario, the propellant/energy used by
the ETT system would be completely obtained from nonpolluting nonrenewable
(nuclear) and renewable (solar, wind, and water) sources. In addition, this implies
that the emissions of GHG from burning these propellants would be negligible
compared to that from burning today’s kerosene. Under such conditions, taking
over the passenger demand from the APT system would reduce the volumes of its
operations and consequently the overall impacts on the environment and society.
Again, it is assumed that the APT system will not operate STA at that time. Let’s
assume that an aircraft type similar to the B787-8 would be mostly operated in the
market in 2051. Its average fuel consumption is about 0.0262 kg/s-km or
0.0328 kg/RPK (the load factor is assumed to be 80 %) (Chap. 2). The emission
rate of JP-1 fuel is 5.25 kgCO2e/kg of fuel, thus giving the emission rate of the
aircraft of about 0.138 kgCO2e/s-km or 0.172 kgCO2e/RPK. For the annual vol-
umes of APT traffic taken over by the ETT system of 592 billion RPK, the total
saved fuel consumption and related emissions of GHG would be about 19.4 and
102.0 million tons, respectively.
The cost of CO2e emissions from APT have been estimated according to dif-
ferent scenarios. In the first so-called BAU (Business As Usual) or ‘‘high’’ scenario
it is 0.045 €/RPK, which gives the total cost savings of 26.64 billion € (IWW-
INFRAS 2004). If NASA’s ‘‘Subsonic Fixed-Wing Research Fuel-Reduction
Goals’’ program is realized by the years 2030–2035, the above-mentioned unit
emissions could be reduced by about 50–70 % and consequently the unit costs
would fall to 0.009 €/RPK (‘‘low’’ scenario). Consequently, the savings in CO2e
emissions in the given case would be about 5.32 billion € in 2051 (GAO 2009;
IBRD 2012; IWW-INFRAS 2004).
In addition, the total APT externalities would be: 0.07 €/RPK (emissions of
GHG, noise, incidents and accidents, and land use), thus enabling the ETT system
to achieve annual savings of about 41.44 billion € in 2051 (if being commer-
cialized) (IBRD 2012).
The ETT system could have significant policy performances both of the national
and international (global) character. On the national scale, the main performance
would be its contribution to creating an integrated transport system. On the
international scale, the main performance would be contribution to creating an

integrated global international very high-speed nonair transport system, which
would even more strongly contribute to the further globalization of the already
highly global economy and society. The former is explained above. The latter, on
the one hand, would imply engaging transport/logistics operators to manage door-
to-door services, i.e., operate the entire intermodal system in which the ETT
subsystem would have the crucial role. On the other, the ETT system project(s)
would need substantive knowledge, expertise, and funding, which could be pro-
vided efficiently and effectively only through international cooperation. In such
respect, the implementation of the system would be a platform for integrating
mankind and turning it toward similar future projects for a better future.
6.4.3 Evaluation
The described EET system possesses both advantages (Strengths and Opportuni-
ties) and disadvantages (Weaknesses and Threats) as follows:
Advantages
• More or at least equally efficient and effective as the conventional existing and
future APT (Air Passenger Transport) system it is assumed to compete with;
• More environmentally and socially friendly as compared to the conventional
existing and future APT system;
• Contribution to creating an integrated global transport system for both passen-
gers and freight on both national and particularly on the international-global
scale;
• Economically, socially, and politically important on the national and particu-
larly on the international scale due to contributing to further: (i) concentration of
existing and developing new resources (knowledge, skills, materials, building/
construction processes, mechanization, etc.); (ii) globalization of economies
through the project funding sources (the national and particularly international),
and (iii) economic, social, and political integration of the societies involved.
Disadvantages
• The system’s inherent uncertain real social/economic feasibility (who would
really need to travel at the offered supersonic speeds and under what
conditions?);
• Very high investment costs, but as a very small proportion of the GDP of the
areas involved (this implies that in the given case the principal funding would
come from EU and North America (ECB (European Central Bank), U.S. Federal
budget, IMF (International Monetary Fund), World Bank, and large private
enterprises interested in the system/project);
• Long lead time for commercialization (at present the lead time seems to be no
shorter than 20 years from when the works begin);
• The unknown technical/technological barriers in developing components, pro-

cesses, and techniques, and natural barriers (both could substantively increase
the planned funding and lead time for commercialization);
• Uncertain and inherent instability of the political, economic, and social condi-
tions during implementation and operationalization, and latter during full
commercialization of the system;
• Inherent vulnerability to potential terrorist attacks; and
• Facing other emerging and presumably more feasible systems and technologies
in the meantime, i.e., during the lead time for commercialization.
Finally, before the eventual further elaboration of the feasibility of the ETT
system for its eventual commercialization, the above-mentioned advantages and
disadvantages should be carefully considered. Some numerical figures provided in
this section could change in absolute but not substantially in relative terms including
their relationships. They indicate that the ETT system might be, under certain con-
ditions, a new promising very high (supersonic) speed long-haul transport system.

and Operations for Increasing Airport Runway
Capacity
1921 ATC (Air Traffic Control) is introduced for the first time at London Croydon Airport (UK)
1950s VOR’s and later VORTAC’s (Very High Frequency Omni-directional Range and
Finding), ILS (Instrument Landing System), and approach lighting systems are
implemented (USA)
1950s Radars are widely deployed to control commercial air traffic; aircraft continue to fly along
fixed air corridors (USA)
1960s Aircraft begin to carry radar beacons/transponders identifying them, and thus making the
radar more efficient (USA, Europe)
ATC (Air Traffic Control) remains based on radars and flight corridors, but becomes
increasingly computerized (USA, Europe)
2000s Plans to replace radars with satellite-guided systems emerge (U.S. NextGen and EU
SESAR Programs) (USA, Europe)
The ultimate capacity of a given airport runway system is defined as the maximum
number of aircraft that can be accommodated during a given period of time
(usually 1 h) under conditions of constant demand for service. At many airports,
this capacity and particularly its landing component is considered as the main
constraint to their future growth (Janic 2006, 2007a). In general, aircraft landings
always have ultimate priority over take-offs when they request service at the same
runway at the same time. This however depends on the pattern of demand for these
particular operations on the one hand and the number of runways used on the
other. At airports with a single runway, the landings and take-offs can interfere
with each other when the demand for service reaches the runway ultimate landing
or take-off capacity. In such cases, take-offs are usually inserted between suc-
cessive landings or vice versa, both at the appropriate time gaps. London Gatwick
(London, UK) and NY LaGuardia airport (New York, USA) are characteristic
examples of such runway operations. At airports with several runways, these can
be separately used for landings and take-offs simultaneously or after some time. In
this case, the two types of operations do not interfere with each other despite
demand for each type reaching the corresponding ultimate runway capacity during
a given period of time (usually one to a few hours). Operating two independent
parallel runways in segregated mode (one exclusively for landings and another
exclusively for take-offs at London Heathrow Airport (UK) at the level of their
ultimate capacities during almost the whole day is an illustrative example. This
and some other airports such as Paris Charles de Gaulle, (Paris, France) and
Amsterdam Schiphol (Amsterdam, the Netherlands) airport (hosting the hub-and-
spoke network(s) of the SkyTeam alliance), and Frankfurt Main (Frankfurt, Ger-
many) airport (hosting the mega hub-and spoke network of STAR alliance) in
Europe are examples of the airports where ‘‘waves’’ of landings are followed by
‘‘waves’’ of take-offs several times during the day. The incoming ‘‘waves’’ are
exclusively served on a given runway(s) operating at its ultimate landing capacity.
The ‘‘waves’’ of departing flights are then exclusively served using the same
runway(s), this time at its take-off capacity. In each of these cases, the runway
landing capacity appears critical because of two reasons. First, it influences the
number of landings and consequently the number of take-offs latter on both during
the given period of time. Second, it influences the size of the ‘‘incoming’’ and
consequently of the outgoing ‘‘waves’’ of flights, and thus the overall airline hub-
and-spoke network performance.
Under such circumstances, many theoretical and practical endeavors have been
made to understand, analyze, calculate, increase, and diminish vulnerability of the
runway landing capacity to bad weather by identifying the most influential factors
and then finding the corresponding solutions.
6.5.2 Analyzing Performances
6.5.2.1 Technologies
The theoretical and practical endeavors to increase the runway landing capacity are
contained in the current U.S. NexGen and the European-EUROCONTROL SESAR
research and development programs (Thompson 2002; http://www.faa.gov/nextgen;
http://www.sesarju.eu). They are focused on developing advanced technologies
6.5 Advanced Air Traffic Control Technologies 343
aiming at supporting more effective, efficient, and safe operations of the future air
transport system and those of the airport runways as well. Specifically, the tech-
nologies to support the advanced landing procedures and consequently contribute to
increasing the runway landing capacity are given in Table 6.10.
The contribution of SESAR technologies is expected to be as follows (http://
www.sesarju.eu):
• Reducing the current distance-based separation rules and complementing them
with time-based separation rules during descent and final approach and landing,
dynamic wake vortex detection and prediction in addition to recategorization of
the current aircraft wake vortex categories (ASAS and WVDS onboard the
aircraft and as the ATC automated supportive functions (tools));
• Developing the ATC decision support tools for efficient and effective
sequencing of aircraft during their initial and final approach and landing (i.e.,
upgrading existing Integrated Arrival/Departure Manager);
• Introducing the initial and final approach procedures with Vertical Guidance
(AVP), which can also be part of the 4D P-RNAV trajectories whose incoming
(the first) segment is CDA (Continuous Descent Approach) procedure;
• Developing ATC aids for monitoring aircraft along their 4D RNAV trajectories
and new approach procedures, conflict advisory and resolution, and improve-
ment of safety nets (by using aircraft-derived data); and
• Developing ground ATC data link processing and management functions
through considering initial data link applications building upon LINK2000+ and
future enhanced applications.
The NextGen technologies are expected to contribute as follows (FAA 2011a,
b, c; http://www.faa.gov/nextgen):
• Enabling efficient and reliable approach and landing at airports not equipped
with ILS under reduced visibility conditions; this particularly refers to airports
operating closely spaced parallel runways (RNP);
• Enabling precise final approach and landing at secondary airports not equipped
with ILS, thus relieving the complexity of procedures for the aircraft
approaching the primary airports in the same metropolitan area (WAAS or
RNP1 and/or RNP with Curved Paths);
• Mitigating uncertainty concerning the current and prospective position of air-
craft along their 4D RNAV trajectories including the final approach and landing
segment by double monitoring, on-board the aircraft and at the ATC (ADS-B);
• Implementing CDA as a common practice with the aircraft engine minimum
power, thus enabling mitigation of the environmental impacts (fuel consumption
and related emissions of greenhouse gases, and noise burden); at the same time
the aircraft is precisely guided along the descent trajectory, thus enabling their
vertical separation in the vicinity of the FAG (Final Approach Gate) (CDA,
RNP, WAAS as a supplemental system to GNSS); and
• Improving surveillance at airports which currently do not have radar
surveillance.
Table 6.10 Advanced technologies for advanced airport landing procedures (EC 2005, 2007a; FAA 2010; http://www.sesarju.eu; http://www.faa.gov/
344
nextgen)
Function/User Technology Availability
Air traffic flow management tools/ • CTAS (Center/TRACON Automation System) assists in optimizing the arrival Now
ATC flow and runway assignment;
• Updated Integrated Arrival/Departure Manager enabling the advance planning Now but still to be Improved in the
and updating the arrival sequences according to the selected separation rules medium term (NextGen)
and service discipline
Air traffic surveillance/ATC • RADAR of improved precision enables reduction of the minimal separation Now with additional improvements
between aircraft from 3 to 2.5 nm; in the medium term (NextGen)
• PRM (Precision Runway Monitor) consisting of a beacon radar and computer Now
predictive displays, thus enabling the independent use of dual- and triple-
dependent parallel runways spaced at less than 4300 ft (ft = feet).
• WVDS (Terminal Wake Vortex Detection System) providing information about Medium to long term (NextGen)
the current and prospective wake vortex behavior during landings and take-offs
6
Avionics/aircraft • FMS (Flight Management System) in combination with RNP (Required Now (NextGen)
Navigational Performance), thus enabling more precise following of 4D P-
RNAV trajectories, thus reducing aircraft position error including that of
arriving at the final approach gate;
• ADS-B (Automatic Dependent Surveillance Broadcasting) improving situation Medium to long term (NextGen)
awareness onboard and with respect to other surrounding air traffic. is used
independently, but in addition to TCAS and enhanced CDTI (Cockpit Display
of Traffic Information);
• CDTI (Cockpit Display of Traffic Information) provides integrated traffic data Medium term (NextGen)
onboard the aircraft, which may reduce the separation rules between aircraft;
• ASAS (Airborne Separation Assistance (Assurance) System) enabling airborne Medium term (NextGen; SESAR)
surveillance, display of traffic information, and consequently sequencing and
merging at the final approach gate using data from ADS-B;
(continued)
Table 6.10 (continued)
Function/User Technology Availability
• ACAS (Airborne Collision Avoidance System) improving the quality of Medium term (NextGen)
information for ASAS, thus enabling reducing position error along 3D RNAV
trajectories TCAS (Traffic Alert and Collision Avoidance System) indicating
the spatial relation of two aircraft and thus providing instructions to avoid
potential conflict(s);
• TCAS–Traffic Alert and Collision Avoidance System shows the spatial relation Now
of two aircraft and provides instructions to avoid potential conflict(s);
• WVDS (Wake Vortex Detector System) onboard the aircraft enables the Medium to long term (NextGen)
collection and display of information on the existing wake vortex to both pilots
and ATC controllers;
• WAAS (Wide Area Augmentation System) supplementing and thus improving Medium to long term (NextGen)
basic GNSS position accuracy;
• LVLASO (Low Visibility Landing and Surface Operating Program) reduces Medium to long term (NextGen,
controls and predicts the runway occupancy time; SESAR)
• New data link infrastructures (improved LINK 2000+) enabling exchanging of Medium to long term (SESAR)
the constantly updated aircraft current and expected position obtained from
FMS to external recipients—other aircraft-pilots and ATC
‘‘Mixed’’ traffic surveillance and • Distributed Air Ground Solution combining ADS-B, TCAS, and ATC tools, thus Medium term (NextGen, SESAR)
conflict alert/ATC and aircraft enabling simultaneous aircraft-ATC air traffic surveillance, alerting and
resolution of potential conflicts
345
6.5.2.2 Landing Procedures, ATC Separation Rules, and Service

Disciplines
Landing procedures
The advanced procedures for approach and landing on a single runway to be
supported by the above-mentioned advanced technologies are classified into three
categories: (a) Single segment with nominal GS (Glide Slope) angles; (b) Double
segment with nominal and steeper GS angle(s); and (c) Single segment with
ultimately arbitrary GS angle(s). Figure 6.10a–c shows a simplified scheme.
(a)
i – Leading aircraft i i – Leading aircraft i
j – Trailing aircraft k j – Trailing aircraft k j
FAG – Final Approach Gate FAG – Final Approach Gate
T – Runway landing threshold T – Runway landing threshold
L/i and H/k, respectively L/i and H/k, respectively
i
vi <= vj vi>vj δ ij
j
i
θ θ
Runway T δ ij FAG Runway T FAG
γ γ ij
ij
(b)
i – Leading aircraft i i – Leading aircraft i j
j – Trailing aircraft k j – Trailing aircraft k
FAG – Final Approach Gate FAG – Final Approach Gate 0
Hii
T – Runway landing threshold T – Runway landing threshold
L/i and H/k, respectively L/i and H/k, respectively i j
vi<= vj vi>vj
j Outer segment
i θ
θ
Runway T Inner segment FAG
Runway T δ ij FAG γ ij
γ ij
(c)
i – Leading aircraft i i – Leading aircraft i j
j – Trailing aircraft k j – Trailing aircraft k
FAG – Final Approach Gate FAG – Final Approach Gate
0
T – Runway landing threshold T – Runway landing threshold Hii
L/i and H/k, respectively L/i and H/k, respectively
i
visinθ i<= v jsinθ j visinθ i >vjsinθ j
j
0
i Hij
θj θj
θI θI
Runway T FAG Runway T FAG
γi γi
Fig. 6.10 Schemes of conventional and advanced approach procedures to a single runway (Janic
2012), a Single segment with nominal GS angles, b Double segment with nominal and steeper GS
angles, c Single segment with ultimately arbitrary GS angles
Single segment—nominal GS angles

This final approach procedure is supported by the ILS (Instrument Landing System)
or MLS (Microwave Landing System) where all aircraft use the same GS angle
along the entire final approach path connecting the FAG (Final Approach Gate) and
the landing threshold T. Figure 6.10a shows a simplified scheme in the vertical
plane. Currently, at most airports, the ILS provides the standardized-nominal GS
(Glide Slope) angle of 3. In some specific cases such as when mitigating noise or
avoiding obstacles in the final approach plane, the GS angle can be steeper, i.e.,
greater than the nominal GS. Consequently, all commercial aircrafts are certified
for a nominal GS angle of 2.5–3. Some smaller regional aircraft are certified for
both nominal and steeper GS angles of 3–5.5, respectively.9
The MLS (Microwave Landing System) has been designed as an alternative to
the ILS offering higher flexibility of GS angles from 2.5 to 7–8, but again only for
certified aircraft (Kelly and La Berge 1990). However, except in some specific
cases, it has not been widely applied. Furthermore, the above-mentioned research
and development programs—US NextGen and European-EUROCONTROL SE-
SAR—seemingly do not particularly consider MLS as a future alternative to ILS.
Thus, at least presently, GS angle flexibility provided by MLS is not considered.
The ATC exclusively applies the minimum horizontal distance-based separa-
tion rules to all types of sequences of landing aircraft differentiated in terms of
their approach speeds as follows: ‘‘Slow–Slow,’’ ‘‘Slow-Fast,’’ ‘‘Fast-Slow,’’ and
‘‘Fast–Fast’’ (Tosic and Horonjeff 1976). Some research also suggests the appli-
cation of ATC time-based separation rules under the same conditions, which could
eventually increase the level and stability of the landing capacity with respect to
weather (Janic 2008).
Double segment with nominal and steeper GS angles
This final approach procedure is based on the concept of ‘‘Individual Flight
Corridor(s)’’ (i.e., 4D RNAV trajectories connecting WP (Way Point) of beginning
the intermediate approach, FAG, and the landing threshold T). Figure 6.10b shows
a simplified scheme in the vertical plane. This concept was originally designed for
landing on closely-spaced parallel runways (Rossow 2003). 4D final approach
trajectories consist of outer and inner segments. As applied to a single runway,
these 4D trajectories overlap in the horizontal and vertical plane along the Inner
segment. They can overlap and/or differ in both horizontal and vertical planes
along the outer segment. This implies that the Inner segment applies a common
(usually nominal) GS angle for all aircraft categories. The outer segment can have
different (flexible) and/or the same GS angles for particular aircraft categories.
Thus, the prime distinction from case (a) is that all aircraft use the common
9
The earliest, De Havilland DHC-6 and DHC-8, were certified as STOL (Short Take-Off and
Landing) aircraft. Later, regional aircraft Cessna Citation, BAe RJ 85/100, Fokker 50, Dornier
328, Embraer ERJ 135/170, and recently the larger Airbus A318 were certified for the steeper GS
angle of 5.50 (EC 2005; TC 2004).
nominal GS angle (3) along the Inner segment and different GS angles (3–6)
along the outer segment. Under such circumstances, the ATC mixed horizontal and
vertical distance-based separation rules can be applied to particular types of
landing sequences. For example, in sequences ‘‘Slow–Slow,’’ ‘‘Fast–Fast,’’ and
‘‘Slow-Fast,’’ ATC horizontal distance-based separation rules and in the sequence
‘‘Fast-Slow,’’ vertical distance-based separation rules can be applied.
Single segment with ultimately arbitrary GS angles
This final approach procedure is based on 4D RNAV trajectories consisting of a
single straight and/or curved line segment connecting the FAG and the runway
landing threshold T. For the same and/or different aircraft categories, this segment
can differ in the horizontal plane except from the very short common portion in the
vicinity of the runway landing threshold T. This segment is used for achieving full
landing configuration and speed. In the vertical plane, the approach trajectories of
particular aircraft categories can be entirely different due to distinctive GS angles.
Figure 6.10c shows a simplified scheme in the vertical plane. In addition, each of
these trajectories can be considered as the end part of a CDA (Continuous Descent
Approach) trajectory aimed at reducing flying time, fuel consumption, related
emissions of greenhouse gases, and noise around particular airports (Helmke et al.
2009). Thus, a range of GS angles (3–6) can be assigned to particular aircraft.
Consequently, contrary to cases (a) and (b), the trajectories of the leading aircraft
in all sequences can be higher, the same, and/or lower than those of the trailing
aircraft, and vice versa. At the same time, as in case (b), 4D RNAV trajectories are
supported by multiple ILS GP or MLS, as well as other above-mentioned inno-
vative and new technologies. The diversity of the actually small GS angles of 4D
RNAV final approach trajectories offers an opportunity for the ATC to exclusively
apply vertical distance-based separation rules to all sequences of landing aircraft.
In this manner, depending on the location where this minimum vertical separation
is established (the runway landing threshold T or FAG), the trailing aircraft in
almost all sequences can come closer to the leading aircraft while always being
above and thus fully protected from the wake vortices moving behind and below
the flight paths of the leading aircraft. Consequently, the horizontal distances in
particular aircraft sequences have become generally shorter than in the cases
(a) and (b), i.e., when the current ATC horizontal distance and/or innovative mixed
horizontal/vertical distance-based separation rules are exclusively applied,
respectively.
ATC separation rules
Currently, landing aircraft is separated by the ATC (Air traffic Control) minimum
horizontal distance-based separation rules, which for given aircraft approach
speeds generate the minimum interarrival times at the runway threshold as the
‘‘reference location’’ for counting operations, and consequently the maximum
flow, i.e., the landing capacity (Tosic and Horonjeff 1976). At US (United States)
airports, two categories of ATC horizontal distance-based separation rules are
applied depending on the weather: IFR (Instrument Flight Rules) under IMC
(Instrument Metrological Conditions) and VFR (Visual Flight Rules) under VMC
(Visual Meteorological Conditions) (FAA 2010; NASA 1999). The former rules
being stricter than the later are the sole responsibility of ATC; the latter are in sole
responsibility of the aircraft/pilots. As being shorter, these rules imply higher
landing capacity. Consequently, at the U.S. airports where both rules are applied,
the ultimate runway landing capacity appears to be inherently unstable with
respect to the weather conditions. At European airports, IFR are applied under both
IMC and VMC, thus providing relatively higher stability of the runway landing
capacity with respect to the weather (ICAO 2001, 2008).
Supported by the above-mentioned technologies, the ATC is supposed to use
four types of separation rules between landing aircraft exclusively and/or in
combination.
Horizontal distance-based separation rules
Thees rules are set up to protect trailing aircraft from the wake vortices of the
leading aircraft in the particular landing sequences. In the USA, they are specified
for both IMC and VMC as IFR and VFR, as given in Table 6.11 (FAA 2010,
2011). In Europe, they are only specified for the IMC as IFR.
Table 6.11 indicates that the current FAA IFR applied under IMC are about
40 % stricter than the VFR applied under VMC, which on average makes the
landing capacity under IMC about 30 % lower than that under VMC (FAA 2010,
2011). Since the Super Heavy A380 still represents a rarity in the dense arrival
streams at many airports, it is not given in Table 6.11. Nevertheless, it is worth
mentioning that the ATC IFR separation rules vary from 4 nm between two
A380 s to 6, 7, and 8 nm when an A380 is leading and a Small, Large/B757, and
Heavy are trailing aircraft in the landing sequence, respectively (ICAO 2008).
Furthermore, according to the ICAO rules, aircraft is categorized into four wake
vortex categories: light, medium, heavy, and super heavy (A380) (EC 2005; ICAO
2007, 2008). The separation rules in Table 6.11 and their ICAO modalities can be
applied to the above-mentioned operational procedure (a).
Mixed horizontal/vertical distance based separation rules
These rules can be applied similarly as horizontal distance-based separation rules,
but by replacing the longest horizontal separation intervals in Table 6.11 with
the vertical ones, thus being applicable to the above-mentioned operational
procedure (b).
Vertical distance-based separation rules
These rules are supposed to be 1,000 ft (ft—feet) for all landing sequences if being
exclusively applied, mainly to the above-mentioned operational procedure (c)
(FAA 2010; NASA 1999). However, they can also be made dependent on the type
of landing sequence similarly as their horizontal distance-based and time-based
counterparts.
Table 6.11 FAA horizontal distance-based separation rules between landing aircraft (nm—
nautical miles) (FAA 2010, 2011; NASA 1999)
i/j VFR IFR
Small Large B757 Heavy Small Large B757 Heavy
Small 1.9 1.9 1.9 1.9 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5
Large 2.7 1.9 1.9 1.9 4 2.5 2.5 2.5
B757 3.5 3 3 2.7 5 4 4 4
Heavy 4.5 3.6 3.6 2.7 5 5 5 4
Table 6.12 Derived ATC minimum time-based separation rules for landing aircraft (minutes)
(Janic 2012)
i/j Small Large B757 Heavy
Small 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0
Large 1.5 1.0 1.0 1.0
B757 2.0 1.3 1.5 1.2
Heavy 2.5 1.5 1.5 1.2
Time-based separation rules

These rules can be applied to the above-mentioned operational procedure (a)
instead of horizontal distance-based separation rules. An example of these rules is
given in Table 6.12.
The time-nbased separation rules are actually based on the VFR horizontal
distance-based separation rules in Table 6.12, and typical aircraft final approach
speeds (Small—120 kts; Large—130 kts; B757—and Heavy—155 kts). They
ensure protection of the trailing aircraft from the wake vortices of the leading
aircraft in particular landing sequences on the one hand, and provide a higher
stability of the landing capacity to the weather conditions on the other (Janic
2008).
The above-mentioned ATC separation rules are under permanent revision
aiming at incorporating advanced knowledge about wake the vortex behavior of
existing and particularly new aircraft. For example, this includes possible recat-
egorization of particular aircraft wake vortex categories and setting up modified
separation rules. Thus, the currently medium aircraft can be segregated into Upper
Medium (A330, A300, A310, B767, B757-300, B757-200—MTOW [= 120 tons
and \250 tons), Medium (A320, B737-[2|3|4|5|7]00, A321, B737- [8|9], MD 80—
MTOW [= 40 tons \120 tons), and Lower medium (CRJ, ERJ, ATR—
MTOW [0 7 tons and \40 tons). The remaining categories are Heavy (A380,
B747/787, C5A, C17, MD11, A340, B777, DC 10—MTOW [250 tons) and
Small (MTOW \7 tons). The corresponding ATC separation rules can be a
combination of the rules given in Table 6.12 (Freville 2008). In addition, the most
recent example are the separation rules of 10 nm set up for Heavy B787-8 as the
leading aircraft in all landing sequences (see Chap. 2).
Service disciplines
ATC is assumed to be able to apply two service disciplines to the aircraft landing
on a single runway. The first commonly applied at most airports is the FCFS (First
Come—First Served) service discipline, where aircraft is accommodated on the
runway according to the actual time of their arrival or request for service (landing).
The other is the PR (Priority) service discipline, which gives priority to particular
aircraft over others irrespective on their actual request for landings. In this case,
ATC creates rather homogenous clusters of aircraft in terms of their wake vortex
categories and landing speeds and then serves them according to the specified
order. Under such circumstances, except between different clusters, ATC separa-
tion rules are uniform within the cluster. Usually, clusters of larger (faster) aircraft
are given priority over smaller (slower) aircraft. In order to avoid unnecessary
delays due to clustering, ATC can apply this service discipline most efficiently if
the aircraft are already in the queue requesting service ultimately at the same time.
In some cases, the airlines’ schedule can favor application of this discipline (the
airlines’ flight scheduling at their hub airports can consist of ‘‘waves’’ of heavy
aircraft followed by ‘‘wave’’ of large and ‘‘wave’’ of small aircraft, both during
landings and take-offs (Janic 2009)). In any case, the eventual implementation of
this (PR) service discipline, in addition to be manageable by ATC, would need to
be accepted by the airlines. The former implies safety, efficiency, and effectiveness
of execution, while the latter implies making the main prospective advantages and
disadvantages transparent and clear.
6.5.2.3 Implementation of Advanced Landing Procedures
Both the SESAR and NexGen program aim at trajectory-based control implying
performance-based navigation and aircraft position information (FAA 2011a;
http://www.sesarju.eu).
The properly equipped aircraft with SESAR and NextGen technologies will be
able to follow 4D P-RNAV (Precision Area Navigation) trajectories from the
departure to the arrival airport gates. ATC will be able to rather accurately predict the
aircraft position over time, i.e., where they will be as compared to the current system,
which informs where they currently are. Aircraft will be able to follow these tra-
jectories by useing FMS (Flight Management System) and fulfillment of RNP
(Required Navigational Performance) (FAA 2011a). The latter will be possible
thanks to continuously improving onboard systems, whose accuracy depends on
GNSS (Global Navigation Satellite System) (an additional supplement to increase
accuracy of GNSS is WAAS (Wide Area Augmentation System) (Table 6.10).
The aircraft position will be continuously and precisely monitored by using
ADS-B both at ATC and onboard of other equipped aircraft (ADS-B uses GNSS to
determine the aircraft position in real time, its transponder to provide its identity
and altitude, and a data link to broadcast and receive positioning information (FAA
2011a)).
The ADS-B will enable carrying out the initial and intermediate descent of 4D
P-RNAV trajectories as CDA. In particular, while performing the advanced final
approach procedures, the aircraft will be continuously self-guided and monitored;
thanks to 3D view surveillance monitors onboard in combination with CDTI. The
ATC will monitor them similarly. Such double monitoring will enable ATC to
systematically apply the current but reduced horizontal, mixed horizontal/vertical,
exclusively vertical distance-based, or time-based separation rules between aircraft
approaching and landing at the same and/or different (in advance assigned) GS
angles provided by the multiple-angle ILS system. Choice and safe use of these
separation rules will be supported by ASAS in addition to both on-board and
ground WVDS (FAA 2011a; http://www.sesarju.eu).
The ATC will sequence the approaching and landing aircraft according to the
selected service discipline using the updated Integrated Arrival/Departure Man-
ager. The other onboard (existing TCAS) and forthcoming ATC conflict detection
and resolving tool(s) will function constantly. Consequently, the arriving aircraft
from en-route to the landing threshold will be automatically separated in order to
provide minimum spacing and sequencing achieving the runway landing capacity
under given conditions.
6.5.2.4 Operationalization of Advanced Landing Procedures
Operationalization of the above/mentioned advanced landing procedures in com-

bination with applying diverse ATC separation rules and service disciplines
requires the fulfillment of three sets of conditions as follows:
• Supportive advanced technologies should be available;
• The aircraft of particular wake vortex categories should be certified for different
(including steeper) GS angles; and
• Both the ATC controllers and pilots should be appropriately trained.
– Some existing and prospective supportive technologies to be in place are
given in the above-mentioned Table 6.10.
– Since GS angles greater than 2.5–3 are considered steeper, the aircraft must
be certified. In the given context, these are assumed to be almost all Small
and the majority of Large/B757 aircraft. The range of GS angles for each of
these aircraft will depend on their aerodynamic characteristics, which implies
that different aircraft of the same categories can be certified for different
ranges of GS angles. In principle, smaller aircraft seem to be able to be
certified for steeper GS angles than the larger ones. This certification will be a
precondition for more frequent, systematic, and safe use of ATC mixed and
particularly vertical distance-based separation rules. The distinctions of
approaching at a steeper instead of a conventional GS angle(s) are as follows:
If DH (Decision Height) at the landing threshold remains 50 ft (15 m) and the

flare distance 35 ft (10.5 m), changing the GS angle from 3 to 5.5 will
shorten the flare and touchdown distance from 300 m and 160 to 200 m and
110 m, respectively (EC 2005);
If the aircraft approach speed(s) remains the same along steeper as compared
to conventional final approach trajectory, its horizontal component will be
lower, thus together with the shorter touchdown distance(s) generally
resulting in a shorter runway landing occupancy time; under such circum-
stances, this time will certainly be shorter than the inter-arrival times at the
landing threshold of particular aircraft sequences, thus not causing turn-
around affecting the landing capacity.
– Training of ATC controllers will need to relate to modifying if not com-
pletely changing their existing mental model(s) used in sequencing landing
aircraft. In addition, it will be necessary to develop a convenient tool for
converting the ATC horizontal shown on the ADS-B and/or radar monitors
into the vertical separation rules to be shown on the 3D view surveillance
monitor(s). The pilots will be trained for approaching at a range of GS angles
and monitoring the angle on the cockpit’s 3D monitor or on vertical profile
view surveillance and CDTI monitor(s).
Numerous barriers to fulfilling the above-mentioned conditions may emerge.
The simplest one could be the lack of necessity for incremental increase in the
landing capacity by advanced landing procedures, separation rules, and service
disciplines at many airports despite the expected traffic growth and consequent
increasing of congestion and delays. This can be due to the availability of other
more easily implemented measures for matching the constrained capacity to
demand such as slot constraints, spreading peaks, stimulating airlines to use the
available slots by larger and fuller aircraft, and charging for congestion (Morrison
and Winston 2007).
Additional barriers could be the rather time-consuming and costly operation-
alization of the above-mentioned advancements including their full acceptance by
the system, i.e., airlines, airports, pilots, and ATC controllers, as compared to the
expected air traffic growth. This could be because of maintaining the required
(target) level of safety and reliability of these inherently more complex system
components including still unsolved dilemmas such as, for example, division of
the control responsibilities between pilots and ATC controllers for maintaining the
given (prescribed) separation rules. Therefore, these and other still hidden barriers
in combination with an inherent inertia of the system to more radically accept such
rather revolutionary changes could postpone operationalization of the proposed
advancements to the long-term future. A factor to eventually speed up this process
a bit could be continuous increase in congestion at airports with strengthening
constraints to provide additional capacity by building additional runway(s) as well
with other means.
6.5.3 Modeling Performances
6.5.3.1 Background
The objectives of modeling the airport runway landing capacity are usually to
develop suitable/convenient analytical and simulation models for estimating the
ultimate capacity based on the advanced operational procedures, ATC separation
rules, and service disciplines. In this context, the analytical models are based on
the following assumptions (Janic 2006, 2007a, 2009, 2012; Tosic and Horonjeff
1976):
• The three-dimensional approach and landing trajectories of particular aircraft
categories are known in advance; assignment of conventional and/or steeper
approach GS angles depends on the type of arrival sequence(s) in terms of the
aircraft wake vortex categories, approach speeds, and the capability to perform
either approach procedure;
• Certified aircraft can safely use both conventional and steeper approach tra-
jectories with different GS angles;
• The assigned GS angles do not influence the runway landing occupancy times;
• The system is error-free, implying that aircraft in all landing sequences appear
on the particular segments of approach trajectories at the time when the ATC
expects them; this implies that the time and space deviations of the actual from
the prescribed aircraft positions in both horizontal and vertical planes are con-
sidered negligible mainly thanks to the above-mentioned new technologies
assumed to be in place at that time (see Table 6.1);
• ATC applies only one type of minimum separation rules and service discipline
at a time; and
• The runway landing threshold is considered as the ‘‘reference location’’ for
counting the capacity.
6.5.3.2 The Runway Capacity Models
Landing capacity
The models for estimating the ultimate landing capacity of a single runway based
on application of the advanced operational procedures, ATC separation rules, and
service disciplines have been categorized as follows (Janic 2008, 2009):
FCFS (First Come-First Served) service discipline
When the FCFS (First Come-First Served) service discipline is applied, the ulti-
mate landing capacity of a single runway can usually be estimated as (Janic 2007a,
2008; Tosic and Horonjeff 1976):
X
k1 ¼ T=t ¼ T= pi tij pj i; j 2 N ð6:9aÞ
ij
where
T is the period of time;
t is the minimum average inter-arrival time between successive aircraft
passing through the ‘‘reference location’’, i.e., the runway landing
threshold, where they are counted;
i, j is the index of the leading and trailing aircraft (i) and (j), respectively, in
the landing sequence (ij);
pi, pj is the proportion of aircraft of wake vortex category (i) and (j),
respectively, in the landing fleet mix;
tij is the minimum inter-arrival time between an aircraft of wake category
(i) followed by an aircraft of wake vortex category (j) at the ‘‘reference
location’’ for counting landings, i.e., the runway landing threshold; and
N is the number of different aircraft wake vortex categories in the landing
fleet mix.
PR (Priority) service discipline

When the PR (Priority) service discipline is applied, Eq. 6.9a is transformed as
follows (Janic 2009):
X
N
k2 ¼ T=t ¼ T= pi tii ð6:9bÞ
i¼1
where
pi is the proportion of aircraft of the wake vortex category (i) in the landing fleet
mix; and
tii is the minimum inter-arrival time of the sequence of aircraft of the same wake
vortex category (i) at the ‘‘reference location’’, i.e., the landing threshold.
The other symbols are analogous to those in Eq. 6.9a. This case implies that the
arriving aircraft is clustered into rather homogeneous groups respecting their wake
vortex and approach speed characteristics, and then landed sequentially, one after
the other. The order of serving particular groups does not influence the ultimate
landing capacity. This is because the average inter-arrival time at the landing
threshold remains independent of the order of their serving. Carrying out the above-
mentioned clustering seems feasible only if a relatively large number of aircraft of
different categories requests landing on the given runway almost at the same time.
Inter-arrival times at the ‘‘reference location(s)’’

Horizontal distance-based separation rules
Currently, ATC applies the minimum horizontal distance-based separation rules
between the landing aircraft on a single runway exclusively (Table 6.11). In such
case, the minimum inter-arrival time at landing threshold T of two aircraft in

landing sequence (ij) independently of their GS angles is determined as follows
(Janic 2007a, 2008; Tosic and Horonjeff 1976):
" #
dij =vj ; for vi vj
tij=h ¼ ð6:10aÞ
dij =vj þ cij ð1=vj 1=vi Þ for vi [ vj
where
dij is the minimum ATC horizontal distance-based separation rule between
leading aircraft (i) and trailing aircraft (j) in landing sequence (ij), and
cij is the length of the final approach trajectory of aircraft (i) and (j) connecting
the FAG and landing threshold T; and
vi, vj is the final approach speed of leading aircraft (i) and trailing aircraft (j),
respectively.
The other symbols are analogous to those in previous equations.

The first condition in Eq. 6.10a implies that ATC minimum horizontal sepa-
ration rules between aircraft (i) and (j) in landing sequence (ij) are applied at the
moment when leading aircraft (i) arrives at landing threshold T (Fig. 6.10a—case
vi \= vj). The second condition implies that these rules are applied at the moment
when leading aircraft (i) is just at the FAG (Fig. 6.10a—case vi [ vj).
Mixed horizontal/vertical distance-based separation rules
ATC mixed horizontal/vertical distance-based separation rules can be applied
between particular sequences of landing aircraft using the above-mentioned
Individual Flight Corridors with two segments, each with different GS angles. In
such case, the minimum inter-arrival time at landing threshold T of aircraft
sequence (ij) can be estimated as follows:
tij=m ¼ ½minðdij =vj ; Hij0 =vj sinhÞ; for vi vj ; Hij0 =vj sinhj þ cij ð1=vj
1=vi Þ; for vi [ vj ð6:10bÞ
where
Hij0 is the minimum ATC vertical distance-based separation rule between
leading aircraft (i) and trailing aircraft (j) in landing sequence (ij);
h; hj is the nominal and steeper GS angle on the Inner and Outer segment of the
approach trajectory of the trailing aircraft (j), respectively;
The other symbols are analogous to those in Eq. 6.10a.
The first condition in Eq. 6.10b implies that the minimum ATC horizontal or
vertical distance-based separation rules are applied at the moment when leading
aircraft (i) arrives at landing threshold T (Fig. 6.10b—case vi \= vj). The second
condition in Eq. 6.10b implies that the minimum ATC vertical separation rules are
applied at the moment when leading aircraft (i) is just at the FAG (Fig. 6.10b—
case vi [ vj). In this case, the vertical distance-based separation rules can be also
dependent on the type of landing sequence similarly as the horizontal ones
Vertical distance-based separation rules

ATC vertical distance-based separation rules can be applied to particular landing
sequences in which the aircraft use different GS angles along their entire final
approach trajectories. Depending on the approach speeds and GS angles, there can
be 12 different combinations of landing sequences for which the minimum inter-
arrival times at the reference location, i.e., the landing threshold, calculated as
follows:
ffi 0
Hij =vj sinhj ; for vi vj sin hj =sinhi
tij=m ¼
Hij0 =vj sinhj þ cij tghi ð1=vj sinhj 1=vi sinhi Þ; for vi [ vj sin hj = sin hi
ð6:10cÞ
where
ci is the length of the final approach path of leading aircraft (i);
hi ; hj is the GS angle of leading aircraft (i) and trailing aircraft (j), respectively,
in landing sequence (ij).

The first condition in Eq. 6.10c implies that ATC minimum vertical separation
rules are applied at the moment when the leading aircraft (i) arrives at the landing
threshold T (see Fig. 6.10c—case: vi sinhi \= vj sinhj). The second condition of
Eq. 6.10c implies that ATC minimum vertical separation rules for sequence (ij) are
applied at the moment when the leading aircraft (i) is just at the FAG (Fig. 6.10c—
case: vi sinhi [ vj sinhj). In all cases, the minimum vertical distance-based sepa-
ration rules can depend of type of aircraft landing sequence (ij).
Time-based separation rules
In order to anticipate application of ATC time-based separation rules, the term
(dij/vj) in Eqs. 6.10a, 6.10b should be replaced with the term sij/min,—the ATC
minimum time interval applicable to aircraft sequence (ij) either at runway
threshold T (vi \= vj) or at the FAG (vi [ vj) (Janic 2008).
In all above-mentioned cases, the minimum inter-arrival time at the runway
landing threshold T, tij must be at least equal or greater than the runway landing
occupancy time tai of the leading aircraft (i) in the landing sequence (ij), i.e.,
tij [= tai. This ensures safe separation on the runway, namely that only one aircraft
can occupy the runway at any time.
6.5.3.3 Application of the Models
The above-mentioned analytical models are applied to the generic case of calcu-
lating the landing capacity of a single runway according to the ‘‘what-if’’ scenario
approach,
Input
Scenarios
The ‘‘what-if’’ scenario approach is used because at present, the prospective op-
erationalization of proposed advanced operational procedures, separation rules, and
service disciplines appears at most airports quite uncertain and thus hypothetical. In
such context, three attributes characterize each scenario: (a) the aircraft fleet mix;
(b) the ATC separation rules and associated operational procedure; and (c) the
service discipline. As a result, eight different scenarios are defined in Table 6.13.
In each scenario, the ATC separation rules are exclusively attributed to the
individual operational procedure. The FCFS service discipline is used in Scenarios
1–4 and the PR service discipline in Scenarios 5–8. The aircraft fleet mix is
common for all Scenarios 1–8. This is specified to reflect the typical situation at
most major airports during peak hours (negligible proportion of Small and B757,
and substantive proportions of large and heavy aircraft) on the one hand, and
enable consistent comparison of the landing capacity across Scenarios on the
other. Scenario 1 in Table 6.13 adopted as the benchmark is characterized by using
the ATC horizontal distance-based separation rules (IFR) given in Table 6.11, the
FCFS service discipline, and the conventional (existing) final operational proce-
dure (Fig. 6.10a) (FAA 2010, 2011). In addition, the ATC time-based separation
rules in Table 6.12 derived from the VFR distance-based separation rules in
Table 6.11 and the aircraft average approach speeds in Table 6.14 are used in
Scenario 4. The other types of ATC advanced separation rules are used accord-
ingly in the remaining Scenarios 2, 3, 5, 6, 7, 8 (Table 6.13).
The length of the common approach path connecting the FAG and the runway
landing threshold is adopted to be: c = 6.2 nm in all scenarios (Janic 2008)
(nm—nautical mile; 1 nm = 1.852 km).
Table 6.13 Characterization of particular ‘‘what-if’’ scenarios for calculating the runway land-
ing capacity (Janic 2012)
Scenario ATC separation Operational Priority Aircraft fleet mix
rules procedure discipline
1 H SS-NGS FCFS Small—5 %
2 MH/V DS-NGS SGS FCFS B757—5 %
3 V SS—UAGS FCFS Large/Heavy as complements
4 TB SS-NGS FCFS (0–90 %)
5 H SS-NGS PR Small—5 %
6 MH/V DS-NGS SGS PR B757—5 %
7 V SS—UAGS PR Large/Heavy as complements
8 TB SS-NGS PR (0–90 %)
H Horizontal, MH/V Mixed Horizontal/Vertical, V Vertical, TB Time-based, SS-NGS Single
segment-nominal GS angles, DS-NGS SGS Double segment—nominal and steeper GS angles, SS-
UAGS Single segment—ultimately arbitrary GS angles
FCFS First Come First Served, PR Priority
Table 6.14 Characteristics of the aircraft wake vortex categories (averages) (EC 2005; FAA
2010; Thompson 2002; Janic 2012)
Aircraft type Weight Weight GS angle Runway landing occupancy time
W v h ta
(tons) (kts) () (s)
Small 20 120 3/4/5.5 30–40
Large 55 130 3/4/- 40–50
B757 117 155 3/4/- 40–45
Heavy 206 155 3/-/- 50–60
Aircraft fleet and assignment of GS angles

The technical/operational characteristics of the particular aircraft wake vortex
categories including the assigned GS angles are given in Table 6.14.
According to these assignments, small, large, and B757 aircraft are assumed to
approach and land at different (steeper) GS angles while heavy aircraft exclusively
use the nominal GS angle of 3.
Based on Table 6.14 and respecting the two operational procedures when the
ATC mixed horizontal/vertical and exclusively the vertical distance–based sepa-
ration rules are applied, the combinations of GS angles for particular aircraft
landing sequences are given in Table 6.15a, b.
Results
The results from applying the models by using the above-mentioned inputs are
shown in Figs. 6.11, 6.12, 6.13, and 6.14.
Figure 6.11 shows the runway landing capacity for Scenarios (1–4) in
Table 6.13, i.e., their dependence on the proportion of Heavy aircraft in the fleet
mix, type of ATC separation rules, and FCFS service discipline.
As can be seen, the capacity is the highest in Scenario 3 when ATC vertical
distance-based separation rules are applied, followed by the capacity in Scenario 4
(ATC time-based separation rules), Scenario 2 (ATC mixed horizontal/vertical
distance-based separation rules), and the benchmarking Scenario 1 (ATC hori-
zontal distance-based separation rules).
The landing capacity in Scenario 4 also decreases as the proportion of Heavy
aircraft in the fleet mix increases. It is lower than the landing capacity in Scenario
3 and the gap increases with the proportion of heavy aircraft in the fleet mix up to
about 6 %.
In the benchmarking Scenario 1, the capacity decreases with increasing of the
proportion of heavy aircraft in the mix, up to about 10 % for the given range of
changes of this proportion. This capacity similarly decreases in Scenarios 3 and 4,
up to about 8 and 12 %, respectively, for the given range of changes of the
proportion of heavy aircraft (0–90 %). In addition, the landing capacity in Sce-
nario 1 is lower than the capacity in Scenario 3 (between 20 and 30 %) and the
capacity in Scenario 4 (between 18 and 28 %). This is as intuitively expected due
to the shortening of distances and consequently the average inter-arrival times
Table 6.15 Combinations of GS angles for different ATC separation rules and related opera-
tional procedures ()-degrees) (Janic 2012)
i/j Small Large B757 Heavy
(a) Mixed horizontal/vertical distance-based separation rules
Small 3/3 3/3 3/3 3/3
Large 3/5.5 3/3 3/3 3/3
B757 3/5.5 3/4 3/3 3/3
Heavy 3/5.5 3/4 3/4 3/3
(b) Vertical distance-based separation rules
Small 3/5.5 3/4 3/4 3/3
Large 3/5.5 3/4 3/4 3/3
B757 3/5.5 3/4 3/4 3/3
Heavy 3/5.5 3/4 3/4 3/3
5% Small
5% B757
Scenario 3
Scenario 4
Scenario 2
Scenario 1
Fig. 6.11 Relationship between the runway landing capacity and the proportion of heavy aircraft
in the mix and different ATC separation rules—FCFS service discipline (Janic 2012)
between landing aircraft thanks to the application of vertical distance-based and

time-based separation rules. Decreasing capacity in Scenarios 1, 3, and 4 as the
proportion of heavy aircraft in the fleet mix increases is mainly due to increasing
the frequency of longer distances between these and other aircraft which could not
be compensated by increasing the average speed of landing flow just thanks to the
more frequent presence of these (Heavy) aircraft in the fleet mix.
Contrary to Scenarios 1, 3, and 4, the landing capacity in Scenario 2 increases
with increasing of the proportion of heavy aircraft in the fleet mix. The difference
between this and the capacity in Scenario 3 decreases from about 28 to 4 %, and
the capacity in Scenario 4 from about 38 to 2.5 %. At the same time, the positive
Scenario 3 Scenario 7
Scenario 6
Scenario 2
5% Small
5% B757
Fig. 6.12 Relationship between the runway landing capacity and the proportion of Heavy
aircraft in the mix and ATC mixed and vertical distance-based separation rules—the FCFS and
PR service discipline (Janic 2012)
difference between this and the capacity in Scenario 1 increases by 6–33 % for a
given range of changes in the aircraft fleet mix. This increase of the capacity with
increasing of the proportion of heavy aircraft in the fleet mix in Scenario 2 is
mainly due to applying vertical separation rules to the FS (‘‘Fast-Slow’’) sequences
at the FAG, which shortens the horizontal distances between aircraft, and conse-
quently the corresponding inter-arrival times at landing threshold T, which in turn
contribute to increasing the landing capacity.
Figure 6.12 shows the influence of the ATC service disciplines (FCFS and PR)
on the landing capacity given ATC mixed horizontal/vertical and vertical distance-
based separation rules (Scenarios 2 and 6, and Scenarios 3 and 7 in Table 6.13,
respectively), and the proportion of heavy aircraft in the mix.
As can be seen, the PR service discipline (Scenarios 6 and 7) increases the
capacity only negligibly as compared to the FCFS service discipline (Scenarios 2
and 3). At the same time, the influence of heavy aircraft on this capacity appears to
be of the same character for both service disciplines in each pair of the considered
Scenarios (3, 7 and 2, 6).
Figure 6.13 shows the dependence of the runway landing capacity on the
proportion of heavy aircraft in the mix, ATC horizontal distance-based and time-
based separation rules, and service disciplines, i.e., the capacities in Scenarios 1
and 5, and Scenarios 4 and 8, respectively.
As can be seen, when ATC horizontal distance-based separation rules are used,
the PR service discipline (Scenario 5) contributes to increasing the landing capacity
5% Small
Scenario 8 5% B757
Scenario 4
Scenario 5
Scenario 1
Fig. 6.13 Relationship between the runway landing capacity and the proportion of Heavy
aircraft in the mix and ATC horizontal distance-based and time-based separation rules—the
FCFS and PR service discipline (Janic 2012)
by about 6 to 7 % as compared to the FCFS service discipline (Scenario 1). This

difference is the greatest (about 30 %) when the proportion of heavy aircraft in the
mix is about 40–50 %. When ATC time-based separation rules are used, the PR
service discipline (Scenario 5) contributes to increasing the runway landing
capacity by between 2 and 5 % as compared to the FCFS service discipline (Sce-
nario 4) for the specified range of proportions of heavy aircraft in the fleet mix
(0–90 %).
Figure 6.14 shows the runway capacity envelopes when different ATC mini-
mum separation rules are applied to the landing aircraft. The landing and departing
aircraft fleet mix consists of 5 % small, 5 % B757, 40 % heavy, and 50 % large
aircraft, all served according to the FCFS service discipline. In addition, ATC
minimum time-based separation rules are exclusively used between successive
departures (FAA 2010, 2011). As can be seen, when the landings predominate at
the runway, different ATC minimum separation rules provide different landing
capacities, namely the highest when ATC vertical and the lowest when ATC
horizontal distance-based separation rules are used. When departures are inserted
more frequently between successive landings, the effects of different ATC sepa-
ration rules between landings diminish and almost disappear when the proportions
of both types of operations equalize. After departures start to dominate, the effects
of different ATC separation rules between landings continue to diminish further.
5% Small
5% B757
40% Heavy
Scenario 3 50% Large
Scenario 4
Scenario 2
Scenario 1
Fig. 6.14 Runway capacity envelopes for cases of application of different ATC minimum
separation rules for landings (Janic 2012)
6.5.4 Evaluation
Advanced ATC (Air Traffic Control) technologies and procedures for increasing
airport runway landing capacity possess some advantages (Strengths and Oppor-
tunities) and disadvantages (Weaknesses and Threats).
Advantages
• Contributing to a substantial increase in the runway landing capacity when the
FCFS service discipline and ATC vertical distance-based separation rules are
applied. This capacity would be the greatest as compared to that obtained by
using ATC time-based, mixed horizontal/vertical and particularly horizontal
distance-based separation rules, respectively; and
• Contributing to a substantial increase in the runway landing capacity when the
PR service discipline is applied instead of the FCFS service discipline in
combination with ATC horizontal distance-based and time-based separation
rules.
Disadvantages
• Demanding a relatively long time for full operationalization both at the ATC
and aircraft;
• Diminishing effects with increasing proportion of heavy aircraft in the landing
mix except in the cases of applying the PR service discipline and ATC mixed
horizontal/vertical distance-based separation rules; and
• Diminishing effects with increasing of the heterogeneity of operations on a

single runway (more take-offs on the account of landings).
Finally, these technologies and procedures can be considered as advanced
mainly due to their contribution to the rather substantial increase in the airport
runway landing capacity as compared to their currently used counterparts.
6.6 Advanced Supersonic Transport Aircraft
1947 The rocket-powered Bell X-1 flown by C.Yeager exceeds the speed of sound during the
first controlled level flight (U.S.)
1967 The air speed record of 3,940 kts (7,297 km/h Mach 6.1) is set by the X-15 aircraft (U.S.)
1975 Aeroflot begins regular services with the supersonic TY144 aircraft (USSR)
1976 British Airways and Air France begin commercial servicers with the French-British
Concorde aircraft (UK, France)
The STA (Supersonic Transport Aircraft) has already been commercialized as the
French-British Concorde and the Soviet Union’s TY144 supersonic aircraft. Their
main characteristics are given in Table 6.16.
Both aircraft had very similar performances. However, during their commercial
use over the limited time span,10 they were unable to fulfill the requirements and
expectations in terms of effectiveness, efficiency, environmental and social
acceptance. This is illustrated by comparing some of the characteristics of Con-
corde and the Boeing 747 aircraft given in Table 6.17.
These characteristics indicate that, except as concerns its cruising speed,
Concorde was inferior to the B747-400 in all considered aspects. As such, it was
not so attractive for airlines faced with increased pressure to manage their prof-
itability and take care about the environment, both under unstable economic
conditions at the time when both aircraft were operating. Figure 6.15a, b addi-
tionally supports this perception of airlines by showing the quite substantial dif-
ferences in the payload-range and technical productivity-range between Concorde
(and TY144D) and the B747-400 aircraft.
In addition, the accident that occurred in 2000 strongly undermined Concorde’s
previous reputation as the safest aircraft. Consequently, the aircraft was retired in
10
Concorde commercially operated during the 1976–2003 period and TY144D during the
1977–1983 period (http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Concorde; http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Tupolev_
Tu-144).
6.6 Advanced Supersonic Transport Aircraft 365
Table 6.16 Characteristics of Concorde and the TY144 supersonic commercial aircraft (http://
www.concordesst.com/home.html; http://www.tu144sst.com/index.html)
Characteristic Aircraft type
Concorde Ty144
Number built/used 20/16 15/3
Length (m) 61.70 65.50
Wingspan (m) 25.60 28.80
Height (m) 12.20 12.55
Cockpit crew 3 3
Seating capacity (seats) 92–120 120–140

MZFWa (tons) 92 92.2
Fuel (tons) 74 99.8
Payload (tons) 13 15
MTOWb (tons) 185 207
MLWc (tons) 111 120
Engines (number/thrust (kN)) 4/140–170 4/200
Range (km) 7220 6000–6600
Rate of climb (ft/min) 5000 3000
Cruising speed (Mach/kts) 2.02/1157 2.15/1232
at 60,000 ft/18300 m at 65,600 ft/20000 m
Average take-off speed (kts) 217 192
Average landing speed (kts) 161 146
Take-off runway length (m) 3599 2930
Landing runway length (m) 2169 2560
Fuel consumption (kg/s-km) 0.120–0.143 0.080–0.093
Maximum nose tip temperature (C) 127 N/A
a
Maximum Zero Fuel Weight
b
Maximum Take-Off Weight
c
Maximum Landing Weight
Table 6.17 Characteristics of Concorde and the Boeing 747-400 aircraft (Smith 1989)
Characteristic Aircraft type
Concorde B747-400
Seating capacity (seats) 120 413
Cruising speed (Mach/km/h) 2.02/2145 0.85/903
Max. range (km) 7,220 14,353
Technical productivity (s-km/h) 261480 377069
Operating costs (€/s-km) 0.0374 0.0202
Fuel efficiency (kg/s-km) 0.120–0.143a 0.025b
Emissions of GHG (kgCO2e/s-km) 0.715 0.133
Noisec (arrivals/departures)d (EPNdB) 119/119/116 100.4/96/101.7
a
Estimated from the total costs of 1.25 billion €, 50,000 flights and length of route of 5,564 km
(London-New York)
b
Estimated from the expression (2.26) for the same route
c
EPNdB—Effective Perceived Noise Level (dBA); Sideline (450 m)/Take-off (6.5 km)/
Approach (2 km)
d
Smith (1989)
(a) 90
Concorde
80 TY144D
B747-400
70 A380-800
Payload - tons
60
50
40
30
20
10
0
0 3000 6000 9000 12000 15000
Range - km
(b) 80
Concorde
TY144D
Technical productivity - 000 t-km/h
70 B747-400
A380-800
60
50
40
30
20
10
0
0 3000 6000 9000 12000 15000
Range - km
Fig. 6.15 Operational performances of the selected aircraft types (Airbus 2005; Boeing 2002;
http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Concorde; http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Tupolev_Tu-144), a Pay-
load-range, b Technical productivity-range
2003. After crashing in Paris, the TY 144 aircraft was retired in 1978 after just one
year in commercial service.
6.6.2.1 Background
After retirement of the supersonic Concorde and TY144 aircraft, the question
remained whether there might be sufficient passenger demand for an advanced
generation of STA (Supersonic Transport Aircraft), which, in addition to speed,
would be also close if not superior to their subsonic conventional counterparts

particularly in terms of the economic, environmental, and social performances.
The full development, implementation, and operationalization, i.e., commer-
cialization of advanced STA seems likely to be a matter of the forthcoming
decades. This is because, at the moment, these currently main aircraft manufac-
turers Airbus and Boeing, and other agencies and institutions dealing with the
visions of development of the air transport system, do not and will not take, at least
publically, such development into account before 2030 (ACARE 2010; Airbus
2012; Boeing 2012). Indirectly, this reflects developments in the airline industry,
which, at least in the short- to medium-term future, does not expect substantial
(mass) increase in the passenger and freight demand for supersonic speed, and
consequently remains uninterested in acquiring and operating such aircraft. In turn,
the manufacturers consider in investing in the development of such aircraft too
risky.
Nevertheless, despite such circumstances, some initiatives of developing
advanced STA as successors of Concorde and TY144 have sustained within the
aircraft manufacturers and other related agencies. Some concepts that have
emerged after the retirement of Concorde are as follows:
• Toward the end of 2003, EADS (European Aeronautic Defense and Space
Company)—the parent company of Airbus—announced its cooperation with
Japanese companies to develop a larger and faster STA as a replacement for
Concorde. As a result, in mid-2011, EADS unveiled the ZEHST (Zero Emission
High-Speed Transport) aircraft concept at the Paris Air Show. This actually
hypersonic aircraft would be able to fly at a cruising speed of Mach 4.0
(4,248 km/h).
• In the last quarter of 2005, JAXA (the Japan Aerospace eXploration Agency)
carried out the aerodynamic testing of a scale model of an aircraft supposed to
have the seating capacity of 300 passengers and speed of about Mach 2 (label
NEXST). If shown commercially feasible, it has been expected to start com-
mercial operations in around 2020/2025.
• In addition, the LAPCAT (Long-Term Advanced Propulsion Concepts and
Technologies) research program half-funded by the EC (European Commission)
examined a design of LH2 (Liquid Hydrogen)-fuelled aircraft with the seating
capacity of about 300 passengers (called the A2), range of about 20,000 km, and
cruising speed of Mach 5.0 (5,110 km/h) (EC 2006; http://en.wikipedia.org/
wiki/Supersonic_transport).
• Furthermore, in 2001, the U.S. NASA (National Aeronautics and Space
Administration) announced the development, among others, of an Efficient
Multi-Mach STA whose sonic boom would be low enough to enable operations
over both land and water. Some specifications of the new EC and US NASA
STA concept are given in Table 6.18 (Coen 2011; EC 2006; NAS 2001).
Fuel tank (LH2)

Fuel tank (LH2)
7.5m 42m
Flight deck and passenger compartment
139m
Flight deck and passenger compartment
32m
Fig. 6.16 Scheme of possible shape of the advanced STA—EC Hydrogen Mach 5 Cruiser A2
(EC 2008)
Figure 6.16 shows an example of possible design of the advanced STA—EC

Hydrogen Mach 5 Cruiser A2 (Coen 2011; EC 2008).
The above-mentioned concepts indicate that the main driving force for devel-
oping new STA remains to be increasing technical productivity as the product of
cruising speed and payload. For airlines, this is simple: if this productivity is
higher, more services (passenger- or ton-km) can be carried out during a shorter
period of time, thus requiring a smaller fleet with consequently lower costs. For
passengers, flying at higher speeds would save time and related travel costs, which
also would be generally beneficial for society. What remains is making the
environmental impacts in terms of the energy consumption and related emissions
of GHG, and noise around airports and wider area due to sonic boom, acceptable.
In general, the technical productivity could be increased exclusively by
increasing speed, increasing payload, or both simultaneously. In the above cases of
STA, the last option has been considered. But how much would this cost?
Operationalization of some of the above-mentioned concepts will likely depend
of their overall costs, reflected through prices and operational costs for airlines,
which in turn will be reflected through fares for passengers and freight shippers.
These costs per unit could be reduced by increasing the number of units (STA)
manufactured, which depends on the number of units sold, which itself depends on
the prices per unit, and vice versa. For example, the number of units sold, in addition
to price, depends on the level of satisfaction of airline requirements in terms of
efficiency, effectiveness, and environmental and social acceptance on the one side,
and the volumes of expected passenger and freight demand on the other. In addition,
overall cost reduction could be achieved by improving the five-stage process of

commercialization (Chap. 1), ensuring greater efficiency of the manufacturing
process through the learning curve, and maintaining the optimal manufacturing pace
(usage of resources—labor, material, and energy), and facilities and equipment).
The infrastructural performances of new STA generally relate to their fitting with
exiting airports in terms of the footprint and other operational performances. For
example, the EC Hydrogen Mach 5 Cruiser STA in Table 6.18 would fit with the
ICAO Aerodrome Code 4 and Letter D, and IATA (International Air Transport
Association) Aircraft Size Categorization Scheme 4. Regarding MTOW, the air-
craft could be categorized as a Heavy (400 tons) aircraft of the approach category
E (approach speed C 166 kts (kts—knots (nm/h)). In addition, its MTOW should
meet the current maximum allowable ground loads, i.e., wheel number, size, load,
and distribution, thus preventing damage to airport runways, taxiways, and aprons.
Furthermore, its dimensions (length, wing span, and ground footprint) should cope
with the existing layout and size of airport maneuvering spaces (runways, taxi-
ways, and aprons). In this context, the length of new STA (139 m in Table 6.18
and Fig. 6.16) could become a critical issue.
Ground handling in terms of embarking and disembarking passengers and
cargo, fuel supply (either compatible with the existing (kerosene) or new system
(LH2)), etc., should enable a reasonable turnaround time of new STA comparable
to that of its subsonic counterparts.
In addition, new STA will have to be able to follow the current and future ATC
(Air Traffic Control) rules and procedures. This may eventually apply to steeper
final approach angles, which could be requested at some airports in order to
increase the airport runway capacity on the one hand and reduce noise around the
airport on the other (Chap. 3).
New STA would operate under rather extreme conditions generally characterized
as follows (EC 2008):
• Higher cruise altitudes (FL500-600, i.e., 50,000–60,000 ft) than its subsonic
counterparts (FL300-350, i.e., 30,000–35,000 ft) would require higher in-cabin
pressure by approximately 25 %,
• Exposure of the structure to a wider range of temperatures, from about -50 C
to more than +150–200 C, including thermal cycling under moisture and
radiation impacts, and
Table 6.18 Specifications of advanced STA concepts (Coen 2011; EC 2008; NAS 2001)
Specification The STA concept
NASA high-speed civil transport— EC Hydrogen Mach 5
beyond the year 2030 Cruiser A2
Design
Length (m)a 89–95 139
Wing span (m)a 42–43 42
Wing Aspect Ratio – 1.868
L/D (Lift-to-Drag) Ratio 10–11 8–9
Take-off weight (tons) 276 400
Number of engines 4 4
Cruise speed (Mach) 2.0–2.4 5.0
Range (km) 9000–11000 20000
Fuel/weight fraction 0.40–0.45 0.13
Payload/weight fraction *0.20 *0.15
Payload (passengers) 300 300
Fuel efficiency
SFC (kg of fuel/kg of thrust/h)b
Kerosene 2.325 –
Liquid Hydrogen (LH2)c – 2.208
Environmental/social efficiency
Emissions of GHG (gNOx/kg of \15 (lower speeds) –
fuel) B5 (higher speeds) B1
Noise
Sonic boom—Low Boom Flight 65–70 –
(EPNdB)
Sonic boom—Overwater flight 75–80 –
(EPNdB)
Airport noise (cumulative below 10–20 –
stage 3/4) (EPNdB)
a
Approximate values
b
TSFC—Thrust Specific Fuel Consumption
c
The ratio of heating content: LH2/Kerosene = 2.745
• Comparability to its subsonic counterparts in terms of technical productivity,

which would require high utilization and reliability during the life cycle—about
25,000 flight cycles and 60,000 h over 20 years.
The above-mentioned conditions will require establishing an optimal balance
between the required strength of structure and weight of the new STA, which will
in turn influence all other technical/technological, operational, economic, envi-
ronmental, and social performances.
Airframe
Supersonic aerodynamics
Supersonic aerodynamics are quite different from subsonic aerodynamics because
of the significant increase of the dynamic pressure and fundamental change in the
character of the fluid flow at very high cruising speeds (above Mach 1.6–2.0). This
makes the aerodynamic performances of the new STA particularly important
because: (i) the typical (L/D) (Lift-to-Drag) of new STA is generally lower than
that of the equivalent subsonic aircraft by about 50 %, (ii) the engine size, fuel
consumption and related emissions of GHG are directly influenced by drag, and
(iii) the weight of new STA is increased due to the above-mentioned two factors,
which in turn compromise all other performances. Consequently, the design of
new STA generally requires simultaneous balancing of many conflicting issues.
For example, supersonic aircraft such as Concorde had relatively low supersonic
efficiency measured by the L/D (Lift-to-Drag) ratio, which was not the result of a
weak design, but a generic consequence of its supersonic aerodynamics.
Regarding aircraft design, the (L/D) is the most important aerodynamic
parameter influencing the most important attributes of economic and environ-
mental performances such as the range, payload, fuel consumption and related
emissions of GHG. Therefore, one of the main design objectives of new STA
would be to increase this ratio at cruising speeds beyond Mach 1.6–2.0. Specifi-
cally, the supersonic lift force (L) can generally be expressed as follows:
L ¼ ð1=2Þq v2 S ð6:11aÞ
where
q is air density (kg/m3);
v is the aircraft speed (km/h);
S is the reference wing area (m2); and
CL is the lift coefficient.
In Eq. 6.11a, the lift coefficient CL depends on the wing characteristics, i.e., its
airfoil or section (a cross section of the wing parallel to the plane of symmetry of
the aircraft). This is shaped to generate lift without excessive drag. The supersonic
drag (D) can be expressed as follows (NAS 2001):

D ¼ qSCD0 þ W=q p b2 þ 128q Vol2 þ ðM 2 1Þ W 2 =ðq p l2 Þ
ð6:11bÞ
where
b is the wingspan (m);
CD0 is the coefficient of parasite drag at zero lift (i.e., skin drag and all other
drag except induced drag);
l is the effective length of the aircraft (m);
M is the Mach number;
q is the dynamic pressure (N/m2);

S is the reference wing area (m2);
Vol is the total volume (m3); and
W is the total weight of the aircraft (tons).
If the optimal cruising altitude for a given Mach number is selected, the
(L/D) ratio can be expressed as follows (NAS 2001; Seebass 1998):
ffi 1=2
4 2ð M 2 1Þ
ðL=DÞmax ¼ þ ðCD0 þ CD0w Þ ð6:11cÞ
p A R p A R1
where
AR is the aspect ratio given by b2/S;
AR1 is the length aspect ratio given by l2/S; and
CD0w is the coefficient of zero lift wave drag depending on the aircraft length,
volume, and wing area.
Using Eq. 6.11c, the ratio (L/D) can be obtained for the specified values of the
particular variables. Alternatively, the maximum achievable ratio (L/D) can be
empirically estimated as follows (EC 2006, 2008):
ðL=DÞ ¼ 6 ðM þ 2Þ=M ð6:11dÞ
where all symbols are analogous to those in the previous equations. Figure 6.17
shows a generic relationship between (L/D) and (M).
The (L/D) ratio increases approximately more than proportionally with
increasing of the Mach number up to about M = 1.5; beyond M = 1.5, the ratio
decreases more than proportionally with increasing of the Mach number. This
implies a decrease in the aerodynamic performances at higher Mach numbers.
Therefore, in order to achieve the required high (L/D) ratio, the drag (D) during the
cruise phase of flight should be as low as possible, which could be achieved by
increasing the length of the advanced STA. Such increase would make the aircraft
much longer than its subsonic counterpart(s) with an equivalent payload. This
would create disparity between the design for the best cruise and the design for
low speed, thus causing degradation of the STA aerodynamic performances at low
speed(s), increasing its weight, and consequently diminishing fuel efficiency and
increasing related emissions of GHG, than otherwise. In order to overcome these
imbalances, some supersonic features such as supersonic laminar flow, methods
for modifying the flow around the aircraft, unconventional aircraft configuration
(preferably long and slender), and computational systems and methodologies
would need to be revolutionized.
Aerodynamic heating
The advanced STA would be exposed to aerodynamic heating during flying at
supersonic speeds. This is caused by heating of the air near the surface of the
Lift-to-Drag Ratio - (L/D) 21
17
13
5
0.5 1.5 2.5 3.5 4.5 5.5 6.5 7.5 8.5 9.5
Mach number
Fig. 6.17 Relationship between Lift-to-Drag (L/D) ratio and Mach number for STA
aircraft whose temperature can reach the so-called stagnation temperature


T ¼ T0 þ v2 2cp ð6:11eÞ
where
T0 is the temperature of the impacting air (C);
v is the aircraft speed (m/s); and
cn is the specific heat capacity11 of air at constant pressure (kJ/kgK).
For example, if the new STA was cruising at the speed of M = 2.0 at the altitude
FL600 (60,000 ft) where the temperature of the impacting air is: T0 = -56.5 C,
the stagnation temperature would be about: T = 112 C. If the speed was M = 2.5,
the stagnation temperature would reach about T = 200 C under the same
conditions.
Materials
If the aircraft stayed under the above-mentioned operating conditions sufficiently
long, the rather high air temperature would pass to its structure as the convective
heating would dominate over the radiative heating. In order to sustain such tem-
perature, the new advanced lightweight high temperature materials have been
tested such as mainly aluminum and titanium alloys PMC (Polymer Matrix
Composites) and MMC/IMC (Metal Intermetalic Matrix Composites/Intermediate
Modulus Carbon) fiber, the latter considered as a compromise between the
11
The specific heat capacity is the amount of heat required to change the temperature of 1 kg of
a given material/substance by 1 C. This capacity of air for temperatures (-50–400 C) ranges
from 1.005 to 1.068 kJ/kgK).
required air-thermodynamic performances and costs. In addition, toughened

Epoxy resins and thermoplastic materials have also been considered. In parallel,
both the EC and NASA in the US have studied different lightweight advanced
materials such as sandwich, honeycomb, and superelastic formed/diffusion bonded
concepts (EC 2006, 2008; NAS 2001; Saounatsos 1998).
Range
The most important aerodynamic and operational characteristics of the new STA is
its range. In general, this range can be expressed as follows (Breguet range
equation):

HðL=DÞ 1 v ðL=DÞ 1
R¼ g ln ¼ ln ð6:11fÞ
g 1 WF =W g SFC 1 WF =W
where
H is the fuel energy content (MJ/kg);
g is the overall installed engine efficiency;
SFC is Specific Fuel Consumption (kg/kN/h);
g is the gravitational acceleration (9.81 m/s2);
W is the aircraft take-off weight (tons); and
WF is the available trip fuel (tons).
The other symbols are analogous to those in the previous equations. Eq. 6.11f
indicates that the range R increases linearly with increasing of the energy content
H of the fuel and the overall installed engine efficiency g. By changing the fuel
from kerosene to LH2 (Liquid Hydrogen), this content and consequently the range
R can be increased by the factor 2.745 (Chap. 4). For a given type of fuel, the
range R of the advanced STA could be increased, on the one hand by increasing
the cruising speed v, improving (L/D), and the amount of fuel carried WF, and on
the other by decreasing the engine SFC. However, at the same time, the SFC
increases with cruising speed and decreases with increasing of the overall engine
propulsion efficiency g as follows:
SFC ¼ M=4g ð6:11gÞ
Figure 6.18 shows some relationships.
Specifying the values of particular variables in the above-mentioned expres-
sions, while particularly intending to increase (L/D) as a vital issue for enabling
economically viable STA, enables setting up some initial specifications for the
STA design similarly to those in Table 6.18.
Propulsion systems
The propulsion systems-engines of the new STA should be designed to fulfill the
following requirements (EC 2008):
• Sufficient thrust to enable operating at the designed supersonic cruising speed(s),
SFC - Specific Fuel Consumption 3
2.5
2
η = 0.4
1.5
1 η = 0.6
0.5
0
0 0.5 1 1.5 2 2.5 3 3.5 4 4.5 5
Cruising speed - Mach number
Fig. 6.18 Relationship between SFC (Specific Fuel Consumption) and the aircraft cruising
speed, and the engine overall propulsion efficiency
• Relatively high propulsion efficiency implying lower fuel consumption and

related emissions of GHG, particularly NOx (Nitrogen Oxides), as compared to
that of supersonic predecessors Concorde and TY144, as well as advanced
subsonic aircraft (Chap. 2).
• Lightweight reliable construction materials resistant to high temperatures, and
• Meeting the noise requirements of Stage-3/4 during LTO cycle (Landing and
Take-off Cycle) (ICAO 2001).
Thrust
The total thrust, i.e., power, of engines (T) for the new STA should generally be
sufficient to balance the aerodynamic drag (D) during cruising phase of flight, i.e.,
T = D (at the same time the lift force (L) should be in balance with aircraft weight
(W), i.e., L = W). Thus, based on Eq. 6.11b, the thrust per engine can be estimated
as follows:
1
T¼ ½D ðM=aÞ ð6:11hÞ
N
where
N is the number of aircraft engines, and
a is the speed of sound at the cruising altitude (m/s).
The other symbols are analogous to those in the previous equations. In com-
bination with Eqs. 6.11b, h for aerodynamic drag (D) implies that the required
thrust for the new STA increases with the third degree of cruising speed.
Propulsion efficiency
The propulsion efficiency of engines powering the advanced STA generally
depends on its cruising speed as follows (empirical relationship):
η - Engine overall propulsion efficiency 1

0.9
0.8
0.7
0.6
0.5
0.4
0.3
0.2
0.1
0
0.5 1.5 2.5 3.5 4.5 5.5 6.5 7.5 8.5 9.5
Mach number
Fig. 6.19 Relationship between propulsion efficiency and Mach number for advanced STA
g ¼ M=ðM þ 3Þ ð6:11iÞ
Figure 6.19 shows an example of this relationship indicating that the overall
propulsion efficiency increases at decreasing rate with increasing of the Mach
number.
This again indicates an inherent conflict with the above-mentioned aerody-
namic design of new STA characterized by the substantial drop of the (L/D) ratio
as the cruising speed increases.
Materials
In order to reduce the weight and improve performances of new STA, the materials
the aircraft engines are made out of must at the same time provide low density,
high strength, and long life at high temperatures. In particular, high temperatures
refer to combustion temperatures that which would likely increase to about
3,000–3,500 F (1,650–1,930 C) and/or nozzle temperatures to about
2,300–2,400 F (1,260–1,370 C). Critical engine components such as disks, tur-
bine airfoils, and nozzles would be exposed to these temperatures for a relatively
long time, i.e., during the cruising phase of flight, which could last 4–5 h (EC
2008; NAS 2001). This is quite different compared to subsonic engines exposed to
extreme temperatures for a shorter time-only during the take-off and climb lasting
about 15–20 min. In addition, more extensive use of such actually advanced
materials could contribute to reducing the overall aircraft weight, and conse-
quently improve the fuel consumption and related emissions of GHG, and noise
efficiency.
Ceramic Matrix Composites (CMCs) could be a promising solution to simul-
taneously reduce the engine weight and increase the above-mentioned engine
aerothermodynamics performances. The materials considered have been polymers,
intermetalics, metal matrix, and ceramics matrix composites. In addition, new

fibers and fiber coatings have also been tested as materials to eventually withstand
the high operational temperatures and long operational times of particular engine
components. One additional material considered for fabricating the critical engine
nozzles has been titanium aluminized and other PETI/5 (Phenylethynul/Termi-
nated Imide), the latter particularly considered for high temperatures composite
matrices (EC 2008; NAS 2001).
The particular issue would be creating materials for maintaining a safe fuel
temperature in the fuel tanks during flying at supersonic speeds. Some preliminary
investigations have shown that this could be achieved by advanced coatings with
the desired emissivity, absorptivity, and corrosion ability to maintain the fuel
temperatures below the acceptable levels (about 150 F) reached at the speeds of
about Mach 2.4 (NAS 2001).
Aircraft systems
Advanced STA would be long and slender lightweight high-temperature durability
constructions preventing water absorption during the aircraft life cycle. As such,
their construction would be able to fulfill the required aerodynamic performances.
This particularly refers to a long pointed nose for drag reduction and delta wings
for flight at high supersonic speeds on the one hand and high attack angles at lower
speeds on the other. Such design at low speeds actually compromises the forward
visibility of the crew from the cockpit. Consequently, this would require either a
drop-nose design (similarly to Concorde) or advanced sensors and cockpit displays
for restoring the required crew visibility. The latter alternative being under
development in the scope of the US NexGen and European SESAR program could
be promising (Chap. 2). Nevertheless, in order to relieve the crew from only a
computer-generated view of the outside environment, the cockpit windows could
be located at the lower instead of the traditional upper front location of the aircraft
fuselage. This would enable visual contact to the outside during the aircraft
approach, landing, and take-off. In other phases, computer displays would be used
for controlling and managing the aircraft flight. In addition, a sonic boom shadow
tracking system would be added as unique to new STA. Using standard, predicted,
or real-time atmospheric conditions, this system would be able to depict location,
coverage, predicted path, and strength of the STA sonic boom.
The operational performances of new STA include their payload-range charac-

teristics, service quality, and technical productivity, which all should be at least
comparable to those of the predecessors Concorde and the TY144 and some of the
subsonic counterparts.
90
Concorde
80 TY144D
B747-400
70 A380-800
Advanced STA
Payload - tons
60
50
40
30
20
10
0
0 3000 6000 9000 12000 15000 18000
Range - km
Fig. 6.20 Payload-range characteristics of selected supersonic and subsonic aircraft (different
websites)
Payload-range characteristics
Possible payload-range characteristics of particular supersonic aircraft and the
B747-400 subsonic aircraft are given in Fig. 6.20.
The payload-range characteristics of the Mach 5.0 STA are superior to those of
both Concorde and the TY144 aircraft. This could be considered as some kind of
increased capability to penetrate the market, which both predecessors were unable
to achieve, and thus provide the necessary economic viability. At the same time,
new STA have a longer range than the subsonic B747-400 aircraft has for about
half of its payload.
Quality of service
The main attribute of the quality of service offered by STA is travel time. Subsonic
commercial flights usually take place along the shortest—Great Circle routes
connecting particular origins and destinations. However, due to passing through
the sound barrier, the routes of the new STA are expected to very often deviate
from the shortest great circle distances in order to avoid the impacts of sonic boom
on populated areas. In terms of design, this will require extension of the range. In
an operational sense, this would extend the travel (flight) time thus partially
mitigating the effects of the supersonic speeds as compared to those of its subsonic
counterparts. Figure 6.21 shows the relationship between the flight time and route
length when flown by subsonic aircraft and advanced STA.
As can be seen, the time differences, which can be deemed as savings for both
airlines and users/passengers, appear to be substantial and almost proportional to
the differences in the cruising speeds of both categories of aircraft/flights. In the
case of airlines, this contributes to decreasing the size of the required fleet for
operating a given route network and schedule. In the case of users/passengers, this
25
Subsonic aircraft
Mach 5 aircraft
Approximate flight time - (h)
20
15
10
0
3500 5500 7500 9500 11500 13500 15500 17500
Flying distance - (km)
Fig. 6.21 Relationship between approximate flight time and length of route for subsonic aircraft
and STA (Mach 5) (EC 2006)
contributes to decreasing their generalized travel costs shown to be particularly

relevant for business passengers.
The technical productivity of new STA during the cruising phase of flight can be
TP ¼ v PL ¼ M a PL ð6:12Þ
where
v is the aircraft speed (km/h);
a is the speed of sound (km/h); and
PL is the payload (tons).
Based on Eq. 6.12, the technical productivity for an advanced STA cruising at
FL600 with the payload PL = 30 tons (300 passengers each weighting together
with their baggage about 100 kg) at the speed of M = 5.0, where the speed of
sound is: a = 1,062 km/h, would be: TP = 159,300 t-km/h.
The economic performances of new STA in terms of aircraft operating costs per
seat and passenger mile/kilometer need to be comparable to those of their subsonic
counterparts particularly while operating on long distance continental and inter-
continental routes for which they are primary planned and designed in order to
maximize savings in the travel time, i.e., to shorten this time from about 7.2–22.5 h
to about 1.7–3.8 h for a range of routes (6,000–18,000 km). For example, the
Hydrogen (LH2) M5 Cruiser STA in Table 6.18 has been estimated to cost about
639 M€. Its annual operating costs have been estimated to be about 554 M€. The
former is based on the costs of developing and manufacturing 100 aircraft, while the
latter is based on the average annual utilization—flight frequency of 2 flights/day on
the route of length of about 18,000 km, availability 0.90, load factor 0.75, and the
number of passengers on the route 148000 (Steelant, 2008). This gives the average
unit operating costs of about 0.1054 €/s-km or 0.208€/p-km, which appears to be
quite comparable to the costs of their subsonic counterparts under equivalent
conditions. If LH2 was derived from electrolysis of water, the share of the fuel costs
in the total STA operating cost would be about 83 %. If LH2 was derived from the
steam reforming of hydrocarbons, the share of fuel costs would be about 30 %,
which in turn reduces the total STA operating costs by about 50 %. In this latter
case, the average unit operating cost would be 0.139 €/s-km and 0.104 €/p-km
under the above-mentioned traffic scenario, which is again competitive to the
subsonic counterparts of STA. If the passenger generalized costs were considered
for long distance travel, taking into account the savings in the costs of travel time
for all categories of passengers (business, leisure) would indicate an additional
advantage of new STA over their conventional subsonic counterparts under the
given conditions. Similar analysis has been carried out for the new STA—Kerosene
Mach 4.5/5.0 Cruiser (EC 2006; Steelant 2008).
The environmental performances of the new STA would specifically include the
energy/fuel consumption and emissions of GHG (Green House Gases), and land
use/take.
Fuel consumption
Fuel consumption is crucial to the economic and environmental success of new
STA. In terms of efficiency, it is usually expressed as SFC (Specific Fuel Con-
sumption), which is closely related to the engine BP (Bypass Ratio). The latter is
defined as the rate between the amount of air flowing around the engine core and
the amount of air passing through the engine. In general, jet engines with a higher
bypass ratio usually have lower SFC. Figure 6.22 shows the SFC-BR relationships
for the cruise and take-off phase of flight for 20 jet engines powering subsonic
commercial aircraft produced by different airspace manufacturers. These are: CFM
Company (joint corporation of Snecma (France) and General Electric Company
(USA)), Rolls-Royce (UK), Pratt and Whitney and General Electric (USA), and
IAE (International Aero Engines AG made up of the engine manufacturers Pratt
and Whitney, Rolls-Royce, MTU (Europe) and Aero Engine Corporation (Japan)).
In addition, the SFC-BR relationships for the engines that powered supersonic
Concorde and the TY144 are shown for comparison purposes (Janic 2007a).
0.7
Cruise - Subsonic
Take-off - Subsonic
0.6 Cruise - Supersonic Concorde, TY144
0.5
SFC - kg/hr/kg
0.4
0.3
0.2
0.1
0
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
BR - Bypass Ratio
Fig. 6.22 Relationship between SFC (Specific Fuel Consumption) and BR (Bypass Ratio) for
different commercial aircraft (Janic 2007b)
As can be seen, the SFC of most turbofan engines powering subsonic com-
mercial aircraft during take-off varies between 0.25 and 0.40 and during cruising
between 0.15 and 0.30 for the given range of BRs, 1–8. For the engines that
powered the two retired above-mentioned supersonic aircraft, the SFC was greater
than 0.5 for BRs ranging from 0 to 0.53. These relationships indicate that in order
to make the new STA economically and environmentally viable, its engines would
need to have a lower SFC (preferably 0.423 as specified in Table 6.18). This would
be a challenge since advanced STA is expected to operate under different engine
operating regimes and speeds (i.e., take-off, subsonic cruise, supersonic cruise,
approach, and landing). In general, this implies operating at the subsonic regime
requiring a high propulsive efficiency and the supersonic regime requiring a high
specific thrust. In the former case the engine frontal area should be as wide as
possible in order to provide a high propulsive efficiency at subsonic speeds, while
in the latter it should be as small as possible in order to reduce drag at high
supersonic speeds. One of the options using kerosene could be a variable cycle
engine, which is similar to a subsonic mixed-flow turbofan engine, but with an
additional secondary outer bypass duct aimed at increasing the overall bypass ratio
and consequently the air flow handling capacity. As opposed to conventional
turbofan engines, a variable cycle engine could change and adapt the bypass ratio
to the particular above-mentioned flight conditions. For example, increasing BR
during {XE ‘‘TO (Take-Off)’’} take-off and landing decreases noise around air-
ports, while reducing BR during cruise improves the fuel efficiency. Furthermore,
for example, increasing BR from 0.5 to 1.0 or even higher for variable cycle
engines would require application of more advanced cooling concepts for the
turbine blades in combination with the use of lightweight heat resisting materials.
Last but not least, at present, the other alternative engine designs perceived as
technologically, economically, and environmentally feasible include PDE (Pulse
Detonated Engine), hydrogen-fueled engines, and the fuel-cell based engines
(propulsive system).
PDEs are based on detonation waves aimed to initiate rapid combustion of a
premixed fuel–oxidizer mixture contained in an array of tubes, which are opened
at one end and closed on the other. These engines are expected to be even more
efficient than the current turbofan engines, while enabling high (supersonic)
speeds. Consequently, the US NASA has maintained PDE research efforts with the
baseline being a Mach 5 STA (a PDE test was successfully carried out in 2008).
LH2 (Liquid Hydrogen)-fuelled engines would seemingly be relatively easier to
design if carried out by modifying existing turbofan engines (Chap. 4).
Fuel-cell based engines (propulsive systems) would be powered by electricity
produced by fuel cells. The power density in terms of both weight and volume has
already shown to be the critical in designing these systems for new STA (NAS
2001).
Emissions of GHG
The energy consumption of STA has already been discussed. The emissions of
GHG (Green House Gases) would depend on the engines’ injection and com-
bustion performances, i.e., on the quality of air/fuel mixture, its distribution in the
combustor primary zone, and the corresponding temperatures. In addition to other
GHG with constant emission rates per unit of fuel burnt (CO2, H2O, etc.) (Chap. 5),
the primary concern would be emissions of NOx (Nitrogen Oxides) independently
of the fuel used—kerosene or LH2 (Liquid Hydrogen). This is because advanced
STA would cruise at altitudes with the maximum concentration/density of O3
(Ozone)-from 14 (FL450) to 26 km (FL850) as shown in Fig. 6.23.
O3 protects the Earth from harmful solar UV radiation by absorbing all light with
a wavelength less than 295 nm* (nanometer). However, O3 is sensitive to free
radicals such as atomic chlorine CI, Nitric Oxide NO, and hydroxyl radicals OH.
They are formed from the water vapor (H2O) and chlorofluorocarbons (CFCs),
products of the fuel burned by the new STA, directly affecting the ozone layer
formed in the stratosphere. Near the ground, emissions of NOx and other hydro-
carbons contribute to increasing the concentrations of O3, which is considered as a
pollutant harmful to inhale and a contributor to the formation of smog (Janic 2007b).
Thus, in contrast to its regional impact near airports, the NOx injected into the
stratosphere affects the ozone layer globally. In any case, the increased concen-
tration of NOx and other GHG might generally cause depletion of the ozone layer
with inevitable impacts. For example, a 10 % depletion of this layer could result in
an increase in UV radiation by about 45 %, which certainly could damage almost
all biological cells and in particular cause skin cancer in the exposed population.
Currently, in the case of the existing subsonic turbofan engines operating at
given fuel combustion temperatures, the highest rate of formation of NOx appears
to be when the fuel/air equivalence rate is equal to one (i.e., to the stoichiometric
air-to-fuel ratio). Furthermore, in the absolute sense, EINOx (Emission Index of
50 50 km
40
Altitude - km
30 30 km
Stratosphere
Ozone depletion
Supersonic flights
20
15 km
Tropopause
12 km
10 Troposphere Subsonic flights
Ozone enhancement
Ground level ozone layer up to 1 km

0
0.01 0.05 0.10 0.15 0.20 0.25 0.30 0.35 0.40
Ozone concentration - mg/m 3
Fig. 6.23 Scheme of distribution of the concentration of ozone and impact of commercial air
transport (mid-latitude) (Janic 2007b)
Nitrogen Oxides) increases with increasing of the fuel combustion temperature as

shown in Fig. 6.24.
This is an exponential increase up to the temperature barrier of the aircraft
constructive materials. Thus, if the above relationship was applied to engines
powering advanced STA without any technological improvements and with the
compressor temperature of about 1,900 C, EINOx would reach about 95,367 g/kg
of fuel, which is far above the specified target of less than 5 g/kg of fuel in
Table 6.18. Consequently, at least in this respect, new technological solutions, for
example, in the variable cycle engine concept, need to be developed in order to
achieve, among the other requirements, also the prescribed targets of NOx and
other GHG emissions. The solutions should achieve either the fuel-rich or lean
burning processes, reduce the compressor exit temperature, or both. Specifically,
in the first case, two different combustion processes have been under investigation:
RQL (the two stage Rich-burn/Quick-quench/Lean-burn), and LPP (Lean Pre-
mixed Prevaporized concept). The former operates at the fuel/air ratios greater
than one, thus affecting the formation of NOx due to the lack of oxygen. The latter
concept operates at a very low fuel/air ratio, which would be sufficient to maintain
stability and efficiency of the combustion process. In the second case, the very high
temperature in both processes (supposed to be around 1,900 C) would require
liner materials and cooling by air, which in turn could affect the emission rates of
GHG achieved by the combustion process. Nevertheless, experiments so far with
two above-mentioned burning processes and related materials have shown that it
could be possible to achieve EINOx, of about 45, 15, 5, and even lower, while not
700
600
EINOx - g/kg of fuel
500
EINOx = 0.097e0.0085T
400 R² = 0.9562
300
200
100
0
0 200 400 600 800 1000 1200
Compressor exit temperature - 0K
Fig. 6.24 Relationship between EINOx (Emission Index of NOx) and the compressor exit
temperature for subsonic turbofan engines (Coen 2011)
critically compromising the other required performances of the advanced STA

propulsion system (engines) (Coen 2011; Saounatsos 1998).
Nevertheless, new STA is expected to contribute to global warming occurring
as a result of radiative forcing, i.e., changes in the global balance between the
incoming solar radiation and the outgoing infrared radiation. Some estimates have
indicated that presence of advanced STA in the commercial aircraft fleet could
increase the radiative forcing by commercial aviation by about 42 % in 2050, i.e.,
from about 0.2 without to about 0.284 W/m2 with advanced STA (IPCC 1999).
Land use
As mentioned above, advanced STA should be designed to smoothly operate
within the existing airport clearances. This implies that the aircraft will be pro-
vided with the maneuvering and parking space without the need for using addi-
tional land.
The social performances of STA relate to noise, congestion, and traffic incidents
and accidents, i.e., safety.
Noise
The main attributes of the noise performances of new STA remain to be the airport
landing, sideline, and take-off noise, and sonic boom while operating at supersonic
speeds.
Landing, sideline, and take-off noise

In order to obtain high specific thrust at supersonic speeds, STA engines would
need to have a rather high jet exhaust speed at subsonic cruising speeds. In general,
this speed could range from about 300–900 m/s (Concorde), but has already been
established at around 400 m/s with the average temperature of 600–800 K. This
could also guarantee an acceptable noise level during the aircraft landing, take-off,
and sideline, i.e., within the ICAO Chap. 3 Noise Regulation for airports (ICAO
2001; Smith 1989).
Sonic boom
Another aspect of the noise of new STA is sonic boom. Sonic boom can be defined
as an acoustic phenomenon associated with supersonic flight. A STA flying at
supersonic speeds creates an acoustic wave, which propagates through the atmo-
sphere and either strikes the ground or dissipates in the upper atmosphere. The
observers (people) on the ground usually hear a sonic boom as a sharp double report
(Hayes 1971). The signal of sonic boom is usually very short lasting typically from
200 to 300 ms. In addition, it is characterized by the sharp head and tail shock,
which are actually caused by the sudden jumps in the air pressure of typically
1–3 psi (psi—pounds/in2) or 60–120 Pa (Pa—Pascale). The loudness of sonic boom
could reach 136–140 dBA. A typical impact of such loudness is its psychoacoustic
effect on people and animals while covering a ground area of about 30–40 km on
both sides of the aircraft track projected on the ground (NAS 2001). For example,
Concorde generated an overpressure of 93 Pa, which consequently restricted its
supersonic flying to over water areas and thus substantively diminished its eco-
nomic feasibility. Some research indicates that advanced STA could achieve an
overpressure of 85 Pa, but again they would need to be restricted from flying over
populated areas, which would extend the routes and related flying times and fur-
thermore result in additional fuel consumption and related emissions of GHG (EC
2006). Therefore, in the given context, the principal task for designers of advanced
STA is to make the sonic boom acceptable for the affected population on the
ground. This would imply including the sonic boom aspect as one of the criteria for
aircraft design, which was not the case at both Concorde and TY144 aircraft.
The sonic boom can generally decrease by decreasing the aircraft weight and
increasing: (i) L/D (Lift–to–Drag) ratio, (ii) length, and (iii) innovative propulsion
integration (NAS 2001). The aircraft weight could be decreased, in addition to
selecting a lightweight construction based on lighter materials, by reducing the
amount of required trip fuel, which could be achieved by reducing the engine SFC
(Specific Fuel Consumption) without compromising the range. The oblique/wing
in combination to the relatively long fuselage and innovative integration of the
propulsion systems (engines) have shown promising in providing both satisfactory
aerodynamic (L/D) performances and acceptable sonic boom, particularly for
Mach numbers of 1.4–2.0 (Kroo 2005; NAS 2001). Thus, because the required
operational and economic performances need to be simultaneously fulfilled in
order to make the advanced STA commercially and environmentally/socially
viable, their design will very likely remain to be highly influenced by the sonic
boom reduction requirements. Use of LH2 as a fuel instead of the conventional jet
fuel-kerosene could additionally require compromise in its design (Chap. 4).
Congestion
Advanced STAs would operate within the approaching and departing traffic flows
at airports exposed to congestion and delays similarly as other subsonic aircraft. In
some cases, they could be given the ultimate priority in service but the related
ATC (Air Traffic Control) criteria, if any, still need to be elaborated. The length of
the advanced STA (Table 6.18) could affect smooth traffic at the airport apron/gate
complex, but this would be resolved by parking and maneuvering on of dedicated
parking positions.
Safety
In addition to the absence of traffic incidents and accidents due to the already know
reasons, the safety of advanced STA would also imply protecting the flight crew
and passengers from high-altitude radiation and cabin decompression.
High-altitude radiation refers to primary and secondary cosmic radiation. The
Earth is protected from this radiation by the atmospheric shield which is over
1,000 g/cm3 thick at sea level, 200–300 g/cm3 thick at typical cruising altitudes of
subsonic aircraft (FL 300–400), and only 60 g/cm3 thick at the cruising altitudes of
new STA (FL600–650). This implies that advanced STA would preferably have
some kind of the very light shield in addition to more careful selection of 4D (four
dimensional) routes based also on the perceived (expected) cosmic radiation.
Furthermore, monitoring the exposure of flight crews and frequent fliers to this
radiation would be introduced as a part of STA flight (safety) regulations.
The crew and passengers of advanced STA would be exposed to a high risk of
loss of life in cases of explosive and rapid cabin decompression or sudden air
leakage from the STA fuselage occurring at altitudes above FL500 (50,000 ft).
Since current regulations do not allow exposure to pressure at altitudes above FL
400 (40,000 ft) for any time (as compared to 2 min of allowable exposure to the
pressure at an altitude of FL 250 (25,000 ft)), this requirement would be very
difficult and complex to fulfill for the advanced STA. Nevertheless, the possible
solutions could be using innovative technologies such as self-sealing materials to
contain fuselage pressure leaks, thus providing sufficient time for an emergency
descent initiated by an automatic emergency descent mode in the scope of the
aircraft flight control system (NAS 2001).
6.6.3 Evaluation
Advanced STA possess both advantages (Strengths and Opportunities) and dis-
advantages (Weaknesses and Threats) as follows:
Advantages
• Superiority as compared to their supersonic (retired) predecessors and com-
petitive to the future subsonic aircraft in terms of the overall efficiency and
effectiveness from the viewpoint of both airlines and users/passengers;
• Complementing to the subsonic and supersonic aircraft fleet operating within the
future APT (Air Passenger Transport) system;
• Contributing to the creation of an integrated and very high-speed transport
system on both the national and particularly the international-global scale;
• Compatibility with the existing airport layout enabling smooth, efficient, and
effective maneuvering, parking, and ground handling;
• Environmentally and socially acceptable in terms of the emissions of GHG and
noise, the former globally and the latter both locally around the airports and
globally (sonic boom); and
• Contributing to development of innovative and new knowledge, processes, and
materials for both airframe and engines, which could be disseminated to other
non-APT (Air Passenger Transport) fields.
Disadvantages
• Uncertainty in the final design (i.e., the most feasible supersonic speed and size,
namely seating capacity) that would guarantee economic feasibility for both
airlines and their users/passengers (similarly as at the ETT system: who would
really demand to travel at the offered supersonic speed at the given price and
under what conditions);
• Unknown technical/technological barriers, which would eventually need to be
overcome to develop the components—fuselage, propulsion systems, and air-
craft control systems;
• Diminishing advantages of flying at supersonic speeds due to the prohibition of
passing over populated areas (creating sonic boom), which may prolong flying
distance(s) (not always the shortest—Great Cycle ones) and related travel
time(s); and
• The inherent risk of increasing the overall environmental and social impacts in
terms of global emissions of GHG and noise (sonic boom), the former due to
increasing emissions of NOx and the latter due to some unavoidable passing
over populated areas at supersonic speeds.
Finally, any further elaboration of the overall feasibility of advanced STA
should include the above-mentioned and additional (depending on the actors/
stakeholders involved) advantages and disadvantages. Some facts provided in this
section indicate that advanced STA might be, under given conditions, a promising
supersonic complement to the future APT (Air Passenger Transport) system and
other long-haul very high-speed systems such as ETT.
References
ACARE, (2010). Beyond vision 2020 (Towards 2050). The Advisory Council for Aeronautic
Research in Europe, Directorate-General for Research Aeronautics and Transport. Brussels,
Belgium: European Commission.
Airbus, (2012). Delivering the future: Global market forecast 2012–2030. Blagnac, Cedex,
France: AIRBUS S.A.S.
Anderson, J. E. (2000). A review of the state of the art of personal rapid transit. Journal of
Advanced Transportation, 34(1), 3–29.
Anderson, J. E. (2005). ‘‘The Future of High-Capacity PRT’’, Advanced Automated Transit
Systems Conference, November 7–8. Italy: Bologna.
Anderson, J. E. (2007). High-capacity personal rapid transit: Rationale, attributes, status,
economics, benefits, and courses of study for engineers and planners. Minnesota, US: PRT
International LLC.
Antaki, A. G. (2003). Piping and pipeline engineering, design, construction, maintenance,
integrity, and repair. Boca Raton, FL: CRC Press.
Boeing, (2002). 747-400 Airplane characteristics for airport planning. Seattle, WA, USA:
Boeing Aircraft Company.
Boeing, (2012). Current market outlook 2012–2031. Market Analysis. Seattle, WA, USA: Boeing
CC, (1999). Automated underground transportation of Cargo: The 5th transportation alternative
for the transport of goods in congested urban areas. Bochum, Germany: Brochure, CargoCap
GmbH.
CIA, (2012). The world factbook. Washington D.C., USA: Central Intelligence Agency.
Coen, P. (2011). Fundamental aeronautic program: Supersonic projects. 2011 Technical
Conference (p. 34). Cleveland, Ohio, USA: National Aeronautic and Aerospace Administration.
EC, (2005). Optimal Procedures and Techniques for the Improvement of Approach and
Landing—OPTIMA. Sixth Framework Program, FP6-2002-Aero 1502880, Deliverable 1.2.
Brussels, Belgium: European Commission.
EC, (2006). ATLLAS (Aerodynamic and Thermal Load Interactions with Lightweight Advanced
Materials for High Speed Flight). European Commissions Sixth Framework Programme,
Final Public Report. Brussels, Belgium: Thematic Priority 1.4 Aeronautic and Space.
EC, (2007). CityMobil. European Commission, DG Research, 6th FMP (Framework Programme),
Thematic priority 1.6, Sustainable Development, Global Change, and Ecosystems, Integrated
Project, No. 031315, Brussels, Belgium.
EC, (2007a). Gaps Identification Airport, TMA, En Route and TBS—Reduced Separation
Minima—RESET. Brussels, Belgium: Deliverable D4.2, EC 6th Framework Program,
European Commission.
EC, (2008). LAPCAT (Long/Term Advanced Propulsion Concepts And Technologies). Brussels,
Belgium: European Commissions Sixth Framework Programme, Final Public Report,
Thematic Priority 1.4 Aeronautic and Space.
Freville, E. (2008). The RECAT project. Brussels, Belgium: Presentation of the TAAM-based
Simulation Tool to Estimate Re-categorisation Impact on Runway Capacity,
EUROCONTROL.
FAA, (2010). Air traffic control,- FAA Order JO 7110.65T. Washington DC, USA: Federal
Aviation Administration, US Department of Transportation.
FAA, (2011). Change 2, order JO 7110.65T. Washington DC, USA: Federal Aviation
Administration, US Department of Transportation.
FAA (2011a). NextGen implementation plan. Washington DC, USA: US Department of
Transport, Federal Aviation Administration.
FAA, (2011b). NextGen for Airports. Washington DC, USA: US Department of Transport,
Federal Aviation Administration.
References 389
FAA, (2011c). NextGen operator and Airport enablers. Washington DC, USA: US Department of
Transport, Federal Aviation Admininistraion.
GAO, (2009). Aviation and climate change: Aircraft emissions expected to grow, but
technological and operational improvements and government policies can help control
emissions. Report to Congressional Committees- GAO-09-554. Washington D.C., USA:
United States Government Accountability Office.
Helmke, H. (Hartmut), Hann, R., Muller, D., Witkowski S., (2009). Time based arrival
management for dual threshold operations and continuous descent approaches. 8th USA/
Europe Air Traffic Management Research and Development Seminar (ATM2009), Napa,
California, USA.
IBRD, (2012). Air travel and energy efficiency. Transport Papers TP-38, The International Bank
for Reconstruction and Development/The World Bank, Washington D.C., USA.
ICAO, (2001). Aircraft engine noise—Environmental protection, Annex 16, Chapters 3 and 4.
Montreal, Canada: International Civil Aviation Organization.
ICAO, (2007). Procedures for air navigation services: Air Traffic Management. Doc. 4444/
ATM501, Fifteen Edition. Montreal, Canada: International Civil Aviation Organization.
ICAO, (2008). Wake Turbulence Aspects of Airbus A380-8/000 Aircraft. TEC/OPS/SEP-08-
0294.SLG. Neuilly sur Siene, Cedex, France: International Civil Aviation Organization.
IPCC, (1999). Aviation and the global atmosphere. Intergovernmental panel on climate change.
Cambridge, UK: Cambridge University Press.
IWW, INFRAS, (2004). External cost of transport: Update study. Summary. Karlsruhe, Zurich,
Germany, Switzerland: Universitaet Karlsruhe, INFRAS Zurich.
Janic, M. (2006). A model of ultimate capacity of dual-dependent parallel runways. Transpor-
tation Research Record, 1951, 76–85.
Janic, M. (2007a). A steeper approach procedure for increasing the ultimate capacity of closely
spaced parallel runways. Transportation Research Record, 2007, 81–90.
Janic, M. (2007b). The sustainability of air transportation: Quantitative analysis and assessment.
UK: Ashgate Publishing Company.
Janic, M. (2008). Towards time-based separation rules for landing aircraft. Transportation
Research Record, 2052, 79–89.
Janic, M. (2009). A concept for prioritizing the aircraft operations at congested airports.
Transportation Research Record, 2106, 100–108.
Janic, M. (2012). Modeling Effects of Different Air Traffic Control Operational Procedures,
Separation Rules, and Service Disciplines on Runway Landing Capacity. to appear in Journal
of Advanced Transportation 24 Aug 2012. DOI: 10.1002/atr.1208
Kelly, R. J., La Berge, F. E. C. (1990). MLS: A total system approach. IEEE AES Magazine
(May), p. 10.
Kersting, M., Draganinska, S. (2005). CargoCap: Economic freight transportation in congested
areas. Proceedings of the 4th International Symposium on Underground Freight Transport by
Capsule Pipelines and Other Tube/Tunnel Technologies, Shanghai, China.
Kroo, I., (2005). Unconventional configurations for efficient supersonic flight. VKI Lecture Series
on Innovative Configurations and Advanced Concepts for Future Civil Aircraft. Stanford
University, USA, p. 25.
LHR, (2010). LHR FEU Annual Report 2010. London, UK: Heathrow Airport.
Liu, H. (2004). Feasibility of underground pneumatic freight transport in New York. Final
Report, prepared for The New York State Energy Research and Development Authority
(NYSERDA). Columbia, Missouri, USA: Freight Pipeline Company.
Morrison, A. S., & Winston, C. (2007). Another look at airport congestion pricing. The American
Economic Review, 97(5), 1970–1977.
NAS, (2001). Commercial supersonic technology: The way ahead. Washington D.C., USA:
National Academy of Science, National Academy Press.
NASA, (1999). Benefit estimates of terminal area productivity program technologies. NASA/
CR—1999 208989. Virginia, USA: National Aeronautics and Space Administration.
Rijsenbrij, J. C., Pielage, B. A., & Visser, J. G. (2006). State of the art on automated
(Underground) freight transport systems for the EU TREND project. Delft, The Netherlands:
Delft University of Technology.
Rodrigue, J.-P., Comtois, C., & Slack, B. (2006). The geography of transport systems. New York,
USA: Routledge.
Rossow, V. J. (2003). Use of individual flight corridors to avoid vortex wakes. Journal of
Aircraft, 40(2), 225–231.
RUF, (2008). RUF international: Investment case. Frederiksberg C, Denmark: RUF International.
Salter, R.M. (1972). The very high speed transit system. The rand corporation (p. 4874). Santa
Monica, California, USA, p. 18.
Saounatsos, G. (1998). Supersonic transport aircraft (SST): Technology readiness and develop-
ment risk. ASCE Journal of Aerospace Engineering 1998, 1–16.
Seebass, R. (1998). Supersonic aerodynamics: Lift and drag. Paper presented at the RTO AVT
Course on ‘‘Fluid Dynamics Research on Supersonic Aircraft’’ (p. 6). Rhode-Saint-Gendse,
Belgium.
Sirohiwala Y. A., Tandon A., Vysetty R. (2007). Feasibility and economic aspects of vactrains.
An Interactive Qualifying Project. Worcester, Massachusetts, USA: The Faculty of the
Worcester Polytechnic Institute.
Smith, M. J. T., (1989). Aircraft noise. Cambridge Aerospace Series. Cambridge, UK: Cambridge
University Press.
Steelant, J. (2008). LAPCAT: High speed propulsion technology, in Advances on Propulsion
Technology for High-Speed Aircraft. Educational notes RTO-EN-AVT-150, Paper 12.
Neuilly-sur-Siene, France, pp. 12-1-12-38.
TC, (2004). Approval of steep approach landing capability of transport category aircraft.
Toronto, Canada: Aircraft Certification, Civil Aviation, Transport Canada.
Thompson, S. D. (2002). Terminal area separation standards: Historical development and
process for change. Lexington, Massachusetts, USA: Lincoln Laboratory, Massachusetts
Institute of Technology.
Tosic, V., & Horonjeff, R. (1976). Effects of multiple path approach procedures on runway
landing capacity. Transportation Research, 10(5), 319–329.
Zhang, Y., Oster, D., Kumada, M., Yu, J., & Li, S. (2011). Key vacuum technology issues to be
solved in evacuated tube transportation. Journal of Modern Transportation, 19(2), 110–113.
Visser, J. G. S. N. (2010). Underground freight transport: What is the role of the public sector ion
developing a new transport mode. Netherlands Institute for Transport Policy Analysis (KiM).
Den Hague, The Netherlands: Ministry of Transportation, Public Works and Water
Management.
Winkelmans, W., Notteboom, T. (2000). In search of strategic positioning of underground freight
transport in the framework of a coherent transport policy. Proceedings of 2nd International
Symposium on Underground Freight Transportation by Capsule Pipelines and Other Tube/
Tunnel Systems. 28–29 September 2000, Delft, The Netherlands.
Chapter 7
Contribution to Sustainability
7.1 Introduction
An important current and prospective medium- to long-term objective of transport

systems worldwide is to continuously improve sustainability. On the one hand, this
implies handling growing passenger and freight transport demand efficiently,
effectively, and safely, and on the other mitigating their direct and indirect impacts
on the environment and society such as energy consumption and related emissions
of GHG (Greenhouse Gases), local noise, congestion, traffic incidents/accidents,
land use/take, and waste on the other. Under such conditions, the main actors/
stakeholders involved in dealing with transport system development, operation,
and use also need to benefit from the perspective of their specific objectives. These
include manufacturers of transport means/vehicles and supporting facilities and
equipment, suppliers of energy/fuel, infrastructure providers and transport opera-
tors, users of transport services—passengers and freight shippers/receivers, the
local population, and associations and policy bodies at different institutional levels
(local, regional, national, and international). Consequently, the question of the
contribution of advanced transport systems and their components to the above-
mentioned sustainable development of the global transport system can be raised.
7.2 Contribution
Advanced transport systems are generally characterized by advanced infrastruc-

ture, transport means/vehicles, energy/fuel used, facilities and equipment, all of
which support operations at the operational, tactical, and strategic level, together
with the related organization of service networks. These advancements include: (i)
design and materials used for building transport infrastructure and manufacturing
transport means/vehicles; (ii) technology, size/capacity, speed, and energy used by
transport means/vehicles; and (iii) different configurations/concepts of transport
service networks aimed at serving the expected passenger and freight transport

392 7 Advanced Transport Systems: Contribution to Sustainability
demand efficiently, effectively, and safely. In order to indicate their contribution to

the sustainability of the transport sector, advanced transport systems have been
scrutinized by analyzing, modeling, and evaluating their infrastructural, technical/
technological, operational, economic, environmental, social, and policy
performances.
Most of the considered advanced systems have already been commercialized
although some are less likely to be commercialized in the medium- to long-term
future. As far as infrastructural performances are concerned, commercialized
advanced systems can use the same (in some cases partially modified and adapted)
infrastructure as their conventional counterparts. In the given context, these
include: (i) BRT (Bus Rapid Transit) systems, roadmega trucks, and advanced
passenger cars in the road transport mode; (ii) High-Speed Tilting passenger trains,
LIFTs (Long Intermodal Freight Trains), and advanced freight collection/distri-
bution network services in the rail and intermodal transport mode; (iii) advanced
ATC (Air Traffic Control) technologies and operations, advanced conventionally
and LH2 (Liquid Hydrogen)-fuelled subsonic passenger and freight aircraft, and
advanced STA (Supersonic Transport Aircraft) in the air transport mode; and (iv)
large advanced container ships in the sea-water transport mode. Others, such as the
commercialized HSR (High-Speed Rail), partially commercialized TRM (Trans-
Rapid Maglev), and the non-commercialized UFT (Underground Freight Trans-
port), and ETT (Evacuated Tube Transport) systems in the rail, and partially
commercialized PRT (Personal Rapid Transit) systems in the road transport mode
would require completely new dedicated (and very expensive) infrastructure.
The technical/technological performances of the above-mentioned systems are
fully developed, while those of the non-commercialized systems require further
elaboration. The main performances of these systems relate to the transport means/
vehicles and facilities and equipment for their control and management. The
former includes being: (i) made of a greater proportion of lighter (composite)
materials; (ii) powered by electric engines (supposedly obtaining energy from
from renewable primary sources such as wind, water, and solar energy) and
renewable fuels such as LH2 (Liquid Hydrogen); (iii) having high to large carrying
capacity; and (iv) operating at as high as possible speeds (large advanced container
ships, which operate at reduced speed in order to improve both economic and
environmental performances, the latter in terms of fuel consumption and related
emissions of GHG, are the exception). The latter includes the rather wide appli-
cation of ITS (Intelligent Transport Systems) in direct and indirect supporting
operations. Technical/technological performances are expected to generally con-
tribute to improving the operational, economic, environmental, social, and policy
performances of the particular advanced transport systems.
Operational performances, which include the service networks and patterns of
their operations, are set up as close as possible to the characteristics of user/
customer demand. They depend on conventional and/or advanced infrastructural
and technical/technological performances. As such, they directly influence all
economic and some environmental performances.
7.2 Contribution 393
For example, BRT systems, road mega trucks, large advanced container ships,
and freight aircraft, all using existing or slightly modified infrastructure, could
improve the efficiency and effectiveness of related services. At the same time,
however, the latter two can contribute to increasing congestion, particularly when
operating in congested urban and suburban areas and spatially constrained ports
and airports, respectively. Similarly, advanced (mainly electric) passenger cars
using the present roads and streets in combination with modified supporting
facilities and equipment mainly for energy/fuel supply can also contribute to
congestion but not to increasing direct emissions of GHG. On the contrary: PRT
and UFT systems, which require completely new dedicated and very expensive
infrastructure if developed to the network level, can mitigate congestion and both
direct and indirect emissions of GHG in given urban or suburban area(s). High-
speed tilting, HSR, and TRM passenger trains operating on completely new
infrastructure (railway lines) do not contribute to increasing congestion due to the
nature of railway operations. In particular, high-speed tilting trains sharing
infrastructure with conventional passenger and freight trains are always given the
highest priority. By taking over medium- to long-distance trips from individual
passenger cars, these trains could indirectly contribute to reducing road congestion
and related emissions of GHG.
Advanced freight collecting/distributing networks and LIFTs in Europe oper-
ating on current rail/road/inland waterway and rail infrastructure, respectively, can
contribute to improving particularly the economic and environmental perfor-
mances of the supply chains served, mainly due to replacing road standard (and
prospectively mega) trucks.
Advanced subsonic commercial aircraft and advanced STA remain neutral in
terms of contributing to congestion as compared to their less advanced counter-
parts. They can use existing infrastructure with modified (or new) supporting
facilities and equipment mainly for fuel supply in case of LH2–fuelled models. The
relative fuel consumption and type of fuel used (also LH2) can contribute to
improving the environmental performances in terms of energy/fuel consumption
and related emissions of GHG. Aircraft engine technology in combination with
advanced ATC technologies and operations for increasing airport runway capacity
can contribute to reducing local noise. In addition, they can directly improve the
technical/technological and operational performances, and indirectly the eco-
nomic, environmental, and social performances of a given airport runway sys-
tem(s). However, due to operating at supersonic speed, advanced STA create sonic
booms, which, in parallel to the requirement for increased energy/fuel consump-
tion and related emissions of GHG, can affect large (also populated) area(s) and
consequently compromise social performances in general.
ETT (Evacuated Tube Transport) systems can apparently contribute to
improving the operational and environmental performances of long-distance
(intercontinental) passenger transport. At the same time, economic performances
can be compromised due to the very high costs of completely new infrastructure
that needs to be built and maintained under very specific conditions (underwater).
The level of maturing and consequently the dynamics of commercialization of

particular advanced transport systems can influence their technical/technological,
and consequently policy performances. In some cases, the influence is positive,
while in others, it is negative. In general, the relevant system must be technically/
technologically mature in order to be fully commercialized. However, very often,
technical/technological maturity does not imply immediate commercialization.
The positive influence of the technical/technological performances on commer-
cialization is already present with respect to the fully and/or partially commer-
cialized systems such as BRT and PRT systems, high-speed titling passenger trains
and HSR, advanced commercial subsonic passenger and large advanced freight
aircraft, advanced freight collection/distribution networks, LIFTs, road mega
trucks, and large advanced container ships. The negative influence of these per-
formances on commercialization is present in case of currently non-commercial-
ized systems such as advanced passenger cars, TRM, UFT, and EET system,
advanced ATC technologies and operations for increasing airport runway system
capacity, and advanced STA.
7.3 Some Controversies
Consequently, many of the above-mentioned advanced transport systems appear

controversial regarding their contribution to the overall medium- to long-term
sustainability of the entire transport sector. This controversy becomes more
obvious after considering their technical productivity, the energy/fuel consumption
and related emissions of GHG, and safety (i.e., traffic incidents and accidents).
7.3.1 Technical Productivity
The evidence so far indicates that the above-mentioned advanced transport sys-
tems are characterized by gradually increasing technical productivity partially
thanks to the increasing size/weight/capacity of transport means/vehicles and their
number in the fleet to serve growing demand, and primarily thanks to increasing
technical and operating speed(s).
7.3.1.1 Vehicle Size
The size/capacity/weight of particular transport means/vehicles operated by dif-

ferent transport modes has seemingly reached constructive/design limits. But is
that really the case? Where are these limits? Are they contained in the sustain-
ability and durability of the vehicle’s structure—design and material? Maybe they
lie in constraints in the existing transport infrastructure (roads, railway lines,
7.3 Some Controversies 395
inland waterways, airports, and river/sea ports) requiring substantial adjustment in

order to enable efficient, effective, and safe maneuvering of these increasingly
larger transport means/vehicles? Is the limit stricter regulation constraining the
absolute impacts of these vehicles/means and the entire transport sector on the
environment and society? Or is this the overall shortage of land for expansion of
infrastructure in combination with an increasing shortage of (and more expensive)
currently used energy/fuels? Or perhaps a combination of all the above-mentioned
factors?
What is the general influence of these larger transport means/vehicles on the
transport processes and related effects and impacts?
In general, the increased size/weight/capacity of transport means/vehicles
implies less frequent services to satisfy a given volume of demand on a given
route(s), and on the entire network(s). Such less frequent services contribute to
increasing schedule delays of passengers at their origins and the inventory cost of
freight shipments at both ends of the given supply chain. In addition, such more
sizeable vehicles are designed to operate on medium to long distances, which in
combination with the longer loading and unloading (ground handling time) gen-
erally require greater fleets to serve the given volumes of passenger and freight
demand during a given period of time. On the other hand, the inherently lower
service frequencies require a smaller number of these larger vehicles. At the same
time, the investment and operating costs of these vehicles per service are higher,
while the unit costs are lower compared to their smaller counterparts thanks to
economies of scale and density. These larger vehicles also consume more energy/
fuel per service, which depending on the type and primary sources of energy/fuel
production generally create higher total emissions of GHG. However, in relative
terms, these emissions can be lower than those of their smaller counterparts. The
same applies to the local noise created by these vehicles.
7.3.1.2 Vehicle Speed
The dynamism of raising the technical and operating speed of the commercialized
and the non-commercialized advanced transport systems is different. The former is
an evolutionary gradual process, while the latter will likely be a revolutionary
process. Take for example the case of evolutionary/gradual increase in the speed of
the urban public passenger transport achieved through operational advancements
in the BRT system. High-speed tilting passenger train(s), HSR (High-Speed Rail)
and its modification Super HSR, and TRM are all examples of gradually increasing
the speed by technical/technological modifications. In urban and suburban freight
transport, a gradual increase in the freight/goods delivery speed can be achieved by
as yet non-commercialized UFT systems. But, again, how big should such an
increase be combined with the other advantages to justify the generally high
investment cost in UFT infrastructure? In case of the ETT system and advanced
STA as yet non-commercialized future systems, the increase in speed will likely be
revolutionary. At the EET system, this implies an application of TRM technology
through a vacuum tube enabling a very high (supersonic) operational speed. In

case of STA, this implies development of a new supersonic configuration expected
to be much faster, efficient, effective, safe, and particularly less noisy than the
previous retired models—the Anglo-French Concorde and the Soviet Union’s
TU144.
Higher technical and operating speeds generally contribute to shortening the
travel time and related costs for the users/passengers and freight shipments. In
parallel, they enable shorter turnaround times, thus requiring engagement of
smaller fleets to serve given volumes of demand during a given period of time.
This generally diminishes the investment, maintenance, and operational costs of
the transport means/vehicles. However, higher speeds require higher energy/fuel
consumption, which contributes to increasing the cost per service. Depending on
the type of primary sources for producing the energy/fuel, such increased energy/
fuel consumption generates higher emissions of GHG. The noise level generated
by the vehicles passing-by at higher speeds is generally also higher. The question
of the maximum possible technical and operation speed of the above-mentioned
systems also arises. Where are the technical/technological barriers and where are
the commercial constraints? The latter implies who actually needs very high
(supersonic) speeds—to what extent are such speeds beneficial and when do they
become counterproductive? Do savings of the users’ time justify setting up usually
very expensive infrastructure, high energy/fuel consumption and related emissions
of GHG, and increase in the local (and global) noise? Large advanced container
ships can be considered as a case of such controversy: by reducing operating
speeds and consequently fuel consumption, these ships can improve their eco-
nomic and environmental performances, but only on account of an increased fleet
size and longer delivery time of the freight/goods shipments, which need to be
acceptable for both operators and users/customers.
7.3.2 Energy/Fuel Consumption and Emissions of GHG
The environmental performances of particular advanced transport systems are

expected to contribute to sustainability through reducing energy/fuel consumption
and related emissions of GHG (Green House Gases). These performances are
generally influenced by the vehicle size/weight/capacity, operating speed, the scale
of operations (size of the network and the service frequency), and type of the
energy/fuel used. As mentioned above, the larger size, speed, and scale of oper-
ations by using a given fuel require a greater total fuel consumption, which con-
sequently generates greater related emissions of GHG, and vice versa. Liquid fuels
as derivatives of nonrenewable primary sources such as crude and LNG (Liquid
Natural Gas), electric energy, and LH2 obtained from different nonrenewable and
renewable primary sources are used by these systems. While crude oil and LNG
7.3 Some Controversies 397
will seemingly remain the primary source of fuels used by large advanced con-
tainer ships and aircraft, road mega trucks, the BRT (Bus Rapid Transit) System
system, and advanced commercial subsonic aircraft. Electric energy obtained from
nonrenewables such as coal, crude oil, LNG, and nuclear, and renewable sources
such as water, wind, and solar energy is and will continue to be used by high-speed
tilting, HSR, and TRM trains, advanced (electric) passenger cars, and the PRT, and
UFT In addition, LH2, which can be obtained from the electrolysis of water,
appears to be under consideration as a future fuel for subsonic commercial APT
including STA. Again, electric energy is needed for producing LH2. Therefore, the
question arises how to obtain sufficient quantities of electric energy for satisfying
humanity’s overall (generally growing) needs including those of advanced trans-
port systems on the one hand while maintaining the related impacts on the envi-
ronment within the prescribed targets, on the other? As well, the he question which
kind of propellant/fuel would be used by the ETT system remains.
Nonrenewable primary sources will be exhausted sooner or later. Water, wind,
and solar energy produced using dedicated plants installed on the Earth’s surface
will remain the most important sources of renewable electric energy. Alternatively,
SSP (Space Solar Power) or SBSP (Space-Based Solar Power)1 as a complement
to existing sources/plants appear to be the most feasible long-term solution(s).
7.3.3 Safety
Advanced transport systems are expected to be safer, namely freer from traffic
incidents and accidents than their conventional counterparts. This implies that,
under given conditions, incidents and accidents should not occur due to already
known reasons. In addition to the adequate design and construction of the infra-
structure, transport means/vehicles, and supportive facilities and equipment, this
will be achieved through the increased automation of operations, which will be
established at the level of an individual vehicle and at the level of a route and/or
the entire network. For example, advanced HS (High Speed) trains and LIFTs,
advanced subsonic and supersonic commercial aircraft, and large advanced con-
tainer ships and aircraft are guided automatically by autopilots mainly during the
cruising phase of their trip. It is only a matter of time when advanced (electric)
passenger cars, BRT buses, and mega trucks will start to be guided in a similar
way. Analogously, advanced ATC technologies and operations will enable allo-
cation of a part of the responsibility for aircraft separation from ATC controllers to
the pilots. PRT and UFT are fully automated driverless systems at both the level of
1
At present, solar energy is routinely used on nearly all spacecraft. On a larger scale, this
technology combined with already demonstrated wireless power transmission could satisfy nearly
all needs for electricity on Earth. Thus, the SSP system would consist of lower-cost
environmentally friendly launch vehicles, large solar power satellites, and a power transmission
system, technologies already known today at least at the conceptual level (NSS 2007).
an individual vehicle/capsule and the level of the route network. In semi-auto-

mated systems, automation helps drivers change their role from the previously
more intensive controlling and monitoring to the present and future increasingly if
not exclusively monitoring. In driverless systems, the controlling and monitoring
role is and will be carried out fully automatically by central computer systems.
Such developments will certainly bring advantages in terms of improving the
efficiency, effectiveness, and inherent safety of these systems. On the other hand,
disadvantages may include less employment and increased complexity requiring
longer learning/training time and resulting in higher repair costs in case of tech-
nical failure. In addition, safety of operations could be significantly compromised
when the drivers again take over a controlling and monitoring role. In light of the
above-mentioned issues, the long-standing principal dilemma about the division of
tasks between man and machine and consequently sharing the ultimate responsi-
bility remains. In addition, incidents and accidents still remain possible. In such
cases, due to operating at high speed and/or due to large size, the human causalities
and property damage could be devastating. Therefore, in any case, safety will
remain to be of the highest priority in designing and operating both existing and
forthcoming advanced transport systems, as well as their conventional
counterparts.
Reference
NSS. (2007). Space solar power: An investment for today-an energy solution for tomorrow.
Washington, D.C.: National Space Society.
About the Author
Dr. Milan Janić is a transport and traffic engineer and planner. At present, he is a
Senior Researcher at the Transport and Planning Department of the Faculty of
Civil Engineering and Geosciences of Delft University of Technology (Delft, The
Netherlands) and Research Professor at the Faculty of Traffic and Transport
Engineering of the University of Belgrade (Belgrade, Serbia). Previously he was a
Leader of the Research Program of the Section Transport and Infrastructure at the
OTB Research Institute for the Built Environment of Delft University of
Technology (Delft, The Netherlands), Senior Researcher at Manchester
Metropolitan University (Manchester, UK) and Loughborough University
(Transport Studies Group) (Loughborough, UK), and the Institute of Transport
(Ljubljana, Slovenia).
He has been involved in transport-related research and planning projects on
both the national and international scale for almost 30 years. He has also published
many scientific and professional transport-related papers, and presented many of
them at national and international transport conferences. In addition, he has
published four books: ‘‘Greening Airports: Advanced Technology and
Operations’’ (2011), ‘‘Airport Analysis, Planning and Design: Demand, Capacity
and Congestion’’ (2009), ‘‘The Sustainability of Air Transportation: A
Quantitative Analysis and Assessment’’ (2007), and ‘‘Air Transport System
Analysis and Modeling: Capacity, Quality of Services and Economics’’ (2000). He
has been a member of NECTAR (Network on European Communications and
Transport Activity Research), Delft Aviation Centre (Delft University of
Technology, Delft, and The Netherlands), GARS (German Aviation Research
Society, Cologne, Germany), ATRS (Air Transport Research Society), and
Airfield and Airspace Capacity and Delay Committee of TRB (Transportation
Research Board) (Washington DC, USA).

DOI: 10.1007/978-1-4471-6287-2, Springer-Verlag London 2014
Index
A Airframe, 62, 72, 73, 149, 150, 161, 242, 371,

Accelerometers, 48 387
Accessibility, 2, 12, 29, 30, 40, 98, 108, 254, Airline, 63, 72, 146, 155–157, 236, 237, 239,
255, 260, 273, 279, 288, 292, 294, 304, 241, 367, 368
314, 332 Airport, 3, 6, 9, 49, 63, 64, 72, 75, 77, 78, 147,
Accidents, 2, 36, 38, 59, 61, 75, 77, 101, 102, 156, 159, 162, 221, 229, 238, 240, 253,
124, 126, 131, 132, 140, 141, 147, 159, 255, 263, 269–271, 278, 279, 296, 305,
160, 201, 218, 236, 246, 255–258, 261, 337, 341–343, 347, 349, 351, 353, 358,
265, 277, 280, 293, 294, 298, 304–306, 364, 369, 384, 387, 393, 395
317, 319, 324, 337–339, 384, 391, Alternatives, 3, 8, 103–105, 143, 168, 178,
394, 398 224, 254, 258, 259, 266, 267, 269, 272–275
ACN (Aircraft Classification Number), 64, 148 Altitude, 44, 212, 218, 221, 256, 324, 352,
Admiralty, 191 372, 386
Advanced, 1–4, 6–8, 11, 12, 20, 42, 43, 51, 62, Analyzing, 4, 8, 14, 43, 63, 86, 87, 112, 127,
65, 66, 68, 75, 76, 78, 84–87, 94, 98, 147, 168, 188, 208, 281, 306, 325, 342,
100–105, 110, 111, 126, 145, 162, 366, 392
166–168, 170, 171, 173, 174, 177–179, Angle, 46–49, 63, 64, 121, 147, 195, 296,
181, 182, 184–191, 193–196, 198–201, 346–348, 352–354, 356, 357, 359, 369
203, 204, 206, 207, 209, 210, 213–216, Application, 49, 72, 103, 105, 139, 152, 177,
229, 236, 246, 275, 278, 279, 281, 305, 222, 224, 226, 266, 268, 274, 278, 305,
324, 346, 350–354, 358, 364, 367, 319, 323, 343, 347, 352–355, 357–359,
372–379, 381–387, 391–397 369, 381
Advantages, 8, 40, 41, 61, 78, 110, 125, 144, Approach, 4, 7, 8, 12, 20, 21, 63, 75, 76, 105,
161, 186, 215, 228, 274, 303, 319, 340, 147, 172, 174, 177, 235, 325, 341, 343,
363, 387 346–348, 350, 352–355, 357–359, 369, 386
Aerodynamics, 65, 77, 246, 371 Apron, 64, 65, 75, 147, 152, 159, 162, 369,
Air, 1, 7, 37, 47, 56, 57, 67, 78, 140, 141, 146, 386
154, 156, 157, 161, 162, 165, 167, 212, APT (Air Passenger Transport), 3, 9, 166, 216,
216, 218, 222–226, 228, 229, 238, 246, 228, 235, 236, 274, 324, 332, 333, 340, 387
249, 251, 270, 271, 278, 281, 298, 311, APU (Auxiliary Power Unit), 65
312, 317, 327, 330, 331, 343, 353, 367, ATC (Air Traffic Control), 3, 6, 159, 263, 277,
372, 373, 380–383, 385, 386 278, 348, 363, 369, 386, 392
Airbus, 63, 74, 78, 145, 152, 167, 237, 278, Attributes, 2–4, 8, 87, 98, 103–105, 204,
367 254–263, 265, 266, 268, 269, 271–274,
Aircraft, 3, 6, 8, 11, 62–64, 66–78, 145–147, 305, 323, 334, 358, 371, 384
149, 151, 152, 154, 156, 158–162, 167, Automated, 20, 21, 101, 197, 251, 277, 280,
217, 218, 220–226, 228, 229, 236, 237, 285, 295, 304, 306, 307, 309, 319, 331,
240–243, 256, 264, 271, 278, 331, 339, 338, 343, 398
341, 343, 347–364, 367, 369, 371, 372, Availability, 7, 29, 30, 178, 288, 303, 314,
375–378, 380, 381, 384–387, 393, 397 322, 323, 353, 380

DOI: 10.1007/978-1-4471-6287-2, Springer-Verlag London 2014
402 Index
B Composite, 62, 66, 67, 78, 149, 161, 181, 182,

BAU (Business As Usual), 208, 339 213, 325, 377, 373, 376, 392
Benefit, 99, 101, 103, 104, 254, 266–269, 391 Concorde, 237, 278, 324, 364–366, 371, 375,
Berth, 189, 213, 287, 288, 296 377, 378, 380, 385, 396
BEV (Battery Electric Vehicle), 168, 170, 173, Congestion, 2, 7, 12, 36, 38, 40, 41, 59, 60, 75,
185, 186 77, 102, 120, 122, 123, 131, 132, 138, 140,
Boeing, 3, 11, 62, 63, 65, 66, 69, 70, 78, 84, 141, 147, 159, 161, 162, 168, 186, 236,
145–147, 149, 152, 154, 167, 217, 223, 246, 254–258, 264, 271, 273, 277, 279,
225, 236, 237, 278, 280, 333, 364, 367 280, 289, 292, 293, 304–306, 317, 319,
Boom, 195, 367, 377, 378, 384–387, 393 324, 337, 338, 353, 384, 386, 391, 393
BR (Bypass Ratio), 68, 69, 74, 380, 381 Consumption, 2, 34, 36, 41, 42, 45, 47, 55–59,
Break-even, 143–145, 257, 262 62, 66, 68, 69, 73, 74, 78, 101, 102, 112,
Breaking, 60, 129, 246, 285, 288, 289, 294, 113, 115, 117–119, 130, 131, 137, 138,
312, 331 141, 147, 149, 150, 156, 158, 161,
BRT (Bus Rapid Transit) system, 3, 6, 8, 165–167, 169, 170, 172–175, 177,
11–17, 19–21, 24–30, 32–41, 279, 283, 181–184, 186–188, 191, 194, 195,
392–395, 397 200–203, 209, 210, 220, 223, 246, 251,
Bus, 3, 6, 8, 11–16, 20–24, 26, 27, 29–33, 36, 252, 257, 264, 271, 277, 292–294, 304,
38, 40, 42, 151, 255, 279, 292, 298, 332 306, 317, 324, 339, 368, 380, 394, 396
Container, 3, 6, 9, 83–86, 99, 111, 117, 126,
128, 152, 165, 166, 187–190, 192–195,
C 198–203, 205, 206, 210, 209, 212–215,
Cant, 44–47, 51, 57, 62 306, 307, 309, 310, 312–314, 318, 319,
Capacity, 3, 6, 9, 12, 13, 19, 21, 23, 25–28, 37, 392–394, 396, 397
40, 50, 53, 54, 56, 58, 60, 62, 77, 84–86, Control, 47, 49, 51, 69, 115, 127, 149, 151,
92, 98, 99, 101, 102, 109, 110, 112–114, 152, 171, 203, 213, 220, 223, 250, 251,
116, 117, 119, 125, 128, 133, 134, 137, 270, 281, 285, 290, 294, 295, 298, 309,
145, 146, 159, 160, 215, 237, 245, 254, 312, 316, 329, 337, 351, 353, 387
256, 257, 262–264, 270, 271, 278–281, Convenience, 41, 63, 168, 270, 273, 280, 292
285–289, 295, 296, 304, 306, 310, Conventional, 1, 2, 11–14, 21, 25, 29, 34, 36,
312–315, 324, 330, 334, 336, 341–343, 38, 40, 42, 43, 45, 49, 51, 53, 54, 59, 60,
347–350, 352–355, 357–364, 367, 387, 62, 72, 83, 85, 94, 111, 126–128, 167–172,
391, 392, 394, 395 174, 177–179, 183, 187, 195, 217–221,
Capital, 12, 32, 101, 199, 200, 256, 261, 270, 223, 224, 226, 228, 251, 275, 279, 306,
290, 291, 336 313, 317, 322, 324, 340, 352, 354, 358,
Capsule, 277, 307, 309–313, 316, 319, 398 367, 380, 381, 386, 392, 393, 397
Car, 14, 17, 21, 30, 35, 36, 46, 47, 56, 58, 84, Corridor, 11–16, 22, 26, 38–40, 42, 84, 85,
168–186, 255, 279, 280, 286, 292, 293, 110, 113, 126–128, 141, 260, 347
296, 298 Cost, 2, 5, 7, 12, 21, 32, 33, 39, 41, 55, 61, 62,
Cargo, 145, 151, 152, 156, 158, 159, 166, 187, 66, 72–74, 78, 83, 87–90, 93, 95, 98–100,
191, 197, 369 102–104, 110, 112, 115–117, 125, 127,
CDB (Central Business District), 15 130–144, 150, 152, 156, 158, 161, 195,
CIFT (Conventional Intermodal Freight 197, 199, 200, 207, 220, 228, 239, 241,
Train), 85, 126–128, 144 254, 260, 263, 266, 269, 270, 278, 290,
CMCs (Ceramic Matrix Composite(s)), 376 291, 303, 316, 323, 332, 337, 339, 380,
Coefficient, 57, 98, 101, 113, 116, 141, 192, 395, 396
265, 372 Criteria, 2–4, 8, 9, 51, 87, 98, 103–105, 107,
Comfort, 2, 19, 29, 30, 40, 42–45, 61, 115, 195, 223, 254–258, 261, 266–274, 317
256, 261, 270, 273, 282, 284, 288, 289, Cruise, 62, 69, 115, 249, 369, 372, 380, 381
303, 335 Cruising, 27, 51, 52, 68, 69, 71, 72, 78, 154,
Commercial, 165, 166, 195, 217, 219, 220, 158, 191, 194–197, 200, 202, 203, 206,
222, 229, 249, 253, 278, 292, 324, 331, 207, 221, 245, 246, 249, 250, 256, 312,
347, 365, 378, 380, 384, 393, 396, 397 331, 336, 367, 371, 374–376, 379, 385, 386
Company, 55, 84, 145, 203, 367, 380 Cryogenic, 220–228
Index 403
Curve, 43–47, 49, 57, 60, 61, 182, 192, 253, 143–145, 148–150, 166, 168–170, 172,
368 174, 177, 178, 181, 184, 192, 203–213,
Cycle, 78, 88, 89, 91, 93, 94, 99, 100, 113, 215, 223, 228, 235, 249, 265, 280, 311,
207, 208, 291, 316, 370, 375, 381, 383 312, 351, 364, 368, 371, 372, 374, 380,
383, 387, 393, 398
EI (Energy Intensity), 241, 242
D EINOx (Emission Index of Nitrogen Oxides),
Delay(s), 40, 255, 261 383
Delivery, 85, 98–101, 108, 109, 115–117, 127, Electric, 13, 19, 37, 48, 55, 58, 129, 131, 151,
129, 130, 137, 144, 145, 161, 305, 314 152, 168–172, 174, 181, 211, 217, 292,
Demand, 1, 5, 15, 21–23, 25, 26, 28, 30, 32, 311, 325, 397
41, 51, 53, 54, 60, 86, 88, 90, 99, 100, 108, Emergency, 125, 126, 294, 325, 386
113, 127, 129, 133, 137, 142–146, 166, Emissions, 2, 34–36, 39, 41, 42, 56, 58, 59, 62,
172, 195, 215, 222, 225, 226, 228, 235, 74, 78, 102, 114, 117, 119, 130, 131, 138,
236, 256, 281, 286, 295, 303, 306, 313, 147, 151, 158, 161, 165–170, 172–174,
322, 323, 331–333, 336, 338, 341, 353, 176, 177, 181, 184–186, 188, 195, 203,
387, 395 204, 208–211, 218, 219, 223, 224, 226,
Design, 2, 8, 11, 26, 27, 43, 45, 51, 56, 57, 62, 271, 292, 294, 298, 304, 316, 337, 339,
63, 66, 77, 78, 112, 113, 120, 147, 149, 368, 371, 372, 380, 382, 385, 387, 393,
171, 173, 181, 190, 194, 210, 220, 221, 395, 396
278, 289, 293, 295, 315, 317, 325, 334, Employment, 2, 23, 40, 317, 324, 398
371, 372, 374, 376–378, 382, 386, 391 Energy, 1–3, 7, 32, 34, 35, 41, 42, 47, 49,
Disadvantages, 8, 40–42, 61, 78, 105, 110, 55–59, 69, 102, 110, 119, 130, 131, 138,
125, 144, 145, 161, 185, 186, 214, 215, 141, 165, 166, 168–173, 175, 177, 178,
219, 228, 229, 274, 303, 304, 319, 341, 182–184, 187, 188, 191, 201, 203, 205,
351, 363, 386, 387, 398 210, 212, 215, 217, 220, 224, 241, 249,
Discipline, 278, 351, 352, 354, 355, 358, 359, 251, 255, 257, 271, 277, 281, 291, 292,
361, 363 294, 298, 305, 310, 311, 316, 323, 324,
Distance, 1, 3, 9, 11, 15, 29–31, 33, 36, 37, 43, 330, 331, 337, 338, 382, 391, 394, 395, 397
44, 46, 54, 58–61, 71, 73, 83, 85, 90, 98, Engine, 168, 190–194, 202, 205, 206, 210,
100, 102, 107–109, 115–123, 126, 128, 212, 228, 331, 346, 371, 374, 376,
130, 134, 137, 139, 142–145, 170, 171, 380–383, 385, 393
199, 201, 210, 241, 249, 253, 262, 271, Entropy, 259, 266, 267, 271
288, 293, 314, 327, 335, 349, 353, 357, Environmental, 168, 172, 187, 188, 191, 201,
359, 379 203, 214, 215, 218, 221, 229, 244, 258,
DM (Decision Making), 8, 87, 104, 105, 259 266, 292, 298, 306, 316, 325, 338, 339,
Drag, 57, 62, 66, 113, 149, 292, 307, 371, 372, 364, 365, 368, 370, 371, 380, 387, 392,
375, 377 393, 396
Draught, 210, 215 ETT (Evacuated Tube Transport), 253, 277,
Dynamic, 16, 57, 112, 249, 282, 287, 296, 278, 322, 324, 329, 331–335, 339, 387,
343 , 371, 372 392, 393
EU (European Union), 165, 169, 236, 244
Evaluation, 185, 208, 214, 228, 260, 266, 274,
E 295, 303, 319, 340, 363, 386
EC (European Commission), 51, 59–61, External, 223, 256, 285, 328, 339
84–87, 102, 111, 112, 179, 244, 247, 367 Externalities, 258, 264, 265, 273, 274, 316,
EEDI (Energy Efficiency Design Index), 317, 319, 337, 340
204–208, 215
EEOI (Energy Efficiency Operational Indica-
tor), 206, 207, 210 F
Effectiveness, 3, 21, 41, 85, 86, 100, 110, 150, FAA (Federal Aviation Administration), 349,
270, 293, 351, 364, 368, 387, 393, 398 351
Efficiency, 3, 5, 21, 35, 41, 62, 67–70, 78, 85, Factor, 170, 175, 178, 198, 202, 217, 249, 255,
86, 100, 109, 110, 114, 115, 117, 126, 257, 262, 288, 292, 327, 328
404 Index
Fares, 270, 286, 292, 303, 337, 368 Heathrow, 239, 240, 280, 296, 343
FCFS (First Come First Served), 278, 354 HFCVs (Hydrogen Fuel Cell Vehicles), 168,
Fleet, 166, 177, 187, 188, 194, 198, 199, 207, 171, 185
208, 215, 224, 225, 286, 289–291, 313, High speed speed tilting passenger train, 11
315, 331, 335, 336, 358–360, 368, 378, High speed tilting passenger train, 6, 8, 11, 42,
394, 396 43, 45, 50, 51, 55, 56, 58–62, 392, 395
Flexibility, 209, 274, 319, 347 HS (High speed), 9, 51, 61, 235, 273, 397
Flight, 216, 220, 237, 240, 243, 264, 342, 347, HS (Hub-and-Spoke(s)) network, 86, 215, 238,
348, 351, 356, 372, 375–378, 380, 381, 343
385, 386 HSR (High Speed rail), 3, 6, 9, 235, 236, 243,
Freight, 166, 187, 196–199, 207, 208, 210, 332, 392, 395
215, 277, 292, 294, 305–307, 310, HV (Hydrogen Vehicle), 168
312–315, 318, 324, 332, 333, 337, 367, Hydrogen, 171, 172, 212, 217, 218
391–393, 395, 396 HYV (Hybrid Vehicle), 168, 169, 185
Freight collection/distribution networks, 394
Freight shuttle, 306, 319
Frequency, 26, 198, 251, 255, 263, 264, 282, I
294, 312, 313, 332, 335, 336, 360 IATA (International Air Transport Associa-
Fuel, 1, 3, 7, 19, 32, 34–36, 41, 62, 67–69, tion), 369
72–74, 78, 112, 115–119, 125, 131, 149, ICAO (International Civil Aviation Organiza-
156, 158, 161, 165–169, 171–173, tion), 63, 147, 270
175–177, 181, 182, 191, 195, 201, 207, ICEV (Internal Combustion Engine Vehicle),
212, 217, 220, 222, 223, 241, 369, 374, 168
377, 380, 391, 395, 396 ICT (Information and Communication Tech-
Function, 2, 22, 44, 63, 121, 141, 249, 285, nologies), 48, 112, 113, 115, 323
286, 327, 332, 343, 352 IFR (Instrument Flight Rules), 349
ILS (Instrument Landing System), 342, 347
IMC (Instrument Metrological Conditions),
G 349
Gate, 64, 65, 75, 147, 152, 159, 162, 213, 327, Impact, 2, 3, 5, 7, 41, 43, 44, 61, 83, 101, 102,
330, 346, 347, 386 108–110, 124, 125, 131, 132, 150, 160,
Gauge, 16, 43 165, 172, 173, 188, 208, 214, 216, 219,
GDP (Gross Domestic Product), 2, 146, 166, 221, 236, 238, 241, 277, 294, 323, 335,
295 346, 378, 382, 385
GHG (Green House Gases), 2, 58, 74, 78, 102, Incidents, 2, 36, 38, 59, 61, 75, 77, 101, 102,
112, 117, 119, 125, 130, 131, 147, 151, 120, 124, 126, 131, 132, 138, 141, 159,
158, 161, 165, 187, 188, 201, 204, 209, 160, 201, 246, 256, 257, 265, 277, 280,
216, 228, 236, 246, 277, 279, 292, 305, 293, 294, 298, 304–306, 317, 324, 337,
306, 316, 319, 324, 338, 380, 382, 391 339, 340, 384, 386, 391, 394
Gigaliners, 111 Indicators, 8, 14, 18, 19, 23, 30, 63, 71, 87, 98,
Government, 237, 254, 255, 257, 258, 263, 103, 106, 107, 206, 254, 274, 296, 314
265, 269, 318 Inertial force, 47, 331
Governmental, 238, 254, 257, 272, 318 Infrastructural, 1, 3–6, 9, 14, 43, 63, 87, 112,
GS (Glide Slope), 346, 347 127, 147, 172, 188, 189, 235, 244, 282,
Guidance, 19, 20, 45, 51, 248, 249, 268, 307, 325, 368
338, 343 Infrastructure, 1–3, 5–7, 12, 15, 16, 19, 32, 36,
Guideway, 248–250, 271, 280, 282, 283, 285, 39, 41, 51, 55, 59, 61, 87, 102, 108–110,
291, 294, 298, 307, 328, 337 112, 113, 125–127, 131, 138, 141, 147,
162, 173, 178, 190, 215, 229, 236, 243,
244, 246, 248, 253, 254, 257, 258, 263,
H 271, 278, 290, 291, 293–295, 306, 325,
Haulage, 88, 108–110, 127, 129, 130, 132, 336, 391
137, 140, 143 Inputs, 8, 123, 130, 142, 177, 268, 358
Headway, 27, 99, 285, 287, 288, 298 Inter-arrival time, 26
Index 405
Intermodal, 1, 6, 17, 83–85, 126–134, 137, Load factor, 74

139, 141–144, 277, 305, 309, 329, 340, 392 Loading, 83, 85–89, 91, 92, 94, 96, 97,
Internal, 30, 40, 61, 83, 126, 130, 132, 137, 99–102, 107–110, 126, 130–134, 138, 139,
142–145, 147, 168, 223, 256, 307, 327, 328 141, 152, 161, 195, 197, 198, 211, 213,
Interoperability, 49–51, 59, 129, 306, 322 307, 311, 315, 395
In-vehicle, 255, 256, 261, 269, 270, 273 Locomotive, 57, 83, 128, 129, 138
Inventory, 87–89, 215, 395 London, 48, 239, 240, 280, 296, 305, 318, 329,
Investments, 7, 41, 61, 138, 215, 242, 254, 342
260, 263, 270, 272, 295 L/R (Line or Ring) network, 86, 96
ITS (Intelligent Transport Systems), 2, 19, 68, LRT (Light Rail Transit), 12, 277, 279, 293
72–75, 86, 88, 117, 126, 130–133, 135,
139–141, 144, 171, 172, 217, 222, 224,
241, 254, 260, 261, 347, 350, 351, 354, M
358, 380 Mach, 278, 366, 368, 371, 372, 376, 377, 382,
385
Maersk, 189–193, 195, 200, 202, 203, 206
J MAGLEV, 3, 6, 9, 248, 251, 253, 330
Janic, 20, 31, 68, 72, 76, 86, 94, 116, 129, 135, Maintenance, 7, 32, 33, 36, 55, 61, 66, 67, 72,
254, 351, 382 73, 141, 151, 156, 161, 168, 199, 207, 213,
220, 246, 261, 263, 284, 289, 325, 328,
329, 336
K Management, 51, 55, 152, 207, 251, 256, 325,
Kilometer, 2, 12, 32, 34, 55, 72, 160, 166, 329, 331, 338, 343, 392
174, 241, 271 Maneuverability, 63, 75, 194, 195, 215
kt (knot), 63, 369 Market, 11, 13, 22, 62, 83–85, 102, 108, 110,
kW (kilowatt), 19, 115, 170 126, 144, 145, 238, 253
kWh (Kilowatt-hour), 58, 119, 170 Masdar City, 280, 296
Material, 7, 11, 55, 62, 66–68, 130, 147, 149,
181, 216, 245, 282, 325, 327, 328, 336,
L 373, 376
Land, 2, 16, 34, 36, 39, 41, 56, 59, 75, 100, Mega, 3, 6, 8, 83, 85, 86, 111–120, 122–126,
112, 113, 117, 120, 131, 147, 158, 159, 137, 142–144, 170, 239, 328, 342,
168, 201, 213, 236, 257, 258, 265, 392–394, 397
271–273, 277, 279, 292, 293, 304, 316, Methodology, 103, 105, 132, 133, 139, 142,
317, 319, 338, 380, 384 172–174, 177, 222, 224, 258, 268, 274
Landing, 73, 75, 77, 147, 159, 251, 256, 346, MLS (Microwave Landing System), 347
348, 352, 354, 355, 357, 359, 360, 385 MLW (Maximum Landing Weight), 64, 70,
Layer, 282, 325, 382 148, 153, 160, 365
LCC (Low Cost Carrier), 239, 240 Model, 3, 22, 105, 116, 120, 174–176, 222,
L/D (Lift-to-Drag), 371 223, 260, 354, 357
LH2 (liquid hydrogen), 3, 6, 9, 165, 210, 216, Modeling, 4, 8, 14, 43, 63, 86, 87, 112, 132,
217, 228, 229, 367, 374, 382, 392 147, 168, 172, 188, 217, 222, 253, 260,
LIFT (Long Intermodal Freight Train), 3, 8, 281, 306, 325, 354, 365, 392
83, 85, 126, 127, 129–133, 137, 139, MTOW (Maximum Take-Off Weight), 145,
142–144, 392 220
Line, 11–13, 15, 17, 22, 24, 25, 27, 29, 30–32, Multicriteria, 8, 9, 87, 103, 107, 235, 253, 258,
38, 40–45, 48, 49, 51, 53–55, 57–60, 62, 259, 265, 266, 268, 274
78, 86, 91, 96, 100, 109, 114, 121, 132, Multimodal, 1, 84–86, 91, 98, 126, 305
134, 135, 141, 189, 194, 197, 200, 202,
204, 205, 227, 244, 246, 253, 260, 262,
272, 288 N
Liquid, 3, 9, 171, 217, 396 Nanoscale, 1
Load, 25, 27, 34, 47, 60, 99, 112, 117, 129, 133, Network, 1, 3, 6, 12, 14, 17, 23, 25–28, 32, 34,
134, 139, 140, 152, 245, 257, 262, 288, 336 41, 63, 83, 85–89, 91–94, 96, 98–101,
406 Index
103–105, 107, 108–112, 126, 127, 130, Power, 19, 33, 51, 56, 57, 115, 118, 129, 151,
131, 133, 143, 152, 154, 156, 161, 171, 152, 168–170, 190, 192–194, 202, 210,
209, 215, 235, 236, 238–240, 243, 246, 296, 316
260, 281, 283, 295, 309, 329, 397 PR (Priority), 17, 278, 351, 355
Noise, 7, 36, 37, 41, 59, 60, 75–78, 102, Pressure, 59, 62, 67, 68, 74, 113, 151, 152,
120–122, 131, 138, 151, 159, 161, 166, 210, 217, 281, 307, 323, 324, 326, 328,
168, 236, 242, 243, 255, 257, 258, 265, 371, 373, 385, 386
271, 279, 293, 338, 384 Procedures, 2, 3, 9, 125, 207, 278, 343, 346,
351, 352, 358, 363, 370
Productivity, 21, 32, 50, 53, 70–72, 78, 98,
O 102, 108, 112, 113, 115, 125, 147, 152,
Operating, 1, 11–14, 27, 28, 30, 32, 34, 36–38, 154, 245, 290
40–43, 48, 51, 54, 55–62, 72, 73, 76, 78, 83, Propellers, 191, 193
87, 99, 100, 107–109, 115, 118–120, 122, Propulsion, 19, 62, 168, 191, 193, 213, 249,
125, 127, 130–132, 134–136, 140, 143, 144, 251, 330, 374, 375
147, 156, 168, 178, 191, 194, 196, 246, 256, P–P (Point-to-Point), 86, 88, 89, 91, 240
261, 262, 270, 280, 285, 330, 335, 393 PRT (Personal Rapid Transit), 3, 6, 9, 277,
Operational, 2, 4–7, 9, 14, 21, 27, 32, 42, 50, 279, 392
51, 55, 60, 63, 70, 71, 78, 83, 87, 99, Pump, 220, 311, 330, 336, 337
110–113, 124, 127, 130, 132, 137–140, Punctuality, 2, 29, 30, 98, 99, 101, 255, 288,
142–144, 147, 151, 152, 161, 165, 166, 289, 298, 304, 314, 315, 324
172, 187, 194, 206, 218, 220, 286, 298,
313, 331, 377
Ozone, 382 Q
Quality, 2, 7, 8, 11, 12, 21, 29, 30, 41, 85,
107–110, 195, 198, 261, 286, 288, 304,
P 306, 313, 314, 324, 331, 334, 377, 378, 382
Pallets, 83, 85, 114, 119, 152, 277, 306, 307,
309, 310, 312–316, 318, 319, 322
Passengers, 2, 7, 9, 11–15, 19–21, 23, 25, 29, R
35, 36, 38, 41, 42, 44–47, 61, 63, 73, 167, Radar, 341, 343, 353
220, 238, 240, 244, 251, 253–257, 260, Rail, 1, 3, 6, 9, 11–13, 15, 26, 33, 42–45, 48,
264, 265, 269, 273, 278, 280–282, 49, 51, 54–56, 59–61, 83, 85, 86, 92, 94,
284–289, 292, 294, 295, 298, 303–305, 96, 107, 109, 110, 126, 127, 131, 133, 134,
329, 332, 334, 340, 367, 369, 378, 380, 137, 141, 142, 144, 154, 243, 244,
386, 387, 391, 395, 396 248–251, 273, 280, 296, 305, 312, 318, 393
Payload, 70–72, 84, 113–117, 119, 125, 128, Range, 8, 41, 63, 70, 78, 109, 118, 142, 143,
134, 138, 145, 146, 152, 154, 158, 220, 147, 152, 154, 161, 165, 186, 189, 191,
237, 251, 296, 368, 371, 372, 377, 379 223, 228, 229, 236, 237, 251, 280, 323,
Performance, 1, 3, 4–6, 9, 14, 19, 21, 23, 32, 324, 348, 352, 359, 369, 374, 378, 380, 385
34, 36, 43, 45, 50, 55, 56, 59, 63, 65, Ranking, 8, 9, 87, 98, 103–105, 107, 235, 243,
67–70, 72, 74, 75, 78, 87, 98, 103, 105, 253, 254, 258, 259, 265, 268, 272, 274
108, 109, 112, 113, 115, 117, 118, 120, Regenerative, 56, 58, 170, 171
127, 130, 132, 147, 149, 152, 156, 158, Reliability, 2, 12, 29, 30, 66, 78, 85, 98, 101,
159, 162, 165, 168, 172, 186–189, 194, 151, 212, 256, 261, 288, 289, 295, 314,
199, 201, 218, 220–222, 236, 253, 255, 315, 324, 353
281, 282, 284, 286, 290, 292–296, 298, Resistance, 22, 56, 57, 114, 118, 122, 191,
316, 317, 319, 325, 329, 331, 336, 339, 193, 220, 249, 251, 292, 310
342, 354, 366, 369, 377, 379, 380, 384, Resources, 1, 174, 257, 262, 323, 324, 340
392, 396 Results, 8, 30, 105, 142, 165, 182, 184, 205,
Plant, 171, 216, 229, 397 208, 220, 226, 271, 328, 359
Policy, 2–7, 9, 14, 36, 43, 59, 63, 75, 78, 84, Revenues, 32, 34, 72, 73, 130, 147, 156, 157,
87, 111, 127, 147, 159, 165, 168, 173, 201, 199, 200, 256, 262, 263, 266, 270, 273,
218, 221, 294, 318, 339 290, 292, 316, 337
Index 407
Road, 1, 3, 6–8, 60, 83–88, 94, 98, 107, 109, SN (Specific Noise), 159, 242
111–113, 115, 116, 124–127, 129–132, SNL (Specific Noise Level), 242
137, 140, 142–145, 154–156, 166, 213, Social, 2, 3, 5–7, 9, 36, 39–43, 59, 61, 63, 75,
278–280, 293, 319, 322, 392, 393, 397 79, 87, 101, 109, 112, 117, 120, 127, 131,
Route, 12, 15, 19, 23, 25–27, 29–31, 41, 147, 159, 166, 168, 172, 173, 188, 201,
51–53, 57, 63, 73, 83, 89, 91, 98–100, 102, 218, 221, 235, 254, 257, 258, 265, 266,
105, 108, 129, 134, 156, 196, 198, 200, 271–273, 281, 293, 294, 298, 306, 317,
241, 255, 260, 262, 264, 286, 292, 332, 337, 338, 340, 341, 384, 393
334, 335, 380, 397 Sonic, 48, 63, 368, 377, 378, 384, 385
RR (Rolls-Royce), 151, 380 Speed, 3, 6, 9, 12, 19, 27, 29, 36, 42–45,
RTK (Revenue Ton-Kilometer), 146, 158, 222 48–51, 53–60, 72, 88, 98, 100, 102, 109,
Rules, 2, 159, 162, 278, 343, 346, 348–350, 115, 118–123, 125, 129, 130, 133, 147,
352–355, 357, 359, 363 154, 168, 170, 186, 191, 193, 194, 235,
Runway, 3, 6, 9, 63, 77, 78, 147, 159, 265, 236, 246, 253, 255, 392
270, 271, 278, 342, 343, 346, 351–354, STA (Supersonic Transport Aircraft), 3, 6, 9,
357, 362, 364 277, 278, 324, 335, 364, 366, 392
Standard, 14, 19, 43, 55, 61, 83, 85, 86,
111–125, 137, 140, 142–144, 169, 190,
S 203, 277, 306, 307, 310, 324, 393
Safety, 7, 21, 36, 38, 39, 44, 55, 59, 61, 62, 75, Strategy, 92, 236, 239
77, 102, 112, 115, 120, 124, 131, 147, 160, Subsonic, 3, 6, 8, 11, 62, 78, 339, 367, 369,
173, 201, 213, 218, 221, 256, 261, 265, 371, 375–378, 380–382, 386, 387, 393, 397
270, 272, 273, 285, 294, 338, 343, 353, Supersonic, 3, 6, 220, 237, 331, 341
384, 386 Supply, 19, 28, 51, 88, 129, 161, 170, 171,
SAW (Simple Additive Weighting), 104, 105 173, 182, 197, 221, 229, 237, 244, 289,
Scenario, 8, 117, 119, 122–124, 274, 291 336, 337, 393
Schedule delay, 29, 98, 99, 108, 109, 255, 288, Surveillance, 69, 343, 352, 353
395 Suspension, 47, 49, 248, 249
SCMR (Specific Maximum Continuous Rat- Sustainability, 9, 203, 396
ing), 193 Switching, 41, 217, 229, 251, 282, 284
Seaborne, 187 System, 1, 3, 6–8, 11, 13, 17, 19–21, 23, 28,
Security, 7, 36, 38, 256, 261, 293, 294, 317, 30, 34, 40, 49, 83, 115, 129, 132, 139, 143,
324, 339 151, 152, 166, 186, 191, 207, 210, 212,
SEEMP (Energy Efficiency Management 222, 228, 236, 244, 248, 250, 251, 259,
Plan), 207 274, 278, 284, 285, 289, 295, 304, 306,
Separation, 15, 77, 78, 147, 159, 162, 268, 311, 312, 374, 377, 393
278, 343, 346–350, 352, 354–358, 361, 363
Service, 1–3, 7, 12, 19, 23–26, 29, 30, 34, 38,
40–42, 48, 53, 55, 58, 72, 85–88, 90, 96, T
98–102, 108–110, 116, 125, 126, 130, 133, TCD (Trunk line with Collecting/Distribution
135, 145, 147, 152, 154, 156, 195, 199, forks), 86, 91, 93
215, 238, 260, 261, 271, 286, 288, Technical productivity, 21, 32, 53, 71, 102,
313–315, 328, 331, 332, 334, 351, 354, 115, 194, 198, 215, 237, 257, 262, 263,
355, 378, 395, 396 270, 273, 286, 290, 315, 331, 335–337,
SFC (Specific Fuel Consumption), 67, 69, 380, 368, 377, 379
385 Technical/technological performances, 5, 6,
Share, 13, 22, 66, 67, 73, 85, 101, 125, 143, 19, 45, 65, 112, 147, 190, 204, 284, 296,
144, 156, 165, 166, 172, 176, 179, 182, 306, 309, 329, 331, 369, 392, 394
208, 225, 337, 380 Technologies, 3, 9, 35, 36, 47, 51, 62, 78, 86,
Ship, 85, 165, 166, 186, 188, 190, 191, 193, 101, 108, 110, 165, 168, 172–174, 179,
195, 196, 198, 200, 207, 208, 210–214, 392 209, 211, 223, 342
Signaling, 45, 49–51, 55, 127, 251 TENs (Trans-European Transport Network(s)),
SMCR (Specific Maximum Continuous 235
Rating, 193 Terminal, 189, 199, 213, 215, 296, 309, 329
408 Index
TEU (Twenty Foot Equivalent Unit), 117, 128, 130–134, 139–141, 195, 197, 202, 207,
188 211, 212, 215, 244, 251, 307, 309–311, 368
Threshold, 198, 347, 348, 353, 355, 356, 358 US (United States), 12, 348
Thrust, 220, 248–250, 312, 374, 375 Use, 2, 6, 12, 19, 21, 34, 36, 39, 41, 43, 47, 49,
Tilting, 393, 397 55, 56, 62, 67, 75, 78, 85, 102, 107, 112,
Time, 26, 73, 74, 165, 167, 170, 175, 196, 264, 113, 120, 127, 131, 147, 149, 152, 159,
287, 289, 290, 313, 314, 332, 350, 357 166, 167, 174–176, 178, 216, 279, 293,
TO (Take-Off), 220, 236 305, 317, 323, 338, 341, 364, 384
TOPSIS (Technique for Order Preference by Users, 2, 7, 12, 13, 15, 20, 22, 23, 25, 29, 35,
Similarity to Ideal Solution), 259, 266, 267 35, 41, 61, 87, 99, 101, 130, 142, 168, 178,
Track, 248–250, 291, 308 238, 256, 273, 286, 288, 293, 303, 304,
Trade, 166, 187, 195, 208, 266, 323 325, 334, 387, 391, 396
Traffic, 167, 223, 226, 236, 246, 317, 329, 337,
341
Train, 244, 249, 253, 270, 313, 315, 330, 332 V
Transition, 216, 224, 226 Vacuum, 325, 327, 329–331, 337, 339, 396
Transport, 165, 166, 178, 217, 222, 235, 236, Vehicle, 1–3, 6, 7, 11, 12, 19–21, 23, 25–30,
255, 256, 260, 261, 272, 279, 312, 391, 32, 33, 35, 36, 38, 41, 43, 45, 51, 83, 98,
392, 395 111, 113, 115, 117, 119, 120, 123–125,
Transportation, 165, 166, 216, 324 130, 132, 133, 139, 168, 169, 229, 249,
Travel, 197, 254, 255, 260, 269, 324, 333, 387 250, 262, 263, 281, 285, 288–290, 292,
TRM (TransRapid MAGLEV), 235, 248, 252, 293, 307, 311, 312, 330, 336
274, 278, 324, 332, 337, 392 VFR (Visual Flight Rules), 349
Truck, 171, 313, 316, 317 VMC (Visual Meteorological Conditions), 349
TTW (Tank-to-Wheel), 178, 181
Tube, 305, 306, 324, 325, 327, 328, 331
Tunnel, 277, 306–308, 312, 314, 315, 325, 336 W
Turbofan, 216, 381, 382 Wake vortex, 350, 354, 355, 359
Turnaround, 194–196, 289, 335 Weight, 19, 56, 62, 66, 67, 69, 78, 83, 104,
TY144, 278, 364, 365, 377, 380 106, 111, 112, 114, 117–119, 126, 128,
129, 131, 134, 138, 149, 152, 154, 159,
169, 191, 193, 207, 210, 220, 228, 246,
U 251, 267, 282, 310, 313, 314, 327,
UFT (Underground Freight Transport), 6, 9, 370–372, 375, 376, 382, 385, 394
277, 305, 392 Welfare, 2, 36, 39, 166, 254, 258, 265,
UK (United Kingdom), 42, 48, 58, 243 271–273, 293, 294, 317
Units, 44, 45, 51, 68, 72, 83, 85–88, 91, 92, 94, WTT (Well-To-Tank), 169, 171, 181
96, 97, 99–102, 107–110, 126, 127,

Advanced Transport Systems

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Advanced Transport Systems

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Advanced Transport Systems

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Milan Janić

Advanced Transport Systems

ISBN 978-1-4471-6286-5 ISBN 978-1-4471-6287-2 (eBook)

Library of Congress Control Number: 2013955907

Springer-Verlag London 2014

Printed on acid-free paper

Springer is part of Springer Science+Business Media (www.springer.com)

October 2013 Milan Janić

The author gratefully acknowledges the support of organizations and individuals in

1 Advanced Transport Systems: General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1

2 Advanced Transport Systems: Operations and Technologies . . . . . 11

3 Advanced Transport Systems: Operations and Economics . . . . . . . 83

3.3 Road Mega Trucks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111

4 Advanced Transport Systems: Technologies and Environment. . . . 165

5 Advanced Transport Systems: Infrastructure, Technologies,

6 Advanced Transport Systems: Future Concepts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277

6.2.2 Analyzing and Modeling Performances . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281

7 Advanced Transport Systems: Contribution to Sustainability . . . . 391

About the Author . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399

ABD Additional breaking device

DWT Deadweight tonnage

MEPC The Marine Environment Protection Committee

STA Supersonic Transport Aircraft

M. Janić, Advanced Transport Systems, 1

performances. In many cases, economic, environmental, and social/policy per-

Advanced transport systems can be classified with respect to different attributes/

1.2.1 Attributes/Criteria Related to Advanced Components

Advanced transport systems can be classified depending on a single and/or com-

1.2.2 Attributes/Criteria Related to Level

Advanced transport systems are generally characterized by infrastructural, tech-

Table 1.1 Classification of advanced transport systems respecting their level of

• Infrastructural and technical/technological performances mainly reflect physi-

Infrastructural Technical / technological

Fig. 1.1 Potential interaction between advanced transport system performances

between these and all other performances. In the ‘‘bottom-up’’ consideration,

The main actors/stakeholders involved in dealing with advanced transport

1.3.2 Analyzing, Modeling, and Evaluation

Analyzing the performances of advanced transport systems implies gaining insight

1.4 Composition of the Book

Intermodal Freight Trains) (in Europe), as well as large commercial freight

M. Janić, Advanced Transport Systems, 11

2.2 Bus Rapid Transit Systems

2.2.1 Definition, Development, and Use

Table 2.1 Some characteristics of BRT systems in the world (http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/

The BRT systems have shown flexibility in terms of feasibility of implemen-

2.2.2 Analyzing and Modeling Performances

The BRT systems are characterized by infrastructural, technical/technological,

2.2.2.2 Infrastructural Performances

The main indicators of the infrastructural performances of BRT systems refer to

Spatial layout of the network

Densely populated area or CBD

Fig. 2.2 Schematic layout of a hypothetical BRT network

2.2.2.3 Technical/Technological Performances

The BRTsystems generally use standard and/or articulated transport vehicles/

ITS (Intelligent Transport Systems)

Systems for managing transit services

• The warning system aims at assisting/warning the vehicle/bus drivers in order to

The user/passenger information system at the terminals/stations and onboard the

2.2.2.4 Operational Performances

Operational performances of the BRT system include demand, capacity, quality of